PIC18F87J11 Family Data Sheet 64/80-Pin High-Performance, 1-Mbit Flash Microcontrollers with nanoWatt Technology © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices: • Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet. • Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the intended manner and under normal conditions. • There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property. • Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code. • Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.” Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act. Information contained in this publication regarding device applications and the like is provided only for your convenience and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to ensure that your application meets with your specifications. MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip intellectual property rights. Trademarks The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, Accuron, dsPIC, KEELOQ, KEELOQ logo, microID, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART, PRO MATE, PowerSmart, rfPIC, and SmartShunt are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. AmpLab, FilterLab, Linear Active Thermistor, Migratable Memory, MXDEV, MXLAB, PS logo, SEEVAL, SmartSensor and The Embedded Control Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, CodeGuard, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, FlexROM, fuzzyLAB, In-Circuit Serial Programming, ICSP, ICEPIC, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLAB Certified logo, MPLIB, MPLINK, PICkit, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICLAB, PICtail, PowerCal, PowerInfo, PowerMate, PowerTool, REAL ICE, rfLAB, rfPICDEM, Select Mode, Smart Serial, SmartTel, Total Endurance, UNI/O, WiperLock and ZENA are trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their respective companies. © 2007, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the U.S.A., All Rights Reserved. Printed on recycled paper. Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 certification for its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and Tempe, Arizona, Gresham, Oregon and Mountain View, California. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures are for its PIC® MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs, KEELOQ® code hopping devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified. DS39778B-page ii Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 64/80-Pin High-Performance, 1-Mbit Flash Microcontrollers with nanoWatt Technology Flexible Oscillator Structure: Peripheral Highlights (continued): • Four Crystal modes, including High-Precision PLL • Two External Clock modes, up to 48 MHz • Internal Oscillator Block: - Provides 8 user-selectable frequencies from 31 kHz to 8 MHz - Provides a complete range of clock speeds, from 31 kHz to 32 MHz when used with PLL - User-tunable to compensate for frequency drift • Secondary Oscillator using Timer1 @ 32 kHz • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor: - Allows for safe shutdown if any clock stops • 8-Bit Parallel Master Port/Enhanced Parallel Slave Port (PMP/EPSP) with 16 Address Lines • Dual Analog Comparators with Input Multiplexing • 10-Bit, up to 15-Channel Analog-to-Digital Converter module (A/D): - Auto-acquisition capability - Conversion available during Sleep External Memory Bus (80-pin devices only): • Address Capability of up to 2 Mbytes • 8-Bit or 16-Bit Interface • 12-Bit, 16-Bit and 20-Bit Addressing modes Peripheral Highlights: • High-Current Sink/Source 25 mA/25mA on PORTB and PORTC • Four Programmable External Interrupts • Four Input Change Interrupts • One 8/16-Bit Timer/Counter • Two 8-Bit Timers/Counters • Two 16-Bit Timers/Counters • Two Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) modules • Three Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) modules: - One, two or four PWM outputs - Selectable polarity - Programmable dead time - Auto-shutdown and auto-restart • Two Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) modules supporting 3-Wire SPI (all 4 modes) and I2C™ Master and Slave modes • Two Enhanced USART modules: - Supports RS-485, RS-232 and LIN 1.2 - Auto-wake-up on Start bit - Auto-Baud Detect Special Microcontroller Features: • Low-Power, High-Speed CMOS Flash Technology • C Compiler Optimized Architecture for Re-Entrant Code • Power Management Features: - Run: CPU on, peripherals on - Idle: CPU off, peripherals on - Sleep: CPU off, peripherals off • Priority Levels for Interrupts • Self-Programmable under Software Control • 8 x 8 Single-Cycle Hardware Multiplier • Extended Watchdog Timer (WDT): - Programmable period from 4 ms to 131s • Single-Supply In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) via Two Pins • In-Circuit Debug (ICD) with 3 Breakpoints via Two Pins • Operating Voltage Range of 2.0V to 3.6V • 5.5V Tolerant Inputs (digital only pins) • On-Chip 2.5V Regulator EUSART Comparators Timers 8/16-Bit External Bus PMP/EPSP • Flash Program Memory of 10000 Erase/Write Cycles and 20-Year Data Retention PIC18F66J11 64 kB 3930 52 11 2/3 2 Y Y 2 2 2/3 N Y PIC18F66J16 96 kB 3930 52 11 2/3 2 Y Y 2 2 2/3 N Y PIC18F67J11 128 kB 3930 52 11 2/3 2 Y Y 2 2 2/3 N Y PIC18F86J11 64 kB 3930 68 15 2/3 2 Y Y 2 2 2/3 Y Y PIC18F86J16 96 kB 3930 68 15 2/3 2 Y Y 2 2 2/3 Y Y PIC18F87J11 128 kB 3930 68 15 2/3 2 Y Y 2 2 2/3 Y Y Device Flash Program Memory (bytes) MSSP SRAM Data Memory (bytes) I/O © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 10-Bit CCP/ECCP A/D (ch) (PWM) Preliminary SPI Master I2C™ DS39778B-page 1 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY Pin Diagrams RD7/PMD7/SS2 RD6/PMD6/SCK2/SCL2 RD5/PMD5/SDI2/SDA2 RD4/PMD4/SDO2 RD3/PMD3 RD2/PMD2 RD1/PMD1 VSS VDD RD0/PMD0 RE7/PMA9/ECCP2(1)/P2A(1) RE6/PMA10/P1B RE5/PMA11/P1C RE4/PMA12/P3B RE3/PMA13/P3C/REFO RE2/PMBE/P2B 64-Pin TQFP 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 RE1/PMWR/P2C RE0/PMRD/P2D 1 2 RG0/PMA8/ECCP3/P3A RG1/PMA7/TX2/CK2 RG2/PMA6/RX2/DT2 3 4 5 6 7 RG3/PMCS1/CCP4/P3D MCLR RG4/PMCS2/CCP5/P1D VSS VDDCORE/VCAP RF7/SS1 RF6/AN11/C1INA RF5/AN10/C1INB/CVREF RF4/AN9/C2INA RF3/AN8/C2INB RF2/PMA5/AN7/C1OUT 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 PIC18F6XJ11 8 9 10 11 12 13 PIC18F6XJ16 39 38 14 15 16 RB0/INT0/FLT0 RB1/INT1/PMA4 RB2/INT2/PMA3 RB3/INT3/PMA2 RB4/KBI0/PMA1 RB5/KBI1/PMA0 RB6/KBI2/PGC VSS OSC2/CLKO/RA6 OSC1/CLKI/RA7 VDD 37 36 35 RB7/KBI3/PGD RC5/SDO1 RC4/SDI1/SDA1 34 RC3/SCK1/SCL1 RC2/ECCP1/P1A 33 Note 1: DS39778B-page 2 RC7/RX1/DT1 RC6/TX1/CK1 RC1/T1OSI/ECCP2(1)/P2A(1) RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI RA4/T0CKI RA5/AN4 VDD VSS RA0/AN0 RA1/AN1 RA2/AN2/VREF- RA3/AN3/VREF+ AVSS AVDD ENVREG RF1/AN6/C2OUT 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 The ECCP2/P2A pin placement depends on the CCP2MX Configuration bit setting. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY Pin Diagrams (Continued RD1/AD1/PMD1(3) RD2/AD2/PMD2(3) RD3/AD3/PMD3(3) RD4/AD4/PMD4(3)/SDO2 RD5/AD5/PMD5(3)/SDI2/SDA2 RD6/AD6/PMD6(3)/SCK2/SCL2 RD7/AD7/PMD7(3)/SS2 RJ0/ALE RJ1/OE RE7/AD15/PMA9/ECCP2(1)/P2A(1) RD0/AD0/PMD0(3) VDD VSS RE2/AD10/PMBE(3)/P2B RE3/AD11/PMA13/P3C(2)/REFO RE4/AD12/PMA12/P3B(2) RE5/AD13/PMA11/P1C(2) RE6/AD14/PMA10/P1B(2) RH1/A17 RH0/A16 80-Pin TQFP 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 RH2/A18/PMD7(3) 1 60 RJ2/WRL RH3/A19/PMD6(3) 2 RE1/AD9/PMWR(3)/P2C RE0/AD8/PMRD(3)/P2D RG0/PMA8/ECCP3/P3A RG1/PMA7/TX2/CK2 3 4 5 6 7 59 58 RJ3/WRH RB0/INT0/FLT0 RB1/INT1/PMA4 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 15 16 17 18 RB2/INT2/PMA3 RB3/INT3/PMA2/ECCP2(1)/P2A(1) RB4/KBI0/PMA1 RB5/KBI1/PMA0 RB6/KBI2/PGC VSS OSC2/CLKO/RA6 OSC1/CLKI/RA7 VDD RB7/KBI3/PGD RC5/SDO1 RC4/SDI1/SDA1 RC3/SCK1/SCL1 RC2/ECCP1/P1A RJ7/UB RJ6/LB RC1/T1OSI/ECCP2(1)/P2A(1) RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI RC6/TX1/CK1 RC7/RX1/DT1 RJ4/BA0 RJ5/CE 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 RA4/PMD5(3)/T0CKI 20 RA5/PMD4(3)/AN4 RH6/PMRD(3)/AN14/ P1C(2)/C1INC RA0/AN0 VSS VDD 19 44 43 42 41 RH5/PMBE(3)/AN13/P3B(2)/C2IND RH4/PMD3(3)/AN12/P3C(2)/C2INC RF1/AN6/C2OUT ENVREG AVDD RH7/PMWR(3)/AN15/P1B(2) Note 1: 2: 3: 52 PIC18F8XJ11 PIC18F8XJ16 10 11 12 13 14 RA2/AN2/VREFRA1/AN1 RF7/PMD0(3)/SS1 RF6/PMD1(3)/AN11/C1INA RF5/PMD2(3)/AN10/ C1INB/CVREF RF4/AN9/C2INA RF3/AN8/C2INB RF2/PMA5/AN7/C1OUT 8 9 AVSS RA3/AN3/VREF+ RG2/PMA6/RX2/DT2 RG3/PMCS1/CCP4/P3D MCLR RG4/PMCS2/CCP5/P1D VSS VDDCORE/VCAP 57 56 55 54 53 The ECCP2/P2A pin placement depends on the CCP2MX Configuration bit and Processor mode settings. P1B, P1C, P3B, and P3C pin placement depends on the ECCPMX Configuration bit setting. PMP pin placement depends on the PMPMX Configuration bit setting. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 3 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY Table of Contents 1.0 Device Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7 2.0 Oscillator Configurations ............................................................................................................................................................ 31 3.0 Power-Managed Modes ............................................................................................................................................................. 41 4.0 Reset .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 49 5.0 Memory Organization ................................................................................................................................................................. 61 6.0 Flash Program Memory .............................................................................................................................................................. 87 7.0 External Memory Bus ................................................................................................................................................................. 97 8.0 8 x 8 Hardware Multiplier.......................................................................................................................................................... 109 9.0 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................................................................. 111 10.0 I/O Ports ................................................................................................................................................................................... 127 11.0 Parallel Master Port .................................................................................................................................................................. 157 12.0 Timer0 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 181 13.0 Timer1 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 185 14.0 Timer2 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 191 15.0 Timer3 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 193 16.0 Timer4 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 197 17.0 Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) Modules ................................................................................................................................. 199 18.0 Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) Module................................................................................................................ 207 19.0 Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) Module .................................................................................................................... 223 20.0 Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) ............................................................... 269 21.0 10-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (A/D) Module ...................................................................................................................... 291 22.0 Comparator Module.................................................................................................................................................................. 301 23.0 Comparator Voltage Reference Module ................................................................................................................................... 309 24.0 Special Features of the CPU .................................................................................................................................................... 313 25.0 Instruction Set Summary .......................................................................................................................................................... 329 26.0 Development Support............................................................................................................................................................... 379 27.0 Electrical Characteristics .......................................................................................................................................................... 383 28.0 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables ....................................................................................................................... 423 29.0 Packaging Information.............................................................................................................................................................. 425 Appendix A: Revision History............................................................................................................................................................. 429 Appendix B: Device Differences......................................................................................................................................................... 429 The Microchip Web Site ..................................................................................................................................................................... 431 Customer Change Notification Service .............................................................................................................................................. 431 Customer Support .............................................................................................................................................................................. 431 Reader Response .............................................................................................................................................................................. 432 Index .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 433 Product Identification System............................................................................................................................................................. 445 DS39778B-page 4 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced. If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via E-mail at [email protected] or fax the Reader Response Form in the back of this data sheet to (480) 792-4150. We welcome your feedback. Most Current Data Sheet To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Web site at: http://www.microchip.com You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page. The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000A is version A of document DS30000). Errata An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision of silicon and revision of document to which it applies. To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following: • Microchip’s Worldwide Web site; http://www.microchip.com • Your local Microchip sales office (see last page) When contacting a sales office, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include literature number) you are using. Customer Notification System Register on our web site at www.microchip.com to receive the most current information on all of our products. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 5 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 6 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 1.0 DEVICE OVERVIEW This document contains device-specific information for the following devices: • PIC18F66J11 • PIC18F86J11 • PIC18F66J16 • PIC18F86J16 • PIC18F67J11 • PIC18F87J11 • A Phase Lock Loop (PLL) frequency multiplier, available to all of the oscillator modes, which allows a wide range of clock speeds from 16 MHz to 48 MHz The internal oscillator block provides a stable reference source that gives the family additional features for robust operation: This family introduces a line of low-voltage, general purpose microcontrollers with the main traditional advantage of all PIC18 microcontrollers – namely, high computational performance and a rich feature set – at an extremely competitive price point. These features make the PIC18F87J11 Family a logical choice for many high-performance applications, where an extended peripheral feature set is required, and cost is a primary consideration. • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor: This option constantly monitors the main clock source against a reference signal provided by the internal oscillator. If a clock failure occurs, the controller is switched to the internal oscillator, allowing for continued low-speed operation or a safe application shutdown. • Two-Speed Start-up: This option allows the internal oscillator to serve as the clock source from Power-on Reset, or wake-up from Sleep mode, until the primary clock source is available. 1.1 1.1.3 1.1.1 Core Features nanoWatt TECHNOLOGY All of the devices in the PIC18F87J11 family incorporate a range of features that can significantly reduce power consumption during operation. Key items include: • Alternate Run Modes: By clocking the controller from the Timer1 source or the internal RC oscillator, power consumption during code execution can be reduced by as much as 90%. • Multiple Idle Modes: The controller can also run with its CPU core disabled but the peripherals still active. In these states, power consumption can be reduced even further, to as little as 4% of normal operation requirements. • On-the-Fly Mode Switching: The power-managed modes are invoked by user code during operation, allowing the user to incorporate power-saving ideas into their application’s software design. 1.1.2 OSCILLATOR OPTIONS AND FEATURES All of the devices in the PIC18F87J11 Family offer four different oscillator options, allowing users a range of choices in developing application hardware. These include: • Two Crystal modes, using crystals or ceramic resonators. • Two External Clock modes, offering the option of a divide-by-4 clock output. • An internal oscillator block which provides an 8 MHz clock and an INTRC source (approximately 31 kHz, stable over temperature and VDD), as well as a range of 6 user-selectable clock frequencies, between 125 kHz to 4 MHz, for a total of 8 clock frequencies. This option frees an oscillator pin for use as an additional general purpose I/O. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. EXPANDED MEMORY The PIC18F87J11 family provides ample room for application code, from 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code space. The Flash cells for program memory are rated to last up to 10,000 erase/write cycles. Data retention without refresh is conservatively estimated to be greater than 20 years. The Flash program memory is readable, writable, and during normal operation, the PIC18F87J11 Family also provides plenty of room for dynamic application data with up to 3930 bytes of data RAM. 1.1.4 EXTERNAL MEMORY BUS In the event that 128 Kbytes of memory are inadequate for an application, the 80-pin members of the PIC18F87J11 Family also implement an External Memory Bus (EMB). This allows the controller’s internal program counter to address a memory space of up to 2 Mbytes, permitting a level of data access that few 8-bit devices can claim. This allows additional memory options, including: • Using combinations of on-chip and external memory up to the 2-Mbyte limit • Using external Flash memory for reprogrammable application code or large data tables • Using external RAM devices for storing large amounts of variable data 1.1.5 EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET The PIC18F87J11 Family implements the optional extension to the PIC18 instruction set, adding 8 new instructions and an Indexed Addressing mode. Enabled as a device configuration option, the extension has been specifically designed to optimize re-entrant application code originally developed in high-level languages, such as ‘C’. Preliminary DS39778B-page 7 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 1.1.6 EASY MIGRATION 1.3 Regardless of the memory size, all devices share the same rich set of peripherals, allowing for a smooth migration path as applications grow and evolve. The consistent pinout scheme used throughout the entire family also aids in migrating to the next larger device. This is true when moving between the 64-pin members, between the 80-pin members, or even jumping from 64-pin to 80-pin devices. The PIC18F87J11 Family is also pin compatible with other PIC18 families, such as the PIC18F87J10, PIC18F85J11, PIC18F8720 and PIC18F8722. This allows a new dimension to the evolution of applications, allowing developers to select different price points within Microchip’s PIC18 portfolio, while maintaining the same feature set. 1.2 Other Special Features • Communications: The PIC18F87J11 Family incorporates a range of serial and parallel communication peripherals. These devices all include 2 independent Enhanced USARTs and 2 Master SSP modules, capable of both SPI and I2C™ (Master and Slave) modes of operation. The devices also have a parallel port and can be configured to function as either a Parallel Master Port or as a Parallel Slave Port. • CCP Modules: All devices in the family incorporate two Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) modules and three Enhanced CCP (ECCP) modules to maximize flexibility in control applications. Up to four different time bases may be used to perform several different operations at once. Each of the three ECCP modules offers up to four PWM outputs, allowing for a total of 12 PWMs. The ECCPs also offer many beneficial features, including polarity selection, programmable dead time, auto-shutdown and restart, and Half-Bridge and Full-Bridge Output modes. • 10-Bit A/D Converter: This module incorporates programmable acquisition time, allowing for a channel to be selected and a conversion to be initiated without waiting for a sampling period, and thus, reducing code overhead. • Extended Watchdog Timer (WDT): This enhanced version incorporates a 16-bit prescaler, allowing an extended time-out range that is stable across operating voltage and temperature. See Section 27.0 “Electrical Characteristics” for time-out periods. DS39778B-page 8 Details on Individual Family Members Devices in the PIC18F87J11 Family are available in 64-pin and 80-pin packages. Block diagrams for the two groups are shown in Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2. The devices are differentiated from each other in three ways: 1. 2. 3. Flash program memory (three sizes, ranging from 64 Kbytes for PIC18FX6J11 devices to 128 Kbytes for PIC18FX7J11 devices). I/O ports (7 bidirectional ports on 64-pin devices, 9 bidirectional ports on 80-pin devices). A/D input channels (11 on 64-pin devices, 15 on 80-pin devices). All other features for devices in this family are identical. These are summarized in Table 1-1 and Table 1-2. The pinouts for all devices are listed in Table 1-3 and Table 1-4. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-1: DEVICE FEATURES FOR THE PIC18F6XJ1X (64-PIN DEVICES) Features PIC18F66J11 PIC18F66J16 PIC18F67J11 DC – 48 MHz DC – 48 MHz DC – 48 MHz 64K 96K 128K Program Memory (Instructions) 32768 49152 65536 Data Memory (Bytes) 3930 3930 3930 Operating Frequency Program Memory (Bytes) Interrupt Sources 29 I/O Ports Ports A, B, C, D, E, F, G Timers 5 Capture/Compare/PWM Modules 2 Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM Modules 3 Serial Communications MSSP (2), Enhanced USART (2) Parallel Communications (PMP) Yes 10-Bit Analog-to-Digital Module 11 Input Channels Resets (and Delays) Instruction Set POR, BOR, RESET Instruction, Stack Full, Stack Underflow, MCLR, WDT (PWRT, OST) 75 Instructions, 83 with Extended Instruction Set Enabled Packages TABLE 1-2: 64-Pin TQFP DEVICE FEATURES FOR THE PIC18F8XJ1X (80-PIN DEVICES) Features PIC18F86J11 PIC18F86J16 PIC18F87J11 DC – 48 MHz DC – 48 MHz DC – 48 MHz 64K 96K 128K Program Memory (Instructions) 32768 49152 65536 Data Memory (Bytes) 3930 3930 3930 Operating Frequency Program Memory (Bytes) Interrupt Sources 29 I/O Ports Ports A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J Timers 5 Capture/Compare/PWM Modules 2 Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM Modules Serial Communications 3 MSSP (2), Enhanced USART (2) Parallel Communications (PMP) Yes 10-Bit Analog-to-Digital Module 15 Input Channels Resets (and Delays) Instruction Set POR, BOR, RESET Instruction, Stack Full, Stack Underflow, MCLR, WDT (PWRT, OST) 75 Instructions, 83 with Extended Instruction Set Enabled Packages © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 80-Pin TQFP Preliminary DS39778B-page 9 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 1-1: PIC18F6XJ1X (64-PIN) BLOCK DIAGRAM Data Bus<8> Table Pointer<21> RA0:RA7(1) Data Memory (2.0, 3.9 Kbytes) PCLATU PCLATH 21 PORTA Data Latch 8 8 inc/dec logic Address Latch 20 PCU PCH PCL Program Counter 12 Data Address<12> PORTB RB0:RB7(1) 31 Level Stack 4 BSR Address Latch STKPTR Program Memory (96 Kbytes) 4 Access Bank 12 FSR0 FSR1 FSR2 Data Latch 12 PORTC RC0:RC7(1) inc/dec logic 8 Table Latch Address Decode ROM Latch Instruction Bus <16> PORTD RD0:RD7(1) IR 8 Instruction Decode and Control OSC2/CLKO OSC1/CLKI PRODH PRODL 3 Timing Generation Power-up Timer 8 MHz INTOSC INTRC Oscillator State Machine Control Signals Precision Band Gap Reference 8 Note RF2:RF7(1) ALU<8> PORTG Brown-out Reset(2) VDD, VSS RG0:RG4(1) MCLR ADC 10-Bit Timer0 Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 Timer4 ECCP2 ECCP3 CCP4 CCP5 EUSART1 EUSART2 1: See Table 1-3 for I/O port pin descriptions. 2: BOR functionality is provided when the on-board voltage regulator is enabled. DS39778B-page 10 PORTF 8 8 Voltage Regulator ECCP1 8 8 Watchdog Timer ENVREG PMP 8 W 8 Power-on Reset VDDCORE/VCAP 8 x 8 Multiply BITOP Oscillator Start-up Timer PORTE RE0:RE7(1) Preliminary Comparators MSSP1 MSSP2 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 1-2: PIC18F8XJ1X (80-PIN) BLOCK DIAGRAM Data Bus<8> Table Pointer<21> inc/dec logic 21 PORTA Data Latch 8 8 RA0:RA7(1) Data Memory (2.0, 3.9 Kbytes) PCLATU PCLATH Address Latch 20 PCU PCH PCL Program Counter PORTB RB0:RB7(1) 12 Data Address<12> 31 Level Stack 4 System Bus Interface Address Latch Program Memory (128 Kbytes) STKPTR 4 12 BSR Data Latch PORTC Access Bank FSR0 FSR1 FSR2 RC0:RC7(1) 12 inc/dec logic 8 Table Latch PORTD RD0:RD7(1) Address Decode ROM Latch Instruction Bus <16> PORTE IR RE0:RE7(1) AD15:AD0, A19:A16 (Multiplexed with PORTD, PORTE and PORTH) 8 OSC2/CLKO OSC1/CLKI Timing Generation RF2:RF7(1) 3 8 x 8 Multiply 8 W BITOP 8 Power-up Timer 8 MHz INTOSC 8 Oscillator Start-up Timer PORTH Precision Band Gap Reference 8 PORTJ Brown-out Reset(2) Voltage Regulator VDDCORE/VCAP Note VDD, VSS RJ0:RJ7(1) MCLR ADC 10-Bit Timer0 Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 Timer4 ECCP2 ECCP3 CCP4 CCP5 EUSART1 EUSART2 1: See Table 1-4 for I/O port pin descriptions. 2: BOR functionality is provided when the on-board voltage regulator is enabled. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. RH0:RH7(1) Watchdog Timer ENVREG ECCP1 8 ALU<8> Power-on Reset PMP PORTG 8 RG0:RG4(1) 8 INTRC Oscillator PORTF PRODH PRODL Instruction Decode & Control State Machine Control Signals Preliminary Comparators MSSP1 MSSP2 DS39778B-page 11 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F6XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS Pin Number 64-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type MCLR 7 I ST OSC1/CLKI/RA7 39 Pin Name OSC1 I CLKI I RA7 I/O OSC2/CLKO/RA6 Description Master Clear (Reset) input. This pin is an active-low Reset to the device. Oscillator crystal or external clock input. Available only in external oscillator modes (EC/ECPLL and HS/HSPLL). ST Main oscillator input connection. Oscillator crystal input or external clock source input. ST buffer when configured in RC mode; CMOS otherwise. CMOS Main clock input connection. External clock source input. Always associated with pin function OSC1. (See related OSC1/CLKI, OSC2/CLKO pins.) TTL General purpose I/O pin. Available only in INTIO2 and INTPLL2 Oscillator modes. 40 OSC2 O — CLKO O — RA6 I/O TTL Oscillator crystal or clock output. Available only in external oscillator modes (EC/ECPLL and HS/HSPLL). Main oscillator feedback output connection. Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode. System cycle clock output (FOSC/4). In EC, ECPLL, INTIO1 and INTPLL1 Oscillator modes, OSC2 pin outputs CLKO which has 1/4 the frequency of OSC1 and denotes the instruction cycle rate. General purpose I/O pin. Available only in INTIO1 and INTPLL1 Oscillator modes. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is set. 2: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared. DS39778B-page 12 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F6XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 64-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTA is a bidirectional I/O port. RA0/AN0 RA0 AN0 24 RA1/AN1 RA1 AN1 23 RA2/AN2/VREFRA2 AN2 VREF- 22 RA3/AN3/VREF+ RA3 AN3 VREF+ 21 RA4/T0CKI RA4 T0CKI 28 RA5/AN4 RA5 AN4 27 RA6 RA7 I/O I TTL Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 0. I/O I TTL Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 1. I/O I I TTL Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 2. A/D reference voltage (low) input. I/O I I TTL Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 3. A/D reference voltage (high) input. I/O I ST ST I/O I TTL Analog — — — See the OSC2/CLKO/RA6 pin. — — — See the OSC1/CLKI/RA7 pin. Digital I/O. Timer0 external clock input. Digital I/O. Analog input 4. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is set. 2: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 13 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F6XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 64-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTB is a bidirectional I/O port. PORTB can be software programmed for internal weak pull-ups on all inputs. RB0/FLT0/INT0 RB0 FLT0 INT0 48 RB1/INT1/PMA4 RB1 INT1 PMA4 47 RB2/INT2/PMA3 RB2 INT2 PMA3 46 RB3/INT3/PMA2 RB3 INT3 PMA2 45 RB4/KBI0/PMA1 RB4 KBI0 PMA1 44 RB5/KBI1/PMA0 RB5 KBI1 PMA0 43 RB6/KBI2/PGC RB6 KBI2 PGC 42 RB7/KBI3/PGD RB7 KBI3 PGD 37 I/O I I TTL ST ST Digital I/O. ECCP1/2/3 Fault input. External interrupt 0. I/O I O TTL ST — Digital I/O. External interrupt 1. Parallel Master Port address. I/O I O TTL ST — Digital I/O. External interrupt 2. Parallel Master Port address. I/O I O TTL ST — Digital I/O. External interrupt 3. Parallel Master Port address. I/O I I/O TTL TTL — Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. Parallel Master Port address. I/O I I/O TTL TTL — Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. Parallel Master Port address. I/O I I/O TTL TTL ST Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP™ programming clock pin. I/O I I/O TTL TTL ST Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP programming data pin. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is set. 2: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared. DS39778B-page 14 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F6XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 64-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTC is a bidirectional I/O port. RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI RC0 T1OSO T13CKI 30 RC1/T1OSI/ECCP2/P2A RC1 T1OSI ECCP2(1) P2A(1) 29 RC2/ECCP1/P1A RC2 ECCP1 P1A 33 RC3/SCK1/SCL1 RC3 SCK1 SCL1 34 RC4/SDI1/SDA1 RC4 SDI1 SDA1 35 RC5/SDO1 RC5 SDO1 36 RC6/TX1/CK1 RC6 TX1 CK1 31 RC7/RX1/DT1 RC7 RX1 DT1 32 I/O O I ST — ST Digital I/O. Timer1 oscillator output. Timer1/Timer3 external clock input. I/O I I/O O ST CMOS ST — Digital I/O. Timer1 oscillator input. Capture 2 input/Compare 2 output/PWM2 output. ECCP2 PWM output A. I/O I/O O ST ST — Digital I/O. Capture 1 input/Compare 1 output/PWM1 output. ECCP1 PWM output A. I/O I/O I/O ST ST ST Digital I/O. Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI mode. Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C™ mode. I/O I I/O ST ST ST Digital I/O. SPI data in. I2C data I/O. I/O O ST — Digital I/O. SPI data out. I/O O I/O ST — ST Digital I/O. EUSART1 asynchronous transmit. EUSART1 synchronous clock (see related RX1/DT1). I/O I I/O ST ST ST Digital I/O. EUSART1 asynchronous receive. EUSART1 synchronous data (see related TX1/CK1). Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is set. 2: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 15 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F6XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 64-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTD is a bidirectional I/O port. RD0/PMD0 RD0 PMD0 58 RD1/PMD1 RD1 PMD1 55 RD2/PMD2 RD2 PMD2 54 RD3/PMD3 RD3 PMD3 53 RD4/PMD4/SDO2 RD4 PMD4 SDO2 52 RD5/PMD5/SDI2/SDA2 RD5 PMD5 SDI2 SDA2 51 RD6/PMD6/SCK2/SCL2 RD6 PMD6 SCK2 SCL2 50 RD7/PMD7/SS2 RD7 PMD7 SS2 49 I/O I/O ST TTL Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. I/O I/O ST TTL Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. I/O I/O ST TTL Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. I/O I/O ST TTL Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. I/O I/O O ST TTL — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. SPI data out. I/O I/O I I/O ST TTL ST ST Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. SPI data in. I2C™ data I/O. I/O I/O I/O I/O ST TTL ST ST Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI mode. Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C mode. I/O I/O I ST TTL TTL Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. SPI slave select input. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is set. 2: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared. DS39778B-page 16 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F6XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 64-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTE is a bidirectional I/O port. RE0/PMRD/P2D RE0 PMRD P2D 2 RE1/PMWR/P2C RE1 PMWR P2C 1 RE2/PMBE/P2B RE2 PMBE P2B 64 RE3/PMA13/P3C/REFO RE3 PMA13 P3C REFO 63 RE4/PMA12/P3B RE4 PMA12 P3B 62 RE5/PMA11/P1C RE5 PMA11 P1C 61 RE6/PMA10/P1B RE6 PMA10 P1B 60 RE7/PMA9/ECCP2/P2A RE7 PMA9 ECCP2(2) P2A(2) 59 I/O I/O O ST — — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port read strobe. ECCP2 PWM output D. I/O I/O O ST — — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port write strobe. ECCP2 PWM output C. I/O O O ST — — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port byte enable ECCP2 PWM output B. I/O O O O ST — — — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. ECCP3 PWM output C. Reference clock out. I/O O O ST — — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. ECCP3 PWM output B. I/O O O ST — — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. ECCP1 PWM output C. I/O O O ST — — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. ECCP1 PWM output B. I/O O I/O O ST — ST — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. Capture 2 input/Compare 2 output/PWM2 output. ECCP2 PWM output A. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is set. 2: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 17 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F6XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 64-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTF is a bidirectional I/O port. RF1/AN6/C2OUT RF1 AN6 C2OUT 17 RF2/PMA5/AN7/C1OUT RF2 PMA5 AN7 C1OUT 16 RF3/AN8/C2INB RF3 AN8 C2INB 15 RF4/AN9/C2INA RF4 AN9 C2INA 14 RF5/AN10/C1INB/CVREF RF5 AN10 C1INB CVREF 13 RF6/AN11/C1INA RF6 AN11 C1INA 12 RF7/SS1 RF7 SS1 11 I/O I O ST Analog — Digital I/O. Analog input 6. Comparator 2 output. I/O O I O ST — Analog — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. Analog input 7. Comparator 1 output. I I I ST Analog Analog Digital input. Analog input 8. Comparator 2 input B. I I I ST Analog Analog Digital input. Analog input 8. Comparator 2 input A. I I I O ST Analog Analog Analog Digital input. Analog input 10. Comparator 1 input B. Comparator reference voltage output. I/O I I ST Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 11. Comparator 1 input A. I/O I ST TTL Digital I/O. SPI slave select input. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is set. 2: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared. DS39778B-page 18 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F6XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 64-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTG is a bidirectional I/O port. RG0/PMA8/ECCP3/P3A RG0 PMA8 ECCP3 P3A 3 RG1/PMA7/TX2/CK2 RG1 PMA7 TX2 CK2 4 RG2/PMA6/RX2/DT2 RG2 PMA6 RX2 DT2 5 RG3/PMCS1/CCP4/P3D RG3 PMCS1 CCP4 P3D 6 RG4/PMCS2/CCP5/P1D RG4 PMCS2 CCP5 P1D 8 VSS 9, 25, 41, 56 I/O O I/O O ST — ST — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. Capture 3 input/Compare 3 output/PWM3 output. ECCP3 PWM output A. I/O O O I/O ST — — ST Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. EUSART2 asynchronous transmit. EUSART2 synchronous clock (see related RX2/DT2). I/O O I I/O ST — ST ST Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. EUSART2 asynchronous receive. EUSART2 synchronous data (see related TX2/CK2). I/O O I/O O ST — ST — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port chip select 1. Capture 4 input/Compare 4 output/PWM4 output. ECCP3 PWM output D. I/O O I/O O ST — ST — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port chip select 2. Capture 5 input/Compare 5 output/PWM5 output. ECCP1 PWM output D. P — Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. VDD 26, 38, 57 P — Positive supply for peripheral digital logic and I/O pins. AVss 20 P — Ground reference for analog modules. AVDD 19 P — Positive supply for analog modules. ENVREG 18 I ST Enable for on-chip voltage regulator. VDDCORE/VCAP VDDCORE 10 P — P — VCAP Core logic power or external filter capacitor connection. Positive supply for microcontroller core logic (regulator disabled). External filter capacitor connection (regulator enabled). Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is set. 2: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 19 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS Pin Number 80-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type MCLR 9 I ST OSC1/CLKI/RA7 49 Pin Name OSC1 I CLKI I RA7 I/O OSC2/CLKO/RA6 Description Master Clear (Reset) input. This pin is an active-low Reset to the device. Oscillator crystal or external clock input. Available only in external oscillator modes (EC/ECPLL and HS/HSPLL). ST Main oscillator input connection. Oscillator crystal input or external clock source input. ST buffer when configured in RC mode; CMOS otherwise. CMOS Main clock input connection. External clock source input. Always associated with pin function OSC1. (See related OSC1/CLKI, OSC2/CLKO pins.) TTL General purpose I/O pin. Available only in INTIO2 and INTPLL2 Oscillator modes. 50 OSC2 O — CLKO O — RA6 I/O TTL Oscillator crystal or clock output. Available only in external oscillator modes (EC/ECPLL and HS/HSPLL). Main oscillator feedback output connection. Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode. System cycle clock output (FOSC/4). In EC, ECPLL, INTIO1 and INTPLL1 Oscillator modes, OSC2 pin outputs CLKO which has 1/4 the frequency of OSC1 and denotes the instruction cycle rate. General purpose I/O pin. Available only in INTIO and INTPLL Oscillator modes. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared (Extended Microcontroller mode). 2: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A for all devices in all operating modes (CCP2MX is set). 3: Default assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is set). 4: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when CCP2MX is cleared (Microcontroller mode). 5: Alternate assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is cleared). 6: Default assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is set. 7: Alternate assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is cleared (programmed). DS39778B-page 20 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 80-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTA is a bidirectional I/O port. RA0/AN0 RA0 AN0 30 RA1/AN1 RA1 AN1 29 RA2/AN2/VREFRA2 AN2 VREF- 28 RA3/AN3/VREF+ RA3 AN3 VREF+ 27 RA4/PMD5/T0CKI RA4 PMD5(7) T0CKI 34 RA5/PMD4/AN4 RA5 PMD4(7) AN4 33 RA6 RA7 I/O I TTL Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 0. I/O I TTL Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 1. I/O I I TTL Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 2. A/D reference voltage (low) input. I/O I I TTL Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog input 3. A/D reference voltage (high) input. I/O I/O I ST TTL ST I/O I/O I TTL TTL Analog — — — See the OSC2/CLKO/RA6 pin. — — — See the OSC1/CLKI/RA7 pin. Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. Timer0 external clock input. Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. Analog input 4. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared (Extended Microcontroller mode). 2: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A for all devices in all operating modes (CCP2MX is set). 3: Default assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is set). 4: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when CCP2MX is cleared (Microcontroller mode). 5: Alternate assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is cleared). 6: Default assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is set. 7: Alternate assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is cleared (programmed). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 21 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 80-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTB is a bidirectional I/O port. PORTB can be software programmed for internal weak pull-ups on all inputs. RB0/FLT0/INT0 RB0 FLT0 INT0 58 RB1/INT1/PMA4 RB1 INT1 PMA4 57 RB2/INT2/PMA3 RB2 INT2 PMA3 56 RB3/INT3/PMA2/ ECCP2/P2A RB3 INT3 PMA2 ECCP2(1) P2A(1) 55 RB4/KBI0/PMA1 RB4 KBI0 PMA1 54 RB5/KBI1/PMA0 RB5 KBI1 PMA0 53 RB6/KBI2/PGC RB6 KBI2 PGC 52 RB7/KBI3/PGD RB7 KBI3 PGD 47 I/O I I TTL ST ST Digital I/O. ECCP1/2/3 Fault input. External interrupt 0. I/O I O TTL ST — Digital I/O. External interrupt 1. Parallel Master Port address. I/O I O TTL ST — Digital I/O. External interrupt 2. Parallel Master Port address. I/O I O I/O O TTL ST — ST — Digital I/O. External interrupt 3. Parallel Master Port address. Capture 2 input/Compare 2 output/PWM2 output. ECCP2 PWM output A. I/O I I/O TTL TTL — Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. Parallel Master Port address. I/O I I/O TTL TTL — Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. Parallel Master Port address. I/O I I/O TTL TTL ST Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP™ programming clock pin. I/O I I/O TTL TTL ST Digital I/O. Interrupt-on-change pin. In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP programming data pin. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared (Extended Microcontroller mode). 2: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A for all devices in all operating modes (CCP2MX is set). 3: Default assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is set). 4: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when CCP2MX is cleared (Microcontroller mode). 5: Alternate assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is cleared). 6: Default assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is set. 7: Alternate assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is cleared (programmed). DS39778B-page 22 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 80-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTC is a bidirectional I/O port. RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI RC0 T1OSO T13CKI 36 RC1/T1OSI/ECCP2/P2A RC1 T1OSI ECCP2(2) P2A(2) 35 RC2/ECCP1/P1A RC2 ECCP1 P1A 43 RC3/SCK1/SCL1 RC3 SCK1 SCL1 44 RC4/SDI1/SDA1 RC4 SDI1 SDA1 45 RC5/SDO1 RC5 SDO1 46 RC6/TX1/CK1 RC6 TX1 CK1 37 RC7/RX1/DT1 RC7 RX1 DT1 38 I/O O I ST — ST Digital I/O. Timer1 oscillator output. Timer1/Timer3 external clock input. I/O I I/O O ST CMOS ST — Digital I/O. Timer1 oscillator input. Capture 2 input/Compare 2 output/PWM2 output. ECCP2 PWM output A. I/O I/O O ST ST — Digital I/O. Capture 1 input/Compare 1 output/PWM1 output. ECCP1 PWM output A. I/O I/O I/O ST ST ST Digital I/O. Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI mode. Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C™ mode. I/O I I/O ST ST ST Digital I/O. SPI data in. I2C data I/O. I/O O ST — Digital I/O. SPI data out. I/O O I/O ST — ST Digital I/O. EUSART1 asynchronous transmit. EUSART1 synchronous clock (see related RX1/DT1). I/O I I/O ST ST ST Digital I/O. EUSART1 asynchronous receive. EUSART1 synchronous data (see related TX1/CK1). Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared (Extended Microcontroller mode). 2: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A for all devices in all operating modes (CCP2MX is set). 3: Default assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is set). 4: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when CCP2MX is cleared (Microcontroller mode). 5: Alternate assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is cleared). 6: Default assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is set. 7: Alternate assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is cleared (programmed). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 23 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 80-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTD is a bidirectional I/O port. RD0/AD0/PMD0 RD0 AD0 PMD0(6) 72 RD1/AD1/PMD1 RD1 AD1 PMD1(6) 69 RD2/AD2/PMD2 RD2 AD2 PMD2(6) 68 RD3/AD3/PMD3 RD3 AD3 PMD3(6) 67 RD4/AD4/PMD4/SDO2 RD4 AD4 PMD4(6) SDO2 66 RD5/AD5/PMD5/ SDI2/SDA2 RD5 AD5 PMD5(6) SDI2 SDA2 65 RD6/AD6/PMD6/ SCK2/SCL2 RD6 AD6 PMD6(6) SCK2 SCL2 64 RD7/AD7/PMD7/SS2 RD7 AD7 PMD7(6) SS2 63 I/O I/O I/O ST TTL TTL Digital I/O. External memory address/data 0. Parallel Master Port data. I/O I/O I/O ST TTL TTL Digital I/O. External memory address/data 1. Parallel Master Port data. I/O I/O I/O ST TTL TTL Digital I/O. External memory address/data 2. Parallel Master Port data. I/O I/O I/O ST TTL TTL Digital I/O. External memory address/data 3. Parallel Master Port data. I/O I/O I/O O ST TTL TTL — Digital I/O. External memory address/data 4. Parallel Master Port data. SPI data out. I/O I/O I/O I I/O ST TTL TTL ST ST Digital I/O. External memory address/data 5. Parallel Master Port data. SPI data in. I2C™ data I/O. I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O ST TTL TTL ST ST Digital I/O. External memory address/data 6. Parallel Master Port data. Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI mode. Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C mode. I/O I/O I/O I ST TTL TTL TTL Digital I/O. External memory address/data 7. Parallel Master Port data. SPI slave select input. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared (Extended Microcontroller mode). 2: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A for all devices in all operating modes (CCP2MX is set). 3: Default assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is set). 4: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when CCP2MX is cleared (Microcontroller mode). 5: Alternate assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is cleared). 6: Default assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is set. 7: Alternate assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is cleared (programmed). DS39778B-page 24 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 80-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTE is a bidirectional I/O port. RE0/AD8/PMRD/P2D RE0 AD8 PMRD(6) P2D 4 RE1/AD9/PMWR/P2C RE1 AD9 PMWR(6) P2C 3 RE2/AD10/PMBE/P2B RE2 AD10 PMBE(6) P2B 78 RE3/AD11/PMA13/P3C/REFO RE3 AD11 PMA13 P3C(3) REFO 77 RE4/AD12/PMA12/P3B RE4 AD12 PMA12 P3B(3) 76 RE5/AD13/PMA11/P1C RE5 AD13 PMA11 P1C(3) 75 RE6/AD14/PMA10/P1B RE6 AD14 PMA10 P1B(3) 74 RE7/AD15/PMA9/ECCP2/P2A RE7 AD15 PMA9 ECCP2(4) P2A(4) 73 I/O I/O I/O O ST TTL — — Digital I/O. External memory address/data 8. Parallel Master Port read strobe. ECCP2 PWM output D. I/O I/O I/O O ST TTL — — Digital I/O. External memory address/data 9. Parallel Master Port write strobe. ECCP2 PWM output C. I/O I/O O O ST TTL — — Digital I/O. External memory address/data 10. Parallel Master Port byte enable. ECCP2 PWM output B. I/O I/O O O O ST TTL — — — Digital I/O. External memory address/data 11. Parallel Master Port address. ECCP3 PWM output C. Reference clock out. I/O I/O O O ST TTL — — Digital I/O. External memory address/data 12. Parallel Master Port address. ECCP3 PWM output B. I/O I/O O O ST TTL — — Digital I/O. External memory address/data 13. Parallel Master Port address. ECCP1 PWM output C. I/O I/O O O ST TTL — — Digital I/O. External memory address/data 14. Parallel Master Port address. ECCP1 PWM output B. I/O I/O O I/O O ST TTL — ST — Digital I/O. External memory address/data 15. Parallel Master Port address. Capture 2 input/Compare 2 output/PWM2 output. ECCP2 PWM output A. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared (Extended Microcontroller mode). 2: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A for all devices in all operating modes (CCP2MX is set). 3: Default assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is set). 4: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when CCP2MX is cleared (Microcontroller mode). 5: Alternate assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is cleared). 6: Default assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is set. 7: Alternate assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is cleared (programmed). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 25 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 80-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTF is a bidirectional I/O port. RF1/AN6/C2OUT RF1 AN6 C2OUT 23 RF2/PMA5/AN7/C1OUT RF2 PMA5 AN7 C1OUT 18 RF3/AN8/C2INB RF3 AN8 C2INB 17 RF4/AN9/C2INA RF4 AN9 C2INA 16 RF5/PMD2/AN10/ C1INB/CVREF RF5 PMD2(7) AN10 C1INB CVREF 15 RF6/PMD1/AN11/C1INA RF6 PMD1(7) AN11 C1INA 14 RF7/PMD0/SS1 RF7 PMD0 (7) SS1 13 I/O I O ST Analog — Digital I/O. Analog input 6. Comparator 2 output. I/O O I O ST — Analog — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. Analog input 7. Comparator 1 output. I I I ST Analog Analog Digital input. Analog input 8. Comparator 2 input B. I I I ST Analog Analog Digital input. Analog input 8. Comparator 2 input A. I/O I/O I I O ST TTL Analog Analog Analog Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. Analog input 10. Comparator 1 input B. Comparator reference voltage output. I/O I/O I I ST TTL Analog Analog Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. Analog input 11. Comparator 1 input A. I/O I/O I ST TTL TTL Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. SPI slave select input. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared (Extended Microcontroller mode). 2: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A for all devices in all operating modes (CCP2MX is set). 3: Default assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is set). 4: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when CCP2MX is cleared (Microcontroller mode). 5: Alternate assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is cleared). 6: Default assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is set. 7: Alternate assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is cleared (programmed). DS39778B-page 26 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 80-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTG is a bidirectional I/O port. RG0/PMA8/ECCP3/P3A RG0 PMA8 ECCP3 P3A 5 RG1/PMA7/TX2/CK2 RG1 PMA7 TX2 CK2 6 RG2/PMA6/RX2/DT2 RG2 PMA6 RX2 DT2 7 RG3/PMCS1/CCP4/P3D RG3 PMCS1 CCP4 P3D 8 RG4/PMCS2/CCP5/P1D RG4 PMCS2 CCP5 P1D 10 I/O O I/O O ST — ST — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. Capture 3 input/Compare 3 output/PWM3 output. ECCP3 PWM output A. I/O O O I/O ST — — ST Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. EUSART2 asynchronous transmit. EUSART2 synchronous clock (see related RX2/DT2). I/O I/O I I/O ST — ST ST Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. EUSART2 asynchronous receive. EUSART2 synchronous data (see related TX2/CK2). I/O I/O I/O O ST — ST — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port chip select 1. Capture 4 input/Compare 4 output/PWM4 output. ECCP3 PWM output D. I/O O I/O O ST — ST — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port chip select 2. Capture 5 input/Compare 5 output/PWM5 output. ECCP1 PWM output D. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared (Extended Microcontroller mode). 2: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A for all devices in all operating modes (CCP2MX is set). 3: Default assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is set). 4: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when CCP2MX is cleared (Microcontroller mode). 5: Alternate assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is cleared). 6: Default assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is set. 7: Alternate assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is cleared (programmed). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 27 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 80-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTH is a bidirectional I/O port. RH0/A16 RH0 A16 79 RH1/A17 RH1 A17 80 RH2/A18/PMD7 RH2 A18 PMD7(7) 1 RH3/A19/PMD6 RH3 A19 PMD6(7) 2 RH4/PMD3/AN12/ P3C/C2INC RH4 PMD3(7) AN12 P3C(5) C2INC 22 RH5/PMBE/AN13/ P3B/C2IND RH5 PMBE(7) AN13 P3B(5) C2IND 21 RH6/PMRD/AN14/ P1C/C1INC RH6 PMRD(7) AN14 P1C(5) C1INC 20 RH7/PMWR/AN15/P1B RH7 PMWR(7) AN15 P1B(5) 19 I/O O ST TTL Digital I/O. External memory address/data 16. I/O O ST TTL Digital I/O. External memory address/data 17. I/O O I/O ST TTL TTL Digital I/O. External memory address/data 18. Parallel Master Port data. I/O O I/O ST TTL TTL Digital I/O. External memory address/data 19. Parallel Master Port data. I/O I/O I O I ST TTL Analog — Analog Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port address. Analog input 12. ECCP3 PWM output C. Comparator 2 input C. I/O O I O I ST — Analog — Analog Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port byte enable. Analog input 13. ECCP3 PWM output B. Comparator 2 input D. I/O I/O I O I ST — Analog — Analog Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port read strobe. Analog input 14. ECCP1 PWM output C. Comparator 1 input C. I/O I/O I O ST — Analog — Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port write strobe. Analog input 15. ECCP1 PWM output B. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared (Extended Microcontroller mode). 2: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A for all devices in all operating modes (CCP2MX is set). 3: Default assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is set). 4: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when CCP2MX is cleared (Microcontroller mode). 5: Alternate assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is cleared). 6: Default assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is set. 7: Alternate assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is cleared (programmed). DS39778B-page 28 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F8XJ1X PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name 80-TQFP Pin Type Buffer Type Description PORTJ is a bidirectional I/O port. RJ0/ALE RJ0 ALE 62 RJ1/OE RJ1 OE 61 RJ2/WRL RJ2 WRL 60 RJ3/WRH RJ3 WRH 59 RJ4/BA0 RJ4 BA0 39 RJ5/CE RJ5 CE 40 RJ6/LB RJ6 LB 41 RJ7/UB RJ7 UB 42 I/O O ST — Digital I/O. External memory address latch enable. I/O O ST — Digital I/O. External memory output enable. I/O O ST — Digital I/O. External memory write low control. I/O O ST — Digital I/O. External memory write high control. I/O O ST — Digital I/O. External memory byte address 0 control. I/O O ST — Digital I/O External memory chip enable control. I/O O ST — Digital I/O. External memory low byte control. I/O O ST — Digital I/O. External memory high byte control. VSS 11, 31, 51, 70 P — Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. VDD 32, 48, 71 P — Positive supply for peripheral digital logic and I/O pins. AVss 26 P — Ground reference for analog modules. AVDD 25 P — Positive supply for analog modules. ENVREG 24 I ST Enable for on-chip voltage regulator. VDDCORE/VCAP VDDCORE 12 P — P — VCAP Core logic power or external filter capacitor connection. Positive supply for microcontroller core logic (regulator disabled). External filter capacitor connection (regulator enabled). Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) Note 1: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when Configuration bit, CCP2MX, is cleared (Extended Microcontroller mode). 2: Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A for all devices in all operating modes (CCP2MX is set). 3: Default assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is set). 4: Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when CCP2MX is cleared (Microcontroller mode). 5: Alternate assignments for P1B/P1C/P3B/P3C (ECCPMX Configuration bit is cleared). 6: Default assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is set. 7: Alternate assignment for PMP data and control pins when PMPMX Configuration bit is cleared (programmed). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 29 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 30 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 2.0 OSCILLATOR CONFIGURATIONS 2.1 Oscillator Types All of these modes are selected by the user by programming the FOSC2:FOSC0 Configuration bits. The PIC18F87J11 family of devices can be operated in eight different oscillator modes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. HS HSPLL High-Speed Crystal/Resonator High-Speed Crystal/Resonator with Software PLL Control EC External Clock with FOSC/4 Output ECPLL External Clock with Software PLL Control INTIO1 Internal Oscillator Block with FOSC/4 Output on RA6 and I/O on RA7 INTIO2 Internal Oscillator Block with I/O on RA6 and RA7 INTPLL1 Internal Oscillator Block with Software PLL Control, FOSC/4 Output on RA6 and I/O on RA7 INTPLL2 Internal Oscillator Block with Software PLL Control and I/O on RA6 and RA7 FIGURE 2-1: In addition, PIC18F87J11 Family devices can switch between different clock sources, either under software control or automatically under certain conditions. This allows for additional power savings by managing device clock speed in real time without resetting the application. The clock sources for the PIC18F87J11 family of devices are shown in Figure 2-1. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY CLOCK DIAGRAM PIC18F87J11 Family Primary Oscillator HS, EC OSC2 OSCTUNE<6> HSPLL, ECPLL, INTPLL 4 x PLL OSC1 Secondary Oscillator T1OSC T1OSO OSCCON<6:4> OSCCON<6:4> 8 MHz 4 MHz Internal Oscillator Block 8 MHz (INTOSC) Postscaler 8 MHz Source 2 MHz 1 MHz 500 kHz 250 kHz 125 kHz Internal Oscillator 110 IDLEN 101 100 011 010 001 1 31 kHz 000 0 INTRC Source © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 31 kHz (INTRC) CPU 111 MUX T1OSI T1OSCEN Enable Oscillator Peripherals MUX Sleep Clock Control FOSC2:FOSC0 OSCCON<1:0> Clock Source Option for Other Modules OSCTUNE<7> WDT, PWRT, FSCM and Two-Speed Start-up Preliminary DS39778B-page 31 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 2.2 Control Registers The OSCCON register (Register 2-1) controls the main aspects of the device clock’s operation. It selects the oscillator type to be used, which of the power-managed modes to invoke and the output frequency of the INTOSC source. It also provides status on the oscillators. The OSCTUNE register (Register 2-2) controls the tuning and operation of the internal oscillator block. It also implements the PLLEN bits which control the operation of the Phase Locked Loop (PLL) (see Section 2.4.3 “PLL Frequency Multiplier”). OSCCON: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER(1) REGISTER 2-1: R/W-0 R/W-1 IDLEN IRCF2(3) R/W-1 (3) IRCF1 R/W-0 IRCF0 (3) R(2) OSTS U-1 — R/W-0 SCS1 (5) R/W-0 SCS0(5) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 IDLEN: Idle Enable bit 1 = Device enters an Idle mode when a SLEEP instruction is executed 0 = Device enters Sleep mode when a SLEEP instruction is executed bit 6-4 IRCF2:IRCF0: INTOSC Source Frequency Select bits(3) 111 = 8 MHz (INTOSC drives clock directly) 110 = 4 MHz (default) 101 = 2 MHz 100 = 1 MHz 011 = 500 kHz 010 = 250 kHz 001 = 125 kHz 000 = 31 kHz (from either INTOSC/256 or INTRC)(4) bit 3 OSTS: Oscillator Start-up Timer Time-out Status bit(2) 1 = Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) time-out has expired; primary oscillator is running 0 = Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) time-out is running; primary oscillator is not ready bit 2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘1’ bit 1-0 SCS1:SCS0: System Clock Select bits(5) 11 = Internal oscillator block 10 = Primary oscillator 01 = Timer1 oscillator 00 = Default primary oscillator (as defined by FOSC2:FOSC0 Configuration bits) Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. Reset state depends on state of the IESO Configuration bit. Modifying these bits will cause an immediate clock frequency switch if the internal oscillator is providing the device clocks. Source selected by the INTSRC bit (OSCTUNE<7>), see text. Modifying these bits will cause an immediate clock source switch. DS39778B-page 32 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 2-2: OSCTUNE: OSCILLATOR TUNING REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 INTSRC PLLEN TUN5 TUN4 TUN3 TUN2 TUN1 TUN0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 INTSRC: Internal Oscillator Low-Frequency Source Select bit 1 = 31.25 kHz device clock derived from 8 MHz INTOSC source (divide-by-256 enabled) 0 = 31 kHz device clock derived from INTRC 31 kHz oscillator bit 6 PLLEN: Frequency Multiplier PLL Enable bit 1 = PLL enabled 0 = PLL disabled bit 5-0 TUN5:TUN0: Fast RC Oscillator (INTOSC) Frequency Tuning bits 011111 = Maximum frequency • • • • 000001 000000 = Center frequency. Fast RC oscillator is running at the calibrated frequency. 111111 • • • • 100000 = Minimum frequency 2.3 Clock Sources and Oscillator Switching Essentially, PIC18F87J11 Family devices have three independent clock sources: • Primary oscillators • Secondary oscillators • Internal oscillator The primary oscillators can be thought of as the main device oscillators. These are any external oscillators connected to the OSC1 and OSC2 pins, and include the External Crystal and Resonator modes and the External Clock modes. If selected by the FOSC2:FOSC0 Configuration bits, the internal oscillator block (either the 31 kHz INTRC or the 8 MHz INTOSC source) may be considered a primary oscillator. The particular mode is defined by the FOSC Configuration bits. The details of these modes are covered in Section 2.4 “External Oscillator Modes”. The secondary oscillators are external clock sources that are not connected to the OSC1 or OSC2 pins. These sources may continue to operate even after the © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. controller is placed in a power-managed mode. PIC18F87J11 Family devices offer the Timer1 oscillator as a secondary oscillator source. This oscillator, in all power-managed modes, is often the time base for functions such as a Real-Time Clock (RTC). The Timer1 oscillator is discussed in greater detail in Section 13.0 “Timer1 Module” In addition to being a primary clock source in some circumstances, the internal oscillator is available as a power-managed mode clock source. The INTRC source is also used as the clock source for several special features, such as the WDT and Fail-Safe Clock Monitor. The internal oscillator block is discussed in more detail in Section 2.5 “Internal Oscillator Block”. The PIC18F87J11 Family includes features that allow the device clock source to be switched from the main oscillator, chosen by device configuration, to one of the alternate clock sources. When an alternate clock source is enabled, various power-managed operating modes are available. Preliminary DS39778B-page 33 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 2.3.1 CLOCK SOURCE SELECTION 2.3.1.1 The System Clock Select bits, SCS1:SCS0 (OSCCON<1:0>), select the clock source. The available clock sources are the primary clock defined by the FOSC2:FOSC0 Configuration bits, the secondary clock (Timer1 oscillator) and the internal oscillator. The clock source changes after one or more of the bits are written to, following a brief clock transition interval. The OSTS (OSCCON<3>) and T1RUN (T1CON<6>) bits indicate which clock source is currently providing the device clock. The OSTS bit indicates that the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has timed out and the primary clock is providing the device clock in primary clock modes. The T1RUN bit indicates when the Timer1 oscillator is providing the device clock in secondary clock modes. In power-managed modes, only one of these bits will be set at any time. If neither of these bits is set, the INTRC is providing the clock, or the internal oscillator has just started and is not yet stable. The IDLEN bit determines if the device goes into Sleep mode or one of the Idle modes when the SLEEP instruction is executed. The use of the flag and control bits in the OSCCON register is discussed in more detail in Section 3.0 “Power-Managed Modes”. Note 1: The Timer1 oscillator must be enabled to select the secondary clock source. The Timer1 oscillator is enabled by setting the T1OSCEN bit in the Timer1 Control register (T1CON<3>). If the Timer1 oscillator is not enabled, then any attempt to select a secondary clock source when executing a SLEEP instruction will be ignored. 2: It is recommended that the Timer1 oscillator be operating and stable before executing the SLEEP instruction or a very long delay may occur while the Timer1 oscillator starts. DS39778B-page 34 System Clock Selection and Device Resets Since the SCS bits are cleared on all forms of Reset, this means the primary oscillator defined by the FOSC2:FOSC0 Configuration bits is used as the primary clock source on device Resets. This could either be the internal oscillator block by itself, or one of the other primary clock source (HS, EC, HSPLL, ECPLL1/2 or INTPLL1/2). In those cases when the internal oscillator block, without PLL, is the default clock on Reset, the Fast RC oscillator (INTOSC) will be used as the device clock source. It will initially start at 4 MHz; the postscaler selection that corresponds to the Reset value of the IRCF2:IRCF0 bits (‘110’). Regardless of which primary oscillator is selected, INTRC will always be enabled on device power-up. It serves as the clock source until the device has loaded its configuration values from memory. It is at this point that the FOSC Configuration bits are read and the oscillator selection of the operational mode is made. Note that either the primary clock source, or the internal oscillator, will have two bit setting options for the possible values of the SCS1:SCS0 bits at any given time. 2.3.2 OSCILLATOR TRANSITIONS PIC18F87J11 family devices contain circuitry to prevent clock “glitches” when switching between clock sources. A short pause in the device clock occurs during the clock switch. The length of this pause is the sum of two cycles of the old clock source and three to four cycles of the new clock source. This formula assumes that the new clock source is stable. Clock transitions are discussed in greater detail in Section 3.1.2 “Entering Power-Managed Modes”. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 2.4 TABLE 2-2: External Oscillator Modes 2.4.1 CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR/CERAMIC RESONATORS (HS MODES) In HS or HSPLL Oscillator modes, a crystal or ceramic resonator is connected to the OSC1 and OSC2 pins to establish oscillation. Figure 2-2 shows the pin connections. The oscillator design requires the use of a crystal rated for parallel resonant operation. Note: Use of a crystal rated for series resonant operation may give a frequency out of the crystal manufacturer’s specifications. TABLE 2-1: CAPACITOR SELECTION FOR CERAMIC RESONATORS Typical Capacitor Values Used: Mode Freq. OSC1 OSC2 HS 8.0 MHz 16.0 MHz 27 pF 22 pF 27 pF 22 pF Capacitor values are for design guidance only. Typical Capacitor Values Tested: Crystal Freq. Osc Type HS C1 C2 4 MHz 27 pF 27 pF 8 MHz 22 pF 22 pF 20 MHz 15 pF 15 pF Capacitor values are for design guidance only. Different capacitor values may be required to produce acceptable oscillator operation. The user should test the performance of the oscillator over the expected VDD and temperature range for the application. Refer to the Microchip application notes cited in Table 2-1 for oscillator specific information. Also see the notes following this table for additional information. Note 1: Higher capacitance increases the stability of oscillator but also increases the start-up time. 2: Since each resonator/crystal has its own characteristics, the user should consult the resonator/crystal manufacturer for appropriate values of external components. Different capacitor values may be required to produce acceptable oscillator operation. The user should test the performance of the oscillator over the expected VDD and temperature range for the application. Refer to the following application notes for oscillator specific information: • AN588, “PIC® Microcontroller Oscillator Design Guide” • AN826, “Crystal Oscillator Basics and Crystal Selection for rfPIC® and PIC® Devices” • AN849, “Basic PIC® Oscillator Design” • AN943, “Practical PIC® Oscillator Analysis and Design” • AN949, “Making Your Oscillator Work” CAPACITOR SELECTION FOR CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR 3: Rs may be required to avoid overdriving crystals with low drive level specification. 4: Always verify oscillator performance over the VDD and temperature range that is expected for the application. FIGURE 2-2: See the notes following Table 2-2 for additional information. CRYSTAL/CERAMIC RESONATOR OPERATION (HS OR HSPLL CONFIGURATION) C1(1) OSC1 XTAL RF(3) OSC2 C2(1) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. RS(2) To Internal Logic Sleep PIC18F87J11 Note 1: See Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 for initial values of C1 and C2. 2: A series resistor (RS) may be required for AT strip cut crystals. 3: RF varies with the oscillator mode chosen. Preliminary DS39778B-page 35 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 2.4.2 EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT (EC MODES) 2.4.3.1 The EC and ECPLL Oscillator modes require an external clock source to be connected to the OSC1 pin. There is no oscillator start-up time required after a Power-on Reset or after an exit from Sleep mode. In the EC Oscillator mode, the oscillator frequency divided by 4 is available on the OSC2 pin. This signal may be used for test purposes or to synchronize other logic. Figure 2-3 shows the pin connections for the EC Oscillator mode. FIGURE 2-3: EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT OPERATION (EC CONFIGURATION) HSPLL and ECPLL Modes The HSPLL and ECPLL modes provide the ability to selectively run the device at 4 times the external oscillating source to produce frequencies up to 48 MHz. The PLL is enabled by programming the FOSC2:FOSC0 Configuration bits to either ‘111’ (for ECPLL) or ‘101’ (for HSPLL). In addition, the PLLEN bit (OSCTUNE<6>) must also be set. Clearing PLLEN disables the PLL, regardless of the chosen oscillator configuration. It also allows additional flexibility for controlling the application’s clock speed in software. FIGURE 2-5: PLL BLOCK DIAGRAM HSPLL or ECPLL (CONFIG2L) PLL Enable (OSCTUNE) OSC1/CLKI Clock from Ext. System PIC18F87J11 FOSC/4 OSC2 OSC2/CLKO HS or EC Mode OSC1 An external clock source may also be connected to the OSC1 pin in the HS mode, as shown in Figure 2-4. In this configuration, the divide-by-4 output on OSC2 is not available. Current consumption in this configuration will be somewhat higher than EC mode, as the internal oscillator’s feedback circuitry will be enabled (in EC mode, the feedback circuit is disabled). FIGURE 2-4: FOUT Loop Filter VCO MUX ÷4 SYSCLK EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT OPERATION (HS OSC CONFIGURATION) 2.4.3.2 PIC18F87J11 (HS Mode) Open PLL and INTOSC The PLL is also available to the internal oscillator block when the internal oscillator block is configured as the primary clock source. In this configuration, the PLL is enabled in software and generates a clock output of up to 32 MHz. The operation of INTOSC with the PLL is described in Section 2.5.2 “INTPLL Modes”. OSC1 Clock from Ext. System 2.4.3 Phase Comparator FIN OSC2 PLL FREQUENCY MULTIPLIER A Phase Locked Loop (PLL) circuit is provided as an option for users who want to use a lower frequency oscillator circuit, or to clock the device up to its highest rated frequency from a crystal oscillator. This may be useful for customers who are concerned with EMI due to high-frequency crystals, or users who require higher clock speeds from an internal oscillator. DS39778B-page 36 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 2.5 FIGURE 2-6: Internal Oscillator Block The PIC18F87J11 Family of devices includes an internal oscillator block which generates two different clock signals; either can be used as the microcontroller’s clock source. This may eliminate the need for an external oscillator circuit on the OSC1 and/or OSC2 pins. The main output is the Fast RC oscillator, or INTOSC, an 8 MHz clock source which can be used to directly drive the device clock. It also drives a postscaler, which can provide a range of clock frequencies from 31 kHz to 4 MHz. INTOSC is enabled when a clock frequency from 125 kHz to 8 MHz is selected. The INTOSC output can also be enabled when 31 kHz is selected, depending on the INTSRC bit (OSCTUNE<7>). The other clock source is the internal RC oscillator (INTRC), which provides a nominal 31 kHz output. INTRC is enabled if it is selected as the device clock source; it is also enabled automatically when any of the following are enabled: • • • • Power-up Timer Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Watchdog Timer Two-Speed Start-up These features are discussed in greater detail in Section 24.0 “Special Features of the CPU”. The clock source frequency (INTOSC direct, INTOSC with postscaler or INTRC direct) is selected by configuring the IRCF bits of the OSCCON register. The default frequency on device Resets is 4 MHz. 2.5.1 INTIO MODES Using the internal oscillator as the clock source eliminates the need for up to two external oscillator pins, which can then be used for digital I/O. Two distinct oscillator configurations, which are determined by the FOSC Configuration bits, are available: • In INTIO1 mode, the OSC2 pin outputs FOSC/4, while OSC1 functions as RA7 (see Figure 2-6) for digital input and output. • In INTIO2 mode, OSC1 functions as RA7 and OSC2 functions as RA6 (see Figure 2-7), both for digital input and output. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. INTIO1 OSCILLATOR MODE I/O (OSC1) RA7 PIC18F87J11 OSC2 FOSC/4 FIGURE 2-7: INTIO2 OSCILLATOR MODE RA7 I/O (OSC1) RA6 I/O (OSC2) PIC18F87J11 2.5.2 INTPLL MODES The 4x Phase Locked Loop (PLL) can be used with the internal oscillator block to produce faster device clock speeds than are normally possible with the internal oscillator sources. When enabled, the PLL produces a clock speed of 16 MHz or 32 MHz. PLL operation is controlled through software. The control bit, PLLEN (OSCTUNE<6>), is used to enable or disable its operation. The PLL is available only to INTOSC when the device is configured to use one of the INTPLL modes as the primary clock source (FOSC2:FOSC0 = 011 or 010). Additionally, the PLL will only function when the selected output frequency is either 4 MHz or 8 MHz (OSCCON<6:4> = 111 or 110). Like the INTIO modes, there are two distinct INTPLL modes available: • In INTPLL1 mode, the OSC2 pin outputs FOSC/4, while OSC1 functions as RA7 for digital input and output. Externally, this is identical in appearance to INTIO1 (Figure 2-6). • In INTPLL2 mode, OSC1 functions as RA7 and OSC2 functions as RA6, both for digital input and output. Externally, this is identical to INTIO2 (Figure 2-7). Preliminary DS39778B-page 37 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 2.5.3 INTERNAL OSCILLATOR OUTPUT FREQUENCY AND TUNING The internal oscillator block is calibrated at the factory to produce an INTOSC output frequency of 8 MHz. It can be adjusted in the user’s application by writing to TUN5:TUN0 (OSCTUNE<5:0>) in the OSCTUNE register (Register 2-2). When the OSCTUNE register is modified, the INTOSC frequency will begin shifting to the new frequency. The oscillator will stabilize within 1 ms. Code execution continues during this shift and there is no indication that the shift has occurred. The INTRC oscillator operates independently of the INTOSC source. Any changes in INTOSC across voltage and temperature are not necessarily reflected by changes in INTRC or vice versa. The frequency of INTRC is not affected by OSCTUNE. 2.5.4 INTOSC FREQUENCY DRIFT The INTOSC frequency may drift as VDD or temperature changes, and can affect the controller operation in a variety of ways. It is possible to adjust the INTOSC frequency by modifying the value in the OSCTUNE register. Depending on the device, this may have no effect on the INTRC clock source frequency. Tuning INTOSC requires knowing when to make the adjustment, in which direction it should be made, and in some cases, how large a change is needed. Three compensation techniques are shown here. 2.5.4.1 Compensating with the EUSART An adjustment may be required when the EUSART begins to generate framing errors or receives data with errors while in Asynchronous mode. Framing errors indicate that the device clock frequency is too high. To adjust for this, decrement the value in OSCTUNE to reduce the clock frequency. On the other hand, errors in data may suggest that the clock speed is too low. To compensate, increment OSCTUNE to increase the clock frequency. 2.5.4.2 Compensating with the Timers This technique compares device clock speed to some reference clock. Two timers may be used; one timer is clocked by the peripheral clock, while the other is clocked by a fixed reference source, such as the Timer1 oscillator. Both timers are cleared, but the timer clocked by the reference generates interrupts. When an interrupt occurs, the internally clocked timer is read and both timers are cleared. If the internally clocked timer value is much greater than expected, then the internal oscillator block is running too fast. To adjust for this, decrement the OSCTUNE register. DS39778B-page 38 2.5.4.3 Compensating with the CCP Module in Capture Mode A CCP module can use free-running Timer1 (or Timer3), clocked by the internal oscillator block and an external event with a known period (i.e., AC power frequency). The time of the first event is captured in the CCPRxH:CCPRxL registers and is recorded for use later. When the second event causes a capture, the time of the first event is subtracted from the time of the second event. Since the period of the external event is known, the time difference between events can be calculated. If the measured time is much greater than the calculated time, the internal oscillator block is running too fast. To compensate, decrement the OSCTUNE register. If the measured time is much less than the calculated time, the internal oscillator block is running too slow. To compensate, increment the OSCTUNE register. 2.6 Reference Clock Output In addition to the FOSC/4 clock output in certain oscillator modes, the device clock in the PIC18F87J11 family can also be configured to provide a reference clock output signal to a port pin. This feature is available in all oscillator configurations and allows the user to select a greater range of clock sub-multiples to drive external devices in the application. This reference clock output is controlled by the REFOCON register (Register 2-3). Setting the ROON bit (REFOCON<7>) makes the clock signal available on the REFO (RE3) pin. The RODIV3:RODIV0 bits enable the selection of 16 different clock divider options. The ROSSLP and ROSEL bits (REFOCON<5:4>) control the availability of the reference output during Sleep mode. The ROSEL bit determines if the oscillator on OSC1 and OSC2, or the current system clock source, is used for the reference clock output. The ROSSLP bit determines if the reference source is available on RE3 when the device is in Sleep mode. To use the reference clock output in Sleep mode, both the ROSSLP and ROSEL bits must be set. The device clock must also be configured for an EC or HS mode; otherwise, the oscillator on OSC1 and OSC2 will be powered down when the device enters Sleep mode. Clearing the ROSEL bit allows the reference output frequency to change as the system clock changes during any clock switches. The REFOCON register is an alternate SFR, and shares the same memory address as the OSCCON register. It is accessed by setting the ADSHR bit in the WDTCON register (WDTCON<4>). Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 2-3: REFOCON: REFERENCE OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ROON — ROSSLP ROSEL(1) RODIV3 RODIV2 RODIV1 RODIV0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 ROON: Reference Oscillator Output Enable bit 1 = Reference oscillator output available on REFO pin 0 = Reference oscillator output disabled bit 6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 ROSSLP: Reference Oscillator Output Stop in Sleep bit 1 = Reference oscillator continues to run in Sleep 0 = Reference oscillator is disabled in Sleep bit 4 ROSEL: Reference Oscillator Source Select bit(1) 1 = Primary oscillator (EC or HS) used as the base clock 0 = System clock used as the base clock; base clock reflects any clock switching of the device bit 3-0 RODIV3:RODIV0: Reference Oscillator Divisor Select bits 1111 = Base clock value divided by 32,768 1110 = Base clock value divided by 16,384 1101 = Base clock value divided by 8,192 1100 = Base clock value divided by 4,096 1011 = Base clock value divided by 2,048 1010 = Base clock value divided by 1,024 1001 = Base clock value divided by 512 1000 = Base clock value divided by 256 0111 = Base clock value divided by 128 0110 = Base clock value divided by 64 0101 = Base clock value divided by 32 0100 = Base clock value divided by 16 0011 = Base clock value divided by 8 0010 = Base clock value divided by 4 0001 = Base clock value divided by 2 0000 = Base clock value Note 1: If ROSEL = 1, an EC or HS oscillator must be configured as the default oscillator with the FOSC Configuration bits to maintain clock output during Sleep mode. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 39 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 2.7 Effects of Power-Managed Modes on the Various Clock Sources When PRI_IDLE mode is selected, the designated primary oscillator continues to run without interruption. For all other power-managed modes, the oscillator using the OSC1 pin is disabled. The OSC1 pin (and OSC2 pin if used by the oscillator) will stop oscillating. In secondary clock modes (SEC_RUN and SEC_IDLE), the Timer1 oscillator is operating and providing the device clock. The Timer1 oscillator may also run in all power-managed modes if required to clock Timer1 or Timer3. In RC_RUN and RC_IDLE modes, the internal oscillator provides the device clock source. The 31 kHz INTRC output can be used directly to provide the clock and may be enabled to support various special features, regardless of the power-managed mode (see Section 24.2 “Watchdog Timer (WDT)” through Section 24.5 “Fail-Safe Clock Monitor” for more information on WDT, Fail-Safe Clock Monitor and Two-Speed Start-up). If the Sleep mode is selected, all clock sources are stopped. Since all the transistor switching currents have been stopped, Sleep mode achieves the lowest current consumption of the device (only leakage currents). Enabling any on-chip feature that will operate during Sleep will increase the current consumed during Sleep. The INTRC is required to support WDT operation. The TABLE 2-3: Timer1 oscillator may be operating to support a RealTime Clock (RTC). Other features may be operating that do not require a device clock source (i.e., MSSP slave, PSP, INTx pins and others). Peripherals that may add significant current consumption are listed in Section 27.2 “DC Characteristics: Power-Down and Supply Current”. 2.8 Power-up Delays Power-up delays are controlled by two timers, so that no external Reset circuitry is required for most applications. The delays ensure that the device is kept in Reset until the device power supply is stable under normal circumstances and the primary clock is operating and stable. For additional information on power-up delays, see Section 4.6 “Power-up Timer (PWRT)”. The first timer is the Power-up Timer (PWRT), which provides a fixed delay on power-up (parameter 33, Table 27-12); it is always enabled. The second timer is the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST), intended to keep the chip in Reset until the crystal oscillator is stable (HS modes). The OST does this by counting 1024 oscillator cycles before allowing the oscillator to clock the device. There is a delay of interval TCSD (parameter 38, Table 27-12), following POR, while the controller becomes ready to execute instructions. OSC1 AND OSC2 PIN STATES IN SLEEP MODE Oscillator Mode OSC1 Pin OSC2 Pin EC, ECPLL Floating, pulled by external clock At logic low (clock/4 output) HS, HSPLL Feedback inverter disabled at quiescent voltage level Feedback inverter disabled at quiescent voltage level INTOSC, INTPLL1/2 I/O pin RA6, direction controlled by TRISA<6> I/O pin RA6, direction controlled by TRISA<7> Note: See Section 4.0 “Reset” for time-outs due to Sleep and MCLR Reset. DS39778B-page 40 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 3.0 POWER-MANAGED MODES 3.1.1 CLOCK SOURCES The PIC18F87J11 Family of devices provides the ability to manage power consumption by simply managing clocking to the CPU and the peripherals. In general, a lower clock frequency and a reduction in the number of circuits being clocked constitutes lower consumed power. For the sake of managing power in an application, there are three primary modes of operation: The SCS1:SCS0 bits allow the selection of one of three clock sources for power-managed modes. They are: • Run mode • Idle mode • Sleep mode 3.1.2 These modes define which portions of the device are clocked and at what speed. The Run and Idle modes may use any of the three available clock sources (primary, secondary or internal oscillator block); the Sleep mode does not use a clock source. The power-managed modes include several power-saving features offered on previous devices. One is the clock switching feature, offered in other PIC18 devices, allowing the controller to use the Timer1 oscillator in place of the primary oscillator. Also included is the Sleep mode, offered by all PIC® devices, where all device clocks are stopped. 3.1 Selecting Power-Managed Modes Selecting a power-managed mode requires two decisions: if the CPU is to be clocked or not and which clock source is to be used. The IDLEN bit (OSCCON<7>) controls CPU clocking, while the SCS1:SCS0 bits (OSCCON<1:0>) select the clock source. The individual modes, bit settings, clock sources and affected modules are summarized in Table 3-1. TABLE 3-1: • the primary clock, as defined by the FOSC2:FOSC0 Configuration bits • the secondary clock (Timer1 oscillator) • the internal oscillator ENTERING POWER-MANAGED MODES Switching from one power-managed mode to another begins by loading the OSCCON register. The SCS1:SCS0 bits select the clock source and determine which Run or Idle mode is to be used. Changing these bits causes an immediate switch to the new clock source, assuming that it is running. The switch may also be subject to clock transition delays. These are discussed in Section 3.1.3 “Clock Transitions and Status Indicators” and subsequent sections. Entry to the power-managed Idle or Sleep modes is triggered by the execution of a SLEEP instruction. The actual mode that results depends on the status of the IDLEN bit. Depending on the current mode and the mode being switched to, a change to a power-managed mode does not always require setting all of these bits. Many transitions may be done by changing the oscillator select bits, or changing the IDLEN bit, prior to issuing a SLEEP instruction. If the IDLEN bit is already configured correctly, it may only be necessary to perform a SLEEP instruction to switch to the desired mode. POWER-MANAGED MODES OSCCON<7,1:0> Mode (1) IDLEN Module Clocking Available Clock and Oscillator Source SCS1:SCS0 CPU Peripherals 0 N/A Off Off PRI_RUN N/A 10 Clocked Clocked Primary – HS, EC, HSPLL, ECPLL, INTOSC oscillator; this is the normal, full-power execution mode SEC_RUN N/A 01 Clocked Clocked Secondary – Timer1 oscillator RC_RUN N/A 11 Clocked Clocked Internal oscillator block(2) PRI_IDLE 1 10 Off Clocked Primary – HS, EC, HSPLL, ECPLL, INTOSC SEC_IDLE 1 01 Off Clocked Secondary – Timer1 oscillator RC_IDLE 1 11 Off Clocked Internal oscillator block(2) Sleep Note 1: 2: None – All clocks are disabled IDLEN reflects its value when the SLEEP instruction is executed. Includes INTRC and INTOSC postcaler (internal oscillator block). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 41 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 3.1.3 CLOCK TRANSITIONS AND STATUS INDICATORS The length of the transition between clock sources is the sum of two cycles of the old clock source and three to four cycles of the new clock source. This formula assumes that the new clock source is stable. Two bits indicate the current clock source and its status: OSTS (OSCCON<3>) and T1RUN (T1CON<6>). In general, only one of these bits will be set while in a given power-managed mode. When the OSTS bit is set, the primary clock is providing the device clock. When the T1RUN bit is set, the Timer1 oscillator is providing the clock. If neither of these bits is set, INTRC is clocking the device. Note: 3.1.4 Executing a SLEEP instruction does not necessarily place the device into Sleep mode. It acts as the trigger to place the controller into either the Sleep mode, or one of the Idle modes, depending on the setting of the IDLEN bit. MULTIPLE SLEEP COMMANDS The power-managed mode that is invoked with the SLEEP instruction is determined by the setting of the IDLEN bit at the time the instruction is executed. If another SLEEP instruction is executed, the device will enter the power-managed mode specified by IDLEN at that time. If IDLEN has changed, the device will enter the new power-managed mode specified by the new setting. DS39778B-page 42 3.2 Run Modes In the Run modes, clocks to both the core and peripherals are active. The difference between these modes is the clock source. 3.2.1 PRI_RUN MODE The PRI_RUN mode is the normal, full-power execution mode of the microcontroller. This is also the default mode upon a device Reset unless Two-Speed Start-up is enabled (see Section 24.4 “Two-Speed Start-up” for details). In this mode, the OSTS bit is set. (see Section 2.2 “Control Registers”). 3.2.2 SEC_RUN MODE The SEC_RUN mode is the compatible mode to the “clock switching” feature offered in other PIC18 devices. In this mode, the CPU and peripherals are clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. This gives users the option of lower power consumption while still using a high-accuracy clock source. SEC_RUN mode is entered by setting the SCS1:SCS0 bits to ‘01’. The device clock source is switched to the Timer1 oscillator (see Figure 3-1), the primary oscillator is shut down, the T1RUN bit (T1CON<6>) is set and the OSTS bit is cleared. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY Note: On transitions from SEC_RUN mode to PRI_RUN mode, the peripherals and CPU continue to be clocked from the Timer1 oscillator while the primary clock is started. When the primary clock becomes ready, a clock switch back to the primary clock occurs (see Figure 3-2). When the clock switch is complete, the T1RUN bit is cleared, the OSTS bit is set and the primary clock is providing the clock. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up; the Timer1 oscillator continues to run. The Timer1 oscillator should already be running prior to entering SEC_RUN mode. If the T1OSCEN bit is not set when the SCS1:SCS0 bits are set to ‘01’, entry to SEC_RUN mode will not occur. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, but not yet running, device clocks will be delayed until the oscillator has started. In such situations, initial oscillator operation is far from stable and unpredictable operation may result. FIGURE 3-1: TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO SEC_RUN MODE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 1 T1OSI 2 3 n-1 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 n Clock Transition OSC1 CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter PC FIGURE 3-2: PC + 2 PC + 4 TRANSITION TIMING FROM SEC_RUN MODE TO PRI_RUN MODE (HSPLL) Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 T1OSI OSC1 TOST(1) TPLL(1) 1 PLL Clock Output 2 n-1 n Clock Transition CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter SCS1:SCS0 Bits Changed PC + 2 PC PC + 4 OSTS Bit Set Note 1: TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 43 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 3.2.3 RC_RUN MODE On transitions from RC_RUN mode to PRI_RUN mode, the device continues to be clocked from the INTOSC block while the primary clock is started. When the primary clock becomes ready, a clock switch to the primary clock occurs (see Figure 3-4). When the clock switch is complete, the OSTS bit is set and the primary clock is providing the device clock. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the switch. The INTRC block source will continue to run if either the WDT or the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled. In RC_RUN mode, the CPU and peripherals are clocked from the internal oscillator; the primary clock is shut down. This mode provides the best power conservation of all the Run modes while still executing code. It works well for user applications which are not highly timing sensitive or do not require high-speed clocks at all times. This mode is entered by setting SCS<1:0> to ‘11’. When the clock source is switched to the internal oscillator block (see Figure 3-3), the primary oscillator is shut down and the OSTS bit is cleared. FIGURE 3-3: TRANSITION TIMING TO RC_RUN MODE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 1 INTRC 2 3 n-1 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 n Clock Transition OSC1 CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter PC FIGURE 3-4: PC + 2 PC + 4 TRANSITION TIMING FROM RC_RUN MODE TO PRI_RUN MODE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q1 INTRC OSC1 TOST(1) TPLL(1) 1 PLL Clock Output 2 n-1 n Clock Transition CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter SCS1:SCS0 Bits Changed PC + 2 PC PC + 4 OSTS Bit Set Note 1: TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale. DS39778B-page 44 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 3.3 Sleep Mode 3.4 The power-managed Sleep mode is identical to the legacy Sleep mode offered in all other PIC devices. It is entered by clearing the IDLEN bit (the default state on device Reset) and executing the SLEEP instruction. This shuts down the selected oscillator (Figure 3-5). All clock source status bits are cleared. Idle Modes The Idle modes allow the controller’s CPU to be selectively shut down while the peripherals continue to operate. Selecting a particular Idle mode allows users to further manage power consumption. If the IDLEN bit is set to ‘1’ when a SLEEP instruction is executed, the peripherals will be clocked from the clock source selected using the SCS1:SCS0 bits; however, the CPU will not be clocked. The clock source status bits are not affected. Setting IDLEN and executing a SLEEP instruction provides a quick method of switching from a given Run mode to its corresponding Idle mode. Entering the Sleep mode from any other mode does not require a clock switch. This is because no clocks are needed once the controller has entered Sleep. If the WDT is selected, the INTRC source will continue to operate. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, it will also continue to run. If the WDT is selected, the INTRC source will continue to operate. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, it will also continue to run. When a wake event occurs in Sleep mode (by interrupt, Reset or WDT time-out), the device will not be clocked until the clock source selected by the SCS1:SCS0 bits becomes ready (see Figure 3-6), or it will be clocked from the internal oscillator if either the Two-Speed Start-up or the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor are enabled (see Section 24.0 “Special Features of the CPU”). In either case, the OSTS bit is set when the primary clock is providing the device clocks. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up. Since the CPU is not executing instructions, the only exits from any of the Idle modes are by interrupt, WDT time-out or a Reset. When a wake event occurs, CPU execution is delayed by an interval of TCSD (parameter 38, Table 27-12) while it becomes ready to execute code. When the CPU begins executing code, it resumes with the same clock source for the current Idle mode. For example, when waking from RC_IDLE mode, the internal oscillator block will clock the CPU and peripherals (in other words, RC_RUN mode). The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up. While in any Idle mode or the Sleep mode, a WDT time-out will result in a WDT wake-up to the Run mode currently specified by the SCS1:SCS0 bits. FIGURE 3-5: TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO SLEEP MODE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 OSC1 CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Sleep Program Counter PC + 2 PC FIGURE 3-6: TRANSITION TIMING FOR WAKE FROM SLEEP (HSPLL) Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 OSC1 TOST(1) PLL Clock Output TPLL(1) CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter PC Wake Event PC + 2 PC + 4 PC + 6 OSTS Bit Set Note1: TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 45 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 3.4.1 PRI_IDLE MODE 3.4.2 This mode is unique among the three low-power Idle modes, in that it does not disable the primary device clock. For timing sensitive applications, this allows for the fastest resumption of device operation with its more accurate primary clock source, since the clock source does not have to “warm up” or transition from another oscillator. PRI_IDLE mode is entered from PRI_RUN mode by setting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruction. If the device is in another Run mode, set IDLEN first, then set the SCS bits to ‘10’ and execute SLEEP. Although the CPU is disabled, the peripherals continue to be clocked from the primary clock source specified by the FOSC1:FOSC0 Configuration bits. The OSTS bit remains set (see Figure 3-7). In SEC_IDLE mode, the CPU is disabled but the peripherals continue to be clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. This mode is entered from SEC_RUN by setting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruction. If the device is in another Run mode, set IDLEN first, then set SCS1:SCS0 to ‘01’ and execute SLEEP. When the clock source is switched to the Timer1 oscillator, the primary oscillator is shut down, the OSTS bit is cleared and the T1RUN bit is set. When a wake event occurs, the peripherals continue to be clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. After an interval of TCSD following the wake event, the CPU begins executing code being clocked by the Timer1 oscillator. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up; the Timer1 oscillator continues to run (see Figure 3-8). When a wake event occurs, the CPU is clocked from the primary clock source. A delay of interval TCSD is required between the wake event and when code execution starts. This is required to allow the CPU to become ready to execute instructions. After the wake-up, the OSTS bit remains set. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up (see Figure 3-8). FIGURE 3-7: SEC_IDLE MODE Note: The Timer1 oscillator should already be running prior to entering SEC_IDLE mode. If the T1OSCEN bit is not set when the SLEEP instruction is executed, the SLEEP instruction will be ignored and entry to SEC_IDLE mode will not occur. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, but not yet running, peripheral clocks will be delayed until the oscillator has started. In such situations, initial oscillator operation is far from stable and unpredictable operation may result. TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO IDLE MODE Q1 Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1 OSC1 CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter FIGURE 3-8: PC PC + 2 TRANSITION TIMING FOR WAKE FROM IDLE TO RUN MODE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 OSC1 TCSD CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter PC Wake Event DS39778B-page 46 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 3.4.3 RC_IDLE MODE 3.5.2 In RC_IDLE mode, the CPU is disabled but the peripherals continue to be clocked from the internal oscillator block. This mode allows for controllable power conservation during Idle periods. From RC_RUN, this mode is entered by setting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruction. If the device is in another Run mode, first set IDLEN, then clear the SCS bits and execute SLEEP. When the clock source is switched to the INTOSC block, the primary oscillator is shut down and the OSTS bit is cleared. When a wake event occurs, the peripherals continue to be clocked from the internal oscillator block. After a delay of TCSD following the wake event, the CPU begins executing code being clocked by the INTRC. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up. The INTRC source will continue to run if either the WDT or the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled. 3.5 A WDT time-out will cause different actions depending on which power-managed mode the device is in when the time-out occurs. If the device is not executing code (all Idle modes and Sleep mode), the time-out will result in an exit from the power-managed mode (see Section 3.2 “Run Modes” and Section 3.3 “Sleep Mode”). If the device is executing code (all Run modes), the time-out will result in a WDT Reset (see Section 24.2 “Watchdog Timer (WDT)”). The Watchdog Timer and postscaler are cleared by one of the following events: • Executing a SLEEP or CLRWDT instruction • The loss of a currently selected clock source (if the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled) 3.5.3 EXIT BY RESET Exiting an Idle or Sleep mode by Reset automatically forces the device to run from the INTRC. Exiting Idle and Sleep Modes An exit from Sleep mode, or any of the Idle modes, is triggered by an interrupt, a Reset or a WDT time-out. This section discusses the triggers that cause exits from power-managed modes. The clocking subsystem actions are discussed in each of the power-managed modes sections (see Section 3.2 “Run Modes”, Section 3.3 “Sleep Mode” and Section 3.4 “Idle Modes”). 3.5.1 EXIT BY WDT TIME-OUT EXIT BY INTERRUPT Any of the available interrupt sources can cause the device to exit from an Idle mode, or the Sleep mode, to a Run mode. To enable this functionality, an interrupt source must be enabled by setting its enable bit in one of the INTCON or PIE registers. The exit sequence is initiated when the corresponding interrupt flag bit is set. On all exits from Idle or Sleep modes by interrupt, code execution branches to the interrupt vector if the GIE/GIEH bit (INTCON<7>) is set. Otherwise, code execution continues or resumes without branching (see Section 9.0 “Interrupts”). 3.5.4 EXIT WITHOUT AN OSCILLATOR START-UP DELAY Certain exits from power-managed modes do not invoke the OST at all. There are two cases: • PRI_IDLE mode, where the primary clock source is not stopped; and • The primary clock source is either the EC or ECPLL mode. In these instances, the primary clock source either does not require an oscillator start-up delay, since it is already running (PRI_IDLE), or normally does not require an oscillator start-up delay (EC). However, a fixed delay of interval, TCSD, following the wake event is still required when leaving Sleep and Idle modes to allow the CPU to prepare for execution. Instruction execution resumes on the first clock cycle following this delay. A fixed delay of interval, TCSD, following the wake event is required when leaving Sleep and Idle modes. This delay is required for the CPU to prepare for execution. Instruction execution resumes on the first clock cycle following this delay. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 47 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 48 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 4.0 RESET A simplified block diagram of the on-chip Reset circuit is shown in Figure 4-1. The PIC18F87J11 Family of devices differentiate between various kinds of Reset: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) Power-on Reset (POR) MCLR Reset during normal operation MCLR Reset during power-managed modes Watchdog Timer (WDT) Reset (during execution) Configuration Mismatch (CM) Brown-out Reset (BOR) RESET Instruction Stack Full Reset Stack Underflow Reset RCON Register Device Reset events are tracked through the RCON register (Register 4-1). The lower five bits of the register indicate that a specific Reset event has occurred. In most cases, these bits can only be set by the event and must be cleared by the application after the event. The state of these flag bits, taken together, can be read to indicate the type of Reset that just occurred. This is described in more detail in Section 4.7 “Reset State of Registers”. This section discusses Resets generated by MCLR, POR and BOR and covers the operation of the various start-up timers. Stack Reset events are covered in Section 5.1.6.4 “Stack Full and Underflow Resets”. WDT Resets are covered in Section 24.2 “Watchdog Timer (WDT)”. FIGURE 4-1: 4.1 The RCON register also has a control bit for setting interrupt priority (IPEN). Interrupt priority is discussed in Section 9.0 “Interrupts”. SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF ON-CHIP RESET CIRCUIT RESET Instruction Configuration Word Mismatch Stack Pointer Stack Full/Underflow Reset External Reset MCLR ( )_IDLE Sleep WDT Time-out VDD Rise Detect POR Pulse VDD Brown-out Reset(1) S PWRT 32 μs PWRT INTRC Note 1: 66 ms R 11-Bit Ripple Counter Q Chip_Reset The ENVREG pin must be tied high to enable Brown-out Reset. The Brown-out Reset is provided by the on-chip voltage regulator when there is insufficient source voltage to maintain regulation. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 49 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 4-1: RCON: RESET CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R-1 R-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 IPEN — CM RI TO PD POR BOR bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 IPEN: Interrupt Priority Enable bit 1 = Enable priority levels on interrupts 0 = Disable priority levels on interrupts (PIC16CXXX Compatibility mode) bit 6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 CM: Configuration Mismatch Flag bit 1 = A Configuration Mismatch Reset has not occurred 0 = A Configuration Mismatch Reset has occurred (must be set in software after a Configuration Mismatch Reset occurs) bit 4 RI: RESET Instruction Flag bit 1 = The RESET instruction was not executed (set by firmware only) 0 = The RESET instruction was executed causing a device Reset (must be set in software after a Brown-out Reset occurs) bit 3 TO: Watchdog Time-out Flag bit 1 = Set by power-up, CLRWDT instruction or SLEEP instruction 0 = A WDT time-out occurred bit 2 PD: Power-Down Detection Flag bit 1 = Set by power-up or by the CLRWDT instruction 0 = Set by execution of the SLEEP instruction bit 1 POR: Power-on Reset Status bit 1 = A Power-on Reset has not occurred (set by firmware only) 0 = A Power-on Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Power-on Reset occurs) bit 0 BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit 1 = A Brown-out Reset has not occurred (set by firmware only) 0 = A Brown-out Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Brown-out Reset occurs) Note 1: It is recommended that the POR bit be set after a Power-on Reset has been detected, so that subsequent Power-on Resets may be detected. 2: If the on-chip voltage regulator is disabled, BOR remains ‘0’ at all times. See Section 4.4.1 “Detecting BOR” for more information. 3: Brown-out Reset is said to have occurred when BOR is ‘0’ and POR is ‘1’ (assuming that POR was set to ‘1’ by software immediately after a Power-on Reset). DS39778B-page 50 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 4.2 FIGURE 4-2: Master Clear (MCLR) The MCLR pin provides a method for triggering a hard external Reset of the device. A Reset is generated by holding the pin low. PIC18 extended microcontroller devices have a noise filter in the MCLR Reset path which detects and ignores small pulses. 4.3 D MCLR C When the device starts normal operation (i.e., exits the Reset condition), device operating parameters (voltage, frequency, temperature, etc.) must be met to ensure operation. If these conditions are not met, the device must be held in Reset until the operating conditions are met. Power-on Reset events are captured by the POR bit (RCON<1>). The state of the bit is set to ‘0’ whenever a Power-on Reset occurs; it does not change for any other Reset event. POR is not reset to ‘1’ by any hardware event. To capture multiple events, the user manually resets the bit to ‘1’ in software following any Power-on Reset. Brown-out Reset (BOR) The PIC18F87J11 family of devices incorporates a simple Brown-out Reset function when the internal regulator is enabled (ENVREG pin is tied to VDD). Any drop of VDD below VBOR (parameter D005)) for greater than time TBOR (parameter 35) will reset the device. A Reset may or may not occur if VDD falls below VBOR for less than TBOR. The chip will remain in Brown-out Reset until VDD rises above VBOR. Once a Brown-out Reset has occurred, the Power-up Timer will keep the chip in Reset for TPWRT (parameter 33). If VDD drops below VBOR while the Power-up Timer is running, the chip will go back into a Brown-out Reset and the Power-up Timer will be initialized. Once VDD rises above VBOR, the Power-up Timer will execute the additional time delay. PIC18F87J11 Note 1: External Power-on Reset circuit is required only if the VDD power-up slope is too slow. The diode D helps discharge the capacitor quickly when VDD powers down. 2: R < 40 kΩ is recommended to make sure that the voltage drop across R does not violate the device’s electrical specification. 3: R1 ≥ 1 kΩ will limit any current flowing into MCLR from external capacitor C, in the event of MCLR/VPP pin breakdown, due to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) or Electrical Overstress (EOS). To take advantage of the POR circuitry, tie the MCLR pin through a resistor (1 kΩ to 10 kΩ) to VDD. This will eliminate external RC components usually needed to create a Power-on Reset delay. A minimum rise rate for VDD is specified (parameter D004). For a slow rise time, see Figure 4-2. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. R R1 Power-on Reset (POR) A Power-on Reset condition is generated on-chip whenever VDD rises above a certain threshold. This allows the device to start in the initialized state when VDD is adequate for operation. 4.4 VDD VDD The MCLR pin is not driven low by any internal Resets, including the WDT. EXTERNAL POWER-ON RESET CIRCUIT (FOR SLOW VDD POWER-UP) 4.4.1 DETECTING BOR The BOR bit always resets to ‘0’ on any Brown-out Reset or Power-on Reset event. This makes it difficult to determine if a Brown-out Reset event has occurred just by reading the state of BOR alone. A more reliable method is to simultaneously check the state of both POR and BOR. This assumes that the POR bit is reset to ‘1’ in software immediately after any Power-on Reset event. If BOR is ‘0’ while POR is ‘1’, it can be reliably assumed that a Brown-out Reset event has occurred. If the voltage regulator is disabled, Brown-out Reset functionality is disabled. In this case, the BOR bit cannot be used to determine a Brown-out Reset event. The BOR bit is still cleared by a Power-on Reset event. 4.5 Configuration Mismatch (CM) The Configuration Mismatch (CM) Reset is designed to detect and attempt to recover from random, memory corrupting events. These include Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) events, which can cause widespread, single-bit changes throughout the device and result in catastrophic failure. In PIC18FXXJ Flash devices, the device Configuration registers (located in the configuration memory space) are continuously monitored during operation by comparing their values to complimentary shadow registers. If a mismatch is detected between the two sets of registers, a CM Reset automatically occurs. These events are captured by the CM bit (RCON<5>). The state of the bit is set to ‘0’ whenever a CM event occurs; it does not change for any other Reset event. Preliminary DS39778B-page 51 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY A CM Reset behaves similarly to a Master Clear Reset, RESET instruction, WDT time-out or Stack Event Resets. As with all hard and power Reset events, the device Configuration Words are reloaded from the Flash Configuration Words in program memory as the device restarts. 4.6 Power-up Timer (PWRT) PIC18F87J11 Family devices incorporate an on-chip Power-up Timer (PWRT) to help regulate the Power-on Reset process. The PWRT is always enabled. The main function is to ensure that the device voltage is stable before code is executed. The Power-up Timer (PWRT) of the PIC18F87J11 Family devices is an 11-bit counter which uses the INTRC source as the clock input. This yields an approximate time interval of 2048 x 32 μs = 66 ms. While the PWRT is counting, the device is held in Reset. FIGURE 4-3: The power-up time delay depends on the INTRC clock and will vary from chip-to-chip due to temperature and process variation. See DC parameter 33 for details. 4.6.1 TIME-OUT SEQUENCE If enabled, the PWRT time-out is invoked after the POR pulse has cleared. The total time-out will vary based on the status of the PWRT. Figure 4-3, Figure 4-4, Figure 4-5 and Figure 4-6 all depict time-out sequences on power-up with the Power-up Timer enabled. Since the time-outs occur from the POR pulse, if MCLR is kept low long enough, the PWRT will expire. Bringing MCLR high will begin execution immediately (Figure 4-5). This is useful for testing purposes, or to synchronize more than one PIC18FXXXX device operating in parallel. TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR TIED TO VDD, VDD RISE < TPWRT) VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR TPWRT PWRT TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 1 FIGURE 4-4: VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR TPWRT PWRT TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET DS39778B-page 52 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 4-5: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 2 VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR TPWRT PWRT TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET FIGURE 4-6: SLOW RISE TIME (MCLR TIED TO VDD, VDD RISE > TPWRT) 3.3V VDD 0V 1V MCLR INTERNAL POR TPWRT PWRT TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 53 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 4.7 Reset State of Registers different Reset situations, as indicated in Table 4-1. These bits are used in software to determine the nature of the Reset. Most registers are unaffected by a Reset. Their status is unknown on POR and unchanged by all other Resets. The other registers are forced to a “Reset state” depending on the type of Reset that occurred. Table 4-2 describes the Reset states for all of the Special Function Registers. These are categorized by Power-on and Brown-out Resets, Master Clear and WDT Resets and WDT wake-ups. Most registers are not affected by a WDT wake-up, since this is viewed as the resumption of normal operation. Status bits from the RCON register (CM, RI, TO, PD, POR and BOR) are set or cleared differently in TABLE 4-1: STATUS BITS, THEIR SIGNIFICANCE AND THE INITIALIZATION CONDITION FOR RCON REGISTER RCON Register STKPTR Register Program Counter(1) CM RI TO PD POR BOR STKFUL STKUNF Power-on Reset 0000h 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 RESET instruction 0000h u 0 u u u u u u Brown-out Reset 0000h 1 1 1 1 u 0 u u Configuration Mismatch Reset 0000h 0 u u u u u u u MCLR Reset during power-managed Run modes 0000h u u 1 u u u u u MCLR Reset during power-managed Idle modes and Sleep mode 0000h u u 1 0 u u u u MCLR Reset during full-power execution 0000h u u u u u u u u Stack Full Reset (STVREN = 1) 0000h u u u u u u 1 u Stack Underflow Reset (STVREN = 1) 0000h u u u u u u u 1 Stack Underflow Error (not an actual Reset, STVREN = 0) 0000h u u u u u u u 1 WDT time-out during full-power or power-managed Run modes 0000h u u 0 u u u u u WDT time-out during power-managed Idle or Sleep modes PC + 2 u u 0 0 u u u u Interrupt exit from power-managed modes PC + 2 u u u 0 u u u u Condition Legend: u = unchanged Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEH or GIEL bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). DS39778B-page 54 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 4-2: INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset MCLR Resets, WDT Reset, RESET Instruction, Stack Resets, CM Resets TOSU PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 uuuu(1) TOSH PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu(1) TOSL PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu(1) STKPTR PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 00-0 0000 uu-0 0000 uu-u uuuu(1) PCLATU PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu PCLATH PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PCL PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 PC + 2(2) TBLPTRU PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu TBLPTRH PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TBLPTRL PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TABLAT PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PRODH PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PRODL PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu INTCON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 000x 0000 000u uuuu uuuu(3) INTCON2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu(3) INTCON3 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1100 0000 1100 0000 uuuu uuuu(3) INDF0 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X N/A N/A N/A Register Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt POSTINC0 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X N/A N/A N/A POSTDEC0 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X N/A N/A N/A PREINC0 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X N/A N/A N/A PLUSW0 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X N/A N/A N/A FSR0H PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X ---- xxxx ---- uuuu ---- uuuu FSR0L PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu WREG PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu INDF1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X N/A N/A N/A POSTINC1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X N/A N/A N/A POSTDEC1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X N/A N/A N/A PREINC1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X N/A N/A N/A PLUSW1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X N/A N/A N/A FSR1H PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X ---- xxxx ---- uuuu ---- uuuu FSR1L PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu BSR PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 4-1 for Reset value for specific condition. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 55 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 4-2: INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset MCLR Resets, WDT Reset, RESET Instruction, Stack Resets, CM Resets INDF2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X N/A N/A N/A POSTINC2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X N/A N/A N/A POSTDEC2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X N/A N/A N/A PREINC2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X N/A N/A N/A PLUSW2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X N/A N/A N/A FSR2H PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X ---- xxxx ---- uuuu ---- uuuu FSR2L PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu STATUS PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X ---x xxxx ---u uuuu ---u uuuu TMR0H PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TMR0L PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu T0CON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu OSCCON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0110 q100 0110 q100 0110 q10u REFOCON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0-00 0000 u-uu uuuu u-uu uuuu CM1CON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0001 1111 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CM2CON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0001 1111 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu RCON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0-11 1100 0-qq qquu u-qq qquu TMR1H PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ODCON1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X ---0 0000 ---u uuuu ---u uuuu TMR1L PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ODCON2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X ---- --00 ---- --uu ---- --uu T1CON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 u0uu uuuu uuuu uuuu ODCON3 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X ---- --00 ---- --uu ---- --uu TMR2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PADCFG1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X ---- ---0 ---- ---u ---- ---u PR2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 MEMCON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0-00 --00 0-00 --00 u-uu --uu T2CON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X -000 0000 -000 0000 -uuu uuuu SSP1BUF PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu SSP1ADD PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSP1MSK PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu SSP1STAT PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSP1CON1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSP1CON2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu Register (4) Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 4-1 for Reset value for specific condition. DS39778B-page 56 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 4-2: INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset MCLR Resets, WDT Reset, RESET Instruction, Stack Resets, CM Resets ADRESH PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ADRESL PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ADCON0 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ADCON1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ANCON0 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 00-0 0000 uu-u uuuu uu-u uuuu ANCON1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu WDTCON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0x-0 ---0 0x-u ---0 ux-u ---u ECCP1AS PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ECCP1DEL PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu CCPR1H PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPR1L PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP1CON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ECCP2AS PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ECCP2DEL PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu CCPR2H PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPR2L PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP2CON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ECCP3AS PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ECCP3DEL PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu CCPR3H PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPR3L PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP3CON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SPBRG1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu RCREG1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TXREG1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu TXSTA1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0010 0000 0010 uuuu uuuu RCSTA1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 000x 0000 000x uuuu uuuu SPBRG2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu RCREG2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TXREG2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TXSTA2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0010 0000 0010 uuuu uuuu EECON2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- EECON1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X --00 x00- --00 u00- --00 u00- Register Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 4-1 for Reset value for specific condition. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 57 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 4-2: INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset MCLR Resets, WDT Reset, RESET Instruction, Stack Resets, CM Resets IPR3 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu PIR3 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu(3) PIE3 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu IPR2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 111- 1111 111- 1111 uuu- uuuu PIR2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 000- 0000 000- 0000 uuu- uuuu(3) PIE2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 000- 0000 000- 0000 uuu- uuuu IPR1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu PIR1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu(3) PIE1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu RCSTA2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 000x 0000 000x uuuu uuuu OSCTUNE PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TRISJ PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu TRISH PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu TRISG PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu TRISF PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1111 111- 1111 111- uuuu uuu- TRISE PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu TRISD PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu TRISC PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu TRISB PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu TRISA PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu LATJ PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu LATH PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu LATG PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X ---x xxxx ---u uuuu ---u uuuu LATF PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxx- uuuu uuu- uuuu uuu- LATE PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu LATD PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu LATC PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu LATB PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu LATA PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu Register Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 4-1 for Reset value for specific condition. DS39778B-page 58 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 4-2: INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset MCLR Resets, WDT Reset, RESET Instruction, Stack Resets, CM Resets PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu PORTH PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PORTG PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 000x xxxx 000u uuuu uuuu uuuu PORTF PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X x001 100- xuuu uuu- xuuu uuu- PORTE PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PORTD PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PORTC PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PORTB PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PORTA PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 000x 0000 000u 0000 uuuu uuuu SPBRGH1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu BAUDCON1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0100 0-00 0100 0-00 uuuu u-uu SPBRGH2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu BAUDCON2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0100 0-00 0100 0-00 uuuu u-uu TMR3H PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu TMR3L PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu T3CON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu TMR4 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PR4 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 CVRCON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu T4CON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X -000 0000 -000 0000 -uuu uuuu CCPR4H PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPR4L PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP4CON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu CCPR5H PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPR5L PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP5CON PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu SSP2BUF PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu SSP2ADD PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSP2MSK PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSP2STAT PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSP2CON1 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSP2CON2 PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu CMSTAT PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X ---- --11 ---- --11 ---- --uu Register PORTJ Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt uuuu uuuu Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 4-1 for Reset value for specific condition. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 59 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 4-2: INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset MCLR Resets, WDT Reset, RESET Instruction, Stack Resets, CM Resets PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDOUT1H PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMADDRL PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDOUT1L PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDIN1H PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDIN1L PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMCONH PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0-00 0000 0-00 0000 u-uu uuuu PMCONL PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMMODEH PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMMODEL PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDOUT2H PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDOUT2L PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDIN2H PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDIN2L PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMEH PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMEL PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMSTATH PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 00-- 0000 00-- 0000 uu-- uuuu PMSTATL PIC18F6XJ1X PIC18F8XJ1X 10-- 1111 10-- 1111 uu-- uuuu Register PMADDRH Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 4-1 for Reset value for specific condition. DS39778B-page 60 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.0 MEMORY ORGANIZATION 5.1 There are two types of memory in PIC18 Flash microcontroller devices: • Program Memory • Data RAM As Harvard architecture devices, the data and program memories use separate busses; this allows for concurrent access of the two memory spaces. Additional detailed information on the operation of the Flash program memory is provided in Section 6.0 “Flash Program Memory”. FIGURE 5-1: Program Memory Organization PIC18 microcontrollers implement a 21-bit program counter which is capable of addressing a 2-Mbyte program memory space. Accessing a location between the upper boundary of the physically implemented memory and the 2-Mbyte address will return all ‘0’s (a NOP instruction). The entire PIC18F87J11 Family of devices offers three different on-chip Flash program memory sizes, from 64 Kbytes (up to 16,384 single-word instructions) to 128 Kbytes (65,536 single-word instructions). The program memory maps for individual family members are shown in Figure 5-3. MEMORY MAPS FOR PIC18F87J11 FAMILY DEVICES PC<20:0> CALL, CALLW, RCALL, RETURN, RETFIE, RETLW, ADDULNK, SUBULNK 21 Stack Level 1 ••• Stack Level 31 PIC18FX6J11 PIC18FX6J16 PIC18FX7J11 On-Chip Memory On-Chip Memory On-Chip Memory Config. Words 000000h 00FFFFh Config. Words Config. Words Unimplemented Unimplemented Unimplemented Read as ‘0’ Read as ‘0’ Read as ‘0’ 01FFFFh User Memory Space 017FFFh 1FFFFFF Note: Sizes of memory areas are not to scale. Sizes of program memory areas are enhanced to show detail. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 61 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.1.1 5.1.2 HARD MEMORY VECTORS FLASH CONFIGURATION WORDS All PIC18 devices have a total of three hard-coded return vectors in their program memory space. The Reset vector address is the default value to which the program counter returns on all device Resets; it is located at 0000h. Because PIC18F87J11 Family devices do not have persistent configuration memory, the top four words of on-chip program memory are reserved for configuration information. On Reset, the configuration information is copied into the Configuration registers. PIC18 devices also have two interrupt vector addresses for the handling of high-priority and low-priority interrupts. The high-priority interrupt vector is located at 0008h and the low-priority interrupt vector is at 0018h. Their locations in relation to the program memory map are shown in Figure 5-2. The Configuration Words are stored in their program memory location in numerical order, starting with the lower byte of CONFIG1 at the lowest address and ending with the upper byte of CONFIG4. For these devices, only Configuration Words, CONFIG1 through CONFIG3, are used; CONFIG4 is reserved. The actual addresses of the Flash Configuration Word for devices in the PIC18F87J11 Family are shown in Table 5-1. Their location in the memory map is shown with the other memory vectors in Figure 5-2. FIGURE 5-2: HARD VECTOR AND CONFIGURATION WORD LOCATIONS FOR PIC18F87J11 FAMILY DEVICES Reset Vector 0000h High-Priority Interrupt Vector 0008h Low-Priority Interrupt Vector 0018h Additional details on the device Configuration Words are provided in Section 24.1 “Configuration Bits”. TABLE 5-1: Device PIC18F66J11 On-Chip Program Memory PIC18F86J11 PIC18F66J16 PIC18F86J16 PIC18F67J11 PIC18F87J11 Flash Configuration Words FLASH CONFIGURATION WORD FOR PIC18F87J11 FAMILY DEVICES Program Memory (Kbytes) Configuration Word Addresses 64 FFF8h to FFFFh 96 17FF8h to 17FFFh 128 1FFF8h to 1FFFFh (Top of Memory-7) (Top of Memory) Read as ‘0’ 1FFFFFh Legend: (Top of Memory) represents upper boundary of on-chip program memory space (see Figure 5-1 for device-specific values). Shaded area represents unimplemented memory. Areas are not shown to scale. DS39778B-page 62 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.1.3 PIC18F8XJ11/8XJ16 PROGRAM MEMORY MODES The 80-pin devices in this family can address up to a total of 2 Mbytes of program memory. This is achieved through the external memory bus. There are two distinct operating modes available to the controllers: • Microcontroller (MC) • Extended Microcontroller (EMC) The program memory mode is determined by setting the EMB Configuration bits (CONFIG3L<5:4>), as shown in Register 5-1. (See also Section 24.1 “Configuration Bits” for additional details on the device Configuration bits.) The program memory modes operate as follows: • The Microcontroller Mode accesses only on-chip Flash memory. Attempts to read above the top of on-chip memory causes a read of all ‘0’s (a NOP instruction). • The Extended Microcontroller Mode allows access to both internal and external program memories as a single block. The device can access its entire on-chip program memory; above this, the device accesses external program memory up to the 2-Mbyte program space limit. Execution automatically switches between the two memories as required. The setting of the EMB Configuration bits also controls the address bus width of the external memory bus. This is covered in more detail in Section 7.0 “External Memory Bus”. In all modes, the microcontroller has complete access to data RAM. Figure 5-3 compares the memory maps of the different program memory modes. The differences between on-chip and external memory access limitations are more fully explained in Table 5-2. The Microcontroller mode is also the only operating mode available to 64-pin devices. REGISTER 5-1: CONFIG3L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 3 LOW R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 WAIT(1) BW(1) EMB1(1) EMB0(1) EASHFT(1) — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: WO = Write-Once bit R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 WAIT: External Bus Wait Enable bit(1) 1 = Wait states on the external bus are disabled 0 = Wait states on the external bus are enabled and selected by MEMCON<5:4> bit 6 BW: Data Bus Width Select bit(1) 1 = 16-Bit Data Width modes 0 = 8-Bit Data Width modes bit 5-4 EMB1:EMB0: External Memory Bus Configuration bits(1) 11 = Microcontroller mode, external bus disabled 10 = Extended Microcontroller mode, 12-bit address width for external bus 01 = Extended Microcontroller mode, 16-bit address width for external bus 00 = Extended Microcontroller mode, 20-bit address width for external bus bit 3 EASHFT: External Address Bus Shift Enable bit(1) 1 = Address shifting enabled – external address bus is shifted to start at 000000h 0 = Address shifting disabled – external address bus reflects the PC value bit 2-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Note 1: Implemented only on 80-pin devices. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 63 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.1.4 EXTENDED MICROCONTROLLER MODE AND ADDRESS SHIFTING To avoid this, the Extended Microcontroller mode implements an address shifting option to enable automatic address translation. In this mode, addresses presented on the external bus are shifted down by the size of the on-chip program memory and are remapped to start at 0000h. This allows the complete use of the external memory device’s memory space as an extension of the device’s on-chip program memory. By default, devices in Extended Microcontroller mode directly present the program counter value on the external address bus for those addresses in the range of the external memory space. In practical terms, this means addresses in the external memory device below the top of on-chip memory are unavailable. FIGURE 5-3: MEMORY MAPS FOR PIC18F87J11 FAMILY PROGRAM MEMORY MODES Microcontroller Mode(1) On-Chip Memory Space Extended Microcontroller Mode(2) External Memory Space On-Chip Memory Space No Access Note 1: 2: 3: On-Chip Program Memory (Top of Memory) (Top of Memory) + 1 External Memory (Top of Memory) (Top of Memory) + 1(3) External Memory Mapped to External Memory 1FFFFFh – Space (Top of Memory) Mapped to External Memory Space 1FFFFFh 1FFFFFh Legend: On-Chip Memory Space 000000h On-Chip Program Memory (Top of Memory) (Top of Memory) + 1 Reads as ‘0’s External Memory Space 000000h 000000h On-Chip Program Memory Extended Microcontroller Mode with Address Shifting(2) 1FFFFFh (Top of Memory) represents upper boundary of on-chip program memory space (see Figure 5-1 for device-specific values). Shaded areas represent unimplemented, or inaccessible areas, depending on the mode. This mode is the only available mode on 64-pin devices and the default on 80-pin devices. These modes are only available on 80-pin devices. Addresses starting at the top of the program memory are translated to start at 0000h of the external device whenever the EASHFT Configuration bit is set. TABLE 5-2: MEMORY ACCESS FOR PIC18F8X11/8616 PROGRAM MEMORY MODES Internal Program Memory Operating Mode External Program Memory Execution From Table Read From Table Write To Execution From Table Read From Table Write To Microcontroller Yes Yes Yes No Access No Access No Access Extended Microcontroller Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes DS39778B-page 64 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.1.5 PROGRAM COUNTER The Program Counter (PC) specifies the address of the instruction to fetch for execution. The PC is 21 bits wide and is contained in three separate 8-bit registers. The low byte, known as the PCL register, is both readable and writable. The high byte, or PCH register, contains the PC<15:8> bits; it is not directly readable or writable. Updates to the PCH register are performed through the PCLATH register. The upper byte is called PCU. This register contains the PC<20:16> bits; it is also not directly readable or writable. Updates to the PCU register are performed through the PCLATU register. The contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are transferred to the program counter by any operation that writes PCL. Similarly, the upper two bytes of the program counter are transferred to PCLATH and PCLATU by an operation that reads PCL. This is useful for computed offsets to the PC (see Section 5.1.8.1 “Computed GOTO”). The PC addresses bytes in the program memory. To prevent the PC from becoming misaligned with word instructions, the Least Significant bit of PCL is fixed to a value of ‘0’. The PC increments by 2 to address sequential instructions in the program memory. The CALL, RCALL, GOTO and program branch instructions write to the program counter directly. For these instructions, the contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are not transferred to the program counter. 5.1.6 RETURN ADDRESS STACK The return address stack allows any combination of up to 31 program calls and interrupts to occur. The PC is pushed onto the stack when a CALL or RCALL instruction is executed, or an interrupt is Acknowledged. The PC value is pulled off the stack on a RETURN, RETLW or a RETFIE instruction (and on ADDULNK and SUBULNK instructions if the extended instruction set is enabled). PCLATU and PCLATH are not affected by any of the RETURN or CALL instructions. FIGURE 5-4: The stack operates as a 31-word by 21-bit RAM and a 5-bit Stack Pointer, STKPTR. The stack space is not part of either program or data space. The Stack Pointer is readable and writable and the address on the top of the stack is readable and writable through the Top-of-Stack Special Function Registers. Data can also be pushed to, or popped from the stack, using these registers. A CALL type instruction causes a push onto the stack. The Stack Pointer is first incremented and the location pointed to by the Stack Pointer is written with the contents of the PC (already pointing to the instruction following the CALL). A RETURN type instruction causes a pop from the stack. The contents of the location pointed to by the STKPTR are transferred to the PC and then the Stack Pointer is decremented. The Stack Pointer is initialized to ‘00000’ after all Resets. There is no RAM associated with the location corresponding to a Stack Pointer value of ‘00000’; this is only a Reset value. Status bits indicate if the stack is full, has overflowed or has underflowed. 5.1.6.1 Top-of-Stack Access Only the top of the return address stack (TOS) is readable and writable. A set of three registers, TOSU:TOSH:TOSL, hold the contents of the stack location pointed to by the STKPTR register (Figure 5-4). This allows users to implement a software stack if necessary. After a CALL, RCALL or interrupt (and ADDULNK and SUBULNK instructions if the extended instruction set is enabled), the software can read the pushed value by reading the TOSU:TOSH:TOSL registers. These values can be placed on a user-defined software stack. At return time, the software can return these values to TOSU:TOSH:TOSL and do a return. The user must disable the global interrupt enable bits while accessing the stack to prevent inadvertent stack corruption. RETURN ADDRESS STACK AND ASSOCIATED REGISTERS Return Address Stack <20:0> Stack Pointer Top-of-Stack Registers TOSU 00h TOSH 1Ah 11111 11110 11101 TOSL 34h Top-of-Stack © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 001A34h 000D58h STKPTR<4:0> 00010 00011 00010 00001 00000 Preliminary DS39778B-page 65 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.1.6.2 Return Stack Pointer (STKPTR) The STKPTR register (Register 5-2) contains the Stack Pointer value, the STKFUL (Stack Full) status bit and the STKUNF (Stack Underflow) status bits. The value of the Stack Pointer can be 0 through 31. The Stack Pointer increments before values are pushed onto the stack and decrements after values are popped off the stack. On Reset, the Stack Pointer value will be zero. The user may read and write the Stack Pointer value. This feature can be used by a Real-Time Operating System (RTOS) for return stack maintenance. After the PC is pushed onto the stack 31 times (without popping any values off the stack), the STKFUL bit is set. The STKFUL bit is cleared by software or by a POR. The action that takes place when the stack becomes full depends on the state of the STVREN (Stack Overflow Reset Enable) Configuration bit. (Refer to Section 24.1 “Configuration Bits” for a description of the device Configuration bits.) If STVREN is set (default), the 31st push will push the (PC + 2) value onto the stack, set the STKFUL bit and reset the device. The STKFUL bit will remain set and the Stack Pointer will be set to zero. If STVREN is cleared, the STKFUL bit will be set on the 31st push and the Stack Pointer will increment to 31. Any additional pushes will not overwrite the 31st push and the STKPTR will remain at 31. REGISTER 5-2: When the stack has been popped enough times to unload the stack, the next pop will return a value of zero to the PC and set the STKUNF bit, while the Stack Pointer remains at zero. The STKUNF bit will remain set until cleared by software or until a POR occurs. Note: 5.1.6.3 Returning a value of zero to the PC on an underflow has the effect of vectoring the program to the Reset vector, where the stack conditions can be verified and appropriate actions can be taken. This is not the same as a Reset, as the contents of the SFRs are not affected. PUSH and POP Instructions Since the Top-of-Stack is readable and writable, the ability to push values onto the stack and pull values off the stack, without disturbing normal program execution, is a desirable feature. The PIC18 instruction set includes two instructions, PUSH and POP, that permit the TOS to be manipulated under software control. TOSU, TOSH and TOSL can be modified to place data or a return address on the stack. The PUSH instruction places the current PC value onto the stack. This increments the Stack Pointer and loads the current PC value onto the stack. The POP instruction discards the current TOS by decrementing the Stack Pointer. The previous value pushed onto the stack then becomes the TOS value. STKPTR: STACK POINTER REGISTER R/C-0 R/C-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 STKFUL(1) STKUNF(1) — SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: C = Clearable-only bit R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 STKFUL: Stack Full Flag bit(1) 1 = Stack became full or overflowed 0 = Stack has not become full or overflowed bit 6 STKUNF: Stack Underflow Flag bit(1) 1 = Stack underflow occurred 0 = Stack underflow did not occur bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 SP4:SP0: Stack Pointer Location bits Note 1: x = Bit is unknown Bit 7 and bit 6 are cleared by user software or by a POR. DS39778B-page 66 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.1.6.4 Stack Full and Underflow Resets 5.1.8 Device Resets on stack overflow and stack underflow conditions are enabled by setting the STVREN bit in Configuration Register 1L. When STVREN is set, a full or underflow condition will set the appropriate STKFUL or STKUNF bit and then cause a device Reset. When STVREN is cleared, a full or underflow condition will set the appropriate STKFUL or STKUNF bit, but not cause a device Reset. The STKFUL or STKUNF bits are cleared by the user software or a Power-on Reset. 5.1.7 FAST REGISTER STACK A Fast Register Stack is provided for the STATUS, WREG and BSR registers to provide a “fast return” option for interrupts. This stack is only one level deep and is neither readable nor writable. It is loaded with the current value of the corresponding register when the processor vectors for an interrupt. All interrupt sources will push values into the Stack registers. The values in the registers are then loaded back into the working registers if the RETFIE, FAST instruction is used to return from the interrupt. LOOK-UP TABLES IN PROGRAM MEMORY There may be programming situations that require the creation of data structures, or look-up tables, in program memory. For PIC18 devices, look-up tables can be implemented in two ways: • Computed GOTO • Table Reads 5.1.8.1 Computed GOTO A computed GOTO is accomplished by adding an offset to the program counter. An example is shown in Example 5-2. A look-up table can be formed with an ADDWF PCL instruction and a group of RETLW nn instructions. The W register is loaded with an offset into the table before executing a call to that table. The first instruction of the called routine is the ADDWF PCL instruction. The next instruction executed will be one of the RETLW nn instructions that returns the value ‘nn’ to the calling function. If both low and high-priority interrupts are enabled, the Stack registers cannot be used reliably to return from low-priority interrupts. If a high-priority interrupt occurs while servicing a low-priority interrupt, the Stack register values stored by the low-priority interrupt will be overwritten. In these cases, users must save the key registers in software during a low-priority interrupt. The offset value (in WREG) specifies the number of bytes that the program counter should advance and should be multiples of 2 (LSb = 0). If interrupt priority is not used, all interrupts may use the Fast Register Stack for returns from interrupt. If no interrupts are used, the Fast Register Stack can be used to restore the STATUS, WREG and BSR registers at the end of a subroutine call. To use the Fast Register Stack for a subroutine call, a CALL label, FAST instruction must be executed to save the STATUS, WREG and BSR registers to the Fast Register Stack. A RETURN, FAST instruction is then executed to restore these registers from the Fast Register Stack. EXAMPLE 5-2: Example 5-1 shows a source code example that uses the Fast Register Stack during a subroutine call and return. EXAMPLE 5-1: CALL SUB1, FAST FAST REGISTER STACK CODE EXAMPLE ;STATUS, WREG, BSR ;SAVED IN FAST REGISTER ;STACK • • • • RETURN FAST SUB1 ;RESTORE VALUES SAVED ;IN FAST REGISTER STACK © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. In this method, only one data byte may be stored in each instruction location and room on the return address stack is required. ORG TABLE 5.1.8.2 MOVF CALL nn00h ADDWF RETLW RETLW RETLW . . . COMPUTED GOTO USING AN OFFSET VALUE OFFSET, W TABLE PCL nnh nnh nnh Table Reads A better method of storing data in program memory allows two bytes of data to be stored in each instruction location. Look-up table data may be stored two bytes per program word while programming. The Table Pointer (TBLPTR) specifies the byte address and the Table Latch (TABLAT) contains the data that is read from the program memory. Data is transferred from program memory one byte at a time. Table read operation is discussed further Section 6.1 “Table Reads and Table Writes”. Preliminary in DS39778B-page 67 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.2 5.2.2 PIC18 Instruction Cycle 5.2.1 An “Instruction Cycle” consists of four Q cycles, Q1 through Q4. The instruction fetch and execute are pipelined in such a manner that a fetch takes one instruction cycle, while the decode and execute takes another instruction cycle. However, due to the pipelining, each instruction effectively executes in one cycle. If an instruction causes the program counter to change (e.g., GOTO), then two cycles are required to complete the instruction (Example 5-3). CLOCKING SCHEME The microcontroller clock input, whether from an internal or external source, is internally divided by four to generate four non-overlapping quadrature clocks (Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4). Internally, the program counter is incremented on every Q1; the instruction is fetched from the program memory and latched into the Instruction Register (IR) during Q4. The instruction is decoded and executed during the following Q1 through Q4. The clocks and instruction execution flow are shown in Figure 5-5. FIGURE 5-5: INSTRUCTION FLOW/PIPELINING A fetch cycle begins with the Program Counter (PC) incrementing in Q1. In the execution cycle, the fetched instruction is latched into the Instruction Register (IR) in cycle Q1. This instruction is then decoded and executed during the Q2, Q3 and Q4 cycles. Data memory is read during Q2 (operand read) and written during Q4 (destination write). CLOCK/INSTRUCTION CYCLE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 OSC1 Q1 Q2 Internal Phase Clock Q3 Q4 PC PC PC + 2 PC + 4 OSC2/CLKO (RC mode) Execute INST (PC – 2) Fetch INST (PC) EXAMPLE 5-3: 1. MOVLW 55h Execute INST (PC + 2) Fetch INST (PC + 4) INSTRUCTION PIPELINE FLOW TCY0 TCY1 Fetch 1 Execute 1 2. MOVWF PORTB 3. BRA SUB_1 4. BSF Execute INST (PC) Fetch INST (PC + 2) Fetch 2 TCY2 TCY3 TCY4 TCY5 Execute 2 Fetch 3 Execute 3 Fetch 4 PORTA, BIT3 (Forced NOP) Flush (NOP) Fetch SUB_1 Execute SUB_1 5. Instruction @ address SUB_1 All instructions are single cycle, except for any program branches. These take two cycles since the fetch instruction is “flushed” from the pipeline while the new instruction is being fetched and then executed. DS39778B-page 68 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.2.3 INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM MEMORY The program memory is addressed in bytes. Instructions are stored as two bytes or four bytes in program memory. The Least Significant Byte of an instruction word is always stored in a program memory location with an even address (LSB = 0). To maintain alignment with instruction boundaries, the PC increments in steps of 2 and the LSB will always read ‘0’ (see Section 5.1.5 “Program Counter”). Figure 5-6 shows an example of how instruction words are stored in the program memory. FIGURE 5-6: The CALL and GOTO instructions have the absolute program memory address embedded into the instruction. Since instructions are always stored on word boundaries, the data contained in the instruction is a word address. The word address is written to PC<20:1> which accesses the desired byte address in program memory. Instruction #2 in Figure 5-6 shows how the instruction, GOTO 0006h, is encoded in the program memory. Program branch instructions, which encode a relative address offset, operate in the same manner. The offset value stored in a branch instruction represents the number of single-word instructions that the PC will be offset by. Section 25.0 “Instruction Set Summary” provides further details of the instruction set. INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM MEMORY LSB = 1 LSB = 0 0Fh EFh F0h C1h F4h 55h 03h 00h 23h 56h Program Memory Byte Locations → 5.2.4 Instruction 1: Instruction 2: MOVLW GOTO 055h 0006h Instruction 3: MOVFF 123h, 456h TWO-WORD INSTRUCTIONS The standard PIC18 instruction set has four two-word instructions: CALL, MOVFF, GOTO and LSFR. In all cases, the second word of the instructions always has ‘1111’ as its four Most Significant bits; the other 12 bits are literal data, usually a data memory address. The use of ‘1111’ in the 4 MSbs of an instruction specifies a special form of NOP. If the instruction is executed in proper sequence – immediately after the first word – the data in the second word is accessed EXAMPLE 5-4: Word Address ↓ 000000h 000002h 000004h 000006h 000008h 00000Ah 00000Ch 00000Eh 000010h 000012h 000014h and used by the instruction sequence. If the first word is skipped for some reason and the second word is executed by itself, a NOP is executed instead. This is necessary for cases when the two-word instruction is preceded by a conditional instruction that changes the PC. Example 5-4 shows how this works. Note: See Section 5.5 “Program Memory and the Extended Instruction Set” for information on two-word instructions in the extended instruction set. TWO-WORD INSTRUCTIONS CASE 1: Object Code Source Code 0110 0110 0000 0000 TSTFSZ REG1 ; is RAM location 0? 1100 0001 0010 0011 MOVFF REG1, REG2 ; No, skip this word ADDWF REG3 ; continue code 1111 0100 0101 0110 0010 0100 0000 0000 ; Execute this word as a NOP CASE 2: Object Code Source Code 0110 0110 0000 0000 TSTFSZ REG1 ; is RAM location 0? 1100 0001 0010 0011 MOVFF REG1, REG2 ; Yes, execute this word ADDWF REG3 1111 0100 0101 0110 0010 0100 0000 0000 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. ; 2nd word of instruction ; continue code Preliminary DS39778B-page 69 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.3 Note: Data Memory Organization The operation of some aspects of data memory are changed when the PIC18 extended instruction set is enabled. See Section 5.6 “Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set” for more information. The data memory in PIC18 devices is implemented as static RAM. Each register in the data memory has a 12-bit address, allowing up to 4096 bytes of data memory. The memory space is divided into as many as 16 banks that contain 256 bytes each. The PIC18F87J11 family implements all available banks and provide 3936 bytes of data memory available to the user. Figure 5-7 shows the data memory organization for the devices. The data memory contains Special Function Registers (SFRs) and General Purpose Registers (GPRs). The SFRs are used for control and status of the controller and peripheral functions, while GPRs are used for data storage and scratchpad operations in the user’s application. Any read of an unimplemented location will read as ‘0’s. The instruction set and architecture allow operations across all banks. The entire data memory may be accessed by Direct, Indirect or Indexed Addressing modes. Addressing modes are discussed later in this section. To ensure that commonly used registers (select SFRs and select GPRs) can be accessed in a single cycle, PIC18 devices implement an Access Bank. This is a 256-byte memory space that provides fast access to select SFRs and the lower portion of GPR Bank 0 without using the BSR. Section 5.3.2 “Access Bank” provides a detailed description of the Access RAM. 5.3.1 Most instructions in the PIC18 instruction set make use of the Bank Pointer, known as the Bank Select Register (BSR). This SFR holds the 4 Most Significant bits of a location’s address; the instruction itself includes the 8 Least Significant bits. Only the four lower bits of the BSR are implemented (BSR3:BSR0). The upper four bits are unused; they will always read ‘0’ and cannot be written to. The BSR can be loaded directly by using the MOVLB instruction. The value of the BSR indicates the bank in data memory. The 8 bits in the instruction show the location in the bank and can be thought of as an offset from the bank’s lower boundary. The relationship between the BSR’s value and the bank division in data memory is shown in Figure 5-8. Since up to 16 registers may share the same low-order address, the user must always be careful to ensure that the proper bank is selected before performing a data read or write. For example, writing what should be program data to an 8-bit address of F9h while the BSR is 0Fh, will end up resetting the program counter. While any bank can be selected, only those banks that are actually implemented can be read or written to. Writes to unimplemented banks are ignored, while reads from unimplemented banks will return ‘0’s. Even so, the STATUS register will still be affected as if the operation was successful. The data memory map in Figure 5-7 indicates which banks are implemented. In the core PIC18 instruction set, only the MOVFF instruction fully specifies the 12-bit address of the source and target registers. This instruction ignores the BSR completely when it executes. All other instructions include only the low-order address as an operand and must use either the BSR or the Access Bank to locate their target registers. BANK SELECT REGISTER Large areas of data memory require an efficient addressing scheme to make rapid access to any address possible. Ideally, this means that an entire address does not need to be provided for each read or write operation. For PIC18 devices, this is accomplished with a RAM banking scheme. This divides the memory space into 16 contiguous banks of 256 bytes. Depending on the instruction, each location can be addressed directly by its full 12-bit address, or an 8-bit low-order address and a 4-bit Bank Pointer. DS39778B-page 70 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 5-7: DATA MEMORY MAP FOR PIC18F87J11 FAMILY DEVICES When a = 0: BSR<3:0> Data Memory Map 00h = 0000 = 0001 = 0010 = 0011 = 0100 = 0101 = 0110 = 0111 = 1000 = 1001 = 1010 = 1011 = 1100 = 1101 = 1110 Access RAM Bank 0 FFh 00h Bank 1 000h 05Fh 060h 0FFh 100h GPR 1FFh 200h FFh 00h Bank 2 GPR FFh 00h Bank 3 2FFh 300h The first 96 bytes are general purpose RAM (from Bank 0). The remaining 160 bytes are Special Function Registers (from Bank 15). When a = 1: The BSR specifies the bank used by the instruction. GPR 3FFh 400h FFh 00h Bank 4 GPR FFh 00h 4FFh 500h GPR Bank 5 FFh 00h 5FFh 600h GPR Bank 6 FFh 00h 6FFh 700h GPR Bank 7 7FFh 800h GPR Bank 8 Access Bank 00h Access RAM Low FFh 00h FFh 00h 5Fh Access RAM High 60h (SFRs) FFh 8FFh 900h GPR Bank 9 FFh 00h 9FFh A00h GPR Bank 10 FFh 00h AFFh B00h GPR Bank 11 FFh 00h BFFh C00h GPR Bank 12 FFh 00h CFFh D00h GPR Bank 13 FFh 00h DFFh E00h GPR Bank 14 = 1111 FFh 00h GPR(1) FFh SFR Bank 15 Note 1: GPR The BSR is ignored and the Access Bank is used. EFFh F00h F5Fh F60h FFFh Addresses F5Ah through F5Fh are also used by SFRs, but are not part of the Access RAM. Users must always use the complete address, or load the proper BSR value, to access these registers. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 71 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 5-8: USE OF THE BANK SELECT REGISTER (DIRECT ADDRESSING) BSR(1) 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 000h Data Memory Bank 0 0 100h Bank 1 Bank Select(2) 00h 7 FFh 00h 11 From Opcode(2) 11 11 11 11 1 0 1 1 FFh 00h 200h Bank 2 FFh 00h 300h Bank 3 through Bank 13 FFh 00h E00h Bank 14 FFh 00h F00h Bank 15 FFFh Note 1: 2: 5.3.2 FFh The Access RAM bit of the instruction can be used to force an override of the selected bank (BSR<3:0>) to the registers of the Access Bank. The MOVFF instruction embeds the entire 12-bit address in the instruction. ACCESS BANK While the use of the BSR with an embedded 8-bit address allows users to address the entire range of data memory, it also means that the user must always ensure that the correct bank is selected. Otherwise, data may be read from or written to the wrong location. This can be disastrous if a GPR is the intended target of an operation, but an SFR is written to instead. Verifying and/or changing the BSR for each read or write to data memory can become very inefficient. To streamline access for the most commonly used data memory locations, the data memory is configured with an Access Bank, which allows users to access a mapped block of memory without specifying a BSR. The Access Bank consists of the first 96 bytes of memory (00h-5Fh) in Bank 0 and the last 160 bytes of memory (60h-FFh) in Bank 15. The lower half is known as the “Access RAM” and is composed of GPRs. The upper half is where the device’s SFRs are mapped. These two areas are mapped contiguously in the Access Bank and can be addressed in a linear fashion by an 8-bit address (Figure 5-7). The Access Bank is used by core PIC18 instructions that include the Access RAM bit (the ‘a’ parameter in the instruction). When ‘a’ is equal to ‘1’, the instruction uses the BSR and the 8-bit address included in the opcode for the data memory address. When ‘a’ is ‘0’, however, the instruction is forced to use the Access Bank address map; the current value of the BSR is ignored entirely. DS39778B-page 72 Using this “forced” addressing allows the instruction to operate on a data address in a single cycle without updating the BSR first. For 8-bit addresses of 60h and above, this means that users can evaluate and operate on SFRs more efficiently. The Access RAM below 60h is a good place for data values that the user might need to access rapidly, such as immediate computational results or common program variables. Access RAM also allows for faster and more code efficient context saving and switching of variables. The mapping of the Access Bank is slightly different when the extended instruction set is enabled (XINST Configuration bit = 1). This is discussed in more detail in Section 5.6.3 “Mapping the Access Bank in Indexed Literal Offset Mode”. 5.3.3 GENERAL PURPOSE REGISTER FILE PIC18 devices may have banked memory in the GPR area. This is data RAM which is available for use by all instructions. GPRs start at the bottom of Bank 0 (address 000h) and grow upwards towards the bottom of the SFR area. GPRs are not initialized by a Power-on Reset and are unchanged on all other Resets. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.3.4 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS The Special Function Registers (SFRs) are registers used by the CPU and peripheral modules for controlling the desired operation of the device. These registers are implemented as static RAM. SFRs start at the top of data memory (FFFh) and extend downward to occupy more than the top half of Bank 15 (F5Ah to FFFh). A list of these registers is given inTable 5-3, Table 5-4 and Table 5-5. ALU’s STATUS register is described later in this section. Registers related to the operation of the peripheral features are described in the chapter for that peripheral. The SFRs are typically distributed among the peripherals whose functions they control. Unused SFR locations are unimplemented and read as ‘0’s Note: The SFRs can be classified into two sets: those associated with the “core” device functionality (ALU, Resets and interrupts) and those related to the peripheral functions. The Reset and interrupt registers are described in their respective chapters, while the TABLE 5-3: Addresses, F5Ah through F5Fh, are not part of the Access Bank. These registers must always be accessed using the Bank Select Register. SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER MAP FOR PIC18F87J11 FAMILY DEVICES Address Name Address FFFh TOSU FDFh INDF2(1) Name POSTINC2(1) FFEh TOSH FDEh FFDh TOSL FDDh POSTDEC2(1) FFCh STKPTR FDCh FFBh PCLATU FFAh FF9h Address FBFh Name ECCP1AS Address Name Address F9Fh IPR1 F7Fh SPBRGH1 Name Address Name F5Fh PMDIN2H FBEh ECCP1DEL F9Eh PIR1 F7Eh BAUDCON1 F5Eh PMDIN2L FBDh CCPR1H F9Dh PIE1 F7Dh SPBRGH2 F5Dh PMEH PREINC2(1) FBCh CCPR1L F9Ch RCSTA2 F7Ch BAUDCON2 F5Ch PMEL FDBh PLUSW2(1) FBBh CCP1CON F9Bh OSCTUNE F7Bh TMR3H F5Bh PMSTATH PCLATH FDAh FSR2H FBAh ECCP2AS F9Ah TRISJ(2) F7Ah TMR3L F5Ah PMSTATL PCL FD9h FSR2L FB9h ECCP2DEL F99h TRISH(2) F79h T3CON F59h — FF8h TBLPTRU FD8h STATUS FB8h CCPR2H F98h TRISG F78h TMR4 F58h — FF7h TBLPTRH FD7h TMR0H FB7h CCPR2L F97h TRISF F77h PR4(3) F57h — FF6h TBLPTRL FD6h TMR0L FB6h CCP2CON F96h TRISE F76h T4CON F56h — FF5h TABLAT FD5h T0CON FB5h ECCP3AS F95h TRISD F75h CCPR4H F55h — FF4h PRODH FD4h — FB4h ECCP3DEL F94h TRISC F74h CCPR4L F54h — FF3h PRODL FD3h OSCCON(3) FB3h CCPR3H F93h TRISB F73h CCP4CON F53h — FF2h INTCON FD2h CM1CON FB2h CCPR3L F92h TRISA F72h CCPR5H F52h — FF1h INTCON2 FD1h CM2CON FB1h CCP3CON F91h LATJ(2) F71h CCPR5L F51h — FF0h INTCON3 FD0h RCON FB0h SPBRG1 F90h LATH(2) F70h CCP5CON F50h — FEFh INDF0(1) FCFh TMR1H(3) FAFh RCREG1 F8Fh LATG F6Fh SSP2BUF F4Fh — FEEh POSTINC0(1) FCEh TMR1L(3) FAEh TXREG1 F8Eh LATF F6Eh SSP2ADD F4Eh — FEDh POSTDEC0(1) FCDh T1CON(3) FADh TXSTA1 F8Dh LATE F6Dh SSP2STAT F4Dh — FECh PREINC0(1) FCCh TMR2(3) FACh RCSTA1 F8Ch LATD F6Ch SSP2CON1 F4Ch — FEBh PLUSW0(1) FCBh PR2(3) FABh SPBRG2 F8Bh LATC F6Bh SSP2CON2 F4Bh — FEAh FSR0H FCAh T2CON FAAh RCREG2 F8Ah LATB F6Ah CMSTAT F4Ah — FE9h FSR0L FC9h SSP1BUF FA9h TXREG2 F89h LATA F69h PMADDRH(4) F49h — FE8h WREG FC8h SSP1ADD FA8h TXSTA2 F88h PORTJ(2) F68h PMADDRL(4) F48h — FE7h INDF1(1) FC7h SSP1STAT FA7h EECON2 F87h PORTH(2) F67h PMDIN1H F47h — FE6h POSTINC1(1) FC6h SSP1CON1 FA6h EECON1 F86h PORTG F66h PMDIN1L F46h — FE5h POSTDEC1(1) FC5h SSP1CON2 FA5h IPR3 F85h PORTF F65h PMCONH F45h — FE4h PREINC1(1) FC4h ADRESH FA4h PIR3 F84h PORTE F64h PMCONL F44h — FE3h PLUSW1(1) FC3h ADRESL FA3h PIE3 F83h PORTD F63h PMMODEH F43h — FE2h FSR1H FC2h ADCON0(3) FA2h IPR2 F82h PORTC F62h PMMODEL F42h — FE1h FSR1L FC1h ADCON1(3) FA1h PIR2 F81h PORTB F61h PMDOUT2H F41h — FE0h BSR FC0h WDTCON FA0h PIE2 F80h PORTA F60h PMDOUT2L F40h — Note 1: 2: 3: 4: This is not a physical register. This register is not available on 64-pin devices. This register shares the same address with another register (see Table 5-4 for alternate register). The PMADDRH/L and PMDOUT1H/L register pairs share the same address. PMADDR is used in Master modes and PMDOUT1 is used in Slave modes. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 73 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.3.4.1 Shared Address SFRs 5.3.4.2 In several locations in the SFR bank, a single address is used to access two different hardware registers. In these cases, a “legacy” register of the standard PIC18 SFR set (such as OSCCON, T1CON, etc.) shares its address with an alternate register. These alternate registers are associated with enhanced configuration options for peripherals, or with new device features not included in the standard PIC18 SFR map. A complete list of shared register addresses and the registers associated with them is provided in Table 5-4. Access to the alternate registers is enabled in software by setting the ADSHR bit in the WDTCON register (Register 5-3). ADSHR must be manually set or cleared to access the alternate or legacy registers, as required. Since the bit remains in a given state until changed, users should always verify the state of ADSHR before writing to any of the shared SFR addresses. TABLE 5-4: Name (D) OSCCON (A) REFOCON FCFh (D) TMR1H (A) ODCON1 FCEh (D) TMR1L (A) ODCON2 Legend: Note 1: In addition to the shared address SFRs, there are several registers that share the same address in the SFR space, but are not accessed with the ADSHR bit. Instead, the register’s definition and use depends on the operating mode of its associated peripheral. These registers are: • SSPxADD and SSPxMSK: These are two separate hardware registers, accessed through a single SFR address. The operating mode of the MSSP module determines which register is being accessed. See Section 19.4.3.4 “7-Bit Address Masking Mode” for additional details. • PMADDRH/L and PMDOUT2H/L: In this case, these named buffer pairs are actually the same physical registers. The PMP module’s operating mode determines what function the registers take on. See Section 11.1.2 “Data Registers” for additional details. SHARED SFR ADDRESSES FOR PIC18F87J11 FAMILY DEVICES Address FD3h Context Defined SFRs Address FCDh Name (D) T1CON (A) ODCON3 FCCh (D) TMR2 (A) PADCFG1 FCBh (D) PR2 (A) MEMCON(1) Address FC2h Name (D) ADCON0 (A) ANCON1 FC1h (D) ADCON1 (A) ANCON0 F77h (D) PR4 (A) CVRCON (D) = Default SFR, accessible only when ADSHR = 0; (A) = Alternate SFR, accessible only when ADSHR = 1. Implemented in 80-pin devices only. REGISTER 5-3: WDTCON: WATCHDOG TIMER CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R-x U-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 REGSLP LVDSTAT — ADSHR — — — SWDTEN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 REGSLP: Voltage Regulator Low-Power Operation Enable bit For details of bit operation, see Register 24-9. bit 6 LVDSTAT: LVD Status bit 1 = VDDCORE > 2.45V 0 = VDDCORE < 2.45V bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 ADSHR: Shared Address SFR Select bit 1 = Alternate SFR is selected 0 = Default (Legacy) SFR is selected bit 3-1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 SWDTEN: Software Controlled Watchdog Timer Enable bit For details of bit operation, see Register 24-9. DS39778B-page 74 Preliminary x = Bit is unknown © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 5-5: File Name REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F87J11 FAMILY) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 — — — Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Details on Page: ---0 0000 55, 65 TOSH Top-of-Stack High Byte (TOS<15:8>) 0000 0000 55, 65 TOSL Top-of-Stack Low Byte (TOS<7:0>) 0000 0000 55, 65 00-0 0000 55, 66 ---0 0000 55, 65 TOSU STKPTR STKFUL STKUNF — PCLATU — — bit 21(1) Top-of-Stack Upper Byte (TOS<20:16>) Value on POR, BOR SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 Holding Register for PC<20:16> PCLATH Holding Register for PC<15:8> 0000 0000 55, 65 PCL PC Low Byte (PC<7:0>) 0000 0000 55, 65 --00 0000 55, 96 TBLPTRU — — bit 21 Program Memory Table Pointer Upper Byte (TBLPTR<20:16>) TBLPTRH Program Memory Table Pointer High Byte (TBLPTR<15:8>) 0000 0000 55, 96 TBLPTRL Program Memory Table Pointer Low Byte (TBLPTR<7:0>) 0000 0000 55, 96 TABLAT Program Memory Table Latch 0000 0000 55, 96 PRODH Product Register High Byte xxxx xxxx 55, 109 PRODL Product Register Low Byte xxxx xxxx 55, 109 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 0000 000x 55, 113 INTCON2 RBPU INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2 INTEDG3 TMR0IP INT3IP RBIP 1111 1111 55, 113 INT2IP INT1IP INT3IE INT2IE INT1IE INT3IF INT2IF INT1IF 1100 0000 55, 113 INTCON3 INDF0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 not changed (not a physical register) N/A 55, 82 POSTINC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 post-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 55, 83 POSTDEC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 post-decremented (not a physical register) N/A 55, 83 PREINC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 pre-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 55, 83 PLUSW0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 pre-incremented (not a physical register) – value of FSR0 offset by W N/A 55, 83 FSR0H ---- xxxx 55, 82 FSR0L Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0 Low Byte — — — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0 High Byte xxxx xxxx 55, 82 WREG Working Register xxxx xxxx 55, 67 INDF1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 not changed (not a physical register) N/A 55, 82 POSTINC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 post-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 55, 83 POSTDEC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 post-decremented (not a physical register) N/A 55, 83 PREINC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 pre-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 55, 83 PLUSW1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 pre-incremented (not a physical register) – value of FSR1 offset by W N/A 55, 83 FSR1H — FSR1L — — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1 High Byte Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1 Low Byte BSR — — — — Bank Select Register ---- xxxx 55, 82 xxxx xxxx 55, 82 ---- 0000 55, 70 INDF2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 not changed (not a physical register) N/A 56, 82 POSTINC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 post-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 56, 83 POSTDEC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 post-decremented (not a physical register) N/A 56, 83 PREINC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 pre-incremented (not a physical register) N/A 56, 83 PLUSW2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 pre-incremented (not a physical register) – value of FSR2 offset by W N/A 56, 83 Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition. Bold indicates shared access SFRs. Bit 21 of the PC is only available in Serial Programming modes. Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. Reset value is ‘0’ when Two-Speed Start-up is enabled and ‘1’ if disabled. The SSPxMSK registers are only accessible when SSPxCON2<3:0> = 1001. Alternate names and definitions for these bits when the MSSP modules are operating in I2C™ Slave mode. See Section 19.4.3.2 “Address Masking Modes” for details These bits and/or registers are only available in 80-pin devices; otherwise, they are unimplemented and read as ‘0’. Reset values are shown for 80-pin devices. These bits are only available in select oscillator modes (FOSC2 Configuration bit = 0); otherwise, they are unimplemented. The PMADDRH/PMDOUT1H and PMADDRL/PMDOUT1L register pairs share the physical registers and addresses, but have different functions determined by the module’s operating mode. See Section 11.1.2 “Data Registers” for more information. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 75 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 5-5: File Name FSR2H FSR2L REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F87J11 FAMILY) (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 — — — — Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2 High Byte Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2 Low Byte STATUS — — TMR0H Timer0 Register High Byte TMR0L Timer0 Register Low Byte — N OV Z DC C Value on POR, BOR Details on Page: ---- xxxx 56, 82 xxxx xxxx 56, 82 ---x xxxx 56, 80 0000 0000 56, 183 xxxx xxxx 56, 183 TMR0ON T08BIT T0CS T0SE PSA T0PS2 T0PS1 T0PS0 1111 1111 56, 182 OSCCON(2)/ IDLEN IRCF2 IRCF1 IRCF0 OSTS(4) — SCS1 SCS0 0110 q100 56, 32 REFOCON(3) ROON — ROSSLP ROSEL RODIV3 RODIV2 RODIV1 RODIV0 0-00 0000 56, 39 CM1CON CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF CCH1 CCH0 0001 1111 56, 302 CM2CON CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF CCH1 CCH0 0001 1111 56, 302 RCON IPEN — CM RI TO PD POR BOR 0-11 1100 54, 56, 125 xxxx xxxx 56, 186 — CCP5OD CCP4OD ECCP3OD ECCP2OD T0CON TMR1H(2)/ ODCON1(3) TMR1L(2)/ — — ECCP1OD ---0 0000 56, 129 xxxx xxxx 56, 186 Timer1 Register Low Byte ODCON2(3) T1CON Timer1 Register High Byte (2) / ODCON3(3) TMR2(2)/ PADCFG1(3) PR2(2)/ — — — — — — U2OD U1OD ---- --00 56, 129 RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON 0000 0000 56, 186 — — — — — — SPI2OD SPI1OD ---- --00 56, 129 0000 0000 56, 191 Timer2 Register — — — — — — — PMPTTL Timer2 Period Register MEMCON(3,7) T2CON EDBIS — — WAIT1 WAIT0 — T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 ---- ---0 56, 130 1111 1111 56, 191 — WM1 WM0 0-00 --00 56, 98 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 -000 0000 56, 191 xxxx xxxx 56, 224, 233 SSP1BUF MSSP1 Receive Buffer/Transmit Register SSP1ADD/ MSSP1 Address Register (I2C™ Slave mode), MSSP1 Baud Rate Reload Register (I2C Master mode) 0000 0000 56, 233 SSP1MSK(5) MSK7 MSK6 MSK5 MSK4 MSK3 MSK2 MSK1 MSK0 0000 0000 56, 240 SSP1STAT SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF 0000 0000 56, 224, 234 SSP1CON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 0000 0000 56, 225, 235 SSP1CON2 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN RCEN PEN RSEN/ SEN 0000 0000 GCEN ACKSTAT ADMSK5(6) ADMSK4(6) ADMSK3(6) ADMSK2(6) ADMSK1(6) SEN 56, 236, 268 ADRESH A/D Result Register High Byte xxxx xxxx 57, 291 ADRESL A/D Result Register Low Byte xxxx xxxx 57, 291 57, 291 ADCON0(2)/ VCFG1 VCFG0 CHS3 CHS2 CHS1 CHS0 GO/DONE ADON 0000 0000 ANCON1(3) PCFG15 PCFG14 PCFG13 PCFG12 PCFG11 PCFG10 PCFG9 PCFG8 0000 0000 57, 293 ADCON1(2)/ ADFM ADCAL ACQT2 ACQT1 ACQT0 ADCS2 ADCS1 ADCS0 0000 0000 57, 292 PCFG7 PCFG6 — PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 00-0 0000 57, 293 REGSLP LVDSTAT — ADSHR — — — SWDTEN 0x-0 ---0 57, 321 ANCON0(3) WDTCON Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition. Bold indicates shared access SFRs. Bit 21 of the PC is only available in Serial Programming modes. Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. Reset value is ‘0’ when Two-Speed Start-up is enabled and ‘1’ if disabled. The SSPxMSK registers are only accessible when SSPxCON2<3:0> = 1001. Alternate names and definitions for these bits when the MSSP modules are operating in I2C™ Slave mode. See Section 19.4.3.2 “Address Masking Modes” for details These bits and/or registers are only available in 80-pin devices; otherwise, they are unimplemented and read as ‘0’. Reset values are shown for 80-pin devices. These bits are only available in select oscillator modes (FOSC2 Configuration bit = 0); otherwise, they are unimplemented. The PMADDRH/PMDOUT1H and PMADDRL/PMDOUT1L register pairs share the physical registers and addresses, but have different functions determined by the module’s operating mode. See Section 11.1.2 “Data Registers” for more information. DS39778B-page 76 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 5-5: File Name ECCP1AS ECCP1DEL REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F87J11 FAMILY) (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 ECCP1ASE ECCP1AS2 ECCP1AS1 ECCP1AS0 P1RSEN P1DC6 P1DC5 P1DC4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Details on Page: PSS1AC1 PSS1AC0 PSS1BD1 PSS1BD0 0000 0000 57, 222 P1DC3 P1DC2 P1DC1 P1DC0 0000 0000 57, 222 CCPR1H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 HIgh Byte xxxx xxxx 57, 222 CCPR1L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 Low Byte xxxx xxxx 57, 222 CCP1CON ECCP2AS ECCP2DEL P1M1 P1M0 DC1B1 DC1B0 ECCP2ASE ECCP2AS2 ECCP2AS1 ECCP2AS0 P2RSEN P2DC6 P2DC5 P2DC4 CCP1M3 CCP1M2 CCP1M1 CCP1M0 0000 0000 57, 222 PSS2AC1 PSS2AC0 PSS2BD1 PSS2BD0 0000 0000 57, 222 P2DC3 P2DC2 P2DC1 P2DC0 0000 0000 57, 222 CCPR2H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2 High Byte xxxx xxxx 57, 222 CCPR2L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2 Low Byte xxxx xxxx 57, 222 CCP2CON ECCP3AS ECCP3DEL P2M1 P2M0 DC2B1 DC2B0 ECCP3ASE ECCP3AS2 ECCP3AS1 ECCP3AS0 P3RSEN P3DC6 P3DC5 P3DC4 CCP2M3 CCP2M2 CCP2M1 CCP2M0 0000 0000 57, 222 PSS3AC1 PSS3AC0 PSS3BD1 PSS3BD0 0000 0000 57, 222 P3DC3 P3DC2 P3DC1 P3DC0 0000 0000 57, 222 CCPR3H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 High Byte xxxx xxxx 57, 222 CCPR3L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 Low Byte xxxx xxxx 57, 222 0000 0000 57, 222 CCP3CON P3M1 P3M0 DC3B1 DC3B0 CCP3M3 CCP3M2 CCP3M1 CCP3M0 SPBRG1 EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte 0000 0000 57, 273 RCREG1 EUSART1 Receive Register 0000 0000 57, 281, 282 TXREG1 EUSART1 Transmit Register xxxx xxxx 57, 279, 280 TXSTA1 CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 0000 0010 57, 279 RCSTA1 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 0000 000x 57, 281 SPBRG2 EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte 0000 0000 57, 273 RCREG2 EUSART2 Receive Register 0000 0000 57, 281, 282 TXREG2 EUSART2 Transmit Register 0000 0000 57, 279, 280 0000 0010 57, 279 TXSTA2 EECON2 EECON1 CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D Program Memory Control Register 2 (not a physical register) ---- ---- 57, 88 — — WPROG FREE WRERR WREN WR — --00 x00- 57, 88 IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP 1111 1111 58, 122 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF 0000 0000 58, 116 PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE 0000 0000 58, 119 IPR2 OSCFIP CM2IP CM1IP — BCL1IP LVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP 111- 1111 58, 122 58, 116 PIR2 OSCFIF CM2IF CM1IF — BCL1IF LVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF 000- 0000 PIE2 OSCFIE CM2IE CM1IE — BCL1IE LVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE 000- 0000 58, 119 IPR1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 1111 1111 58, 122 58, 116 PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 0000 0000 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 0000 0000 58, 119 RCSTA2 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 0000 000x 58, 281 INTSRC PLLEN TUN5 TUN4 TUN3 TUN2 TUN1 TUN0 0000 0000 58, 33 OSCTUNE Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition. Bold indicates shared access SFRs. Bit 21 of the PC is only available in Serial Programming modes. Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. Reset value is ‘0’ when Two-Speed Start-up is enabled and ‘1’ if disabled. The SSPxMSK registers are only accessible when SSPxCON2<3:0> = 1001. Alternate names and definitions for these bits when the MSSP modules are operating in I2C™ Slave mode. See Section 19.4.3.2 “Address Masking Modes” for details These bits and/or registers are only available in 80-pin devices; otherwise, they are unimplemented and read as ‘0’. Reset values are shown for 80-pin devices. These bits are only available in select oscillator modes (FOSC2 Configuration bit = 0); otherwise, they are unimplemented. The PMADDRH/PMDOUT1H and PMADDRL/PMDOUT1L register pairs share the physical registers and addresses, but have different functions determined by the module’s operating mode. See Section 11.1.2 “Data Registers” for more information. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 77 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 5-5: File Name REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F87J11 FAMILY) (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Details on Page: 58, 155 TRISJ(7) TRISJ7 TRISJ6 TRISJ5 TRISJ4 TRISJ3 TRISJ2 TRISJ1 TRISJ0 1111 1111 TRISH(7) TRISH7 TRISH6 TRISH5 TRISH4 TRISH3 TRISH2 TRISH1 TRISH0 1111 1111 58, 153 — — — TRISG4 TRISG3 TRISG2 TRISG1 TRISG0 ---1 1111 58, 150 TRISG TRISF TRISF7 TRISF6 TRISF5 TRISF4 TRISF3 TRISF2 TRISF1 — 1111 111- 58, 147 TRISE TRISE7 TRISE6 TRISE5 TRISE4 TRISE3 TRISE2 TRISE1 TRISE0 1111 1111 58, 144 TRISD TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4 TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1 TRISD0 1111 1111 58, 141 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 1111 1111 58, 138 TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 1111 1111 58, 135 TRISA TRISA7(8) TRISA6(8) TRISA5 TRISA4 TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 1111 1111 58, 132 LATJ(7) LATJ7 LATJ6 LATJ5 LATJ4 LATJ3 LATJ2 LATJ1 LATJ0 xxxx xxxx 58, 155 LATH(7) LATH7 LATH6 LATH5 LATH4 LATH3 LATH2 LATH1 LATH0 xxxx xxxx 58, 153 LATG — — — LATG4 LATG3 LATG2 LATG1 LATG0 ---x xxxx 58, 150 LATF LATF7 LATF6 LATF5 LATF4 LATF3 LATF2 LATF1 — xxxx xxx- 58, 147 LATE LATE7 LATE6 LATE5 LATE4 LATE3 LATE2 LATE1 LATE0 xxxx xxxx 58, 144 LATD LATD7 LATD6 LATD5 LATD4 LATD3 LATD2 LATD1 LATD0 xxxx xxxx 58, 141 LATC LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 xxxx xxxx 58, 138 LATB LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 LATB3 LATB2 LATB1 LATB0 xxxx xxxx 58, 135 LATA LATA7(8) LATA6(8) LATA5 LATA4 LATA3 LATA2 LATA1 LATA0 xxxx xxxx 58, 132 RJ7 RJ6 RJ5 RJ4 RJ3 RJ2 RJ1 RJ0 xxxx xxxx 59, 155 PORTJ(7) PORTH(7) PORTG RH7 RH6 RH5 RH4 RH3 RH2 RH1 RH0 0000 xxxx 59, 153 RDPU REPU RJPU(7) RG4 RG3 RG2 RG1 RG0 000x xxxx 59, 150 PORTF RF7 RF6 RF5 RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1 — x000 000- 59, 147 PORTE RE7 RE6 RE5 RE4 RE3 RE2 RE1 RE0 xxxx xxxx 59, 144 PORTD RD7 RD6 RD5 RD4 RD3 RD2 RD1 RD0 xxxx xxxx 59, 141 PORTC RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 xxxx xxxx 59, 138 PORTB RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 xxxx xxxx 59, 135 PORTA RA7(8) RA6(8) RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0 000x 0000 59, 132 0000 0000 59, 273 0100 0-00 59, 273 SPBRGH1 BAUDCON1 SPBRGH2 BAUDCON2 EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP SCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP SCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 0000 0000 59, 273 0100 0-00 59, 273 59, 198 TMR3H Timer3 Register High Byte xxxx xxxx TMR3L Timer3 Register Low Byte xxxx xxxx 59, 198 0000 0000 59, 198 T3CON RD16 T3CCP2 T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 T3CCP1 T3SYNC TMR3CS TMR3ON TMR4 Timer4 Register 0000 0000 59, 197 PR4(2)/ Timer4 Period Register 1111 1111 59, 198 CVRCON(3) T4CON CVREN — Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: CVROE CVRR CVRSS CVR3 T4OUTPS3 T4OUTPS2 T4OUTPS1 T4OUTPS0 CVR2 CVR1 CVR0 0000 0000 59, 310 TMR4ON T4CKPS1 T4CKPS0 -000 0000 59, 197 x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition. Bold indicates shared access SFRs. Bit 21 of the PC is only available in Serial Programming modes. Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. Reset value is ‘0’ when Two-Speed Start-up is enabled and ‘1’ if disabled. The SSPxMSK registers are only accessible when SSPxCON2<3:0> = 1001. Alternate names and definitions for these bits when the MSSP modules are operating in I2C™ Slave mode. See Section 19.4.3.2 “Address Masking Modes” for details These bits and/or registers are only available in 80-pin devices; otherwise, they are unimplemented and read as ‘0’. Reset values are shown for 80-pin devices. These bits are only available in select oscillator modes (FOSC2 Configuration bit = 0); otherwise, they are unimplemented. The PMADDRH/PMDOUT1H and PMADDRL/PMDOUT1L register pairs share the physical registers and addresses, but have different functions determined by the module’s operating mode. See Section 11.1.2 “Data Registers” for more information. DS39778B-page 78 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 5-5: File Name REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F87J11 FAMILY) (CONTINUED) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Details on Page: 59, 200 CCPR4H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 4 High Byte xxxx xxxx CCPR4L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 4 Low Byte xxxx xxxx 59, 200 --00 0000 59, 200 CCP4CON — — DC4B1 DC4B0 CCP4M3 CCP4M2 CCP4M1 CCP4M0 CCPR5H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 5 High Byte xxxx xxxx 59, 200 CCPR5L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 5 Low Byte xxxx xxxx 59, 200 CCP5CON — — DC5B1 DC5B0 CCP5M3 CCP5M2 CCP5M1 CCP5M0 SSP2BUF MSSP2 Receive Buffer/Transmit Register SSP2ADD/ MSSP2 Address Register (I2C™ Slave mode), MSSP2 Baud Rate Reload Register (I2C Master mode) --00 0000 59, 200 xxxx xxxx 59, 224, 233 0000 0000 59, 233 SSP2MSK(5) MSK7 MSK6 MSK5 MSK4 MSK3 MSK2 MSK1 MSK0 0000 0000 59, 240 SSP2STAT SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF 0000 0000 59, 224, 234 SSP2CON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 0000 0000 59, 225, 235 SSP2CON2 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN RCEN PEN RSEN/ SEN 0000 0000 GCEN ACKSTAT ADMSK5(6) ADMSK4(6) ADMSK3(6) ADMSK2(6) ADMSK1(6) SEN 59, 236, 268 — — — — COUT2 COUT1 ---- --11 59, 303 CMSTAT PMADDRH / — — CS2 CS1 Parallel Master Port Address, High Byte 0000 0000 60, 164 PMDOUT1H(9) Parallel Port Out Data High Byte (Buffer 1) 0000 0000 60, 167 PMADDRL/ Parallel Master Port Address Low Byte 0000 0000 60, 164 PMDOUT1L(9) Parallel Port Out Data Low Byte (Buffer 0) 0000 0000 60, 164 PMDIN1H Parallel Port In Data High Byte (Buffer 1) 0000 0000 60, 164 PMDIN1L Parallel Port In Data Low Byte (Buffer 0) 0000 0000 60, 164 PMCONH PMPEN — PSIDL ADRMUX1 ADRMUX0 PTBEEN PTWREN PTRDEN 0-00 0000 60, 158 PMCONL CSF1 CSF0 ALP CS2P CS1P BEP WRSP RDSP 0000 0000 60, 159 PMMODEH BUSY IRQM1 IRQM0 INCM1 INCM0 MODE16 MODE1 MODE0 0000 0000 60, 160 PMMODEL WAITB1 WAITB0 WAITM3 WAITM2 WAITM1 WAITM0 WAITE1 WAITE0 0000 0000 60, 161 PMDOUT2H Parallel Port Out Data High Byte (Buffer 3) 0000 0000 60, 164 PMDOUT2L Parallel Port Out Data Low Byte (Buffer 2) 0000 0000 60, 164 PMDIN2H Parallel Port In Data High Byte (Buffer 3) 0000 0000 60, 164 PMDIN2L Parallel Port In Data Low Byte (Buffer 2) 0000 0000 60, 164 PMEH PTEN15 PTEN14 PTEN13 PTEN12 PTEN11 PTEN10 PTEN9 PTEN8 0000 0000 60, 161 PMEL PTEN7 PTEN6 PTEN5 PTEN4 PTEN3 PTEN2 PTEN1 PTEN0 0000 0000 60, 162 PMSTATH IBF IBOV — — IB3F IB2F IB1F IB0F 00-- 0000 60, 162 PMSTATL OBE OBUF — — OB3E OB2E OB1E OB0E 10-- 1111 60, 163 Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition. Bold indicates shared access SFRs. Bit 21 of the PC is only available in Serial Programming modes. Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. Reset value is ‘0’ when Two-Speed Start-up is enabled and ‘1’ if disabled. The SSPxMSK registers are only accessible when SSPxCON2<3:0> = 1001. Alternate names and definitions for these bits when the MSSP modules are operating in I2C™ Slave mode. See Section 19.4.3.2 “Address Masking Modes” for details These bits and/or registers are only available in 80-pin devices; otherwise, they are unimplemented and read as ‘0’. Reset values are shown for 80-pin devices. These bits are only available in select oscillator modes (FOSC2 Configuration bit = 0); otherwise, they are unimplemented. The PMADDRH/PMDOUT1H and PMADDRL/PMDOUT1L register pairs share the physical registers and addresses, but have different functions determined by the module’s operating mode. See Section 11.1.2 “Data Registers” for more information. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 79 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.3.5 STATUS REGISTER The STATUS register, shown in Register 5-4, contains the arithmetic status of the ALU. The STATUS register can be the operand for any instruction, as with any other register. If the STATUS register is the destination for an instruction that affects the Z, DC, C, OV or N bits, then the write to these five bits is disabled. These bits are set or cleared according to the device logic. Therefore, the result of an instruction with the STATUS register as destination may be different than intended. For example, CLRF STATUS will set the Z bit but leave the other bits unchanged. The STATUS register then reads back as ‘000u u1uu’. It is REGISTER 5-4: U-0 For other instructions not affecting any Status bits, see the instruction set summaries in Table 25-2 and Table 25-3. Note: The C and DC bits operate as a borrow and digit borrow bit respectively, in subtraction. STATUS REGISTER U-0 — recommended, therefore, that only BCF, BSF, SWAPF, MOVFF and MOVWF instructions are used to alter the STATUS register because these instructions do not affect the Z, C, DC, OV or N bits in the STATUS register. — U-0 — R/W-x N R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x Z DC(1) C(2) OV bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 N: Negative bit This bit is used for signed arithmetic (2’s complement). It indicates whether the result was negative (ALU MSB = 1). 1 = Result was negative 0 = Result was positive bit 3 OV: Overflow bit This bit is used for signed arithmetic (2’s complement). It indicates an overflow of the 7-bit magnitude which causes the sign bit (bit 7) to change state. 1 = Overflow occurred for signed arithmetic (in this arithmetic operation) 0 = No overflow occurred bit 2 Z: Zero bit 1 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is zero 0 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is not zero bit 1 DC: Digit carry/borrow bit(1) For ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW and SUBWF instructions: 1 = A carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result occurred 0 = No carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result bit 0 C: Carry/borrow bit(2) For ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW and SUBWF instructions: 1 = A carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred 0 = No carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred Note 1: 2: For borrow, the polarity is reversed. A subtraction is executed by adding the 2’s complement of the second operand. For rotate (RRF, RLF) instructions, this bit is loaded with either bit 4 or bit 3 of the source register. For borrow, the polarity is reversed. A subtraction is executed by adding the 2’s complement of the second operand. For rotate (RRF, RLF) instructions, this bit is loaded with either the high or low-order bit of the source register. DS39778B-page 80 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.4 Data Addressing Modes Note: The execution of some instructions in the core PIC18 instruction set are changed when the PIC18 extended instruction set is enabled. See Section 5.6 “Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set” for more information. While the program memory can be addressed in only one way – through the program counter – information in the data memory space can be addressed in several ways. For most instructions, the addressing mode is fixed. Other instructions may use up to three modes, depending on which operands are used and whether or not the extended instruction set is enabled. The addressing modes are: • • • • Inherent Literal Direct Indirect An additional addressing mode, Indexed Literal Offset, is available when the extended instruction set is enabled (XINST Configuration bit = 1). Its operation is discussed in greater detail in Section 5.6.1 “Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset”. 5.4.1 INHERENT AND LITERAL ADDRESSING Many PIC18 control instructions do not need any argument at all; they either perform an operation that globally affects the device, or they operate implicitly on one register. This addressing mode is known as Inherent Addressing. Examples include SLEEP, RESET and DAW. Other instructions work in a similar way, but require an additional explicit argument in the opcode. This is known as Literal Addressing mode, because they require some literal value as an argument. Examples include ADDLW and MOVLW, which respectively, add or move a literal value to the W register. Other examples include CALL and GOTO, which include a 20-bit program memory address. Purpose Register File”), or a location in the Access Bank (Section 5.3.2 “Access Bank”) as the data source for the instruction. The Access RAM bit ‘a’ determines how the address is interpreted. When ‘a’ is ‘1’, the contents of the BSR (Section 5.3.1 “Bank Select Register”) are used with the address to determine the complete 12-bit address of the register. When ‘a’ is ‘0’, the address is interpreted as being a register in the Access Bank. Addressing that uses the Access RAM is sometimes also known as Direct Forced Addressing mode. A few instructions, such as MOVFF, include the entire 12-bit address (either source or destination) in their opcodes. In these cases, the BSR is ignored entirely. The destination of the operation’s results is determined by the destination bit ‘d’. When ‘d’ is ‘1’, the results are stored back in the source register, overwriting its original contents. When ‘d’ is ‘0’, the results are stored in the W register. Instructions without the ‘d’ argument have a destination that is implicit in the instruction; their destination is either the target register being operated on or the W register. 5.4.3 INDIRECT ADDRESSING Indirect Addressing allows the user to access a location in data memory without giving a fixed address in the instruction. This is done by using File Select Registers (FSRs) as pointers to the locations to be read or written to. Since the FSRs are themselves located in RAM as Special Function Registers, they can also be directly manipulated under program control. This makes FSRs very useful in implementing data structures such as tables and arrays in data memory. The registers for Indirect Addressing are also implemented with Indirect File Operands (INDFs) that permit automatic manipulation of the pointer value with auto-incrementing, auto-decrementing or offsetting with another value. This allows for efficient code using loops, such as the example of clearing an entire RAM bank in Example 5-5. It also enables users to perform Indexed Addressing and other Stack Pointer operations for program memory in data memory. EXAMPLE 5-5: 5.4.2 DIRECT ADDRESSING Direct Addressing specifies all or part of the source and/or destination address of the operation within the opcode itself. The options are specified by the arguments accompanying the instruction. In the core PIC18 instruction set, bit-oriented and byte-oriented instructions use some version of Direct Addressing by default. All of these instructions include some 8-bit Literal Address as their Least Significant Byte. This address specifies either a register address in one of the banks of data RAM (Section 5.3.3 “General © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. NEXT LFSR CLRF BTFSS BRA CONTINUE Preliminary HOW TO CLEAR RAM (BANK 1) USING INDIRECT ADDRESSING FSR0, 100h ; POSTINC0 ; Clear INDF ; register then ; inc pointer FSR0H, 1 ; All done with ; Bank1? NEXT ; NO, clear next ; YES, continue DS39778B-page 81 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.4.3.1 FSR Registers and the INDF Operand the SFR space but are not physically implemented. Reading or writing to a particular INDF register actually accesses its corresponding FSR register pair. A read from INDF1, for example, reads the data at the address indicated by FSR1H:FSR1L. Instructions that use the INDF registers as operands actually use the contents of their corresponding FSR as a pointer to the instruction’s target. The INDF operand is just a convenient way of using the pointer. At the core of Indirect Addressing are three sets of registers: FSR0, FSR1 and FSR2. Each represents a pair of 8-bit registers, FSRnH and FSRnL. The four upper bits of the FSRnH register are not used, so each FSR pair holds a 12-bit value. This represents a value that can address the entire range of the data memory in a linear fashion. The FSR register pairs, then, serve as pointers to data memory locations. Because Indirect Addressing uses a full 12-bit address, data RAM banking is not necessary. Thus, the current contents of the BSR and the Access RAM bit have no effect on determining the target address. Indirect Addressing is accomplished with a set of Indirect File Operands, INDF0 through INDF2. These can be thought of as “virtual” registers: they are mapped in FIGURE 5-9: INDIRECT ADDRESSING 000h Using an instruction with one of the Indirect Addressing registers as the operand.... Bank 0 ADDWF, INDF1, 1 100h Bank 1 200h Bank 2 ...uses the 12-bit address stored in the FSR pair associated with that register.... 300h FSR1H:FSR1L 7 0 x x x x 1 1 1 1 7 0 Bank 3 through Bank 13 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 ...to determine the data memory location to be used in that operation. E00h In this case, the FSR1 pair contains FCCh. This means the contents of location FCCh will be added to that of the W register and stored back in FCCh. Bank 14 F00h Bank 15 FFFh Data Memory DS39778B-page 82 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.4.3.2 FSR Registers and POSTINC, POSTDEC, PREINC and PLUSW In addition to the INDF operand, each FSR register pair also has four additional indirect operands. Like INDF, these are “virtual” registers that cannot be indirectly read or written to. Accessing these registers actually accesses the associated FSR register pair, but also performs a specific action on its stored value. They are: • POSTDEC: accesses the FSR value, then automatically decrements it by ‘1’ afterwards • POSTINC: accesses the FSR value, then automatically increments it by ‘1’ afterwards • PREINC: increments the FSR value by ‘1’, then uses it in the operation • PLUSW: adds the signed value of the W register (range of -127 to 128) to that of the FSR and uses the new value in the operation In this context, accessing an INDF register uses the value in the FSR registers without changing them. Similarly, accessing a PLUSW register gives the FSR value offset by the value in the W register; neither value is actually changed in the operation. Accessing the other virtual registers changes the value of the FSR registers. Operations on the FSRs with POSTDEC, POSTINC and PREINC affect the entire register pair; that is, rollovers of the FSRnL register from FFh to 00h carry over to the FSRnH register. On the other hand, results of these operations do not change the value of any flags in the STATUS register (e.g., Z, N, OV, etc.). 5.4.3.3 Operations by FSRs on FSRs Indirect Addressing operations that target other FSRs or virtual registers represent special cases. For example, using an FSR to point to one of the virtual registers will not result in successful operations. As a specific case, assume that FSR0H:FSR0L contains FE7h, the address of INDF1. Attempts to read the value of the INDF1, using INDF0 as an operand, will return 00h. Attempts to write to INDF1, using INDF0 as the operand, will result in a NOP. On the other hand, using the virtual registers to write to an FSR pair may not occur as planned. In these cases, the value will be written to the FSR pair but without any incrementing or decrementing. Thus, writing to INDF2 or POSTDEC2 will write the same value to the FSR2H:FSR2L. Since the FSRs are physical registers mapped in the SFR space, they can be manipulated through all direct operations. Users should proceed cautiously when working on these registers, particularly if their code uses Indirect Addressing. Similarly, operations by Indirect Addressing are generally permitted on all other SFRs. Users should exercise the appropriate caution that they do not inadvertently change settings that might affect the operation of the device. The PLUSW register can be used to implement a form of Indexed Addressing in the data memory space. By manipulating the value in the W register, users can reach addresses that are fixed offsets from pointer addresses. In some applications, this can be used to implement some powerful program control structure, such as software stacks, inside of data memory. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 83 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.5 Program Memory and the Extended Instruction Set When using the extended instruction set, this addressing mode requires the following: The operation of program memory is unaffected by the use of the extended instruction set. Enabling the extended instruction set adds five additional two-word commands to the existing PIC18 instruction set: ADDFSR, CALLW, MOVSF, MOVSS and SUBFSR. These instructions are executed as described in Section 5.2.4 “Two-Word Instructions”. 5.6 Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set (XINST Configuration bit = 1) significantly changes certain aspects of data memory and its addressing. Specifically, the use of the Access Bank for many of the core PIC18 instructions is different. This is due to the introduction of a new addressing mode for the data memory space. This mode also alters the behavior of Indirect Addressing using FSR2 and its associated operands. What does not change is just as important. The size of the data memory space is unchanged, as well as its linear addressing. The SFR map remains the same. Core PIC18 instructions can still operate in both Direct and Indirect Addressing mode; inherent and literal instructions do not change at all. Indirect Addressing with FSR0 and FSR1 also remains unchanged. 5.6.1 INDEXED ADDRESSING WITH LITERAL OFFSET Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set changes the behavior of Indirect Addressing using the FSR2 register pair and its associated file operands. Under the proper conditions, instructions that use the Access Bank – that is, most bit-oriented and byte-oriented instructions – can invoke a form of Indexed Addressing using an offset specified in the instruction. This special addressing mode is known as Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset, or Indexed Literal Offset mode. DS39778B-page 84 • The use of the Access Bank is forced (‘a’ = 0); and • The file address argument is less than or equal to 5Fh. Under these conditions, the file address of the instruction is not interpreted as the lower byte of an address (used with the BSR in Direct Addressing) or as an 8-bit address in the Access Bank. Instead, the value is interpreted as an offset value to an Address Pointer specified by FSR2. The offset and the contents of FSR2 are added to obtain the target address of the operation. 5.6.2 INSTRUCTIONS AFFECTED BY INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE Any of the core PIC18 instructions that can use Direct Addressing are potentially affected by the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode. This includes all byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions, or almost one-half of the standard PIC18 instruction set. Instructions that only use Inherent or Literal Addressing modes are unaffected. Additionally, byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions are not affected if they use the Access Bank (Access RAM bit is ‘1’) or include a file address of 60h or above. Instructions meeting these criteria will continue to execute as before. A comparison of the different possible addressing modes when the extended instruction set is enabled is shown in Figure 5-10. Those who desire to use byte-oriented or bit-oriented instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset mode should note the changes to assembler syntax for this mode. This is described in more detail in Section 25.2.1 “Extended Instruction Syntax”. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 5-10: COMPARING ADDRESSING OPTIONS FOR BIT-ORIENTED AND BYTE-ORIENTED INSTRUCTIONS (EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET ENABLED) EXAMPLE INSTRUCTION: ADDWF, f, d, a (Opcode: 0010 01da ffff ffff) When a = 0 and f ≥ 60h: The instruction executes in Direct Forced mode. ‘f’ is interpreted as a location in the Access RAM between 060h and FFFh. This is the same as locations F60h to FFFh (Bank 15) of data memory. Locations below 060h are not available in this addressing mode. 000h 060h Bank 0 100h 00h Bank 1 through Bank 14 60h Valid range for ‘f’ FFh F00h Access RAM Bank 15 F60h SFRs FFFh Data Memory When a = 0 and f ≤ 5Fh: The instruction executes in Indexed Literal Offset mode. ‘f’ is interpreted as an offset to the address value in FSR2. The two are added together to obtain the address of the target register for the instruction. The address can be anywhere in the data memory space. Note that in this mode, the correct syntax is now: ADDWF [k], d where ‘k’ is the same as ‘f’. 000h Bank 0 060h 100h 001001da ffffffff Bank 1 through Bank 14 FSR2H FSR2L F00h Bank 15 F60h SFRs FFFh Data Memory When a = 1 (all values of f): The instruction executes in Direct mode (also known as Direct Long mode). ‘f’ is interpreted as a location in one of the 16 banks of the data memory space. The bank is designated by the Bank Select Register (BSR). The address can be in any implemented bank in the data memory space. BSR 00000000 000h Bank 0 060h 100h Bank 1 through Bank 14 001001da ffffffff F00h Bank 15 F60h SFRs FFFh Data Memory © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 85 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 5.6.3 MAPPING THE ACCESS BANK IN INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE The use of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode effectively changes how the lower part of Access RAM (00h to 5Fh) is mapped. Rather than containing just the contents of the bottom part of Bank 0, this mode maps the contents from Bank 0 and a user-defined “window” that can be located anywhere in the data memory space. The value of FSR2 establishes the lower boundary of the addresses mapped into the window, while the upper boundary is defined by FSR2 plus 95 (5Fh). Addresses in the Access RAM above 5Fh are mapped as previously described (see Section 5.3.2 “Access Bank”). An example of Access Bank remapping in this addressing mode is shown in Figure 5-11. FIGURE 5-11: Remapping of the Access Bank applies only to operations using the Indexed Literal Offset mode. Operations that use the BSR (Access RAM bit is ‘1’) will continue to use Direct Addressing as before. Any Indirect or Indexed Addressing operation that explicitly uses any of the indirect file operands (including FSR2) will continue to operate as standard Indirect Addressing. Any instruction that uses the Access Bank, but includes a register address of greater than 05Fh, will use Direct Addressing and the normal Access Bank map. 5.6.4 BSR IN INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE Although the Access Bank is remapped when the extended instruction set is enabled, the operation of the BSR remains unchanged. Direct Addressing, using the BSR to select the data memory bank, operates in the same manner as previously described. REMAPPING THE ACCESS BANK WITH INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET ADDRESSING Example Situation: ADDWF f, d, a FSR2H:FSR2L = 120h 000h 05Fh Locations in the region from the FSR2 Pointer (120h) to the pointer plus 05Fh (17Fh) are mapped to the bottom of the Access RAM (000h-05Fh). 100h 120h 17Fh Bank 0 Window 00h Bank 1 Bank 1 “Window” 200h 5Fh 60h Special Function Registers at F60h through FFFh are mapped to 60h through FFh, as usual. Bank 0 addresses below 5Fh are not available in this mode. They can still be addressed by using the BSR. Not Accessible Bank 2 through Bank 14 SFRs FFh Access Bank F00h Bank 15 F60h SFRs FFFh Data Memory DS39778B-page 86 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 6.0 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY 6.1 Table Reads and Table Writes The Flash program memory is readable, writable and erasable during normal operation over the entire VDD range. In order to read and write program memory, there are two operations that allow the processor to move bytes between the program memory space and the data RAM: A read from program memory is executed on one byte at a time. A write to program memory is executed on blocks of 64 bytes at a time or two bytes at a time. Program memory is erased in blocks of 1024 bytes at a time. A bulk erase operation may not be issued from user code. • Table Read (TBLRD) • Table Write (TBLWT) Writing or erasing program memory will cease instruction fetches until the operation is complete. The program memory cannot be accessed during the write or erase, therefore, code cannot execute. An internal programming timer terminates program memory writes and erases. A value written to program memory does not need to be a valid instruction. Executing a program memory location that forms an invalid instruction results in a NOP. The program memory space is 16 bits wide, while the data RAM space is 8 bits wide. Table reads and table writes move data between these two memory spaces through an 8-bit register (TABLAT). Table read operations retrieve data from program memory and place it into the data RAM space. Figure 6-1 shows the operation of a table read with program memory and data RAM. Table write operations store data from the data memory space into holding registers in program memory. The procedure to write the contents of the holding registers into program memory is detailed in Section 6.5 “Writing to Flash Program Memory”. Figure 6-2 shows the operation of a table write with program memory and data RAM. Table operations work with byte entities. A table block containing data, rather than program instructions, is not required to be word-aligned. Therefore, a table block can start and end at any byte address. If a table write is being used to write executable code into program memory, program instructions will need to be word-aligned. FIGURE 6-1: TABLE READ OPERATION Instruction: TBLRD* Program Memory Table Pointer(1) TBLPTRU TBLPTRH Table Latch (8-bit) TBLPTRL TABLAT Program Memory (TBLPTR) Note 1: Table Pointer register points to a byte in program memory. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 87 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 6-2: TABLE WRITE OPERATION Instruction: TBLWT* Program Memory Holding Registers Table Pointer(1) TBLPTRU TBLPTRH Table Latch (8-bit) TBLPTRL TABLAT Program Memory (TBLPTR) Note 1: 6.2 Table Pointer actually points to one of 64 holding registers, the address of which is determined by TBLPTRL<5:0>. The process for physically writing data to the program memory array is discussed in Section 6.5 “Writing to Flash Program Memory”. Control Registers Several control registers are used in conjunction with the TBLRD and TBLWT instructions. These include the: • • • • EECON1 register EECON2 register TABLAT register TBLPTR registers 6.2.1 The FREE bit, when set, will allow a program memory erase operation. When FREE is set, the erase operation is initiated on the next WR command. When FREE is clear, only writes are enabled. The WREN bit, when set, will allow a write operation. On power-up, the WREN bit is clear. The WRERR bit is set in hardware when the WR bit is set and cleared when the internal programming timer expires and the write operation is complete. EECON1 AND EECON2 REGISTERS Note: The EECON1 register (Register 6-1) is the control register for memory accesses. The EECON2 register is not a physical register; it is used exclusively in the memory write and erase sequences. Reading EECON2 will read all ‘0’s. The WPROG bit, when set, allows the user to program a single word (two bytes) upon the execution of the WR command. If this bit is cleared, the WR command programs a block of 64 bytes. DS39778B-page 88 During normal operation, the WRERR is read as ‘1’. This can indicate that a write operation was prematurely terminated by a Reset, or a write operation was attempted improperly. The WR control bit initiates write operations. The bit cannot be cleared, only set, in software. It is cleared in hardware at the completion of the write operation. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 6-1: EECON1: EEPROM CONTROL REGISTER 1 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-x R/W-0 R/S-0 U-0 — — WPROG FREE WRERR(1) WREN WR — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: S = Set-only bit (cannot be cleared in software) R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 WPROG: One Word Wide Program bit 1 = Program 64 bytes on the next WR command 0 = Program 2 bytes on the next WR command bit 4 FREE: Flash Row Erase Enable bit 1 = Erase the program memory row addressed by TBLPTR on the next WR command (cleared by completion of erase operation) 0 = Perform write only bit 3 WRERR: Flash Program Error Flag bit(1) 1 = A write operation is prematurely terminated (any Reset during self-timed programming in normal operation, or an improper write attempt) 0 = The write operation completed bit 2 WREN: Flash Program Write Enable bit 1 = Allows write cycles to Flash program memory 0 = Inhibits write cycles to Flash program memory bit 1 WR: Write Control bit 1 = Initiates a program memory erase cycle or write cycle (The operation is self-timed and the bit is cleared by hardware once write is complete. The WR bit can only be set (not cleared) in software.) 0 = Write cycle is complete bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Note 1: When a WRERR occurs, the EEPGD and CFGS bits are not cleared. This allows tracing of the error condition. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 89 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 6.2.2 TABLE LATCH REGISTER (TABLAT) 6.2.4 The Table Latch (TABLAT) is an 8-bit register mapped into the SFR space. The Table Latch register is used to hold 8-bit data during data transfers between program memory and data RAM. 6.2.3 TBLPTR is used in reads, writes and erases of the Flash program memory. When a TBLRD is executed, all 22 bits of the TBLPTR determine which byte is read from program memory into TABLAT. TABLE POINTER REGISTER (TBLPTR) When a TBLWT is executed, the seven LSbs of the Table Pointer register (TBLPTR<6:0>) determine which of the 64 program memory holding registers is written to. When the timed write to program memory begins (via the WR bit), the 12 MSbs of the TBLPTR (TBLPTR<21:10>) determine which program memory block of 1024 bytes is written to. For more detail, see Section 6.5 “Writing to Flash Program Memory”. The Table Pointer (TBLPTR) register addresses a byte within the program memory. The TBLPTR is comprised of three SFR registers: Table Pointer Upper Byte, Table Pointer High Byte and Table Pointer Low Byte (TBLPTRU:TBLPTRH:TBLPTRL). These three registers join to form a 22-bit wide pointer. The low-order 21 bits allow the device to address up to 2 Mbytes of program memory space. The 22nd bit allows access to the device ID, the user ID and the Configuration bits. When an erase of program memory is executed, the 12 MSbs of the Table Pointer register point to the 1024-byte block that will be erased. The Least Significant bits are ignored. The Table Pointer register, TBLPTR, is used by the TBLRD and TBLWT instructions. These instructions can update the TBLPTR in one of four ways based on the table operation. These operations are shown in Table 6-1. These operations on the TBLPTR only affect the low-order 21 bits. TABLE 6-1: TABLE POINTER BOUNDARIES Figure 6-3 describes the relevant boundaries of TBLPTR based on Flash program memory operations. TABLE POINTER OPERATIONS WITH TBLRD AND TBLWT INSTRUCTIONS Example Operation on Table Pointer TBLRD* TBLWT* TBLPTR is not modified TBLRD*+ TBLWT*+ TBLPTR is incremented after the read/write TBLRD*TBLWT*- TBLPTR is decremented after the read/write TBLRD+* TBLWT+* TBLPTR is incremented before the read/write FIGURE 6-3: 21 TABLE POINTER BOUNDARIES BASED ON OPERATION TBLPTRU 16 15 TBLPTRH 8 7 TBLPTRL 0 ERASE: TBLPTR<20:10> TABLE WRITE: TBLPTR<20:6> TABLE READ: TBLPTR<21:0> DS39778B-page 90 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 6.3 Reading the Flash Program Memory TBLPTR points to a byte address in program space. Executing TBLRD places the byte pointed to into TABLAT. In addition, TBLPTR can be modified automatically for the next table read operation. The TBLRD instruction is used to retrieve data from program memory and places it into data RAM. Table reads from program memory are performed one byte at a time. FIGURE 6-4: The internal program memory is typically organized by words. The Least Significant bit of the address selects between the high and low bytes of the word. Figure 6-4 shows the interface between the internal program memory and the TABLAT. READS FROM FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY Program Memory (Even Byte Address) (Odd Byte Address) TBLPTR = xxxxx1 Instruction Register (IR) EXAMPLE 6-1: FETCH TBLRD TBLPTR = xxxxx0 TABLAT Read Register READING A FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY WORD MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF CODE_ADDR_UPPER TBLPTRU CODE_ADDR_HIGH TBLPTRH CODE_ADDR_LOW TBLPTRL ; Load TBLPTR with the base ; address of the word READ_WORD TBLRD*+ MOVF MOVWF TBLRD*+ MOVF MOVWF TABLAT, W WORD_EVEN TABLAT, W WORD_ODD © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. ; read into TABLAT and increment ; get data ; read into TABLAT and increment ; get data Preliminary DS39778B-page 91 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 6.4 Erasing Flash Program Memory The minimum erase block is 512 words or 1024 bytes. Only through the use of an external programmer, or through ICSP control, can larger blocks of program memory be bulk erased. Word erase in the Flash array is not supported. When initiating an erase sequence from the microcontroller itself, a block of 1024 bytes of program memory is erased. The Most Significant 12 bits of the TBLPTR<21:10> point to the block being erased. TBLPTR<9:0> are ignored. The EECON1 register commands the erase operation. The WREN bit must be set to enable write operations. The FREE bit is set to select an erase operation. For protection, the write initiate sequence for EECON2 must be used. A long write is necessary for erasing the internal Flash. Instruction execution is halted while in a long write cycle. The long write will be terminated by the internal programming timer. EXAMPLE 6-2: 6.4.1 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY ERASE SEQUENCE The sequence of events for erasing a block of internal program memory location is: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Load Table Pointer register with address of row being erased. Set the WREN and FREE bits (EECON1<2,4>) to enable the erase operation. Disable interrupts. Write 55h to EECON2. Write 0AAh to EECON2. Set the WR bit. This will begin the row erase cycle. The CPU will stall for duration of the erase for TIW (see parameter D133A). Re-enable interrupts. ERASING A FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY ROW MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF CODE_ADDR_UPPER TBLPTRU CODE_ADDR_HIGH TBLPTRH CODE_ADDR_LOW TBLPTRL ; load TBLPTR with the base ; address of the memory block BSF BCF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF BSF EECON1, INTCON, 55h EECON2 0AAh EECON2 EECON1, INTCON, ; enable Row Erase operation ; disable interrupts ERASE_ROW Required Sequence DS39778B-page 92 FREE GIE ; write 55h WR GIE ; write 0AAh ; start erase (CPU stall) ; re-enable interrupts Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 6.5 Writing to Flash Program Memory The on-chip timer controls the write time. The write/erase voltages are generated by an on-chip charge pump, rated to operate over the voltage range of the device. The programming block is 32 words or 64 bytes. Programming one word or two bytes at a time is also supported. Note 1: Unlike previous PIC18 Flash devices, members of the PIC18F87J11 family do not reset the holding registers after a write occurs. The holding registers must be cleared or overwritten before a programming sequence. Table writes are used internally to load the holding registers needed to program the Flash memory. There are 64 holding registers used by the table writes for programming. Since the Table Latch (TABLAT) is only a single byte, the TBLWT instruction may need to be executed 64 times for each programming operation (if WPROG = 0). All of the table write operations will essentially be short writes because only the holding registers are written. At the end of updating the 64 holding registers, the EECON1 register must be written to in order to start the programming operation with a long write. 2: To maintain the endurance of the program memory cells, each Flash byte should not be programmed more than one time between erase operations. Before attempting to modify the contents of the target cell a second time, a row erase of the target row, or a bulk erase of the entire memory, must be performed. The long write is necessary for programming the internal Flash. Instruction execution is halted while in a long write cycle. The long write will be terminated by the internal programming timer. FIGURE 6-5: TABLE WRITES TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY TABLAT Write Register 8 8 TBLPTR = xxxxx0 8 TBLPTR = xxxxx1 Holding Register TBLPTR = xxxxx2 Holding Register 8 TBLPTR = xxxx3F Holding Register Holding Register Program Memory 6.5.1 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY WRITE SEQUENCE The sequence of events for programming an internal program memory location should be: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Read 1024 bytes into RAM. Update data values in RAM as necessary. Load Table Pointer register with address being erased. Execute the row erase procedure. Load Table Pointer register with address of first byte being written, minus 1. Write the 64 bytes into the holding registers with auto-increment. Set the WREN bit (EECON1<2>) to enable byte writes. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Disable interrupts. Write 55h to EECON2. Write 0AAh to EECON2. Set the WR bit. This will begin the write cycle. The CPU will stall for duration of the write for TIW (parameter D133A). 13. Re-enable interrupts. 14. Repeat steps 6 through 13 until all 1024 bytes are written to program memory. 15. Verify the memory (table read). An example of the required code is shown in Example 6-3 on the following page. Note: Preliminary Before setting the WR bit, the Table Pointer address needs to be within the intended address range of the 64 bytes in the holding register. DS39778B-page 93 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY EXAMPLE 6-3: WRITING TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF CODE_ADDR_UPPER TBLPTRU CODE_ADDR_HIGH TBLPTRH CODE_ADDR_LOW TBLPTRL ; Load TBLPTR with the base address ; of the memory block, minus 1 BSF BSF BCF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF BSF MOVLW MOVWF EECON1, WREN EECON1, FREE INTCON, GIE 55h EECON2 0AAh EECON2 EECON1, WR INTCON, GIE D'16' WRITE_COUNTER ; enable write to memory ; enable Row Erase operation ; disable interrupts MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF D'64' COUNTER BUFFER_ADDR_HIGH FSR0H BUFFER_ADDR_LOW FSR0L ERASE_BLOCK ; write 55h ; write 0AAh ; start erase (CPU stall) ; re-enable interrupts ; Need to write 16 blocks of 64 to write ; one erase block of 1024 RESTART_BUFFER ; point to buffer FILL_BUFFER ... ; read the new data from I2C, SPI, ; PSP, USART, etc. WRITE_BUFFER MOVLW MOVWF WRITE_BYTE_TO_HREGS MOVFF MOVWF TBLWT+* D’64 COUNTER ; number of bytes in holding register POSTINC0, WREG TABLAT ; ; ; ; ; DECFSZ BRA COUNTER WRITE_BYTE_TO_HREGS BSF BCF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF BSF BCF EECON1, INTCON, 55h EECON2 0AAh EECON2 EECON1, INTCON, EECON1, DECFSZ BRA WRITE_COUNTER RESTART_BUFFER get low byte of buffer data present data to table latch write data, perform a short write to internal TBLWT holding register. loop until buffers are full PROGRAM_MEMORY Required Sequence DS39778B-page 94 WREN GIE ; enable write to memory ; disable interrupts ; write 55h ; ; ; ; WR GIE WREN write 0AAh start program (CPU stall) re-enable interrupts disable write to memory ; done with one write cycle ; if not done replacing the erase block Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 6.5.2 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY WRITE SEQUENCE (WORD PROGRAMMING). 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. The PIC18F87J11 Family of devices have a feature that allows programming a single word (two bytes). This feature is enable when the WPROG bit is set. If the memory location is already erased, the following sequence is required to enable this feature: 1. 2. Load the Table Pointer register with the address of the data to be written Write the 2 bytes into the holding registers and perform a table write EXAMPLE 6-4: 9. Set the WREN bit (EECON1<2>) to enable byte writes. Disable interrupts. Write 55h to EECON2. Write 0AAh to EECON2. Set the WR bit. This will begin the write cycle. The CPU will stall for duration of the write for TIW (see parameter D133A). Re-enable interrupts. SINGLE-WORD WRITE TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF CODE_ADDR_UPPER TBLPTRU CODE_ADDR_HIGH TBLPTRH CODE_ADDR_LOW TBLPTRL MOVLW MOVWF TBLWT*+ MOVLW MOVWF TBLWT* DATA0 TABLAT ; Load TBLPTR with the base address DATA1 TABLAT PROGRAM_MEMORY Required Sequence BSF BSF BCF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF BSF BCF BCF EECON1, EECON1, INTCON, 55h EECON2 0AAh EECON2 EECON1, INTCON, EECON1, EECON1, © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. WPROG WREN GIE ; enable single word write ; enable write to memory ; disable interrupts ; write 55h WR GIE WPROG WREN ; ; ; ; ; write 0AAh start program (CPU stall) re-enable interrupts disable single word write disable write to memory Preliminary DS39778B-page 95 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 6.5.3 WRITE VERIFY 6.6 Depending on the application, good programming practice may dictate that the value written to the memory should be verified against the original value. This should be used in applications where excessive writes can stress bits near the specification limit. 6.5.4 Flash Program Operation During Code Protection See Section 24.6 “Program Verification and Code Protection” for details on code protection of Flash program memory. UNEXPECTED TERMINATION OF WRITE OPERATION If a write is terminated by an unplanned event, such as loss of power or an unexpected Reset, the memory location just programmed should be verified and reprogrammed if needed. If the write operation is interrupted by a MCLR Reset or a WDT time-out Reset during normal operation, the user can check the WRERR bit and rewrite the location(s) as needed. TABLE 6-2: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 TBLPTRU — — bit 21 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: Program Memory Table Pointer Upper Byte (TBLPTR<20:16>) 55 TBPLTRH Program Memory Table Pointer High Byte (TBLPTR<15:8>) 55 TBLPTRL Program Memory Table Pointer Low Byte (TBLPTR<7:0>) 55 TABLAT 55 Program Memory Table Latch INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL EECON2 Program Memory Control Register 2 (not a physical register) EECON1 — — TMR0IE WPROG INT0IE FREE RBIE WRERR TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 57 WREN WR — 57 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used during Flash program memory access. DS39778B-page 96 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 7.0 EXTERNAL MEMORY BUS Note: The external memory bus implemented on 64-pin devices. is not The External Memory Bus (EMB) allows the device to access external memory devices (such as Flash, EPROM, SRAM, etc.) as program or data memory. It supports both 8 and 16-Bit Data Width modes and three address widths of up to 20 bits. TABLE 7-1: The bus is implemented with 28 pins, multiplexed across four I/O ports. Three ports (PORTD, PORTE and PORTH) are multiplexed with the address/data bus for a total of 20 available lines, while PORTJ is multiplexed with the bus control signals. A list of the pins and their functions is provided in Table 7-1. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY EXTERNAL BUS – I/O PORT FUNCTIONS Name Port Bit External Memory Bus Function RD0/AD0 PORTD 0 Address bit 0 or Data bit 0 RD1/AD1 PORTD 1 Address bit 1 or Data bit 1 RD2/AD2 PORTD 2 Address bit 2 or Data bit 2 RD3/AD3 PORTD 3 Address bit 3 or Data bit 3 RD4/AD4 PORTD 4 Address bit 4 or Data bit 4 RD5/AD5 PORTD 5 Address bit 5 or Data bit 5 RD6/AD6 PORTD 6 Address bit 6 or Data bit 6 RD7/AD7 PORTD 7 Address bit 7 or Data bit 7 RE0/AD8 PORTE 0 Address bit 8 or Data bit 8 RE1/AD9 PORTE 1 Address bit 9 or Data bit 9 RE2/AD10 PORTE 2 Address bit 10 or Data bit 10 RE3/AD11 PORTE 3 Address bit 11 or Data bit 11 RE4/AD12 PORTE 4 Address bit 12 or Data bit 12 RE5/AD13 PORTE 5 Address bit 13 or Data bit 13 RE6/AD14 PORTE 6 Address bit 14 or Data bit 14 RE7/AD15 PORTE 7 Address bit 15 or Data bit 15 RH0/A16 PORTH 0 Address bit 16 RH1/A17 PORTH 1 Address bit 17 RH2/A18 PORTH 2 Address bit 18 RH3/A19 PORTH 3 Address bit 19 RJ0/ALE PORTJ 0 Address Latch Enable (ALE) Control pin RJ1/OE PORTJ 1 Output Enable (OE) Control pin RJ2/WRL PORTJ 2 Write Low (WRL) Control pin RJ3/WRH PORTJ 3 Write High (WRH) Control pin RJ4/BA0 PORTJ 4 Byte Address bit 0 (BA0) RJ5/CE PORTJ 5 Chip Enable (CE) Control pin RJ6/LB PORTJ 6 Lower Byte Enable (LB) Control pin RJ7/UB PORTJ 7 Upper Byte Enable (UB) Control pin Note: For the sake of clarity, only I/O port and external bus assignments are shown here. One or more additional multiplexed features may be available on some pins. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 97 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 7.1 External Memory Bus Control The operation of the interface is controlled by the MEMCON register (Register 7-1). This register is available in all program memory operating modes except Microcontroller mode. In this mode, the register is disabled and cannot be written to. The EBDIS bit (MEMCON<7>) controls the operation of the bus and related port functions. Clearing EBDIS enables the interface and disables the I/O functions of the ports, as well as any other functions multiplexed to those pins. Setting the bit enables the I/O ports and other functions, but allows the interface to override everything else on the pins when an external memory operation is required. By default, the external bus is always enabled and disables all other I/O. The WAIT bits allow for the addition of wait states to external memory operations. The use of these bits is discussed in Section 7.3 “Wait States”. The WM bits select the particular operating mode used when the bus is operating in 16-Bit Data Width mode. These are discussed in more detail in Section 7.6 “16-Bit Data Width Modes”. These bits have no effect when an 8-bit Data Width mode is selected. The MEMCON register (see Register 7-1) shares the same memory space as the PR2 register and can be alternately selected based on the designation of the ADSHR bit in the WDTCON register (see Register 24-9). The operation of the EBDIS bit is also influenced by the program memory mode being used. This is discussed in more detail in Section 7.5 “Program Memory Modes and the External Memory Bus”. REGISTER 7-1: MEMCON: EXTERNAL MEMORY BUS CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 EBDIS — WAIT1 WAIT0 — — WM1 WM0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 x = Bit is unknown EBDIS: External Bus Disable bit 1 = External bus enabled when microcontroller accesses external memory; otherwise, all external bus drivers are mapped as I/O ports 0 = External bus always enabled, I/O ports are disabled bit 6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-4 WAIT1:WAIT0: Table Reads and Writes Bus Cycle Wait Count bits 11 = Table reads and writes will wait 0 TCY 10 = Table reads and writes will wait 1 TCY 01 = Table reads and writes will wait 2 TCY 00 = Table reads and writes will wait 3 TCY bit 3-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1-0 WM1:WM0: TBLWT Operation with 16-Bit Data Bus Width Select bits 1x = Word Write mode: TABLAT word output, WRH active when TABLAT written 01 = Byte Select mode: TABLAT data copied on both MSB and LSB, WRH and (UB or LB) will activate 00 = Byte Write mode: TABLAT data copied on both MSB and LSB, WRH or WRL will activate DS39778B-page 98 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 7.2 7.2.1 Address and Data Width The PIC18F87J11 Family of devices can be independently configured for different address and data widths on the same memory bus. Both address and data width are set by Configuration bits in the CONFIG3L register. As Configuration bits, this means that these options can only be configured by programming the device and are not controllable in software. The BW bit selects an 8-bit or 16-bit data bus width. Setting this bit (default) selects a data width of 16 bits. The EMB1:EMB0 bits determine both the program memory operating mode and the address bus width. The available options are 20-bit, 16-bit and 12-bit, as well as Microcontroller mode (external bus disabled). Selecting a 16-bit or 12-bit width makes a corresponding number of high-order lines available for I/O functions. These pins are no longer affected by the setting of the EBDIS bit. For example, selecting a 16-Bit Addressing mode (EMB1:EMB0 = 01) disables A19:A16 and allows PORTH<3:0> to function without interruptions from the bus. Using the smaller address widths allows users to tailor the memory bus to the size of the external memory space for a particular design while freeing up pins for dedicated I/O operation. Because the EMB bits have the effect of disabling pins for memory bus operations, it is important to always select an address width at least equal to the data width. If a 12-bit address width is used with a 16-bit data width, the upper four bits of data will not be available on the bus. All combinations of address and data widths require multiplexing of address and data information on the same lines. The address and data multiplexing, as well as I/O ports made available by the use of smaller address widths, are summarized in Table 7-2. TABLE 7-2: Data Width By default, the address presented on the external bus is the value of the PC. In practical terms, this means that addresses in the external memory device below the top of on-chip memory are unavailable to the microcontroller. To access these physical locations, the glue logic between the microcontroller and the external memory must somehow translate addresses. To simplify the interface, the external bus offers an extension of Extended Microcontroller mode that automatically performs address shifting. This feature is controlled by the EASHFT Configuration bit. Setting this bit offsets addresses on the bus by the size of the microcontroller’s on-chip program memory and sets the bottom address at 0000h. This allows the device to use the entire range of physical addresses of the external memory. 7.2.2 This addressing mode is available in both 8-bit and certain 16-Bit Data Width modes. Additional details are provided in Section 7.6.3 “16-Bit Byte Select Mode” and Section 7.7 “8-Bit Data Width Mode”. ADDRESS AND DATA LINES FOR DIFFERENT ADDRESS AND DATA WIDTHS Address Width Multiplexed Data and Address Lines (and Corresponding Ports) 16-bit AD7:AD0 (PORTD<7:0>) 20-bit 16-bit 16-bit 21-BIT ADDRESSING As an extension of 20-bit address width operation, the external memory bus can also fully address a 2-Mbyte memory space. This is done by using the Bus Address bit 0 (BA0) control line as the Least Significant bit of the address. The UB and LB control signals may also be used with certain memory devices to select the upper and lower bytes within a 16-bit wide data word. 12-bit 8-bit ADDRESS SHIFTING ON THE EXTERNAL BUS 20-bit © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. AD15:AD0 (PORTD<7:0>, PORTE<7:0>) Preliminary Address Only Lines (and Corresponding Ports) Ports Available for I/O AD11:AD8 (PORTE<3:0>) PORTE<7:4>, All of PORTH AD15:AD8 (PORTE<7:0>) All of PORTH A19:A16, AD15:AD8 (PORTH<3:0>, PORTE<7:0>) — — All of PORTH A19:A16 (PORTH<3:0>) — DS39778B-page 99 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 7.3 Wait States While it may be assumed that external memory devices will operate at the microcontroller clock rate, this is often not the case. In fact, many devices require longer times to write or retrieve data than the time allowed by the execution of table read or table write operations. To compensate for this, the external memory bus can be configured to add a fixed delay to each table operation using the bus. Wait states are enabled by setting the WAIT Configuration bit. When enabled, the amount of delay is set by the WAIT1:WAIT0 bits (MEMCON<5:4>). The delay is based on multiples of microcontroller instruction cycle time and are added following the instruction cycle when the table operation is executed. The range is from no delay to 3 TCY (default value). 7.4 Port Pin Weak Pull-ups With the exception of the upper address lines, A19:A16, the pins associated with the external memory bus are equipped with weak pull-ups. The pull-ups are controlled by the upper three bits of the PORTG register (PORTG<7:5>). They are named RDPU, REPU and RJPU and control pull-ups on PORTD, PORTE and PORTJ, respectively. Setting one of these bits enables the corresponding pull-ups for that port. All pull-ups are disabled by default on all device Resets. functions. When EBDIS = 0, the pins function as the external bus. When EBDIS = 1, the pins function as I/O ports. If the device fetches or accesses external memory while EBDIS = 1, the pins will switch to external bus. If the EBDIS bit is set by a program executing from external memory, the action of setting the bit will be delayed until the program branches into the internal memory. At that time, the pins will change from external bus to I/O ports. If the device is executing out of internal memory when EBDIS = 0, the memory bus address/data and control pins will not be active. They will go to a state where the active address/data pins are tri-state; the CE, OE, WRH, WRL, UB and LB signals are ‘1’ and ALE and BA0 are ‘0’. Note that only those pins associated with the current address width are forced to tri-state; the other pins continue to function as I/O. In the case of 16-bit address width, for example, only AD<15:0> (PORTD and PORTE) are affected; A19:A16 (PORTH<3:0>) continue to function as I/O. In all external memory modes, the bus takes priority over any other peripherals that may share pins with it. This includes the Parallel Master Port and serial communication modules which would otherwise take priority over the I/O port. 7.6 16-Bit Data Width Modes In Extended Microcontroller mode, the port pull-ups can be useful in preserving the memory state on the external bus while the bus is temporarily disabled (EBDIS = ‘1’). In 16-Bit Data Width mode, the external memory interface can be connected to external memories in three different configurations: 7.5 • 16-Bit Byte Write • 16-Bit Word Write • 16-Bit Byte Select Program Memory Modes and the External Memory Bus The PIC18F87J11 Family of devices is capable of operating in one of two program memory modes, using combinations of on-chip and external program memory. The functions of the multiplexed port pins depend on the program memory mode selected, as well as the setting of the EBDIS bit. In Microcontroller Mode, the bus is not active and the pins have their port functions only. Writes to the MEMCOM register are not permitted. The Reset value of EBDIS (‘0’) is ignored and EMB pins behave as I/O ports. In Extended Microcontroller Mode, the external program memory bus shares I/O port functions on the pins. When the device is fetching or doing table read/table write operations on the external program memory space, the pins will have the external bus function. If the device is fetching and accessing internal program memory locations only, the EBDIS control bit will change the pins from external memory to I/O port DS39778B-page 100 The configuration to be used is determined by the WM1:WM0 bits in the MEMCON register (MEMCON<1:0>). These three different configurations allow the designer maximum flexibility in using both 8-bit and 16-bit devices with 16-bit data. For all 16-bit modes, the Address Latch Enable (ALE) pin indicates that the address bits, AD<15:0>, are available on the external memory interface bus. Following the address latch, the Output Enable signal (OE) will enable both bytes of program memory at once to form a 16-bit instruction word. The Chip Enable signal (CE) is active at any time that the microcontroller accesses external memory, whether reading or writing; it is inactive (asserted high) whenever the device is in Sleep mode. In Byte Select mode, JEDEC standard Flash memories will require BA0 for the byte address line and one I/O line to select between Byte and Word mode. The other 16-bit modes do not need BA0. JEDEC standard static RAM memories will use the UB or LB signals for byte selection. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 7.6.1 16-BIT BYTE WRITE MODE Figure 7-1 shows an example of 16-Bit Byte Write mode for PIC18F87J11 Family devices. This mode is used for two separate 8-bit memories connected for 16-bit operation. This generally includes basic EPROM and Flash devices. It allows table writes to byte-wide external memories. FIGURE 7-1: During a TBLWT instruction cycle, the TABLAT data is presented on the upper and lower bytes of the AD15:AD0 bus. The appropriate WRH or WRL control line is strobed on the LSb of the TBLPTR. 16-BIT BYTE WRITE MODE EXAMPLE D<7:0> PIC18F87J11 AD<7:0> (MSB) 373 A<19:0> D<15:8> (LSB) A<x:0> A<x:0> D<7:0> D<7:0> D<7:0> CE AD<15:8> 373 OE CE WR(2) OE WR(2) ALE A<19:16>(1) CE OE WRH WRL Address Bus Data Bus Control Lines Note 1: 2: Upper order address lines are used only for 20-bit address widths. This signal only applies to table writes. See Section 6.1 “Table Reads and Table Writes”. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 101 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 7.6.2 16-BIT WORD WRITE MODE Figure 7-2 shows an example of 16-Bit Word Write mode for PIC18F87J11 Family devices. This mode is used for word-wide memories which include some of the EPROM and Flash-type memories. This mode allows opcode fetches and table reads from all forms of 16-bit memory and table writes to any type of word-wide external memories. This method makes a distinction between TBLWT cycles to even or odd addresses. During a TBLWT cycle to an even address (TBLPTR<0> = 0), the TABLAT data is transferred to a holding latch and the external address data bus is tri-stated for the data portion of the bus cycle. No write signals are activated. FIGURE 7-2: During a TBLWT cycle to an odd address (TBLPTR<0> = 1), the TABLAT data is presented on the upper byte of the AD15:AD0 bus. The contents of the holding latch are presented on the lower byte of the AD15:AD0 bus. The WRH signal is strobed for each write cycle; the WRL pin is unused. The signal on the BA0 pin indicates the LSb of the TBLPTR, but it is left unconnected. Instead, the UB and LB signals are active to select both bytes. The obvious limitation to this method is that the table write must be done in pairs on a specific word boundary to correctly write a word location. 16-BIT WORD WRITE MODE EXAMPLE PIC18F87J11 AD<7:0> 373 A<20:1> D<15:0> A<x:0> JEDEC Word EPROM Memory D<15:0> CE OE WR(2) AD<15:8> 373 ALE A<19:16>(1) CE OE WRH Address Bus Data Bus Control Lines Note 1: 2: Upper order address lines are used only for 20-bit address widths. This signal only applies to table writes. See Section 6.1 “Table Reads and Table Writes”. DS39778B-page 102 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 7.6.3 16-BIT BYTE SELECT MODE Figure 7-3 shows an example of 16-Bit Byte Select mode. This mode allows table write operations to word-wide external memories with byte selection capability. This generally includes both word-wide Flash and SRAM devices. During a TBLWT cycle, the TABLAT data is presented on the upper and lower byte of the AD15:AD0 bus. The WRH signal is strobed for each write cycle; the WRL pin is not used. The BA0 or UB/LB signals are used to select the byte to be written, based on the Least Significant bit of the TBLPTR register. FIGURE 7-3: Flash and SRAM devices use different control signal combinations to implement Byte Select mode. JEDEC standard Flash memories require that a controller I/O port pin be connected to the memory’s BYTE/WORD pin to provide the select signal. They also use the BA0 signal from the controller as a byte address. JEDEC standard static RAM memories, on the other hand, use the UB or LB signals to select the byte. 16-BIT BYTE SELECT MODE EXAMPLE PIC18F87J11 AD<7:0> A<20:1> A<x:1> 373 JEDEC Word FLASH Memory D<15:0> D<15:0> 138(3) AD<15:8> 373 CE A0 BYTE/WORD ALE OE WR(1) A<19:16>(2) OE WRH WRL A<20:1> A<x:1> BA0 JEDEC Word SRAM Memory I/O D<15:0> LB CE LB UB UB D<15:0> OE WR(1) Address Bus Data Bus Control Lines Note 1: This signal only applies to table writes. See Section 6.1 “Table Reads and Table Writes”. 2: Upper order address lines are used only for 20-bit address width. 3: Demultiplexing is only required when multiple memory devices are accessed. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 103 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 7.6.4 16-BIT MODE TIMING The presentation of control signals on the external memory bus is different for the various operating modes. Typical signal timing diagrams are shown in Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-5. FIGURE 7-4: EXTERNAL MEMORY BUS TIMING FOR TBLRD (EXTENDED MICROCONTROLLER MODE) Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 0Ch A<19:16> CF33h AD<15:0> 9256h CE ALE OE Memory Cycle Opcode Fetch TBLRD * from 000100h Opcode Fetch MOVLW 55h from 000102h TBLRD 92h from 199E67h Opcode Fetch ADDLW 55h from 000104h Instruction Execution INST(PC – 2) TBLRD Cycle 1 TBLRD Cycle 2 MOVLW FIGURE 7-5: EXTERNAL MEMORY BUS TIMING FOR SLEEP (EXTENDED MICROCONTROLLER MODE) Q1 Q2 Q4 Q1 Q2 3AAAh Q3 Q4 Q1 00h 00h A<19:16> AD<15:0> Q3 0003h 0E55h 3AABh CE ALE OE Memory Cycle Instruction Execution DS39778B-page 104 Opcode Fetch SLEEP from 007554h Opcode Fetch MOVLW 55h from 007556h INST(PC – 2) SLEEP Preliminary Sleep Mode, Bus Inactive © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 7.7 8-Bit Data Width Mode will enable one byte of program memory for a portion of the instruction cycle, then BA0 will change and the second byte will be enabled to form the 16-bit instruction word. The Least Significant bit of the address, BA0, must be connected to the memory devices in this mode. The Chip Enable signal (CE) is active at any time that the microcontroller accesses external memory, whether reading or writing. It is inactive (asserted high) whenever the device is in Sleep mode. In 8-Bit Data Width mode, the external memory bus operates only in Multiplexed mode; that is, data shares the 8 Least Significant bits of the address bus. Figure 7-6 shows an example of 8-Bit Multiplexed mode for 80-pin devices. This mode is used for a single 8-bit memory connected for 16-bit operation. The instructions will be fetched as two 8-bit bytes on a shared data/address bus. The two bytes are sequentially fetched within one instruction cycle (TCY). Therefore, the designer must choose external memory devices according to timing calculations based on 1/2 TCY (2 times the instruction rate). For proper memory speed selection, glue logic propagation delay times must be considered, along with setup and hold times. This generally includes basic EPROM and Flash devices. It allows table writes to byte-wide external memories. During a TBLWT instruction cycle, the TABLAT data is presented on the upper and lower bytes of the AD15:AD0 bus. The appropriate level of the BA0 control line is strobed on the LSb of the TBLPTR. The Address Latch Enable (ALE) pin indicates that the address bits, AD<15:0>, are available on the external memory interface bus. The Output Enable signal (OE) FIGURE 7-6: 8-BIT MULTIPLEXED MODE EXAMPLE D<7:0> PIC18F87J11 AD<7:0> ALE 373 A<19:0> A<x:1> A0 D<15:8> D<7:0> AD<15:8>(1) A<19:16> CE (1) OE WR(2) BA0 CE OE WRL Address Bus Data Bus Control Lines Note 1: 2: Upper order address bits are only used for 20-bit address width. The upper AD byte is used for all address widths except 8-bit. This signal only applies to table writes. See Section 6.1 “Table Reads and Table Writes”. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 105 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 7.7.1 8-BIT MODE TIMING The presentation of control signals on the external memory bus is different for the various operating modes. Typical signal timing diagrams are shown in Figure 7-7 and Figure 7-8. FIGURE 7-7: EXTERNAL MEMORY BUS TIMING FOR TBLRD (EXTENDED MICROCONTROLLER MODE) Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 A<19:16> 0Ch AD<15:8> CFh 33h AD<7:0> Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 92h CE ALE OE Memory Cycle Opcode Fetch TBLRD * from 000100h Opcode Fetch MOVLW 55h from 000102h TBLRD 92h from 199E67h Opcode Fetch ADDLW 55h from 000104h Instruction Execution INST(PC – 2) TBLRD Cycle 1 TBLRD Cycle 2 MOVLW FIGURE 7-8: EXTERNAL MEMORY BUS TIMING FOR SLEEP (EXTENDED MICROCONTROLLER MODE) Q1 Q2 Q4 Q1 Q2 3Ah AD<15:8> AAh 00h Q3 Q4 Q1 00h 00h A<19:16> AD<7:0> Q3 3Ah 03h ABh 0Eh 55h BA0 CE ALE OE Memory Cycle Instruction Execution DS39778B-page 106 Opcode Fetch SLEEP from 007554h Opcode Fetch MOVLW 55h from 007556h INST(PC – 2) SLEEP Preliminary Sleep Mode, Bus Inactive © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 7.8 Operation in Power-Managed Modes In alternate, power-managed Run modes, the external bus continues to operate normally. If a clock source with a lower speed is selected, bus operations will run at that speed. In these cases, excessive access times for the external memory may result if wait states have been enabled and added to external memory operations. If operations in a lower power Run mode are anticipated, users should provide in their applications for adjusting memory access times at the lower clock speeds. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. In Sleep and Idle modes, the microcontroller core does not need to access data; bus operations are suspended. The state of the external bus is frozen, with the address/data pins and most of the control pins holding at the same state they were in when the mode was invoked. The only potential changes are the CE, LB and UB pins, which are held at logic high. Preliminary DS39778B-page 107 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 108 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 8.0 8 x 8 HARDWARE MULTIPLIER 8.1 Introduction EXAMPLE 8-1: MOVF MULWF All PIC18 devices include an 8 x 8 hardware multiplier as part of the ALU. The multiplier performs an unsigned operation and yields a 16-bit result that is stored in the product register pair, PRODH:PRODL. The multiplier’s operation does not affect any flags in the STATUS register. ARG1, W ARG2 EXAMPLE 8-2: Making multiplication a hardware operation allows it to be completed in a single instruction cycle. This has the advantages of higher computational throughput and reduced code size for multiplication algorithms and allows the PIC18 devices to be used in many applications previously reserved for digital signal processors. A comparison of various hardware and software multiply operations, along with the savings in memory and execution time, is shown in Table 8-1. 8.2 8 x 8 UNSIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE ; ; ARG1 * ARG2 -> ; PRODH:PRODL 8 x 8 SIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE MOVF MULWF ARG1, W ARG2 BTFSC SUBWF ARG2, SB PRODH, F MOVF BTFSC SUBWF ARG2, W ARG1, SB PRODH, F ; ; ; ; ; ARG1 * ARG2 -> PRODH:PRODL Test Sign Bit PRODH = PRODH - ARG1 ; Test Sign Bit ; PRODH = PRODH ; - ARG2 Operation Example 8-1 shows the instruction sequence for an 8 x 8 unsigned multiplication. Only one instruction is required when one of the arguments is already loaded in the WREG register. Example 8-2 shows the sequence to do an 8 x 8 signed multiplication. To account for the sign bits of the arguments, each argument’s Most Significant bit (MSb) is tested and the appropriate subtractions are done. TABLE 8-1: PERFORMANCE COMPARISON FOR VARIOUS MULTIPLY OPERATIONS Routine 8 x 8 unsigned 8 x 8 signed 16 x 16 unsigned 16 x 16 signed Multiply Method Without hardware multiply Program Memory (Words) Cycles (Max) @ 48 MHz @ 10 MHz @ 4 MHz 13 69 5.7 μs 27.6 μs 69 μs Time Hardware multiply 1 1 83.3 ns 400 ns 1 μs Without hardware multiply 33 91 7.5 μs 36.4 μs 91 μs Hardware multiply 6 6 500 ns 2.4 μs 6 μs Without hardware multiply 21 242 20.1 μs 96.8 μs 242 μs Hardware multiply 28 28 2.3 μs 11.2 μs 28 μs Without hardware multiply 52 254 21.6 μs 102.6 μs 254 μs Hardware multiply 35 40 3.3 μs 16.0 μs 40 μs © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 109 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY Example 8-3 shows the sequence to do a 16 x 16 unsigned multiplication. Equation 8-1 shows the algorithm that is used. The 32-bit result is stored in four registers (RES3:RES0). EQUATION 8-1: RES3:RES0 = = EXAMPLE 8-3: 16 x 16 UNSIGNED MULTIPLICATION ALGORITHM ARG1H:ARG1L • ARG2H:ARG2L (ARG1H • ARG2H • 216) + (ARG1H • ARG2L • 28) + (ARG1L • ARG2H • 28) + (ARG1L • ARG2L) EQUATION 8-2: RES3:RES0 = ARG1H:ARG1L • ARG2H:ARG2L = (ARG1H • ARG2H • 216) + (ARG1H • ARG2L • 28) + (ARG1L • ARG2H • 28) + (ARG1L • ARG2L) + (-1 • ARG2H<7> • ARG1H:ARG1L • 216) + (-1 • ARG1H<7> • ARG2H:ARG2L • 216) EXAMPLE 8-4: 16 x 16 UNSIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE MOVF MULWF ARG1L, W ARG2L MOVFF MOVFF PRODH, RES1 PRODL, RES0 MOVF MULWF ARG1H, W ARG2H MOVFF MOVFF PRODH, RES3 PRODL, RES2 MOVF MULWF ARG1L, W ARG2H MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F MOVF MULWF ARG1H, W ARG2L MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F ; ARG1L * ARG2L-> ; PRODH:PRODL ; ; ARG1L * ARG2H-> PRODH:PRODL Add cross products ARG1H * ARG2L-> PRODH:PRODL Add cross products MOVFF MOVFF PRODH, RES1 PRODL, RES0 MOVF MULWF ARG1H, W ARG2H MOVFF MOVFF PRODH, RES3 PRODL, RES2 MOVF MULWF ARG1L, W ARG2H MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F MOVF MULWF ARG1H, W ARG2L MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F BTFSS BRA MOVF SUBWF MOVF SUBWFB ARG2H, 7 SIGN_ARG1 ARG1L, W RES2 ARG1H, W RES3 ; ARG2H:ARG2L neg? ; no, check ARG1 ; ; ; ARG1H, 7 CONT_CODE ARG2L, W RES2 ARG2H, W RES3 ; ARG1H:ARG1L neg? ; no, done ; ; ; ; ARG1L * ARG2L -> ; PRODH:PRODL ; ; ; ARG1H * ARG2H -> ; PRODH:PRODL ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ARG1L * ARG2H -> PRODH:PRODL Add cross products ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ARG1H * ARG2L -> PRODH:PRODL Add cross products ; Example 8-4 shows the sequence to do a 16 x 16 signed multiply. Equation 8-2 shows the algorithm used. The 32-bit result is stored in four registers (RES3:RES0). To account for the sign bits of the arguments, the MSb for each argument pair is tested and the appropriate subtractions are done. DS39778B-page 110 ARG1L, W ARG2L ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; MOVF MULWF ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; 16 x 16 SIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE ; ; ; ARG1H * ARG2H-> ; PRODH:PRODL ; ; 16 x 16 SIGNED MULTIPLICATION ALGORITHM ; SIGN_ARG1 BTFSS BRA MOVF SUBWF MOVF SUBWFB ; CONT_CODE : Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 9.0 INTERRUPTS Members of the PIC18F87J11 Family of devices have multiple interrupt sources and an interrupt priority feature that allows most interrupt sources to be assigned a high-priority level or a low-priority level. The high-priority interrupt vector is at 0008h and the low-priority interrupt vector is at 0018h. High-priority interrupt events will interrupt any low-priority interrupts that may be in progress. There are thirteen registers which are used to control interrupt operation. These registers are: • • • • • • • RCON INTCON INTCON2 INTCON3 PIR1, PIR2, PIR3 PIE1, PIE2, PIE3 IPR1, IPR2, IPR3 It is recommended that the Microchip header files supplied with MPLAB® IDE be used for the symbolic bit names in these registers. This allows the assembler/compiler to automatically take care of the placement of these bits within the specified register. In general, interrupt sources have three bits to control their operation. They are: • Flag bit to indicate that an interrupt event occurred • Enable bit that allows program execution to branch to the interrupt vector address when the flag bit is set • Priority bit to select high-priority or low-priority When the IPEN bit is cleared (default state), the interrupt priority feature is disabled and interrupts are compatible with PIC16 mid-range devices. In Compatibility mode, the interrupt priority bits for each source have no effect. INTCON<6> is the PEIE bit which enables/disables all peripheral interrupt sources. INTCON<7> is the GIE bit which enables/disables all interrupt sources. All interrupts branch to address 0008h in Compatibility mode. When an interrupt is responded to, the global interrupt enable bit is cleared to disable further interrupts. If the IPEN bit is cleared, this is the GIE bit. If interrupt priority levels are used, this will be either the GIEH or GIEL bit. High-priority interrupt sources can interrupt a low-priority interrupt. Low-priority interrupts are not processed while high-priority interrupts are in progress. The return address is pushed onto the stack and the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector address (0008h or 0018h). Once in the Interrupt Service Routine, the source(s) of the interrupt can be determined by polling the interrupt flag bits. The interrupt flag bits must be cleared in software before re-enabling interrupts to avoid recursive interrupts. The “return from interrupt” instruction, RETFIE, exits the interrupt routine and sets the GIE bit (GIEH or GIEL if priority levels are used) which re-enables interrupts. For external interrupt events, such as the INTx pins or the PORTB input change interrupt, the interrupt latency will be three to four instruction cycles. The exact latency is the same for one or two-cycle instructions. Individual interrupt flag bits are set regardless of the status of their corresponding enable bit or the GIE bit. Note: The interrupt priority feature is enabled by setting the IPEN bit (RCON<7>). When interrupt priority is enabled, there are two bits which enable interrupts globally. Setting the GIEH bit (INTCON<7>) enables all interrupts that have the priority bit set (high priority). Setting the GIEL bit (INTCON<6>) enables all interrupts that have the priority bit cleared (low priority). When the interrupt flag, enable bit and appropriate global interrupt enable bit are set, the interrupt will vector immediately to address 0008h or 0018h, depending on the priority bit setting. Individual interrupts can be disabled through their corresponding enable bits. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Do not use the MOVFF instruction to modify any of the interrupt control registers while any interrupt is enabled. Doing so may cause erratic microcontroller behavior. DS39778B-page 111 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 9-1: PIC18F87J11 FAMILY INTERRUPT LOGIC Wake-up if in Idle or Sleep modes TMR0IF TMR0IE TMR0IP RBIF RBIE RBIP INT0IF INT0IE INT1IF INT1IE INT1IP INT2IF INT2IE INT2IP INT3IF INT3IE INT3IP PIR1<7:0> PIE1<7:0> IPR1<7:0> PIR2<7:5, 3:0> PIE2<7:5, 3:0> IPR2<7:5, 3:0> Interrupt to CPU Vector to Location 0008h GIE/GIEH IPEN PIR3<7, 0> PIE3<7, 0> IPR3<7, 0> IPEN PEIE/GIEL IPEN High-Priority Interrupt Generation Low-Priority Interrupt Generation PIR1<7:0> PIE1<7:0> IPR1<7:0> PIR2<7:5, 3:0> PIE2<7:5, 3:0> IPR2<7:5, 3:0> PIR3<7, 0> PIE3<7, 0> IPR3<7, 0> TMR0IF TMR0IE TMR0IP RBIF RBIE RBIP Interrupt to CPU Vector to Location 0018h IPEN GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL INT1IF INT1IE INT1IP INT2IF INT2IE INT2IP INT3IF INT3IE INT3IP DS39778B-page 112 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 9.1 INTCON Registers Note: The INTCON registers are readable and writable registers which contain various enable, priority and flag bits. REGISTER 9-1: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the global interrupt enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling. INTCON: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-x GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 GIE/GIEH: Global Interrupt Enable bit When IPEN = 0: 1 = Enables all unmasked interrupts 0 = Disables all interrupts When IPEN = 1: 1 = Enables all high-priority interrupts 0 = Disables all interrupts bit 6 PEIE/GIEL: Peripheral Interrupt Enable bit When IPEN = 0: 1 = Enables all unmasked peripheral interrupts 0 = Disables all peripheral interrupts When IPEN = 1: 1 = Enables all low-priority peripheral interrupts 0 = Disables all low-priority peripheral interrupts bit 5 TMR0IE: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR0 overflow interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR0 overflow interrupt bit 4 INT0IE: INT0 External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT0 external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT0 external interrupt bit 3 RBIE: RB Port Change Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the RB port change interrupt 0 = Disables the RB port change interrupt bit 2 TMR0IF: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR0 register has overflowed (must be cleared in software) 0 = TMR0 register did not overflow bit 1 INT0IF: INT0 External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT0 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = The INT0 external interrupt did not occur bit 0 RBIF: RB Port Change Interrupt Flag bit(1) 1 = At least one of the RB7:RB4 pins changed state (must be cleared in software) 0 = None of the RB7:RB4 pins have changed state Note 1: A mismatch condition will continue to set this bit. Reading PORTB will end the mismatch condition and allow the bit to be cleared. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 113 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 9-2: INTCON2: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER 2 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 RBPU INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2 INTEDG3 TMR0IP INT3IP RBIP bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 RBPU: PORTB Pull-up Enable bit 1 = All PORTB pull-ups are disabled 0 = PORTB pull-ups are enabled by individual port latch values bit 6 INTEDG0: External Interrupt 0 Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge 0 = Interrupt on falling edge bit 5 INTEDG1: External Interrupt 1 Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge 0 = Interrupt on falling edge bit 4 INTEDG2: External Interrupt 2 Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge 0 = Interrupt on falling edge bit 3 INTEDG3: External Interrupt 3 Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge 0 = Interrupt on falling edge bit 2 TMR0IP: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 1 INT3IP: INT3 External Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 0 RBIP: RB Port Change Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority Note: x = Bit is unknown Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the global interrupt enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling. DS39778B-page 114 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 9-3: INTCON3: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER 3 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 INT2IP INT1IP INT3IE INT2IE INT1IE INT3IF INT2IF INT1IF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 INT2IP: INT2 External Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 6 INT1IP: INT1 External Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 5 INT3IE: INT3 External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT3 external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT3 external interrupt bit 4 INT2IE: INT2 External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT2 external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT2 external interrupt bit 3 INT1IE: INT1 External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT1 external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT1 external interrupt bit 2 INT3IF: INT3 External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT3 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = The INT3 external interrupt did not occur bit 1 INT2IF: INT2 External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT2 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = The INT2 external interrupt did not occur bit 0 INT1IF: INT1 External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT1 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = The INT1 external interrupt did not occur Note: x = Bit is unknown Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the global interrupt enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 115 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 9.2 PIR Registers The PIR registers contain the individual flag bits for the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral interrupt sources, there are three Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) registers (PIR1, PIR2, PIR3). REGISTER 9-4: Note 1: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the Global Interrupt Enable bit, GIE (INTCON<7>). 2: User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are cleared prior to enabling an interrupt and after servicing that interrupt. PIR1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 PMPIF: Parallel Master Port Read/Write Interrupt Flag bit 1 = A read or a write operation has taken place (must be cleared in software) 0 = No read or write has occurred bit 6 ADIF: A/D Converter Interrupt Flag bit 1 = An A/D conversion completed (must be cleared in software) 0 = The A/D conversion is not complete bit 5 RC1IF: EUSART1 Receive Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The EUSART1 receive buffer, RCREG1, is full (cleared when RCREG1 is read) 0 = The EUSART1 receive buffer is empty bit 4 TX1IF: EUSART1 Transmit Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The EUSART1 transmit buffer, TXREG1, is empty (cleared when TXREG1 is written) 0 = The EUSART1 transmit buffer is full bit 3 SSP1IF: MSSP1 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The transmission/reception is complete (must be cleared in software) 0 = Waiting to transmit/receive bit 2 CCP1IF: ECCP1 Interrupt Flag bit Capture mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred Compare mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred PWM mode: Unused in this mode. bit 1 TMR2IF: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR2 to PR2 match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR2 to PR2 match occurred bit 0 TMR1IF: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR1 register overflowed (must be cleared in software) 0 = TMR1 register did not overflow DS39778B-page 116 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 9-5: R/W-0 PIR2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 2 R/W-0 OSCFIF CM2IF R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CM1IF — BCL1IF LVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 OSCFIF: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Device oscillator failed, clock input has changed to INTOSC (must be cleared in software) 0 = Device clock operating bit 6 CM2IF: Comparator 2 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Comparator input has changed (must be cleared in software) 0 = Comparator input has not changed bit 5 CM1IF: Comparator 1 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Comparator input has changed (must be cleared in software) 0 = Comparator input has not changed bit 4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 BCL1IF: Bus Collision Interrupt Flag bit (MSSP1 module) 1 = A bus collision occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No bus collision occurred bit 2 LVDIF: Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Flag bit 1 = A low-voltage condition occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = VDDCORE has not fallen below the low-voltage trip point (about 2.45V) bit 1 TMR3IF: TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR3 register overflowed (must be cleared in software) 0 = TMR3 register did not overflow bit 0 CCP2IF: ECCP2 Interrupt Flag bit Capture mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred Compare mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred PWM mode: Unused in this mode. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 117 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 9-6: PIR3: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 3 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 SSP2IF: MSSP2 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The transmission/reception is complete (must be cleared in software) 0 = Waiting to transmit/receive bit 6 BCL2IF: Bus Collision Interrupt Flag bit (MSSP2 module) 1 = A bus collision occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No bus collision occurred bit 5 RC2IF: EUSART2 Receive Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The EUSART2 receive buffer, RCREG2, is full (cleared when RCREG2 is read) 0 = The EUSART2 receive buffer is empty bit 4 TX2IF: EUSART2 Transmit Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The EUSART2 transmit buffer, TXREG2, is empty (cleared when TXREG2 is written) 0 = The EUSART2 transmit buffer is full bit 3 TMR4IF: TMR4 to PR4 Match Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR4 to PR4 match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR4 to PR4 match occurred bit 2 CCP5IF: CCP5 Interrupt Flag bit Capture mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred Compare mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred PWM mode: Unused in this mode. bit 1 CCP4IF: CCP4 Interrupt Flag bit Capture mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred Compare mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred PWM mode: Unused in this mode. bit 0 CCP3IF: ECCP3 Interrupt Flag bit Capture mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred Compare mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred PWM mode: Unused in this mode. DS39778B-page 118 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 9.3 PIE Registers The PIE registers contain the individual enable bits for the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral interrupt sources, there are three Peripheral Interrupt Enable registers (PIE1, PIE2, PIE3). When IPEN = 0, the PEIE bit must be set to enable any of these peripheral interrupts. REGISTER 9-7: PIE1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 PMPIE: Parallel Master Port Read/Write Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the PM read/write interrupt 0 = Disables the PM read/write interrupt bit 6 ADIE: A/D Converter Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the A/D interrupt 0 = Disables the A/D interrupt bit 5 RC1IE: EUSART1 Receive Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the EUSART1 receive interrupt 0 = Disables the EUSART1 receive interrupt bit 4 TX1IE: EUSART1 Transmit Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the EUSART1 transmit interrupt 0 = Disables the EUSART1 transmit interrupt bit 3 SSP1IE: MSSP1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the MSSP1 interrupt 0 = Disables the MSSP1 interrupt bit 2 CCP1IE: ECCP1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the ECCP1 interrupt 0 = Disables the ECCP1 interrupt bit 1 TMR2IE: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR2 to PR2 match interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR2 to PR2 match interrupt bit 0 TMR1IE: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR1 overflow interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR1 overflow interrupt © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39778B-page 119 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 9-8: PIE2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 2 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 OSCFIE CM2IE CM1IE — BCL1IE LVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 OSCFIE: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 6 CM2IE: Comparator 2 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 5 CM1IE: Comparator 1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 BCL1IE: Bus Collision Interrupt Enable bit (MSSP1 module) 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 2 LVDIE: Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 1 TMR3IE: TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 0 CCP2IE: ECCP2 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled DS39778B-page 120 Preliminary x = Bit is unknown © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 9-9: PIE3: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 3 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 SSP2IE: MSSP2 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 6 BCL2IE: Bus Collision Interrupt Enable bit (MSSP2 module) 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 5 RC2IE: EUSART2 Receive Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 4 TX2IE: EUSART2 Transmit Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 3 TMR4IE: TMR4 to PR4 Match Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 2 CCP5IE: CCP5 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 1 CCP4IE: CCP4 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 0 CCP3IE: ECCP3 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39778B-page 121 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 9.4 IPR Registers The IPR registers contain the individual priority bits for the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral interrupt sources, there are three Peripheral Interrupt Priority registers (IPR1, IPR2, IPR3). Using the priority bits requires that the Interrupt Priority Enable (IPEN) bit be set. REGISTER 9-10: IPR1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 PMPIP: Parallel Master Port Read/Write Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 6 ADIP: A/D Converter Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 5 RC1IP: EUSART1 Receive Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 4 TX1IP: EUSART1 Transmit Interrupt Priority bit x = Bit is unknown 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 3 SSP1IP: MSSP1 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 2 CCP1IP: ECCP1 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 1 TMR2IP: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 0 TMR1IP: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority DS39778B-page 122 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 9-11: IPR2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 2 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 OSCFIP CM2IP CM1IP — BCL1IP LVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 OSCFIP: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 6 CM2IP: Comparator 2 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 5 C12IP: Comparator 1 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 BCL1IP: Bus Collision Interrupt Priority bit (MSSP1 module) 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 2 LVDIP: Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 1 TMR3IP: TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 0 CCP2IP: ECCP2 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39778B-page 123 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 9-12: IPR3: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 3 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 SSP2IP: MSSP2 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 6 BCL2IP: Bus Collision Interrupt Priority bit (MSSP2 module) 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 5 RC2IP: EUSART2 Receive Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 4 TX2IP: EUSART2 Transmit Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 3 TMR4IE: TMR4 to PR4 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 2 CCP5IP: CCP5 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 1 CCP4IP: CCP4 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 0 CCP3IP: ECCP3 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority DS39778B-page 124 Preliminary x = Bit is unknown © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 9.5 RCON Register The RCON register contains bits used to determine the cause of the last Reset or wake-up from Idle or Sleep modes. RCON also contains the bit that enables interrupt priorities (IPEN). REGISTER 9-13: RCON: RESET CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R-1 R-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 IPEN — CM RI TO PD POR BOR bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 IPEN: Interrupt Priority Enable bit 1 = Enable priority levels on interrupts 0 = Disable priority levels on interrupts (PIC16CXXX Compatibility mode) bit 6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 CM: Configuration Mismatch Flag bit For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1. bit 4 RI: RESET Instruction Flag bit For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1. bit 3 TO: Watchdog Timer Time-out Flag bit For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1. bit 2 PD: Power-Down Detection Flag bit For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1. bit 1 POR: Power-on Reset Status bit For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1. bit 0 BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39778B-page 125 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 9.6 INTx Pin Interrupts 9.7 TMR0 Interrupt External interrupts on the RB0/INT0, RB1/INT1, RB2/INT2 and RB3/INT3 pins are edge-triggered. If the corresponding INTEDGx bit in the INTCON2 register is set (= 1), the interrupt is triggered by a rising edge; if the bit is clear, the trigger is on the falling edge. When a valid edge appears on the RBx/INTx pin, the corresponding flag bit, INTxIF, is set. This interrupt can be disabled by clearing the corresponding enable bit, INTxIE. Flag bit, INTxIF, must be cleared in software in the Interrupt Service Routine before re-enabling the interrupt. In 8-bit mode (which is the default), an overflow in the TMR0 register (FFh → 00h) will set flag bit, TMR0IF. In 16-bit mode, an overflow in the TMR0H:TMR0L register pair (FFFFh → 0000h) will set TMR0IF. The interrupt can be enabled/disabled by setting/clearing enable bit, TMR0IE (INTCON<5>). Interrupt priority for Timer0 is determined by the value contained in the interrupt priority bit, TMR0IP (INTCON2<2>). See Section 12.0 “Timer0 Module” for further details on the Timer0 module. All external interrupts (INT0, INT1, INT2 and INT3) can wake-up the processor from the power-managed modes if bit INTxIE was set prior to going into the power-managed modes. If the Global Interrupt Enable bit, GIE, is set, the processor will branch to the interrupt vector following wake-up. 9.8 Interrupt priority for INT1, INT2 and INT3 is determined by the value contained in the interrupt priority bits, INT1IP (INTCON3<6>), INT2IP (INTCON3<7>) and INT3IP (INTCON2<1>). There is no priority bit associated with INT0. It is always a high-priority interrupt source. EXAMPLE 9-1: An input change on PORTB<7:4> sets flag bit, RBIF (INTCON<0>). The interrupt can be enabled/disabled by setting/clearing enable bit, RBIE (INTCON<3>). Interrupt priority for PORTB interrupt-on-change is determined by the value contained in the interrupt priority bit, RBIP (INTCON2<0>). 9.9 Context Saving During Interrupts During interrupts, the return PC address is saved on the stack. Additionally, the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers are saved on the Fast Return Stack. If a fast return from interrupt is not used (see Section 5.3 “Data Memory Organization”), the user may need to save the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers on entry to the Interrupt Service Routine. Depending on the user’s application, other registers may also need to be saved. Example 9-1 saves and restores the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers during an Interrupt Service Routine. SAVING STATUS, WREG AND BSR REGISTERS IN RAM MOVWF W_TEMP MOVFF STATUS, STATUS_TEMP MOVFF BSR, BSR_TEMP ; ; USER ISR CODE ; MOVFF BSR_TEMP, BSR MOVF W_TEMP, W MOVFF STATUS_TEMP, STATUS DS39778B-page 126 PORTB Interrupt-on-Change ; W_TEMP is in virtual bank ; STATUS_TEMP located anywhere ; BSR_TMEP located anywhere ; Restore BSR ; Restore WREG ; Restore STATUS Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 10.0 I/O PORTS 10.1 Depending on the device selected and features enabled, there are up to nine ports available. Some pins of the I/O ports are multiplexed with an alternate function from the peripheral features on the device. In general, when a peripheral is enabled, that pin may not be used as a general purpose I/O pin. Each port has three memory-mapped registers for its operation: • TRIS register (Data Direction register) • PORT register (reads the levels on the pins of the device) • LAT register (Output Latch register) Reading the PORT register reads the current status of the pins, whereas writing to the PORT register writes to the Output Latch (LAT) register. Setting a TRIS bit (= 1) makes the corresponding PORT pin an input (i.e., puts the corresponding output driver in a high-impedance mode). Clearing a TRIS bit (= 0) makes the corresponding PORT pin an output (i.e., puts the contents of the corresponding LAT bit on the selected pin). I/O Port Pin Capabilities When developing an application, the capabilities of the port pins must be considered. Outputs on some pins have higher output drive strength than others. Similarly, some pins can tolerate higher than VDD input levels. 10.1.1 INPUT PINS AND VOLTAGE CONSIDERATIONS The voltage tolerance of pins used as device inputs is dependent on the pin’s input function. Pins that are used as digital only inputs are able to handle DC voltages up to 5.5V, a level typical for digital logic circuits. In contrast, pins that also have analog input functions of any kind (such as A/D and comparator inputs) can only tolerate voltages up to VDD. Voltage excursions beyond VDD on these pins should be avoided. Table 10-1 summarizes the input capabilities. Refer to Section 27.0 “Electrical Characteristics” for more details. TABLE 10-1: Port or Pin The Output Latch (LAT register) is useful for read-modify-write operations on the value that the I/O pins are driving. Read-modify-write operations on the LAT register read and write the latched output value for the PORT register. PORTA<7:0> A simplified model of a generic I/O port, without the interfaces to other peripherals, is shown in Figure 10-1. PORTH<7:4>(1) Description VDD Only VDD input levels tolerated. 5.5V Tolerates input levels above VDD, useful for most standard logic. PORTF<6:1> PORTC<7:2> GENERIC I/O PORT OPERATION Tolerated Input PORTC<1:0> PORTB<7:0> FIGURE 10-1: INPUT VOLTAGE LEVELS PORTD<7:0> PORTE<7:0> PORTF<7> RD LAT PORTG<4:0> Data Bus WR LAT or PORT D PORTH<3:0>(1) Q I/O pin(1) PORTJ<7:0>(1) Note 1: CK Data Latch D WR TRIS Q 10.1.2 CK TRIS Latch Input Buffer RD TRIS Q D ENEN RD PORT © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. These ports are not available on 64-pin devices. PIN OUTPUT DRIVE When used as digital I/O, the output pin drive strengths vary for groups of pins intended to meet the needs for a variety of applications. In general, there are three classes of output pins in terms of drive capability. PORTB and PORTC, as well as PORTA<7:6>, are designed to drive higher current loads, such as LEDs. PORTD, PORTE and PORTJ are capable of driving digital circuits associated with external memory devices; they can also drive LEDs, but only those with smaller current requirements. PORTF, PORTG and PORTH, along with PORTA<5:0>, have the lowest drive level, but are capable of driving normal digital circuit loads with a high input impedance. Preliminary DS39778B-page 127 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY Table 10-2 summarizes the output capabilities of the ports. Refer to the “Absolute Maximum Ratings” in Section 27.0 “Electrical Characteristics” for more details. TABLE 10-2: Port PORTA OUTPUT DRIVE LEVELS Drive Description When the open-drain option is required, the output pin must also be tied through an external pull-up resistor provided by the user to a higher voltage level, up to 5V on digital only pins (Figure 10-2). When a digital logic high signal is output, it is pulled up to the higher voltage level. FIGURE 10-2: Minimum Intended for indication. PORTF USING THE OPEN-DRAIN OUTPUT (EUSARTx SHOWN AS EXAMPLE) PORTG PORTD Medium Sufficient drive levels for external memory interfacing as well as indication. High Suitable for direct LED drive levels. PORTE PORTJ(1) PORTB PORTC Note 1: 10.1.3 PIC18F87J11 VDD TXX (at logic ‘1’) 3.3V 5V These ports are not available on 64-pin devices. PULL-UP CONFIGURATION Four of the I/O ports (PORTB, PORTD, PORTE and PORTJ) implement configurable weak pull-ups on all pins. These are internal pull-ups that allow floating digital input signals to be pulled to a consistent level, without the use of external resistors. The pull-ups are enabled with a single bit for each of the ports: RBPU (INTCON2<7>) for PORTB, and RDPU, REPU and RJPU (PORTG<7:5>) for the other ports. 10.1.4 +5V 3.3V PORTH(1) OPEN-DRAIN OUTPUTS The output pins for several peripherals are also equipped with a configurable, open-drain output option. This allows the peripherals to communicate with external digital logic operating at a higher voltage level, without the use of level translators. The open-drain option is implemented on port pins specifically associated with the data and clock outputs of the EUSARTs, the MSSP modules (in SPI mode) and the CCP and ECCP modules. It is selectively enabled by setting the open-drain control bit for the corresponding module in the ODCON registers (Register 10-1, Register 10-2 and Register 10-3). Their configuration is discussed in more detail with the individual port where these peripherals are multiplexed. 10.1.5 TTL INPUT BUFFER OPTION Many of the digital I/O ports use Schmitt Trigger (ST) input buffers. While this form of buffering works well with many types of input, some applications may require TTL-level signals to interface with external logic devices. This is particularly true with the EMB and the Parallel Master Port (PMP), which are particularly likely to be interfaced to TTL-level logic or memory devices. The inputs for the PMP can be optionally configured for TTL buffers with the PMPTTL bit in the PADCFG1 register (Register 10-4). Setting this bit configures all data and control input pins for the PMP to use TTL buffers. By default, these PMP inputs use the port’s ST buffers. As with the ODCON registers, the PADCFG1 register resides in the SFR configuration space; it shares the same memory address as the TMR2 register. PADCFG1 is accessed by setting the ADSHR bit (WDTCON<4>). The ODCON registers all reside in the SFR configuration space and share the same SFR addresses as the Timer1 registers (see Section 5.3.4.1 “Shared Address SFRs” for more details). The ODCON registers are accessed by setting the ADSHR bit (WDTCON<4>). DS39778B-page 128 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 10-1: ODCON1: PERIPHERAL OPEN-DRAIN CONTROL REGISTER 1 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — CCP5OD CCP4OD ECCP3OD ECCP2OD ECCP1OD bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-3 CCP5OD:CCP4OD: CCPx Open-Drain Output Enable bits 1 = Open-drain output on CCPx pin (Capture/PWM modes) enabled 0 = Open-drain output disabled bit 2-0 ECCP3OD:ECCP1OD: ECCPx Open-Drain Output Enable bits 1 = Open-drain output on ECCPx pin (Capture mode) enabled 0 = Open-drain output disabled REGISTER 10-2: ODCON2: PERIPHERAL OPEN-DRAIN CONTROL REGISTER 2 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — — — U2OD U1OD bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1-0 U2OD:U1OD: EUSARTx Open-Drain Output Enable bits 1 = Open-drain output on TXx pin enabled 0 = Open-drain output disabled REGISTER 10-3: x = Bit is unknown ODCON3: PERIPHERAL OPEN-DRAIN CONTROL REGISTER 3 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — — — SPI2OD SPI1OD bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1-0 SPI2OD:SPI1OD: SPI Open-Drain Output Enable bits 1 = Open-drain output on SDOx pin enabled 0 = Open-drain output disabled © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39778B-page 129 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 10-4: PADCFG1: I/O PAD CONFIGURATION CONTROL REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 — — — — — — — PMPTTL bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 PMPTTL: PMP Module TTL Input Buffer Select bit 1 = PMP module uses TTL input buffers 0 = PMP module uses Schmitt Trigger input buffers 10.2 PORTA, TRISA and LATA Registers PORTA is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. It may function as a 6-bit or 7-bit port, depending on the oscillator mode selected. The corresponding Data Direction and Output Latch registers are TRISA and LATA. The RA4 pin is multiplexed with the Timer0 module clock input to become the RA4/T0CKI pin; it is also multiplexed as the Parallel Master Port data pin (in 80-pin devices). The other PORTA pins are multiplexed with the analog VREF+ and VREF- inputs. The operation of pins, RA<5,3:0>, as A/D Converter inputs is selected by clearing or setting the appropriate PCFG control bits in the ANCON0 register. Note 1: RA5 (RA5/PMD4/AN4) is multiplexed as an analog input in all devices and Parallel Master Port data in 80-pin devices. 2: RA5 and RA3:RA0 are configured as analog inputs on any Reset and are read as ‘0’. RA4 is configured as a digital input. The RA4/T0CKI pin is a Schmitt Trigger input. All other PORTA pins have TTL input levels and full CMOS output drivers. The TRISA register controls the direction of the PORTA pins, even when they are being used as analog inputs. The user must ensure the bits in the TRISA register are maintained set when using them as analog inputs. OSC2/CLKO/RA6 and OSC1/CLKI/RA7 normally serve as the external circuit connections for the external (primary) oscillator circuit (HS and HSPLL Oscillator modes), or the external clock input (EC and ECPLL Oscillator modes). In these cases, RA6 and RA7 are not available as digital I/O, and their corresponding TRIS and LAT bits are read as ‘0’. ing on the oscillator mode selected. When RA6 is not configured as a digital I/O, in these cases, it provides a clock output at FOSC/4. A list of the possible configurations for RA6 and RA7, based on oscillator mode, is provided in Table 10-3. For these pins, the corresponding PORTA, TRISA and LATA bits are only defined when the pins are configured as I/O. TABLE 10-3: FUNCTION OF RA7:RA6 IN INTIO AND INTPLL MODES Oscillator Mode (FOSC2:FOSC0 Configuration) RA6 RA7 INTPLL1 (011) CLKO I/O INTPLL2 (010) I/O I/O INTIO1 (001) CLKO I/O INTIO2 (000) I/O I/O Legend: CLKO = FOSC/4 clock output; I/O = digital port. EXAMPLE 10-1: CLRF CLRF BSF MOVLW MOVWF BCF MOVLW MOVWF For INTIO and INTPLL Oscillator modes (FOSC2 Configuration bit is ‘0’), either RA7 or both RA6 and RA7 automatically become available as digital I/O, depend- DS39778B-page 130 x = Bit is unknown Preliminary PORTA INITIALIZING PORTA ; ; ; LATA ; ; WDTCON,ADSHR ; ; 1Fh ; ANCON0 ; WDTCON,ADSHR ; ; 0CFh ; ; ; TRISA ; ; Initialize PORTA by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear data latches Enable write/read to the shared SFR Configure A/D for digital inputs Disable write/read to the shared SFR Value used to initialize data direction Set RA<3:0> as inputs, RA<5:4> as outputs © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-4: Pin Name RA0/AN0 PORTA FUNCTIONS Function TRIS Setting I/O RA0 RA1/AN1 RA2/AN2/VREF- RA3/AN3/VREF+ RA4/PMD5/ T0CKI/ OSC2/CLKO/ RA6 OSC1/CLKI/ RA7 Legend: Note 1: Description 0 O DIG 1 I TTL PORTA<0> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. AN0 1 I ANA A/D input channel 0. Default input configuration on POR; does not affect digital output. RA1 0 O DIG LATA<1> data output; not affected by analog input. 1 I TTL PORTA<1> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. AN1 1 I ANA A/D input channel 1. Default input configuration on POR; does not affect digital output. RA2 0 O DIG LATA<2> data output; not affected by analog input. Disabled when CVREF output enabled. 1 I TTL PORTA<2> data input. Disabled when analog functions enabled; disabled when CVREF output enabled. AN2 1 I ANA A/D input channel 2. Default input configuration on POR; not affected by analog output. VREF- 1 I ANA A/D low reference voltage input. RA3 0 O DIG LATA<3> data output; not affected by analog input. 1 I TTL PORTA<3> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. AN3 1 I ANA A/D input channel 3. Default input configuration on POR. VREF+ 1 I ANA A/D high reference voltage input. RA4 0 O DIG LATA<4> data output. 1 I ST PORTA<4> data input; default configuration on POR. x O DIG Parallel Master Port data output. x I TTL Parallel Master Port data output. PMD5(1) RA5/PMD4/AN4 I/O Type LATA<0> data output; not affected by analog input. T0CKI x I ST Timer0 clock input. RA5 0 O DIG LATA<5> data output; not affected by analog input. 1 I TTL PORTA<5> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. PMD4(1) x O DIG Parallel Master Port data output. x I TTL Parallel Master Port data output. AN4 1 I ANA A/D input channel 4. Default configuration on POR. OSC2 x O ANA Main oscillator feedback output connection (HS and HSPLL modes). CLKO x O DIG System cycle clock output, FOSC/4 (EC, ECPLL, INTIO1 and INTPLL1 modes). RA6 0 O DIG LATA<6> data output; disabled when FOSC2 Configuration bit is set. 1 I TTL PORTA<6> data input; disabled when FOSC2 Configuration bit is set. OSC1 x I ANA Main oscillator input connection (HS and HSPLL modes). CLKI x I ANA Main external clock source input (EC and ECPLL modes). RA7 0 O DIG LATA<7> data output; disabled when FOSC2 Configuration bit is set. 1 I TTL PORTA<7> data input; disabled when FOSC2 Configuration bit is set. O = Output, I = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input, TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). Alternate PMP configuration when the PMPMX Configuration bit is ‘0’; available on 80-pin devices only. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 131 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-5: Name SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTA Bit 6 RA7(1) RA6(1) RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0 59 LATA LATA7 LATA6(1) LATA5 LATA4 LATA3 LATA2 LATA1 LATA0 58 TRISA TRISA7(1) TRISA6(1) TRISA5 TRISA4 TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 58 — PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 57 PORTA (2) ANCON0 (1) PCFG7 PCFG6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: Bit 7 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by PORTA. Note 1: Implemented only in specific oscillator modes (FOSC2 Configuration bit = 0); otherwise read as ‘0’. 2: Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. DS39778B-page 132 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 10.3 PORTB, TRISB and LATB Registers PORTB is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding Data Direction register is TRISB. All pins on PORTB are digital only and tolerate voltages up to 5.5V. Each of the PORTB pins has a weak internal pull-up. A single control bit can turn on all the pull-ups. This is performed by clearing bit, RBPU (INTCON2<7>). The weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are disabled on a Power-on Reset. Four of the PORTB pins (RB7:RB4) have an interrupt-on-change feature. Only pins configured as inputs can cause this interrupt to occur (i.e., any RB7:RB4 pin configured as an output is excluded from the interrupt-on-change comparison). The input pins (of RB7:RB4) are compared with the old value latched on the last read of PORTB. The “mismatch” outputs of RB7:RB4 are ORed together to generate the RB Port Change Interrupt with Flag bit, RBIF (INTCON<0>). This interrupt can wake the device from power-managed modes. The user, in the Interrupt Service Routine, can clear the interrupt in the following manner: a) b) The interrupt-on-change feature is recommended for wake-up on key depression operation and operations where PORTB is only used for the interrupt-on-change feature. Polling of PORTB is not recommended while using the interrupt-on-change feature. For 80-pin devices, RB3 can be configured as the alternate peripheral pin for the ECCP2 module and Enhanced PWM output 2A by clearing the CCP2MX Configuration bit. This applies only to 80-pin devices operating in Extended Microcontroller mode. If the device is in Microcontroller mode, the alternate assignment for ECCP2 is RE7. As with other ECCP2 configurations, the user must ensure that the TRISB<3> bit is set appropriately for the intended operation. Ports, RB1, RB2, RB3, RB4 and RB5, are multiplexed with the Parallel Master Port address. EXAMPLE 10-2: CLRF PORTB CLRF LATB MOVLW 0CFh MOVWF TRISB Any read or write of PORTB (except with the MOVFF (ANY), PORTB instruction). This will end the mismatch condition. Clear flag bit, RBIF. INITIALIZING PORTB ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Initialize PORTB by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Value used to initialize data direction Set RB<3:0> as inputs RB<5:4> as outputs RB<7:6> as inputs A mismatch condition will continue to set flag bit, RBIF. Reading PORTB will end the mismatch condition and allow flag bit, RBIF, to be cleared. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 133 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-6: PORTB FUNCTIONS Pin Name Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RB0/INT0/FLT0 RB0 0 O DIG LATB<0> data output. 1 I TTL PORTB<0> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. INT0 1 I ST External interrupt 0 input. FLT0 1 I ST Enhanced PWM Fault input (ECCP1 module); enabled in software. RB1 0 O DIG LATB<1> data output. 1 I TTL PORTB<1> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. INT1 1 I ST External interrupt 1 input. PMA4 x O — Parallel Master Port address out. RB2 0 O DIG LATB<2> data output. 1 I TTL PORTB<2> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. RB1/INT1/ PMA4 RB2/INT2/ PMA3 RB3/INT3/ PMA2/ECCP2/ P2A INT2 1 I ST External interrupt 2 input. PMA3 x O — Parallel Master Port address out. RB3 0 O DIG LATB<3> data output. PORTB<3> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. 1 I TTL INT3 1 I ST External interrupt 3 input. PMA2 x O — Parallel Master Port address out. ECCP2(1) 0 O DIG ECCP2 compare output and CCP2 PWM output; takes priority over port data. 1 I ST ECCP2 capture input. P2A(1) 0 O DIG ECCP2 Enhanced PWM output, channel A. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. Takes priority over port data. RB4 0 O DIG LATB<4> data output. 1 I TTL PORTB<4> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. I TTL RB4/KBI0/ PMA1 KBI0 x O — RB5 0 O DIG LATB<5> data output. 1 I TTL PORTB<5> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. I TTL — KBI1 Interrupt-on-pin change. x O RB6 0 O DIG LATB<6> data output. 1 I TTL PORTB<6> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. KBI2 1 I TTL Interrupt-on-pin change. PGC x I ST Serial execution (ICSP™) clock input for ICSP and ICD operation.(2) RB7 0 O DIG LATB<7> data output. 1 I TTL PORTB<7> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared. RB7/KBI3/PGD 2: Parallel Master Port address out. PMA0 RB6/KBI2/PGC Note 1: Interrupt-on-pin change. PMA1 RB5/KBI1/ PMA0 Legend: Description Parallel Master Port address out. KBI3 1 I TTL Interrupt-on-pin change. PGD x O DIG Serial execution data output for ICSP and ICD operation.(2) x I ST Serial execution data input for ICSP and ICD operation.(2) O = Output, I = Input, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input, TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when the CCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared (Extended Microcontroller mode, 80-pin devices only). Default assignment is RC1. All other pin functions are disabled when ICSP™ or ICD is enabled. DS39778B-page 134 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-7: Name PORTB SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTB Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 59 LATB LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 LATB3 LATB2 LATB1 LATB0 58 TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 58 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE INTCON INTCON2 RBPU INTCON3 INT2IP INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2 INTEDG3 INT1IP INT3IE INT2IE INT1IE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 TMR0IP INT3IP RBIP 55 INT3IF INT2IF INT1IF 55 Legend: Shaded cells are not used by PORTB. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 135 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 10.4 PORTC, TRISC and LATC Registers Note: PORTC is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. Only PORTC pins, RC2 through RC7, are digital only pins and can tolerate input voltages up to 5.5V. PORTC is multiplexed with ECCP, MSSP and EUSART peripheral functions (Table 10-8). The pins have Schmitt Trigger input buffers. The pins for ECCP, SPI and EUSART are also configurable for open-drain output whenever these functions are active. Open-drain configuration is selected by setting the SPIxOD, ECCPxOD, and UxOD control bits in the ODCON registers (see Section 10.1.3 “Pull-up Configuration” for more information). RC1 is normally configured as the default peripheral pin for the ECCP2 module. Assignment of ECCP2 is controlled by Configuration bit, CCP2MX (default state, CCP2MX = 1). These pins are configured as digital inputs on any device Reset. The contents of the TRISC register are affected by peripheral overrides. Reading TRISC always returns the current contents, even though a peripheral device may be overriding one or more of the pins. EXAMPLE 10-3: CLRF PORTC CLRF LATC MOVLW 0CFh MOVWF TRISC INITIALIZING PORTC ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Initialize PORTC by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Value used to initialize data direction Set RC<3:0> as inputs RC<5:4> as outputs RC<7:6> as inputs When enabling peripheral functions, care should be taken in defining TRIS bits for each PORTC pin. Some peripherals override the TRIS bit to make a pin an output, while other peripherals override the TRIS bit to make a pin an input. The user should refer to the corresponding peripheral section for the correct TRIS bit settings. DS39778B-page 136 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-8: Pin Name RC0/T1OSO/ T13CKI RC1/T1OSI/ ECCP2/P2A RC2/ECCP1/ P1A PORTC FUNCTIONS Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RC0 0 O DIG LATC<0> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<0> data input. T1OSO x O ANA T13CKI 1 I ST RC1 0 O DIG LATC<1> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<1> data input. T1OSI x I ANA ECCP2(1) 0 O DIG ECCP2 compare output and ECCP2 PWM output; takes priority over port data. 1 I ST ECCP2 capture input. P2A(1) 0 O DIG ECCP2 Enhanced PWM output, channel A. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. Takes priority over port data. RC2 0 O DIG LATC<2> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<2> data input. 0 O DIG ECCP1 compare output and ECCP1 PWM output; takes priority over port data. 1 I ST ECCP1 capture input. P1A 0 O DIG ECCP1 Enhanced PWM output, channel A. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. Takes priority over port data. RC3 0 O DIG LATC<3> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<3> data input. 0 O DIG SPI clock output (MSSP1 module); takes priority over port data. ECCP1 RC3/SCK1/ SCL1 SCK1 SCL1 RC4/SDI1/ SDA1 RC4 RC5/SDO1 RC7/RX1/DT1 Legend: Note 1: Timer1 oscillator output; enabled when Timer1 oscillator enabled. Disables digital I/O. Timer1/Timer3 counter input. Timer1 oscillator input; enabled when Timer1 oscillator enabled. Disables digital I/O. 1 I ST SPI clock input (MSSP1 module). 0 O DIG I2C™ clock output (MSSP1 module); takes priority over port data. 1 I ST I2C clock input (MSSP1 module); input type depends on module setting. 0 O DIG LATC<4> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<4> data input. SDI1 1 I ST SPI data input (MSSP1 module). SDA1 1 O DIG I2C data output (MSSP1 module); takes priority over port data. 1 I ST I2C data input (MSSP1 module); input type depends on module setting. 0 O DIG LATC<5> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<5> data input. SDO1 0 O DIG SPI data output (MSSP1 module); takes priority over port data. RC6 0 O DIG LATC<6> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<6> data input. TX1 1 O DIG Synchronous serial data output (EUSART1 module); takes priority over port data. CK1 1 O DIG Synchronous serial data input (EUSART1 module). User must configure as an input. Synchronous serial clock input (EUSART1 module). RC5 RC6/TX1/CK1 Description RC7 1 I ST 0 O DIG LATC<7> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<7> data input. RX1 1 I ST Asynchronous serial receive data input (EUSART1 module). DT1 1 O DIG Synchronous serial data output (EUSART1 module); takes priority over port data. 1 I ST Synchronous serial data input (EUSART1 module). User must configure as an input. O = Output, I = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input, TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). Default assignment for ECCP2/P2A when CCP2MX Configuration bit is set. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 137 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-9: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 59 LATC LATC7 LATBC6 LATC5 LATCB4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 58 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 58 Name PORTC DS39778B-page 138 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 10.5 PORTD, TRISD and LATD Registers PORTD is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. All pins on PORTD are digital only and tolerate voltages up to 5.5V. All pins on PORTD are implemented with Schmitt Trigger input buffers. Each pin is individually configurable as an input or output. Note: These pins are configured as digital inputs on any device Reset. On 80-pin devices, PORTD is multiplexed with the system bus as part of the external memory interface. I/O port and other functions are only available when the interface is disabled by setting the EBDIS bit (MEMCON<7>). When the interface is enabled, PORTD is the low-order byte of the multiplexed address/data bus (AD7:AD0). The TRISD bits are also overridden. Each of the PORTD pins has a weak internal pull-up. This is performed by clearing bit RDPU (PORTG<7>). The weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are disabled on all device Resets. EXAMPLE 10-4: CLRF PORTD CLRF LATD MOVLW 0CFh MOVWF TRISD INITIALIZING PORTD ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Initialize PORTD by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Value used to initialize data direction Set RD<3:0> as inputs RD<5:4> as outputs RD<7:6> as inputs PORTD is also multiplexed with the data functions of the Parallel Master Port data. In this mode, Parallel Master Port takes priority over the other digital I/O (but not the external memory bus). This multiplexing is available when PMPMX = 1. When the Parallel Master Port is active, the input buffers are TTL. For more information, refer to Section 11.0 “Parallel Master Port”. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 139 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-10: PORTD FUNCTIONS Pin Name Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RD0 0 O DIG 1 I ST PORTD<0> data input. AD0(2) x O DIG External memory interface, address/data bit 0 output.(1) x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 0 input.(1) x O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. x I TTL Parallel Master Port data input. 0 O DIG LATD<1> data output. RD0/AD0/ PMD0 PMD0(3) RD1/AD1/ PMD1 RD1 AD1(2) PMD1 RD2/AD2/ PMD2 (3) RD2 AD2(2) PMD2(3) RD3/AD3/ PMD3 RD3 AD3(2) PMD3 RD4/AD4/ PMD4/SDO2 (3) RD4 AD4(2) PMD4(3) RD5/AD5/ PMD5/SDI2/ SDA2 Note 1: 2: 3: LATD<0> data output. 1 I ST PORTD<1> data input. x O DIG External memory interface, address/data bit 1 output.(1) x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 1 input.(1) x O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. x I TTL Parallel Master Port data input. 0 O DIG LATD<2> data output. 1 I ST PORTD<2> data input. x O DIG External memory interface, address/data bit 2 output.(1) x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 2 input.(1) x O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. x I TTL Parallel Master Port data input. 0 O DIG LATD<3> data output. 1 I ST PORTD<3> data input. x O DIG External memory interface, address/data bit 3 output.(1) x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 3 input.(1) x O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. x I TTL Parallel Master Port data input. 0 O DIG LATD<4> data output. 1 I ST PORTD<4> data input. x O DIG External memory interface, address/data bit 4 output.(1) x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 4 input.(1) x O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. x I TTL Parallel Master Port data input. SDO2 0 O DIG SPI data output (MSSP2 module); takes priority over port data. RD5 0 O DIG LATD<5> data output. 1 I ST PORTD<5> data input. x O DIG External memory interface, address/data bit 5 output.(1) x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 5 input.(1) x O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. x I TTL Parallel Master Port data input. AD5(2) PMD5 Legend: Description (3) SDI2 1 I ST SPI data input (MSSP2 module). SDA2 1 O DIG I2C™ data output (MSSP2 module); takes priority over port data. 1 I ST I2C data input (MSSP2 module); input type depends on module setting. O = Output, I = Input, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input, TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). External memory interface I/O takes priority over all other digital and PMP I/O. Available on 80-pin devices only. Default configuration for PMP (PMPMX Configuration bit = 1). DS39778B-page 140 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-10: PORTD FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Name RD6/AD6/ PMD6/SCK2/ SCL2 Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RD6 0 O DIG LATD<6> data output. PORTD<6> data input. AD6(2) PMD6(3) SCK2 SCL2 RD7/AD7/ PMD7/SS2 RD7 AD7(2) PMD7(3) SS2 Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: Description 1 I ST x O DIG-3 x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 6 input.(1) x O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. x I TTL Parallel Master Port data input. 0 O DIG SPI clock output (MSSP2 module); takes priority over port data. External memory interface, address/data bit 6 output.(1) 1 I ST SPI clock input (MSSP2 module). 0 O DIG I2C™ clock output (MSSP2 module); takes priority over port data. 1 I ST I2C clock input (MSSP2 module); input type depends on module setting. 0 O DIG LATD<7> data output. 1 I ST PORTD<7> data input. x O DIG External memory interface, address/data bit 7 output.(1) x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 7 input.(1) x O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. x I TTL Parallel Master Port data input. x I TTL Slave select input for MSSP2 module. O = Output, I = Input, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input, TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). External memory interface I/O takes priority over all other digital and PMP I/O. Available on 80-pin devices only. Default configuration for PMP (PMPMX Configuration bit = 1). TABLE 10-11: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTD Name PORTD Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: RD7 RD6 RD5 RD4 RD3 RD2 RD1 RD0 59 LATD LATD7 LATD6 LATD5 LATD4 LATD3 LATD2 LATD1 LATD0 58 TRISD TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4 TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1 TRISD0 58 PORTG RDPU REPU RJPU(1) RG4 RG3 RG2 RG1 RG0 59 Legend: Shaded cells are not used by PORTD. Note 1: Unimplemented on 64-pin devices, read as ‘0’. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 141 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 10.6 PORTE, TRISE and LATE Registers PORTE is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. All pins on PORTE are digital only and tolerate voltages up to 5.5V. All pins on PORTE are implemented with Schmitt Trigger input buffers. Each pin is individually configurable as an input or output. Note: These pins are configured as digital inputs on any device Reset. On 80-pin devices, PORTE is multiplexed with the system bus as part of the external memory interface. I/O port and other functions are only available when the interface is disabled, by setting the EBDIS bit (MEMCON<7>). When the interface is enabled, PORTE is the high-order byte of the multiplexed address/data bus (AD15:AD8). The TRISE bits are also overridden. Each of the PORTE pins has a weak internal pull-up. A single control bit can turn off all the pull-ups. This is performed by clearing bit REPU (PORTG<6>). The weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are disabled on any device Reset. DS39778B-page 142 PORTE is also multiplexed with Enhanced PWM outputs B and C for ECCP1 and ECCP3 and outputs B, C and D for ECCP2. For all devices, their default assignments are on PORTE<6:0>. On 80-pin devices, the multiplexing for the outputs of ECCP1 and ECCP3 is controlled by the ECCPMX Configuration bit. Clearing this bit reassigns the P1B/P1C and P3B/P3C outputs to PORTH. For devices operating in Microcontroller mode, pin RE7 can be configured as the alternate peripheral pin for the ECCP2 module and Enhanced PWM output 2A. This is done by clearing the CCP2MX Configuration bit. PORTE is also multiplexed with the Parallel Master Port address lines. When PMPMX = 0, RE1 and RE0 are multiplexed with the control signals PMWR and PMRD. RE3 can also be configured as the Reference Clock Output (REFO) from the system clock. For further details, refer to Section 2.6 “Reference Clock Output”. EXAMPLE 10-5: CLRF PORTE CLRF LATE MOVLW 03h MOVWF TRISE Preliminary INITIALIZING PORTE ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Initialize PORTE by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Value used to initialize data direction Set RE<1:0> as inputs RE<7:2> as outputs © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-12: Pin Name RE0/AD8/ PMRD/P2D PORTE FUNCTIONS Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RE0 0 O DIG 1 I ST PORTE<0> data input. AD8(3) x O DIG External memory interface, address/data bit 8 output.(2) x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 8 input.(2) x O DIG Parallel Master Port read strobe pin. PMRD(5) RE1/AD9/ PMWR/P2C x I TTL Parallel Master Port read pin. 0 O DIG ECCP2 Enhanced PWM output, channel D; takes priority over port and PMP data. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. RE1 0 O DIG LATE<1> data output. 1 I ST PORTE<1> data input. x O DIG External memory interface, address/data bit 9 output.(2) x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 9 input.(2) x O DIG Parallel Master Port write strobe pin. x I TTL Parallel Master Port write pin. P2C 0 O DIG ECCP2 Enhanced PWM output, channel C; takes priority over port and PMP data. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. RE2 0 O DIG LATE<2> data output. 1 I ST PORTE<2> data input. x O DIG External memory interface, address/data bit 10 output.(2) x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 10 input.(2) AD9 PMWR (5) AD10(3) PMBE RE3/AD11/ PMA13/P3C/ REFO RE4/AD12/ PMA12/P3B Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: (5) x O DIG Parallel Master Port byte enable. P2B 0 O DIG ECCP2 Enhanced PWM output, channel B; takes priority over port and PMP data. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. RE3 0 O DIG LATE<3> data output. 1 I ST PORTE<3> data input. AD11(3) x O DIG External memory interface, address/data bit 11 output.(2) x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 11 input.(2) PMA13 x O DIG Parallel Master Port address. (1) P3C 0 O DIG ECCP3 Enhanced PWM output, channel C; takes priority over port and PMP data. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. REFO x O DIG Reference output clock. RE4 0 O DIG LATE<4> data output. 1 I ST PORTE<4> data input. x O DIG External memory interface, address/data bit 12 output.(2) x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 12 input.(2) AD12 Legend: LATE<0> data output. P2D (3) RE2/AD10/ PMBE/P2B Description (3) PMA12 x O DIG Parallel Master Port address. P3B(1) 0 O DIG ECCP3 Enhanced PWM output, channel B; takes priority over port and PMP data. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. O = Output, I = Input, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input, TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). Default assignments for P1B/P1C and P3B/P3C when ECCPMX Configuration bit is set (80-pin devices only). External memory interface I/O takes priority over all other digital and PMP I/O. Available on 80-pin devices only. Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when ECCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared (all devices in Microcontroller mode). Default configuration for PMP (PMPMX Configuration bit = 1). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 143 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-12: Pin Name PORTE FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED) Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RE5 0 O DIG LATE<5> data output. RE5/AD13/ PMA11/P1C 1 I ST PORTE<5> data input. x O DIG External memory interface, address/data bit 13 output.(2) x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 13 input.(2) PMA11 x O DIG Parallel Master Port address. (1) 0 O DIG ECCP1 Enhanced PWM output, channel C; takes priority over port and PMP data. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. 0 O DIG LATE<6> data output. 1 I ST PORTE<6> data input. x O DIG External memory interface, address/data bit 14 output.(2) x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 14 input.(2) AD13(3) P1C RE6/AD14/ PMA10/P1B RE6 AD14(3) RE7/AD15/ PMA9/ECCP2/ P2A PMA10 x O DIG Parallel Master Port address. P1B(1) 0 O DIG ECCP1 Enhanced PWM output, channel B; takes priority over port and PMP data. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. RE7 0 O DIG LATE<7> data output. 1 I ST PORTE<7> data input. AD15(3) x O DIG External memory interface, address/data bit 15 output.(2) x I TTL External memory interface, data bit 15 input.(2) x O DIG Parallel Master Port address. 0 O DIG ECCP2 compare output and ECCP2 PWM output; takes priority over port data. 1 I ST ECCP2 capture input. 0 O DIG ECCP2 Enhanced PWM output, channel A; takes priority over port and PMP data. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. PMA9 ECCP2 (4) (4) P2A Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Description O = Output, I = Input, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input, TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). Default assignments for P1B/P1C and P3B/P3C when ECCPMX Configuration bit is set (80-pin devices only). External memory interface I/O takes priority over all other digital and PMP I/O. Available on 80-pin devices only. Alternate assignment for ECCP2/P2A when ECCP2MX Configuration bit is cleared (all devices in Microcontroller mode). Default configuration for PMP (PMPMX Configuration bit = 1). TABLE 10-13: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTE Name PORTE Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: RE7 RE6 RE5 RE4 RE3 RE2 RE1 RE0 59 LATE LATE7 LATE6 LATE5 LATE4 LATE3 LATE2 LATE1 LATE0 58 TRISE TRISE7 TRISE6 TRISE5 TRISE4 TRISE3 TRISE2 TRISE1 TRISE0 58 PORTG RDPU REPU RJPU(1) RG4 RG3 RG2 RG1 RG0 59 Legend: Shaded cells are not used by PORTE. Note 1: Unimplemented on 64-pin devices, read as ‘0’. DS39778B-page 144 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 10.7 PORTF, LATF and TRISF Registers PORTF is a 7-bit wide, bidirectional port. Only pin 7 of PORTF has no analog input; it is the only pin that can tolerate voltages up to 5.5V. All pins on PORTF are implemented with Schmitt Trigger input buffers. Each pin is individually configurable as an input or output. PORTF is multiplexed with analog peripheral functions. RF1 through RF6 may also be used as analog input channels for the A/D Converter. All pins may be used as comparator inputs or outputs by setting the appropriate bits in the CMCON register. To use RF<6:3> as digital inputs, it is also necessary to turn off the comparators. Note 1: On device Resets, pins RF6:RF1 are configured as analog inputs and are read as ‘0’. 2: To configure PORTF as digital I/O, set the corresponding bits in ANCON0 and ANCON1. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. When Configuration bit, PMPMX = 0, PORTF is multiplexed with the Parallel Master Port data. This multiplexing is available only in 80-pin devices. EXAMPLE 10-6: CLRF ; ; ; CLRF LATF ; ; BSF WDTCON,ADSHR ; ; MOVLW C0h ; MOVWF ANCON0 ; MOVLW 0Fh ; MOVWF ANCON1 ; BCF WDTCON,ADSHR ; ; MOVLW CEh ; MOVWF TRISF ; ; Preliminary PORTF INITIALIZING PORTF Initialize PORTF by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output latches Enable write/read to the shared SFR make RF1:RF2 digital make RF<6:3> digital Disable write/read to the shared SFR Set RF5:RF4 as outputs, RF<7:6>,<3:1> as inputs DS39778B-page 145 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-14: PORTF FUNCTIONS Pin Name Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RF1 0 O DIG 1 I ST AN6 1 I ANA A/D input channel 6. Default configuration on POR. C2OUT x O DIG Comparator 2 output. RF2 0 O DIG LATF<2> data output; not affected by analog input. 1 I ST PORTF<2> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. PMA5 x O DIG Parallel Master Port address. AN7 1 I ANA A/D input channel 7. Default configuration on POR. C1OUT x O DIG Comparator 1 output. RF3 0 O DIG LATF<3> data output; not affected by analog input. 1 I ST AN8 1 I ANA A/D input channel 8. Default configuration on POR. C2INB x I ANA Comparator 2 input B. RF4 0 O DIG LATF<4> data output; not affected by analog input. 1 I ST 1 I ANA A/D input channel 9. Default configuration on POR. RF1/AN6/ C2OUT RF2/PMA5/ AN7//C1OUT RF3/AN8/ C2INB RF4/AN9/ C2INA AN9 PORTF<1> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. PORTF<3> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. PORTF<4> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. x I ANA Comparator 2 input A. RF5 0 O DIG LATF<5> data output; not affected by analog input. Disabled when CVREF output enabled. 1 I ST PORTF<5> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. Disabled when CVREF output enabled. x O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. PMD2(1) x I TTL Parallel Master Port data input. AN10 1 I ANA A/D input channel 10 and Comparator C1+ input. Default input configuration on POR. C1INB x I ANA Comparator 1 input B. CVREF x O ANA Comparator voltage reference output. Enabling this feature disables digital I/O. RF6 0 O DIG LATF<6> data output; not affected by analog input. 1 I ST PORTF<6> data input; disabled when analog input enabled. x O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. x I TTL Parallel Master Port data input. AN11 1 I ANA A/D input channel 11 and comparator C1- input. Default input configuration on POR; does not affect digital output. C1INA x I ANA Comparator 1 input A. RF7 0 O DIG LATF<7> data output. 1 I ST PORTF<7> data input. x O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. x I TTL Parallel Master Port data input. 1 I TTL Slave select input for MSSP1 module. RF6/PMD1/ AN11/C1INA PMD1(1) RF7/PMD0/ SS1 PMD0(1) SS1 Note 1: LATF<1> data output; not affected by analog input. C2INA RF5/PMD2/ AN10/C1INB/ CVREF Legend: Description O = Output, I = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input, TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). Alternate PMP configuration when the PMPMX Configuration bit = 0; available on 80-pin devices only. DS39778B-page 146 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-15: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTF Name PORTF LATF TRISF ANCON0 (1) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: RF7 RF6 RF5 RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1 — 59 58 LATF7 LATF6 LATF5 LATF4 LATF3 LATF2 LATF1 — TRISF7 TRISF6 TRISF5 TRISF4 TRISF3 TRISF2 TRISF1 — 58 PCFG7 PCFG6 — PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 57 ANCON1(1) PCFG15 PCFG14 PCFG13 PCFG12 PCFG11 PCFG10 PCFG9 PCFG8 57 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by PORTF. Note 1: Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 147 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 10.8 PORTG, TRISG and LATG Registers PORTG is a 5-bit wide, bidirectional port. All pins on PORTG are digital only and tolerate voltages up to 5.5V. PORTG is multiplexed with EUSART2 functions (Table 10-16). PORTG pins have Schmitt Trigger input buffers. PORTG is also multiplexed with address and control functions of the Parallel Master Port. When enabling peripheral functions, care should be taken in defining TRIS bits for each PORTG pin. Some peripherals override the TRIS bit to make a pin an output, while other peripherals override the TRIS bit to make a pin an input. The user should refer to the corresponding peripheral section for the correct TRIS bit settings. The pin override value is not loaded into the TRIS register. This allows read-modify-write of the TRIS register without concern due to peripheral overrides. DS39778B-page 148 Although the port itself is only five bits wide, PORTG<7:5> bits are still implemented. These are used to control the weak pull-ups on the I/O ports associated with the external memory bus (PORTD, PORTE and PORTJ). Setting these bits enables the pull-ups. Since these are control bits and are not associated with port I/O, the corresponding TRISG and LATG bits are not implemented. EXAMPLE 10-7: CLRF PORTG CLRF LATG MOVLW 04h MOVWF TRISG Preliminary INITIALIZING PORTG ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Initialize PORTG by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Value used to initialize data direction Set RG1:RG0 as outputs RG2 as input RG4:RG3 as outputs © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-16: PORTG FUNCTIONS Pin Name RG0/PMA8/ ECCP3/P3A Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RG0 0 O DIG LATG<0> data output. 1 I ST PORTG<0> data input. x O DIG Parallel Master Port address. O DIG ECCP3 compare and PWM output; takes priority over port data. PMA8 ECCP3 RG1/PMA7/ TX2/CK2 RG2/PMA6/ RX2/DT2 I ST ECCP3 capture input. P3A 0 O DIG ECCP3 Enhanced PWM output, channel A; takes priority over port and PMP data. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. RG1 0 O DIG LATG<1> data output. 1 I ST PORTG<1> data input. PMA7 x O DIG Parallel Master Port address. TX2 1 O DIG Synchronous serial data output (EUSART2 module); takes priority over port data. CK2 1 O DIG Synchronous serial data input (EUSART2 module). User must configure as an input. 1 I ST Synchronous serial clock input (EUSART2 module). 0 O DIG LATG<2> data output. 1 I ST PORTG<2> data input. PMA6 x O DIG Parallel Master Port address. RX2 1 I ST Asynchronous serial receive data input (EUSART2 module). DT2 1 O DIG Synchronous serial data output (EUSART2 module); takes priority over port data. 1 I ST Synchronous serial data input (EUSART2 module). User must configure as an input. 0 O DIG LATG<3> data output. 1 I ST PORTG<3> data input. x O DIG Parallel Master Port address chip select 1 x I TTL Parallel Master Port address chip select 1 in. 0 O DIG CCP4 compare output and CCP4 PWM output; takes priority over port data. 1 I ST CCP4 capture input. P3D 0 O DIG ECCP3 Enhanced PWM output, channel D; takes priority over port and PMP data. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. RG4 0 O DIG LATG<4> data output. 1 I ST PORTG<4> data input. PMCS2 x O DIG Parallel Master Port address chip select 2 CCP5 0 O DIG CCP5 compare output and CCP5 PWM output; takes priority over port data. 1 I ST CCP5 capture input. 0 O DIG ECCP1 Enhanced PWM output, channel D; takes priority over port and PMP data. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. RG2 RG3/PMCS1/ CCP4/P3D RG3 PMCS1 CCP4 RG4/PMCS2/ CCP5/P1D P1D Legend: Description O = Output, I = Input, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input, TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 149 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-17: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTG Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: RDPU REPU RJPU(1) RG4 RG3 RG2 RG1 RG0 59 LATG — — — LATG4 LATG3 LATG2 LATG1 LATG0 58 TRISG — — — TRISG4 TRISG3 TRISG2 TRISG1 TRISG0 58 Name PORTG Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by PORTG. Note 1: Unimplemented on 64-pin devices, read as ‘0’. DS39778B-page 150 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 10.9 Note: PORTH, LATH and TRISH Registers PORTH is available only on 80-pin devices. PORTH is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional I/O port. PORTH pins <3:0> are digital only and tolerate voltages up to 5.5V. All pins on PORTH are implemented with Schmitt Trigger input buffers. Each pin is individually configurable as an input or output. When the external memory interface is enabled, four of the PORTH pins function as the high-order address lines for the interface. The address output from the interface takes priority over other digital I/O. The corresponding TRISH bits are also overridden. PORTH pins, RH4 through RH7, are multiplexed with analog converter inputs. The operation of these pins as analog inputs is selected by clearing or setting the corresponding bits in the ANCON1 register. RH2 to RH6 are multiplexed with the Parallel Master Port and RH4 to RH6 are multiplexed as comparator inputs. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PORTH can also be configured as the alternate Enhanced PWM output channels B and C for the ECCP1 and ECCP3 modules. This is done by clearing the ECCPMX Configuration bit. EXAMPLE 10-8: CLRF CLRF BSF MOVLW MOVWF BCF MOVLW MOVWF Preliminary PORTH INITIALIZING PORTH ; ; ; LATH ; ; WDTCON,ADSHR ; ; F0h ; ANCON1 ; WDTCON,ADSHR ; ; 0CFh ; ; TRISH ; ; ; Initialize PORTH by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output latches Enable write/read to the shared SFR Configure PORTH as digital I/O Disable write/read to the shared SFR Value used to initialize data direction Set RH<3:0> as inputs RH<5:4> as outputs RH<7:6> as inputs DS39778B-page 151 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-18: PORTH FUNCTIONS Pin Name RH0/A16 RH1/A17 RH2/A18/ PMD7 RH3/A19/ PMD6 Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RH0 0 O DIG LATH<0> data output. 1 I ST PORTH<0> data input. A16 x O DIG External memory interface, address line 16. Takes priority over port data. RH1 0 O DIG LATH<1> data output. PORTH<1> data input. 1 I ST A17 x O DIG External memory interface, address line 17. Takes priority over port data. RH2 0 O DIG LATH<2> data output. 1 I ST PORTH<2> data input. A18 x O DIG External memory interface, address line 18. Takes priority over port data. PMD7(2) x O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. x I TTL Parallel Master Port data input. 0 O DIG LATH<3> data output. RH3 RH4/PMD3/ AN12/P3C/ C2INC 1 I ST PORTH<3> data input. A19 x O DIG External memory interface, address line 19. Takes priority over port data. PMD6(2) x O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. x I TTL Parallel Master Port data input. 0 O DIG LATH<4> data output. 1 I ST PORTH<4> data input. x I TTL Parallel Master Port data out. x O DIG Parallel Master Port data input. I ANA A/D input channel 12. Default input configuration on POR; does not affect digital output. O DIG ECCP3 Enhanced PWM output, channel C; takes priority over port and PMP data. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. RH4 PMD3(2) AN12 RH5/PMBE/ AN13/P3B/ C2IND P3C(1) 0 C2INC x I ANA Comparator 2 input C. RH5 0 O DIG LATH<5> data output. 1 I ST PORTH<5> data input. PMBE(2) x O DIG Parallel Master Port data byte enable. I ANA A/D input channel 13. Default input configuration on POR; does not affect digital output. O DIG ECCP3 Enhanced PWM output, channel B; takes priority over port and PMP data. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. Comparator 2 input D. AN13 RH6/PMRD/ AN14/P1C/ C1INC P3B(1) 0 C2IND x I ANA RH6 0 O DIG LATH<6> data output. 1 I ST PORTH<6> data input. x O DIG Parallel Master Port read strobe. x I TTL Parallel Master Port read in. I ANA A/D input channel 14. Default input configuration on POR; does not affect digital output. PMRD(2) AN14 Legend: Note 1: 2: Description P1C(1) 0 O DIG ECCP1 Enhanced PWM output, channel C; takes priority over port and PMP data. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. C1INC x I ANA Comparator 1 input C. O = Output, I = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input, TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). Alternate assignments for P1B/P1C and P3B/P3C when the ECCPMX Configuration bit is cleared. Default assignments are PORTE<6:3>. Alternate PMP configuration when the PMPMX Configuration bit = 0; available on 80-pin devices only. DS39778B-page 152 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-18: PORTH FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Name RH7/PMWR/ AN15/P1B Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RH7 0 O DIG LATH<7> data output. PORTH<7> data input. PMWR(2) 1 I ST x O DIG Parallel Master Port write strobe. x I TTL Parallel Master Port write in. I ANA A/D input channel 15. Default input configuration on POR; does not affect digital output. O DIG ECCP1 Enhanced PWM output, channel B; takes priority over port and PMP data. May be configured for tri-state during Enhanced PWM shutdown events. AN15 P1B(1) Legend: Note 1: 2: Description 0 O = Output, I = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input, TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). Alternate assignments for P1B/P1C and P3B/P3C when the ECCPMX Configuration bit is cleared. Default assignments are PORTE<6:3>. Alternate PMP configuration when the PMPMX Configuration bit = 0; available on 80-pin devices only. TABLE 10-19: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTH Name PORTH(1) (1) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: RH7 RH6 RH5 RH4 RH3 RH2 RH1 RH0 58 LATH LATH7 LATH6 LATH5 LATH4 LATH3 LATH2 LATH1 LATH0 59 TRISH(1) TRISH7 TRISH6 TRISH5 TRISH4 TRISH3 TRISH2 TRISH1 TRISH0 58 ANCON1(2) PCFG15 PCFG14 PCFG13 PCFG12 PCFG11 PCFG10 PCFG9 PCFG8 57 Legend: Shaded cells are not used by PORTH. Note 1: Unimplemented on 64-pin devices, read as ‘0’. 2: Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 153 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 10.10 PORTJ, TRISJ and LATJ Registers Note: PORTJ is available only on 80-pin devices. PORTJ is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. All pins on PORTJ are digital only and tolerate voltages up to 5.5V. All pins on PORTJ are implemented with Schmitt Trigger input buffers. Each pin is individually configurable as an input or output. Note: These pins are configured as digital inputs on any device Reset. When the external memory interface is enabled, all of the PORTJ pins function as control outputs for the interface. This occurs automatically when the interface is enabled by clearing the EBDIS control bit (MEMCON<7>). The TRISJ bits are also overridden. DS39778B-page 154 Each of the PORTJ pins has a weak internal pull-up. A single control bit can turn off all the pull-ups. This is performed by clearing bit RJPU (PORTG<5>). The weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are disabled on any device Reset. EXAMPLE 10-9: CLRF PORTJ CLRF LATJ MOVLW 0CFh MOVWF TRISJ Preliminary INITIALIZING PORTJ ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Initialize PORTG by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Value used to initialize data direction Set RJ3:RJ0 as inputs RJ5:RJ4 as output RJ7:RJ6 as inputs © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 10-20: PORTJ FUNCTIONS Pin Name RJ0/ALE RJ1/OE RJ2/WRL RJ3/WRH RJ4/BA0 RJ5/CE RJ6/LB RJ7/UB Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RJ0 0 O DIG 1 I ST PORTJ<0> data input. ALE x O DIG External memory interface address latch enable control output; takes priority over digital I/O. RJ1 0 O DIG LATJ<1> data output. 1 I ST PORTJ<1> data input. OE x O DIG External memory interface output enable control output; takes priority over digital I/O. RJ2 0 O DIG LATJ<2> data output. 1 I ST PORTJ<2> data input. WRL x O DIG External memory bus write low byte control; takes priority over digital I/O. RJ3 0 O DIG LATJ<3> data output. 1 I ST PORTJ<3> data input. WRH x O DIG External memory interface write high byte control output; takes priority over digital I/O. RJ4 0 O DIG LATJ<4> data output. 1 I ST PORTJ<4> data input. BA0 x O DIG External memory interface byte address 0 control output; takes priority over digital I/O. RJ5 0 O DIG LATJ<5> data output. 1 I ST PORTJ<5> data input. CE x O DIG External memory interface chip enable control output; takes priority over digital I/O. RJ6 0 O DIG LATJ<6> data output. LATJ<0> data output. 1 I ST PORTJ<6> data input. LB x O DIG External memory interface lower byte enable control output; takes priority over digital I/O. RJ7 0 O DIG LATJ<7> data output. 1 I ST PORTJ<7> data input. x O DIG External memory interface upper byte enable control output; takes priority over digital I/O. UB Legend: Description O = Output, I = Input, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input, x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). TABLE 10-21: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTJ Name PORTJ(1) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: RJ7 RJ6 RJ5 RJ4 RJ3 RJ2 RJ1 RJ0 59 LATJ(1) LATJ7 LATJ6 LATJ5 LATJ4 LATJ3 LATJ2 LATJ1 LATJ0 58 TRISJ(1) TRISJ7 TRISJ6 TRISJ5 TRISJ4 TRISJ3 TRISJ2 TRISJ1 TRISJ0 58 PORTG RDPU REPU RJPU(1) RG4 RG3 RG2 RG1 RG0 59 Legend: Shaded cells are not used by PORTJ. Note 1: Unimplemented on 64-pin devices, read as ‘0’. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 155 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 156 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 11.0 PARALLEL MASTER PORT Key features of the PMP module include: The Parallel Master Port module (PMP) is a parallel, 8-bit I/O module, specifically designed to communicate with a wide variety of parallel devices, such as communication peripherals, LCDs, external memory devices and microcontrollers. Because the interface to parallel peripherals varies significantly, the PMP is highly configurable. The PMP module can be configured to serve as either a Parallel Master Port or as a Parallel Slave Port. FIGURE 11-1: • Up to 16 Programmable Address Lines • Up to Two Chip Select Lines • Programmable Strobe Options - Individual Read and Write Strobes or; - Read/Write Strobe with Enable Strobe • Address Auto-Increment/Auto-Decrement • Programmable Address/Data Multiplexing • Programmable Polarity on Control Signals • Legacy Parallel Slave Port Support • Enhanced Parallel Slave Support - Address Support - 4-Byte Deep, Auto-Incrementing Buffer • Programmable Wait States • Selectable Input Voltage Levels PMP MODULE OVERVIEW Address Bus Data Bus Control Lines PIC18 Parallel Master Port PMA<0> PMALL PMA<1> PMALH Up to 16-Bit Address EEPROM PMA<13:2> PMA<14> PMCS1 PMA<15> PMCS2 PMBE PMRD PMRD/PMWR Microcontroller LCD FIFO Buffer PMWR PMENB PMD<7:0> PMA<7:0> PMA<15:8> © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary 8-Bit Data DS39778B-page 157 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 11.1 Module Registers The PMCON registers (Register 11-1 and Register 11-2) control basic module operations, including turning the module on or off. They also configure address multiplexing and control strobe configuration. The PMP module has a total of 14 Special Function Registers for its operation, plus one additional register to set configuration options. Of these, 8 registers are used for control and 6 are used for PMP data transfer. 11.1.1 The PMMODE registers (Register 11-3 and Register 11-4) configure the various Master and Slave Operating modes, the data width and interrupt generation. CONTROL REGISTERS The eight PMP Control registers are: • • • • The PMEH and PMEL registers (Register 11-5 and Register 11-6) configure the module’s operation at the hardware (I/O pin) level. PMCONH and PMCONL PMMODEH and PMMODEL PMSTATL and PMSTATH PMEH and PMEL REGISTER 11-1: The PMSTAT registers (Register 11-7 and Register 11-8) provide status flags for the module’s input and output buffers, depending on the operating mode. PMCONH: PARALLEL PORT CONTROL HIGH BYTE REGISTER R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PMPEN — PSIDL ADRMUX1 ADRMUX0 PTBEEN PTWREN PTRDEN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 PMPEN: Parallel Master Port Enable bit 1 = PMP enabled 0 = PMP disabled, no off-chip access performed bit 6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 PSIDL: Stop in Idle Mode bit 1 = Discontinue module operation when device enters Idle mode 0 = Continue module operation in Idle mode bit 4-3 ADRMUX1:ADRMUX0: Address/Data Multiplexing Selection bits 11 = Reserved 10 = All 16 bits of address are multiplexed on PMD<7:0> pins 01 = Lower 8 bits of address are multiplexed on PMD<7:0> pins, upper 8 bits are on PMA<15:8> 00 = Address and data appear on separate pins bit 2 PTBEEN: Byte Enable Port Enable bit (16-bit Master mode) 1 = PMBE port enabled 0 = PMBE port disabled bit 1 PTWREN: Write Enable Strobe Port Enable bit 1 = PMWR/PMENB port enabled 0 = PMWR/PMENB port disabled bit 0 PTRDEN: Read/Write Strobe Port Enable bit 1 = PMRD/PMWR port enabled 0 = PMRD/PMWR port disabled DS39778B-page 158 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 11-2: PMCONL: PARALLEL PORT CONTROL LOW BYTE REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0(1) R/W-0(1) R/W-0(1) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CSF1 CSF0 ALP CS2P CS1P BEP WRSP RDSP bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 CSF1:CSF0: Chip Select Function bits 11 = Reserved 10 = PMCS1 and PMCS2 function as chip select 01 = PMCS2 functions as chip select, PMCS1 used as address bit 14 (PMADDRH address bit 6) 00 = PMCS2 and PMCS1 used as address bits 15 and 14 (PMADDRH address bits 7 and 6) bit 5 ALP: Address Latch Polarity bit(1) 1 = Active-high (PMALL and PMALH) 0 = Active-low (PMALL and PMALH) bit 4 CS2P: Chip Select 2 Polarity bit(1) 1 = Active-high (PMCS2) 0 = Active-low (PMCS2) bit 3 CS1P: Chip Select 1 Polarity bit(1) 1 = Active-high (PMCS1/PMCS) 0 = Active-low (PMCS1/PMCS) bit 2 BEP: Byte Enable Polarity bit 1 = Byte enable active-high (PMBE) 0 = Byte enable active-low (PMBE) bit 1 WRSP: Write Strobe Polarity bit For Slave modes and Master mode 2 (PMMODEH<1:0> = 00,01,10): 1 = Write strobe active-high (PMWR) 0 = Write strobe active-low (PMWR) For Master mode 1 (PMMODEH<1:0> = 11): 1 = Enable strobe active-high (PMENB) 0 = Enable strobe active-low (PMENB) bit 0 RDSP: Read Strobe Polarity bit For Slave modes and Master mode 2 (PMMODEH<1:0> = 00,01,10): 1 = Read strobe active-high (PMRD) 0 = Read strobe active-low (PMRD) For Master mode 1 (PMMODEH<1:0> = 11): 1 = Read/write strobe active-high (PMRD/PMWR) 0 = Read/write strobe active-low (PMRD/PMWR) Note 1: These bits have no effect when their corresponding pins are used as address lines. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 159 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 11-3: PMMODEH: PARALLEL PORT MODE HIGH BYTE REGISTER R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 BUSY IRQM1 IRQM0 INCM1 INCM0 MODE16 MODE1 MODE0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 BUSY: Busy bit (Master mode only) 1 = Port is busy 0 = Port is not busy bit 6-5 IRQM1:IRQM0: Interrupt Request Mode bits 11 = Interrupt generated when Read Buffer 3 is read or Write Buffer 3 is written (Buffered PSP mode) or on a read or write operation when PMA<1:0> = 11 (Addressable PSP mode only) 10 = No interrupt generated, processor stall activated 01 = Interrupt generated at the end of the read/write cycle 00 = No interrupt generated bit 4-3 INCM1:INCM0: Increment Mode bits 11 = PSP read and write buffers auto-increment (Legacy PSP mode only) 10 = Decrement ADDR<15,13:0> by 1 every read/write cycle 01 = Increment ADDR<15,13:0> by 1 every read/write cycle 00 = No increment or decrement of address bit 2 MODE16: 8/16-Bit Mode bit 1 = 16-Bit mode: data register is 16 bits, a read or write to the data register invokes two 8-bit transfers 0 = 8-Bit mode: data register is 8 bits, a read or write to the data register invokes one 8-bit transfer bit 1-0 MODE1:MODE0: Parallel Port Mode Select bits 11 = Master mode 1 (PMCSx, PMRD/PMWR, PMENB, PMBE, PMA<x:0> and PMD<7:0>) 10 = Master mode 2 (PMCSx, PMRD, PMWR, PMBE, PMA<x:0> and PMD<7:0>) 01 = Enhanced PSP, control signals (PMRD, PMWR, PMCS, PMD<7:0> and PMA<1:0>) 00 = Legacy Parallel Slave Port, control signals (PMRD, PMWR, PMCS and PMD<7:0>) DS39778B-page 160 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 11-4: PMMODEL: PARALLEL PORT MODE LOW BYTE REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 WAITB1(1) WAITB0(1) WAITM3 WAITM2 WAITM1 WAITM0 WAITE1(1) WAITE0(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 WAITB1:WAITB0: Data Setup to Read/Write Wait State Configuration bits(1) 11 = Data wait of 4 TCY; multiplexed address phase of 4 TCY 10 = Data wait of 3 TCY; multiplexed address phase of 3 TCY 01 = Data wait of 2 TCY; multiplexed address phase of 2 TCY 00 = Data wait of 1 TCY; multiplexed address phase of 1 TCY bit 5-2 WAITM3:WAITM0: Read to Byte Enable Strobe Wait State Configuration bits 1111 = Wait of additional 15 TCY ... 0001 = Wait of additional 1 TCY 0000 = No additional wait cycles (operation forced into one TCY) bit 1-0 WAITE1:WAITE0: Data Hold After Strobe Wait State Configuration bits(1) 11 = Wait of 4 TCY 10 = Wait of 3 TCY 01 = Wait of 2 TCY 00 = Wait of 1 TCY Note 1: WAITB and WAITE bits are ignored whenever WAITM3:WAITM0 = 0000. REGISTER 11-5: PMEH: PARALLEL PORT ENABLE HIGH BYTE REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PTEN15 PTEN14 PTEN13 PTEN12 PTEN11 PTEN10 PTEN9 PTEN8 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 PTEN15:PTEN14: PMCSx Strobe Enable bits 1 = PMA15 and PMA14 function as either PMA<15:14> or PMCS2 and PMCS1 0 = PMA15 and PMA14 function as port I/O bit 5-0 PTEN13:PTEN8: PMP Address Port Enable bits 1 = PMA<13:8> function as PMP address lines 0 = PMA<13:8> function as port I/O © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 161 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 11-6: PMEL: PARALLEL PORT ENABLE LOW BYTE REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PTEN7 PTEN6 PTEN5 PTEN4 PTEN3 PTEN2 PTEN1 PTEN0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-2 PTEN7:PTEN2: PMP Address Port Enable bits 1 = PMA<7:2> function as PMP address lines 0 = PMA<7:2> function as port I/O bit 1-0 PTEN1:PTEN0: PMALH/PMALL Strobe Enable bits 1 = PMA1 and PMA0 function as either PMA<1:0> or PMALH and PMALL 0 = PMA1 and PMA0 pads functions as port I/O REGISTER 11-7: PMSTATH: PARALLEL PORT STATUS HIGH BYTE REGISTER R-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 IBF IBOV — — IB3F IB2F IB1F IB0F bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 IBF: Input Buffer Full Status bit 1 = All writable input buffer registers are full 0 = Some or all of the writable input buffer registers are empty bit 6 IBOV: Input Buffer Overflow Status bit 1 = A write attempt to a full input byte register occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No overflow occurred bit 5-4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3-0 IB3F:IB0F: Input Buffer Status Full bits 1 = Input buffer contains data that has not been read (reading buffer will clear this bit) 0 = Input buffer does not contain any unread data DS39778B-page 162 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 11-8: PMSTATL: PARALLEL PORT STATUS LOW BYTE REGISTER R-1 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 R-1 R-1 R-1 R-1 OBE OBUF — — OB3E OB2E OB1E OB0E bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 OBE: Output Buffer Empty Status bit 1 = All readable output buffer registers are empty 0 = Some or all of the readable output buffer registers are full bit 6 OBUF: Output Buffer Underflow Status bit 1 = A read occurred from an empty output byte register (must be cleared in software) 0 = No underflow occurred bit 5-4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3-0 OBnE: Output Buffer n Status Empty bit 1 = Output buffer is empty (writing data to the buffer will clear this bit) 0 = Output buffer contains data that has not been transmitted © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 163 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 11.1.2 DATA REGISTERS The PMP module uses 6 registers for transferring data into and out of the microcontroller. They are arranged as three pairs to allow the option of 16-bit data operations: • • • • PMDIN1H and PMDIN1L PMDIN2H and PMDIN2L PMADDRH/PMDOUT1H and PMADDRL/PMDOUT1L PMDOUT2H and PMDOUT2L The PMDIN1 register is used for incoming data in Slave modes, and both input and output data in Master modes. The PMDIN2 register is used for buffering input data in select Slave modes. The PMADDRx/PMDOUT1x registers are actually a single register pair; the name and function is dictated by the module’s operating mode. In Master modes, the registers functions as the PMADDRH and PMADDRL registers, and contain the address of any incoming or outgoing data. In Slave modes, the registers function as PMDOUT1H and PMDOUT1L and are used for outgoing data. PMADDRH differs from PMADDRL in that it can also have limited PMP control functions. When the module is operating in select Master mode configurations, the REGISTER 11-9: upper two bits of the register can be used to determine the operation of chip select signals. If chip select signals are not used, PMADDR simply functions to hold the upper 8 bits of the address. The function of the individual bits in PMADDRH is shown in Register 11-9. The PMDOUT2H and PMDOUT2L registers are only used in buffered Slave modes and serve as a buffer for outgoing data. 11.1.3 PAD CONFIGURATION CONTROL REGISTER In addition to the module level configuration options, the PMP module can also be configured at the I/O pin for electrical operation. This option allows users to select either the normal Schmitt Trigger input buffer on digital I/O pins shared with the PMP, or use TTL level compatible buffers instead. Buffer configuration is controlled by the PMPTTL bit in the PADCFG1 register. The PADCFG1 register is one of the shared address SFRs, and has the same address as the TMR2 register. PADCFG1 is accessed by setting the ADSHR bit (WDTCON<4>). Refer to Section 5.3.4.1 “Shared Address SFRs” for more information. PMADDRH: PARALLEL PORT ADDRESS REGISTER, HIGH BYTE (MASTER MODES ONLY)(1) R/W-0 R/W-0 CS2 CS1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ADDR<13:8> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at Reset 1 = bit is set 0 = bit is cleared bit 7 CS2: Chip Select 2 bit If PMCON<7:6> = 10 or 01: 1 = Chip Select 2 is active 0 = Chip Select 2 is inactive If PMCON<7:6> = 11 or 00: Bit functions as ADDR<15>. bit 6 CS1: Chip Select 1 bit If PMCON<7:6> = 10: 1 = Chip Select 1 is active 0 = Chip Select 1 is inactive If PMCON<7:6> = 11 or 0x: Bit functions as ADDR<14>. bit 5-0 ADDR13:ADDR0: Destination Address bits Note 1: x = bit is unknown In Enhanced Slave mode, PMADDRH functions as PMDOUT1H, one of the Output Data Buffer registers. DS39778B-page 164 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 11.1.4 11.2 PMP MULTIPLEXING OPTIONS (80-PIN DEVICES) By default, the PMP and the external memory bus multiplex some of their signals to the same I/O pins on PORTD and PORTE. It is possible that some applications may require the PMP signals to be located elsewhere. For these instances, the 80-pin devices can be configured to multiplex the PMP to different I/O ports. PMP configuration is determined by the PMPMX Configuration bit setting; by default, the PMP and EMB modules share PORTD and PORTE. The optional pin configuration is shown in Table 11-1. TABLE 11-1: PMP PIN MULTIPLEXING FOR 80-PIN DEVICES Pin Assignment PMP Function PMPMX = 1 PMPMX = 0 PMD0 PORTD<0> PORTF<7> PMD1 PORTD<1> PORTF<6> PMD2 PORTD<2> PORTF<5> PMD3 PORTD<3> PORTH<4> PMD4 PORTD<4> PORTA<5> PMD5 PORTD<5> PORTA<4> PMD6 PORTD<6> PORTH<3> PMD7 PORTD<7> PORTH<2> PMBE PORTE<2> PORTH<5> PMWR PORTE<1> PORTH<7> PMRD PORTE<0> PORTH<6> FIGURE 11-2: Slave Port Modes The primary mode of operation for the module is configured using the MODE1:MODE0 bits in the PMMODEH register. The setting affects whether the module acts as a slave or a master and it determines the usage of the control pins. 11.2.1 LEGACY MODE (PSP) In Legacy mode (PMMODEH<1:0> = 00 and PMPEN = 1), the module is configured as a Parallel Slave Port with the associated enabled module pins dedicated to the module. In this mode, an external device, such as another microcontroller or microprocessor, can asynchronously read and write data using the 8-bit data bus (PMD<7:0>), the read (PMRD), write (PMWR) and chip select (PMCS1) inputs. It acts as a slave on the bus and responds to the read/write control signals. Figure 11-2 shows the connection of the Parallel Slave Port. When chip select is active and a write strobe occurs (PMCS = 1 and PMWR = 1), the data from PMD<7:0> is captured into the PMDIN1L register. LEGACY PARALLEL SLAVE PORT EXAMPLE Master PIC18 Slave Address Bus Data Bus PMD<7:0> PMD<7:0> PMCS PMCS1 PMRD PMRD PMWR PMWR © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Control Lines DS39778B-page 165 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 11.2.1.1 WRITE TO SLAVE PORT 11.2.1.2 When chip select is active and a write strobe occurs (PMCS = 1 and PMWR = 1), the data from PMD<7:0> is captured into the PMDIN1L register. The PMPIF and IBF flag bits are set when the write ends.The timing for the control signals in Write mode is shown in Figure 11-3. The polarity of the control signals are configurable. FIGURE 11-3: READ FROM SLAVE PORT When chip select is active and a read strobe occurs (PMCS = 1 and PMRD = 1), the data from the PMDOUTL1 register (PMDOUTL1<7:0>) is presented onto PMD<7:0>.The timing for the control signals in Read mode is shown in Figure 11-4. PARALLEL SLAVE PORT WRITE WAVEFORMS | | | | | | | Q4 | Q1 | Q2 | Q3 | Q4 | Q1 | Q2 | Q3 | Q4 PMCS1 PMWR PMRD PMD<7:0> IBF OBE PMPIF FIGURE 11-4: PARALLEL SLAVE PORT READ WAVEFORMS | | | | | | | Q4 PMCS1 PMWR PMRD PMD<7:0> IBF OBE PMPIF DS39778B-page 166 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 11.2.2 BUFFERED PARALLEL SLAVE PORT MODE Buffered Parallel Slave Port mode is functionally identical to the Legacy Parallel Slave Port mode with one exception: the implementation of 4-level read and write buffers. Buffered PSP mode is enabled by setting the INCM bits in the PMMODE register. If the INCM<1:0> bits are set to ‘11’, the PMP module will act as the Buffered Parallel Slave Port. When the Buffered mode is active, the PMDIN1L,PMDIN1H, PMDIN2L and PMDIN2H registers become the write buffers and the PMDOUT1L, PMDOUT1H, PMDOUT2L and PMDOUT2H registers become the read buffers. Buffers are numbered 0 through 3, starting with the lower byte of PMDIN1L to PMDIN2H as the read buffers, and PMDOUT1L to PMDOUT2H as the write buffers. 11.2.2.1 READ FROM SLAVE PORT For read operations, the bytes will be sent out sequentially, starting with Buffer 0 (PMDOUT1L<7:0>) and ending with Buffer 3 (PMDOUT2H<7:0>) for every read strobe. The module maintains an internal pointer to keep track of which buffer is to be read. Each of the buffers has a corresponding read status bit, OBxE, in the PMSTATL register. This bit is cleared when a buffer contains data that has not been written to the bus, and is set when data is written to the bus. If the current buffer location being read from is empty, a buffer under- FIGURE 11-5: flow is generated, and the Buffer Overflow flag bit OBUF is set. If all 4 OBxE status bits are set, then the Output Buffer Empty flag (OBE) will also be set. 11.2.2.2 WRITE TO SLAVE PORT For write operations, the data is be stored sequentially, starting with Buffer 0 (PMDIN1L<7:0>) and ending with Buffer 3 (PMDIN2H<7:0). As with read operations, the module maintains an internal pointer to the buffer that is to be written next. The input buffers have their own write status bits, IBxF in the PMSTATH register. The bit is set when the buffer contains unread incoming data, and cleared when the data has been read. The flag bit is set on the write strobe. If a write occurs on a buffer when its associated IBxF bit is set, the Buffer Overflow flag, IBOV, is set; any incoming data in the buffer will be lost. If all 4 IBxF flags are set, the Input Buffer Full Flag (IBF) is set. In Buffered Slave mode, the module can be configured to generate an interrupt on every read or write strobe (IRQM1:IRQM0 = 01). It can be configured to generate an interrupt on a read from Read Buffer 3 or a write to Write Buffer 3, which is essentially an interrupt every fourth read or write strobe (RQM1:IRQM0 = 11). When interrupting every fourth byte for input data, all input buffer registers should be read to clear the IBxF flags. If these flags are not cleared, then their is a risk of hitting an overflow condition. PARALLEL MASTER/SLAVE CONNECTION BUFFERED EXAMPLE PIC18 Slave Master PMD<7:0> PMD<7:0> Write Address Pointer Read Address Pointer PMDOUT1L (0) PMDIN1L (0) PMCS PMCS1 PMDOUT1H (1) PMDIN1H (1) PMRD PMRD PMDOUT2L (2) PMDIN2L (2) PMWR PMWR PMDOUT2H (3) PMDIN2H (3) Data Bus Control Lines © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 167 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 11.2.3 ADDRESSABLE PARALLEL SLAVE PORT MODE In the Addressable Parallel Slave Port mode (PMMODEH<1:0> = 01), the module is configured with two extra inputs, PMA<1:0>, which are the address lines 1 and 0. This makes the 4-byte buffer space directly addressable as fixed pairs of read and write buffers. As with Buffered Legacy mode, data is output from PMDOUT1L, PMDOUT1H, PMDOUT2L and PMDOUT2H, and is read in PMDIN1L, PMDIN1H, PMDIN2L and PMDIN2H. Table 11-2 shows the buffer addressing for the incoming address to the input and output registers. FIGURE 11-6: TABLE 11-2: SLAVE MODE BUFFER ADDRESSING PMADDR <1:0> Output Register (Buffer) Input Register (Buffer) 00 PMDOUT1L (0) PMDIN1L (0) 01 PMDOUT1H (1) PMDIN1H (1) 10 PMDOUT2L (2) PMDIN2L (2) 11 PMDOUT2H (3) PMDIN2H (3) PARALLEL MASTER/SLAVE CONNECTION ADDRESSED BUFFER EXAMPLE Master PIC18F Slave PMA<1:0> PMA<1:0> PMD<7:0> PMD<7:0> Read Address Decode PMDOUT1L (0) PMDIN1L (0) PMDOUT1H (1) PMDIN1H (1) PMRD PMDOUT2L (2) PMDIN2L (2) PMWR PMDOUT2H (3) PMDIN2H (3) PMCS PMCS1 PMRD PMWR Write Address Decode Address Bus Data Bus Control Lines DS39778B-page 168 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 11.2.3.1 READ FROM SLAVE PORT When an output buffer is read, the corresponding OBxE bit is set. The OBE flag bit is set when all the buffers are empty. If any buffer is already empty (OBxE = 1), the next read to that buffer will generate an OBUF event. When chip select is active and a read strobe occurs (PMCS = 1 and PMRD = 1), the data from one of the four output bytes is presented onto PMD<7:0>. Which byte is read depends on the 2-bit address placed on ADDR<1:0>. Table 11-2 shows the corresponding output registers and their associated address. FIGURE 11-7: PARALLEL SLAVE PORT READ WAVEFORMS Q1 | Q2 | Q3 | Q4 | Q1 | Q2 | Q3 | Q4 | Q1 | Q2 | Q3 | Q4 PMCS PMWR PMRD PMD<7:0> PMA<1:0> OBE PMPIF 11.2.3.2 WRITE TO SLAVE PORT When an input buffer is written, the corresponding IBxF bit is set. The IBF flag bit is set when all the buffers are written. If any buffer is already written (IBxF = 1), the next write strobe to that buffer will generate an OBUF event and the byte will be discarded. When chip select is active and a write strobe occurs (PMCS = 1 and PMWR = 1), the data from PMD<7:0> is captured into one of the four input buffer bytes. Which byte is written depends on the 2-bit address placed on ADDRL<1:0>. Table 11-2 shows the corresponding input registers and their associated address. FIGURE 11-8: PARALLEL SLAVE PORT WRITE WAVEFORMS Q1 | Q2 | Q3 | Q4 | Q1 | Q2 | Q3 | Q4 | Q1 | Q2 | Q3 | Q4 PMCS PMWR PMRD PMD<7:0> PMA<1:0> IBF PMPIF © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 169 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 11.3 Master Port Modes In its Master modes, the PMP module provides an 8-bit data bus, up to 16 bits of address, and all the necessary control signals to operate a variety of external parallel devices, such as memory devices, peripherals and slave microcontrollers. To use the PMP as a master, the module must be enabled (PMPEN = 1) and the mode must be set to one of the two possible Master modes (PMMODEH<1:0> = 10 or 11). Because there are a number of parallel devices with a variety of control methods, the PMP module is designed to be extremely flexible to accommodate a range of configurations. Some of these features include: • • • • • • • 8 and 16-Bit Data modes on an 8-bit data bus Configurable address/data multiplexing Up to two chip select lines Up to 16 selectable address lines Address auto-increment and auto-decrement Selectable polarity on all control lines Configurable wait states at different stages of the read/write cycle 11.3.1 PMP AND I/O PIN CONTROL Multiple control bits are used to configure the presence or absence of control and address signals in the module. These bits are PTBEEN, PTWREN, PTRDEN, and PTEN<15:0>. They give the user the ability to conserve pins for other functions and allow flexibility to control the external address. When any one of these bits is set, the associated function is present on its associated pin; when clear, the associated pin reverts to its defined I/O port function. Setting a PTEN bit will enable the associated pin as an address pin and drive the corresponding data contained in the PMADDR register. Clearing the PTENx bit will force the pin to revert to its original I/O function. For the pins configured as chip select (PMCS1 or PMCS2) with the corresponding PTENx bit set, chip select pins drive inactive data (with polarity defined by the CS1P and CS2P bits) when a read or write operation is not being performed. The PTEN0 and PTEN1 bits also control the PMALL and PMALH signals. When multiplexing is used, the associated address latch signals should be enabled. 11.3.2 READ/WRITE CONTROL The PMP module supports two distinct read/write _signaling methods. In Master mode 1, read and write strobes are combined into a single control line, PMRD/PMWR. A second control line, PMENB, determines when a read or write action is to be taken. In Master mode 2, separate read and write strobes (PMRD and PMWR) are supplied on separate pins. DS39778B-page 170 All control signals (PMRD, PMWR, PMBE, PMENB, PMAL and PMCSx) can be individually configured as either positive or negative polarity. Configuration is controlled by separate bits in the PMCONL register. Note that the polarity of control signals that share the same output pin (for example, PMWR and PMENB) are controlled by the same bit; the configuration depends on which Master Port mode is being used. 11.3.3 DATA WIDTH The PMP supports data widths of both 8 and 16 bits. The data width is selected by the MODE16 bit (PMMODEH<2>). Because the data path into and out of the module is only 8 bits wide, 16-bit operations are always handled in a multiplexed fashion, with the Least Significant Byte of data being presented first. To differentiate data bytes, the Byte Enable (PMBE) control strobe is used to signal when the Most Significant Byte of data is being presented on the data lines. 11.3.4 ADDRESS MULTIPLEXING In either of the Master modes (PMMODEH<1:0> = 1x), the user can configure the address bus to be multiplexed together with the data bus. This is accomplished using the ADRMUX1:ADRMUX0 bits (PMCONH<4:3>). There are three address multiplexing modes available; typical pinout configurations for these modes are shown in Figure 11-9, Figure 11-10 and Figure 11-11. In Demultiplexed mode (PMCONH<4:3> = 00), data and address information are completely separated. Data bits are presented on PMD<7:0>, and address bits are presented on PMADDRH<7:0> and PMADDRL<7:0>. In Partially Multiplexed mode (PMCONH<4:3> = 01), the lower eight bits of the address are multiplexed with the data pins on PMD<7:0>. The upper eight bits of address are unaffected and are presented on PMADDRH<7:0>. The PMA0 pin is used as an address latch and presents the Address Latch Low (PMALL) enable strobe. The read and write sequences are extended by a complete CPU cycle during which the address is presented on the PMD<7:0> pins. In Fully Multiplexed mode (PMCONH<4:3> = 10), the entire 16 bits of the address are multiplexed with the data pins on PMD<7:0>. The PMA0 and PMA1 pins are used to present Address Latch Low (PMALL) enable and Address Latch High (PMALH) enable strobes, respectively. The read and write sequences are extended by two complete CPU cycles. During the first cycle, the lower eight bits of the address are presented on the PMD<7:0> pins with the PMALL strobe active. During the second cycle, the upper eight bits of the address are presented on the PMD<7:0> pins with the PMALH strobe active. In the event the upper address bits are configured as chip select pins, the corresponding address bits are automatically forced to ‘0’. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 11-9: DEMULTIPLEXED ADDRESSING MODE (SEPARATE READ AND WRITE STROBES, TWO CHIP SELECTS) PIC18F PMA<13:0> PMD<7:0> PMCS1 PMCS2 Address Bus PMRD PMWR FIGURE 11-10: Data Bus Control Lines PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESSING MODE (SEPARATE READ AND WRITE STROBES, TWO CHIP SELECTS) PIC18F PMA<13:8> PMD<7:0> PMA<7:0> PMCS1 PMCS2 Address Bus PMALL PMRD PMWR FIGURE 11-11: Multiplexed Data and Address Bus Control Lines FULLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESSING MODE (SEPARATE READ AND WRITE STROBES, TWO CHIP SELECTS) PIC18F PMD<7:0> PMA<13:8> PMCS1 PMCS2 PMALL PMALH PMRD PMWR © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Multiplexed Data and Address Bus Control Lines DS39778B-page 171 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 11.3.5 CHIP SELECT FEATURES Up to two chip select lines, PMCS1 and PMCS2, are available for the Master modes of the PMP. The two chip select lines are multiplexed with the Most Significant bits of the address bus (PMADDRH<6> and PMADDRH<7>). When a pin is configured as a chip select, it is not included in any address auto-increment/decrement. The function of the chip select signals is configured using the chip select function bits (PMCONL <7:6>). 11.3.6 AUTO-INCREMENT/DECREMENT While the module is operating in one of the Master modes, the INCM bits (PMMODEH<3:4>) control the behavior of the address value. The address can be made to automatically increment or decrement after each read and write operation. The address increments once each operation is completed and the BUSY bit goes to ‘0’. If the chip select signals are disabled and configured as address bits, the bits will participate in the increment and decrement operations; otherwise, the CS2 and CS1 bit values will be unaffected. 11.3.7 WAIT STATES In Master mode, the user has control over the duration of the read, write and address cycles by configuring the module wait states. Three portions of the cycle, the beginning, middle, and end, are configured using the corresponding WAITBx, WAITMx and WAITEx bits in the PMMODEL register. The WAITB1:WAITB0 bits (PMMODEL<7:6>) set the number of wait cycles for the data setup prior to the PMRD/PMWT strobe in Mode 10, or prior to the PMENB strobe in Mode 11. The WAITM3:WAITM0 bits (PMMODEL<5:2>) set the number of wait cycles for the PMRD/PMWT strobe in Mode 10, or for the PMENB strobe in Mode 11. When this wait state setting is 0, then WAITB and WAITE have no effect. The WAITE1:WAITE0 bits (PMMODEL<1:0>) define the number of wait cycles for the data hold time after the PMRD/PMWT strobe in Mode 10, or after the PMENB strobe in Mode 11. 11.3.8 READ OPERATION To perform a read on the Parallel Master Port, the user reads the PMDIN1L register. This causes the PMP to output the desired values on the chip select lines and the address bus. Then the read line (PMRD) is strobed. The read data is placed into the PMDIN1L register. DS39778B-page 172 If the 16-bit mode is enabled (MODE16 = 1), the read of the low byte of the PMDIN1L register will initiate two bus reads. The first read data byte is placed into the PMDIN1L register, and the second read data is placed into the PMDIN1H. Note that the read data obtained from the PMDIN1L register is actually the read value from the previous read operation. Hence, the first user read will be a dummy read to initiate the first bus read and fill the read register. Also, the requested read value will not be ready until after the BUSY bit is observed low. Thus, in a back-to-back read operation, the data read from the register will be the same for both reads. The next read of the register will yield the new value. 11.3.9 WRITE OPERATION To perform a write onto the parallel bus, the user writes to the PMDIN1L register. This causes the module to first output the desired values on the chip select lines and the address bus. The write data from the PMDIN1L register is placed onto the PMD<7:0> data bus. Then the write line (PMWR) is strobed. If the 16-bit mode is enabled (MODE16 = 1), the write to the PMDIN1L register will initiate two bus writes. First write will consist of the data contained in PMDIN1L and the second write will contain the PMDIN1H. 11.3.10 11.3.10.1 PARALLEL MASTER PORT STATUS The BUSY Bit In addition to the PMP interrupt, a BUSY bit is provided to indicate the status of the module. This bit is only used in Master mode. While any read or write operation is in progress, the BUSY bit is set for all but the very last CPU cycle of the operation. In effect, if a single-cycle read or write operation is requested, the BUSY bit will never be active. This allows back-to-back transfers. While the bit is set, any request by the user to initiate a new operation will be ignored (i.e., writing or reading the lower byte of the PMDIN1L register will not initiate either a read nor a write). 11.3.10.2 INTERRUPTS When the PMP module interrupt is enabled for Master mode, the module will interrupt on every completed read or write cycle; otherwise, the BUSY bit is available to query the status of the module. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 11.3.11 MASTER MODE TIMING This section contains a number of timing examples that represent the common Master mode configuration options. These options vary from 8-bit to 16-bit data, fully demultiplexed to fully multiplexed address, as well as wait states. FIGURE 11-12: READ AND WRITE TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, DEMULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS2 PMCS1 PMD<7:0> PMA<13:0> PMWR PMRD PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-13: READ TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS2 PMCS1 Address<7:0> PMD<7:0> Data PMA<13:8> PMWR PMRD PMALL PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-14: READ TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, WAIT STATES ENABLED, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - PMCS2 PMCS1 PMD<7:0> Address<7:0> Data PMA<13:8> PMRD PMWR PMALL PMPIF BUSY WAITB<1:0> = 01 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. WAITE<1:0> = 00 WAITM<3:0> = 0010 Preliminary DS39778B-page 173 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 11-15: WRITE TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS2 PMCS1 Address<7:0> PMD<7:0> Data PMA<13:8> PMWR PMRD PMALL PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-16: WRITE TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, WAIT STATES ENABLED, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - PMCS2 PMCS1 Address<7:0> PMD<7:0> Data PMA<13:8> PMWR PMRD PMALL PMPIF BUSY WAITE<1:0> = 00 WAITB<1:0> = 01 WAITM<3:0> = 0010 FIGURE 11-17: READ TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS, ENABLE STROBE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS2 PMCS1 PMD<7:0> Address<7:0> Data PMA<13:8> PMRD/PMWR PMENB PMALL PMPIF BUSY DS39778B-page 174 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 11-18: WRITE TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS, ENABLE STROBE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS2 PMCS1 Address<7:0> PMD<7:0> Data PMA<13:8> PMRD/PMWR PMENB PMALL PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-19: READ TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, FULLY MULTIPLEXED 16-BIT ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS2 PMCS1 Address<7:0> PMD<7:0> Address<15:8> Data PMWR PMRD PMALL PMALH PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-20: WRITE TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, FULLY MULTIPLEXED 16-BIT ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS2 PMCS1 PMD<7:0> Address<7:0> Address<15:8> Data PMWR PMRD PMALL PMALH PMPIF BUSY © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 175 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 11-21: READ TIMING, 16-BIT DATA, DEMULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS2 PMCS1 LSB PMD<7:0> MSB PMA<13:0> PMWR PMRD PMBE PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-22: WRITE TIMING, 16-BIT DATA, DEMULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS2 PMCS1 PMD<7:0> LSB MSB PMA<13:0> PMWR PMRD PMBE PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-23: READ TIMING, 16-BIT MULTIPLEXED DATA, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS2 PMCS1 PMD<7:0> Address<7:0> LSB MSB PMA<13:8> PMWR PMRD PMBE PMALL PMPIF BUSY DS39778B-page 176 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 11-24: WRITE TIMING, 16-BIT MULTIPLEXED DATA, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS2 PMCS1 Address<7:0> PMD<7:0> LSB MSB PMA<13:8> PMWR PMRD PMBE PMALL PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-25: READ TIMING, 16-BIT MULTIPLEXED DATA, FULLY MULTIPLEXED 16-BIT ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS2 PMCS1 Address<7:0> PMD<7:0> LSB Address<15:8> MSB PMWR PMRD PMBE PMALH PMALL PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-26: WRITE TIMING, 16-BIT MULTIPLEXED DATA, FULLY MULTIPLEXED 16-BIT ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS2 PMCS1 PMD<7:0> Address<7:0> Address<15:8> LSB MSB PMWR PMRD PMBE PMALH PMALL PMPIF BUSY © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 177 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 11.4 11.4.1 Application Examples This section introduces some potential applications for the PMP module. FIGURE 11-27: Figure 11-27 demonstrates the hookup of a memory or other addressable peripheral in Full Multiplex mode. Consequently, this mode achieves the best pin saving from the microcontroller perspective. However, for this configuration, there needs to be some external latches to maintain the address. EXAMPLE OF A MULTIPLEXED ADDRESSING APPLICATION PIC18F PMD<7:0> A<7:0> 373 PMALL A<15:0> D<7:0> 373 D<7:0> CE A<15:8> OE PMALH 11.4.2 MULTIPLEXED MEMORY OR PERIPHERAL WR PMCS Address Bus PMRD Data Bus PMWR Control Lines ory or peripheral that is partially multiplexed with an external latch. If the peripheral has internal latches as shown in Figure 11-29, then no extra circuitry is required except for the peripheral itself. PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED MEMORY OR PERIPHERAL Partial multiplexing implies using more pins; however, for a few extra pins, some extra performance can be achieved. Figure 11-28 shows an example of a mem- FIGURE 11-28: EXAMPLE OF A PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESSING APPLICATION PIC18F PMD<7:0> 373 PMALL PMA<14:7> A<7:0> D<7:0> A<14:8> D<7:0> CE OE PMCS WR Address Bus Data Bus PMRD Control Lines PMWR FIGURE 11-29: A<14:0> EXAMPLE OF AN 8-BIT MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS AND DATA APPLICATION PIC18F PMD<7:0> PMALL Parallel Peripheral AD<7:0> ALE PMCS CS Address Bus PMRD RD Data Bus PMWR WR Control Lines DS39778B-page 178 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 11.4.3 PARALLEL EEPROM EXAMPLE Figure 11-30 shows an example connecting parallel EEPROM to the PMP. Figure 11-31 shows a slight variation to this, configuring the connection for 16-bit data from a single EEPROM. FIGURE 11-30: PARALLEL EEPROM EXAMPLE (UP TO 15-BIT ADDRESS, 8-BIT DATA) PIC18F Parallel EEPROM PMA<n:0> A<n:0> PMD<7:0> D<7:0> PMCS CE PMRD OE PMWR WR FIGURE 11-31: Data Bus Control Lines PARALLEL EEPROM EXAMPLE (UP TO 15-BIT ADDRESS, 16-BIT DATA) PIC18F Parallel EEPROM PMA<n:0> A<n:1> PMD<7:0> D<7:0> PMBE 11.4.4 Address Bus A0 PMCS CE PMRD OE PMWR WR Address Bus Data Bus Control Lines LCD CONTROLLER EXAMPLE The PMP module can be configured to connect to a typical LCD controller interface, as shown in Figure 11-32. In this case, the PMP module is configured for active-high control signals since common LCD displays require active-high control. FIGURE 11-32: LCD CONTROL EXAMPLE (BYTE MODE OPERATION) PIC18F PM<7:0> PMA0 PMRD/PMWR PMCS LCD Controller D<7:0> RS R/W E Address Bus Data Bus Control Lines © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 179 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 11-3: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PMP MODULE Bit 7 INTCON Bit 6 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 58 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 58 IPR1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP PMCONH PMPEN — PSIDL PMCONL CSF1 CSF0 ALP CS2 CS1 PMADDRH/ PMDOUT1H(1) ADRMUX1 ADRMUX0 PTBEEN CS2P CS1P BEP TMR2IP TMR1IP 58 PTWREN PTRDEN 60 WRSP RDSP 60 Parallel Master Port Address, High Byte 60 Parallel Port Out Data High Byte (Buffer 1) PMADDRL/ 60 Parallel Master Port Address Low Byte 60 PMDOUT1L(1) Parallel Port Out Data Low Byte (Buffer 0) 60 PMDOUT2H Parallel Port Out Data High Byte (Buffer 3) 60 PMDOUT2L Parallel Port Out Data Low Byte (Buffer 2) 60 PMDIN1H Parallel Port In Data High Byte (Buffer 1) 60 PMDIN1L Parallel Port In Data Low Byte (Buffer 0) 60 PMDIN2H Parallel Port In Data High Byte (Buffer 3) 60 PMDIN2L Parallel Port In Data Low Byte (Buffer 2) 60 PMMODEH BUSY IRQM1 IRQM0 INCM1 INCM0 MODE16 MODE1 MODE0 60 PMMODEL WAITB1 WAITB0 WAITM3 WAITM2 WAITM1 WAITM0 WAITE1 WAITE0 60 PMEH PTEN15 PTEN14 PTEN13 PTEN12 PTEN11 PTEN10 PTEN9 PTEN8 60 PMEL PTEN7 PTEN6 PTEN5 PTEN4 PTEN3 PTEN2 PTEN1 PTEN0 60 PMSTATH IBF IBOV — — IB3F IB2F IB1F IB0F 60 PMSTATL OBE OBUF — — OB3E OB2E OB1E OB0E 60 — — — — — — — PMPTTL 56 PADCFG1(2) Legend: Note 1: 2: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used during PMP operation. The PMADDRH/PMDOUT1H and PMADDRL/PMDOUT1L register pairs share the physical registers and addresses, but have different functions determined by the module’s operating mode. Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. DS39778B-page 180 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 12.0 TIMER0 MODULE The Timer0 module incorporates the following features: • Software selectable operation as a timer or counter in both 8-bit or 16-bit modes • Readable and writable registers • Dedicated 8-bit, software programmable prescaler • Selectable clock source (internal or external) • Edge select for external clock • Interrupt-on-overflow REGISTER 12-1: The T0CON register (Register 12-1) controls all aspects of the module’s operation, including the prescale selection. It is both readable and writable. A simplified block diagram of the Timer0 module in 8-bit mode is shown in Figure 12-1. Figure 12-2 shows a simplified block diagram of the Timer0 module in 16-bit mode. T0CON: TIMER0 CONTROL REGISTER R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 TMR0ON T08BIT T0CS T0SE PSA T0PS2 T0PS1 T0PS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 TMR0ON: Timer0 On/Off Control bit 1 = Enables Timer0 0 = Stops Timer0 bit 6 T08BIT: Timer0 8-Bit/16-Bit Control bit 1 = Timer0 is configured as an 8-bit timer/counter 0 = Timer0 is configured as a 16-bit timer/counter bit 5 T0CS: Timer0 Clock Source Select bit 1 = Transition on T0CKI pin 0 = Internal instruction cycle clock (CLKO) bit 4 T0SE: Timer0 Source Edge Select bit 1 = Increment on high-to-low transition on T0CKI pin 0 = Increment on low-to-high transition on T0CKI pin bit 3 PSA: Timer0 Prescaler Assignment bit 1 = TImer0 prescaler is not assigned. Timer0 clock input bypasses prescaler. 0 = Timer0 prescaler is assigned. Timer0 clock input comes from prescaler output. bit 2-0 T0PS2:T0PS0: Timer0 Prescaler Select bits 111 = 1:256 Prescale value 110 = 1:128 Prescale value 101 = 1:64 Prescale value 100 = 1:32 Prescale value 011 = 1:16 Prescale value 010 = 1:8 Prescale value 001 = 1:4 Prescale value 000 = 1:2 Prescale value © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 181 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 12.1 Timer0 Operation Timer0 can operate as either a timer or a counter. The mode is selected with the T0CS bit (T0CON<5>). In Timer mode (T0CS = 0), the module increments on every clock by default unless a different prescaler value is selected (see Section 12.3 “Prescaler”). If the TMR0 register is written to, the increment is inhibited for the following two instruction cycles. The user can work around this by writing an adjusted value to the TMR0 register. The Counter mode is selected by setting the T0CS bit (= 1). In this mode, Timer0 increments either on every rising or falling edge of pin RA4/T0CKI. The incrementing edge is determined by the Timer0 Source Edge Select bit, T0SE (T0CON<4>); clearing this bit selects the rising edge. Restrictions on the external clock input are discussed below. An external clock source can be used to drive Timer0; however, it must meet certain requirements to ensure that the external clock can be synchronized with the FIGURE 12-1: internal phase clock (TOSC). There is a delay between synchronization and the onset of incrementing the timer/counter. 12.2 Timer0 Reads and Writes in 16-Bit Mode TMR0H is not the actual high byte of Timer0 in 16-bit mode. It is actually a buffered version of the real high byte of Timer0 which is not directly readable nor writable (refer to Figure 12-2). TMR0H is updated with the contents of the high byte of Timer0 during a read of TMR0L. This provides the ability to read all 16 bits of Timer0 without having to verify that the read of the high and low byte were valid, due to a rollover between successive reads of the high and low byte. Similarly, a write to the high byte of Timer0 must also take place through the TMR0H Buffer register. The high byte is updated with the contents of TMR0H when a write occurs to TMR0L. This allows all 16 bits of Timer0 to be updated at once. TIMER0 BLOCK DIAGRAM (8-BIT MODE) FOSC/4 0 1 1 Programmable Prescaler T0CKI pin T0SE T0CS 0 Sync with Internal Clocks Set TMR0IF on Overflow TMR0L (2 TCY Delay) 8 3 T0PS2:T0PS0 8 PSA Note: Internal Data Bus Upon Reset, Timer0 is enabled in 8-bit mode with clock input from T0CKI max. prescale. FIGURE 12-2: TIMER0 BLOCK DIAGRAM (16-BIT MODE) FOSC/4 0 1 1 Programmable Prescaler T0CKI pin TMR0 High Byte TMR0L 8 Set TMR0IF on Overflow (2 TCY Delay) T0SE T0CS 0 Sync with Internal Clocks 3 Read TMR0L T0PS2:T0PS0 Write TMR0L PSA 8 8 TMR0H 8 8 Internal Data Bus Note: Upon Reset, Timer0 is enabled in 8-bit mode with clock input from T0CKI max. prescale. DS39778B-page 182 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 12.3 12.3.1 Prescaler An 8-bit counter is available as a prescaler for the Timer0 module. The prescaler is not directly readable or writable. Its value is set by the PSA and T0PS2:T0PS0 bits (T0CON<3:0>) which determine the prescaler assignment and prescale ratio. Clearing the PSA bit assigns the prescaler to the Timer0 module. When it is assigned, prescale values from 1:2 through 1:256 in power-of-2 increments are selectable. When assigned to the Timer0 module, all instructions writing to the TMR0 register (e.g., CLRF TMR0, MOVWF TMR0, BSF TMR0, etc.) clear the prescaler count. Note: Writing to TMR0 when the prescaler is assigned to Timer0 will clear the prescaler count but will not change the prescaler assignment. TABLE 12-1: Name SWITCHING PRESCALER ASSIGNMENT The prescaler assignment is fully under software control and can be changed “on-the-fly” during program execution. 12.4 Timer0 Interrupt The TMR0 interrupt is generated when the TMR0 register overflows from FFh to 00h in 8-bit mode, or from FFFFh to 0000h in 16-bit mode. This overflow sets the TMR0IF flag bit. The interrupt can be masked by clearing the TMR0IE bit (INTCON<5>). Before re-enabling the interrupt, the TMR0IF bit must be cleared in software by the Interrupt Service Routine. Since Timer0 is shut down in Sleep mode, the TMR0 interrupt cannot awaken the processor from Sleep. REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 TMR0L Timer0 Register Low Byte TMR0H Timer0 Register High Byte INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE T0CON TMR0ON TRISA TRISA7(1) TRISA6(1) T08BIT Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: 56 56 INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 T0CS T0SE PSA T0PS2 T0PS1 T0PS0 56 TRISA5 TRISA4 TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 58 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by Timer0. Note 1: These bits are only available in select oscillator modes (FOSC2 Configuration bit = 0); otherwise, they are unimplemented. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 183 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 184 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 13.0 TIMER1 MODULE The Timer1 timer/counter module incorporates these features: • Software selectable operation as a 16-bit timer or counter • Readable and writable 8-bit registers (TMR1H and TMR1L) • Selectable clock source (internal or external) with device clock or Timer1 oscillator internal options • Interrupt on overflow • Reset on ECCPx Special Event Trigger • Device clock status flag (T1RUN) REGISTER 13-1: A simplified block diagram of the Timer1 module is shown in Figure 13-1. A block diagram of the module’s operation in Read/Write mode is shown in Figure 13-2. The module incorporates its own low-power oscillator to provide an additional clocking option. The Timer1 oscillator can also be used as a low-power clock source for the microcontroller in power-managed operation. Timer1 can also be used to provide Real-Time Clock (RTC) functionality to applications with only a minimal addition of external components and code overhead. Timer1 is controlled through the T1CON Control register (Register 13-1). It also contains the Timer1 Oscillator Enable bit (T1OSCEN). Timer1 can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing control bit, TMR1ON (T1CON<0>). T1CON: TIMER1 CONTROL REGISTER(1) R/W-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 RD16: 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Enable bit 1 = Enables register read/write of TImer1 in one 16-bit operation 0 = Enables register read/write of Timer1 in two 8-bit operations bit 6 T1RUN: Timer1 System Clock Status bit 1 = Device clock is derived from Timer1 oscillator 0 = Device clock is derived from another source bit 5-4 T1CKPS1:T1CKPS0: Timer1 Input Clock Prescale Select bits 11 = 1:8 Prescale value 10 = 1:4 Prescale value 01 = 1:2 Prescale value 00 = 1:1 Prescale value bit 3 T1OSCEN: Timer1 Oscillator Enable bit 1 = Timer1 oscillator is enabled 0 = Timer1 oscillator is shut off The oscillator inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain. bit 2 T1SYNC: Timer1 External Clock Input Synchronization Select bit When TMR1CS = 1: 1 = Do not synchronize external clock input 0 = Synchronize external clock input When TMR1CS = 0: This bit is ignored. Timer1 uses the internal clock when TMR1CS = 0. bit 1 TMR1CS: Timer1 Clock Source Select bit 1 = External clock from pin RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI (on the rising edge) 0 = Internal clock (FOSC/4) bit 0 TMR1ON: Timer1 On bit 1 = Enables Timer1 0 = Stops Timer1 Note 1: Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 185 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 13.1 Timer1 Operation cycle (FOSC/4). When the bit is set, Timer1 increments on every rising edge of the Timer1 external clock input or the Timer1 oscillator, if enabled. Timer1 can operate in one of these modes: • Timer • Synchronous Counter • Asynchronous Counter When Timer1 is enabled, the RC1/T1OSI and RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI pins become inputs. This means the values of TRISC<1:0> are ignored and the pins are read as ‘0’. The operating mode is determined by the clock select bit, TMR1CS (T1CON<1>). When TMR1CS is cleared (= 0), Timer1 increments on every internal instruction FIGURE 13-1: TIMER1 BLOCK DIAGRAM Timer1 Oscillator Timer1 Clock Input 1 On/Off T1OSO/T13CKI 1 FOSC/4 Internal Clock T1OSI Synchronize Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 0 Detect 0 2 T1OSCEN(1) Sleep Input Timer1 On/Off TMR1CS T1CKPS1:T1CKPS0 T1SYNC TMR1ON Clear TMR1 (ECCPx Special Event Trigger) Set TMR1IF on Overflow TMR1 High Byte TMR1L Note 1: When enable bit, T1OSCEN, is cleared, the inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain. FIGURE 13-2: TIMER1 BLOCK DIAGRAM (16-BIT READ/WRITE MODE) Timer1 Oscillator Timer1 Clock Input 1 T1OSO/T13CKI T1OSI 1 FOSC/4 Internal Clock Synchronize Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 0 Detect 0 2 Sleep Input TMR1CS T1OSCEN(1) T1CKPS1:T1CKPS0 T1SYNC TMR1ON Clear TMR1 (ECCPx Special Event Trigger) Timer1 On/Off TMR1 High Byte TMR1L 8 Set TMR1IF on Overflow Read TMR1L Write TMR1L 8 8 TMR1H 8 8 Internal Data Bus Note 1: When enable bit, T1OSCEN, is cleared, the inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain. DS39778B-page 186 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 13.2 TABLE 13-1: Timer1 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Timer1 can be configured for 16-bit reads and writes (see Figure 13-2). When the RD16 control bit, T1CON<7>, is set, the address for TMR1H is mapped to a buffer register for the high byte of Timer1. A read from TMR1L will load the contents of the high byte of Timer1 into the Timer1 High Byte Buffer register. This provides the user with the ability to accurately read all 16 bits of Timer1 without having to determine whether a read of the high byte, followed by a read of the low byte, has become invalid due to a rollover between reads. Oscillator Type Freq. C1 C2 LP 32 kHz 27 pF(1) 27 pF(1) Note 1: Microchip suggests these values as a starting point in validating the oscillator circuit. 2: Higher capacitance increases the stability of the oscillator but also increases the start-up time. A write to the high byte of Timer1 must also take place through the TMR1H Buffer register. The Timer1 high byte is updated with the contents of TMR1H when a write occurs to TMR1L. This allows a user to write all 16 bits to both the high and low bytes of Timer1 at once. The high byte of Timer1 is not directly readable or writable in this mode. All reads and writes must take place through the Timer1 High Byte Buffer register. Writes to TMR1H do not clear the Timer1 prescaler. The prescaler is only cleared on writes to TMR1L. 13.3 Timer1 Oscillator An on-chip crystal oscillator circuit is incorporated between pins T1OSI (input) and T1OSO (amplifier output). It is enabled by setting the Timer1 Oscillator Enable bit, T1OSCEN (T1CON<3>). The oscillator is a low-power circuit rated for 32 kHz crystals. It will continue to run during all power-managed modes. The circuit for a typical LP oscillator is shown in Figure 13-3. Table 13-1 shows the capacitor selection for the Timer1 oscillator. The user must provide a software time delay to ensure proper start-up of the Timer1 oscillator. FIGURE 13-3: EXTERNAL COMPONENTS FOR THE TIMER1 LP OSCILLATOR C1 27 pF PIC18F87J11 3: Since each resonator/crystal has its own characteristics, the user should consult the resonator/crystal manufacturer for appropriate values of external components. 4: Capacitor values are for design guidance only. 13.3.1 Whenever the Timer1 oscillator is providing the clock source, the Timer1 system clock status flag, T1RUN (T1CON<6>), is set. This can be used to determine the controller’s current clocking mode. It can also indicate the clock source being currently used by the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor. If the Clock Monitor is enabled and the Timer1 oscillator fails while providing the clock, polling the T1RUN bit will indicate whether the clock is being provided by the Timer1 oscillator or another source. 13.3.2 TIMER1 OSCILLATOR LAYOUT CONSIDERATIONS The Timer1 oscillator circuit draws very little power during operation. Due to the low-power nature of the oscillator, it may also be sensitive to rapidly changing signals in close proximity. XTAL 32.768 kHz T1OSO C2 27 pF See the Notes with Table 13-1 for additional information about capacitor selection. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. USING TIMER1 AS A CLOCK SOURCE The Timer1 oscillator is also available as a clock source in power-managed modes. By setting the clock select bits, SCS1:SCS0 (OSCCON<1:0>), to ‘01’, the device switches to SEC_RUN mode; both the CPU and peripherals are clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. If the IDLEN bit (OSCCON<7>) is cleared and a SLEEP instruction is executed, the device enters SEC_IDLE mode. Additional details are available in Section 3.0 “Power-Managed Modes”. T1OSI Note: CAPACITOR SELECTION FOR THE TIMER OSCILLATOR(2,3,4) The oscillator circuit, shown in Figure 13-3, should be located as close as possible to the microcontroller. There should be no circuits passing within the oscillator circuit boundaries other than VSS or VDD. Preliminary DS39778B-page 187 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY If a high-speed circuit must be located near the oscillator (such as the ECCP1 pin in Output Compare or PWM mode, or the primary oscillator using the OSC2 pin), a grounded guard ring around the oscillator circuit, as shown in Figure 13-4, may be helpful when used on a single-sided PCB or in addition to a ground plane. FIGURE 13-4: VSS OSC1 OSC2 RC1 RC2 Note: Not drawn to scale. Timer1 Interrupt The TMR1 register pair (TMR1H:TMR1L) increments from 0000h to FFFFh and rolls over to 0000h. The Timer1 interrupt, if enabled, is generated on overflow which is latched in interrupt flag bit, TMR1IF (PIR1<0>). This interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the Timer1 Interrupt Enable bit, TMR1IE (PIE1<0>). Resetting Timer1 Using the ECCPx Special Event Trigger Since the register pair is 16 bits wide, counting up to overflow the register directly from a 32.768 kHz clock would take 2 seconds. To force the overflow at the required one-second intervals, it is necessary to preload it. The simplest method is to set the MSb of TMR1H with a BSF instruction. Note that the TMR1L register is never preloaded or altered; doing so may introduce cumulative error over many cycles. For this method to be accurate, Timer1 must operate in Asynchronous mode and the Timer1 overflow interrupt must be enabled (PIE1<0> = 1), as shown in the routine, RTCinit. The Timer1 oscillator must also be enabled and running at all times. 13.7 If ECCP1 or ECCP2 is configured to use Timer1 and to generate a Special Event Trigger in Compare mode (CCPxM3:CCPxM0 = 1011), this signal will reset Timer3. The trigger from ECCP2 will also start an A/D conversion if the A/D module is enabled (see Section 18.2.1 “Special Event Trigger” for more information). The module must be configured as either a timer or a synchronous counter to take advantage of this feature. When used this way, the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair effectively becomes a period register for Timer1. If Timer1 is running in Asynchronous Counter mode, this Reset operation may not work. In the event that a write to Timer1 coincides with a Special Event Trigger, the write operation will take precedence. DS39778B-page 188 Using Timer1 as a Real-Time Clock The application code routine, RTCisr, shown in Example 13-1, demonstrates a simple method to increment a counter at one-second intervals using an Interrupt Service Routine. Incrementing the TMR1 register pair to overflow triggers the interrupt and calls the routine which increments the seconds counter by one. Additional counters for minutes and hours are incremented as the previous counter overflows. RC0 13.5 13.6 The Special Event Triggers from the ECCPx module will not set the TMR1IF interrupt flag bit (PIR1<0>). Adding an external LP oscillator to Timer1 (such as the one described in Section 13.3 “Timer1 Oscillator”) gives users the option to include RTC functionality to their applications. This is accomplished with an inexpensive watch crystal to provide an accurate time base and several lines of application code to calculate the time. When operating in Sleep mode and using a battery or supercapacitor as a power source, it can completely eliminate the need for a separate RTC device and battery backup. OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT WITH GROUNDED GUARD RING VDD 13.4 Note: Considerations in Asynchronous Counter Mode Following a Timer1 interrupt and an update to the TMR1 registers, the Timer1 module uses a falling edge on its clock source to trigger the next register update on the rising edge. If the update is completed after the clock input has fallen, the next rising edge will not be counted. If the application can reliably update TMR1 before the timer input goes low, no additional action is needed. Otherwise, an adjusted update can be performed following a later Timer1 increment. This can be done by monitoring TMR1L within the interrupt routine until it increments, and then updating the TMR1H:TMR1L register pair while the clock is low, or one-half of the period of the clock source. Assuming that Timer1 is being used as a Real-Time Clock, the clock source is a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator. In this case, one-half period of the clock is 15.25 μs. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY The Real-Time Clock application code in Example 13-1 shows a typical ISR for Timer1, as well as the optional code required if the update cannot be done reliably within the required interval. EXAMPLE 13-1: IMPLEMENTING A REAL-TIME CLOCK USING A TIMER1 INTERRUPT SERVICE RTCinit MOVLW MOVWF CLRF MOVLW MOVWF CLRF CLRF MOVLW MOVWF BSF RETURN 80h TMR1H TMR1L b’00001111’ T1CON secs mins .12 hours PIE1, TMR1IE ; Preload TMR1 register pair ; for 1 second overflow ; Configure for external clock, ; Asynchronous operation, external oscillator ; Initialize timekeeping registers ; ; Enable Timer1 interrupt RTCisr TABLE 13-2: Name INTCON BTFSC BRA BTFSS BRA TMR1L,0 $-2 TMR1L,0 $-2 BSF BCF INCF MOVLW CPFSGT RETURN CLRF INCF MOVLW CPFSGT RETURN CLRF INCF MOVLW CPFSGT RETURN CLRF RETURN TMR1H, 7 PIR1, TMR1IF secs, F .59 secs secs mins, F .59 mins mins hours, F .23 hours ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Insert the next 4 lines of code when TMR1 can not be reliably updated before clock pulse goes low wait for TMR1L to become clear (may already be clear) wait for TMR1L to become set TMR1 has just incremented If TMR1 update can be completed before clock pulse goes low Start ISR here Preload for 1 sec overflow Clear interrupt flag Increment seconds 60 seconds elapsed? ; ; ; ; No, done Clear seconds Increment minutes 60 minutes elapsed? ; ; ; ; No, done clear minutes Increment hours 24 hours elapsed? ; No, done ; Reset hours ; Done hours REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER1 AS A TIMER/COUNTER Bit 7 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 Bit 6 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 58 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 58 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 58 IPR1 TMR1L(1) Timer1 Register Low Byte 56 (1) Timer1 Register High Byte 56 TMR1H (1) T1CON RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON 56 Legend: Shaded cells are not used by the Timer1 module. Note 1: Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 189 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 190 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 14.0 TIMER2 MODULE 14.1 Timer2 Operation • 8-Bit Timer and Period registers (TMR2 and PR2, respectively) • Readable and writable (both registers) • Software programmable prescaler (1:1, 1:4 and 1:16) • Software programmable postscaler (1:1 through 1:16) • Interrupt on TMR2 to PR2 match • Optional use as the shift clock for the MSSP modules In normal operation, TMR2 is incremented from 00h on each clock (FOSC/4). A 4-bit counter/prescaler on the clock input gives direct input, divide-by-4 and divide-by-16 prescale options. These are selected by the prescaler control bits, T2CKPS1:T2CKPS0 (T2CON<1:0>). The value of TMR2 is compared to that of the Period register, PR2, on each clock cycle. When the two values match, the comparator generates a match signal as the timer output. This signal also resets the value of TMR2 to 00h on the next cycle and drives the output counter/postscaler (see Section 14.2 “Timer2 Interrupt”). The module is controlled through the T2CON register (Register 14-1) which enables or disables the timer and configures the prescaler and postscaler. Timer2 can be shut off by clearing control bit, TMR2ON (T2CON<2>), to minimize power consumption. The TMR2 and PR2 registers are both directly readable and writable. The TMR2 register is cleared on any device Reset, while the PR2 register initializes at FFh. Both the prescaler and postscaler counters are cleared on the following events: A simplified block diagram of the module is shown in Figure 14-1. • a write to the TMR2 register • a write to the T2CON register • any device Reset (Power-on Reset, MCLR Reset, Watchdog Timer Reset or Brown-out Reset) The Timer2 module incorporates the following features: TMR2 is not cleared when T2CON is written. REGISTER 14-1: T2CON: TIMER2 CONTROL REGISTER U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-3 T2OUTPS3:T2OUTPS0: Timer2 Output Postscale Select bits 0000 = 1:1 Postscale 0001 = 1:2 Postscale • • • 1111 = 1:16 Postscale bit 2 TMR2ON: Timer2 On bit 1 = Timer2 is on 0 = Timer2 is off bit 1-0 T2CKPS1:T2CKPS0: Timer2 Clock Prescale Select bits 00 = Prescaler is 1 01 = Prescaler is 4 1x = Prescaler is 16 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39778B-page 191 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 14.2 Timer2 Interrupt 14.3 Timer2 can also generate an optional device interrupt. The Timer2 output signal (TMR2 to PR2 match) provides the input for the 4-bit output counter/postscaler. This counter generates the TMR2 match interrupt flag which is latched in TMR2IF (PIR1<1>). The interrupt is enabled by setting the TMR2 Match Interrupt Enable bit, TMR2IE (PIE1<1>). Timer2 Output The unscaled output of TMR2 is available primarily to the ECCPx/CCPx modules, where it is used as a time base for operations in PWM mode. Timer2 can be optionally used as the shift clock source for the MSSP modules operating in SPI mode. Additional information is provided in Section 19.0 “Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) Module”. A range of 16 postscale options (from 1:1 through 1:16 inclusive) can be selected with the postscaler control bits, T2OUTPS3:T2OUTPS0 (T2CON<6:3>). FIGURE 14-1: TIMER2 BLOCK DIAGRAM 4 1:1 to 1:16 Postscaler T2OUTPS3:T2OUTPS0 Set TMR2IF 2 TMR2 Output (to PWM or MSSP) T2CKPS1:T2CKPS0 1:1, 1:4, 1:16 Prescaler FOSC/4 TMR2/PR2 Match Reset TMR2 Comparator PR2 8 8 8 Internal Data Bus TABLE 14-1: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER2 AS A TIMER/COUNTER Bit 7 Bit 6 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 58 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 58 IPR1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 58 TMR2(1) T2CON PR2(1) Timer2 Register — 56 T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 Timer2 Period Register 56 56 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer2 module. Note 1: Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. DS39778B-page 192 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 15.0 TIMER3 MODULE The Timer3 timer/counter module incorporates these features: • Software selectable operation as a 16-bit timer or counter • Readable and writable 8-bit registers (TMR3H and TMR3L) • Selectable clock source (internal or external) with device clock or Timer1 oscillator internal options • Interrupt-on-overflow • Module Reset on ECCPx Special Event Trigger REGISTER 15-1: A simplified block diagram of the Timer3 module is shown in Figure 15-1. A block diagram of the module’s operation in Read/Write mode is shown in Figure 15-2. The Timer3 module is controlled through the T3CON register (Register 15-1). It also selects the clock source options for the CCP and ECCP modules; see Section 17.1.1 “CCP Modules and Timer Resources” for more information. T3CON: TIMER3 CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 RD16 T3CCP2 T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 T3CCP1 T3SYNC TMR3CS TMR3ON bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 RD16: 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Enable bit 1 = Enables register read/write of Timer3 in one 16-bit operation 0 = Enables register read/write of Timer3 in two 8-bit operations bit 6,3 T3CCP2:T3CCP1: Timer3 and Timer1 to ECCPx/CCPx Enable bits 11 = Timer3 and Timer4 are the clock sources for all ECCPx/CCPx modules 10 = Timer3 and Timer4 are the clock sources for ECCP3, CCP4 and CCP5; Timer1 and Timer2 are the clock sources for ECCP1 and ECCP2 01 = Timer3 and Timer4 are the clock sources for ECCP2, ECCP3, CCP4 and CCP5; Timer1 and Timer2 are the clock sources for ECCP1 00 = Timer1 and Timer2 are the clock sources for all ECCPx/CCPx modules bit 5-4 T3CKPS1:T3CKPS0: Timer3 Input Clock Prescale Select bits 11 = 1:8 Prescale value 10 = 1:4 Prescale value 01 = 1:2 Prescale value 00 = 1:1 Prescale value bit 2 T3SYNC: Timer3 External Clock Input Synchronization Control bit (Not usable if the device clock comes from Timer1/Timer3.) When TMR3CS = 1: 1 = Do not synchronize external clock input 0 = Synchronize external clock input When TMR3CS = 0: This bit is ignored. Timer3 uses the internal clock when TMR3CS = 0. bit 1 TMR3CS: Timer3 Clock Source Select bit 1 = External clock input from Timer1 oscillator or T13CKI (on the rising edge after the first falling edge) 0 = Internal clock (FOSC/4) bit 0 TMR3ON: Timer3 On bit 1 = Enables Timer3 0 = Stops Timer3 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 193 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 15.1 Timer3 Operation The operating mode is determined by the clock select bit, TMR3CS (T3CON<1>). When TMR3CS is cleared (= 0), Timer3 increments on every internal instruction cycle (FOSC/4). When the bit is set, Timer3 increments on every rising edge of the Timer1 external clock input or the Timer1 oscillator, if enabled. Timer3 can operate in one of three modes: • Timer • Synchronous Counter • Asynchronous Counter As with Timer1, the RC1/T1OSI and RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI pins become inputs when the Timer1 oscillator is enabled. This means the values of TRISC<1:0> are ignored and the pins are read as ‘0’. FIGURE 15-1: TIMER3 BLOCK DIAGRAM Timer1 Oscillator Timer1 Clock Input 1 1 T1OSO/T13CKI FOSC/4 Internal Clock T1OSI Synchronize Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 0 Detect 0 2 T1OSCEN(1) Sleep Input Timer3 On/Off TMR3CS T3CKPS1:T3CKPS0 T3SYNC TMR3ON ECCPx Special Event Trigger ECCPx/CCPx Select from T3CON<6,3> Clear TMR3 Set TMR3IF on Overflow TMR3 High Byte TMR3L Note 1: When enable bit, T1OSCEN, is cleared, the inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain. FIGURE 15-2: TIMER3 BLOCK DIAGRAM (16-BIT READ/WRITE MODE) Timer1 Oscillator Timer1 Clock Input 1 1 T13CKI/T1OSO FOSC/4 Internal Clock T1OSI Synchronize Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 0 Detect 0 2 T1OSCEN(1) Sleep Input Timer3 On/Off TMR3CS T3CKPS1:T3CKPS0 T3SYNC TMR3ON ECCPx Special Event Trigger ECCPx/CCPx Select from T3CON<6,3> Clear TMR3 Set TMR3IF on Overflow TMR3 High Byte TMR3L 8 Read TMR1L Write TMR1L 8 8 TMR3H 8 8 Internal Data Bus Note 1: When enable bit, T1OSCEN, is cleared, the inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain. DS39778B-page 194 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 15.2 Timer3 16-Bit Read/Write Mode 15.4 Timer3 Interrupt Timer3 can be configured for 16-bit reads and writes (see Figure 15-2). When the RD16 control bit (T3CON<7>) is set, the address for TMR3H is mapped to a buffer register for the high byte of Timer3. A read from TMR3L will load the contents of the high byte of Timer3 into the Timer3 High Byte Buffer register. This provides the user with the ability to accurately read all 16 bits of Timer1 without having to determine whether a read of the high byte, followed by a read of the low byte, has become invalid due to a rollover between reads. The TMR3 register pair (TMR3H:TMR3L) increments from 0000h to FFFFh and overflows to 0000h. The Timer3 interrupt, if enabled, is generated on overflow and is latched in interrupt flag bit, TMR3IF (PIR2<1>). This interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the Timer3 Interrupt Enable bit, TMR3IE (PIE2<1>). A write to the high byte of Timer3 must also take place through the TMR3H Buffer register. The Timer3 high byte is updated with the contents of TMR3H when a write occurs to TMR3L. This allows a user to write all 16 bits to both the high and low bytes of Timer3 at once. If ECCP1 or ECCP2 is configured to use Timer3 and to generate a Special Event Trigger in Compare mode (CCPxM3:CCPxM0 = 1011), this signal will reset Timer3. The trigger from ECCP2 will also start an A/D conversion if the A/D module is enabled (see Section 18.2.1 “Special Event Trigger” for more information). The high byte of Timer3 is not directly readable or writable in this mode. All reads and writes must take place through the Timer3 High Byte Buffer register. 15.5 Resetting Timer3 Using the ECCPx Special Event Trigger Writes to TMR3H do not clear the Timer3 prescaler. The prescaler is only cleared on writes to TMR3L. The module must be configured as either a timer or synchronous counter to take advantage of this feature. When used this way, the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair effectively becomes a period register for Timer3. 15.3 If Timer3 is running in Asynchronous Counter mode, the Reset operation may not work. Using the Timer1 Oscillator as the Timer3 Clock Source The Timer1 internal oscillator may be used as the clock source for Timer3. The Timer1 oscillator is enabled by setting the T1OSCEN (T1CON<3>) bit. To use it as the Timer3 clock source, the TMR3CS bit must also be set. As previously noted, this also configures Timer3 to increment on every rising edge of the oscillator source. In the event that a write to Timer3 coincides with a Special Event Trigger from an ECCPx module, the write will take precedence. Note: The Special Event Triggers from the ECCPx module will not set the TMR3IF interrupt flag bit (PIR1<0>). The Timer1 oscillator is described in Section 13.0 “Timer1 Module”. TABLE 15-1: Name INTCON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER3 AS A TIMER/COUNTER Bit 7 Bit 6 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 PIR2 OSCFIF CM2IF CM1IF — BCL1IF LVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF 58 PIE2 OSCFIE CM2IE CM1IE — BCL1IE LVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE 58 IPR2 OSCFIP CM2IP CM1IP — BCL1IP LVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP 58 TMR3L Timer3 Register Low Byte 59 TMR3H Timer3 Register High Byte 59 (1) T1CON RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON 56 T3CON RD16 T3CCP2 T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 TMR3CS TMR3ON 59 T3CCP1 T3SYNC Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer3 module. Note 1: Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 195 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 196 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 16.0 TIMER4 MODULE 16.1 The Timer4 timer module has the following features: • • • • • • 8-bit timer register (TMR4) 8-bit period register (PR4) Readable and writable (both registers) Software programmable prescaler (1:1, 1:4, 1:16) Software programmable postscaler (1:1 to 1:16) Interrupt on TMR4 match of PR4 Timer4 has a control register shown in Register 16-1. Timer4 can be shut off by clearing control bit, TMR4ON (T4CON<2>), to minimize power consumption. The prescaler and postscaler selection of Timer4 are also controlled by this register. Figure 16-1 is a simplified block diagram of the Timer4 module. Timer4 Operation Timer4 can be used as the PWM time base for the PWM mode of the ECCPx/CCPx modules. The TMR4 register is readable and writable and is cleared on any device Reset. The input clock (FOSC/4) has a prescale option of 1:1, 1:4 or 1:16, selected by control bits T4CKPS1:T4CKPS0 (T4CON<1:0>). The match output of TMR4 goes through a 4-bit postscaler (which gives a 1:1 to 1:16 scaling inclusive) to generate a TMR4 interrupt, latched in flag bit, TMR4IF (PIR3<3>). The prescaler and postscaler counters are cleared when any of the following occurs: • a write to the TMR4 register • a write to the T4CON register • any device Reset (Power-on Reset, MCLR Reset, Watchdog Timer Reset or Brown-out Reset) TMR4 is not cleared when T4CON is written. REGISTER 16-1: T4CON: TIMER4 CONTROL REGISTER U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — T4OUTPS3 T4OUTPS2 T4OUTPS1 T4OUTPS0 TMR4ON T4CKPS1 T4CKPS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-3 T4OUTPS3:T4OUTPS0: Timer4 Output Postscale Select bits 0000 = 1:1 Postscale 0001 = 1:2 Postscale • • • 1111 = 1:16 Postscale bit 2 TMR4ON: Timer4 On bit 1 = Timer4 is on 0 = Timer4 is off bit 1-0 T4CKPS1:T4CKPS0: Timer4 Clock Prescale Select bits 00 = Prescaler is 1 01 = Prescaler is 4 1x = Prescaler is 16 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39778B-page 197 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 16.2 Timer4 Interrupt 16.3 The Timer4 module has an 8-bit period register, PR4, which is both readable and writable. Timer4 increments from 00h until it matches PR4 and then resets to 00h on the next increment cycle. The PR4 register is initialized to FFh upon Reset. FIGURE 16-1: Output of TMR4 The output of TMR4 (before the postscaler) is used only as a PWM time base for the ECCPx/CCPx modules. It is not used as a baud rate clock for the MSSP modules as is the Timer2 output. TIMER4 BLOCK DIAGRAM 4 1:1 to 1:16 Postscaler T4OUTPS3:T4OUTPS0 Set TMR4IF 2 TMR4 Output (to PWM) T4CKPS1:T4CKPS0 TMR4/PR4 Match Reset 1:1, 1:4, 1:16 Prescaler FOSC/4 Comparator TMR4 PR4 8 8 8 Internal Data Bus TABLE 16-1: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER4 AS A TIMER/COUNTER Bit 7 Bit 6 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP 58 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF 58 PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE 58 TMR4 T4CON PR4 Timer4 Register — 59 T4OUTPS3 T4OUTPS2 T4OUTPS1 T4OUTPS0 TMR4ON T4CKPS1 T4CKPS0 Timer4 Period Register 59 59 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer4 module. DS39778B-page 198 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 17.0 CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM (CCP) MODULES Members of the PIC18F87J11 family of devices all have a total of five CCP (Capture/Compare/PWM) modules. Two of these (CCP4 and CCP5) implement standard Capture, Compare and Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) modes and are discussed in this section. The other three modules (ECCP1, ECCP2, ECCP3) implement standard Capture and Compare modes, as well as Enhanced PWM modes. These are discussed in Section 18.0 “Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) Module”. Each CCP/ECCP module contains a 16-bit register which can operate as a 16-bit Capture register, a 16-bit Compare register or a PWM Master/Slave Duty Cycle register. For the sake of clarity, all CCP module operation in the following sections is described with respect to CCP4, but is equally applicable to CCP5. REGISTER 17-1: Capture and Compare operations described in this chapter apply to all standard and Enhanced CCP modules. The operations of PWM mode, described in Section 17.4 “PWM Mode”, apply to CCP4 and CCP5 only. Note: Throughout this section and Section 18.0 “Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) Module”, references to register and bit names that may be associated with a specific CCP module are referred to generically by the use of ‘x’ or ‘y’ in place of the specific module number. Thus, “CCPxCON” might refer to the control register for ECCP1, ECCP2, ECCP3, CCP4 or CCP5. CCPxCON: CCPx CONTROL REGISTER (CCP4 MODULE, CCP5 MODULE) U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — CCPxX CCPxY CCPxM3 CCPxM2 CCPxM1 CCPxM0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-4 CCPx<X:Y>: PWM Duty Cycle bit 1 and bit 0 for CCPx Module Capture mode: Unused. Compare mode: Unused. PWM mode: These bits are the two Least Significant bits (bit 1 and bit 0) of the 10-bit PWM duty cycle. The eight Most Significant bits (DCx9:DCx2) of the duty cycle are found in CCPRxL. bit 3-0 CCPxM3:CCPxM0: CCPx Module Mode Select bits 0000 = Capture/Compare/PWM disabled (resets CCPx module) 0001 = Reserved 0010 = Compare mode, toggle output on match (CCPxIF bit is set) 0011 = Reserved 0100 = Capture mode: every falling edge 0101 = Capture mode: every rising edge 0110 = Capture mode: every 4th rising edge 0111 = Capture mode: every 16th rising edge 1000 = Compare mode: initialize CCPx pin low; on compare match, force CCPx pin high (CCPxIF bit is set) 1001 = Compare mode: initialize CCPx pin high; on compare match, force CCPx pin low (CCPxIF bit is set) 1010 = Compare mode: generate software interrupt on compare match (CCPxIF bit is set, CCPx pin reflects I/O state) 1011 = Compare mode: trigger special event, reset timer, start A/D conversion on CCPx match (CCPxIF bit is set)(1) 11xx = PWM mode © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 199 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 17.1 CCP Module Configuration Each Capture/Compare/PWM module is associated with a control register (generically, CCPxCON) and a data register (CCPRx). The data register, in turn, is comprised of two 8-bit registers: CCPRxL (low byte) and CCPRxH (high byte). All registers are both readable and writable. 17.1.1 17.1.2 CCP MODULES AND TIMER RESOURCES The ECCP/CCP modules utilize Timers 1, 2, 3 or 4, depending on the mode selected. Timer1 and Timer3 are available to modules in Capture or Compare modes, while Timer2 and Timer4 are available for modules in PWM mode. TABLE 17-1: CCP MODE – TIMER RESOURCE CCP Mode Timer Resource Capture Compare PWM Timer1 or Timer3 Timer1 or Timer3 Timer2 or Timer4 FIGURE 17-1: The assignment of a particular timer to a module is determined by the timer to CCP enable bits in the T3CON register (Register 15-1, page 193). Depending on the configuration selected, up to four timers may be active at once, with modules in the same configuration (Capture/Compare or PWM) sharing timer resources. The possible configurations are shown in Figure 17-1. OPEN-DRAIN OUTPUT OPTION When operating in Output mode (i.e., in Compare or PWM modes), the drivers for the CCP pins can be optionally configured as open-drain outputs. This feature allows the voltage level on the pin to be pulled to a higher level through an external pull-up resistor, and allows the output to communicate with external circuits without the need for additional level shifters. For more information, see Section 10.1.4 “Open-Drain Outputs”. The open-drain output option is controlled by the bits in the ODCON1 register. Setting the appropriate bit configures the pin for the corresponding module for open-drain operation. The ODCON1 memory shares the same address space as TMR1H. The ODCON1 register can be accessed by setting the ADSHR bit in the WDTCON register (WDTCON<4>). ECCPx/CCPx AND TIMER INTERCONNECT CONFIGURATIONS T3CCP<2:1> = 00 T3CCP<2:1> = 01 T3CCP<2:1> = 10 T3CCP<2:1> = 11 TMR1 TMR1 TMR1 TMR1 TMR3 TMR3 ECCP1 ECCP1 TMR3 TMR3 ECCP1 ECCP1 ECCP2 ECCP2 ECCP2 ECCP2 ECCP3 ECCP3 ECCP3 ECCP3 CCP4 CCP4 CCP4 CCP4 CCP5 CCP5 CCP5 CCP5 TMR2 TMR4 Timer1 is used for all Capture and Compare operations for all CCP modules. Timer2 is used for PWM operations for all CCP modules. Modules may share either timer resource as a common time base. Timer3 and Timer4 are not available. DS39778B-page 200 TMR2 TMR4 Timer1 and Timer2 are used for Capture and Compare or PWM operations for ECCP1 only (depending on selected mode). All other modules use either Timer3 or Timer4. Modules may share either timer resource as a common time base if they are in Capture/Compare or PWM modes. TMR2 TMR4 Timer1 and Timer2 are used for Capture and Compare or PWM operations for ECCP1 and ECCP2 only (depending on the mode selected for each module). Both modules may use a timer as a common time base if they are both in Capture/Compare or PWM modes. TMR2 TMR4 Timer3 is used for all Capture and Compare operations for all CCP modules. Timer4 is used for PWM operations for all CCP modules. Modules may share either timer resource as a common time base. Timer1 and Timer2 are not available. The other modules use either Timer3 or Timer4. Modules may share either timer resource as a common time base if they are in Capture/Compare or PWM modes. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 17.2 17.2.3 Capture Mode When the Capture mode is changed, a false capture interrupt may be generated. The user should keep the CCPxIE interrupt enable bit clear to avoid false interrupts. The interrupt flag bit, CCPxIF, should also be cleared following any such change in operating mode. In Capture mode, the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair captures the 16-bit value of the TMR1 or TMR3 registers when an event occurs on the corresponding CCP pin. An event is defined as one of the following: • • • • every falling edge every rising edge every 4th rising edge every 16th rising edge 17.2.4 Switching from one capture prescaler to another may generate an interrupt. Also, the prescaler counter will not be cleared; therefore, the first capture may be from a non-zero prescaler. Example 17-1 shows the recommended method for switching between capture prescalers. This example also clears the prescaler counter and will not generate the “false” interrupt. CCP PIN CONFIGURATION In Capture mode, the appropriate CCP pin should be configured as an input by setting the corresponding TRIS direction bit. Note: 17.2.2 If RG4/CCP5 is configured as an output, a write to the port can cause a capture condition. EXAMPLE 17-1: TIMER1/TIMER3 MODE SELECTION The timers that are to be used with the capture feature (Timer1 and/or Timer3) must be running in Timer mode or Synchronized Counter mode. In Asynchronous Counter mode, the capture operation will not work. The timer to be used with each CCP module is selected in the T3CON register (see Section 17.1.1 “CCP Modules and Timer Resources”). FIGURE 17-2: CCP PRESCALER There are four prescaler settings in Capture mode. They are specified as part of the operating mode selected by the mode select bits (CCPxM3:CCPxM0). Whenever the CCP module is turned off or Capture mode is disabled, the prescaler counter is cleared. This means that any Reset will clear the prescaler counter. The event is selected by the mode select bits, CCPxM3:CCPxM0 (CCPxCON<3:0>). When a capture is made, the interrupt request flag bit, CCPxIF, is set; it must be cleared in software. If another capture occurs before the value in register CCPRx is read, the old captured value is overwritten by the new captured value. 17.2.1 SOFTWARE INTERRUPT CHANGING BETWEEN CAPTURE PRESCALERS (CCP5 SHOWN) CLRF MOVLW CCP5CON NEW_CAPT_PS MOVWF CCP5CON ; ; ; ; ; ; Turn CCP module off Load WREG with the new prescaler mode value and CCP ON Load CCP5CON with this value CAPTURE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM TMR3H TMR3L Set CCP4IF T3CCP2 CCP4 pin Prescaler ÷ 1, 4, 16 and Edge Detect CCPR4H T3CCP2 4 CCP4CON<3:0> Q1:Q4 CCP5CON<3:0> 4 TMR3 Enable CCPR4L TMR1 Enable TMR1H TMR1L TMR3H TMR3L Set CCP5IF 4 T3CCP1 T3CCP2 TMR3 Enable CCP5 pin Prescaler ÷ 1, 4, 16 and Edge Detect CCPR5H CCPR5L TMR1 Enable T3CCP2 T3CCP1 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary TMR1H TMR1L DS39778B-page 201 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 17.3 Compare Mode Note: In Compare mode, the 16-bit CCPRx register value is constantly compared against either the TMR1 or TMR3 register pair value. When a match occurs, the CCP pin can be: • • • • driven high driven low toggled (high-to-low or low-to-high) remains unchanged (that is, reflects the state of the I/O latch) 17.3.2 17.3.3 SOFTWARE INTERRUPT MODE When the Generate Software Interrupt mode is chosen (CCPxM3:CCPxM0 = 1010), the corresponding CCP pin is not affected. Only a CCP interrupt is generated, if enabled, and the CCPxIE bit is set. CCP PIN CONFIGURATION The user must configure the CCP pin as an output by clearing the appropriate TRIS bit. FIGURE 17-3: TIMER1/TIMER3 MODE SELECTION Timer1 and/or Timer3 must be running in Timer mode or Synchronized Counter mode if the CCP module is using the compare feature. In Asynchronous Counter mode, the compare operation may not work. The action on the pin is based on the value of the mode select bits (CCPxM3:CCPxM0). At the same time, the interrupt flag bit, CCPxIF, is set. 17.3.1 Clearing the CCP5CON register will force the RG4 compare output latch (depending on device configuration) to the default low level. This is not the PORTB or PORTC I/O data latch. COMPARE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM CCPR4H Set CCP4IF CCPR4L CCP4 pin Comparator Output Logic Compare Match S Q R TRIS Output Enable 4 CCP4CON<3:0> 0 TMR1H TMR1L 0 1 TMR3H TMR3L 1 T3CCP1 T3CCP2 Set CCP5IF Comparator CCPR5H CCP5 pin Compare Match Output Logic 4 CCPR5L S Q R TRIS Output Enable CCP5CON<3:0> DS39778B-page 202 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 17-2: Name INTCON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CAPTURE, COMPARE, TIMER1 AND TIMER3 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 IPEN — CM RI TO PD POR BOR 56 PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 58 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 58 IPR1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 58 RCON PIR2 OSCFIF CM2IF CM1IF — BCL1IF LVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF 58 PIE2 OSCFIE CM2IE CM1IE — BCL1IE LVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE 58 IPR2 OSCFIP CM2IP CM1IP — BCL1IP LVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP 58 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF 58 PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE 58 IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP 58 — — — TRISG4 TRISG3 TRISG2 TRISG1 TRISG0 TRISG TMR1L(1) Timer1 Register Low Byte TMR1H(1) Timer1 Register High Byte ODCON1(2) (1) T1CON — — RD16 T1RUN 58 56 56 — CCP5OD CCP4OD ECCP3OD ECCP2OD ECCP1OD T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON 56 56 TMR3H Timer3 Register High Byte 59 TMR3L Timer3 Register Low Byte 59 T3CON RD16 T3CCP2 T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 T3CCP1 T3SYNC TMR3CS TMR3ON 59 CCPR4L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 4 Low Byte 59 CCPR4H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 4 High Byte 59 CCPR5L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 5 Low Byte 59 CCPR5H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 5 High Byte 59 CCP4CON — — DC4B1 DC4B0 CCP4M3 CCP4M2 CCP4M1 CCP4M0 59 CCP5CON — — DC5B1 DC5B0 CCP5M3 CCP5M2 CCP5M1 CCP5M0 59 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by Capture/Compare, Timer1 or Timer3. Note 1: Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. 2: Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 203 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 17.4 17.4.1 PWM Mode In Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) mode, the CCP pin produces up to a 10-bit resolution PWM output. Since the CCP4 and CCP5 pins are multiplexed with a PORTG data latch, the appropriate TRISG bit must be cleared to make the CCP4 or CCP5 pin an output. Note: Clearing the CCP4CON or CCP5CON register will force the RG3 or RG4 output latch (depending on device configuration) to the default low level. This is not the PORTG I/O data latch. Figure 17-4 shows a simplified block diagram of the CCP module in PWM mode. For a step-by-step procedure on how to set up a CCP module for PWM operation, see Section 17.4.3 “Setup for PWM Operation”. FIGURE 17-4: SIMPLIFIED PWM BLOCK DIAGRAM The PWM period is specified by writing to the PR2 (PR4) register. The PWM period can be calculated using Equation 17-1: EQUATION 17-1: PWM Period = [(PR2) + 1] • 4 • TOSC • (TMR2 Prescale Value) PWM frequency is defined as 1/[PWM period]. When TMR2 (TMR4) is equal to PR2 (PR4), the following three events occur on the next increment cycle: • TMR2 (TMR4) is cleared • The CCP pin is set (exception: if PWM duty cycle = 0%, the CCP pin will not be set) • The PWM duty cycle is latched from CCPRxL into CCPRxH Note: Duty Cycle Register 9 0 CCPxCON<5:4> CCPRxL Latch Duty Cycle (1) CCPRxH S Comparator Reset CCPx pin TMRx TMRx = PRx Match 17.4.2 Q R 2 LSbs latched from Q clocks Comparator PRx TRIS Output Enable Set CCPx pin Note 1: The two LSbs of the Duty Cycle register are held by a 2-bit latch that is part of the module’s hardware. It is physically separate from the CCPRx registers. A PWM output (Figure 17-5) has a time base (period) and a time that the output stays high (duty cycle). The frequency of the PWM is the inverse of the period (1/period). FIGURE 17-5: PWM OUTPUT PWM PERIOD The Timer2 and Timer 4 postscalers (see Section 14.0 “Timer2 Module” and Section 16.0 “Timer4 Module”) are not used in the determination of the PWM frequency. The postscaler could be used to have a servo update rate at a different frequency than the PWM output. PWM DUTY CYCLE The PWM duty cycle is specified by writing to the CCPRxL register and to the CCPxCON<5:4> bits. Up to 10-bit resolution is available. The CCPRxL contains the eight MSbs and the CCPxCON<5:4> contains the two LSbs. This 10-bit value is represented by CCPRxL:CCPxCON<5:4>. Equation 17-2 is used to calculate the PWM duty cycle in time. EQUATION 17-2: PWM Duty Cycle = (CCPRXL:CCPXCON<5:4>) • TOSC • (TMR2 Prescale Value) CCPRxL and CCPxCON<5:4> can be written to at any time, but the duty cycle value is not latched into CCPRxH until after a match between PR2 (PR4) and TMR2 (TMR4) occurs (i.e., the period is complete). In PWM mode, CCPRxH is a read-only register. Period Duty Cycle TMR2 (TMR4) = PR2 (PR4) TMR2 (TMR4) = Duty Cycle TMR2 (TMR4) = PR2 (TMR4) DS39778B-page 204 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY The CCPRxH register and a 2-bit internal latch are used to double-buffer the PWM duty cycle. This double-buffering is essential for glitchless PWM operation. When the CCPRxH and 2-bit latch match TMR2 (TMR4), concatenated with an internal 2-bit Q clock or 2 bits of the TMR2 (TMR4) prescaler, the CCP pin is cleared. The maximum PWM resolution (bits) for a given PWM frequency is given by Equation 17-3: 17.4.3 The following steps should be taken when configuring the CCP module for PWM operation: 1. Set the PWM period by writing to the PR2 (PR4) register. Set the PWM duty cycle by writing to the CCPRxL register and CCPxCON<5:4> bits. Make the CCP pin an output by clearing the appropriate TRIS bit. Set the TMR2 (TMR4) prescale value, then enable Timer2 (Timer4) by writing to T2CON (T4CON). Configure the CCP module for PWM operation. 2. 3. 4. EQUATION 17-3: FOSC log FPWM PWM Resolution (max) = log(2) ( Note: ) SETUP FOR PWM OPERATION 5. bits If the PWM duty cycle value is longer than the PWM period, the CCP pin will not be cleared. TABLE 17-3: EXAMPLE PWM FREQUENCIES AND RESOLUTIONS AT 40 MHz PWM Frequency Timer Prescaler (1, 4, 16) PR2 Value Maximum Resolution (bits) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.44 kHz 9.77 kHz 39.06 kHz 156.25 kHz 312.50 kHz 416.67 kHz 16 4 1 1 1 1 FFh FFh FFh 3Fh 1Fh 17h 10 10 10 8 7 6.58 Preliminary DS39778B-page 205 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 17-4: Name INTCON RCON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PWM, TIMER2 AND TIMER4 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 IPEN — CM RI TO PD POR BOR 56 PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 58 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 58 IPR1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 58 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF 58 PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE 58 IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP 58 — — — TRISG4 TRISG3 TRISG2 TRISG1 TRISG0 58 TRISG TMR2(1) Timer2 Register (1) 56 Timer2 Period Register PR2 T2CON — TMR4 Timer4 Register PR4 Timer4 Period Register — T4CON 56 T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 56 59 59 T4OUTPS3 T4OUTPS2 T4OUTPS1 T4OUTPS0 TMR4ON T4CKPS1 T4CKPS0 59 CCPR4L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 4 Low Byte 59 CCPR4H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 4 High Byte 59 CCPR5L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 5 Low Byte 59 CCPR5H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 5 High Byte 59 CCP4CON — — DC4B1 DC4B0 CCP4M3 CCP4M2 CCP4M1 CCP4M0 59 CCP5CON — — DC5B1 DC5B0 CCP5M3 CCP5M2 CCP5M1 CCP5M0 59 — — — CCP5OD CCP4OD ODCON1(2) Legend: Note 1: 2: ECCP3OD ECCP2OD ECCP1OD 56 — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by PWM, Timer2 or Timer4. Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. DS39778B-page 206 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 18.0 ENHANCED CAPTURE/ COMPARE/PWM (ECCP) MODULE The control register for the Enhanced CCP module is shown in Register 18-1. It differs from the CCP4CON/ CCP5CON registers in that the two Most Significant bits are implemented to control PWM functionality. In the PIC18F87J11 family of devices, three of the CCP modules are implemented as standard CCP modules with Enhanced PWM capabilities. These include the provision for 2 or 4 output channels, user-selectable polarity, dead-band control and automatic shutdown and restart. The Enhanced features are discussed in detail in Section 18.4 “Enhanced PWM Mode”. Capture, Compare and single-output PWM functions of the ECCP module are the same as described for the standard CCP module. REGISTER 18-1: In addition to the expanded range of modes available through the Enhanced CCPxCON register, the ECCP modules each have two additional registers associated with Enhanced PWM operation and auto-shutdown features. They are: • ECCPxDEL (ECCPx PWM Delay) • ECCPxAS (ECCPx Auto-Shutdown Control) CCPxCON: ECCPx CONTROL REGISTER (ECCP1/ECCP2/ECCP3) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PxM1 PxM0 DCxB1 DCxB0 CCPxM3 CCPxM2 CCPxM1 CCPxM0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 PxM1:PxM0: Enhanced PWM Output Configuration bits If CCPxM3:CCPxM2 = 00, 01, 10: xx = PxA assigned as Capture/Compare input/output; PxB, PxC, PxD assigned as port pins If CCPxM3:CCPxM2 = 11: 00 = Single output: PxA modulated; PxB, PxC, PxD assigned as port pins 01 = Full-bridge output forward: P1D modulated; P1A active; P1B, P1C inactive 10 = Half-bridge output: P1A, P1B modulated with dead-band control; P1C, P1D assigned as port pins 11 = Full-bridge output reverse: P1B modulated; P1C active; P1A, P1D inactive bit 5-4 DCxB1:DCxB0: PWM Duty Cycle bit 1 and bit 0 Capture mode: Unused. Compare mode: Unused. PWM mode: These bits are the two LSbs of the 10-bit PWM duty cycle. The eight MSbs of the duty cycle are found in CCPRxL. bit 3-0 CCPxM3:CCPxM0: Enhanced CCPx Module Mode Select bits 0000 = Capture/Compare/PWM off (resets ECCPx module) 0001 = Reserved 0010 = Compare mode, toggle output on match 0011 = Capture mode 0100 = Capture mode: every falling edge 0101 = Capture mode: every rising edge 0110 = Capture mode: every 4th rising edge 0111 = Capture mode: every 16th rising edge 1000 = Compare mode: initialize ECCPx pin low; set output on compare match (set CCPxIF) 1001 = Compare mode: initialize ECCPx pin high; clear output on compare match (set CCPxIF) 1010 = Compare mode: generate software interrupt only; ECCPx pin reverts to I/O state 1011 = Compare mode: trigger special event (ECCPx resets TMR1 or TMR3, sets CCPxIF bit, ECCPx trigger also starts A/D conversion if A/D module is enabled)(1) 1100 = PWM mode: PxA, PxC active-high; PxB, PxD active-high 1101 = PWM mode: PxA, PxC active-high; PxB, PxD active-low 1110 = PWM mode: PxA, PxC active-low; PxB, PxD active-high 1111 = PWM mode: PxA, PxC active-low; PxB, PxD active-low Note 1: Implemented only for ECCP1 and ECCP2; same as ‘1010’ for ECCP3. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 207 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 18.1 ECCP Outputs and Configuration Each of the Enhanced CCP modules may have up to four PWM outputs, depending on the selected operating mode. These outputs, designated PxA through PxD, are multiplexed with various I/O pins. Some ECCP pin assignments are constant, while others change based on device configuration. For those pins that do change, the controlling bits are: • CCP2MX Configuration bit • ECCPMX Configuration bit (80-pin devices only) • Program Memory Operating mode, set by the EMB Configuration bits (80-pin devices only) The pin assignments for the Enhanced CCP modules are summarized in Table 18-1, Table 18-2 and Table 18-3. To configure the I/O pins as PWM outputs, the proper PWM mode must be selected by setting the PxMx and CCPxMx bits (CCPxCON<7:6> and <3:0>, respectively). The appropriate TRIS direction bits for the corresponding port pins must also be set as outputs. 18.1.1 ECCP1/ECCP3 OUTPUTS AND PROGRAM MEMORY MODE In 80-pin devices, the use of Extended Microcontroller mode has an indirect effect on the use of ECCP1 and ECCP3 in Enhanced PWM modes. By default, PWM outputs, P1B/P1C and P3B/P3C, are multiplexed to PORTE pins along with the high-order byte of the external memory bus. When the bus is active in Extended Microcontroller mode, it overrides the Enhanced CCP outputs and makes them unavailable. Because of this, ECCP1 and ECCP3 can only be used in compatible (single output) PWM modes when the device is in Extended Microcontroller mode and default pin configuration. An exception to this configuration is when a 12-bit address width is selected for the external bus (EMB1:EMB0 Configuration bits = 01). In this case, the upper pins of PORTE continue to operate as digital I/O, even when the external bus is active. P1B/P1C and P3B/P3C remain available for use as Enhanced PWM outputs. If an application requires the use of additional PWM outputs during enhanced microcontroller operation, the P1B/P1C and P3B/P3C outputs can be reassigned to the upper bits of PORTH. This is done by clearing the ECCPMX Configuration bit. 18.1.2 ECCP2 OUTPUTS AND PROGRAM MEMORY MODES For 80-pin devices, the program memory mode of the device (Section 5.1.3 “PIC18F8xJ11/8XJ16 Program Memory Modes”) also impacts pin multiplexing for the module. DS39778B-page 208 The ECCP2 input/output (ECCP2/P2A) can be multiplexed to one of three pins. The default assignment (CCP2MX Configuration bit is set) for all devices is RC1. Clearing CCP2MX reassigns ECCP2/ P2A to RE7. An additional option exists for 80-pin devices. When these devices are operating in Microcontroller mode, the multiplexing options described above still apply. In Extended Microcontroller mode, clearing CCP2MX reassigns ECCP2/P2A to RB3. Changing the pin assignment of ECCP2 does not automatically change any requirements for configuring the port pin. Users must always verify that the appropriate TRIS register is configured correctly for ECCP2 operation regardless of where it is located. 18.1.3 USE OF CCP4 AND CCP5 WITH ECCP1 AND ECCP3 Only the ECCP2 module has four dedicated output pins that are available for use. Assuming that the I/O ports or other multiplexed functions on those pins are not needed, they may be used whenever needed without interfering with any other CCP module. ECCP1 and ECCP3, on the other hand, only have three dedicated output pins: ECCPx/PxA, PxB and PxC. Whenever these modules are configured for Quad PWM mode, the pin normally used for CCP4 or CCP5 becomes the PxD output pins for ECCP3 and ECCP1, respectively. The CCP4 and CCP5 modules remain functional but their outputs are overridden. 18.1.4 ECCP MODULES AND TIMER RESOURCES Like the standard CCP modules, the ECCP modules can utilize Timers 1, 2, 3 or 4, depending on the mode selected. Timer1 and Timer3 are available for modules in Capture or Compare modes, while Timer2 and Timer4 are available for modules in PWM mode. Additional details on timer resources are provided in Section 17.1.1 “CCP Modules and Timer Resources”. 18.1.5 OPEN-DRAIN OUTPUT OPTION When operating in compare or standard PWM modes, the drivers for the ECCP pins can be optionally configured as open-drain outputs. This feature allows the voltage level on the pin to be pulled to a higher level through an external pull-up resistor, and allows the output to communicate with external circuits without the need for additional level shifters. For more information, see Section 10.1.4 “Open-Drain Outputs” The open-drain output option is controlled by the bits in the ODCON1 register. Setting the appropriate bit configures the pin for the corresponding module for open-drain operation. The ODCON1 memory shares the same address space as of TMR1H. The ODCON1 register can be accessed by setting the ADSHR bit in the WDTCON register (WDTCON<4>). Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 18-1: PIN CONFIGURATIONS FOR ECCP1 CCP1CON Configuration ECCP Mode RC2 RE6 RE5 RG4 RH7 RH6 All PIC18F6XJ1X Devices: Compatible CCP 00xx 11xx ECCP1 RE6 RE5 RG4/CCP5 N/A N/A Dual PWM 10xx 11xx P1A P1B RE5 RG4/CCP5 N/A N/A x1xx 11xx P1A P1B P1C P1D N/A N/A Quad PWM(1) PIC18F8XJ1X Devices, ECCPMX = 0, Microcontroller mode: Compatible CCP 00xx 11xx ECCP1 RE6/AD14 RE5/AD13 RG4/CCP5 RH7/AN15 RH6/AN14 Dual PWM 10xx 11xx P1A RE6/AD14 RE5/AD13 RG4/CCP5 P1B RH6/AN14 x1xx 11xx P1A RE6/AD14 RE5/AD13 P1D P1B P1C (1) Quad PWM PIC18F8XJ1X Devices, ECCPMX = 1, Extended Microcontroller mode, 16-Bit or 20-Bit Address Width: Compatible CCP ECCP1 00xx 11xx RE6/AD14 RE5/AD13 RG4/CCP5 RH7/AN15 RH6/AN14 PIC18F8XJ1X Devices, ECCPMX = 1, Microcontroller mode or Extended Microcontroller mode, 12-Bit Address Width: Compatible CCP 00xx 11xx ECCP1 RE6/AD14 RE5/AD13 RG4/CCP5 RH7/AN15 RH6/AN14 Dual PWM 10xx 11xx P1A P1B RE5/AD13 RG4/CCP5 RH7/AN15 RH6/AN14 x1xx 11xx P1A P1B P1C P1D RH7/AN15 RH6/AN14 (1) Quad PWM Legend: x = Don’t care, N/A = Not Available. Shaded cells indicate pin assignments not used by ECCP1 in a given mode. Note 1: With ECCP1 in Quad PWM mode, CCP5’s output is overridden by P1D; otherwise, CCP5 is fully operational. TABLE 18-2: PIN CONFIGURATIONS FOR ECCP2 ECCP Mode CCP2CON Configuration Compatible CCP 00xx 11xx RB3/INT3 ECCP2 RE7 Dual PWM 10xx 11xx RB3/INT3 P2A RE7 Quad PWM x1xx 11xx RB3/INT3 P2A RE7 Compatible CCP 00xx 11xx RB3/INT3 RC1/T1OS1 ECCP2 Dual PWM 10xx 11xx RB3/INT3 RC1/T1OS1 Quad PWM x1xx 11xx RB3/INT3 RC1/T1OS1 Compatible CCP 00xx 11xx ECCP2 RC1/T1OS1 RE7/AD15 RE2/CS RE1/WR RE0/RD Dual PWM 10xx 11xx P2A RC1/T1OS1 RE7/AD15 P2B RE1/WR RE0/RD Quad PWM x1xx 11xx P2A RC1/T1OS1 RE7/AD15 P2B P2C P2D RB3 RC1 RE7 RE2 RE1 RE0 RE2 RE1 RE0 P2B RE1 RE0 P2B P2C P2D RE2 RE1 RE0 P2A P2B RE1 RE0 P2A P2B P2C P2D All Devices, CCP2MX = 1, Either Operating mode: All Devices, CCP2MX = 0, Microcontroller mode: PIC18F8XJ1X Devices, CCP2MX = 0, Extended Microcontroller mode: Legend: x = Don’t care. Shaded cells indicate pin assignments not used by ECCP2 in a given mode. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 209 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 18-3: PIN CONFIGURATIONS FOR ECCP3 CCP3CON Configuration ECCP Mode RG0 RE4 RE3 RG3 RH5 RH4 PIC18F6XJ1X Devices: Compatible CCP 00xx 11xx ECCP3 RE4 RE3 RG3/CCP4 N/A N/A Dual PWM 10xx 11xx P3A P3B RE3 RG3/CCP4 N/A N/A x1xx 11xx P3A P3B P3C P3D N/A N/A Quad PWM(1) PIC18F8XJ1X Devices, ECCPMX = 0, Microcontroller mode: Compatible CCP 00xx 11xx ECCP3 RE6/AD14 RE5/AD13 RG3/CCP4 RH7/AN15 RH6/AN14 Dual PWM 10xx 11xx P3A RE6/AD14 RE5/AD13 RG3/CCP4 P3B RH6/AN14 x1xx 11xx P3A RE6/AD14 RE5/AD13 P3D P3B P3C (1) Quad PWM PIC18F8XJ1X Devices, ECCPMX = 1, Extended Microcontroller mode, 16-Bit or 20-Bit Address Width: Compatible CCP 00xx 11xx ECCP3 RE6/AD14 RE5/AD13 RG3/CCP4 RH7/AN15 RH6/AN14 PIC18F8XJ1X Devices, ECCPMX = 1, Microcontroller mode or Extended Microcontroller mode, 12-Bit Address Width: Compatible CCP 00xx 11xx ECCP3 RE4/AD12 RE3/AD11 RG3/CCP4 RH5/AN13 RH4/AN12 Dual PWM 10xx 11xx P3A P3B RE3/AD11 RG3/CCP4 RH5/AN13 RH4/AN12 x1xx 11xx P3A P3B P3C P3D RH5/AN13 RH4/AN12 (1) Quad PWM Legend: x = Don’t care, N/A = Not Available. Shaded cells indicate pin assignments not used by ECCP3 in a given mode. Note 1: With ECCP3 in Quad PWM mode, CCP4’s output is overridden by P1D; otherwise, CCP4 is fully operational. 18.2 Capture and Compare Modes Except for the operation of the Special Event Trigger discussed below, the Capture and Compare modes of the ECCP module are identical in operation to that of CCP4. These are discussed in detail in Section 17.2 “Capture Mode” and Section 17.3 “Compare Mode”. 18.2.1 Special Event Triggers are not implemented for ECCP3, CCP4 or CCP5. Selecting the Special Event Trigger mode for these modules has the same effect as selecting the Compare with Software Interrupt mode (CCPxM3:CCPxM0 = 1010). Note: The Special Event Trigger from ECCP2 will not set the Timer1 or Timer3 interrupt flag bits. SPECIAL EVENT TRIGGER ECCP1 and ECCP2 incorporate an internal hardware trigger that is generated in Compare mode on a match between the CCPRx register pair and the selected timer. This can be used in turn to initiate an action. This mode is selected by setting CCPxCON<3:0> to ‘1011’. The Special Event Trigger output of either ECCP1 or ECCP2 resets the TMR1 or TMR3 register pair, depending on which timer resource is currently selected. This allows the CCPRx register pair to effectively be a 16-bit programmable period register for Timer1 or Timer3. In addition, the ECCP2 Special Event Trigger will also start an A/D conversion if the A/D module is enabled. DS39778B-page 210 18.3 Standard PWM Mode When configured in Single Output mode, the ECCP module functions identically to the standard CCP module in PWM mode, as described in Section 17.4 “PWM Mode”. This is also sometimes referred to as “Compatible CCP” mode as in Tables 18-1 through 18-3. Note: Preliminary When setting up single output PWM operations, users are free to use either of the processes described in Section 17.4.3 “Setup for PWM Operation” or Section 18.4.9 “Setup for PWM Operation”. The latter is more generic but will work for either single or multi-output PWM. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 18.4 Enhanced PWM Mode The Enhanced PWM mode provides additional PWM output options for a broader range of control applications. The module is a backward compatible version of the standard CCP module and offers up to four outputs, designated PxA through PxD. Users are also able to select the polarity of the signal (either active-high or active-low). The module’s output mode and polarity are configured by setting the PxM1:PxM0 and CCPxM3:CCPxM0 bits of the CCPxCON register (CCPxCON<7:6> and CCPxCON<3:0>, respectively). For the sake of clarity, Enhanced PWM mode operation is described generically throughout this section with respect to the ECCP1 and TMR2 modules. Control register names are presented in terms of ECCP1. All three Enhanced modules, as well as the two timer resources, can be used interchangeably and function identically. TMR2 or TMR4 can be selected for PWM operation by selecting the proper bits in T3CON. Figure 18-1 shows a simplified block diagram of PWM operation. All control registers are double-buffered and are loaded at the beginning of a new PWM cycle (the period boundary when Timer2 resets) in order to prevent glitches on any of the outputs. The exception is the ECCPx PWM Delay register, ECCPxDEL, which is loaded at either the duty cycle boundary or the boundary period (whichever comes first). Because of the buffering, the module waits until the assigned timer resets instead of starting immediately. This means that FIGURE 18-1: Enhanced PWM waveforms do not exactly match the standard PWM waveforms, but are instead offset by one full instruction cycle (4 TOSC). As before, the user must manually configure the appropriate TRIS bits for output. 18.4.1 PWM PERIOD The PWM period is specified by writing to the PR2 register. The PWM period can be calculated using the equation: EQUATION 18-1: PWM Period = [(PR2) + 1] • 4 • TOSC • (TMR2 Prescale Value) PWM frequency is defined as 1/[PWM period]. When TMR2 is equal to PR2, the following three events occur on the next increment cycle: • TMR2 is cleared • The ECCP1 pin is set (if PWM duty cycle = 0%, the ECCP1 pin will not be set) • The PWM duty cycle is copied from CCPR1L into CCPR1H Note: The Timer2 postscaler (see Section 14.0 “Timer2 Module”) is not used in the determination of the PWM frequency. The postscaler could be used to have a servo update rate at a different frequency than the PWM output. SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE ENHANCED PWM MODULE Duty Cycle Registers CCP1CON<5:4> CCP1M<3:0> 4 P1M1<1:0> 2 CCPR1L ECCP1/P1A ECCP1/P1A TRISx<x> CCPR1H (Slave) P1B R Comparator Q Output Controller P1B TRISx<x> P1C TMR2 TRISx<x> S P1D Comparator PR2 P1C (Note 1) Clear Timer, set ECCP1 pin and latch D.C. P1D TRISx<x> ECCP1DEL Note: The 8-bit TMR2 register is concatenated with the 2-bit internal Q clock, or 2 bits of the prescaler, to create the 10-bit time base. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 211 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 18.4.2 PWM DUTY CYCLE Note: The PWM duty cycle is specified by writing to the CCPR1L register and to the CCP1CON<5:4> bits. Up to 10-bit resolution is available. The CCPR1L contains the eight MSbs and the CCP1CON<5:4> contains the two LSbs. This 10-bit value is represented by CCPR1L:CCP1CON<5:4>. The PWM duty cycle is calculated by the following equation: 18.4.3 PWM Duty Cycle = (CCPR1L:CCP1CON<5:4>) • TOSC • (TMR2 Prescale Value) CCPR1L and CCP1CON<5:4> can be written to at any time but the duty cycle value is not copied into CCPR1H until a match between PR2 and TMR2 occurs (i.e., the period is complete). In PWM mode, CCPR1H is a read-only register. The CCPR1H register and a 2-bit internal latch are used to double-buffer the PWM duty cycle. This double-buffering is essential for glitchless PWM operation. When the CCPR1H and 2-bit latch match TMR2, concatenated with an internal 2-bit Q clock or two bits of the TMR2 prescaler, the ECCP1 pin is cleared. The maximum PWM resolution (bits) for a given PWM frequency is given by the equation: PWM OUTPUT CONFIGURATIONS The P1M1:P1M0 bits in the CCP1CON register allow one of four configurations: • • • • EQUATION 18-2: If the PWM duty cycle value is longer than the PWM period, the ECCP1 pin will not be cleared. Single Output Half-Bridge Output Full-Bridge Output, Forward mode Full-Bridge Output, Reverse mode The Single Output mode is the standard PWM mode discussed in Section 18.4 “Enhanced PWM Mode”. The Half-Bridge and Full-Bridge Output modes are covered in detail in the sections that follow. The general relationship of the outputs in all configurations is summarized in Figure 18-2. EQUATION 18-3: log FOSC FPWM PWM Resolution (max) = log(2) ( TABLE 18-4: ) bits EXAMPLE PWM FREQUENCIES AND RESOLUTIONS AT 40 MHz PWM Frequency Timer Prescaler (1, 4, 16) PR2 Value Maximum Resolution (bits) DS39778B-page 212 2.44 kHz 9.77 kHz 39.06 kHz 156.25 kHz 312.50 kHz 416.67 kHz 16 4 1 1 1 1 FFh FFh FFh 3Fh 1Fh 17h 10 10 10 8 7 6.58 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 18-2: PWM OUTPUT RELATIONSHIPS (ACTIVE-HIGH STATE) 0 CCP1CON<7:6> PR2 + 1 Duty Cycle SIGNAL Period 00 (Single Output) P1A Modulated Delay(1) Delay(1) P1A Modulated (Half-Bridge) 10 P1B Modulated P1A Active (Full-Bridge, Forward) 01 P1B Inactive P1C Inactive P1D Modulated P1A Inactive (Full-Bridge, Reverse) 11 P1B Modulated P1C Active P1D Inactive FIGURE 18-3: PWM OUTPUT RELATIONSHIPS (ACTIVE-LOW STATE) CCP1CON<7:6> SIGNAL 0 Duty Cycle PR2 + 1 Period 00 (Single Output) P1A Modulated P1A Modulated 10 (Half-Bridge) Delay(1) Delay(1) P1B Modulated P1A Active 01 (Full-Bridge, Forward) P1B Inactive P1C Inactive P1D Modulated P1A Inactive 11 (Full-Bridge, Reverse) P1B Modulated P1C Active P1D Inactive Relationships: • Period = 4 * TOSC * (PR2 + 1) * (TMR2 Prescale Value) • Duty Cycle = TOSC * (CCPR1L<7:0>:CCP1CON<5:4>) * (TMR2 Prescale Value) • Delay = 4 * TOSC * (ECCP1DEL<6:0>) Note 1: Dead-band delay is programmed using the ECCP1DEL register (Section 18.4.6 “Programmable Dead-Band Delay”). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 213 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 18.4.4 HALF-BRIDGE MODE FIGURE 18-4: In the Half-Bridge Output mode, two pins are used as outputs to drive push-pull loads. The PWM output signal is output on the P1A pin, while the complementary PWM output signal is output on the P1B pin (Figure 18-4). This mode can be used for half-bridge applications, as shown in Figure 18-5, or for full-bridge applications, where four power switches are being modulated with two PWM signals. HALF-BRIDGE PWM OUTPUT Period Period Duty Cycle P1A (2) td td P1B(2) In Half-Bridge Output mode, the programmable dead-band delay can be used to prevent shoot-through current in half-bridge power devices. The value of bits P1DC6:P1DC0 sets the number of instruction cycles before the output is driven active. If the value is greater than the duty cycle, the corresponding output remains inactive during the entire cycle. See Section 18.4.6 “Programmable Dead-Band Delay” for more details on dead-band delay operations. (1) (1) (1) td = Dead Band Delay Note 1: At this time, the TMR2 register is equal to the PR2 register. 2: Output signals are shown as active-high. Since the P1A and P1B outputs are multiplexed with the PORTC<2> and PORTE<6> data latches, the TRISC<2> and TRISE<6> bits must be cleared to configure P1A and P1B as outputs. FIGURE 18-5: EXAMPLES OF HALF-BRIDGE OUTPUT MODE APPLICATIONS V+ Standard Half-Bridge Circuit (“Push-Pull”) PIC18F87J11 FET Driver + V - P1A Load FET Driver + V - P1B V- Half-Bridge Output Driving a Full-Bridge Circuit V+ PIC18F87J11 FET Driver FET Driver P1A FET Driver Load FET Driver P1B V- DS39778B-page 214 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 18.4.5 FULL-BRIDGE MODE In Full-Bridge Output mode, four pins are used as outputs; however, only two outputs are active at a time. In the Forward mode, pin P1A is continuously active and pin P1D is modulated. In the Reverse mode, pin P1C is continuously active and pin P1B is modulated. These are illustrated in Figure 18-6. FIGURE 18-6: P1A, P1B, P1C and P1D outputs are multiplexed with the port pins as described in Table 18-1, Table 18-2 and Table 18-3. The corresponding TRIS bits must be cleared to make the P1A, P1B, P1C and P1D pins outputs. FULL-BRIDGE PWM OUTPUT Forward Mode Period P1A(2) Duty Cycle P1B(2) P1C(2) P1D(2) (1) (1) Reverse Mode Period Duty Cycle P1A(2) P1B(2) P1C(2) P1D(2) (1) (1) Note 1: At this time, the TMR2 register is equal to the PR2 register. Note 2: Output signal is shown as active-high. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 215 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 18-7: EXAMPLE OF FULL-BRIDGE OUTPUT APPLICATION V+ PIC18F87J11 FET Driver QC QA FET Driver P1A Load P1B FET Driver P1C FET Driver QD QB VP1D 18.4.5.1 Direction Change in Full-Bridge Output Mode In the Full-Bridge Output mode, the P1M1 bit in the CCP1CON register allows users to control the forward/ reverse direction. When the application firmware changes this direction control bit, the module will assume the new direction on the next PWM cycle. Just before the end of the current PWM period, the modulated outputs (P1B and P1D) are placed in their inactive state, while the unmodulated outputs (P1A and P1C) are switched to drive in the opposite direction. This occurs in a time interval of (4 TOSC * (Timer2 Prescale Value) before the next PWM period begins. The Timer2 prescaler will be either 1, 4 or 16, depending on the value of the T2CKPS bits (T2CON<1:0>). During the interval from the switch of the unmodulated outputs to the beginning of the next period, the modulated outputs (P1B and P1D) remain inactive. This relationship is shown in Figure 18-8. Figure 18-9 shows an example where the PWM direction changes from forward to reverse at a near 100% duty cycle. At time t1, the outputs, P1A and P1D, become inactive, while output, P1C, becomes active. In this example, since the turn-off time of the power devices is longer than the turn-on time, a shoot-through current may flow through power devices, QC and QD (see Figure 18-7), for the duration of ‘t’. The same phenomenon will occur to power devices, QA and QB, for PWM direction change from reverse to forward. If changing PWM direction at high duty cycle is required for an application, one of the following requirements must be met: 1. 2. Reduce PWM for a PWM period before changing directions. Use switch drivers that can drive the switches off faster than they can drive them on. Other options to prevent shoot-through current may exist. Note that in the Full-Bridge Output mode, the ECCP1 module does not provide any dead-band delay. In general, since only one output is modulated at all times, dead-band delay is not required. However, there is a situation where a dead-band delay might be required. This situation occurs when both of the following conditions are true: 1. 2. The direction of the PWM output changes when the duty cycle of the output is at or near 100%. The turn-off time of the power switch, including the power device and driver circuit, is greater than the turn-on time. DS39778B-page 216 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 18-8: PWM DIRECTION CHANGE Period(1) SIGNAL Period P1A (Active-High) P1B (Active-High) DC P1C (Active-High) (Note 2) P1D (Active-High) DC Note 1: The direction bit in the ECCP1 Control register (CCP1CON<7>) is written at any time during the PWM cycle. 2: When changing directions, the P1A and P1C signals switch before the end of the current PWM cycle at intervals of 4 TOSC, 16 TOSC or 64 TOSC, depending on the Timer2 prescaler value. The modulated P1B and P1D signals are inactive at this time. FIGURE 18-9: PWM DIRECTION CHANGE AT NEAR 100% DUTY CYCLE Forward Period t1 Reverse Period P1A(1) P1B(1) DC P1C(1) P1D(1) DC tON(2) External Switch C(1) tOFF(3) External Switch D(1) t = tOFF – tON(2,3) Potential Shoot-Through Current(1) Note 1: All signals are shown as active-high. 2: tON is the turn-on delay of power switch QC and its driver. 3: tOFF is the turn-off delay of power switch QD and its driver. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 217 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 18.4.6 PROGRAMMABLE DEAD-BAND DELAY In half-bridge applications, where all power switches are modulated at the PWM frequency at all times, the power switches normally require more time to turn off than to turn on. If both the upper and lower power switches are switched at the same time (one turned on and the other turned off), both switches may be on for a short period of time until one switch completely turns off. During this brief interval, a very high current (shoot-through current) may flow through both power switches, shorting the bridge supply. To avoid this potentially destructive shoot-through current from flowing during switching, turning on either of the power switches is normally delayed to allow the other switch to completely turn off. In the Half-Bridge Output mode, a digitally programmable, dead-band delay is available to avoid shoot-through current from destroying the bridge power switches. The delay occurs at the signal transition from the non-active state to the active state (see Figure 18-4 for illustration). The lower seven bits of the ECCPxDEL register (Register 18-2) set the delay period in terms of microcontroller instruction cycles (TCY or 4 TOSC). 18.4.7 ENHANCED PWM AUTO-SHUTDOWN When the ECCP1 is programmed for any of the Enhanced PWM modes, the active output pins may be configured for auto-shutdown. Auto-shutdown immediately places the Enhanced PWM output pins into a defined shutdown state when a shutdown event occurs. REGISTER 18-2: A shutdown event can be caused by either of the two comparator modules or the FLT0 pin (or any combination of these three sources). The comparators may be used to monitor a voltage input proportional to a current being monitored in the bridge circuit. If the voltage exceeds a threshold, the comparator switches state and triggers a shutdown. Alternatively, a low-level digital signal on the FLT0 pin can also trigger a shutdown. The auto-shutdown feature can be disabled by not selecting any auto-shutdown sources. The auto-shutdown sources to be used are selected using the ECCP1AS2:ECCP1AS0 bits (ECCP1AS<6:4>). When a shutdown occurs, the output pins are asynchronously placed in their shutdown states, specified by the PSS1AC1:PSS1AC0 and PSS1BD1:PSS1BD0 bits (ECCP1AS3:ECCP1AS0). Each pin pair (P1A/P1C and P1B/P1D) may be set to drive high, drive low or be tri-stated (not driving). The ECCP1ASE bit (ECCP1AS<7>) is also set to hold the Enhanced PWM outputs in their shutdown states. The ECCP1ASE bit is set by hardware when a shutdown event occurs. If automatic restarts are not enabled, the ECCP1ASE bit is cleared by firmware when the cause of the shutdown clears. If automatic restarts are enabled, the ECCP1ASE bit is automatically cleared when the cause of the auto-shutdown has cleared. If the ECCP1ASE bit is set when a PWM period begins, the PWM outputs remain in their shutdown state for that entire PWM period. When the ECCP1ASE bit is cleared, the PWM outputs will return to normal operation at the beginning of the next PWM period. Note: Writing to the ECCP1ASE bit is disabled while a shutdown condition is active. ECCPxDEL: ECCPx PWM DELAY REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PxRSEN PxDC6 PxDC5 PxDC4 PxDC3 PxDC2 PxDC1 PxDC0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 PxRSEN: PWM Restart Enable bit 1 = Upon auto-shutdown, the ECCPxASE bit clears automatically once the shutdown event goes away; the PWM restarts automatically 0 = Upon auto-shutdown, ECCPxASE must be cleared in software to restart the PWM bit 6-0 PxDC6:PxDC0: PWM Delay Count bits Delay time, in number of FOSC/4 (4 * TOSC) cycles, between the scheduled and actual time for a PWM signal to transition to active. DS39778B-page 218 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 18-3: ECCPxAS: ECCPx AUTO-SHUTDOWN CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ECCPxASE ECCPxAS2 ECCPxAS1 ECCPxAS0 PSSxAC1 PSSxAC0 PSSxBD1 PSSxBD0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 ECCPxASE: ECCPx Auto-Shutdown Event Status bit 0 = ECCPx outputs are operating 1 = A shutdown event has occurred; ECCPx outputs are in shutdown state bit 6-4 ECCPxAS2:ECCPxAS0: ECCPx Auto-Shutdown Source Select bits 000 = Auto-shutdown is disabled 001 = Comparator 1 output 010 = Comparator 2 output 011 = Either Comparator 1 or 2 100 = FLT0 101 = FLT0 or Comparator 1 110 = FLT0 or Comparator 2 111 = FLT0 or Comparator 1 or Comparator 2 bit 3-2 PSSxAC1:PSSxAC0: Pins A and C Shutdown State Control bits 00 = Drive Pins A and C to ‘0’ 01 = Drive Pins A and C to ‘1’ 1x = Pins A and C tri-state bit 1-0 PSSxBD1:PSSxBD0: Pins B and D Shutdown State Control bits 00 = Drive Pins B and D to ‘0’ 01 = Drive Pins B and D to ‘1’ 1x = Pins B and D tri-state 18.4.7.1 Auto-Shutdown and Automatic Restart The auto-shutdown feature can be configured to allow automatic restarts of the module following a shutdown event. This is enabled by setting the P1RSEN bit of the ECCP1DEL register (ECCP1DEL<7>). In Shutdown mode with P1RSEN = 1 (Figure 18-10), the ECCP1ASE bit will remain set for as long as the cause of the shutdown continues. When the shutdown condition clears, the ECCP1ASE bit is cleared. If P1RSEN = 0 (Figure 18-11), once a shutdown condition occurs, the ECCP1ASE bit will remain set until it is cleared by firmware. Once ECCP1ASE is cleared, the Enhanced PWM will resume at the beginning of the next PWM period. Note: Writing to the ECCP1ASE bit is disabled while a shutdown condition is active. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Independent of the P1RSEN bit setting, if the auto-shutdown source is one of the comparators, the shutdown condition is a level. The ECCP1ASE bit cannot be cleared as long as the cause of the shutdown persists. The Auto-Shutdown mode can be forced by writing a ‘1’ to the ECCP1ASE bit. 18.4.8 START-UP CONSIDERATIONS When the ECCP1 module is used in the PWM mode, the application hardware must use the proper external pull-up and/or pull-down resistors on the PWM output pins. When the microcontroller is released from Reset, all of the I/O pins are in the high-impedance state. The external circuits must keep the power switch devices in the OFF state until the microcontroller drives the I/O pins with the proper signal levels, or activates the PWM output(s). Preliminary DS39778B-page 219 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY The CCP1M1:CCP1M0 bits (CCP1CON<1:0>) allow the user to choose whether the PWM output signals are active-high or active-low for each pair of PWM output pins (P1A/P1C and P1B/P1D). The PWM output polarities must be selected before the PWM pins are configured as outputs. Changing the polarity configuration while the PWM pins are configured as outputs is not recommended since it may result in damage to the application circuits. FIGURE 18-10: The P1A, P1B, P1C and P1D output latches may not be in the proper states when the PWM module is initialized. Enabling the PWM pins for output at the same time as the ECCP1 module may cause damage to the application circuit. The ECCP1 module must be enabled in the proper output mode and complete a full PWM cycle before configuring the PWM pins as outputs. The completion of a full PWM cycle is indicated by the TMR2IF bit being set as the second PWM period begins. PWM AUTO-SHUTDOWN (P1RSEN = 1, AUTO-RESTART ENABLED) PWM Period Shutdown Event ECCP1ASE bit PWM Activity Normal PWM Start of PWM Period FIGURE 18-11: Shutdown Shutdown Event Occurs Event Clears PWM Resumes PWM AUTO-SHUTDOWN (P1RSEN = 0, AUTO-RESTART DISABLED) PWM Period Shutdown Event ECCP1ASE bit PWM Activity Normal PWM Start of PWM Period DS39778B-page 220 ECCP1ASE Cleared by Shutdown Shutdown Firmware PWM Event Occurs Event Clears Resumes Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 18.4.9 SETUP FOR PWM OPERATION 8. The following steps should be taken when configuring the ECCP module for PWM operation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Configure the PWM pins PxA and PxB (and PxC and PxD, if used) as inputs by setting the corresponding TRIS bits. Set the PWM period by loading the PR2 (PR4) register. Configure the ECCP module for the desired PWM mode and configuration by loading the CCPxCON register with the appropriate values: • Select one of the available output configurations and direction with the PxM1:PxM0 bits. • Select the polarities of the PWM output signals with the CCPxM3:CCPxM0 bits. Set the PWM duty cycle by loading the CCPRxL register and the CCPxCON<5:4> bits. For auto-shutdown: • Disable auto-shutdown; ECCPxASE = 0 • Configure auto-shutdown source • Wait for Run condition For Half-Bridge Output mode, set the dead-band delay by loading ECCPxDEL<6:0> with the appropriate value. If auto-shutdown operation is required, load the ECCPxAS register: • Select the auto-shutdown sources using the ECCPxAS2:ECCPxAS0 bits. • Select the shutdown states of the PWM output pins using the PSSxAC1:PSSxAC0 and PSSxBD1:PSSxBD0 bits. • Set the ECCPxASE bit (ECCPxAS<7>). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. If auto-restart operation is required, set the PxRSEN bit (ECCPxDEL<7>). 9. Configure and start TMRn (TMR2 or TMR4): • Clear the TMRn interrupt flag bit by clearing the TMRnIF bit (PIR1<1> for Timer2 or PIR3<3> for Timer4). • Set the TMRn prescale value by loading the TnCKPS bits (TnCON<1:0>). • Enable Timer2 (or Timer4) by setting the TMRnON bit (TnCON<2>). 10. Enable PWM outputs after a new PWM cycle has started: • Wait until TMRn overflows (TMRnIF bit is set). • Enable the ECCPx/PxA, PxB, PxC and/or PxD pin outputs by clearing the respective TRIS bits. • Clear the ECCPxASE bit (ECCPxAS<7>). 18.4.10 EFFECTS OF A RESET Both Power-on Reset and subsequent Resets will force all ports to Input mode and the ECCP registers to their Reset states. This forces the Enhanced CCP module to reset to a state compatible with the standard CCP module. Preliminary DS39778B-page 221 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 18-5: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ECCP MODULES AND TIMER1 TO TIMER4 Bit 7 INTCON Bit 6 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL RCON — IPEN Reset Values on Page: Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 CM RI TO PD POR BOR 56 PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 58 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 58 IPR1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 58 PIR2 OSCFIF CM2IF CM1IF — BCL1IF LVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF 58 PIE2 OSCFIE CM2IE CM1IE — BCL1IE LVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE 58 IPR2 OSCFIP CM2IP CM1IP — BCL1IP LVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP 58 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF 58 PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE 58 IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP 58 TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 58 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 58 TRISE TRISE7 TRISE6 TRISE5 TRISE4 TRISE3 TRISE2 TRISE1 TRISE0 58 TRISG — — — TRISG4 TRISG3 TRISG2 TRISG1 TRISG0 58 TRISH7 TRISH6 TRISH5 TRISH4 TRISH3 TRISH2 TRISH1 TRISH0 58 TRISH(1) TMR1L(3) Timer1 Register Low Byte 56 TMR1H(3) Timer1 Register High Byte 56 (4) ODCON1 — — — T1CON(3) RD16 T1RUN T1CKPS1 TMR2(3) CCP5OD CCP4OD T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN ECCP3OD ECCP2OD ECCP1OD T1SYNC TMR1CS 56 T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 56 Timer2 Register — T2CON 56 TMR1ON 56 T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON PR2(3) Timer2 Period Register 56 TMR3L Timer3 Register Low Byte 59 TMR3H Timer3 Register High Byte 59 RD16 T3CON TMR4 T3CCP2 T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 T3CCP1 T3SYNC TMR3CS TMR3ON 59 T4CKPS1 T4CKPS0 59 Timer4 Register — T4CON 59 T4OUTPS3 T4OUTPS2 T4OUTPS1 T4OUTPS0 TMR4ON PR4(3) Timer4 Period Register 59 CCPRxL(2) Capture/Compare/PWM Register x Low Byte 57 CCPRxH(2) Capture/Compare/PWM Register x High Byte CCPxCON(2) ECCPxAS(2) (2) ECCPxDEL Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: PxM1 CCPxM2 CCPxM1 CCPxM0 57 ECCPxASE ECCPxAS2 ECCPxAS1 ECCPxAS0 PSSxAC1 PSSxAC0 PSSxBD1 PSSxBD0 57 PxDC2 PxDC1 PxDC0 57 PxDC6 DCxB1 PxDC5 DCxB0 57, CCPxM3 PxRSEN PxM0 PxDC4 PxDC3 — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used during ECCP operation. Available on 80-pin devices only. Generic term for all of the identical registers of this name for all Enhanced CCP modules, where ‘x’ identifies the individual module (ECCP1, ECCP2 or ECCP3). Bit assignments and Reset values for all registers of the same generic name are identical. Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. DS39778B-page 222 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.0 19.1 MASTER SYNCHRONOUS SERIAL PORT (MSSP) MODULE 19.3 SPI Mode The SPI mode allows 8 bits of data to be synchronously transmitted and received simultaneously. All four modes of SPI are supported. To accomplish communication, typically three pins are used: Master SSP (MSSP) Module Overview The Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) module is a serial interface, useful for communicating with other peripheral or microcontroller devices. These peripheral devices may be serial EEPROMs, shift registers, display drivers, A/D converters, etc. The MSSP module can operate in one of two modes: • Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) • Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C™) - Full Master mode - Slave mode (with general address call) • Serial Data Out (SDOx) – RC5/SDO1 or RD4/SDO2 • Serial Data In (SDIx) – RC4/SDI1/SDA1 or RD5/SDI2/SDA2 • Serial Clock (SCKx) – RC3/SCK1/SCL1 or RD6/SCK2/SCL2 Additionally, a fourth pin may be used when in a Slave mode of operation: • Slave Select (SSx) – RF7/SS1 or RD7/SS2 Figure 19-1 shows the block diagram of the MSSP module when operating in SPI mode. The I2C interface supports the following modes in hardware: FIGURE 19-1: • Master mode • Multi-Master mode • Slave mode with 5-bit and 7-bit address masking (with address masking for both 10-bit and 7-bit addressing) Internal Data Bus Read 19.2 SDIx SSPxSR reg Throughout this section, generic references to an MSSP module in any of its operating modes may be interpreted as being equally applicable to MSSP1 or MSSP2. Register names and module I/O signals use the generic designator ‘x’ to indicate the use of a numeral to distinguish a particular module when required. Control bit names are not individuated. SDOx SSx Control Registers SSx Control Enable 2 Clock Select SCKx In devices with more than one MSSP module, it is very important to pay close attention to SSPxCON register names. SSP1CON1 and SSP1CON2 control different operational aspects of the same module, while SSP1CON1 and SSP2CON1 control the same features for two different modules. SSPM3:SSPM0 SMP:CKE 4 TMR2 Output 2 2 ( Edge Select Additional details are provided under the individual sections. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Shift Clock bit 0 Edge Select Each MSSP module has three associated control registers. These include a status register (SSPxSTAT) and two control registers (SSPxCON1 and SSPxCON2). The use of these registers and their individual configuration bits differ significantly depending on whether the MSSP module is operated in SPI or I2C mode. Note: Write SSPxBUF reg All members of the PIC18F87J11 Family have two MSSP modules, designated as MSSP1 and MSSP2. Each module operates independently of the other. Note: MSSP BLOCK DIAGRAM (SPI MODE) ) Prescaler TOSC 4, 16, 64 Data to TXx/RXx in SSPxSR TRIS bit Note: Preliminary Only port I/O names are used in this diagram for the sake of brevity. Refer to the text for a full list of multiplexed functions. DS39778B-page 223 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.3.1 REGISTERS SSPxSR is the shift register used for shifting data in or out. SSPxBUF is the buffer register to which data bytes are written to or read from. Each MSSP module has four registers for SPI mode operation. These are: In receive operations, SSPxSR and SSPxBUF together create a double-buffered receiver. When SSPxSR receives a complete byte, it is transferred to SSPxBUF and the SSPxIF interrupt is set. • MSSPx Control Register 1 (SSPxCON1) • MSSPx Status Register (SSPxSTAT) • Serial Receive/Transmit Buffer Register (SSPxBUF) • MSSPx Shift Register (SSPxSR) – Not directly accessible During transmission, the SSPxBUF is not double-buffered. A write to SSPxBUF will write to both SSPxBUF and SSPxSR. SSPxCON1 and SSPxSTAT are the control and status registers in SPI mode operation. The SSPxCON1 register is readable and writable. The lower 6 bits of the SSPxSTAT are read-only. The upper two bits of the SSPxSTAT are read/write. REGISTER 19-1: SSPxSTAT: MSSPx STATUS REGISTER (SPI MODE) R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 SMP CKE(1) D/A P S R/W UA BF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 SMP: Sample bit SPI Master mode: 1 = Input data sampled at end of data output time 0 = Input data sampled at middle of data output time SPI Slave mode: SMP must be cleared when SPI is used in Slave mode. bit 6 CKE: SPI Clock Select bit(1) 1 = Transmit occurs on transition from active to Idle clock state 0 = Transmit occurs on transition from Idle to active clock state bit 5 D/A: Data/Address bit Used in I2C mode only. bit 4 P: Stop bit Used in I2C mode only. This bit is cleared when the MSSPx module is disabled, SSPEN is cleared. bit 3 S: Start bit Used in I2C mode only. bit 2 R/W: Read/Write Information bit Used in I2C mode only. bit 1 UA: Update Address bit Used in I2C mode only. bit 0 BF: Buffer Full Status bit (Receive mode only) 1 = Receive complete, SSPxBUF is full 0 = Receive not complete, SSPxBUF is empty Note 1: Polarity of clock state is set by the CKP bit (SSPxCON1<4>). DS39778B-page 224 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 19-2: SSPxCON1: MSSPx CONTROL REGISTER 1 (SPI MODE) R/W-0 R/W-0 WCOL SSPOV(1) R/W-0 (2) SSPEN R/W-0 CKP R/W-0 SSPM3 (3) R/W-0 SSPM2 (3) R/W-0 SSPM1 (3) R/W-0 SSPM0(3) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 WCOL: Write Collision Detect bit 1 = The SSPxBUF register is written while it is still transmitting the previous word (must be cleared in software) 0 = No collision bit 6 SSPOV: Receive Overflow Indicator bit(1) SPI Slave mode: 1 = A new byte is received while the SSPxBUF register is still holding the previous data. In case of overflow, the data in SSPxSR is lost. Overflow can only occur in Slave mode. The user must read the SSPxBUF, even if only transmitting data, to avoid setting overflow (must be cleared in software). 0 = No overflow bit 5 SSPEN: Master Synchronous Serial Port Enable bit(2) 1 = Enables serial port and configures SCKx, SDOx, SDIx and SSx as serial port pins 0 = Disables serial port and configures these pins as I/O port pins bit 4 CKP: Clock Polarity Select bit 1 = Idle state for clock is a high level 0 = Idle state for clock is a low level bit 3-0 SSPM3:SSPM0: Master Synchronous Serial Port Mode Select bits(3) 0101 = SPI Slave mode, clock = SCKx pin, SSx pin control disabled, SSx can be used as I/O pin 0100 = SPI Slave mode, clock = SCKx pin, SSx pin control enabled 0011 = SPI Master mode, clock = TMR2 output/2 0010 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/64 0001 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/16 0000 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/4 Note 1: 2: 3: In Master mode, the overflow bit is not set since each new reception (and transmission) is initiated by writing to the SSPxBUF register. When enabled, these pins must be properly configured as input or output. Bit combinations not specifically listed here are either reserved or implemented in I2C mode only. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 225 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.3.2 OPERATION When initializing the SPI, several options need to be specified. This is done by programming the appropriate control bits (SSPxCON1<5:0> and SSPxSTAT<7:6>). These control bits allow the following to be specified: • • • • Master mode (SCKx is the clock output) Slave mode (SCKx is the clock input) Clock Polarity (Idle state of SCKx) Data Input Sample Phase (middle or end of data output time) • Clock Edge (output data on rising/falling edge of SCKx) • Clock Rate (Master mode only) • Slave Select mode (Slave mode only) Each MSSP module consists of a transmit/receive shift register (SSPxSR) and a buffer register (SSPxBUF). The SSPxSR shifts the data in and out of the device, MSb first. The SSPxBUF holds the data that was written to the SSPxSR until the received data is ready. Once the 8 bits of data have been received, that byte is moved to the SSPxBUF register. Then, the Buffer Full detect bit, BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) and the interrupt flag bit, SSPxIF, are set. This double-buffering of the received data (SSPxBUF) allows the next byte to start reception before reading the data that was just received. Any write to the SSPxBUF register during transmission/reception of data will be ignored and the Write Collision Detect bit, WCOL (SSPxCON1<7>), will be set. User software must clear the WCOL bit so that it can be determined if the following write(s) to the SSPxBUF register completed successfully. When the application software is expecting to receive valid data, the SSPxBUF should be read before the next byte of data to transfer is written to the SSPxBUF. The Buffer Full bit, BF (SSPxSTAT<0>), indicates when SSPxBUF has been loaded with the received data (transmission is complete). When the SSPxBUF is read, the BF bit is cleared. This data may be irrelevant if the SPI is only a transmitter. Generally, the MSSP interrupt is used to determine when the transmission/reception has completed. If the interrupt method is not going to be used, then software polling can be done to ensure that a write collision does not occur. Example 19-1 shows the loading of the SSPxBUF (SSPxSR) for data transmission. The SSPxSR is not directly readable or writable and can only be accessed by addressing the SSPxBUF register. Additionally, the SSPxSTAT register indicates the various status conditions. 19.3.3 OPEN-DRAIN OUTPUT OPTION The drivers for the SDOx output and SCKx clock pins can be optionally configured as open-drain outputs. This feature allows the voltage level on the pin to be pulled to a higher level through an external pull-up resistor, and allows the output to communicate with external circuits without the need for additional level shifters. For more information, see Section 10.1.4 “Open-Drain Outputs”. The open-drain output option is controlled by the SPI2OD and SPI1OD bits (ODCON3<1:0>). Setting an SPIxOD bit configures the SDOx and SCKx pins for the corresponding module for open-drain operation. The ODCON3 register shares the same address as the T1CON register. The ODCON3 register is accessed by setting the ADSHR bit in the WDTCON register (WDTCON<4>). EXAMPLE 19-1: LOOP LOADING THE SSP1BUF (SSP1SR) REGISTER BTFSS BRA MOVF SSP1STAT, BF LOOP SSP1BUF, W ;Has data been received (transmit complete)? ;No ;WREG reg = contents of SSP1BUF MOVWF RXDATA ;Save in user RAM, if data is meaningful MOVF MOVWF TXDATA, W SSP1BUF ;W reg = contents of TXDATA ;New data to xmit DS39778B-page 226 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.3.4 ENABLING SPI I/O To enable the serial port, MSSP Enable bit, SSPEN (SSPxCON1<5>), must be set. To reset or reconfigure SPI mode, clear the SSPEN bit, reinitialize the SSPxCON registers and then set the SSPEN bit. This configures the SDIx, SDOx, SCKx and SSx pins as serial port pins. For the pins to behave as the serial port function, some must have their data direction bits (in the TRIS register) appropriately programmed as follows: • SDIx is automatically controlled by the SPI module • SDOx must have the TRISC<5> or TRISD<4> bit cleared • SCKx (Master mode) must have the TRISC<3> or TRISD<6>bit cleared • SCKx (Slave mode) must have the TRISC<3> or TRISD<6> bit set • SSx must have the TRISF<7> or TRISD<7> bit set FIGURE 19-2: Any serial port function that is not desired may be overridden by programming the corresponding Data Direction (TRIS) register to the opposite value. 19.3.5 TYPICAL CONNECTION Figure 19-2 shows a typical connection between two microcontrollers. The master controller (Processor 1) initiates the data transfer by sending the SCKx signal. Data is shifted out of both shift registers on their programmed clock edge and latched on the opposite edge of the clock. Both processors should be programmed to the same Clock Polarity (CKP), then both controllers would send and receive data at the same time. Whether the data is meaningful (or dummy data) depends on the application software. This leads to three scenarios for data transmission: • Master sends data – Slave sends dummy data • Master sends data – Slave sends data • Master sends dummy data – Slave sends data SPI MASTER/SLAVE CONNECTION SPI Master SSPM3:SSPM0 = 00xxb SPI Slave SSPM3:SSPM0 = 010xb SDOx SDIx Serial Input Buffer (SSPxBUF) SDIx Shift Register (SSPxSR) MSb Serial Input Buffer (SSPxBUF) SDOx LSb MSb SCKx Serial Clock PROCESSOR 1 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Shift Register (SSPxSR) LSb SCKx PROCESSOR 2 Preliminary DS39778B-page 227 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.3.6 MASTER MODE The master can initiate the data transfer at any time because it controls the SCKx. The master determines when the slave (Processor 1, Figure 19-2) is to broadcast data by the software protocol. In Master mode, the data is transmitted/received as soon as the SSPxBUF register is written to. If the SPI is only going to receive, the SDOx output could be disabled (programmed as an input). The SSPxSR register will continue to shift in the signal present on the SDIx pin at the programmed clock rate. As each byte is received, it will be loaded into the SSPxBUF register as if a normal received byte (interrupts and status bits appropriately set). This could be useful in receiver applications as a “Line Activity Monitor” mode. The clock polarity is selected by appropriately programming the CKP bit (SSPxCON1<4>). This then, would give waveforms for SPI communication as FIGURE 19-3: shown in Figure 19-3, Figure 19-5 and Figure 19-6, where the MSB is transmitted first. In Master mode, the SPI clock rate (bit rate) is user programmable to be one of the following: • • • • FOSC/4 (or TCY) FOSC/16 (or 4 • TCY) FOSC/64 (or 16 • TCY) Timer2 output/2 This allows a maximum data rate (at 40 MHz) of 10.00 Mbps. Figure 19-3 shows the waveforms for Master mode. When the CKE bit is set, the SDOx data is valid before there is a clock edge on SCKx. The change of the input sample is shown based on the state of the SMP bit. The time when the SSPxBUF is loaded with the received data is shown. SPI MODE WAVEFORM (MASTER MODE) Write to SSPxBUF SCKx (CKP = 0 CKE = 0) SCKx (CKP = 1 CKE = 0) 4 Clock Modes SCKx (CKP = 0 CKE = 1) SCKx (CKP = 1 CKE = 1) SDOx (CKE = 0) bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 SDOx (CKE = 1) bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 SDIx (SMP = 0) bit 0 bit 7 Input Sample (SMP = 0) SDIx (SMP = 1) bit 0 bit 7 Input Sample (SMP = 1) SSPxIF Next Q4 Cycle after Q2↓ SSPxSR to SSPxBUF DS39778B-page 228 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.3.7 SLAVE MODE In Slave mode, the data is transmitted and received as the external clock pulses appear on SCKx. When the last bit is latched, the SSPxIF interrupt flag bit is set. While in Slave mode, the external clock is supplied by the external clock source on the SCKx pin. This external clock must meet the minimum high and low times as specified in the electrical specifications. While in Sleep mode, the slave can transmit/receive data. When a byte is received, the device can be configured to wake-up from Sleep. 19.3.8 SLAVE SELECT SYNCHRONIZATION The SSx pin allows a Synchronous Slave mode. The SPI must be in Slave mode with the SSx pin control enabled (SSPxCON1<3:0> = 04h). When the SSx pin is low, transmission and reception are enabled and the SDOx pin is driven. When the SSx pin goes high, the SDOx pin is no longer driven, even if in the middle of a FIGURE 19-4: transmitted byte and becomes a floating output. External pull-up/pull-down resistors may be desirable depending on the application. Note 1: When the SPI is in Slave mode control enabled with SSx pin (SSPxCON1<3:0> = 0100), the SPI module will reset if the SSx pin is set to VDD. 2: If the SPI is used in Slave mode with CKE set, then the SSx pin control must be enabled. When the SPI module resets, the bit counter is forced to ‘0’. This can be done by either forcing the SSx pin to a high level or clearing the SSPEN bit. To emulate two-wire communication, the SDOx pin can be connected to the SDIx pin. When the SPI needs to operate as a receiver, the SDOx pin can be configured as an input. This disables transmissions from the SDOx. The SDIx can always be left as an input (SDI function) since it cannot create a bus conflict. SLAVE SYNCHRONIZATION WAVEFORM SSx SCKx (CKP = 0 CKE = 0) SCKx (CKP = 1 CKE = 0) Write to SSPxBUF SDOx SDIx (SMP = 0) bit 7 bit 6 bit 7 bit 0 bit 0 bit 7 bit 7 Input Sample (SMP = 0) SSPxIF Interrupt Flag Next Q4 Cycle after Q2↓ SSPxSR to SSPxBUF © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 229 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 19-5: SPI MODE WAVEFORM (SLAVE MODE WITH CKE = 0) SSx Optional SCKx (CKP = 0 CKE = 0) SCKx (CKP = 1 CKE = 0) Write to SSPxBUF SDOx SDIx (SMP = 0) bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 bit 0 bit 7 Input Sample (SMP = 0) SSPxIF Interrupt Flag Next Q4 Cycle after Q2↓ SSPxSR to SSPxBUF FIGURE 19-6: SPI MODE WAVEFORM (SLAVE MODE WITH CKE = 1) SSx Not Optional SCKx (CKP = 0 CKE = 1) SCKx (CKP = 1 CKE = 1) Write to SSPxBUF SDOx SDIx (SMP = 0) bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 bit 0 bit 7 Input Sample (SMP = 0) SSPxIF Interrupt Flag Next Q4 Cycle after Q2↓ SSPxSR to SSPxBUF DS39778B-page 230 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.3.9 OPERATION IN POWER-MANAGED MODES In SPI Master mode, module clocks may be operating at a different speed than when in full power mode; in the case of the Sleep mode, all clocks are halted. In Idle modes, a clock is provided to the peripherals. That clock can be from the primary clock source, the secondary clock (Timer1 oscillator) or the INTOSC source. See Section 2.3 “Clock Sources and Oscillator Switching” for additional information. 19.3.11 Table 19-1 shows the compatibility between the standard SPI modes and the states of the CKP and CKE control bits. TABLE 19-1: If the Sleep mode is selected, all module clocks are halted and the transmission/reception will remain in that state until the device wakes. After the device returns to Run mode, the module will resume transmitting and receiving data. In SPI Slave mode, the SPI Transmit/Receive Shift register operates asynchronously to the device. This allows the device to be placed in any power-managed mode and data to be shifted into the SPI Transmit/Receive Shift register. When all 8 bits have been received, the MSSP interrupt flag bit will be set and if enabled, will wake the device. 19.3.10 SPI BUS MODES Control Bits State Standard SPI Mode Terminology CKP CKE 0, 0 0 1 0, 1 0 0 1, 0 1 1 1, 1 1 0 In most cases, the speed that the master clocks SPI data is not important; however, this should be evaluated for each system. If MSSP interrupts are enabled, they can wake the controller from Sleep mode, or one of the Idle modes, when the master completes sending data. If an exit from Sleep or Idle mode is not desired, MSSP interrupts should be disabled. BUS MODE COMPATIBILITY There is also an SMP bit which controls when the data is sampled. 19.3.12 SPI CLOCK SPEED AND MODULE INTERACTIONS Because MSSP1 and MSSP2 are independent modules, they can operate simultaneously at different data rates. Setting the SSPM3:SSPM0 bits of the SSPxCON1 register determines the rate for the corresponding module. An exception is when both modules use Timer2 as a time base in Master mode. In this instance, any changes to the Timer2 module’s operation will affect both MSSP modules equally. If different bit rates are required for each module, the user should select one of the other three time base options for one of the modules. EFFECTS OF A RESET A Reset disables the MSSP module and terminates the current transfer. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 231 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 19-2: Name INTCON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SPI OPERATION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 58 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 58 IPR1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 58 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF 58 PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE 58 IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP 58 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 58 TRISD TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4 TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1 TRISD0 58 TRISF7 TRISF6 TRISF5 TRISF4 TRISF3 TRISF2 — — 58 TRISF SSP1BUF MSSP1 Receive Buffer/Transmit Register 56 SSPxCON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 56, 59 SSPxSTAT SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF 56, 59 — — SPI2OD SPI1OD SSP2BUF ODCON3(1) MSSP2 Receive Buffer/Transmit Register — — — — 59 56 Legend: Shaded cells are not used by the MSSP module in SPI mode. Note 1: Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. DS39778B-page 232 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4 I2C Mode 19.4.1 The MSSP module in I 2C mode fully implements all master and slave functions (including general call support), and provides interrupts on Start and Stop bits in hardware to determine a free bus (multi-master function). The MSSP module implements the standard mode specifications, as well as 7-bit and 10-bit addressing. Two pins are used for data transfer: • Serial Clock (SCLx) – RC3/SCK1/SCL1 or RD6/SCK2/SCL2 • Serial Data (SDAx) – RC4/SDI1/SDA1 or RD5/SDI2/SDA2 The user must configure these pins as inputs by setting the associated TRIS bits. FIGURE 19-7: MSSP BLOCK DIAGRAM (I2C™ MODE) Write Shift Clock MSb LSb Match Detect Addr Match Address Mask Note: SSPxCON1, SSPxCON2 and SSPxSTAT are the control and status registers in I2C mode operation. The SSPxCON1 and SSPxCON2 registers are readable and writable. The lower 6 bits of the SSPxSTAT are read-only. The upper two bits of the SSPxSTAT are read/write. In receive operations, SSPxSR and SSPxBUF together, create a double-buffered receiver. When SSPxSR receives a complete byte, it is transferred to SSPxBUF and the SSPxIF interrupt is set. SSPxADD reg Start and Stop bit Detect MSSPx Control Register 1 (SSPxCON1) MSSPx Control Register 2 (SSPxCON2) MSSPx Status Register (SSPxSTAT) Serial Receive/Transmit Buffer Register (SSPxBUF) • MSSPx Shift Register (SSPxSR) – Not directly accessible • MSSPx Address Register (SSPxADD) • I2C Slave Address Mask Register (SSPxMSK) SSPxMSK holds the slave address mask value when the module is configured for 7-bit Address Masking mode. While it is a separate register, it shares the same SFR address as SSPxADD; it is only accessible when the SSPM3:SSPM0 bits are specifically set to permit access. Additional details are provided in Section 19.4.3.4 “7-Bit Address Masking Mode”. SSPxSR reg SDAx • • • • SSPxADD contains the slave device address when the MSSP is configured in I2C Slave mode. When the MSSP is configured in Master mode, the lower seven bits of SSPxADD act as the Baud Rate Generator reload value. SSPxBUF reg SCLx The MSSP module has six registers for I2C operation. These are: SSPxSR is the shift register used for shifting data in or out. SSPxBUF is the buffer register to which data bytes are written to or read from. Internal Data Bus Read REGISTERS Set, Reset S, P bits (SSPxSTAT reg) During transmission, the SSPxBUF is not double-buffered. A write to SSPxBUF will write to both SSPxBUF and SSPxSR. Only port I/O names are used in this diagram for the sake of brevity. Refer to the text for a full list of multiplexed functions. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 233 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 19-3: R/W-0 SSPxSTAT: MSSPx STATUS REGISTER (I2C™ MODE) R/W-0 SMP CKE R-0 R-0 R-0 D/A (1) (1) P S R-0 R/W (2,3) R-0 R-0 UA BF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 SMP: Slew Rate Control bit In Master or Slave mode: 1 = Slew rate control disabled for Standard Speed mode (100 kHz and 1 MHz) 0 = Slew rate control enabled for High-Speed mode (400 kHz) bit 6 CKE: SMBus Select bit In Master or Slave mode: 1 = Enable SMBus specific inputs 0 = Disable SMBus specific inputs bit 5 D/A: Data/Address bit In Master mode: Reserved. In Slave mode: 1 = Indicates that the last byte received or transmitted was data 0 = Indicates that the last byte received or transmitted was address bit 4 P: Stop bit(1) 1 = Indicates that a Stop bit has been detected last 0 = Stop bit was not detected last bit 3 S: Start bit(1) 1 = Indicates that a Start bit has been detected last 0 = Start bit was not detected last bit 2 R/W: Read/Write Information bit(2,3) In Slave mode: 1 = Read 0 = Write In Master mode: 1 = Transmit is in progress 0 = Transmit is not in progress bit 1 UA: Update Address bit (10-Bit Slave mode only) 1 = Indicates that the user needs to update the address in the SSPxADD register 0 = Address does not need to be updated bit 0 BF: Buffer Full Status bit In Transmit mode: 1 = SSPxBUF is full 0 = SSPxBUF is empty In Receive mode: 1 = SSPxBUF is full (does not include the ACK and Stop bits) 0 = SSPxBUF is empty (does not include the ACK and Stop bits) Note 1: 2: 3: This bit is cleared on Reset and when SSPEN is cleared. This bit holds the R/W bit information following the last address match. This bit is only valid from the address match to the next Start bit, Stop bit or not ACK bit. ORing this bit with SEN, RSEN, PEN, RCEN or ACKEN will indicate if the MSSPx is in Active mode. DS39778B-page 234 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 19-4: R/W-0 WCOL SSPxCON1: MSSPx CONTROL REGISTER 1 (I2C™ MODE) R/W-0 R/W-0 SSPOV SSPEN(1) R/W-0 CKP R/W-0 SSPM3 (2) R/W-0 SSPM2 (2) R/W-0 SSPM1 (2) R/W-0 SSPM0(2) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 WCOL: Write Collision Detect bit In Master Transmit mode: 1 = A write to the SSPxBUF register was attempted while the I2C conditions were not valid for a transmission to be started (must be cleared in software) 0 = No collision In Slave Transmit mode: 1 = The SSPxBUF register is written while it is still transmitting the previous word (must be cleared in software) 0 = No collision In Receive mode (Master or Slave modes): This is a “don’t care” bit. bit 6 SSPOV: Receive Overflow Indicator bit In Receive mode: 1 = A byte is received while the SSPxBUF register is still holding the previous byte (must be cleared in software) 0 = No overflow In Transmit mode: This is a “don’t care” bit in Transmit mode. bit 5 SSPEN: Master Synchronous Serial Port Enable bit(1) 1 = Enables the serial port and configures the SDAx and SCLx pins as the serial port pins 0 = Disables serial port and configures these pins as I/O port pins bit 4 CKP: SCKx Release Control bit In Slave mode: 1 = Releases clock 0 = Holds clock low (clock stretch), used to ensure data setup time In Master mode: Unused in this mode. bit 3-0 SSPM3:SSPM0: Master Synchronous Serial Port Mode Select bits(2) 1111 = I2C Slave mode, 10-bit address with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled 1110 = I2C Slave mode, 7-bit address with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled 1011 = I2C Firmware Controlled Master mode (Slave Idle) 1001 = Load SSPMSK register at SSPADD SFR address(3,4) 1000 = I2C Master mode, clock = FOSC/(4 * (SSPxADD + 1)) 0111 = I2C Slave mode, 10-bit address 0110 = I2C Slave mode, 7-bit address Note 1: 2: 3: 4: When enabled, the SDAx and SCLx pins must be configured as inputs. Bit combinations not specifically listed here are either reserved or implemented in SPI mode only. When SSPM3:SSPM0 = 1001, any reads or writes to the SSPxADD SFR address actually accesses the SSPxMSK register. This mode is only available when 7-Bit Address Masking mode is selected (MSSPMSK Configuration bit is ‘1’). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 235 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 19-5: SSPxCON2: MSSPx CONTROL REGISTER 2 (I2C™ MASTER MODE) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT(1) ACKEN(2) RCEN(2) PEN(2) RSEN(2) SEN(2) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 GCEN: General Call Enable bit Unused in Master mode. bit 6 ACKSTAT: Acknowledge Status bit (Master Transmit mode only) 1 = Acknowledge was not received from slave 0 = Acknowledge was received from slave bit 5 ACKDT: Acknowledge Data bit (Master Receive mode only)(1) 1 = Not Acknowledge 0 = Acknowledge bit 4 ACKEN: Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit(2) 1 = Initiates Acknowledge sequence on SDAx and SCLx pins and transmit ACKDT data bit. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Acknowledge sequence Idle bit 3 RCEN: Receive Enable bit (Master Receive mode only)(2) 1 = Enables Receive mode for I2C 0 = Receive Idle bit 2 PEN: Stop Condition Enable bit(2) 1 = Initiates Stop condition on SDAx and SCLx pins. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Stop condition Idle bit 1 RSEN: Repeated Start Condition Enable bit(2) 1 = Initiates Repeated Start condition on SDAx and SCLx pins. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Repeated Start condition Idle bit 0 SEN: Start Condition Enable bit(2) 1 = Initiates Start condition on SDAx and SCLx pins. Automatically cleared by hardware. 0 = Start condition Idle Note 1: 2: Value that will be transmitted when the user initiates an Acknowledge sequence at the end of a receive. If the I2C module is active, these bits may not be set (no spooling) and the SSPxBUF may not be written (or writes to the SSPxBUF are disabled). DS39778B-page 236 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 19-6: SSPxCON2: MSSPx CONTROL REGISTER 2 (I2C™ SLAVE MODE) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 GCEN ACKSTAT ADMSK5 ADMSK4 ADMSK3 ADMSK2 ADMSK1 SEN(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 GCEN: General Call Enable bit 1 = Enables interrupt when a general call address (0000h) is received in the SSPSR 0 = General call address disabled bit 6 ACKSTAT: Acknowledge Status bit Unused in Slave mode. bit 5-2 ADMSK5:ADMSK2: Slave Address Mask Select bits (5-Bit Address Masking mode) 1 = Masking of corresponding bits of SSPxADD enabled 0 = Masking of corresponding bits of SSPxADD disabled bit 1 ADMSK1: Slave Address Least Significant bit(s) Mask Select bit In 7-Bit Addressing mode: 1 = Masking of SSPxADD<1> only enabled 0 = Masking of SSPxADD<1> only disabled In 10-Bit Addressing mode: 1 = Masking of SSPxADD<1:0> enabled 0 = Masking of SSPxADD<1:0> disabled bit 0 SEN: Stretch Enable bit(1) 1 = Clock stretching is enabled for both slave transmit and slave receive (stretch enabled) 0 = Clock stretching is disabled Note 1: If the I2C module is active, this bit may not be set (no spooling) and the SSPBUF may not be written (or writes to the SSPxBUF are disabled). REGISTER 19-7: SSPxMSK: I2C™ SLAVE ADDRESS MASK REGISTER (7-BIT MASKING MODE)(1) R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 MSK7 MSK6 MSK5 MSK4 MSK3 MSK2 MSK1 MSK0(2) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-0 x = Bit is unknown MSK7:MSK0: Slave Address Mask Select bit 1 = Masking of corresponding bit of SSPxADD enabled 0 = Masking of corresponding bit of SSPxADD disabled Note 1: 2: This register shares the same SFR address as SSPxADD, and is only addressable in select MSSPx operating modes. See Section 19.4.3.4 “7-Bit Address Masking Mode” for more details. MSK0 is not used as a mask bit in 7-bit addressing. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 237 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.2 OPERATION 19.4.3.1 The MSSP module functions are enabled by setting the MSSP Enable bit, SSPEN (SSPxCON1<5>). The SSPxCON1 register allows control of the I2C operation. Four mode selection bits (SSPxCON1<3:0>) allow one of the following I2C modes to be selected: I2C Master mode, clock I 2C Slave mode (7-bit address) I 2C Slave mode (10-bit address) I 2C Slave mode (7-bit address) with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled • I 2C Slave mode (10-bit address) with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled • I 2C Firmware Controlled Master mode, slave is Idle • • • • 19.4.3 Once the MSSP module has been enabled, it waits for a Start condition to occur. Following the Start condition, the 8 bits are shifted into the SSPxSR register. All incoming bits are sampled with the rising edge of the clock (SCLx) line. The value of register, SSPxSR<7:1>, is compared to the value of the SSPxADD register. The address is compared on the falling edge of the eighth clock (SCLx) pulse. If the addresses match and the BF and SSPOV bits are clear, the following events occur: 1. 2. 3. 4. Selection of any I 2C mode with the SSPEN bit set forces the SCLx and SDAx pins to be open-drain, provided these pins are programmed as inputs by setting the appropriate TRISC or TRISD bits. To ensure proper operation of the module, pull-up resistors must be provided externally to the SCLx and SDAx pins. SLAVE MODE In Slave mode, the SCLx and SDAx pins must be configured as inputs (TRISC<4:3> set). The MSSP module will override the input state with the output data when required (slave-transmitter). The I 2C Slave mode hardware will always generate an interrupt on an address match. Address masking will allow the hardware to generate an interrupt for more than one address (up to 31 in 7-bit addressing and up to 63 in 10-bit addressing). Through the mode select bits, the user can also choose to interrupt on Start and Stop bits. When an address is matched, or the data transfer after an address match is received, the hardware automatically will generate the Acknowledge (ACK) pulse and load the SSPxBUF register with the received value currently in the SSPxSR register. Any combination of the following conditions will cause the MSSP module not to give this ACK pulse: • The Buffer Full bit, BF (SSPxSTAT<0>), was set before the transfer was received. • The overflow bit, SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>), was set before the transfer was received. Addressing The SSPxSR register value is loaded into the SSPxBUF register. The Buffer Full bit, BF, is set. An ACK pulse is generated. The MSSP Interrupt Flag bit, SSPxIF, is set (and interrupt is generated, if enabled) on the falling edge of the ninth SCLx pulse. In 10-Bit Addressing mode, two address bytes need to be received by the slave. The five Most Significant bits (MSbs) of the first address byte specify if this is a 10-bit address. Bit R/W (SSPxSTAT<2>) must specify a write so the slave device will receive the second address byte. For a 10-bit address, the first byte would equal ‘11110 A9 A8 0’, where ‘A9’ and ‘A8’ are the two MSbs of the address. The sequence of events for 10-bit addressing is as follows, with steps 7 through 9 for the slave-transmitter: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Receive first (high) byte of address (bits SSPxIF, BF and UA are set on address match). Update the SSPxADD register with second (low) byte of address (clears bit UA and releases the SCLx line). Read the SSPxBUF register (clears bit, BF) and clear flag bit, SSPxIF. Receive second (low) byte of address (bits SSPxIF, BF and UA are set). Update the SSPxADD register with the first (high) byte of address. If match releases SCLx line, this will clear bit UA. Read the SSPxBUF register (clears bit BF) and clear flag bit SSPxIF. Receive Repeated Start condition. Receive first (high) byte of address (bits SSPxIF and BF are set). Read the SSPxBUF register (clears bit BF) and clear flag bit, SSPxIF. In this case, the SSPxSR register value is not loaded into the SSPxBUF, but bit SSPxIF is set. The BF bit is cleared by reading the SSPxBUF register, while bit SSPOV is cleared through software. The SCLx clock input must have a minimum high and low for proper operation. The high and low times of the I2C specification, as well as the requirement of the MSSP module, are shown in timing parameter 100 and parameter 101. DS39778B-page 238 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.3.2 Address Masking Modes Masking an address bit causes that bit to become a “don’t care”. When one address bit is masked, two addresses will be Acknowledged and cause an interrupt. It is possible to mask more than one address bit at a time, which greatly expands the number of addresses Acknowledged. The I2C Slave behaves the same way whether address masking is used or not. However, when address masking is used, the I2C slave can Acknowledge multiple addresses and cause interrupts. When this occurs, it is necessary to determine which address caused the interrupt by checking the SSPxBUF. The PIC18F87J11 Family of devices is capable of using two different Address Masking modes in I2C Slave operation: 5-Bit Address Masking and 7-Bit Address Masking. The Masking mode is selected at device configuration using the MSSPMSK Configuration bit. The default device configuration is 7-Bit Address Masking. Both Masking modes, in turn, support address masking of 7-bit and 10-bit addresses. The combination of Masking modes and addresses provide different ranges of Acknowledgable addresses for each combination. While both Masking modes function in roughly the same manner, the way they use address masks are different. 19.4.3.3 Acknowledge up to 31 addresses when using 7-bit addressing, or 63 addresses with 10-bit addressing (see Example 19-2). This Masking mode is selected when the MSSPMSK Configuration bit is programmed (‘0’). The address mask in this mode is stored in the SSPxCON2 register, which stops functioning as a control register in I2C Slave mode (Register 19-6). In 7-Bit Address Masking mode, address mask bits, ADMSK<5:1> (SSPxCON2<5:1>), mask the corresponding address bits in the SSPxADD register. For any ADMSK bits that are set (ADMSK<n> = 1), the corresponding address bit is ignored (SSPxADD<n> = x). For the module to issue an address Acknowledge, it is sufficient to match only on addresses that do not have an active address mask. In 10-Bit Address Masking mode, bits ADMSK<5:2> mask the corresponding address bits in the SSPxADD register. In addition, ADMSK1 simultaneously masks the two LSbs of the address (SSPxADD<1:0>). For any ADMSK bits that are active (ADMSK<n> = 1), the corresponding address bit is ignored (SPxADD<n> = x). Also note, that although in 10-Bit Address Masking mode, the upper address bits reuse part of the SSPxADD register bits. The address mask bits do not interact with those bits; they only affect the lower address bits. Note 1: ADMSK1 masks the two Least Significant bits of the address. 5-Bit Address Masking Mode As the name implies, 5-Bit Address Masking mode uses an address mask of up to 5 bits to create a range of addresses to be Acknowledged, using bits 5 through 1 of the incoming address. This allows the module to EXAMPLE 19-2: 2: The two Most Significant bits of the address are not affected by address masking. ADDRESS MASKING EXAMPLES IN 5-BIT MASKING MODE 7-Bit Addressing: SSPADD<7:1>= A0h (1010000) (SSPADD<0> is assumed to be 0) ADMSK<5:1> = 00111 Addresses Acknowledged: A0h, A2h, A4h, A6h, A8h, AAh, ACh, AEh 10-Bit Addressing: SSPADD<7:0> = A0h (10100000) (The two MSb of the address are ignored in this example, since they are not affected by masking) ADMSK<5:1> = 00111 Addresses Acknowledged: A0h, A1h, A2h, A3h, A4h, A5h, A6h, A7h, A8h, A9h, AAh, ABh, ACh, ADh, AEh, AFh © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 239 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.3.4 7-Bit Address Masking Mode Unlike 5-bit masking, 7-Bit Address Masking mode uses a mask of up to 8 bits (in 10-bit addressing) to define a range of addresses than can be Acknowledged, using the lowest bits of the incoming address. This allows the module to Acknowledge up to 127 different addresses with 7-bit addressing, or 255 with 10-bit addressing (see Example 19-3). This mode is the default configuration of the module, and is selected when MSSPMSK is unprogrammed (‘1’). The address mask for 7-Bit Address Masking mode is stored in the SSPxMSK register, instead of the SSPxCON2 register. SSPxMSK is a separate hardware register within the module, but it is not directly addressable. Instead, it shares an address in the SFR space with the SSPxADD register. To access the SSPxMSK register, it is necessary to select MSSP mode, ‘1001’ (SSPCON1<3:0> = 1001), and then read or write to the location of SSPxADD. To use 7-Bit Address Masking mode, it is necessary to initialize SSPxMSK with a value before selecting the I2C Slave Addressing mode. Thus, the required sequence of events is: 1. 2. 3. Setting or clearing mask bits in SSPxMSK behaves in the opposite manner of the ADMSK bits in 5-Bit Address Masking mode. That is, clearing a bit in SSPxMSK causes the corresponding address bit to be masked; setting the bit requires a match in that position. SSPxMSK resets to all ‘1’s upon any Reset condition and, therefore, has no effect on the standard MSSP operation until written with a mask value. With 7-bit addressing, SSPxMSK<7:1> bits mask the corresponding address bits in the SSPxADD register. For any SSPxMSK bits that are active (SSPxMSK<n> = 0), the corresponding SSPxADD address bit is ignored (SSPxADD<n> = x). For the module to issue an address Acknowledge, it is sufficient to match only on addresses that do not have an active address mask. With 10-bit addressing, SSPxMSK<7:0> bits mask the corresponding address bits in the SSPxADD register. For any SSPxMSK bits that are active (= 0), the corresponding SSPxADD address bit is ignored (SSPxADD<n> = x). Note: Select SSPxMSK Access mode (SSPxCON2<3:0> = 1001). Write the mask value to the appropriate SSPADD register address (FC8h for MSSP1, F6Eh for MSSP2). Set the appropriate I2C Slave mode (SSPxCON2<3:0> = 0111 for 10-bit addressing, 0110 for 7-bit addressing). EXAMPLE 19-3: The two Most Significant bits of the address are not affected by address masking. ADDRESS MASKING EXAMPLES IN 7-BIT MASKING MODE 7-Bit Addressing: SSPxADD<7:1> = 1010 000 SSPxMSK<7:1> = 1111 001 Addresses Acknowledged = A8h, A6h, A4h, A0h 10-Bit Addressing: SSPxADD<7:0> = 1010 0000 (The two MSb are ignored in this example since they are not affected) SSPxMSK<5:1> = 1111 0 Addresses Acknowledged = A8h, A6h, A4h, A0h DS39778B-page 240 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.3.5 Reception 19.4.3.6 When the R/W bit of the address byte is clear and an address match occurs, the R/W bit of the SSPxSTAT register is cleared. The received address is loaded into the SSPxBUF register and the SDAx line is held low (ACK). When the address byte overflow condition exists, then the no Acknowledge (ACK) pulse is given. An overflow condition is defined as either bit, BF (SSPxSTAT<0>), is set or bit, SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>), is set. An MSSP interrupt is generated for each data transfer byte. The interrupt flag bit, SSPxIF, must be cleared in software. The SSPxSTAT register is used to determine the status of the byte. If SEN is enabled (SSPxCON2<0> = 1), SCLx will be held low (clock stretch) following each data transfer. The clock must be released by setting bit, CKP (SSPxCON1<4>). See Section 19.4.4 “Clock Stretching” for more details. Transmission When the R/W bit of the incoming address byte is set and an address match occurs, the R/W bit of the SSPxSTAT register is set. The received address is loaded into the SSPxBUF register. The ACK pulse will be sent on the ninth bit and pin SCLx is held low regardless of SEN (see Section 19.4.4 “Clock Stretching” for more details). By stretching the clock, the master will be unable to assert another clock pulse until the slave is done preparing the transmit data. The transmit data must be loaded into the SSPxBUF register which also loads the SSPxSR register. Then, pin SCLx should be enabled by setting bit, CKP (SSPxCON1<4>). The eight data bits are shifted out on the falling edge of the SCLx input. This ensures that the SDAx signal is valid during the SCLx high time (Figure 19-10). The ACK pulse from the master-receiver is latched on the rising edge of the ninth SCLx input pulse. If the SDAx line is high (not ACK), then the data transfer is complete. In this case, when the ACK is latched by the slave, the slave logic is reset (resets the SSPxSTAT register) and the slave monitors for another occurrence of the Start bit. If the SDAx line was low (ACK), the next transmit data must be loaded into the SSPxBUF register. Again, pin SCLx must be enabled by setting bit, CKP. An MSSP interrupt is generated for each data transfer byte. The SSPxIF bit must be cleared in software and the SSPxSTAT register is used to determine the status of the byte. The SSPxIF bit is set on the falling edge of the ninth clock pulse. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 241 DS39778B-page 242 2 A6 Preliminary 3 4 A4 5 A3 Receiving Address A5 6 A2 (CKP does not reset to ‘0’ when SEN = 0) CKP (SSPxCON<4>) SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>) BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) SSPxIF (PIR1<3> or PIR3<7>) 1 SCLx S A7 7 A1 8 9 ACK R/W = 0 1 D7 3 4 D4 5 D3 Receiving Data D5 Cleared in software SSPxBUF is read 2 D6 6 D2 7 D1 8 D0 9 ACK 1 D7 2 D6 3 4 D4 5 D3 Receiving Data D5 6 D2 7 D1 8 D0 Bus master terminates transfer P SSPOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. 9 ACK FIGURE 19-8: SDAx PIC18F87J11 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 0 (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 2 A6 Preliminary Note 3 A5 4 X 5 A3 6 X 1 3 4 D4 Cleared in software SSPxBUF is read 2 D5 5 D3 6 D2 7 D1 8 D0 In this example, an address equal to A7.A6.A5.X.A3.X.X will be Acknowledged and cause an interrupt. 9 D6 x = Don’t care (i.e., address bit can either be a ‘1’ or a ‘0’). 8 D7 Receiving Data 2: 7 X ACK R/W = 0 1: (CKP does not reset to ‘0’ when SEN = 0) CKP (SSPxCON<4>) SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>) BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) SSPxIF (PIR1<3> or PIR3<7>) 1 SCLx S A7 Receiving Address 9 ACK 1 D7 2 D6 3 D5 4 D4 5 D3 Receiving Data 6 D2 7 D1 8 D0 Bus master terminates transfer P SSPOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. 9 ACK FIGURE 19-9: SDAx PIC18F87J11 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 0 AND ADMSK<5:1> = 01011 (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) DS39778B-page 243 DS39778B-page 244 2 Data in sampled 1 A6 Preliminary CKP (SSPxCON<4>) BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) SSPxIF (PIR1<3> or PIR3<7>) S A7 3 4 A4 5 A3 6 A2 Receiving Address A5 7 A1 8 R/W = 0 9 ACK 3 D5 4 5 D3 SSPxBUF is written in software 6 D2 Transmitting Data D4 Cleared in software 2 D6 CKP is set in software SCLx held low while CPU responds to SSPxIF 1 D7 7 8 D0 9 From SSPxIF ISR D1 ACK 1 D7 4 D4 5 D3 Cleared in software 3 D5 6 D2 CKP is set in software SSPxBUF is written in software 2 D6 7 8 D0 9 ACK From SSPxIF ISR D1 Transmitting Data P FIGURE 19-10: SCLx SDAx PIC18F87J11 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING (TRANSMISSION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 2 1 3 1 Preliminary 5 0 7 A8 8 UA is set indicating that the SSPxADD needs to be updated SSPxBUF is written with contents of SSPxSR 6 A9 9 2 X 4 5 A3 6 A2 4 5 6 Cleared in software 3 7 8 9 1 2 4 5 6 Cleared in software 3 D3 D2 Receive Data Byte D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with high byte of address 2 D3 D2 Note that the Most Significant bits of the address are not affected by the bit masking. 1 D6 D5 D4 3: 9 D7 x = Don’t care (i.e., address bit can either be a ‘1’ or a ‘0’). 8 X Receive Data Byte In this example, an address equal to A9.A8.A7.A6.A5.X.A3.A2.X.X will be Acknowledged and cause an interrupt. UA is set indicating that SSPxADD needs to be updated Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with low byte of address 7 X Cleared in software 3 A5 Dummy read of SSPxBUF to clear BF flag 1 A6 ACK 1: A7 Receive Second Byte of Address 2: (CKP does not reset to ‘0’ when SEN = 0) CKP (SSPxCON<4>) UA (SSPxSTAT<1>) SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>) BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) Note 4 1 Cleared in software SSPxIF (PIR1<3> or PIR3<7>) 1 SCLx S 1 ACK R/W = 0 Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place 7 8 D1 D0 9 P Bus master terminates transfer SSPOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. ACK FIGURE 19-11: SDAx Receive First Byte of Address Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place PIC18F87J11 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 0 AND ADMSK<5:1> = 01001 (RECEPTION, 10-BIT ADDRESS) DS39778B-page 245 DS39778B-page 246 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 0 Preliminary 7 A8 8 UA is set indicating that the SSPxADD needs to be updated SSPxBUF is written with contents of SSPxSR 6 A9 9 (CKP does not reset to ‘0’ when SEN = 0) CKP (SSPxCON<4>) UA (SSPxSTAT<1>) SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>) BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) Cleared in software SSPxIF (PIR1<3> or PIR3<7>) 1 SCLx S 1 ACK R/W = 0 A7 2 4 A4 5 A3 6 A2 8 9 A0 ACK UA is set indicating that SSPxADD needs to be updated Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with low byte of address 7 A1 Cleared in software 3 A5 Dummy read of SSPxBUF to clear BF flag 1 A6 Receive Second Byte of Address 1 D7 4 5 6 Cleared in software 3 D3 D2 7 8 9 1 2 4 5 6 Cleared in software 3 D3 D2 Receive Data Byte D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with high byte of address 2 D6 D5 D4 Receive Data Byte Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place 7 8 D1 D0 9 P Bus master terminates transfer SSPOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. ACK FIGURE 19-12: SDAx Receive First Byte of Address Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place PIC18F87J11 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 0 (RECEPTION, 10-BIT ADDRESS) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 2 3 1 4 1 Preliminary CKP (SSPxCON1<4>) UA (SSPxSTAT<1>) BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) 5 0 6 7 A9 A8 8 UA is set indicating that the SSPxADD needs to be updated SSPxBUF is written with contents of SSPxSR SSPxIF (PIR1<3> or PIR3<7>) 1 S SCLx 1 Receive First Byte of Address 1 9 ACK 1 3 4 5 Cleared in software 2 7 UA is set indicating that SSPxADD needs to be updated 8 A0 Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with low byte of address 6 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 Receive Second Byte of Address Dummy read of SSPxBUF to clear BF flag A7 9 ACK 2 3 1 4 1 Cleared in software 1 1 5 0 6 8 9 ACK R/W = 1 1 2 4 5 6 CKP is set in software 9 P Completion of data transmission clears BF flag 8 ACK Bus master terminates transfer CKP is automatically cleared in hardware, holding SCLx low 7 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Cleared in software 3 D7 D6 D5 Transmitting Data Byte Clock is held low until CKP is set to ‘1’ Write of SSPxBUF BF flag is clear initiates transmit at the end of the third address sequence 7 A9 A8 Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with high byte of address. Dummy read of SSPxBUF to clear BF flag Sr 1 Receive First Byte of Address Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place FIGURE 19-13: SDAx R/W = 0 Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place PIC18F87J11 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING (TRANSMISSION, 10-BIT ADDRESS) DS39778B-page 247 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.4 CLOCK STRETCHING 19.4.4.3 Both 7-Bit and 10-Bit Slave modes implement automatic clock stretching during a transmit sequence. The SEN bit (SSPxCON2<0>) allows clock stretching to be enabled during receives. Setting SEN will cause the SCLx pin to be held low at the end of each data receive sequence. 19.4.4.1 Clock Stretching for 7-Bit Slave Receive Mode (SEN = 1) In 7-Bit Slave Receive mode, on the falling edge of the ninth clock at the end of the ACK sequence, if the BF bit is set, the CKP bit in the SSPxCON1 register is automatically cleared, forcing the SCLx output to be held low. The CKP bit being cleared to ‘0’ will assert the SCLx line low. The CKP bit must be set in the user’s ISR before reception is allowed to continue. By holding the SCLx line low, the user has time to service the ISR and read the contents of the SSPxBUF before the master device can initiate another receive sequence. This will prevent buffer overruns from occurring (see Figure 19-15). Note 1: If the user reads the contents of the SSPxBUF before the falling edge of the ninth clock, thus clearing the BF bit, the CKP bit will not be cleared and clock stretching will not occur. 2: The CKP bit can be set in software regardless of the state of the BF bit. The user should be careful to clear the BF bit in the ISR before the next receive sequence in order to prevent an overflow condition. 19.4.4.2 Clock Stretching for 7-Bit Slave Transmit Mode The 7-Bit Slave Transmit mode implements clock stretching by clearing the CKP bit after the falling edge of the ninth clock if the BF bit is clear. This occurs regardless of the state of the SEN bit. The user’s ISR must set the CKP bit before transmission is allowed to continue. By holding the SCLx line low, the user has time to service the ISR and load the contents of the SSPxBUF before the master device can initiate another transmit sequence (see Figure 19-10). Note 1: If the user loads the contents of SSPxBUF, setting the BF bit before the falling edge of the ninth clock, the CKP bit will not be cleared and clock stretching will not occur. 2: The CKP bit can be set in software regardless of the state of the BF bit. 19.4.4.4 Clock Stretching for 10-Bit Slave Transmit Mode In 10-Bit Slave Transmit mode, clock stretching is controlled during the first two address sequences by the state of the UA bit, just as it is in 10-Bit Slave Receive mode. The first two addresses are followed by a third address sequence, which contains the high-order bits of the 10-bit address and the R/W bit set to ‘1’. After the third address sequence is performed, the UA bit is not set, the module is now configured in Transmit mode and clock stretching is controlled by the BF flag as in 7-Bit Slave Transmit mode (see Figure 19-13). Clock Stretching for 10-Bit Slave Receive Mode (SEN = 1) In 10-Bit Slave Receive mode, during the address sequence, clock stretching automatically takes place but CKP is not cleared. During this time, if the UA bit is set after the ninth clock, clock stretching is initiated. The UA bit is set after receiving the upper byte of the 10-bit address and following the receive of the second byte of the 10-bit address with the R/W bit cleared to ‘0’. The release of the clock line occurs upon updating SSPxADD. Clock stretching will occur on each data receive sequence as described in 7-bit mode. Note: If the user polls the UA bit and clears it by updating the SSPxADD register before the falling edge of the ninth clock occurs, and if the user hasn’t cleared the BF bit by reading the SSPxBUF register before that time, then the CKP bit will still NOT be asserted low. Clock stretching on the basis of the state of the BF bit only occurs during a data sequence, not an address sequence. DS39778B-page 248 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.4.5 Clock Synchronization and the CKP bit When the CKP bit is cleared, the SCLx output is forced to ‘0’. However, clearing the CKP bit will not assert the SCLx output low until the SCLx output is already sampled low. Therefore, the CKP bit will not assert the SCLx line until an external I2C master device has FIGURE 19-14: already asserted the SCLx line. The SCLx output will remain low until the CKP bit is set and all other devices on the I2C bus have deasserted SCLx. This ensures that a write to the CKP bit will not violate the minimum high time requirement for SCLx (see Figure 19-14). CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION TIMING Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 SDAx DX – 1 DX SCLx CKP Master device asserts clock Master device deasserts clock WR SSPxCON1 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 249 DS39778B-page 250 2 A6 Preliminary CKP (SSPxCON<4>) SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>) BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) SSPxIF (PIR1<3> or PIR3<7>) 1 SCLx S A7 3 4 A4 5 A3 6 A2 Receiving Address A5 7 A1 8 9 ACK R/W = 0 3 4 D4 5 D3 Receiving Data D5 Cleared in software 2 D6 If BF is cleared prior to the falling edge of the 9th clock, CKP will not be reset to ‘0’ and no clock stretching will occur SSPxBUF is read 1 D7 6 D2 7 D1 9 ACK 1 D7 BF is set after falling edge of the 9th clock, CKP is reset to ‘0’ and clock stretching occurs 8 D0 3 4 D4 5 D3 Receiving Data D5 CKP written to ‘1’ in software 2 D6 Clock is held low until CKP is set to ‘1’ 6 D2 7 D1 8 D0 Bus master terminates transfer P SSPOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. 9 ACK Clock is not held low because ACK = 1 FIGURE 19-15: SDAx Clock is not held low because buffer full bit is clear prior to falling edge of 9th clock PIC18F87J11 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 1 (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 0 Preliminary CKP (SSPxCON<4>) UA (SSPxSTAT<1>) SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>) BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) 6 7 A9 A8 8 UA is set indicating that the SSPxADD needs to be updated SSPxBUF is written with contents of SSPxSR Cleared in software SSPxIF (PIR1<3> or PIR3<7>) 1 SCLx S 1 9 ACK R/W = 0 A7 2 4 A4 5 A3 6 A2 Cleared in software 3 A5 7 A1 8 A0 Note: An update of the SSPxADD register before the falling edge of the ninth clock will have no effect on UA and UA will remain set. UA is set indicating that SSPxADD needs to be updated Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with low byte of address after falling edge of ninth clock Dummy read of SSPxBUF to clear BF flag 1 A6 Receive Second Byte of Address 9 ACK 2 4 5 6 Cleared in software 3 D3 D2 7 8 1 4 5 6 Cleared in software 3 CKP written to ‘1’ in software 2 D3 D2 Receive Data Byte D7 D6 D5 D4 Note: An update of the SSPxADD register before the falling edge of the ninth clock will have no effect on UA and UA will remain set. 9 ACK Clock is held low until CKP is set to ‘1’ D1 D0 Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with high byte of address after falling edge of ninth clock Dummy read of SSPxBUF to clear BF flag 1 D7 D6 D5 D4 Receive Data Byte Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place 7 8 9 Bus master terminates transfer P SSPOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. D1 D0 ACK Clock is not held low because ACK = 1 FIGURE 19-16: SDAx Receive First Byte of Address Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place PIC18F87J11 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 1 (RECEPTION, 10-BIT ADDRESS) DS39778B-page 251 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.5 GENERAL CALL ADDRESS SUPPORT If the general call address matches, the SSPxSR is transferred to the SSPxBUF, the BF flag bit is set (eighth bit), and on the falling edge of the ninth bit (ACK bit), the SSPxIF interrupt flag bit is set. The addressing procedure for the I2C bus is such that the first byte after the Start condition usually determines which device will be the slave addressed by the master. The exception is the general call address which can address all devices. When this address is used, all devices should, in theory, respond with an Acknowledge. When the interrupt is serviced, the source for the interrupt can be checked by reading the contents of the SSPxBUF. The value can be used to determine if the address was device-specific or a general call address. In 10-Bit Addressing mode, the SSPxADD is required to be updated for the second half of the address to match and the UA bit is set (SSPxSTAT<1>). If the general call address is sampled when the GCEN bit is set, while the slave is configured in 10-Bit Addressing mode, then the second half of the address is not necessary, the UA bit will not be set and the slave will begin receiving data after the Acknowledge (Figure 19-17). The general call address is one of eight addresses reserved for specific purposes by the I2C protocol. It consists of all ‘0’s with R/W = 0. The general call address is recognized when the General Call Enable bit, GCEN, is enabled (SSPxCON2<7> set). Following a Start bit detect, 8 bits are shifted into the SSPxSR and the address is compared against the SSPxADD. It is also compared to the general call address and fixed in hardware. FIGURE 19-17: SLAVE MODE GENERAL CALL ADDRESS SEQUENCE (7 OR 10-BIT ADDRESSING MODE) Address is Compared to General Call Address after ACK, set interrupt Receiving Data R/W = 0 General Call Address SDAx ACK D7 ACK D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SCLx S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 9 SSPxIF BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) Cleared in software SSPxBUF is read SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>) ‘0’ GCEN (SSPxCON2<7>) ‘1’ DS39778B-page 252 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY MASTER MODE Note: Master mode is enabled by setting and clearing the appropriate SSPM bits in SSPxCON1 and by setting the SSPEN bit. In Master mode, the SCLx and SDAx lines are manipulated by the MSSP hardware if the TRIS bits are set. Master mode of operation is supported by interrupt generation on the detection of the Start and Stop conditions. The Stop (P) and Start (S) bits are cleared from a Reset or when the MSSP module is disabled. Control of the I 2C bus may be taken when the P bit is set, or the bus is Idle, with both the S and P bits clear. The following events will cause the MSSP Interrupt Flag bit, SSPxIF, to be set (and MSSP interrupt, if enabled): In Firmware Controlled Master mode, user code conducts all I 2C bus operations based on Start and Stop bit conditions. • • • • • Once Master mode is enabled, the user has six options. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Assert a Start condition on SDAx and SCLx. Assert a Repeated Start condition on SDAx and SCLx. Write to the SSPxBUF register initiating transmission of data/address. Configure the I2C port to receive data. Generate an Acknowledge condition at the end of a received byte of data. Generate a Stop condition on SDAx and SCLx. FIGURE 19-18: The MSSP module, when configured in I2C Master mode, does not allow queueing of events. For instance, the user is not allowed to initiate a Start condition and immediately write the SSPxBUF register to initiate transmission before the Start condition is complete. In this case, the SSPxBUF will not be written to and the WCOL bit will be set, indicating that a write to the SSPxBUF did not occur. Start condition Stop condition Data transfer byte transmitted/received Acknowledge transmitted Repeated Start MSSP BLOCK DIAGRAM (I2C™ MASTER MODE) Internal Data Bus Read SSPM3:SSPM0 SSPxADD<6:0> Write SSPxBUF Baud Rate Generator Shift Clock SDAx SDAx In SCLx In Bus Collision © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. LSb Start bit, Stop bit, Acknowledge Generate Start bit Detect Stop bit Detect Write Collision Detect Clock Arbitration State Counter for End of XMIT/RCV Preliminary Clock Cntl SCLx Receive Enable SSPxSR MSb Clock Arbitrate/WCOL Detect (hold off clock source) 19.4.6 Set/Reset S, P (SSPxSTAT), WCOL (SSPxCON1); Set SSPxIF, BCLxIF; Reset ACKSTAT, PEN (SSPxCON2) DS39778B-page 253 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.6.1 I2C Master Mode Operation A typical transmit sequence would go as follows: The master device generates all of the serial clock pulses and the Start and Stop conditions. A transfer is ended with a Stop condition or with a Repeated Start condition. Since the Repeated Start condition is also the beginning of the next serial transfer, the I2C bus will not be released. In Master Transmitter mode, serial data is output through SDAx while SCLx outputs the serial clock. The first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the receiving device (7 bits) and the Read/Write (R/W) bit. In this case, the R/W bit will be logic ‘0’. Serial data is transmitted 8 bits at a time. After each byte is transmitted, an Acknowledge bit is received. Start and Stop conditions are output to indicate the beginning and the end of a serial transfer. In Master Receive mode, the first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the transmitting device (7 bits) and the R/W bit. In this case, the R/W bit will be logic ‘1’. Thus, the first byte transmitted is a 7-bit slave address, followed by a ‘1’ to indicate the receive bit. Serial data is received via SDAx, while SCLx outputs the serial clock. Serial data is received 8 bits at a time. After each byte is received, an Acknowledge bit is transmitted. Start and Stop conditions indicate the beginning and end of transmission. The Baud Rate Generator, used for the SPI mode operation, is used to set the SCLx clock frequency for either 100 kHz, 400 kHz or 1 MHz I2C operation. See Section 19.4.7 “Baud Rate” for more details. DS39778B-page 254 1. The user generates a Start condition by setting the Start Enable bit, SEN (SSPxCON2<0>). 2. SSPxIF is set. The MSSP module will wait the required start time before any other operation takes place. 3. The user loads the SSPxBUF with the slave address to transmit. 4. Address is shifted out the SDAx pin until all 8 bits are transmitted. 5. The MSSP module shifts in the ACK bit from the slave device and writes its value into the SSPxCON2 register (SSPxCON2<6>). 6. The MSSP module generates an interrupt at the end of the ninth clock cycle by setting the SSPxIF bit. 7. The user loads the SSPxBUF with eight bits of data. 8. Data is shifted out the SDAx pin until all 8 bits are transmitted. 9. The MSSP module shifts in the ACK bit from the slave device and writes its value into the SSPxCON2 register (SSPxCON2<6>). 10. The MSSP module generates an interrupt at the end of the ninth clock cycle by setting the SSPxIF bit. 11. The user generates a Stop condition by setting the Stop Enable bit, PEN (SSPxCON2<2>). 12. Interrupt is generated once the Stop condition is complete. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.7 BAUD RATE 19.4.7.1 2 In I C Master mode, the Baud Rate Generator (BRG) reload value is placed in the lower 7 bits of the SSPxADD register (Figure 19-19). When a write occurs to SSPxBUF, the Baud Rate Generator will automatically begin counting. The BRG counts down to 0 and stops until another reload has taken place. The BRG count is decremented twice per instruction cycle (TCY) on the Q2 and Q4 clocks. In I2C Master mode, the BRG is reloaded automatically. Baud Rate and Module Interdependence Because MSSP1 and MSSP2 are independent, they can operate simultaneously in I2C Master mode at different baud rates. This is done by using different BRG reload values for each module. Because this mode derives its basic clock source from the system clock, any changes to the clock will affect both modules in the same proportion. It may be possible to change one or both baud rates back to a previous value by changing the BRG reload value. Once the given operation is complete (i.e., transmission of the last data bit is followed by ACK), the internal clock will automatically stop counting and the SCLx pin will remain in its last state. Table 19-3 demonstrates clock rates based on instruction cycles and the BRG value loaded into SSPxADD. FIGURE 19-19: BAUD RATE GENERATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM SSPM3:SSPM0 SSPM3:SSPM0 Reload SCLx Control SSPxADD<6:0> Reload CLKO BRG Down Counter FOSC/4 I2C™ CLOCK RATE w/BRG TABLE 19-3: FOSC FCY FCY * 2 BRG Value FSCL (2 Rollovers of BRG) 40 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz 18h 400 kHz(1) 40 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz 1Fh 312.5 kHz 40 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz 63h 100 kHz 16 MHz 4 MHz 8 MHz 09h 400 kHz(1) 16 MHz 4 MHz 8 MHz 0Ch 308 kHz 16 MHz 4 MHz 8 MHz 27h 100 kHz 4 MHz 1 MHz 2 MHz 02h 333 kHz(1) 4 MHz 1 MHz 2 MHz 09h 100 kHz 1 MHz 2 MHz 00h 1 MHz(1) 4 MHz Note 1: 2 2 The I C interface does not conform to the 400 kHz I C specification (which applies to rates greater than 100 kHz) in all details, but may be used with care where higher rates are required by the application. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 255 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.7.2 Clock Arbitration Clock arbitration occurs when the master, during any receive, transmit or Repeated Start/Stop condition, deasserts the SCLx pin (SCLx allowed to float high). When the SCLx pin is allowed to float high, the Baud Rate Generator (BRG) is suspended from counting until the SCLx pin is actually sampled high. When the FIGURE 19-20: SCLx pin is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPxADD<6:0> and begins counting. This ensures that the SCLx high time will always be at least one BRG rollover count in the event that the clock is held low by an external device (Figure 19-20). BAUD RATE GENERATOR TIMING WITH CLOCK ARBITRATION SDAx DX DX – 1 SCLx deasserted but slave holds SCLx low (clock arbitration) SCLx allowed to transition high SCLx BRG decrements on Q2 and Q4 cycles BRG Value 03h 02h 01h 00h (hold off) 03h 02h SCLx is sampled high, reload takes place and BRG starts its count BRG Reload DS39778B-page 256 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.8 I2C MASTER MODE START CONDITION TIMING Note: To initiate a Start condition, the user sets the Start Enable bit, SEN (SSPxCON2<0>). If the SDAx and SCLx pins are sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPxADD<6:0> and starts its count. If SCLx and SDAx are both sampled high when the Baud Rate Generator times out (TBRG), the SDAx pin is driven low. The action of the SDAx being driven low while SCLx is high is the Start condition and causes the S bit (SSPxSTAT<3>) to be set. Following this, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPxADD<6:0> and resumes its count. When the Baud Rate Generator times out (TBRG), the SEN bit (SSPxCON2<0>) will be automatically cleared by hardware. The Baud Rate Generator is suspended, leaving the SDAx line held low and the Start condition is complete. FIGURE 19-21: 19.4.8.1 If, at the beginning of the Start condition, the SDAx and SCLx pins are already sampled low or if during the Start condition, the SCLx line is sampled low before the SDAx line is driven low, a bus collision occurs, the Bus Collision Interrupt Flag, BCLxIF, is set, the Start condition is aborted and the I2C module is reset into its Idle state. WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a Start sequence is in progress, the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn’t occur). Note: Because queueing of events is not allowed, writing to the lower 5 bits of SSPxCON2 is disabled until the Start condition is complete. FIRST START BIT TIMING Set S bit (SSPxSTAT<3>) Write to SEN bit occurs here SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 TBRG At completion of Start bit, hardware clears SEN bit and sets SSPxIF bit TBRG Write to SSPxBUF occurs here 1st bit SDAx 2nd bit TBRG SCLx TBRG S © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 257 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.9 I2C MASTER MODE REPEATED START CONDITION TIMING Note 1: If RSEN is programmed while any other event is in progress, it will not take effect. A Repeated Start condition occurs when the RSEN bit (SSPxCON2<1>) is programmed high and the I2C logic module is in the Idle state. When the RSEN bit is set, the SCLx pin is asserted low. When the SCLx pin is sampled low, the Baud Rate Generator is loaded with the contents of SSPxADD<5:0> and begins counting. The SDAx pin is released (brought high) for one Baud Rate Generator count (TBRG). When the Baud Rate Generator times out and if SDAx is sampled high, the SCLx pin will be deasserted (brought high). When SCLx is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPxADD<6:0> and begins counting. SDAx and SCLx must be sampled high for one TBRG. This action is then followed by assertion of the SDAx pin (SDAx = 0) for one TBRG while SCLx is high. Following this, the RSEN bit (SSPxCON2<1>) will be automatically cleared and the Baud Rate Generator will not be reloaded, leaving the SDAx pin held low. As soon as a Start condition is detected on the SDAx and SCLx pins, the S bit (SSPxSTAT<3>) will be set. The SSPxIF bit will not be set until the Baud Rate Generator has timed out. 2: A bus collision during the Repeated Start condition occurs if: • SDAx is sampled low when SCLx goes from low-to-high. • SCLx goes low before SDAx is asserted low. This may indicate that another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘1’. Immediately following the SSPxIF bit getting set, the user may write the SSPxBUF with the 7-bit address in 7-bit mode, or the default first address in 10-bit mode. After the first eight bits are transmitted and an ACK is received, the user may then transmit an additional eight bits of address (10-bit mode) or eight bits of data (7-bit mode). 19.4.9.1 If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a Repeated Start sequence is in progress, the WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn’t occur). Note: FIGURE 19-22: WCOL Status Flag Because queueing of events is not allowed, writing of the lower 5 bits of SSPxCON2 is disabled until the Repeated Start condition is complete. REPEATED START CONDITION WAVEFORM S bit set by hardware Write to SSPxCON2 occurs here: SDAx = 1, SCLx (no change). SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 TBRG TBRG At completion of Start bit, hardware clears RSEN bit and sets SSPxIF TBRG 1st bit SDAx RSEN bit set by hardware on falling edge of ninth clock, end of XMIT Write to SSPxBUF occurs here TBRG SCLx TBRG Sr = Repeated Start DS39778B-page 258 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.10 I2C MASTER MODE TRANSMISSION Transmission of a data byte, a 7-bit address or the other half of a 10-bit address, is accomplished by simply writing a value to the SSPxBUF register. This action will set the Buffer Full flag bit, BF, and allow the Baud Rate Generator to begin counting and start the next transmission. Each bit of address/data will be shifted out onto the SDAx pin after the falling edge of SCLx is asserted (see data hold time specification parameter 106). SCLx is held low for one Baud Rate Generator rollover count (TBRG). Data should be valid before SCLx is released high (see data setup time specification parameter 107). When the SCLx pin is released high, it is held that way for TBRG. The data on the SDAx pin must remain stable for that duration and some hold time after the next falling edge of SCLx. After the eighth bit is shifted out (the falling edge of the eighth clock), the BF flag is cleared and the master releases SDAx. This allows the slave device being addressed to respond with an ACK bit during the ninth bit time if an address match occurred, or if data was received properly. The status of ACK is written into the ACKDT bit on the falling edge of the ninth clock. If the master receives an Acknowledge, the Acknowledge Status bit, ACKSTAT, is cleared; if not, the bit is set. After the ninth clock, the SSPxIF bit is set and the master clock (Baud Rate Generator) is suspended until the next data byte is loaded into the SSPxBUF, leaving SCLx low and SDAx unchanged (Figure 19-23). After the write to the SSPxBUF, each bit of the address will be shifted out on the falling edge of SCLx until all seven address bits and the R/W bit are completed. On the falling edge of the eighth clock, the master will deassert the SDAx pin, allowing the slave to respond with an Acknowledge. On the falling edge of the ninth clock, the master will sample the SDAx pin to see if the address was recognized by a slave. The status of the ACK bit is loaded into the ACKSTAT status bit (SSPxCON2<6>). Following the falling edge of the ninth clock transmission of the address, the SSPxIF flag is set, the BF flag is cleared and the Baud Rate Generator is turned off until another write to the SSPxBUF takes place, holding SCLx low and allowing SDAx to float. 19.4.10.1 19.4.10.3 ACKSTAT Status Flag In Transmit mode, the ACKSTAT bit (SSPxCON2<6>) is cleared when the slave has sent an Acknowledge (ACK = 0) and is set when the slave does not Acknowledge (ACK = 1). A slave sends an Acknowledge when it has recognized its address (including a general call), or when the slave has properly received its data. 19.4.11 I2C MASTER MODE RECEPTION Master mode reception is enabled by programming the Receive Enable bit, RCEN (SSPxCON2<3>). Note: The MSSP module must be in an inactive state before the RCEN bit is set or the RCEN bit will be disregarded. The Baud Rate Generator begins counting and on each rollover, the state of the SCLx pin changes (high-to-low/low-to-high) and data is shifted into the SSPxSR. After the falling edge of the eighth clock, the receive enable flag is automatically cleared, the contents of the SSPxSR are loaded into the SSPxBUF, the BF flag bit is set, the SSPxIF flag bit is set and the Baud Rate Generator is suspended from counting, holding SCLx low. The MSSP is now in Idle state awaiting the next command. When the buffer is read by the CPU, the BF flag bit is automatically cleared. The user can then send an Acknowledge bit at the end of reception by setting the Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit, ACKEN (SSPxCON2<4>). 19.4.11.1 BF Status Flag In receive operation, the BF bit is set when an address or data byte is loaded into SSPxBUF from SSPxSR. It is cleared when the SSPxBUF register is read. 19.4.11.2 SSPOV Status Flag In receive operation, the SSPOV bit is set when 8 bits are received into the SSPxSR and the BF flag bit is already set from a previous reception. 19.4.11.3 BF Status Flag In Transmit mode, the BF bit (SSPxSTAT<0>) is set when the CPU writes to SSPxBUF and is cleared when all 8 bits are shifted out. 19.4.10.2 The user should verify that the WCOL bit is clear after each write to SSPxBUF to ensure the transfer is correct. In all cases, WCOL must be cleared in software. WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a receive is already in progress (i.e., SSPxSR is still shifting in a data byte), the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn’t occur). WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a transmit is already in progress (i.e., SSPxSR is still shifting out a data byte), the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn’t occur) after 2 TCY after the SSPxBUF write. If SSPxBUF is rewritten within 2 TCY, the WCOL bit is set and SSPxBUF is updated. This may result in a corrupted transfer. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 259 DS39778B-page 260 S Preliminary R/W PEN SEN BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) SSPxIF SCLx SDAx A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 3 4 5 Cleared in software 2 6 7 8 After Start condition, SEN cleared by hardware SSPxBUF written 1 9 D7 1 SCLx held low while CPU responds to SSPxIF ACK = 0 R/W = 0 SSPxBUF written with 7-bit address and R/W, start transmit A7 Transmit Address to Slave 3 D5 4 D4 5 D3 6 D2 7 D1 8 D0 SSPxBUF is written in software Cleared in software service routine from MSSP interrupt 2 D6 Transmitting Data or Second Half of 10-bit Address P Cleared in software 9 ACK From slave, clear ACKSTAT bit (SSPxCON2<6>) ACKSTAT in SSPxCON2 = 1 FIGURE 19-23: SEN = 0 Write SSPxCON2<0> (SEN = 1), Start condition begins PIC18F87J11 FAMILY I 2C™ MASTER MODE WAVEFORM (TRANSMISSION, 7 OR 10-BIT ADDRESS) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. S Preliminary ACKEN SSPOV BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1, while CPU responds to SSPxIF SSPxIF SCLx SDAx 1 A7 2 4 5 6 Cleared in software 3 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 Transmit Address to Slave 7 A1 8 9 R/W = 0 ACK Receiving Data from Slave 2 3 5 6 7 8 D0 9 ACK Receiving Data from Slave 2 3 4 5 6 7 Cleared in software Set SSPxIF interrupt at end of Acknowledge sequence Data shifted in on falling edge of CLK 1 Cleared in software Set SSPxIF at end of receive 9 ACK is not sent ACK Bus master terminates transfer Set P bit (SSPxSTAT<4>) and SSPxIF Set SSPxIF interrupt at end of Acknowledge sequence P PEN bit = 1 written here SSPOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full 8 D0 RCEN cleared automatically Set ACKEN, start Acknowledge sequence, SDAx = ACKDT = 1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 Last bit is shifted into SSPxSR and contents are unloaded into SSPxBUF Cleared in software Set SSPxIF interrupt at end of receive 4 Cleared in software 1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 RCEN = 1, start next receive ACK from master, SDAx = ACKDT = 0 FIGURE 19-24: Master configured as a receiver by programming SSPxCON2<3> (RCEN = 1) SEN = 0 Write to SSPxBUF occurs here, RCEN cleared ACK from Slave automatically start XMIT Write to SSPxCON2<0> (SEN = 1), begin Start condition Write to SSPxCON2<4> to start Acknowledge sequence, SDAx = ACKDT (SSPxCON2<5>) = 0 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY I 2C™ MASTER MODE WAVEFORM (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) DS39778B-page 261 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.12 ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE TIMING 19.4.13 A Stop bit is asserted on the SDAx pin at the end of a receive/transmit by setting the Stop Sequence Enable bit, PEN (SSPxCON2<2>). At the end of a receive/transmit, the SCLx line is held low after the falling edge of the ninth clock. When the PEN bit is set, the master will assert the SDAx line low. When the SDAx line is sampled low, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded and counts down to 0. When the Baud Rate Generator times out, the SCLx pin will be brought high and one TBRG (Baud Rate Generator rollover count) later, the SDAx pin will be deasserted. When the SDAx pin is sampled high while SCLx is high, the P bit (SSPxSTAT<4>) is set. A TBRG later, the PEN bit is cleared and the SSPxIF bit is set (Figure 19-26). An Acknowledge sequence is enabled by setting the Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit, ACKEN (SSPxCON2<4>). When this bit is set, the SCLx pin is pulled low and the contents of the Acknowledge data bit are presented on the SDAx pin. If the user wishes to generate an Acknowledge, then the ACKDT bit should be cleared. If not, the user should set the ACKDT bit before starting an Acknowledge sequence. The Baud Rate Generator then counts for one rollover period (TBRG) and the SCLx pin is deasserted (pulled high). When the SCLx pin is sampled high (clock arbitration), the Baud Rate Generator counts for TBRG; the SCLx pin is then pulled low. Following this, the ACKEN bit is automatically cleared, the Baud Rate Generator is turned off and the MSSP module then goes into an inactive state (Figure 19-25). 19.4.12.1 19.4.13.1 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a Stop sequence is in progress, then the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn’t occur). WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPxBUF when an Acknowledge sequence is in progress, then WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write doesn’t occur). FIGURE 19-25: STOP CONDITION TIMING ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE WAVEFORM Acknowledge sequence starts here, write to SSPxCON2, ACKEN = 1, ACKDT = 0 ACKEN automatically cleared TBRG TBRG SDAx D0 SCLx 8 ACK 9 SSPxIF SSPxIF set at the end of receive Cleared in software Cleared in software SSPxIF set at the end of Acknowledge sequence Note: TBRG = one Baud Rate Generator period. FIGURE 19-26: STOP CONDITION RECEIVE OR TRANSMIT MODE SCLx = 1 for TBRG, followed by SDAx = 1 for TBRG after SDAx sampled high. P bit (SSPxSTAT<4>) is set Write to SSPxCON2, set PEN PEN bit (SSPxCON2<2>) is cleared by hardware and the SSPxIF bit is set Falling edge of 9th clock TBRG SCLx SDAx ACK P TBRG TBRG TBRG SCLx brought high after TBRG SDAx asserted low before rising edge of clock to set up Stop condition Note: TBRG = one Baud Rate Generator period. DS39778B-page 262 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.14 SLEEP OPERATION 19.4.17 2 While in Sleep mode, the I C module can receive addresses or data and when an address match or complete byte transfer occurs, wake the processor from Sleep (if the MSSP interrupt is enabled). 19.4.15 EFFECTS OF A RESET A Reset disables the MSSP module and terminates the current transfer. 19.4.16 MULTI-MASTER MODE In Multi-Master mode, the interrupt generation on the detection of the Start and Stop conditions allows the determination of when the bus is free. The Stop (P) and Start (S) bits are cleared from a Reset or when the MSSP module is disabled. Control of the I 2C bus may be taken when the P bit (SSPxSTAT<4>) is set, or the bus is Idle, with both the S and P bits clear. When the bus is busy, enabling the MSSP interrupt will generate the interrupt when the Stop condition occurs. In multi-master operation, the SDAx line must be monitored for arbitration to see if the signal level is the expected output level. This check is performed in hardware with the result placed in the BCLxIF bit. The states where arbitration can be lost are: • • • • • Address Transfer Data Transfer A Start Condition A Repeated Start Condition An Acknowledge Condition MULTI -MASTER COMMUNICATION, BUS COLLISION AND BUS ARBITRATION Multi-Master mode support is achieved by bus arbitration. When the master outputs address/data bits onto the SDAx pin, arbitration takes place when the master outputs a ‘1’ on SDAx, by letting SDAx float high, and another master asserts a ‘0’. When the SCLx pin floats high, data should be stable. If the expected data on SDAx is a ‘1’ and the data sampled on the SDAx pin = 0, then a bus collision has taken place. The master will set the Bus Collision Interrupt Flag, BCLxIF and reset the I2C port to its Idle state (Figure 19-27). If a transmit was in progress when the bus collision occurred, the transmission is halted, the BF flag is cleared, the SDAx and SCLx lines are deasserted and the SSPxBUF can be written to. When the user services the bus collision Interrupt Service Routine and if the I2C bus is free, the user can resume communication by asserting a Start condition. If a Start, Repeated Start, Stop or Acknowledge condition was in progress when the bus collision occurred, the condition is aborted, the SDAx and SCLx lines are deasserted and the respective control bits in the SSPxCON2 register are cleared. When the user services the bus collision Interrupt Service Routine, and if the I2C bus is free, the user can resume communication by asserting a Start condition. The master will continue to monitor the SDAx and SCLx pins. If a Stop condition occurs, the SSPxIF bit will be set. A write to the SSPxBUF will start the transmission of data at the first data bit regardless of where the transmitter left off when the bus collision occurred. In Multi-Master mode, the interrupt generation on the detection of Start and Stop conditions allows the determination of when the bus is free. Control of the I2C bus can be taken when the P bit is set in the SSPxSTAT register, or the bus is Idle and the S and P bits are cleared. FIGURE 19-27: BUS COLLISION TIMING FOR TRANSMIT AND ACKNOWLEDGE Data changes while SCLx = 0 SDAx line pulled low by another source SDAx released by master Sample SDAx. While SCLx is high, data doesn’t match what is driven by the master; bus collision has occurred. SDAx SCLx Set bus collision interrupt (BCLxIF) BCLxIF © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 263 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.17.1 Bus Collision During a Start Condition During a Start condition, a bus collision occurs if: a) b) SDAx or SCLx is sampled low at the beginning of the Start condition (Figure 19-28). SCLx is sampled low before SDAx is asserted low (Figure 19-29). During a Start condition, both the SDAx and the SCLx pins are monitored. If the SDAx pin is sampled low during this count, the BRG is reset and the SDAx line is asserted early (Figure 19-30). If, however, a ‘1’ is sampled on the SDAx pin, the SDAx pin is asserted low at the end of the BRG count. The Baud Rate Generator is then reloaded and counts down to 0. If the SCLx pin is sampled as ‘0’ during this time, a bus collision does not occur. At the end of the BRG count, the SCLx pin is asserted low. Note: If the SDAx pin is already low, or the SCLx pin is already low, then all of the following occur: • the Start condition is aborted, • the BCLxIF flag is set and • the MSSP module is reset to its inactive state (Figure 19-28) The Start condition begins with the SDAx and SCLx pins deasserted. When the SDAx pin is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is loaded from SSPxADD<6:0> and counts down to 0. If the SCLx pin is sampled low while SDAx is high, a bus collision occurs because it is assumed that another master is attempting to drive a data ‘1’ during the Start condition. FIGURE 19-28: The reason that bus collision is not a factor during a Start condition is that no two bus masters can assert a Start condition at the exact same time. Therefore, one master will always assert SDAx before the other. This condition does not cause a bus collision because the two masters must be allowed to arbitrate the first address following the Start condition. If the address is the same, arbitration must be allowed to continue into the data portion, Repeated Start or Stop conditions. BUS COLLISION DURING START CONDITION (SDAx ONLY) SDAx goes low before the SEN bit is set. Set BCLxIF, S bit and SSPxIF set because SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1. SDAx SCLx Set SEN, enable Start condition if SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 SEN cleared automatically because of bus collision. MSSP module reset into Idle state. SEN BCLxIF SDAx sampled low before Start condition. Set BCLxIF. S bit and SSPxIF set because SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1. SSPxIF and BCLxIF are cleared in software S SSPxIF SSPxIF and BCLxIF are cleared in software DS39778B-page 264 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 19-29: BUS COLLISION DURING START CONDITION (SCLx = 0) SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1 TBRG TBRG SDAx Set SEN, enable Start sequence if SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 SCLx SCLx = 0 before SDAx = 0, bus collision occurs. Set BCLxIF. SEN SCLx = 0 before BRG time-out, bus collision occurs. Set BCLxIF. BCLxIF Interrupt cleared in software S ‘0’ ‘0’ SSPxIF ‘0’ ‘0’ FIGURE 19-30: BRG RESET DUE TO SDAx ARBITRATION DURING START CONDITION SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1 Set S Less than TBRG SDAx Set SSPxIF TBRG SDAx pulled low by other master. Reset BRG and assert SDAx. SCLx S SCLx pulled low after BRG time-out SEN BCLxIF Set SEN, enable Start sequence if SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 ‘0’ S SSPxIF SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1, set SSPxIF © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Interrupts cleared in software DS39778B-page 265 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.17.2 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition If SDAx is low, a bus collision has occurred (i.e., another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘0’, Figure 19-31). If SDAx is sampled high, the BRG is reloaded and begins counting. If SDAx goes from high-to-low before the BRG times out, no bus collision occurs because no two masters can assert SDAx at exactly the same time. During a Repeated Start condition, a bus collision occurs if: a) b) A low level is sampled on SDAx when SCLx goes from a low level to a high level. SCLx goes low before SDAx is asserted low, indicating that another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘1’. If SCLx goes from high-to-low before the BRG times out and SDAx has not already been asserted, a bus collision occurs. In this case, another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘1’ during the Repeated Start condition (see Figure 19-32). When the user deasserts SDAx and the pin is allowed to float high, the BRG is loaded with SSPxADD<6:0> and counts down to 0. The SCLx pin is then deasserted and when sampled high, the SDAx pin is sampled. FIGURE 19-31: If, at the end of the BRG time-out, both SCLx and SDAx are still high, the SDAx pin is driven low and the BRG is reloaded and begins counting. At the end of the count, regardless of the status of the SCLx pin, the SCLx pin is driven low and the Repeated Start condition is complete. BUS COLLISION DURING A REPEATED START CONDITION (CASE 1) SDAx SCLx Sample SDAx when SCLx goes high. If SDAx = 0, set BCLxIF and release SDAx and SCLx. RSEN BCLxIF Cleared in software S ‘0’ SSPxIF ‘0’ FIGURE 19-32: BUS COLLISION DURING REPEATED START CONDITION (CASE 2) TBRG TBRG SDAx SCLx BCLxIF SCLx goes low before SDAx, set BCLxIF. Release SDAx and SCLx. Interrupt cleared in software RSEN ‘0’ S SSPxIF DS39778B-page 266 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 19.4.17.3 Bus Collision During a Stop Condition The Stop condition begins with SDAx asserted low. When SDAx is sampled low, the SCLx pin is allowed to float. When the pin is sampled high (clock arbitration), the Baud Rate Generator is loaded with SSPxADD<6:0> and counts down to 0. After the BRG times out, SDAx is sampled. If SDAx is sampled low, a bus collision has occurred. This is due to another master attempting to drive a data ‘0’ (Figure 19-33). If the SCLx pin is sampled low before SDAx is allowed to float high, a bus collision occurs. This is another case of another master attempting to drive a data ‘0’ (Figure 19-34). Bus collision occurs during a Stop condition if: a) b) After the SDAx pin has been deasserted and allowed to float high, SDAx is sampled low after the BRG has timed out. After the SCLx pin is deasserted, SCLx is sampled low before SDAx goes high. FIGURE 19-33: BUS COLLISION DURING A STOP CONDITION (CASE 1) TBRG TBRG TBRG SDAx sampled low after TBRG, set BCLxIF SDAx SDAx asserted low SCLx PEN BCLxIF P ‘0’ SSPxIF ‘0’ FIGURE 19-34: BUS COLLISION DURING A STOP CONDITION (CASE 2) TBRG TBRG TBRG SDAx SCLx goes low before SDAx goes high, set BCLxIF Assert SDAx SCLx PEN BCLxIF P ‘0’ SSPxIF ‘0’ © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 267 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 19-4: Name INTCON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH I2C™ OPERATION Bit 7 Bit 6 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 58 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 58 IPR1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 58 PIR2 OSCFIF CM2IF CM1IF — BCL1IF LVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF 58 PIE2 OSCFIE CM2IE CM1IE — BCL1IE LVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE 58 IPR2 OSCFIP CM2IP CM1IP — BCL1IP LVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP 58 TX2IF TMR4IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF 58 TX2IE TMR4IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE 58 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP 58 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 58 TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4 TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1 TRISD0 58 TRISD SSP1BUF SSP1ADD MSSP1 Receive Buffer/Transmit Register 56 2C™ 56 Slave mode), MSSP1 Address Register (I MSSP1 Baud Rate Reload Register (I2C Master mode) SSP1MSK(1) MSK7 MSK6 MSK5 MSK4 MSK3 MSK2 MSK1 MSK0 56 SSP1CON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 56 SSP1CON2 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN RCEN PEN RSEN SEN 56 GCEN ACKSTAT ADMSK5(2) ADMSK4(2) ADMSK3(2) ADMSK2(2) ADMSK1(2) SSP1STAT SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA SEN BF 56 SSP2BUF MSSP2 Receive Buffer/Transmit Register 59 SSP2ADD MSSP2 Address Register (I2C Slave mode), MSSP2 Baud Rate Reload Register (I2C Master mode) 59 SSP2MSK(1) MSK7 SSP2CON1 SSP2CON2 MSK6 MSK5 WCOL SSPOV GCEN ACKSTAT ACKSTAT GCEN SSP2STAT SMP CKE MSK4 MSK3 MSK2 MSK1 MSK0 59 SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 59 ACKDT ACKEN RCEN PEN RSEN SEN 59 ADMSK5(2) ADMSK4(2) ADMSK3(2) ADMSK2(2) ADMSK1(2) SEN D/A P S R/W UA BF 59 2 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the MSSP module in I C™ mode. Note 1: SSPxMSK shares the same address in SFR space as SSPxADD, but is only accessible in certain I2C™ Slave operating modes in 7-bit Masking mode. See Section 19.4.3.4 “7-Bit Address Masking Mode” for more details. 2: Alternate bit definitions for use in I2C Slave mode operations only. DS39778B-page 268 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 20.0 ENHANCED UNIVERSAL SYNCHRONOUS ASYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER TRANSMITTER (EUSART) The Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) module is one of two serial I/O modules. (Generically, the EUSART is also known as a Serial Communications Interface or SCI.) The EUSART can be configured as a full-duplex asynchronous system that can communicate with peripheral devices, such as CRT terminals and personal computers. It can also be configured as a half-duplex synchronous system that can communicate with peripheral devices, such as A/D or D/A integrated circuits, serial EEPROMs, etc. The Enhanced USART module implements additional features, including automatic baud rate detection and calibration, automatic wake-up on Sync Break reception and 12-bit Break character transmit. These make it ideally suited for use in Local Interconnect Network bus (LIN bus) systems. All members of the PIC18F87J11 family are equipped with two independent EUSART modules, referred to as EUSART1 and EUSART2. They can be configured in the following modes: • Asynchronous (full duplex) with: - Auto-wake-up on character reception - Auto-baud calibration - 12-bit Break character transmission • Synchronous – Master (half duplex) with selectable clock polarity • Synchronous – Slave (half duplex) with selectable clock polarity © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. The pins of EUSART1 and EUSART2 are multiplexed with the functions of PORTC (RC6/TX1/CK1 and RC7/RX1/DT1) and PORTG (RG1/TX2/CK2 and RG2/RX2/DT2), respectively. In order to configure these pins as an EUSART: • For EUSART1: - bit SPEN (RCSTA1<7>) must be set (= 1) - bit TRISC<7> must be set (= 1) - bit TRISC<6> must be cleared (= 0) for Asynchronous and Synchronous Master modes - bit TRISC<6> must be set (= 1) for Synchronous Slave mode • For EUSART2: - bit SPEN (RCSTA2<7>) must be set (= 1) - bit TRISG<2> must be set (= 1) - bit TRISG<1> must be cleared (= 0) for Asynchronous and Synchronous Master modes - bit TRISC<6> must be set (= 1) for Synchronous Slave mode Note: The EUSART control will automatically reconfigure the pin from input to output as needed. The operation of each Enhanced USART module is controlled through three registers: • Transmit Status and Control (TXSTAx) • Receive Status and Control (RCSTAx) • Baud Rate Control (BAUDCONx) These are detailed on the following pages in Register 20-1, Register 20-2 and Register 20-3, respectively. Note: Preliminary Throughout this section, references to register and bit names that may be associated with a specific EUSART module are referred to generically by the use of ‘x’ in place of the specific module number. Thus, “RCSTAx” might refer to the Receive Status register for either EUSART1 or EUSART2. DS39778B-page 269 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 20-1: TXSTAx: TRANSMIT STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-1 R/W-0 CSRC TX9 TXEN(1) SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 CSRC: Clock Source Select bit Asynchronous mode: Don’t care. Synchronous mode: 1 = Master mode (clock generated internally from BRG) 0 = Slave mode (clock from external source) bit 6 TX9: 9-Bit Transmit Enable bit 1 = Selects 9-bit transmission 0 = Selects 8-bit transmission bit 5 TXEN: Transmit Enable bit(1) 1 = Transmit enabled 0 = Transmit disabled bit 4 SYNC: EUSART Mode Select bit 1 = Synchronous mode 0 = Asynchronous mode bit 3 SENDB: Send Break Character bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Send Sync Break on next transmission (cleared by hardware upon completion) 0 = Sync Break transmission completed Synchronous mode: Don’t care. bit 2 BRGH: High Baud Rate Select bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = High speed 0 = Low speed Synchronous mode: Unused in this mode. bit 1 TRMT: Transmit Shift Register Status bit 1 = TSR empty 0 = TSR full bit 0 TX9D: 9th bit of Transmit Data Can be address/data bit or a parity bit. Note 1: SREN/CREN overrides TXEN in Sync mode. DS39778B-page 270 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 20-2: RCSTAx: RECEIVE STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R-x SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 SPEN: Serial Port Enable bit 1 = Serial port enabled (configures RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx pins as serial port pins) 0 = Serial port disabled (held in Reset) bit 6 RX9: 9-Bit Receive Enable bit 1 = Selects 9-bit reception 0 = Selects 8-bit reception bit 5 SREN: Single Receive Enable bit Asynchronous mode: Don’t care. Synchronous mode – Master: 1 = Enables single receive 0 = Disables single receive This bit is cleared after reception is complete. Synchronous mode – Slave: Don’t care. bit 4 CREN: Continuous Receive Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Enables receiver 0 = Disables receiver Synchronous mode: 1 = Enables continuous receive until enable bit CREN is cleared (CREN overrides SREN) 0 = Disables continuous receive bit 3 ADDEN: Address Detect Enable bit Asynchronous mode 9-Bit (RX9 = 1): 1 = Enables address detection, enables interrupt and loads the receive buffer when RSR<8> is set 0 = Disables address detection, all bytes are received and ninth bit can be used as parity bit Asynchronous mode 9-Bit (RX9 = 0): Don’t care. bit 2 FERR: Framing Error bit 1 = Framing error (can be updated by reading RCREGx register and receiving next valid byte) 0 = No framing error bit 1 OERR: Overrun Error bit 1 = Overrun error (can be cleared by clearing bit CREN) 0 = No overrun error bit 0 RX9D: 9th bit of Received Data This can be address/data bit or a parity bit and must be calculated by user firmware. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 271 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 20-3: BAUDCONx: BAUD RATE CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP SCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 ABDOVF: Auto-Baud Acquisition Rollover Status bit 1 = A BRG rollover has occurred during Auto-Baud Rate Detect mode (must be cleared in software) 0 = No BRG rollover has occurred bit 6 RCIDL: Receive Operation Idle Status bit 1 = Receive operation is Idle 0 = Receive operation is active bit 5 DTRXP: Data/Receive Polarity Select bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Receive data (RXx) is inverted (active low) 0 = Receive data (RXx) is not inverted (active high) Synchronous mode: 1 = Data (DTx) is inverted (active low) 0 = Data (DTx) is not inverted (active high) bit 4 SCKP: Synchronous Clock Polarity Select bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Idle state for transmit (TXx) is a low level 0 = Idle state for transmit (TXx) is a high level Synchronous mode: 1 = Idle state for clock (CKx) is a high level 0 = Idle state for clock (CKx) is a low level bit 3 BRG16: 16-Bit Baud Rate Register Enable bit 1 = 16-bit Baud Rate Generator – SPBRGHx and SPBRGx 0 = 8-bit Baud Rate Generator – SPBRGx only (Compatible mode), SPBRGHx value ignored bit 2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1 WUE: Wake-up Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = EUSART will continue to sample the RXx pin – interrupt generated on falling edge; bit cleared in hardware on following rising edge 0 = RXx pin not monitored or rising edge detected Synchronous mode: Unused in this mode. bit 0 ABDEN: Auto-Baud Detect Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Enable baud rate measurement on the next character. Requires reception of a Sync field (55h); cleared in hardware upon completion. 0 = Baud rate measurement disabled or completed Synchronous mode: Unused in this mode. DS39778B-page 272 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 20.1 Baud Rate Generator (BRG) The BRG is a dedicated, 8-bit or 16-bit generator that supports both the Asynchronous and Synchronous modes of the EUSART. By default, the BRG operates in 8-bit mode; setting the BRG16 bit (BAUDCONx<3>) selects 16-bit mode. The SPBRGHx:SPBRGx register pair controls the period of a free-running timer. In Asynchronous mode, bits BRGH (TXSTAx<2>) and BRG16 (BAUDCONx<3>) also control the baud rate. In Synchronous mode, BRGH is ignored. Table 20-1 shows the formula for computation of the baud rate for different EUSART modes which only apply in Master mode (internally generated clock). Given the desired baud rate and FOSC, the nearest integer value for the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx registers can be calculated using the formulas in Table 20-1. From this, the error in baud rate can be determined. An example calculation is shown in Example 20-1. Typical baud rates and error values for the various Asynchronous modes are shown in Table 20-2. It may be advantageous to use TABLE 20-1: the high baud rate (BRGH = 1) or the 16-bit BRG to reduce the baud rate error, or achieve a slow baud rate for a fast oscillator frequency. Writing a new value to the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx registers causes the BRG timer to be reset (or cleared). This ensures the BRG does not wait for a timer overflow before outputting the new baud rate. 20.1.1 OPERATION IN POWER-MANAGED MODES The device clock is used to generate the desired baud rate. When one of the power-managed modes is entered, the new clock source may be operating at a different frequency. This may require an adjustment to the value in the SPBRGx register pair. 20.1.2 SAMPLING The data on the RXx pin (either RC7/RX1/DT1 or RG2/RX2/DT2) is sampled three times by a majority detect circuit to determine if a high or a low level is present at the RXx pin. BAUD RATE FORMULAS Configuration Bits BRG/EUSART Mode Baud Rate Formula 8-bit/Asynchronous FOSC/[64 (n + 1)] SYNC BRG16 BRGH 0 0 0 0 0 1 8-bit/Asynchronous 0 1 0 16-bit/Asynchronous 0 1 1 16-bit/Asynchronous 1 0 x 8-bit/Synchronous 1 1 x 16-bit/Synchronous FOSC/[16 (n + 1)] FOSC/[4 (n + 1)] Legend: x = Don’t care, n = value of SPBRGHx:SPBRGx register pair © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 273 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY EXAMPLE 20-1: CALCULATING BAUD RATE ERROR For a device with FOSC of 16 MHz, desired baud rate of 9600, Asynchronous mode, and 8-bit BRG: Desired Baud Rate = FOSC/(64 ([SPBRGHx:SPBRGx] + 1)) Solving for SPBRGHx:SPBRGx: X = ((FOSC/Desired Baud Rate)/64) – 1 = ((16000000/9600)/64) – 1 = [25.042] = 25 Calculated Baud Rate = 16000000/(64 (25 + 1)) = 9615 Error = (Calculated Baud Rate – Desired Baud Rate)/Desired Baud Rate = (9615 – 9600)/9600 = 0.16% TABLE 20-2: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH BAUD RATE GENERATOR Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: TXSTAx CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 57 RCSTAx SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 57 RCIDL DTRXP SCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 59 BAUDCONx ABDOVF SPBRGHx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte 59 SPBRGx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte 59 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the BRG. DS39778B-page 274 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 20-3: BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 40.000 MHz FOSC = 20.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) FOSC = 10.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) FOSC = 8.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.3 — — — — — — — — — — — — 1.2 — — — 1.221 1.73 255 1.202 0.16 129 1.201 -0.16 103 2.4 2.441 1.73 255 2.404 0.16 129 2.404 0.16 64 2.403 -0.16 51 9.6 9.615 0.16 64 9.766 1.73 31 9.766 1.73 15 9.615 -0.16 12 19.2 19.531 1.73 31 19.531 1.73 15 19.531 1.73 7 — — — 57.6 56.818 -1.36 10 62.500 8.51 4 52.083 -9.58 2 — — — 115.2 125.000 8.51 4 104.167 -9.58 2 78.125 -32.18 1 — — — SPBRG value (decimal) % Error SPBRG value (decimal) % Error SPBRG value (decimal) % Error SPBRG value (decimal) SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 4.000 MHz FOSC = 2.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.16 207 0.300 0.16 51 1.201 2.404 0.16 25 9.6 8.929 -6.99 19.2 20.833 57.6 62.500 115.2 62.500 FOSC = 1.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error -0.16 103 0.300 -0.16 51 -0.16 25 1.201 -0.16 12 2.403 -0.16 12 — — — 6 — — — — — — 8.51 2 — — — — — — 8.51 0 — — — — — — -45.75 0 — — — — — — Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.3 0.300 1.2 1.202 2.4 SPBRG value SPBRG value SPBRG value (decimal) SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 40.000 MHz FOSC = 20.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error — — — — — — — — — 9.766 1.73 255 Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.3 — 1.2 — 2.4 9.6 SPBRG value FOSC = 10.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error — — — — — — — — — 9.615 0.16 FOSC = 8.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error — — — — — — — — — 2.441 1.73 255 2.403 -0.16 207 129 9.615 0.16 64 9.615 -0.16 51 25 SPBRG value SPBRG value SPBRG value (decimal) — 19.2 19.231 0.16 129 19.231 0.16 64 19.531 1.73 31 19.230 -0.16 57.6 58.140 0.94 42 56.818 -1.36 21 56.818 -1.36 10 55.555 3.55 8 115.2 113.636 -1.36 21 113.636 -1.36 10 125.000 8.51 4 — — — SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 4.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) % Error FOSC = 2.000 MHz SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error SPBRG value (decimal) FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) % Error SPBRG value (decimal) 0.3 — — — — — — 0.300 -0.16 207 1.2 1.202 0.16 207 1.201 -0.16 103 1.201 -0.16 51 2.4 2.404 0.16 103 2.403 -0.16 51 2.403 -0.16 25 9.6 9.615 0.16 25 9.615 -0.16 12 — — — 19.2 19.231 0.16 12 — — — — — — 57.6 62.500 8.51 3 — — — — — — 115.2 125.000 8.51 1 — — — — — — © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 275 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 20-3: BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES (CONTINUED) SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 40.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) % Error FOSC = 20.000 MHz SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error FOSC = 10.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) SPBRG value % Error FOSC = 8.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error SPBRG value SPBRG value (decimal) 0.3 0.300 0.00 8332 0.300 0.02 4165 0.300 0.02 2082 0.300 -0.04 1.2 1.200 0.02 2082 1.200 -0.03 1041 1.200 -0.03 520 1.201 -0.16 1665 415 2.4 2.402 0.06 1040 2.399 -0.03 520 2.404 0.16 259 2.403 -0.16 207 9.6 9.615 0.16 259 9.615 0.16 129 9.615 0.16 64 9.615 -0.16 51 25 19.2 19.231 0.16 129 19.231 0.16 64 19.531 1.73 31 19.230 -0.16 57.6 58.140 0.94 42 56.818 -1.36 21 56.818 -1.36 10 55.555 3.55 8 115.2 113.636 -1.36 21 113.636 -1.36 10 125.000 8.51 4 — — — SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 4.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) % Error FOSC = 2.000 MHz SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error FOSC = 1.000 MHz SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error SPBRG value (decimal) 0.3 0.300 0.04 832 0.300 -0.16 415 0.300 -0.16 207 1.2 1.202 0.16 207 1.201 -0.16 103 1.201 -0.16 51 2.4 2.404 0.16 103 2.403 -0.16 51 2.403 -0.16 25 9.6 9.615 0.16 25 9.615 -0.16 12 — — — 19.2 19.231 0.16 12 — — — — — — 57.6 62.500 8.51 3 — — — — — — 115.2 125.000 8.51 1 — — — — — — SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 40.000 MHz FOSC = 20.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.00 33332 0.300 0.00 8332 1.200 0.02 4165 Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.3 0.300 1.2 1.200 2.4 2.400 SPBRG value FOSC = 10.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.00 16665 0.300 0.02 4165 1.200 2.400 0.02 2082 2.402 SPBRG value FOSC = 8.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.00 8332 0.300 -0.01 6665 0.02 2082 1.200 -0.04 1665 0.06 1040 2.400 -0.04 832 SPBRG value SPBRG value (decimal) 9.6 9.606 0.06 1040 9.596 -0.03 520 9.615 0.16 259 9.615 -0.16 207 19.2 19.193 -0.03 520 19.231 0.16 259 19.231 0.16 129 19.230 -0.16 103 57.6 57.803 0.35 172 57.471 -0.22 86 58.140 0.94 42 57.142 0.79 34 115.2 114.943 -0.22 86 116.279 0.94 42 113.636 -1.36 21 117.647 -2.12 16 SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 4.000 MHz FOSC = 2.000 MHz (decimal) % Error 3332 832 0.300 1.201 -0.04 -0.16 2.403 -0.16 207 9.615 -0.16 51 19.230 -0.16 25 16 55.555 3.55 8 — — % Error 0.3 1.2 0.300 1.200 0.01 0.04 2.4 2.404 0.16 415 9.6 9.615 0.16 103 19.2 19.231 0.16 51 57.6 58.824 2.12 115.2 111.111 -3.55 DS39778B-page 276 FOSC = 1.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) Actual Rate (K) SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error 1665 415 0.300 1.201 -0.04 -0.16 832 207 2.403 -0.16 103 9.615 -0.16 25 19.230 -0.16 12 8 — — — — — — — SPBRG value Preliminary SPBRG value (decimal) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 20.1.3 AUTO-BAUD RATE DETECT The Enhanced USART module supports the automatic detection and calibration of baud rate. This feature is active only in Asynchronous mode and while the WUE bit is clear. Note 1: If the WUE bit is set with the ABDEN bit, Auto-Baud Rate Detection will occur on the byte following the Break character. 2: It is up to the user to determine that the incoming character baud rate is within the range of the selected BRG clock source. Some combinations of oscillator frequency and EUSART baud rates are not possible due to bit error rates. Overall system timing and communication baud rates must be taken into consideration when using the Auto-Baud Rate Detection feature. The automatic baud rate measurement sequence (Figure 20-1) begins whenever a Start bit is received and the ABDEN bit is set. The calculation is self-averaging. In the Auto-Baud Rate Detect (ABD) mode, the clock to the BRG is reversed. Rather than the BRG clocking the incoming RXx signal, the RXx signal is timing the BRG. In ABD mode, the internal Baud Rate Generator is used as a counter to time the bit period of the incoming serial byte stream. Once the ABDEN bit is set, the state machine will clear the BRG and look for a Start bit. The Auto-Baud Rate Detect must receive a byte with the value 55h (ASCII “U”, which is also the LIN bus Sync character) in order to calculate the proper bit rate. The measurement is taken over both a low and a high bit time in order to minimize any effects caused by asymmetry of the incoming signal. After a Start bit, the SPBRGx begins counting up, using the preselected clock source on the first rising edge of RXx. After eight bits on the RXx pin or the fifth rising edge, an accumulated value totalling the proper BRG period is left in the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx register pair. Once the 5th edge is seen (this should correspond to the Stop bit), the ABDEN bit is automatically cleared. If a rollover of the BRG occurs (an overflow from FFFFh to 0000h), the event is trapped by the ABDOVF status bit (BAUDCONx<7>). It is set in hardware by BRG rollovers and can be set or cleared by the user in software. ABD mode remains active after rollover events and the ABDEN bit remains set (Figure 20-2). TABLE 20-4: BRG COUNTER CLOCK RATES BRG16 BRGH BRG Counter Clock 0 0 FOSC/512 0 1 FOSC/128 1 0 FOSC/128 1 FOSC/32 1 Note: During the ABD sequence, SPBRGx and SPBRGHx are both used as a 16-bit counter, independent of BRG16 setting. 20.1.3.1 ABD and EUSART Transmission Since the BRG clock is reversed during ABD acquisition, the EUSART transmitter cannot be used during ABD. This means that whenever the ABDEN bit is set, TXREGx cannot be written to. Users should also ensure that ABDEN does not become set during a transmit sequence. Failing to do this may result in unpredictable EUSART operation. While calibrating the baud rate period, the BRG registers are clocked at 1/8th the preconfigured clock rate. Note that the BRG clock will be configured by the BRG16 and BRGH bits. Independent of the BRG16 bit setting, both the SPBRGx and SPBRGHx will be used as a 16-bit counter. This allows the user to verify that no carry occurred for 8-bit modes by checking for 00h in the SPBRGHx register. Refer to Table 20-4 for counter clock rates to the BRG. While the ABD sequence takes place, the EUSART state machine is held in Idle. The RCxIF interrupt is set once the fifth rising edge on RXx is detected. The value in the RCREGx needs to be read to clear the RCxIF interrupt. The contents of RCREGx should be discarded. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 277 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 20-1: BRG Value AUTOMATIC BAUD RATE CALCULATION XXXXh RXx pin 0000h 001Ch Start Edge #1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Edge #2 Bit 3 Bit 2 Edge #3 Bit 5 Bit 4 Edge #4 Bit 7 Bit 6 Edge #5 Stop Bit BRG Clock Auto-Cleared Set by User ABDEN bit RCxIF bit (Interrupt) Read RCREGx SPBRGx XXXXh 1Ch SPBRGHx XXXXh 00h Note: The ABD sequence requires the EUSART module to be configured in Asynchronous mode and WUE = 0. FIGURE 20-2: BRG OVERFLOW SEQUENCE BRG Clock ABDEN bit RXx pin Start Bit 0 ABDOVF bit FFFFh BRG Value DS39778B-page 278 XXXXh 0000h 0000h Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 20.2 EUSART Asynchronous Mode Once the TXREGx register transfers the data to the TSR register (occurs in one TCY), the TXREGx register is empty and the TXxIF flag bit is set. This interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the interrupt enable bit, TXxIE. TXxIF will be set regardless of the state of TXxIE; it cannot be cleared in software. TXxIF is also not cleared immediately upon loading TXREGx, but becomes valid in the second instruction cycle following the load instruction. Polling TXxIF immediately following a load of TXREGx will return invalid results. The Asynchronous mode of operation is selected by clearing the SYNC bit (TXSTAx<4>). In this mode, the EUSART uses standard Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ) format (one Start bit, eight or nine data bits and one Stop bit). The most common data format is 8 bits. An on-chip, dedicated 8-bit/16-bit Baud Rate Generator can be used to derive standard baud rate frequencies from the oscillator. The EUSART transmits and receives the LSb first. The EUSART’s transmitter and receiver are functionally independent but use the same data format and baud rate. The Baud Rate Generator produces a clock, either x16 or x64 of the bit shift rate, depending on the BRGH and BRG16 bits (TXSTAx<2> and BAUDCONx<3>). Parity is not supported by the hardware but can be implemented in software and stored as the 9th data bit. While TXxIF indicates the status of the TXREGx register; another bit, TRMT (TXSTAx<1>), shows the status of the TSR register. TRMT is a read-only bit which is set when the TSR register is empty. No interrupt logic is tied to this bit so the user has to poll this bit in order to determine if the TSR register is empty. Note 1: The TSR register is not mapped in data memory, so it is not available to the user. When operating in Asynchronous mode, the EUSART module consists of the following important elements: • • • • • • • 2: Flag bit, TXxIF, is set when enable bit, TXEN, is set. Baud Rate Generator Sampling Circuit Asynchronous Transmitter Asynchronous Receiver Auto-Wake-up on Sync Break Character 12-Bit Break Character Transmit Auto-Baud Rate Detection 20.2.1 To set up an Asynchronous Transmission: 1. 2. EUSART ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMITTER 3. 4. The EUSART transmitter block diagram is shown in Figure 20-3. The heart of the transmitter is the Transmit (Serial) Shift Register (TSR). The Shift register obtains its data from the Read/Write Transmit Buffer register, TXREGx. The TXREGx register is loaded with data in software. The TSR register is not loaded until the Stop bit has been transmitted from the previous load. As soon as the Stop bit is transmitted, the TSR is loaded with new data from the TXREGx register (if available). FIGURE 20-3: 5. 6. 7. 8. Initialize the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx registers for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing bit SYNC and setting bit, SPEN. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, TXxIE. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set transmit bit TX9. Can be used as address/data bit. Enable the transmission by setting bit, TXEN, which will also set bit, TXxIF. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded in bit, TX9D. Load data to the TXREGx register (starts transmission). If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. EUSART TRANSMIT BLOCK DIAGRAM Data Bus TXxIF TXREGx Register TXxIE 8 MSb (8) LSb • • • Pin Buffer and Control 0 TSR Register TXx pin Interrupt TXEN Baud Rate CLK TRMT BRG16 SPBRGHx SPBRGx Baud Rate Generator © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. SPEN TX9 TX9D Preliminary DS39778B-page 279 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 20-4: ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION Write to TXREGx Word 1 BRG Output (Shift Clock) TXx (pin) Start bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit Word 1 TXxIF bit (Transmit Buffer Reg. Empty Flag) 1 TCY Word 1 Transmit Shift Reg TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) FIGURE 20-5: ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (BACK-TO-BACK) Write to TXREGx Word 2 Word 1 BRG Output (Shift Clock) TXx (pin) Start bit bit 0 bit 1 1 TCY TXxIF bit (Interrupt Reg. Flag) bit 7/8 Stop bit Start bit bit 0 Word 2 Word 1 1 TCY Word 1 Transmit Shift Reg. TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) Word 2 Transmit Shift Reg. Note: This timing diagram shows two consecutive transmissions. TABLE 20-5: Name INTCON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION Bit 7 Bit 6 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 58 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 58 IPR1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 58 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF 58 PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE 58 IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP 58 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 57 RCSTAx TXREGx TXSTAx BAUDCONx EUSARTx Transmit Register 57 CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 57 ABDOVF RCIDL DTRXP SCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 59 SPBRGHx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte 59 SPBRGx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte 59 Legend: — = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for asynchronous transmission. DS39778B-page 280 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 20.2.2 EUSART ASYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER 20.2.3 The receiver block diagram is shown in Figure 20-6. The data is received on the RXx pin and drives the data recovery block. The data recovery block is actually a high-speed shifter operating at x16 times the baud rate, whereas the main receive serial shifter operates at the bit rate or at FOSC. This mode would typically be used in RS-232 systems. This mode would typically be used in RS-485 systems. To set up an Asynchronous Reception with Address Detect Enable: 1. Initialize the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx registers for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. 2. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing the SYNC bit and setting the SPEN bit. 3. If interrupts are required, set the RCEN bit and select the desired priority level with the RCxIP bit. 4. Set the RX9 bit to enable 9-bit reception. 5. Set the ADDEN bit to enable address detect. 6. Enable reception by setting the CREN bit. 7. The RCxIF bit will be set when reception is complete. The interrupt will be Acknowledged if the RCxIE and GIE bits are set. 8. Read the RCSTAx register to determine if any error occurred during reception, as well as read bit 9 of data (if applicable). 9. Read RCREGx to determine if the device is being addressed. 10. If any error occurred, clear the CREN bit. 11. If the device has been addressed, clear the ADDEN bit to allow all received data into the receive buffer and interrupt the CPU. To set up an Asynchronous Reception: 1. Initialize the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx registers for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. 2. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing bit, SYNC, and setting bit, SPEN. 3. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, RCxIE. 4. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit, RX9. 5. Enable the reception by setting bit, CREN. 6. Flag bit, RCxIF, will be set when reception is complete and an interrupt will be generated if enable bit, RCxIE, was set. 7. Read the RCSTAx register to get the 9th bit (if enabled) and determine if any error occurred during reception. 8. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the RCREGx register. 9. If any error occurred, clear the error by clearing enable bit, CREN. 10. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. FIGURE 20-6: SETTING UP 9-BIT MODE WITH ADDRESS DETECT EUSART RECEIVE BLOCK DIAGRAM CREN OERR FERR x64 Baud Rate CLK BRG16 SPBRGHx SPBRGx Baud Rate Generator ÷ 64 or ÷ 16 or ÷4 RSR Register MSb Stop (8) 7 • • • 1 LSb 0 Start RX9 Pin Buffer and Control Data Recovery RXx RX9D RCREGx Register FIFO SPEN 8 Interrupt RCxIF Data Bus RCxIE © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 281 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 20-7: ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION Start bit RXx (pin) bit 0 bit 7/8 Stop bit bit 1 Start bit bit 0 Rcv Shift Reg Rcv Buffer Reg Stop bit Start bit bit 7/8 Stop bit Word 2 RCREGx Word 1 RCREGx Read Rcv Buffer Reg RCREGx bit 7/8 RCxIF (Interrupt Flag) OERR bit CREN Note: This timing diagram shows three words appearing on the RXx input. The RCREGx (Receive Buffer) is read after the third word causing the OERR (Overrun) bit to be set. TABLE 20-6: Name INTCON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION Bit 7 Bit 6 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 58 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 58 IPR1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 58 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF 58 PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE 58 IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP 58 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D RCSTAx RCREGx TXSTAx EUSARTx Receive Register CSRC BAUDCONx ABDOVF 57 57 TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 57 RCIDL DTRXP SCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 59 SPBRGHx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte 59 SPBRGx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte 59 Legend: — = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for asynchronous reception. 20.2.4 AUTO-WAKE-UP ON SYNC BREAK CHARACTER During Sleep mode, all clocks to the EUSART are suspended. Because of this, the Baud Rate Generator is inactive and a proper byte reception cannot be performed. The auto-wake-up feature allows the controller to wake-up due to activity on the RXx/DTx line while the EUSART is operating in Asynchronous mode. The auto-wake-up feature is enabled by setting the WUE bit (BAUDCONx<1>). Once set, the typical receive sequence on RXx/DTx is disabled and the EUSART remains in an Idle state, monitoring for a wake-up event independent of the CPU mode. A wake-up event consists of a high-to-low transition on DS39778B-page 282 the RXx/DTx line. (This coincides with the start of a Sync Break or a Wake-up Signal character for the LIN protocol.) Following a wake-up event, the module generates an RCxIF interrupt. The interrupt is generated synchronously to the Q clocks in normal operating modes (Figure 20-8) and asynchronously if the device is in Sleep mode (Figure 20-9). The interrupt condition is cleared by reading the RCREGx register. The WUE bit is automatically cleared once a low-to-high transition is observed on the RXx line following the wake-up event. At this point, the EUSART module is in Idle mode and returns to normal operation. This signals to the user that the Sync Break event is over. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 20.2.4.1 Special Considerations Using Auto-Wake-up 20.2.4.2 Since auto-wake-up functions by sensing rising edge transitions on RXx/DTx, information with any state changes before the Stop bit may signal a false End-of-Character (EOC) and cause data or framing errors. To work properly, therefore, the initial character in the transmission must be all ‘0’s. This can be 00h (8 bytes) for standard RS-232 devices or 000h (12 bits) for LIN bus. Oscillator start-up time must also be considered, especially in applications using oscillators with longer start-up intervals (i.e., HS or HSPLL mode). The Sync Break (or Wake-up Signal) character must be of sufficient length and be followed by a sufficient interval to allow enough time for the selected oscillator to start and provide proper initialization of the EUSART. FIGURE 20-8: Special Considerations Using the WUE Bit The timing of WUE and RCxIF events may cause some confusion when it comes to determining the validity of received data. As noted, setting the WUE bit places the EUSART in an Idle mode. The wake-up event causes a receive interrupt by setting the RCxIF bit. The WUE bit is cleared after this when a rising edge is seen on RXx/DTx. The interrupt condition is then cleared by reading the RCREGx register. Ordinarily, the data in RCREGx will be dummy data and should be discarded. The fact that the WUE bit has been cleared (or is still set) and the RCxIF flag is set should not be used as an indicator of the integrity of the data in RCREGx. Users should consider implementing a parallel method in firmware to verify received data integrity. To assure that no actual data is lost, check the RCIDL bit to verify that a receive operation is not in process. If a receive operation is not occurring, the WUE bit may then be set just prior to entering the Sleep mode. AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMINGS DURING NORMAL OPERATION Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 OSC1 Bit set by user Auto-Cleared WUE bit(1) RXx/DTx Line RCxIF Note 1: Cleared due to user read of RCREGx The EUSART remains in Idle while the WUE bit is set. FIGURE 20-9: AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMINGS DURING SLEEP Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 OSC1 Bit set by user Auto-Cleared WUE bit(2) RXx/DTx Line Note 1 RCxIF Sleep Ends SLEEP Command Executed Note 1: 2: Cleared due to user read of RCREGx If the wake-up event requires long oscillator warm-up time, the auto-clear of the WUE bit can occur before the oscillator is ready. This sequence should not depend on the presence of Q clocks. The EUSART remains in Idle while the WUE bit is set. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 283 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 20.2.5 BREAK CHARACTER SEQUENCE The EUSART module has the capability of sending the special Break character sequences that are required by the LIN bus standard. The Break character transmit consists of a Start bit, followed by twelve ‘0’ bits and a Stop bit. The Frame Break character is sent whenever the SENDB and TXEN bits (TXSTAx<3> and TXSTAx<5>) are set while the Transmit Shift Register is loaded with data. Note that the value of data written to TXREGx will be ignored and all ‘0’s will be transmitted. The SENDB bit is automatically reset by hardware after the corresponding Stop bit is sent. This allows the user to preload the transmit FIFO with the next transmit byte following the Break character (typically, the Sync character in the LIN specification). Note that the data value written to the TXREGx for the Break character is ignored. The write simply serves the purpose of initiating the proper sequence. The TRMT bit indicates when the transmit operation is active or Idle, just as it does during normal transmission. See Figure 20-10 for the timing of the Break character sequence. 20.2.5.1 Break and Sync Transmit Sequence The following sequence will send a message frame header made up of a Break, followed by an Auto-Baud Sync byte. This sequence is typical of a LIN bus master. FIGURE 20-10: Write to TXREGx 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Configure the EUSART for the desired mode. Set the TXEN and SENDB bits to set up the Break character. Load the TXREGx with a dummy character to initiate transmission (the value is ignored). Write ‘55h’ to TXREGx to load the Sync character into the transmit FIFO buffer. After the Break has been sent, the SENDB bit is reset by hardware. The Sync character now transmits in the preconfigured mode. When the TXREGx becomes empty, as indicated by the TXxIF, the next data byte can be written to TXREGx. 20.2.6 RECEIVING A BREAK CHARACTER The Enhanced USART module can receive a Break character in two ways. The first method forces configuration of the baud rate at a frequency of 9/13 the typical speed. This allows for the Stop bit transition to be at the correct sampling location (13 bits for Break versus Start bit and 8 data bits for typical data). The second method uses the auto-wake-up feature described in Section 20.2.4 “Auto-Wake-up on Sync Break Character”. By enabling this feature, the EUSART will sample the next two transitions on RXx/DTx, cause an RCxIF interrupt and receive the next data byte followed by another interrupt. Note that following a Break character, the user will typically want to enable the Auto-Baud Rate Detect feature. For both methods, the user can set the ABDEN bit once the TXxIF interrupt is observed. SEND BREAK CHARACTER SEQUENCE Dummy Write BRG Output (Shift Clock) TXx (pin) Start Bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 11 Stop Bit Break TXxIF bit (Transmit Buffer Reg. Empty Flag) TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) SENDB sampled here Auto-Cleared SENDB bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) DS39778B-page 284 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 20.3 EUSART Synchronous Master Mode Once the TXREGx register transfers the data to the TSR register (occurs in one TCY), the TXREGx is empty and the TXxIF flag bit is set. The interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the interrupt enable bit, TXxIE. TXxIF is set regardless of the state of enable bit, TXxIE; it cannot be cleared in software. It will reset only when new data is loaded into the TXREGx register. The Synchronous Master mode is entered by setting the CSRC bit (TXSTAx<7>). In this mode, the data is transmitted in a half-duplex manner (i.e., transmission and reception do not occur at the same time). When transmitting data, the reception is inhibited and vice versa. Synchronous mode is entered by setting bit, SYNC (TXSTAx<4>). In addition, enable bit, SPEN (RCSTAx<7>), is set in order to configure the TXx and RXx pins to CKx (clock) and DTx (data) lines, respectively. While flag bit, TXxIF, indicates the status of the TXREGx register, another bit, TRMT (TXSTAx<1>), shows the status of the TSR register. TRMT is a read-only bit which is set when the TSR is empty. No interrupt logic is tied to this bit, so the user must poll this bit in order to determine if the TSR register is empty. The TSR is not mapped in data memory so it is not available to the user. The Master mode indicates that the processor transmits the master clock on the CKx line. Clock polarity is selected with the SCKP bit (BAUDCONx<4>). Setting SCKP sets the Idle state on CKx as high, while clearing the bit sets the Idle state as low. This option is provided to support Microwire devices with this module. 20.3.1 To set up a Synchronous Master Transmission: 1. EUSART SYNCHRONOUS MASTER TRANSMISSION 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. The EUSART transmitter block diagram is shown in Figure 20-3. The heart of the transmitter is the Transmit (Serial) Shift Register (TSR). The Shift register obtains its data from the Read/Write Transmit Buffer register, TXREGx. The TXREGx register is loaded with data in software. The TSR register is not loaded until the last bit has been transmitted from the previous load. As soon as the last bit is transmitted, the TSR is loaded with new data from the TXREGx (if available). FIGURE 20-11: 7. 8. Initialize the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx registers for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRG16 bit, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits, SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, TXxIE. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set bit, TX9. Enable the transmission by setting bit, TXEN. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded in bit, TX9D. Start transmission by loading data to the TXREGx register. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION Q1 Q2 Q3Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 RC7/RX1/DT1 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 bit 7 bit 0 bit 1 bit 7 Word 2 Word 1 RC6/TX1/CK1 pin (SCKP = 0) RC6/TX1/CK1 pin (SCKP = 1) Write to TXREG1 Reg Write Word 1 Write Word 2 TX1IF bit (Interrupt Flag) TRMT bit TXEN bit Note: ‘1’ ‘1’ Sync Master mode, SPBRGx = 0, continuous transmission of two 8-bit words. This example is equally applicable to EUSART2 (RG1/TX2/CK2 and RG2/RX2/DT2). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 285 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 20-12: SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (THROUGH TXEN) RC7/RX1/DT1 pin bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 6 bit 7 RC6/TX1/CK1 pin Write to TXREG1 reg TX1IF bit TRMT bit TXEN bit Note: This example is equally applicable to EUSART2 (RG1/TX2/CK2 and RG2/RX2/DT2). TABLE 20-7: Name INTCON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER TRANSMISSION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 58 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 58 IPR1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 58 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF 58 PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE 58 IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP 58 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 57 RCSTAx TXREGx TXSTAx EUSARTx Transmit Register CSRC BAUDCONx ABDOVF 57 TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 57 RCIDL DTRXP SCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 59 SPBRGHx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte 59 SPBRGx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte 59 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous master transmission. DS39778B-page 286 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 20.3.2 EUSART SYNCHRONOUS MASTER RECEPTION Once Synchronous mode is selected, reception is enabled by setting either the Single Receive Enable bit, SREN (RCSTAx<5>) or the Continuous Receive Enable bit, CREN (RCSTAx<4>). Data is sampled on the RXx pin on the falling edge of the clock. If enable bit, SREN, is set, only a single word is received. If enable bit, CREN, is set, the reception is continuous until CREN is cleared. If both bits are set, then CREN takes precedence. To set up a Synchronous Master Reception: 1. 2. Initialize the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx registers for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRG16 bit, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits, SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. FIGURE 20-13: 3. 4. 5. 6. Ensure bits, CREN and SREN, are clear. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, RCxIE. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit, RX9. If a single reception is required, set bit, SREN. For continuous reception, set bit, CREN. 7. Interrupt flag bit, RCxIF, will be set when reception is complete and an interrupt will be generated if the enable bit, RCxIE, was set. 8. Read the RCSTAx register to get the 9th bit (if enabled) and determine if any error occurred during reception. 9. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the RCREGx register. 10. If any error occurred, clear the error by clearing bit CREN. 11. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. SYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION (MASTER MODE, SREN) Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 RC7/RX1/DT1 pin bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 RC6/TX1/CK1 pin (SCKP = 0) RC6/TX1/CK1 pin (SCKP = 1) Write to bit SREN SREN bit CREN bit ‘0’ ‘0’ RC1IF bit (Interrupt) Read RCREG1 Note: Timing diagram demonstrates Sync Master mode with bit SREN = 1 and bit BRGH = 0. This example is equally applicable to EUSART2 (RG1/TX2/CK2 and RG2/RX2/DT2). TABLE 20-8: Name INTCON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER RECEPTION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 58 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 58 IPR1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 58 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF 58 PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE 58 IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP 58 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 57 RCSTAx RCREGx TXSTAx EUSARTx Receive Register CSRC BAUDCONx ABDOVF 57 TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 57 RCIDL DTRXP SCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 59 SPBRGHx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte 59 SPBRGx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte 59 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous master reception. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 287 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 20.4 EUSART Synchronous Slave Mode To set up a Synchronous Slave Transmission: 1. Synchronous Slave mode is entered by clearing bit, CSRC (TXSTAx<7>). This mode differs from the Synchronous Master mode in that the shift clock is supplied externally at the CKx pin (instead of being supplied internally in Master mode). This allows the device to transfer or receive data while in any low-power mode. 20.4.1 2. 3. 4. 5. EUSART SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE TRANSMISSION 6. The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave modes is identical, except in the case of Sleep mode. 7. If two words are written to the TXREGx and then the SLEEP instruction is executed, the following will occur: 8. a) b) c) d) e) The first word will immediately transfer to the TSR register and transmit. The second word will remain in the TXREGx register. Flag bit, TXxIF, will not be set. When the first word has been shifted out of TSR, the TXREGx register will transfer the second word to the TSR and flag bit, TXxIF, will now be set. If enable bit, TXxIE, is set, the interrupt will wake the chip from Sleep. If the global interrupt is enabled, the program will branch to the interrupt vector. TABLE 20-9: Name INTCON Enable the synchronous slave serial port by setting bits, SYNC and SPEN, and clearing bit, CSRC. Clear bits, CREN and SREN. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, TXxIE. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set bit, TX9. Enable the transmission by setting enable bit, TXEN. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded in bit, TX9D. Start transmission by loading data to the TXREGx register. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE TRANSMISSION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 58 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 58 IPR1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 58 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF 58 PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE 58 IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP 58 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 57 RCSTAx TXREGx TXSTAx EUSARTx Transmit Register CSRC BAUDCONx ABDOVF 57 TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 57 RCIDL DTRXP SCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 59 SPBRGHx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte 59 SPBRGx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte 59 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous slave transmission. DS39778B-page 288 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 20.4.2 EUSART SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE RECEPTION To set up a Synchronous Slave Reception: 1. The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave modes is identical, except in the case of Sleep, or any Idle mode and bit, SREN, which is a “don’t care” in Slave mode. If receive is enabled by setting the CREN bit prior to entering Sleep or any Idle mode, then a word may be received while in this low-power mode. Once the word is received, the RSR register will transfer the data to the RCREGx register. If the RCxIE enable bit is set, the interrupt generated will wake the chip from the low-power mode. If the global interrupt is enabled, the program will branch to the interrupt vector. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits, SYNC and SPEN, and clearing bit, CSRC. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, RCxIE. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit, RX9. To enable reception, set enable bit, CREN. Flag bit, RCxIF, will be set when reception is complete. An interrupt will be generated if enable bit, RCxIE, was set. Read the RCSTAx register to get the 9th bit (if enabled) and determine if any error occurred during reception. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the RCREGx register. If any error occurred, clear the error by clearing bit, CREN. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. TABLE 20-10: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE RECEPTION Name INTCON Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 58 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 58 IPR1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 58 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF 58 PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE 58 IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP 58 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 57 RCSTAx RCREGx TXSTAx EUSARTx Receive Register CSRC BAUDCONx ABDOVF 57 TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 57 RCIDL DTRXP SCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 59 SPBRGHx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte 59 SPBRGx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte 59 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous slave reception. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 289 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 290 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 21.0 10-BIT ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER (A/D) MODULE The Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter module has 11 inputs for the 64-pin devices and 15 for the 80-pin devices. This module allows conversion of an analog input signal to a corresponding 10-bit digital number. The module has six registers: • A/D Port Configuration Register 2 (ANCON0) • A/D Port Configuration Register 1 (ANCON1) • A/D Result Registers (ADRESH and ADRESL) The ADCON0 register, shown in Register 21-1, controls the operation of the A/D module. The ADCON1 register, shown in Register 21-2, configures the A/D clock source, programmed acquisition time and justification. • A/D Control Register 0 (ADCON0) • A/D Control Register 1 (ADCON1) REGISTER 21-1: ADCON0: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 0(1) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 VCFG1 VCFG0 CHS3 CHS2 CHS1 CHS0 GO/DONE ADON bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-6 VCFG1: Voltage Reference Configuration bit (VREF- source) 1 = VREF- (AN2) 0 = AVSS bit VCFG0: Voltage Reference Configuration bit (VREF+ source) 1 = VREF+ (AN3) 0 = AVDD bit 5-2 CHS3:CHS0: Analog Channel Select bits 0000 = Channel 00 (AN0) 0001 = Channel 01 (AN1) 0010 = Channel 02 (AN2) 0011 = Channel 03 (AN3) 0100 = Channel 04 (AN4) 0101 = Unused 0110 = Channel 06 (AN6) 0111 = Channel 07 (AN7) 1000 = Channel 08 (AN8) 1001 = Channel 09 (AN9) 1010 = Channel 10 (AN10) 1011 = Channel 11 (AN11) 1100 = Channel 12 (AN12)(2,3) 1101 = Channel 13 (AN13)(2,3) 1110 = Channel 14 (AN14)(2,3) 1111 = Channel 15 (AN15)(2,3) bit 1 GO/DONE: A/D Conversion Status bit When ADON = 1: 1 = A/D conversion in progress 0 = A/D Idle bit 0 ADON: A/D On bit 1 = A/D Converter module is enabled 0 = A/D Converter module is disabled Note 1: 2: 3: x = Bit is unknown Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. These channels are not implemented on 64-pin devices. Performing a conversion on unimplemented channels will return random values. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 291 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 21-2: ADCON1: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 1(1) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ADFM ADCAL ACQT2 ACQT1 ACQT0 ADCS2 ADCS1 ADCS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 ADFM: A/D Result Format Select bit 1 = Right justified 0 = Left justified bit 6 ADCAL: A/D Calibration bit x = Bit is unknown 1 = Calibration is performed on next A/D conversion 0 = Normal A/D Converter operation (no conversion is performed) bit 5-3 ACQT2:ACQT0: A/D Acquisition Time Select bits 111 = 20 TAD 110 = 16 TAD 101 = 12 TAD 100 = 8 TAD 011 = 6 TAD 010 = 4 TAD 001 = 2 TAD 000 = 0 TAD(1) bit 2-0 ADCS2:ADCS0: A/D Conversion Clock Select bits 111 = FRC (clock derived from A/D RC oscillator)(2) 110 = FOSC/64 101 = FOSC/16 100 = FOSC/4 011 = FRC (clock derived from A/D RC oscillator)(2) 010 = FOSC/32 001 = FOSC/8 000 = FOSC/2 Note 1: 2: Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. If the A/D FRC clock source is selected, a delay of one TCY (instruction cycle) is added before the A/D clock starts. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed before starting a conversion. DS39778B-page 292 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY The ANCON0 and ANCON1 registers are used to configure the operation of the I/O pin associated with each analog channel. Setting any one of the PCFG bits configures the corresponding pin to operate as a digital only I/O. Clearing a bit configures the pin to operate as an analog input for either the A/D Converter or the comparator module; all digital peripherals are disabled, and digital inputs read as ‘0’. As a rule, I/O pins that are multiplexed with analog inputs default to analog operation on device Resets. REGISTER 21-3: ANCON0 and ANCON1 are shared address SFRs, and use the same addresses as the ADCON1 and ADCON0 registers. The ANCON registers are accessed by setting the ADSHR bit (WDTCON<4>). See Section 5.3.4.1 “Shared Address SFRs” for more information. ANCON0: A/D PORT CONFIGURATION REGISTER 2 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PCFG7 PCFG6 — PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 PCFG7:PCFG6: Analog Port Configuration bits (AN7 and AN6) 1 = Pin configured as a digital port 0 = Pin configured as an analog channel; digital input disabled and reads ‘0’ bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 PCFG4:PCFG0: Analog Port Configuration bits (AN4 through AN0) 1 = Pin configured as a digital port 0 = Pin configured as an analog channel; digital input disabled and reads ‘0’ REGISTER 21-4: ANCON1: A/D PORT CONFIGURATION REGISTER 1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PCFG15(1) PCFG14(1) PCFG13(1) PCFG12(1) PCFG11 PCFG10 PCFG9 PCFG8 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-0 Note 1: x = Bit is unknown PCFG15:PCFG8: Analog Port Configuration bits (AN15 through AN8) 1 = Pin configured as a digital port 0 = Pin configured as an analog channel; digital input disabled and reads ‘0’ AN15 through AN12 are implemented only on 80-pin devices. For 64-pin devices, the corresponding PCFGx bits are still implemented for these channels, but have no effect. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 293 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY The analog reference voltage is software selectable to either the device’s positive and negative supply voltage (AVDD and AVSS), or the voltage level on the RA3/AN3/VREF+ and RA2/AN2/VREF- pins. the A/D conversion. When the A/D conversion is complete, the result is loaded into the ADRESH:ADRESL register pair, the GO/DONE bit (ADCON0<1>) is cleared and A/D Interrupt Flag bit, ADIF, is set. The A/D Converter has a unique feature of being able to operate while the device is in Sleep mode. To operate in Sleep, the A/D conversion clock must be derived from the A/D’s internal RC oscillator. A device Reset forces all registers to their Reset state. This forces the A/D module to be turned off and any conversion in progress is aborted. The value in the ADRESH:ADRESL register pair is not modified for a Power-on Reset. These registers will contain unknown data after a Power-on Reset. The output of the sample and hold is the input into the converter, which generates the result via successive approximation. The block diagram of the A/D module is shown in Figure 21-1. Each port pin associated with the A/D Converter can be configured as an analog input or as a digital I/O. The ADRESH and ADRESL registers contain the result of FIGURE 21-1: A/D BLOCK DIAGRAM CHS3:CHS0 1111 AN15(1) 1110 AN14(1) 1101 AN13(1) 1100 AN12(1) 1011 1010 1001 1000 0111 0110 0100 VAIN 0011 (Input Voltage) 10-Bit A/D Converter 0010 0001 VCFG1:VCFG0 0000 VDD(2) Reference Voltage AN11 AN10 AN9 AN8 AN7 AN6 AN4 AN3 AN2 AN1 AN0 VREF+ VREFVSS(2) Note 1: Channels AN15 through AN12 are not available on 64-pin devices. 2: I/O pins have diode protection to VDD and VSS. DS39778B-page 294 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY After the A/D module has been configured as desired, the selected channel must be acquired before the conversion is started. The analog input channels must have their corresponding TRIS bits selected as an input. To determine acquisition time, see Section 21.1 “A/D Acquisition Requirements”. After this acquisition time has elapsed, the A/D conversion can be started. An acquisition time can be programmed to occur between setting the GO/DONE bit and the actual start of the conversion. The following steps should be followed to do an A/D conversion: 1. 2. 3. 4. Wait the required acquisition time (if required). Start conversion: • Set GO/DONE bit (ADCON0<1>) Wait for A/D conversion to complete, by either: • Polling for the GO/DONE bit to be cleared 5. OR • Waiting for the A/D interrupt Read A/D Result registers (ADRESH:ADRESL); clear bit, ADIF, if required. For next conversion, go to step 1 or step 2, as required. The A/D conversion time per bit is defined as TAD. A minimum wait of 2 TAD is required before next acquisition starts. 6. 7. Configure the A/D module: • Configure the required ADC pins as analog pins using ANCON0, ANCON1 • Set voltage reference using ADCON0 • Select A/D input channel (ADCON0) • Select A/D acquisition time (ADCON1) • Select A/D conversion clock (ADCON1) • Turn on A/D module (ADCON0) Configure A/D interrupt (if desired): • Clear ADIF bit • Set ADIE bit • Set GIE bit FIGURE 21-2: ANALOG INPUT MODEL VDD Sampling Switch VT = 0.6V RS VAIN RIC ≤ 1k ANx CPIN 5 pF VT = 0.6V SS RSS ILEAKAGE ±100 nA CHOLD = 25 pF VSS Legend: CPIN = input capacitance VT = threshold voltage ILEAKAGE = leakage current at the pin due to various junctions = interconnect resistance RIC = sampling switch SS = sample/hold capacitance (from DAC) CHOLD RSS = sampling switch resistance © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary VDD 1 2 3 4 Sampling Switch (kΩ) DS39778B-page 295 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 21.1 A/D Acquisition Requirements For the A/D Converter to meet its specified accuracy, the charge holding capacitor (CHOLD) must be allowed to fully charge to the input channel voltage level. The analog input model is shown in Figure 21-2. The source impedance (RS) and the internal sampling switch (RSS) impedance directly affect the time required to charge the capacitor CHOLD. The sampling switch (RSS) impedance varies over the device voltage (VDD). The source impedance affects the offset voltage at the analog input (due to pin leakage current). The maximum recommended impedance for analog sources is 2.5 kΩ. After the analog input channel is selected (changed), the channel must be sampled for at least the minimum acquisition time before starting a conversion. Note: CHOLD Rs Conversion Error VDD Temperature = = ≤ = = 25 pF 2.5 kΩ 1/2 LSb 3V → Rss = 2 kΩ 85°C (system max.) ACQUISITION TIME = Amplifier Settling Time + Holding Capacitor Charging Time + Temperature Coefficient = TAMP + TC + TCOFF EQUATION 21-2: VHOLD or TC Equation 21-3 shows the calculation of the minimum required acquisition time, TACQ. This calculation is based on the following application system assumptions: When the conversion is started, the holding capacitor is disconnected from the input pin. EQUATION 21-1: TACQ To calculate the minimum acquisition time, Equation 21-1 may be used. This equation assumes that 1/2 LSb error is used (1024 steps for the A/D). The 1/2 LSb error is the maximum error allowed for the A/D to meet its specified resolution. A/D MINIMUM CHARGING TIME = (VREF – (VREF/2048)) • (1 – e(-TC/CHOLD(RIC + RSS + RS))) = -(CHOLD)(RIC + RSS + RS) ln(1/2048) EQUATION 21-3: CALCULATING THE MINIMUM REQUIRED ACQUISITION TIME TACQ = TAMP + TC + TCOFF TAMP = 0.2 μs TCOFF = (Temp – 25°C)(0.02 μs/°C) (85°C – 25°C)(0.02 μs/°C) 1.2 μs Temperature coefficient is only required for temperatures > 25°C. Below 25°C, TCOFF = 0 ms. TC = -(CHOLD)(RIC + RSS + RS) ln(1/2048) μs -(25 pF) (1 kΩ + 2 kΩ + 2.5 kΩ) ln(0.0004883) μs 1.05 μs TACQ = 0.2 μs + 1.05 μs + 1.2 μs 2.45 μs DS39778B-page 296 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 21.2 TABLE 21-1: Selecting and Configuring Automatic Acquisition Time AD Clock Source (TAD) The ADCON1 register allows the user to select an acquisition time that occurs each time the GO/DONE bit is set. When the GO/DONE bit is set, sampling is stopped and a conversion begins. The user is responsible for ensuring the required acquisition time has passed between selecting the desired input channel and setting the GO/DONE bit. This occurs when the ACQT2:ACQT0 bits (ADCON1<5:3>) remain in their Reset state (‘000’) and is compatible with devices that do not offer programmable acquisition times. If desired, the ACQT bits can be set to select a programmable acquisition time for the A/D module. When the GO/DONE bit is set, the A/D module continues to sample the input for the selected acquisition time, then automatically begins a conversion. Since the acquisition time is programmed, there may be no need to wait for an acquisition time between selecting a channel and setting the GO/DONE bit. In either case, when the conversion is completed, the GO/DONE bit is cleared, the ADIF flag is set and the A/D begins sampling the currently selected channel again. If an acquisition time is programmed, there is nothing to indicate if the acquisition time has ended or if the conversion has begun. 21.3 Selecting the A/D Conversion Clock Operation ADCS2:ADCS0 Maximum Device Frequency 2 TOSC 000 2.86 MHz TOSC 100 5.71 MHz 8 TOSC 001 11.43 MHz 16 TOSC 101 22.86 MHz 32 TOSC 010 40.00 MHz 64 TOSC 110 40.00 MHz RC(2) x11 1.00 MHz(1) 4 Note 1: 2: 21.4 The RC source has a typical TAD time of 4 μs. For device frequencies above 1 MHz, the device must be in Sleep mode for the entire conversion or the A/D accuracy may be out of specification. Configuring Analog Port Pins The ANCON0, ANCON1, TRISA, TRISF and TRISH registers control the operation of the A/D port pins. The port pins needed as analog inputs must have their corresponding TRIS bits set (input). If the TRIS bit is cleared (output), the digital output level (VOH or VOL) will be converted. The A/D operation is independent of the state of the CHS3:CHS0 bits and the TRIS bits. The A/D conversion time per bit is defined as TAD. The A/D conversion requires 11 TAD per 10-bit conversion. The source of the A/D conversion clock is software selectable. There are seven possible options for TAD: • • • • • • • TAD vs. DEVICE OPERATING FREQUENCIES 2 TOSC 4 TOSC 8 TOSC 16 TOSC 32 TOSC 64 TOSC Internal RC Oscillator Note 1: When reading the PORT register, all pins configured as analog input channels will read as cleared (a low level). Pins configured as digital inputs will convert an analog input. Analog levels on a digitally configured input will be accurately converted. 2: Analog levels on any pin defined as a digital input may cause the digital input buffer to consume current out of the device’s specification limits. For correct A/D conversions, the A/D conversion clock (TAD) must be as short as possible but greater than the minimum TAD (see parameter 130 in Table 27-30 for more information). Table 21-1 shows the resultant TAD times derived from the device operating frequencies and the A/D clock source selected. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 297 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 21.5 A/D Conversions 21.6 Figure 21-3 shows the operation of the A/D Converter after the GO/DONE bit has been set and the ACQT2:ACQT0 bits are cleared. A conversion is started after the following instruction to allow entry into Sleep mode before the conversion begins. An A/D conversion can be started by the “Special Event Trigger” of the ECCP2 module. This requires that the CCP2M3:CCP2M0 bits (CCP2CON<3:0>) be programmed as ‘1011’ and that the A/D module is enabled (ADON bit is set). When the trigger occurs, the GO/DONE bit will be set, starting the A/D acquisition and conversion, and the Timer1 (or Timer3) counter will be reset to zero. Timer1 (or Timer3) is reset to automatically repeat the A/D acquisition period with minimal software overhead (moving ADRESH/ADRESL to the desired location). The appropriate analog input channel must be selected and the minimum acquisition period is either timed by the user, or an appropriate TACQ time is selected before the Special Event Trigger sets the GO/DONE bit (starts a conversion). Figure 21-4 shows the operation of the A/D Converter after the GO/DONE bit has been set, the ACQT2:ACQT0 bits are set to ‘010’ and selecting a 4 TAD acquisition time before the conversion starts. Clearing the GO/DONE bit during a conversion will abort the current conversion. The A/D Result register pair will NOT be updated with the partially completed A/D conversion sample. This means the ADRESH:ADRESL registers will continue to contain the value of the last completed conversion (or the last value written to the ADRESH:ADRESL registers). If the A/D module is not enabled (ADON is cleared), the Special Event Trigger will be ignored by the A/D module but will still reset the Timer1 (or Timer3) counter. After the A/D conversion is completed or aborted, a 2 TAD wait is required before the next acquisition can be started. After this wait, acquisition on the selected channel is automatically started. Note: Use of the ECCP2 Trigger The GO/DONE bit should NOT be set in the same instruction that turns on the A/D. FIGURE 21-3: A/D CONVERSION TAD CYCLES (ACQT2:ACQT0 = 000, TACQ = 0) TCY - TAD TAD1 TAD2 TAD3 TAD4 TAD5 TAD6 TAD7 TAD8 TAD9 TAD10 TAD11 b4 b1 b0 b6 b7 b2 b9 b8 b3 b5 Conversion starts Holding capacitor is disconnected from analog input (typically 100 ns) Set GO/DONE bit Next Q4: ADRESH/ADRESL is loaded, GO/DONE bit is cleared, ADIF bit is set, holding capacitor is connected to analog input. A/D CONVERSION TAD CYCLES (ACQT2:ACQT0 = 010, TACQ = 4 TAD) FIGURE 21-4: TAD Cycles TACQT Cycles 1 2 3 4 1 2 b9 Automatic Acquisition Time 4 5 b8 b7 b6 6 b5 7 b4 8 9 10 11 b3 b2 b1 b0 Conversion starts (Holding capacitor is disconnected) Set GO/DONE bit (Holding capacitor continues acquiring input) DS39778B-page 298 3 Next Q4: ADRESH:ADRESL is loaded, GO/DONE bit is cleared, ADIF bit is set, holding capacitor is reconnected to analog input. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 21.7 A/D Converter Calibration The A/D Converter in the PIC18F87J11 family of devices includes a self-calibration feature which compensates for any offset generated within the module. The calibration process is automated and is initiated by setting the ADCAL bit (ADCON1<6>). The next time the GO/DONE bit is set, the module will perform a “dummy” conversion (that is, with reading none of the input channels) and store the resulting value internally to compensate for the offset. Thus, subsequent offsets will be compensated. An example of a calibration routine is shown in Example 21-1. The calibration process assumes that the device is in a relatively steady-state operating condition. If A/D calibration is used, it should be performed after each device Reset or if there are other major changes in operating conditions. 21.8 Operation in Power-Managed Modes The selection of the automatic acquisition time and A/D conversion clock is determined in part by the clock source and frequency while in a power-managed mode. EXAMPLE 21-1: BSF BCF BCF BSF BSF BSF CALIBRATION BTFSC BRA BCF If the A/D is expected to operate while the device is in a power-managed mode, the ACQT2:ACQT0 and ADCS2:ADCS0 bits in ADCON1 should be updated in accordance with the power-managed mode clock that will be used. After the power-managed mode is entered (either of the power-managed Run modes), an A/D acquisition or conversion may be started. Once an acquisition or conversion is started, the device should continue to be clocked by the same power-managed mode clock source until the conversion has been completed. If desired, the device may be placed into the corresponding power-managed Idle mode during the conversion. If the power-managed mode clock frequency is less than 1 MHz, the A/D RC clock source should be selected. Operation in the Sleep mode requires the A/D RC clock to be selected. If bits, ACQT2:ACQT0, are set to ‘000’ and a conversion is started, the conversion will be delayed one instruction cycle to allow execution of the SLEEP instruction and entry to Sleep mode. The IDLEN and SCS bits in the OSCCON register must have already been cleared prior to starting the conversion. SAMPLE A/D CALIBRATION ROUTINE WDTCON,ADSHR ANCON0,PCFG0 WDTCON,ADSHR ADCON0,ADON ADCON1,ADCAL ADCON0,GO ADCON0,GO CALIBRATION ADCON1,ADCAL © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. ;Enable write/read to the shared SFR ;Make Channel 0 analog ;Disable write/read to the shared SFR ;Enable A/D module ;Enable Calibration ;Start a dummy A/D conversion ; ;Wait for the dummy conversion to finish ; ;Calibration done, turn off calibration enable ;Proceed with the actual A/D conversion Preliminary DS39778B-page 299 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 21-2: Name SUMMARY OF A/D REGISTERS Bit 7 INTCON Bit 6 Bit 5 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 PIR1 PMPIF ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 58 PIE1 PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 58 IPR1 PMPIP ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 58 PIR2 OSCFIF CM2IF CM1IF — BCL1IF LVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF 58 PIE2 OSCFIE CM2IE CM1IE — BCL1IE LVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE 58 IPR2 OSCFIP CM2IP CM1IP — BCL1IP LVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP 58 ADRESH A/D Result Register High Byte 57 ADRESL A/D Result Register Low Byte 57 (2) ADCON0 VCFG1 VCFG0 CHS3 CHS3 CHS1 CHS0 GO/DONE ADON 57 ANCON0(3) PCFG7 PCFG6 — PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 57 ADCON1(2) ADFM ADCAL ACQT2 ACQT1 ACQT0 ADCS2 ADCS1 ADCS0 57 ANCON1(3) PCFG15 PCFG14 PCFG13 PCFG12 PCFG11 PCFG10 PCFG9 PCFG8 57 CCP2CON P2M1 P2M0 DC2B1 DC2B0 CCP2M3 CCP2M2 CCP2M1 CCP2M0 57 PORTA RA7(4) RA6(4) RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0 59 TRISA TRISA7(4) TRISA6(4) TRISA5 TRISA4 TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 58 PORTF RF7 RF6 RF5 RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1 — 59 TRISF TRISF7 TRISF6 TRISF5 TRISF4 TRISF3 TRISF2 TRISF1 — 58 RH7 RH6 RH5 RH4 RH3 RH2 RH1 RH0 59 TRISH7 TRISH6 TRISH5 TRISH4 TRISH3 TRISH2 TRISH1 TRISH0 58 PORTH(1) TRISH(1) Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for A/D conversion. This register is not implemented on 64-pin devices. Default (legacy) SFR at this address, available when WDTCON<4> = 0. Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. These bits are only available in select oscillator modes (FOSC2 Configuration bit = 0); otherwise, they are unimplemented. DS39778B-page 300 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 22.0 COMPARATOR MODULE 22.1 The analog comparator module contains two comparators that can be independently configured in a variety of ways. The inputs can be selected from the analog inputs and two internal voltage references. The digital outputs are available at the pin level and can also be read through the control register. Multiple output and interrupt event generation are also available. A generic single comparator from the module is shown in Figure 22-1. Registers The CMxCON registers (Register 22-1) select the input and output configuration for each comparator, as well as the settings for interrupt generation. The CMSTAT register (Register 22-2) provides the output results of the comparators. The bits in this register are read-only. Key features of the module includes: • • • • • Independent comparator control Programmable input configuration Output to both pin and register levels Programmable output polarity Independent interrupt generation for each comparator with configurable interrupt-on-change FIGURE 22-1: COMPARATOR SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM COUTx (CMSTAT<1:0>) CCH1:CCH0 CxINB 0 CxINC 1(1) CxIND 2(1,2) VIRV Interrupt Logic CMxIF 3 EVPOL<4:3> CREF VIN- CxINA 0 CVREF 1 Note 1: 2: COE - VIN+ Cx Polarity Logic CON CPOL CxOUT Available in 80-pin devices only. Implemented in Comparator 2 only. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 301 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 22-1: R/W-0 CON CMxCON: COMPARATORx CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 COE R/W-0 CPOL R/W-1 EVPOL1 R/W-1 EVPOL0 R/W-1 CREF R/W-1 CCH1 R/W-1 CCH0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7 W = Writable bit ‘1’ = Bit is set U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown CON: Comparator Enable bit 1 = Comparator is enabled 0 = Comparator is disabled COE: Comparator Output Enable bit 1 = Comparator output is present on the CxOUT pin 0 = Comparator output is internal only bit 6 bit 5 CPOL: Comparator Output Polarity Select bit 1 = Comparator output is inverted 0 = Comparator output is not inverted EVPOL1:EVPOL0: Interrupt Polarity Select bits 11 = Interrupt generation on any change of the output(1) 10 = Interrupt generation only on high-to-low transition of the output 01 = Interrupt generation only on low-to-high transition of the output 00 = Interrupt generation is disabled bit 4-3 bit 2 CREF: Comparator Reference Select bit (non-inverting input) 1 = Non-inverting input connects to internal CVREF voltage 0 = Non-inverting input connects to CxINA pin CCH1:CCH0: Comparator Channel Select bits 11 = Inverting input of comparator connects to VIRV 10 = Inverting input of comparator connects to CxIND pin(2) 01 = Inverting input of comparator connects to CxINC pin(2) 00 = Inverting input of comparator connects to CxINB pin bit 1-0 Note 1: 2: The CMxIF is automatically set any time this mode is selected and must be cleared by the application after the initial configuration. Available in 80-pin devices only. DS39778B-page 302 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 22-2: U-0 — CMSTAT: COMPARATOR OUTPUT STATUS REGISTER U-0 — U-0 — U-0 — U-0 — U-0 — R-1 COUT2 R-1 COUT1 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-2 bit 1-0 x = Bit is unknown Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ COUT2:COUT1: Comparator x Status bits If CPOL = 0 (non-inverted polarity): 1 = Comparator’s VIN+ > VIN0 = Comparator’s VIN+ < VINIf CPOL = 1 (inverted polarity): 1 = Comparator VIN+ < VIN0 = Comparator VIN+ > VIN- © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 303 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 22.2 Comparator Operation 22.3 Comparator Response Time A single comparator is shown in Figure 22-2, along with the relationship between the analog input levels and the digital output. When the analog input at VIN+ is less than the analog input VIN-, the output of the comparator is a digital low level. When the analog input at VIN+ is greater than the analog input VIN-, the output of the comparator is a digital high level. The shaded areas of the output of the comparator in Figure 22-2 represent the uncertainty due to input offsets and response time. Response time is the minimum time, after selecting a new reference voltage or input source, before the comparator output has a valid level. The response time of the comparator differs from the settling time of the voltage reference. Therefore, both of these times must be considered when determining the total response to a comparator input change. Otherwise, the maximum delay of the comparators should be used (see Section 27.0 “Electrical Characteristics”). FIGURE 22-2: SINGLE COMPARATOR 22.4 + A simplified circuit for an analog input is shown in Figure 22-3. Since the analog pins are connected to a digital output, they have reverse biased diodes to VDD and VSS. The analog input, therefore, must be between VSS and VDD. If the input voltage deviates from this range by more than 0.6V in either direction, one of the diodes is forward biased and a latch-up condition may occur. A maximum source impedance of 10 kΩ is recommended for the analog sources. Any external component connected to an analog input pin, such as a capacitor or a Zener diode, should have very little leakage current. VIN+ Output – VIN- VINVIN+ Output FIGURE 22-3: Analog Input Connection Considerations COMPARATOR ANALOG INPUT MODEL VDD VT = 0.6V RS < 10k RIC Comparator Input AIN CPIN 5 pF VA VT = 0.6V ILEAKAGE ±500 nA VSS Legend: DS39778B-page 304 CPIN VT ILEAKAGE RIC RS VA = = = = = = Input Capacitance Threshold Voltage Leakage Current at the pin due to various junctions Interconnect Resistance Source Impedance Analog Voltage Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 22.5 Comparator Control and Configuration Each comparator has up to eight possible combinations of inputs: up to four external analog inputs, and one of two internal voltage references. Both comparators allow a selection of the signal from pin, CxINA, or the voltage from the comparator reference (CVREF) on the non-inverting channel. This is compared to either CxINB, CxINC, CXIND or the microcontroller’s fixed internal reference voltage (VIRV, 1.2V nominal) on the inverting channel. The comparator inputs and outputs are tied to fixed I/O pins, defined in Table 22-1. The available configurations and their corresponding bit settings are shown in Figure 22-1. The comparator module also allows the selection of an internally generated voltage reference (CVREF) from the comparator voltage reference module. This module is described in more detail in Section 23.0 “Comparator Voltage Reference Module”. The reference from the Comparator Voltage Reference module is only available when CREF = 1. In this mode, the internal voltage reference is applied to the comparator’s VIN+ pin. Note: 22.5.1.1 TABLE 22-1: Comparator 1 COMPARATOR INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Input or Output I/O Pin C1INA (VIN+) RF6 C1INB (VIN-) RF5 C1INC (VIN-)(1) RH6(1) C1OUT 2 Note 1: 22.5.1 RF2 C2INA(VIN+) RF4 C2INB(VIN-) RF3 C2INC(VIN-)(1) RH4(1) C2IND(VIN-)(1) RH5(1) C2OUT RF1 Comparator Configurations in 64-Pin and 80-Pin Devices In PIC18F87J11 family devices, the C and D input channels for both comparators are linked to pins in PORTH and cannot be reassigned to alternate analog inputs. Because of this, 64-pin devices offer a total of 4 different configurations for each comparator. In contrast, 80-pin devices offer a choice of 6 configurations for Comparator 1, and 8 configurations for Comparator 2. The configurations shown in Figure 22-1 are footnoted to indicate where they are not available. 22.5.2 COMPARATOR ENABLE AND OUTPUT SELECTION The comparator outputs are read through the CMSTAT register. The CMSTAT<0> reads the Comparator 1 output and CMSTAT<1> reads the Comparator 2 output. These bits are read-only. Available in 80-pin devices only. COMPARATOR ENABLE AND INPUT SELECTION Setting the CON bit of the CMxCON register (CMxCON<7>) enables the comparator for operation. Clearing the CON bit disables the comparator resulting in minimum current consumption. The CCH1:CCH0 bits in the CMxCON register (CMxCON<1:0>) direct either one of three analog input pins, or the Internal Reference Voltage (VIRV), to the comparator VIN-. Depending on the comparator operating mode, either an external or internal voltage reference may be used. The analog signal present at VIN- is compared to the signal at VIN+ and the digital output of the comparator is adjusted accordingly. The external reference is used when CREF = 0 (CMxCON<2>) and VIN+ is connected to the CxINA pin. When external voltage references are used, the comparator module can be configured to have the reference sources externally. The reference signal must be between VSS and VDD, and can be applied to either pin of the comparator. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. The comparator input pin selected by CCH1:CH0 must be configured as an input by setting both the corresponding TRISF or TRISH bit, and the corresponding PCFG bit in the ANCON1 register. The comparator outputs may also be directly output to the RF1 and RF2 I/O pins by setting the COE bit (CMxCON<6>). When enabled, multiplexors in the output path of the pins switch to the output of the comparator. The TRISF<1:2> bits still function as the digital output enable for the RF1 and RF2 pins while in this mode. By default, the comparator’s output is at logic high whenever the voltage on VIN+ is greater than on VIN-. The polarity of the comparator outputs can be inverted using the CPOL bit (CMxCON<5>). The uncertainty of each of the comparators is related to the input offset voltage and the response time given in the specifications, as discussed in Section 22.2 “Comparator Operation”. Preliminary DS39778B-page 305 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 22-4: COMPARATOR I/O CONFIGURATIONS Comparator Off CON = 0, CREF = x, CCH1:CCH0 = xx COE VIN- Cx VIN+ Off (Read as ‘0’) CxOUT pin Comparator CxINC > CxINA Compare(1) CON = 1, CREF = 0, CCH1:CCH0 = 01 Comparator CxINB > CxINA Compare CON = 1, CREF = 0, CCH1:CCH0 = 00 COE CxINB CxINA VIN- COE CxINC Cx VIN+ CxOUT pin Comparator CxIND > CxINA Compare(1,2) CON = 1, CREF = 0, CCH1:CCH0 = 10 CxINA VIN- Cx VIN+ CxOUT pin Comparator VIRV > CxINA Compare CON = 1, CREF = 0, CCH1:CCH0 = 11 COE CxIND CxINA VIN- COE VIRV Cx VIN+ CxOUT pin CxINA VIN- Cx VIN+ CxOUT pin Comparator CxINC > CVREF Compare(1) CON = 1, CREF = 1, CCH1:CCH0 = 01 Comparator CxINB > CVREF Compare CON = 1, CREF = 1, CCH1:CCH0 = 00 COE CxINB CVREF VIN- COE CxINC Cx VIN+ CxOUT pin Comparator CxIND > CVREF Compare(1,2) CON = 1, CREF = 1, CCH1:CCH0 = 10 CVREF VIN- Cx VIN+ CxOUT pin Comparator VIRV > CVREF Compare CON = 1, CREF = 1, CCH1:CCH0 = 11 COE CxIND CVREF Legend: Note 1: 2: VINVIN+ COE VIRV Cx CxOUT pin CVREF VINVIN+ Cx CxOUT pin VIRV = Fixed Interval Reference Voltage (1.2V nominal), CVREF = Comparator Voltage Reference module output. Configurations are available on both Comparators 1 and 2 in all package sizes unless otherwise noted. Configuration is available in 80-pin devices only. Configuration is available in Comparator 2 only (80-pin devices). DS39778B-page 306 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 22.6 Comparator Interrupts The comparator interrupt flag is set whenever any of the following occurs: • Low-to-high transition of the comparator output • High-to-low transition of the comparator output • Any change in the comparator output The comparator interrupt selection is done by the EVPOL1:EVPOL0 bits in the CMxCON register (CMxCON<4:3>). In order to provide maximum flexibility, the output of the comparator may be inverted using the CPOL bit in the CMxCON register (CMxCON<5>). This is functionally identical to reversing the inverting and non-inverting inputs of the comparator for a particular mode. An interrupt is generated on the low-to-high or high-tolow transition of the comparator output. This mode of interrupt generation is dependent on EVPOL<1:0> in the CMxCON register. If EVPOL<1:0> = 01 or 10, the interrupt is generated on a low-to-high or high-to-low TABLE 22-2: CPOL transition of the comparator output. Once the interrupt is generated, it is required to clear the interrupt flag by software. When EVPOL<1:0> = 11, the comparator interrupt flag is set whenever there is a change in the output value of either comparator. Software will need to maintain information about the status of the output bits, as read from CMSTAT<1:0>, to determine the actual change that occurred. The CMxIF bits (PIR2<6:5>) are the Comparator Interrupt Flags. The CMxIF bits must be reset by clearing them. Since it is also possible to write a ‘1’ to this register, a simulated interrupt may be initiated. Table 22-2 shows the interrupt generation with respect to comparator input voltages and EVPOL bit settings. Both the CMxIE bits (PIE2<6:5>) and the PEIE bit (INTCON<6>) must be set to enable the interrupt. In addition, the GIE bit (INTCON<7>) must also be set. If any of these bits are clear, the interrupt is not enabled, though the CMxIF bits will still be set if an interrupt condition occurs. COMPARATOR INTERRUPT GENERATION EVPOL<1:0> 00 01 0 10 11 00 01 1 10 11 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Comparator Input Change COUTx Transition VIN+ > VIN- Low-to-High No VIN+ < VIN- High-to-Low No VIN+ > VIN- Low-to-High Yes VIN+ < VIN- High-to-Low No VIN+ > VIN- Low-to-High No VIN+ < VIN- High-to-Low Yes VIN+ > VIN- Low-to-High Yes VIN+ < VIN- High-to-Low Yes VIN+ > VIN- High-to-Low No VIN+ < VIN- Low-to-High No VIN+ > VIN- High-to-Low No VIN+ < VIN- Low-to-High Yes VIN+ > VIN- High-to-Low Yes VIN+ < VIN- Low-to-High No VIN+ > VIN- High-to-Low Yes VIN+ < VIN- Low-to-High Yes Preliminary Interrupt Generated DS39778B-page 307 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 22.7 Comparator Operation During Sleep 22.8 When a comparator is active and the device is placed in Sleep mode, the comparator remains active and the interrupt is functional if enabled. This interrupt will wake-up the device from Sleep mode when enabled. Each operational comparator will consume additional current. To minimize power consumption while in Sleep mode, turn off the comparators (CON = 0) before entering Sleep. If the device wakes up from Sleep, the contents of the CMxCON register are not affected. TABLE 22-3: Name INTCON Effects of a Reset A device Reset forces the CMxCON registers to their Reset state. This forces both comparators and the voltage reference to the OFF state. REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH COMPARATOR MODULE Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 55 PIR2 OSCFIF CM2IF CM1IF — BCL1IF LVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF 58 PIE2 OSCFIE CM2IE CM1IE — BCL1IE LVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE 58 IPR2 OSCFIP CM2IP CM1IP — BCL1IP LVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP 58 CM1CON CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF CCH1 CCH0 56 CM2CON CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF CCH1 CCH0 56 — — — — — — COUT2 COUT1 56 CVRCON(2) CVREN CVROE CVRR CVRSS CVR3 CVR2 CVR1 CVR0 59 ANCON1(2) PCFG15 PCFG14 PCFG13 PCFG12 PCFG11 PCFG10 PCFG9 PCFG8 57 ANCON0(2) PCFG7 PCFG6 — PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 57 CMSTAT RF7 RF6 RF5 RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1 — 59 LATF PORTF LATF7 LATF6 LATF5 LATF4 LATF3 LATF2 LATF1 — 58 TRISF TRISF7 TRISF6 TRISF5 TRISF4 TRISF3 TRISF2 TRISF1 — 58 RH7 RH6 RH5 RH4 RH3 RH2 RH1 RH0 59 TRISH7 TRISH6 TRISH5 TRISH4 TRISH3 TRISH2 TRISH1 TRISH0 58 PORTH(1) (1) TRISH Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for A/D conversion. Note 1: These registers are not implemented on 64-pin devices. 2: Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. DS39778B-page 308 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 23.0 COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE MODULE The comparator voltage reference is a 16-tap resistor ladder network that provides a selectable reference voltage. Although its primary purpose is to provide a reference for the analog comparators, it may also be used independently of them. FIGURE 23-1: A block diagram of the module is shown in Figure 23-1. The resistor ladder is segmented to provide two ranges of CVREF values and has a power-down function to conserve power when the reference is not being used. The module’s supply reference can be provided from either device VDD/VSS or an external voltage reference. COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE BLOCK DIAGRAM VREF+ VDD CVRSS = 1 8R CVRSS = 0 CVR3:CVR0 R CVREN R 16-to-1 MUX R R 16 Steps CVREF R R R CVRR VREF- 8R CVRSS = 1 CVRSS = 0 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 309 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 23.1 Configuring the Comparator Voltage Reference The comparator voltage reference module is controlled through the CVRCON register (Register 23-1). The comparator voltage reference provides two ranges of output voltage, each with 16 distinct levels. The range to be used is selected by the CVRR bit (CVRCON<5>). The primary difference between the ranges is the size of the steps selected by the CVREF Selection bits (CVR3:CVR0), with one range offering finer resolution. The equations used to calculate the output of the comparator voltage reference are as follows: If CVRR = 1: CVREF = ((CVR3:CVR0)/24) x (CVRSRC) The comparator reference supply voltage can come from either VDD and VSS, or the external VREF+ and VREF- that are multiplexed with RA2 and RA3. The voltage source is selected by the CVRSS bit (CVRCON<4>). The settling time of the comparator voltage reference must be considered when changing the CVREF output (see Table 27-3 in Section 27.0 “Electrical Characteristics”). The CVRCON register is a shared address SFR and uses the same address as the PR4 register. The CVRCON register is accessed by setting the ADSHR bit (WDTCON<4>). If CVRR = 0: CVREF = (CVRSRC/4) + ((CVR3:CVR0)/32) x (CVRSRC) REGISTER 23-1: CVRCON: COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CVREN CVROE(1) CVRR CVRSS CVR3 CVR2 CVR1 CVR0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 CVREN: Comparator Voltage Reference Enable bit 1 = CVREF circuit powered on 0 = CVREF circuit powered down bit 6 CVROE: Comparator VREF Output Enable bit(1) 1 = CVREF voltage level is also output on the RF5/AN10/C1INB/CVREF pin 0 = CVREF voltage is disconnected from the RF5/AN10/C1INB/CVREF pin bit 5 CVRR: Comparator VREF Range Selection bit 1 = 0 to 0.667 CVRSRC, with CVRSRC/24 step size (low range) 0 = 0.25 CVRSRC to 0.75 CVRSRC, with CVRSRC/32 step size (high range) bit 4 CVRSS: Comparator VREF Source Selection bit 1 = Comparator reference source, CVRSRC = (VREF+) – (VREF-) 0 = Comparator reference source, CVRSRC = AVDD – AVSS bit 3-0 CVR3:CVR0: Comparator VREF Value Selection bits (0 ≤ (CVR3:CVR0) ≤ 15) When CVRR = 1: CVREF = ((CVR3:CVR0)/24) • (CVRSRC) When CVRR = 0: CVREF = (CVRSRC/4) + ((CVR3:CVR0)/32) • (CVRSRC) Note 1: CVROE overrides the TRISF<5> bit setting. DS39778B-page 310 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 23.2 Voltage Reference Accuracy/Error The full range of voltage reference cannot be realized due to the construction of the module. The transistors on the top and bottom of the resistor ladder network (Figure 23-1) keep CVREF from approaching the reference source rails. The voltage reference is derived from the reference source; therefore, the CVREF output changes with fluctuations in that source. The tested absolute accuracy of the voltage reference can be found in Section 27.0 “Electrical Characteristics”. 23.3 Connection Considerations The voltage reference module operates independently of the comparator module. The output of the reference generator may be connected to the RF5 pin if the CVROE bit is set. Enabling the voltage reference output onto RA2 when it is configured as a digital input will increase current consumption. Connecting RF5 as a digital output with CVRSS enabled will also increase current consumption. FIGURE 23-2: The RF5 pin can be used as a simple D/A output with limited drive capability. Due to the limited current drive capability, a buffer must be used on the voltage reference output for external connections to VREF. Figure 23-2 shows an example buffering technique. 23.4 Operation During Sleep When the device wakes up from Sleep through an interrupt or a Watchdog Timer time-out, the contents of the CVRCON register are not affected. To minimize current consumption in Sleep mode, the voltage reference should be disabled. 23.5 Effects of a Reset A device Reset disables the voltage reference by clearing CVREN (CVRCON<7>). This Reset also disconnects the reference from the RA2 pin by clearing CVROE, and selects the high-voltage range by clearing CVRR. The CVR value select bits are also cleared. COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE OUTPUT BUFFER EXAMPLE PIC18F87J11 CVREF Module R(1) Note 1: TABLE 23-1: + – RF5 Voltage Reference Output Impedance CVREF Output R is dependent upon the comparator voltage reference configuration bits, CVRCON<5> and CVRCON<3:0>. REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 CVRCON(2) CVREN CVROE CVRR CVRSS CVR3 CVR2 CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF TRISA4 TRISA3 TRISA2 CM1CON CM2CON TRISA TRISA7(1) TRISA6(1) TRISA5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: CVR1 CVR0 59 CCH1 CCH0 56 CCH1 CCH0 56 TRISA1 TRISA0 58 Bit 1 TRISF TRISF7 TRISF6 TRISF5 TRISF4 TRISF3 TRISF2 TRISF1 — 58 ANCON0(2) PCFG7 PCFG6 — PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 57 ANCON1(2) PCFG15 PCFG14 PCFG13 PCFG12 PCFG11 PCFG10 PCFG9 PCFG8 57 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used with the comparator voltage reference. Note 1: These bits are only available in select oscillator modes (FOSC2 Configuration bit = 0); otherwise, they are unimplemented. 2: Configuration SFR, overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 311 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 312 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 24.0 SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE CPU PIC18F87J11 Family devices include several features intended to maximize reliability and minimize cost through elimination of external components. These are: • Oscillator Selection • Resets: - Power-on Reset (POR) - Power-up Timer (PWRT) - Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) - Brown-out Reset (BOR) • Interrupts • Watchdog Timer (WDT) • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor • Two-Speed Start-up • Code Protection • In-Circuit Serial Programming CONSIDERATIONS FOR CONFIGURING THE PIC18F87J11 FAMILY DEVICES Unlike previous PIC18 microcontrollers, devices of the PIC18F87J11 Family do not use persistent memory registers to store configuration information. The configuration bytes are implemented as volatile memory which means that configuration data must be programmed each time the device is powered up. Configuration data is stored in the four words at the top of the on-chip program memory space, known as the Flash Configuration Words. It is stored in program memory in the same order shown in Table 24-2, with CONFIG1L at the lowest address and CONFIG3H at the highest. The data is automatically loaded in the proper Configuration registers during device power-up. The oscillator can be configured for the application depending on frequency, power, accuracy and cost. All of the options are discussed in detail in Section 2.0 “Oscillator Configurations”. A complete discussion of device Resets and interrupts is available in previous sections of this data sheet. In addition to their Power-up and Oscillator Start-up Timers provided for Resets, the PIC18F87J11 Family of devices have a configurable Watchdog Timer which is controlled in software. The inclusion of an internal RC oscillator also provides the additional benefits of a Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) and Two-Speed Start-up. FSCM provides for background monitoring of the peripheral clock and automatic switchover in the event of its failure. Two-Speed Start-up enables code to be executed almost immediately on start-up, while the primary clock source completes its start-up delays. All of these features are enabled and configured by setting the appropriate Configuration register bits. 24.1 24.1.1 Configuration Bits When creating applications for these devices, users should always specifically allocate the location of the Flash Configuration Word for configuration data. This is to make certain that program code is not stored in this address when the code is compiled. The volatile memory cells used for the Configuration bits always reset to ‘1’ on Power-on Resets. For all other type of Reset events, the previously programmed values are maintained and used without reloading from program memory. The four Most Significant bits of CONFIG1H, CONFIG2H and CONFIG3H in program memory should also be ‘1111’. This makes these Configuration Words appear to be NOP instructions in the remote event that their locations are ever executed by accident. Since Configuration bits are not implemented in the corresponding locations, writing ‘1’s to these locations has no effect on device operation. To prevent inadvertent configuration changes during code execution, all programmable Configuration bits are write-once. After a bit is initially programmed during a power cycle, it cannot be written to again. Changing a device configuration requires that power to the device be cycled. The Configuration bits can be programmed (read as ‘0’) or left unprogrammed (read as ‘1’) to select various device configurations. These bits are mapped starting at program memory location 300000h. A complete list is shown in Table 24-2. A detailed explanation of the various bit functions is provided in Register 24-1 through Register 24-6. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 313 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 24-1: MAPPING OF THE FLASH CONFIGURATION WORDS TO THE CONFIGURATION REGISTERS Configuration Byte Note 1: Configuration Register Address Code Space Address CONFIG1L XXXF8h 300000h CONFIG1H XXXF9h 300001h CONFIG2L XXXFAh 300002h CONFIG2H XXXFBh 300003h CONFIG3L XXXFCh 300004h CONFIG3H XXXFDh 300005h CONFIG4L(1) XXXFEh 300006h CONFIG4H(1) XXXFFh 300007h Unimplemented in PIC18F87J11 Family devices. TABLE 24-2: CONFIGURATION BITS AND DEVICE IDs File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 300000h CONFIG1L DEBUG XINST 300001h CONFIG1H —(2) —(2) STVREN — —(2) —(2) Default/ Unprogrammed Value(1) Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 — — — WDTEN 111- ---1 — CP0 — — 1111 0111 300002h CONFIG2L IESO FCMEN — — — FOSC2 FOSC1 FOSC0 11-- -111 300003h CONFIG2H —(2) —(2) —(2) —(2) WDTPS3 WDTPS2 WDTPS1 WDTPS0 1111 1111 300004h CONFIG3L WAIT(3) BW(3) EMB1(3) EMB0(3) EASHFT(3) — — — 300005h CONFIG3H —(2) —(2) —(2) —(2) 3FFFFEh DEVID1 DEV2 DEV1 DEV0 REV4 REV3 REV2 REV1 REV0 xxx0 0000(4) 3FFFFFh DEVID2 DEV10 DEV9 DEV8 DEV7 DEV6 DEV5 DEV4 DEV3 0100 00xx(4) Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: MSSPMSK PMPMX(3) ECCPMX(3) CCP2MX 1111 1--1111 1111 x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented. Shaded cells are unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Values reflect the unprogrammed state as received from the factory and following Power-on Resets. In all other Reset states, the configuration bytes maintain their previously programmed states. The value of these bits in program memory should always be ‘1’. This ensures that the location is executed as a NOP if it is accidentally executed. Implemented in 80-pin devices only. See Register 24-7 and Register 24-8 for DEVID values. These registers are read-only and cannot be programmed by the user. DS39778B-page 314 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 24-1: CONFIG1L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 1 LOW (BYTE ADDRESS 300000h) R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/WO-1 DEBUG XINST STVREN — — — — WDTEN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 DEBUG: Background Debugger Enable bit 1 = Background debugger disabled; RB6 and RB7 configured as general purpose I/O pins 0 = Background debugger enabled; RB6 and RB7 are dedicated to In-Circuit Debug bit 6 XINST: Extended Instruction Set Enable bit 1 = Instruction set extension and Indexed Addressing mode enabled 0 = Instruction set extension and Indexed Addressing mode disabled (Legacy mode) bit 5 STVREN: Stack Overflow/Underflow Reset Enable bit 1 = Reset on stack overflow/underflow enabled 0 = Reset on stack overflow/underflow disabled bit 4-1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 WDTEN: Watchdog Timer Enable bit 1 = WDT enabled 0 = WDT disabled (control is placed on SWDTEN bit) REGISTER 24-2: CONFIG1H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 1 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 300001h) U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 U-0 R/WO-1 U-1 U-1 — — — — — CP0 — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 CP0: Code Protection bit 1 = Program memory is not code-protected 0 = Program memory is code-protected bit 1-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39778B-page 315 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 24-3: CONFIG2L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 2 LOW (BYTE ADDRESS 300002h) R/WO-1 R/WO-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 IESO FCMEN — — — FOSC2 FOSC1 FOSC0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 IESO: Two-Speed Start-up (Internal/External Oscillator Switchover) Control bit 1 = Two-Speed Start-up enabled 0 = Two-Speed Start-up disabled bit 6 FCMEN: Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Enable bit 1 = Fail-Safe Clock Monitor enabled 0 = Fail-Safe Clock Monitor disabled bit 5-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-0 FOSC2:FOSC0: Oscillator Selection bits 111 = EC oscillator with PLL enabled; CLKO on RA6 (ECPLL) 110 = EC oscillator; CLKO on RA6 (EC) 101 = HS oscillator with PLL enabled (HSPLL) 100 = HS oscillator (HS) 011 = Internal oscillator with PLL enabled; CLKO on RA6, port function on RA7 (INTPLL1) 010 = Internal oscillator with PLL enabled; port function on RA6 and RA7 (INTPLL2) 001 = Internal oscillator block; CLKO on RA6, port function on RA7 (INTIO1) 000 = Internal oscillator block ; port function on RA6 and RA7 (INTIO2) DS39778B-page 316 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 24-4: CONFIG2H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 2 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 300003h) U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 — — — — WDTPS3 WDTPS2 WDTPS1 WDTPS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3-0 WDTPS3:WDTPS0: Watchdog Timer Postscale Select bits 1111 = 1:32,768 1110 = 1:16,384 1101 = 1:8,192 1100 = 1:4,096 1011 = 1:2,048 1010 = 1:1,024 1001 = 1:512 1000 = 1:256 0111 = 1:128 0110 = 1:64 0101 = 1:32 0100 = 1:16 0011 = 1:8 0010 = 1:4 0001 = 1:2 0000 = 1:1 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39778B-page 317 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 24-5: CONFIG3L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 3 LOW (BYTE ADDRESS 300004h) R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 WAIT(1) BW(1) EMB1(1) EMB0(1) EASHFT(1) — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 WAIT: External Bus Wait Enable bit(1) 1 = Wait states on the external bus are disabled 0 = Wait states on the external bus are enabled and selected by MEMCON<5:4> bit 6 BW: Data Bus Width Select bit(1) 1 = 16-Bit Data Width modes 0 = 8-Bit Data Width modes bit 5-4 EMB1:EMB0: External Memory Bus Configuration bits(1) 11 = Microcontroller mode, external bus disabled 10 = Extended Microcontroller mode, 12-bit address width for external bus 01 = Extended Microcontroller mode, 16-bit address width for external bus 00 = Extended Microcontroller mode, 20-bit address width for external bus bit 3 EASHFT: External Address Bus Shift Enable bit(1) 1 = Address shifting enabled – external address bus is shifted to start at 000000h 0 = Address shifting disabled – external address bus reflects the PC value bit 2-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Note 1: Implemented on 80-pin devices only. DS39778B-page 318 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 24-6: CONFIG3H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 3 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 300005h) U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 — — — — MSSPMSK PMPMX(1) ECCPMX(1) CCP2MX bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 MSSPMSK: MSSP Address Masking Mode Select bit 1 = 7-Bit Address Masking mode enabled 0 = 5-Bit Address Masking mode enable bit 2 PMPMX: PMP Pin Multiplex bit(1) 1 = PMP data and control multiplexed to same pins as external memory bus (PORTD and PORTE) 0 = PMP data and control multiplexed to alternate pin assignments (PORTA, PORTF and PORTH) bit 1 ECCPMX: ECCPx MUX bit(1) 1 = ECCP1 outputs (P1B/P1C) are multiplexed with RE6 and RE5; ECCP3 outputs (P3B/P3C) are multiplexed with RE4 and RE3 0 = ECCP1 outputs (P1B/P1C) are multiplexed with RH7 and RH6; ECCP3 outputs (P3B/P3C) are multiplexed with RH5 and RH4 bit 0 CCP2MX: ECCP2 MUX bit 1 = ECCP2/P2A is multiplexed with RC1 0 = ECCP2/P2A is multiplexed with RE7 in Microcontroller mode (all devices) or with RB3 in Extended Microcontroller mode (80-pin devices only) Note 1: Implemented on 80-pin devices only. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 319 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 24-7: DEVID1: DEVICE ID REGISTER 1 FOR PIC18F87J11 FAMILY DEVICES R R R R R R R R DEV2 DEV1 DEV0 REV4 REV3 REV2 REV1 REV0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-5 DEV2:DEV0: Device ID bits See Register 24-8 for a complete listing. bit 4-0 REV4:REV0: Revision ID bits These bits are used to indicate the device revision. REGISTER 24-8: x = Bit is unknown DEVID2: DEVICE ID REGISTER 2 FOR PIC18F87J11 FAMILY DEVICES R R R R R R R R DEV10 DEV9 DEV8 DEV7 DEV6 DEV5 DEV4 DEV3 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-0 x = Bit is unknown DEV10:DEV3: Device ID bits: DS39778B-page 320 DEV10:DEV3 (DEVID2<7:0>) DEV2:DEV0 (DEVID1<7:5>) Device 0100 0100 010 PIC18F66J11 0100 0100 011 PIC18F66J16 0100 0100 100 PIC18F67J11 0100 0100 111 PIC18F86J11 0100 0101 000 PIC18F86J16 0100 0101 001 PIC18F87J11 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 24.2 Watchdog Timer (WDT) For PIC18F87J11 Family devices, the WDT is driven by the INTRC oscillator. When the WDT is enabled, the clock source is also enabled. The nominal WDT period is 4 ms and has the same stability as the INTRC oscillator. The 4 ms period of the WDT is multiplied by a 16-bit postscaler. Any output of the WDT postscaler is selected by a multiplexor, controlled by the WDTPS bits in Configuration Register 2H. Available periods range from about 4 ms to 135 seconds (2.25 minutes depending on voltage, temperature and WDT postscaler). The WDT and postscaler are cleared whenever a SLEEP or CLRWDT instruction is executed, or a clock failure (primary or Timer1 oscillator) has occurred. Note 1: The CLRWDT and SLEEP instructions clear the WDT and postscaler counts when executed. 2: When a CLRWDT instruction is executed, the postscaler count will be cleared. 24.2.1 CONTROL REGISTER The WDTCON register (Register 24-9) is a readable and writable register. The SWDTEN bit enables or disables WDT operation. This allows software to override the WDTEN Configuration bit and enable the WDT only if it has been disabled by the Configuration bit. The ADSHR bit selects which SFRs are currently selected and accessible. See Section 5.3.4.1 “Shared Address SFRs” for additional details. The LVDSTAT is a read-only status bit which is continuously updated and provides information about the current level of VDDCORE. This bit is only valid when the on-chip voltage regulator is enabled. FIGURE 24-1: SWDTEN WDT BLOCK DIAGRAM Enable WDT INTRC Control WDT Counter INTRC Oscillator Wake-up from Power-Managed Modes ÷128 Programmable Postscaler 1:1 to 1:32,768 CLRWDT All Device Resets Reset WDT Reset WDT WDTPS3:WDTPS0 4 Sleep © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 321 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY REGISTER 24-9: WDTCON: WATCHDOG TIMER CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R-x U-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 REGSLP LVDSTAT — ADSHR — — — SWDTEN(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 REGSLP: Voltage Regulator Low-Power Operation Enable bit 1 = On-chip regulator enters low-power operation when device enters Sleep mode 0 = On-chip regulator is active, even in Sleep mode bit 6 LVDSTAT: LVD Status bit 1 = VDDCORE > 2.45V 0 = VDDCORE < 2.45V bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 ADSHR: Shared Address SFR Select bit For details of bit operation, see Register 5-3. bit 3-1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 SWDTEN: Software Controlled Watchdog Timer Enable bit(1) 1 = Watchdog Timer is on 0 = Watchdog Timer is off Note 1: This bit has no effect if the Configuration bit, WDTEN, is enabled. TABLE 24-3: Name RCON WDTCON SUMMARY OF WATCHDOG TIMER REGISTERS Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 IPEN — REGSLP LVDSTAT Bit 0 Reset Values on Page: POR BOR 56 — SWDTEN 57 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 CM RI TO PD — ADSHR — — Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Watchdog Timer. DS39778B-page 322 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 24.3 FIGURE 24-2: On-Chip Voltage Regulator All of the PIC18F87J11 family devices power their core digital logic at a nominal 2.5V. For designs that are required to operate at a higher typical voltage, such as 3.3V, all devices in the PIC18F87J11 family incorporate an on-chip regulator that allows the device to run its core logic from VDD. The regulator is controlled by the ENVREG pin. Tying VDD to the pin enables the regulator, which in turn, provides power to the core from the other VDD pins. When the regulator is enabled, a low-ESR filter capacitor must be connected to the VDDCORE/VCAP pin (Figure 24-2). This helps to maintain the stability of the regulator. The recommended value for the filter capacitor is provided in Section 27.3 “DC Characteristics: PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial)”. Regulator Enabled (ENVREG tied to VDD): 3.3V PIC18F87J11 VDD ENVREG VDDCORE/VCAP CF VSS Regulator Disabled (ENVREG tied to ground): If ENVREG is tied to VSS, the regulator is disabled. In this case, separate power for the core logic at a nominal 2.5V must be supplied to the device on the VDDCORE/VCAP pin to run the I/O pins at higher voltage levels, typically 3.3V. Alternatively, the VDDCORE/VCAP and VDD pins can be tied together to operate at a lower nominal voltage. Refer to Figure 24-2 for possible configurations. 24.3.1 CONNECTIONS FOR THE ON-CHIP REGULATOR 2.5V(1) 3.3V(1) PIC18F87J11 VDD ENVREG VDDCORE/VCAP VSS VOLTAGE REGULATOR TRACKING MODE AND LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTION When it is enabled, the on-chip regulator provides a constant voltage of 2.5V nominal to the digital core logic. The regulator can provide this level from a VDD of about 2.5V, all the way up to the device’s VDDMAX. It does not have the capability to boost VDD levels below 2.5V. In order to prevent “brown-out” conditions, when the voltage drops too low for the regulator, the regulator enters Tracking mode. In Tracking mode, the regulator output follows VDD, with a typical voltage drop of 100 mV. The on-chip regulator includes a simple, Low-Voltage Detect (LVD) circuit. If VDD drops too low to maintain approximately 2.45V on VDDCORE, the circuit sets the Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Flag, LVDIF (PIR2<2>). This can be used to generate an interrupt and put the application into a low-power operational mode, or trigger an orderly shutdown. Low-Voltage Detection is only available when the regulator is enabled. Regulator Disabled (VDD tied to VDDCORE): 2.5V(1) PIC18F87J11 VDD ENVREG VDDCORE/VCAP VSS Note 1: These are typical operating voltages. Refer to Section 27.1 “DC Characteristics: Supply Voltage” for the full operating ranges of VDD and VDDCORE. The Low-Voltage Detect interrupt is edge-sensitive. The interrupt flag will only be set once per falling edge of VDDCORE. Firmware can clear the interrupt flag, but a new interrupt will not be generated until VDDCORE rises back above, and then falls below, the 2.45 threshold. Upon device Resets, the interrupt flag will reset to ‘0’, even if VDDCORE is less than 2.45V. When the regulator is enabled, the LVDSTAT bit in the WDTCON register can be polled to determine the current level of VDDCORE. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 323 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 24.3.2 ON-CHIP REGULATOR AND BOR Substantial Sleep mode power savings can be obtained by setting the REGSLP bit, but device wake-up time will increase in order to insure the regulator has enough time to stabilize. The REGSLP bit is automatically cleared by hardware when a Low-Voltage Detect condition occurs. When the on-chip regulator is enabled, PIC18F87J11 family devices also have a simple brown-out capability. If the voltage supplied to the regulator is inadequate to maintain a regulated level, the regulator Reset circuitry will generate a Brown-out Reset. This event is captured by the BOR flag bit (RCON<0>). 24.4 The operation of the Brown-out Reset is described in more detail in Section 4.4 “Brown-out Reset (BOR)” and Section 4.4.1 “Detecting BOR”. The brown-out voltage levels are specific in Section 27.1 “DC Characteristics: Supply Voltage PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial)”. The Two-Speed Start-up feature helps to minimize the latency period, from oscillator start-up to code execution, by allowing the microcontroller to use the INTRC oscillator as a clock source until the primary clock source is available. It is enabled by setting the IESO Configuration bit. 24.3.3 Two-Speed Start-up should be enabled only if the primary oscillator mode is HS or HSPLL (Crystal-Based) modes. Since the EC and ECPLL modes do not require an Oscillator Start-up Timer delay, Two-Speed Start-up should be disabled. POWER-UP REQUIREMENTS The on-chip regulator is designed to meet the power-up requirements for the device. If the application does not use the regulator, then strict power-up conditions must be adhered to. While powering up, VDDCORE must never exceed VDD by 0.3 volts. 24.3.4 When enabled, Resets and wake-ups from Sleep mode cause the device to configure itself to run from the internal oscillator block as the clock source, following the time-out of the Power-up Timer after a Power-on Reset is enabled. This allows almost immediate code execution while the primary oscillator starts and the OST is running. Once the OST times out, the device automatically switches to PRI_RUN mode. OPERATION IN SLEEP MODE When enabled, the on-chip regulator always consumes a small incremental amount of current over IDD. This includes when the device is in Sleep mode, even though the core digital logic does not require power. To provide additional savings in applications where power resources are critical, the regulator can be configured to automatically disable itself whenever the device goes into Sleep mode. This feature is controlled by the REGSLP bit (WDTCON<7>, Register 24-9). Setting this bit disables the regulator in Sleep mode and reduces its current consumption to a minimum. FIGURE 24-3: Two-Speed Start-up In all other power-managed modes, Two-Speed Start-up is not used. The device will be clocked by the currently selected clock source until the primary clock source becomes available. The setting of the IESO bit is ignored. TIMING TRANSITION FOR TWO-SPEED START-UP (INTRC TO HSPLL) Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q1 INTRC OSC1 TOST(1) TPLL(1) 1 PLL Clock Output 2 n-1 n Clock Transition CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter PC Wake from Interrupt Event Note 1: DS39778B-page 324 PC + 2 PC + 4 PC + 6 OSTS bit Set TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 24.4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR USING TWO-SPEED START-UP While using the INTRC oscillator in Two-Speed Start-up, the device still obeys the normal command sequences for entering power-managed modes, including serial SLEEP instructions (refer to Section 3.1.4 “Multiple Sleep Commands”). In practice, this means that user code can change the SCS1:SCS0 bit settings or issue SLEEP instructions before the OST times out. This would allow an application to briefly wake-up, perform routine “housekeeping” tasks and return to Sleep before the device starts to operate from the primary oscillator. User code can also check if the primary clock source is currently providing the device clocking by checking the status of the OSTS bit (OSCCON<3>). If the bit is set, the primary oscillator is providing the clock. Otherwise, the internal oscillator block is providing the clock during wake-up from Reset or Sleep mode. 24.5 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Clock failure is tested for on the falling edge of the sample clock. If a sample clock falling edge occurs while CM is still set, a clock failure has been detected (Figure 24-5). This causes the following: • the FSCM generates an oscillator fail interrupt by setting bit OSCFIF (PIR2<7>); • the device clock source is switched to the internal oscillator block (OSCCON is not updated to show the current clock source – this is the fail-safe condition); and • the WDT is reset. During switchover, the postscaler frequency from the internal oscillator block may not be sufficiently stable for timing sensitive applications. In these cases, it may be desirable to select another clock configuration and enter an alternate power-managed mode. This can be done to attempt a partial recovery or execute a controlled shutdown. See Section 3.1.4 “Multiple Sleep Commands” and Section 24.4.1 “Special Considerations for Using Two-Speed Start-up” for more details. The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) allows the microcontroller to continue operation in the event of an external oscillator failure by automatically switching the device clock to the internal oscillator block. The FSCM function is enabled by setting the FCMEN Configuration bit. The FSCM will detect failures of the primary or secondary clock sources only. If the internal oscillator block fails, no failure would be detected, nor would any action be possible. When FSCM is enabled, the INTRC oscillator runs at all times to monitor clocks to peripherals and provide a backup clock in the event of a clock failure. Clock monitoring (shown in Figure 24-4) is accomplished by creating a sample clock signal which is the INTRC output divided by 64. This allows ample time between FSCM sample clocks for a peripheral clock edge to occur. The peripheral device clock and the sample clock are presented as inputs to the Clock Monitor (CM) latch. The CM is set on the falling edge of the device clock source but cleared on the rising edge of the sample clock. Both the FSCM and the WDT are clocked by the INTRC oscillator. Since the WDT operates with a separate divider and counter, disabling the WDT has no effect on the operation of the INTRC oscillator when the FSCM is enabled. FIGURE 24-4: FSCM BLOCK DIAGRAM 24.5.1 FSCM AND THE WATCHDOG TIMER As already noted, the clock source is switched to the INTRC clock when a clock failure is detected; this may mean a substantial change in the speed of code execution. If the WDT is enabled with a small prescale value, a decrease in clock speed allows a WDT time-out to occur and a subsequent device Reset. For this reason, fail-safe clock events also reset the WDT and postscaler, allowing it to start timing from when execution speed was changed and decreasing the likelihood of an erroneous time-out. Clock Monitor Latch (CM) (edge-triggered) Peripheral Clock INTRC Source (32 μs) ÷ 64 S Q C Q 488 Hz (2.048 ms) Clock Failure Detected © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 325 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 24-5: FSCM TIMING DIAGRAM Sample Clock Oscillator Failure Device Clock Output CM Output (Q) Failure Detected OSCFIF CM Test CM Test Note: 24.5.2 The device clock is normally at a much higher frequency than the sample clock. The relative frequencies in this example have been chosen for clarity. EXITING FAIL-SAFE OPERATION The fail-safe condition is terminated by either a device Reset or by entering a power-managed mode. On Reset, the controller starts the primary clock source specified in Configuration Register 2H (with any required start-up delays that are required for the oscillator mode, such as OST or PLL timer). The INTRC oscillator provides the device clock until the primary clock source becomes ready (similar to a Two-Speed Start-up). The clock source is then switched to the primary clock (indicated by the OSTS bit in the OSCCON register becoming set). The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor then resumes monitoring the peripheral clock. The primary clock source may never become ready during start-up. In this case, operation is clocked by the INTRC oscillator. The OSCCON register will remain in its Reset state until a power-managed mode is entered. 24.5.3 CM Test 24.5.4 The FSCM is designed to detect oscillator failure at any point after the device has exited Power-on Reset (POR) or low-power Sleep mode. When the primary device clock is either the EC or INTRC modes, monitoring can begin immediately following these events. For HS or HSPLL modes, the situation is somewhat different. Since the oscillator may require a start-up time considerably longer than the FSCM sample clock time, a false clock failure may be detected. To prevent this, the internal oscillator block is automatically configured as the device clock and functions until the primary clock is stable (the OST and PLL timers have timed out). This is identical to Two-Speed Start-up mode. Once the primary clock is stable, the INTRC returns to its role as the FSCM source. Note: FSCM INTERRUPTS IN POWER-MANAGED MODES By entering a power-managed mode, the clock multiplexor selects the clock source selected by the OSCCON register. Fail-Safe Clock Monitoring of the power-managed clock source resumes in the power-managed mode. If an oscillator failure occurs during power-managed operation, the subsequent events depend on whether or not the oscillator failure interrupt is enabled. If enabled (OSCFIF = 1), code execution will be clocked by the INTRC multiplexor. An automatic transition back to the failed clock source will not occur. If the interrupt is disabled, subsequent interrupts while in Idle mode will cause the CPU to begin executing instructions while being clocked by the INTRC source. DS39778B-page 326 POR OR WAKE-UP FROM SLEEP The same logic that prevents false oscillator failure interrupts on POR, or wake from Sleep, will also prevent the detection of the oscillator’s failure to start at all following these events. This can be avoided by monitoring the OSTS bit and using a timing routine to determine if the oscillator is taking too long to start. Even so, no oscillator failure interrupt will be flagged. As noted in Section 24.4.1 “Special Considerations for Using Two-Speed Start-up”, it is also possible to select another clock configuration and enter an alternate power-managed mode while waiting for the primary clock to become stable. When the new power-managed mode is selected, the primary clock is disabled. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 24.6 Program Verification and Code Protection 24.7 For all devices in the PIC18F87J11 Family of devices, the on-chip program memory space is treated as a single block. Code protection for this block is controlled by one Configuration bit, CP0. This bit inhibits external reads and writes to the program memory space. It has no direct effect in normal execution mode. 24.6.1 CONFIGURATION REGISTER PROTECTION The Configuration registers are protected against untoward changes or reads in two ways. The primary protection is the write-once feature of the Configuration bits which prevents reconfiguration once the bit has been programmed during a power cycle. To safeguard against unpredictable events, Configuration bit changes resulting from individual cell level disruptions (such as ESD events) will cause a parity error and trigger a device Reset. This is seen by the user as a Configuration Match Reset. The data for the Configuration registers is derived from the Flash Configuration Words in program memory. When the CP0 bit set, the source data for device configuration is also protected as a consequence. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. In-Circuit Serial Programming PIC18F87J11 Family microcontrollers can be serially programmed while in the end application circuit. This is simply done with two lines for clock and data and three other lines for power, ground and the programming voltage. This allows customers to manufacture boards with unprogrammed devices and then program the microcontroller just before shipping the product. This also allows the most recent firmware or a custom firmware to be programmed. 24.8 In-Circuit Debugger When the DEBUG Configuration bit is programmed to a ‘0’, the In-Circuit Debugger functionality is enabled. This function allows simple debugging functions when used with MPLAB® IDE. When the microcontroller has this feature enabled, some resources are not available for general use. Table 24-4 shows which resources are required by the background debugger. TABLE 24-4: DEBUGGER RESOURCES I/O pins: RB6, RB7 Stack: 2 levels Program Memory: 512 bytes Data Memory: 10 bytes Preliminary DS39778B-page 327 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 328 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 25.0 INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY The PIC18F87J11 Family of devices incorporate the standard set of 75 PIC18 core instructions, as well as an extended set of 8 new instructions for the optimization of code that is recursive or that utilizes a software stack. The extended set is discussed later in this section. 25.1 Standard Instruction Set The standard PIC18 instruction set adds many enhancements to the previous PIC® instruction sets, while maintaining an easy migration from these instruction sets. Most instructions are a single program memory word (16 bits), but there are four instructions that require two program memory locations. Each single-word instruction is a 16-bit word divided into an opcode, which specifies the instruction type and one or more operands, which further specify the operation of the instruction. The instruction set is highly orthogonal and is grouped into four basic categories: • • • • Byte-oriented operations Bit-oriented operations Literal operations Control operations The PIC18 instruction set summary in Table 25-2 lists byte-oriented, bit-oriented, literal and control operations. Table 25-1 shows the opcode field descriptions. Most byte-oriented instructions have three operands: 1. 2. 3. The file register (specified by ‘f’) The destination of the result (specified by ‘d’) The accessed memory (specified by ‘a’) The file register designator, ‘f’, specifies which file register is to be used by the instruction. The destination designator, ‘d’, specifies where the result of the operation is to be placed. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in the WREG register. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed in the file register specified in the instruction. • A literal value to be loaded into a file register (specified by ‘k’) • The desired FSR register to load the literal value into (specified by ‘f’) • No operand required (specified by ‘—’) The control instructions may use some of the following operands: • A program memory address (specified by ‘n’) • The mode of the CALL or RETURN instructions (specified by ‘s’) • The mode of the table read and table write instructions (specified by ‘m’) • No operand required (specified by ‘—’) All instructions are a single word, except for four double-word instructions. These instructions were made double-word to contain the required information in 32 bits. In the second word, the 4 MSbs are ‘1’s. If this second word is executed as an instruction (by itself), it will execute as a NOP. All single-word instructions are executed in a single instruction cycle, unless a conditional test is true or the program counter is changed as a result of the instruction. In these cases, the execution takes two instruction cycles with the additional instruction cycle(s) executed as a NOP. The double-word instructions execute in two instruction cycles. One instruction cycle consists of four oscillator periods. Thus, for an oscillator frequency of 4 MHz, the normal instruction execution time is 1 μs. If a conditional test is true, or the program counter is changed as a result of an instruction, the instruction execution time is 2 μs. Two-word branch instructions (if true) would take 3 μs. Figure 25-1 shows the general formats that the instructions can have. All examples use the convention ‘nnh’ to represent a hexadecimal number. The instruction set summary, shown in Table 25-2, lists the standard instructions recognized by the Microchip MPASMTM Assembler. All bit-oriented instructions have three operands: 1. 2. 3. The literal instructions may use some of the following operands: The file register (specified by ‘f’) The bit in the file register (specified by ‘b’) The accessed memory (specified by ‘a’) Section 25.1.1 “Standard Instruction Set” provides a description of each instruction. The bit field designator ‘b’ selects the number of the bit affected by the operation, while the file register designator, ‘f’, represents the number of the file in which the bit is located. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 329 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 25-1: OPCODE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS Field Description a RAM access bit: a = 0: RAM location in Access RAM (BSR register is ignored) a = 1: RAM bank is specified by BSR register bbb Bit address within an 8-bit file register (0 to 7). BSR Bank Select Register. Used to select the current RAM bank. C, DC, Z, OV, N ALU Status bits: Carry, Digit Carry, Zero, Overflow, Negative. d Destination select bit: d = 0: store result in WREG d = 1: store result in file register f dest Destination: either the WREG register or the specified register file location. f 8-bit register file address (00h to FFh), or 2-bit FSR designator (0h to 3h). fs 12-bit register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the source address. fd 12-bit register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the destination address. GIE Global Interrupt Enable bit. k Literal field, constant data or label (may be either an 8-bit, 12-bit or a 20-bit value). label Label name. mm The mode of the TBLPTR register for the table read and table write instructions. Only used with table read and table write instructions: * No Change to register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) *+ Post-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) *- Post-Decrement register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) Pre-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) +* n The relative address (2’s complement number) for relative branch instructions or the direct address for Call/Branch and Return instructions. PC Program Counter. PCL Program Counter Low Byte. PCH Program Counter High Byte. PCLATH Program Counter High Byte Latch. PCLATU Program Counter Upper Byte Latch. PD Power-Down bit. PRODH Product of Multiply High Byte. PRODL Product of Multiply Low Byte. s Fast Call/Return mode select bit: s = 0: do not update into/from shadow registers s = 1: certain registers loaded into/from shadow registers (Fast mode) TBLPTR 21-bit Table Pointer (points to a program memory location). TABLAT 8-bit Table Latch. TO Time-out bit. TOS Top-of-Stack. u Unused or Unchanged. WDT Watchdog Timer. WREG Working register (accumulator). x Don’t care (‘0’ or ‘1’). The assembler will generate code with x = 0. It is the recommended form of use for compatibility with all Microchip software tools. zs 7-bit offset value for Indirect Addressing of register files (source). 7-bit offset value for Indirect Addressing of register files (destination). zd { } Optional argument. [text] Indicates Indexed Addressing. (text) The contents of text. [expr]<n> Specifies bit n of the register indicated by the pointer, expr. → Assigned to. < > Register bit field. ∈ In the set of. italics User-defined term (font is Courier New). DS39778B-page 330 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 25-1: GENERAL FORMAT FOR INSTRUCTIONS Byte-oriented file register operations 15 10 9 OPCODE Example Instruction 8 7 d 0 a f (FILE #) ADDWF MYREG, W, B d = 0 for result destination to be WREG register d = 1 for result destination to be file register (f) a = 0 to force Access Bank a = 1 for BSR to select bank f = 8-bit file register address Byte to Byte move operations (2-word) 15 12 11 0 OPCODE 15 f (Source FILE #) 12 11 MOVFF MYREG1, MYREG2 0 f (Destination FILE #) 1111 f = 12-bit file register address Bit-oriented file register operations 15 12 11 9 8 7 0 OPCODE b (BIT #) a f (FILE #) BSF MYREG, bit, B b = 3-bit position of bit in file register (f) a = 0 to force Access Bank a = 1 for BSR to select bank f = 8-bit file register address Literal operations 15 8 7 0 OPCODE MOVLW 7Fh k (literal) k = 8-bit immediate value Control operations CALL, GOTO and Branch operations 15 8 7 0 OPCODE 15 GOTO Label n<7:0> (literal) 12 11 0 n<19:8> (literal) 1111 n = 20-bit immediate value 15 8 7 OPCODE 15 S 0 CALL MYFUNC n<7:0> (literal) 12 11 0 n<19:8> (literal) 1111 S = Fast bit 15 11 10 OPCODE 15 0 8 7 OPCODE © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. BRA MYFUNC n<10:0> (literal) 0 n<7:0> (literal) Preliminary BC MYFUNC DS39778B-page 331 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 25-2: PIC18F87J11 FAMILY INSTRUCTION SET Mnemonic, Operands 16-Bit Instruction Word Description Cycles MSb LSb Status Affected Notes BYTE-ORIENTED OPERATIONS ADDWF ADDWFC ANDWF CLRF COMF CPFSEQ CPFSGT CPFSLT DECF DECFSZ DCFSNZ INCF INCFSZ INFSNZ IORWF MOVF MOVFF f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, a f, d, a f, a f, a f, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a fs, fd MOVWF MULWF NEGF RLCF RLNCF RRCF RRNCF SETF SUBFWB f, a f, a f, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, a f, d, a SUBWF f, d, a SUBWFB f, d, a Add WREG and f Add WREG and Carry bit to f AND WREG with f Clear f Complement f Compare f with WREG, Skip = Compare f with WREG, Skip > Compare f with WREG, Skip < Decrement f Decrement f, Skip if 0 Decrement f, Skip if Not 0 Increment f Increment f, Skip if 0 Increment f, Skip if Not 0 Inclusive OR WREG with f Move f Move fs (source) to 1st word fd (destination) 2nd word Move WREG to f Multiply WREG with f Negate f Rotate Left f through Carry Rotate Left f (No Carry) Rotate Right f through Carry Rotate Right f (No Carry) Set f Subtract f from WREG with Borrow Subtract WREG from f Subtract WREG from f with Borrow Swap Nibbles in f Test f, Skip if 0 Exclusive OR WREG with f 1 1 1 1 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1 2 C, DC, Z, OV, N C, DC, Z, OV, N Z, N Z Z, N None None None C, DC, Z, OV, N None None C, DC, Z, OV, N None None Z, N Z, N None 1, 2 1, 2 1,2 2 1, 2 4 4 1, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 4 1, 2 1, 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0010 0010 0001 0110 0001 0110 0110 0110 0000 0010 0100 0010 0011 0100 0001 0101 1100 1111 0110 0000 0110 0011 0100 0011 0100 0110 0101 01da 00da 01da 101a 11da 001a 010a 000a 01da 11da 11da 10da 11da 10da 00da 00da ffff ffff 111a 001a 110a 01da 01da 00da 00da 100a 01da ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff 1 1 0101 11da 0101 10da ffff ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N 1, 2 ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N 1 0011 10da 1 (2 or 3) 0110 011a 1 0001 10da ffff ffff ffff ffff None ffff None ffff Z, N None None 1, 2 C, DC, Z, OV, N C, Z, N 1, 2 Z, N C, Z, N Z, N None 1, 2 C, DC, Z, OV, N SWAPF TSTFSZ XORWF f, d, a f, a f, d, a Note 1: When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is ‘1’ for a pin configured as input and is driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a ‘0’. If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and, where applicable, d = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if assigned. If the Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16 bits. This ensures that all program memory locations have a valid instruction. 2: 3: 4: DS39778B-page 332 Preliminary 4 1, 2 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 25-2: PIC18F87J11 FAMILY INSTRUCTION SET (CONTINUED) 16-Bit Instruction Word Mnemonic, Operands Description Cycles MSb LSb Status Affected Notes BIT-ORIENTED OPERATIONS BCF BSF BTFSC BTFSS BTG f, b, a f, b, a f, b, a f, b, a f, b, a Bit Clear f Bit Set f Bit Test f, Skip if Clear Bit Test f, Skip if Set Bit Toggle f 1 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1001 1000 1011 1010 0111 bbba bbba bbba bbba bbba ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff None None None None None Branch if Carry Branch if Negative Branch if Not Carry Branch if Not Negative Branch if Not Overflow Branch if Not Zero Branch if Overflow Branch Unconditionally Branch if Zero Call Subroutine 1st word 2nd word Clear Watchdog Timer Decimal Adjust WREG Go to Address 1st word 2nd word No Operation No Operation Pop Top of Return Stack (TOS) Push Top of Return Stack (TOS) Relative Call Software Device Reset Return from Interrupt Enable 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 2 1 (2) 2 0010 0110 0011 0111 0101 0001 0100 0nnn 0000 110s kkkk 0000 0000 1111 kkkk 0000 xxxx 0000 0000 1nnn 0000 0000 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn kkkk kkkk 0000 0000 kkkk kkkk 0000 xxxx 0000 0000 nnnn 1111 0001 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn kkkk kkkk 0100 0111 kkkk kkkk 0000 xxxx 0110 0101 nnnn 1111 000s None None None None None None None None None None 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1101 1110 1110 1111 0000 0000 1110 1111 0000 1111 0000 0000 1101 0000 0000 Return with Literal in WREG Return from Subroutine Go into Standby mode 2 2 1 0000 1100 0000 0000 0000 0000 kkkk 0001 0000 1, 2 1, 2 3, 4 3, 4 1, 2 CONTROL OPERATIONS BC BN BNC BNN BNOV BNZ BOV BRA BZ CALL n n n n n n n n n n, s CLRWDT — DAW — GOTO n NOP NOP POP PUSH RCALL RESET RETFIE — — — — n s RETLW k RETURN s SLEEP — Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 1 1 2 TO, PD C None None None None None None All GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL kkkk None 001s None 0011 TO, PD 4 When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is ‘1’ for a pin configured as input and is driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a ‘0’. If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and, where applicable, d = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if assigned. If the Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16 bits. This ensures that all program memory locations have a valid instruction. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 333 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 25-2: PIC18F87J11 FAMILY INSTRUCTION SET (CONTINUED) 16-Bit Instruction Word Mnemonic, Operands Description Cycles MSb LSb Status Affected Notes LITERAL OPERATIONS ADDLW ANDLW IORLW LFSR k k k f, k MOVLB MOVLW MULLW RETLW SUBLW XORLW k k k k k k Add Literal and WREG AND Literal with WREG Inclusive OR Literal with WREG Move Literal (12-bit) 2nd word to FSR (f) 1st word Move Literal to BSR<3:0> Move Literal to WREG Multiply Literal with WREG Return with Literal in WREG Subtract WREG from Literal Exclusive OR Literal with WREG 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 0000 0000 0000 1110 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1011 1001 1110 0000 0001 1110 1101 1100 1000 1010 kkkk kkkk kkkk 00ff kkkk 0000 kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk C, DC, Z, OV, N Z, N Z, N None 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 None None None None None None None None None None None None C, DC, Z, OV, N Z, N DATA MEMORY ↔ PROGRAM MEMORY OPERATIONS TBLRD* TBLRD*+ TBLRD*TBLRD+* TBLWT* TBLWT*+ TBLWT*TBLWT+* Note 1: 2: 3: 4: Table Read 2 Table Read with Post-Increment Table Read with Post-Decrement Table Read with Pre-Increment Table Write 2 Table Write with Post-Increment Table Write with Post-Decrement Table Write with Pre-Increment When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is ‘1’ for a pin configured as input and is driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a ‘0’. If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and, where applicable, d = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if assigned. If the Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16 bits. This ensures that all program memory locations have a valid instruction. DS39778B-page 334 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 25.1.1 STANDARD INSTRUCTION SET ADDLW ADD Literal to W ADDWF ADD W to f Syntax: ADDLW Syntax: ADDWF Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (W) + (f) → dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: (W) + k → W Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0000 1111 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are added to the 8-bit literal ‘k’ and the result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Encoding: 0010 Description: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: ADDLW 01da ffff ffff Add W to register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 15h Before Instruction W = 10h After Instruction W = 25h f {,d {,a}} Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: ADDWF Before Instruction W = REG = After Instruction W = REG = Note: REG, 0, 0 17h 0C2h 0D9h 0C2h All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument preceding the instruction mnemonic for use in symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction format then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 335 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY ADDWFC ADD W and Carry bit to f ANDLW AND Literal with W Syntax: ADDWFC Syntax: ANDLW Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] f {,d {,a}} (W) + (f) + (C) → dest Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: 0010 Description: 00da Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: (W) .AND. k → W Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: N,OV, C, DC, Z ffff ffff Add W, the Carry flag and data memory location ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed in data memory location ‘f’. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 0000 1011 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are ANDed with the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. k Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: ANDLW Before Instruction W = After Instruction W = 05Fh A3h 03h Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: ADDWFC Before Instruction Carry bit = REG = W = After Instruction Carry bit = REG = W = DS39778B-page 336 REG, 0, 1 1 02h 4Dh 0 02h 50h Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY ANDWF AND W with f BC Branch if Carry Syntax: ANDWF Syntax: BC Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] f {,d {,a}} Operation: (W) .AND. (f) → dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0001 Description: Operands: -128 ≤ n ≤ 127 Operation: if Carry bit is ‘1’, (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 01da ffff ffff 1110 Description: The contents of W are ANDed with register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: nnnn nnnn Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: 0010 If the Carry bit is ’1’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. n ANDWF Before Instruction W = REG = After Instruction W = REG = REG, 0, 0 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Example: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Carry PC If Carry PC 17h C2h 02h C2h © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Q1 Decode Preliminary BC 5 = address (HERE) = = = = 1; address (HERE + 12) 0; address (HERE + 2) DS39778B-page 337 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY BCF Bit Clear f BN Branch if Negative Syntax: BCF Syntax: BN Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 0≤b≤7 a ∈ [0,1] f, b {,a} Operation: 0 → f<b> Status Affected: None Encoding: 1001 Description: Operands: -128 ≤ n ≤ 127 Operation: if Negative bit is ‘1’, (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Status Affected: None Encoding: bbba ffff ffff 1110 Description: Bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is cleared. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: BCF Before Instruction FLAG_REG = C7h After Instruction FLAG_REG = 47h DS39778B-page 338 FLAG_REG, 0110 nnnn nnnn If the Negative bit is ‘1’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Q Cycle Activity: Decode n If No Jump: 7, 0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Example: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Negative PC If Negative PC Preliminary BN Jump = address (HERE) = = = = 1; address (Jump) 0; address (HERE + 2) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY BNC Branch if Not Carry BNN Branch if Not Negative Syntax: BNC Syntax: BNN n n Operands: -128 ≤ n ≤ 127 Operands: -128 ≤ n ≤ 127 Operation: if Carry bit is ‘0’, (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Operation: if Negative bit is ‘0’, (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 Description: 0011 nnnn nnnn If the Carry bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. Encoding: 1110 Description: The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. nnnn nnnn The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: 0111 If the Negative bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation If No Jump: Example: If No Jump: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Carry PC If Carry PC BNC Jump = address (HERE) = = = = 0; address (Jump) 1; address (HERE + 2) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Example: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Negative PC If Negative PC Preliminary BNN Jump = address (HERE) = = = = 0; address (Jump) 1; address (HERE + 2) DS39778B-page 339 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY BNOV Branch if Not Overflow BNZ Branch if Not Zero Syntax: BNOV Syntax: BNZ n n Operands: -128 ≤ n ≤ 127 Operands: -128 ≤ n ≤ 127 Operation: if Overflow bit is ‘0’, (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Operation: if Zero bit is ‘0’, (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 Description: 0101 nnnn nnnn If the Overflow bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. Encoding: 1110 Description: The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. nnnn nnnn The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: 0001 If the Zero bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation If No Jump: If No Jump: Example: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Overflow PC If Overflow PC DS39778B-page 340 BNOV Jump = address (HERE) = = = = 0; address (Jump) 1; address (HERE + 2) Example: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Zero PC If Zero PC Preliminary BNZ Jump = address (HERE) = = = = 0; address (Jump) 1; address (HERE + 2) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY BRA Unconditional Branch BSF Bit Set f Syntax: BRA Syntax: BSF Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 0≤b≤7 a ∈ [0,1] Operation: 1 → f<b> Status Affected: None n Operands: -1024 ≤ n ≤ 1023 Operation: (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1101 Description: 0nnn nnnn nnnn Add the 2’s complement number ‘2n’ to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Encoding: 1000 Description: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation bbba ffff ffff Bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is set. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Q Cycle Activity: Decode f, b {,a} Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Example: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction PC BRA Jump = address (HERE) = address (Jump) Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: BSF Before Instruction FLAG_REG After Instruction FLAG_REG © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary FLAG_REG, 7, 1 = 0Ah = 8Ah DS39778B-page 341 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY BTFSC Bit Test File, Skip if Clear BTFSS Bit Test File, Skip if Set Syntax: BTFSC f, b {,a} Syntax: BTFSS f, b {,a} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 0≤b≤7 a ∈ [0,1] Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 0≤b<7 a ∈ [0,1] Operation: skip if (f<b>) = 0 Operation: skip if (f<b>) = 1 Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 1011 Description: bbba ffff ffff If bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is ‘0’, then the next instruction is skipped. If bit ‘b’ is ‘0’, then the next instruction fetched during the current instruction execution is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. Encoding: 1010 Description: bbba ffff ffff If bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is ‘1’, then the next instruction is skipped. If bit ‘b’ is ‘1’, then the next instruction fetched during the current instruction execution is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip: If skip: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE FALSE TRUE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If FLAG<1> PC If FLAG<1> PC DS39778B-page 342 BTFSC : : FLAG, 1, 0 = address (HERE) = = = = 0; address (TRUE) 1; address (FALSE) Example: HERE FALSE TRUE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If FLAG<1> PC If FLAG<1> PC Preliminary BTFSS : : FLAG, 1, 0 = address (HERE) = = = = 0; address (FALSE) 1; address (TRUE) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY BTG Bit Toggle f BOV Branch if Overflow Syntax: BTG f, b {,a} Syntax: BOV Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 0≤b<7 a ∈ [0,1] Operands: -128 ≤ n ≤ 127 Operation: if Overflow bit is ‘1’, (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Status Affected: None Operation: (f<b>) → f<b> Status Affected: None Encoding: 0111 Description: Encoding: bbba ffff ffff 1110 Description: Bit ‘b’ in data memory location ‘f’ is inverted. Words: Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: BTG PORTC, © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. nnnn Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation 4, 0 Before Instruction: PORTC = 0111 0101 [75h] After Instruction: PORTC = 0110 0101 [65h] nnnn Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: 1 Cycles: 0100 If the Overflow bit is ‘1’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. n Example: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Overflow PC If Overflow PC Preliminary BOV Jump = address (HERE) = = = = 1; address (Jump) 0; address (HERE + 2) DS39778B-page 343 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY BZ Branch if Zero CALL Subroutine Call Syntax: BZ Syntax: CALL k {,s} n Operands: -128 ≤ n ≤ 127 Operands: Operation: if Zero bit is ‘1’, (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC 0 ≤ k ≤ 1048575 s ∈ [0,1] Operation: Status Affected: None (PC) + 4 → TOS, k → PC<20:1>; if s = 1, (W) → WS, (STATUS) → STATUSS, (BSR) → BSRS Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 Description: 0000 nnnn nnnn If the Zero bit is ‘1’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Encoding: 1st word (k<7:0>) 2nd word(k<19:8>) Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation If No Jump: Example: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Zero PC If Zero PC DS39778B-page 344 BZ address (HERE) = = = = 1; address (Jump) 0; address (HERE + 2) k7kkk kkkk kkkk0 kkkk8 Subroutine call of entire 2-Mbyte memory range. First, return address (PC + 4) is pushed onto the return stack. If ‘s’ = 1, the W, STATUS and BSR registers are also pushed into their respective shadow registers, WS, STATUSS and BSRS. If ‘s’ = 0, no update occurs (default). Then, the 20-bit value ‘k’ is loaded into PC<20:1>. CALL is a two-cycle instruction. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Jump = 110s k19kkk Description: Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Decode 1110 1111 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’<7:0>, Push PC to stack Read literal ’k’<19:8>, Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE Before Instruction PC = After Instruction PC = TOS = WS = BSRS = STATUSS = Preliminary CALL THERE,1 address (HERE) address (THERE) address (HERE + 4) W BSR STATUS © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY CLRF Clear f Syntax: CLRF Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 a ∈ [0,1] f {,a} Operation: 000h → f, 1→Z Status Affected: Z Encoding: 0110 Description: 101a ffff ffff Clears the contents of the specified register. CLRWDT Clear Watchdog Timer Syntax: CLRWDT Operands: None Operation: 000h → WDT, 000h → WDT postscaler, 1 → TO, 1 → PD Status Affected: TO, PD Encoding: 0000 Words: 1 Cycles: 1 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q Cycle Activity: Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: CLRF Before Instruction FLAG_REG After Instruction FLAG_REG FLAG_REG,1 = 5Ah = 00h © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 0100 Words: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation Process Data No operation Example: Q1 0000 CLRWDT instruction resets the Watchdog Timer. It also resets the postscaler of the WDT. Status bits, TO and PD, are set. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 0000 Description: Preliminary CLRWDT Before Instruction WDT Counter After Instruction WDT Counter WDT Postscaler TO PD = ? = = = = 00h 0 1 1 DS39778B-page 345 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY COMF Complement f CPFSEQ Compare f with W, Skip if f = W Syntax: COMF Syntax: CPFSEQ Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) – (W), skip if (f) = (W) (unsigned comparison) Status Affected: None f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: f → dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0001 Description: 11da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are complemented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). Encoding: Description: If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 1 Cycles: 1 Decode Q2 Read register ‘f’ Example: COMF Before Instruction REG = After Instruction REG = W = 13h 13h ECh Q3 Process Data REG, 0, 0 ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Q4 Words: 1 Write to destination Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read register ‘f’ Q3 Process Data Q4 No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 No No No operation operation operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 No No No operation operation operation No No No operation operation operation Example: HERE NEQUAL EQUAL Before Instruction PC Address W REG After Instruction If REG PC If REG PC DS39778B-page 346 ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). Q Cycle Activity: Q1 001a Compares the contents of data memory location ‘f’ to the contents of W by performing an unsigned subtraction. If ‘f’ = W, then the fetched instruction is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). Words: 0110 f {,a} Preliminary Q4 No operation Q4 No operation No operation CPFSEQ REG, 0 : : = = = HERE ? ? = = ≠ = W; Address (EQUAL) W; Address (NEQUAL) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY CPFSGT Compare f with W, Skip if f > W CPFSLT Compare f with W, Skip if f < W Syntax: CPFSGT Syntax: CPFSLT Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 a ∈ [0,1] Operands: Operation: (f) – (W), skip if (f) > (W) (unsigned comparison) 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) – (W), skip if (f) < (W) (unsigned comparison) Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 0110 f {,a} 010a ffff ffff Compares the contents of data memory location ‘f’ to the contents of the W by performing an unsigned subtraction. Encoding: 0110 Description: If the contents of ‘f’ are greater than the contents of WREG, then the fetched instruction is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q2 Read register ‘f’ Q3 Process Data Q4 No operation Example: HERE NGREATER GREATER Before Instruction PC W After Instruction If REG PC If REG PC Address (HERE) ? > = ≤ = W; Address (GREATER) W; Address (NGREATER) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Compares the contents of data memory location ‘f’ to the contents of W by performing an unsigned subtraction. 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: CPFSGT REG, 0 : : = = ffff Words: Q4 No operation Q4 No operation No operation ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 No No No operation operation operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 No No No operation operation operation No No No operation operation operation 000a If the contents of ‘f’ are less than the contents of W, then the fetched instruction is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. f {,a} Preliminary HERE NLESS LESS Before Instruction PC W After Instruction If REG PC If REG PC CPFSLT REG, 1 : : = = Address (HERE) ? < = ≥ = W; Address (LESS) W; Address (NLESS) DS39778B-page 347 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY DAW Decimal Adjust W Register DECF Decrement f Syntax: DAW Syntax: DECF f {,d {,a}} Operands: None Operands: Operation: If [W<3:0> > 9] or [DC = 1] then, (W<3:0>) + 6 → W<3:0>; else, (W<3:0>) → W<3:0> 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) – 1 → dest Status Affected: C, DC, N, OV, Z Encoding: If [W<7:4> > 9] or [C = 1] then, (W<7:4>) + 6 → W<7:4>, C = 1; else, (W<7:4>) → W<7:4> Status Affected: 0000 Description: C Encoding: 0000 Description: 0000 0000 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register W Process Data Write W Example 1: A5h 0 0 DS39778B-page 348 Decrement register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: DECF Before Instruction CNT = Z = After Instruction CNT = Z = 05h 1 0 Example 2: Before Instruction W = C = DC = After Instruction W = C = DC = ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. DAW Before Instruction W = C = DC = After Instruction W = C = DC = ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). 0111 DAW adjusts the eight-bit value in W, resulting from the earlier addition of two variables (each in packed BCD format) and produces a correct packed BCD result. Words: 01da CNT, 1, 0 01h 0 00h 1 CEh 0 0 34h 1 0 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY DECFSZ Decrement f, Skip if 0 DCFSNZ Decrement f, Skip if not 0 Syntax: DECFSZ f {,d {,a}} Syntax: DCFSNZ Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) – 1 → dest, skip if result = 0 Operation: (f) – 1 → dest, skip if result ≠ 0 Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 0010 Description: 11da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are decremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). Encoding: 0100 Description: If the result is ‘0’, the next instruction which is already fetched is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Q2 Q3 Q4 Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination If skip: If skip: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation DECFSZ GOTO CNT, 1, 1 LOOP Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: CONTINUE HERE ZERO NZERO Before Instruction TEMP After Instruction TEMP If TEMP PC If TEMP PC Address (HERE) CNT – 1 0; Address (CONTINUE) 0; Address (HERE + 2) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Q1 No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 No operation Before Instruction PC = After Instruction CNT = If CNT = PC = If CNT ≠ PC = 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode HERE ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Q Cycle Activity: Example: ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 1 11da The contents of register ‘f’ are decremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If the result is not ‘0’, the next instruction which is already fetched is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). Words: f {,d {,a}} Preliminary DCFSNZ : : TEMP, 1, 0 = ? = = = ≠ = TEMP – 1, 0; Address (ZERO) 0; Address (NZERO) DS39778B-page 349 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY GOTO Unconditional Branch INCF Increment f Syntax: GOTO k Syntax: INCF Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 1048575 Operands: Operation: k → PC<20:1> Status Affected: None 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) + 1 → dest Status Affected: C, DC, N, OV, Z Encoding: 1st word (k<7:0>) 2nd word(k<19:8>) 1110 1111 1111 k19kkk k7kkk kkkk kkkk0 kkkk8 Description: GOTO allows an unconditional branch anywhere within entire 2-Mbyte memory range. The 20-bit value ‘k’ is loaded into PC<20:1>. GOTO is always a two-cycle instruction. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Encoding: 0010 Description: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read literal ‘k’<7:0>, No operation Read literal ‘k’<19:8>, Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 GOTO THERE After Instruction PC = Address (THERE) Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: INCF Before Instruction CNT = Z = C = DC = After Instruction CNT = Z = C = DC = DS39778B-page 350 10da If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). Q Cycle Activity: Decode f {,d {,a}} Preliminary CNT, 1, 0 FFh 0 ? ? 00h 1 1 1 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY INCFSZ Increment f, Skip if 0 INFSNZ Syntax: INCFSZ Syntax: INFSNZ 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] f {,d {,a}} Increment f, Skip if not 0 f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operands: Operation: (f) + 1 → dest, skip if result = 0 Operation: (f) + 1 → dest, skip if result ≠ 0 Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 0011 Description: 11da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’. (default) Encoding: 0100 Description: 10da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If the result is ‘0’, the next instruction which is already fetched is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. If the result is not ‘0’, the next instruction which is already fetched is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip: If skip: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE NZERO ZERO Before Instruction PC = After Instruction CNT = If CNT = PC = If CNT ≠ PC = INCFSZ : : CNT, 1, 0 Example: Before Instruction PC = After Instruction REG = If REG ≠ PC = If REG = PC = Address (HERE) CNT + 1 0; Address (ZERO) 0; Address (NZERO) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. HERE ZERO NZERO Preliminary INFSNZ REG, 1, 0 Address (HERE) REG + 1 0; Address (NZERO) 0; Address (ZERO) DS39778B-page 351 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY IORLW Inclusive OR Literal with W IORWF Inclusive OR W with f Syntax: IORLW k Syntax: IORWF Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operands: Operation: (W) .OR. k → W Status Affected: N, Z 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (W) .OR. (f) → dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0000 1001 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are ORed with the eight-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Encoding: 0001 Description: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: IORLW Before Instruction W = After Instruction W = 00da ffff ffff Inclusive OR W with register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 35h 9Ah BFh f {,d {,a}} Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: IORWF Before Instruction RESULT = W = After Instruction RESULT = W = DS39778B-page 352 Preliminary RESULT, 0, 1 13h 91h 13h 93h © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY LFSR Load FSR MOVF Move f Syntax: LFSR f, k Syntax: MOVF Operands: 0≤f≤2 0 ≤ k ≤ 4095 Operands: Operation: k → FSRf 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Status Affected: None Operation: f → dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 1110 1111 1110 0000 00ff k7kkk k11kkk kkkk Description: The 12-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into the file select register pointed to by ‘f’. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Encoding: 0101 Description: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ MSB Process Data Write literal ‘k’ MSB to FSRfH Decode Read literal ‘k’ LSB Process Data Write literal ‘k’ to FSRfL Example: After Instruction FSR2H FSR2L 03h ABh 00da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are moved to a destination dependent upon the status of ‘d’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). Location ‘f’ can be anywhere in the 256-byte bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. LFSR 2, 3ABh = = f {,d {,a}} Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write W Example: MOVF Before Instruction REG W After Instruction REG W © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary REG, 0, 0 = = 22h FFh = = 22h 22h DS39778B-page 353 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY MOVFF Move f to f MOVLB Move Literal to Low Nibble in BSR Syntax: MOVFF fs,fd Syntax: MOVLW k Operands: 0 ≤ fs ≤ 4095 0 ≤ fd ≤ 4095 Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: k → BSR Status Affected: None Operation: (fs) → fd Status Affected: None Encoding: 1st word (source) 2nd word (destin.) Encoding: 1100 1111 Description: ffff ffff ffff ffff ffffs ffffd The contents of source register ‘fs’ are moved to destination register ‘fd’. Location of source ‘fs’ can be anywhere in the 4096-byte data space (000h to FFFh) and location of destination ‘fd’ can also be anywhere from 000h to FFFh. 2 Cycles: 2 kkkk kkkk The eight-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into the Bank Select Register (BSR). The value of BSR<7:4> always remains ‘0’ regardless of the value of k7:k4. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write literal ‘k’ to BSR MOVLB 5 Example: The MOVFF instruction cannot use the PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the destination register Words: 0001 Description: Either source or destination can be W (a useful special situation). MOVFF is particularly useful for transferring a data memory location to a peripheral register (such as the transmit buffer or an I/O port). 0000 Before Instruction BSR Register = After Instruction BSR Register = 02h 05h Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ (src) Process Data No operation Decode No operation No operation Write register ‘f’ (dest) No dummy read Example: MOVFF Before Instruction REG1 REG2 After Instruction REG1 REG2 DS39778B-page 354 REG1, REG2 = = 33h 11h = = 33h 33h Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY MOVLW Move Literal to W MOVWF Move W to f Syntax: MOVLW k Syntax: MOVWF Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operands: Operation: k→W 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 a ∈ [0,1] Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 Description: 1110 kkkk kkkk The eight-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Operation: (W) → f Status Affected: None Encoding: 0110 Description: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: After Instruction W = MOVLW f {,a} 111a ffff ffff Move data from W to register ‘f’. Location ‘f’ can be anywhere in the 256-byte bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 5Ah 5Ah Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: MOVWF Before Instruction W = REG = After Instruction W = REG = © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary REG, 0 4Fh FFh 4Fh 4Fh DS39778B-page 355 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY MULLW Multiply Literal with W MULWF Syntax: MULLW Syntax: MULWF Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operands: Operation: (W) x k → PRODH:PRODL 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 a ∈ [0,1] Status Affected: None Operation: (W) x (f) → PRODH:PRODL Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 Description: k 1101 kkkk kkkk An unsigned multiplication is carried out between the contents of W and the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The 16-bit result is placed in PRODH:PRODL register pair. PRODH contains the high byte. Multiply W with f Encoding: 0000 Description: W is unchanged. None of the Status flags are affected. 1 Cycles: 1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write registers PRODH: PRODL MULLW If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 0C4h = = = E2h ? ? = = = E2h ADh 08h Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write registers PRODH: PRODL Example: Before Instruction W REG PRODH PRODL After Instruction W REG PRODH PRODL DS39778B-page 356 ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). Decode Before Instruction W PRODH PRODL After Instruction W PRODH PRODL ffff Note that neither Overflow nor Carry is possible in this operation. A Zero result is possible but not detected. Q Cycle Activity: Example: 001a An unsigned multiplication is carried out between the contents of W and the register file location ‘f’. The 16-bit result is stored in the PRODH:PRODL register pair. PRODH contains the high byte. Both W and ‘f’ are unchanged. None of the Status flags are affected. Note that neither Overflow nor Carry is possible in this operation. A Zero result is possible but not detected. Words: f {,a} Preliminary MULWF REG, 1 = = = = C4h B5h ? ? = = = = C4h B5h 8Ah 94h © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NEGF Negate f Syntax: NEGF Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 a ∈ [0,1] f {,a} Operation: (f) + 1 → f Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0110 Description: 110a ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 1 1 Syntax: NOP Operands: None Operation: No operation Status Affected: None 0000 1111 ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). Cycles: No Operation Encoding: Location ‘f’ is negated using two’s complement. The result is placed in the data memory location ‘f’. Words: NOP 0000 xxxx Description: No operation. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 0000 xxxx 0000 xxxx Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation No operation No operation Example: None. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: NEGF Before Instruction REG = After Instruction REG = REG, 1 0011 1010 [3Ah] 1100 0110 [C6h] © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 357 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY POP Pop Top of Return Stack PUSH Push Top of Return Stack Syntax: POP Syntax: PUSH Operands: None Operands: None Operation: (TOS) → bit bucket Operation: (PC + 2) → TOS Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0110 Description: The TOS value is pulled off the return stack and is discarded. The TOS value then becomes the previous value that was pushed onto the return stack. This instruction is provided to enable the user to properly manage the return stack to incorporate a software stack. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Encoding: Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation POP TOS value No operation POP GOTO NEW Before Instruction TOS Stack (1 level down) DS39778B-page 358 0000 0101 The PC + 2 is pushed onto the top of the return stack. The previous TOS value is pushed down on the stack. This instruction allows implementing a software stack by modifying TOS and then pushing it onto the return stack. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 After Instruction TOS PC 0000 Description: Q Cycle Activity: Example: 0000 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode PUSH PC + 2 onto return stack No operation No operation Example: = = = = 0031A2h 014332h 014332h NEW Preliminary PUSH Before Instruction TOS PC = = 345Ah 0124h After Instruction PC TOS Stack (1 level down) = = = 0126h 0126h 345Ah © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY RCALL Relative Call RESET Reset Syntax: RCALL Syntax: RESET n Operands: -1024 ≤ n ≤ 1023 Operands: None Operation: (PC) + 2 → TOS, (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Operation: Reset all registers and flags that are affected by a MCLR Reset. Status Affected: None Status Affected: All Encoding: 1101 Description: 1nnn nnnn nnnn Subroutine call with a jump up to 1K from the current location. First, return address (PC + 2) is pushed onto the stack. Then, add the 2’s complement number ‘2n’ to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Encoding: 0000 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation 1111 Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Start reset No operation No operation Example: Q1 1111 This instruction provides a way to execute a MCLR Reset in software. Q Cycle Activity: Decode 0000 Description: After Instruction Registers = Flags* = RESET Reset Value Reset Value PUSH PC to stack No operation Example: No operation HERE RCALL Jump Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) After Instruction PC = Address (Jump) TOS = Address (HERE + 2) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 359 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY RETFIE Return from Interrupt RETLW Return Literal to W Syntax: RETFIE {s} Syntax: RETLW k Operands: s ∈ [0,1] Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: (TOS) → PC, 1 → GIE/GIEH or PEIE/GIEL; if s = 1, (WS) → W, (STATUSS) → STATUS, (BSRS) → BSR, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged Operation: k → W, (TOS) → PC, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged Status Affected: None Status Affected: Encoding: 0000 Description: 0000 0001 Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: kkkk kkkk W is loaded with the eight-bit literal ‘k’. The program counter is loaded from the top of the stack (the return address). The high address latch (PCLATH) remains unchanged. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 000s Return from interrupt. Stack is popped and Top-of-Stack (TOS) is loaded into the PC. Interrupts are enabled by setting either the high or low-priority global interrupt enable bit. If ‘s’ = 1, the contents of the shadow registers WS, STATUSS and BSRS are loaded into their corresponding registers W, STATUS and BSR. If ‘s’ = 0, no update of these registers occurs (default). 1100 Description: GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL. Encoding: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data POP PC from stack, write to W No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation No operation POP PC from stack Set GIEH or GIEL No operation 0000 No operation Example: RETFIE After Interrupt PC W BSR STATUS GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL DS39778B-page 360 No operation No operation 1 = = = = = TOS WS BSRS STATUSS 1 CALL TABLE ; ; ; ; : TABLE ADDWF PCL ; RETLW k0 ; RETLW k1 ; : : RETLW kn ; Before Instruction W = After Instruction W = Preliminary W contains table offset value W now has table value W = offset Begin table End of table 07h value of kn © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY RETURN Return from Subroutine RLCF Rotate Left f through Carry Syntax: RETURN {s} Syntax: RLCF Operands: s ∈ [0,1] Operands: Operation: (TOS) → PC; if s = 1, (WS) → W, (STATUSS) → STATUS, (BSRS) → BSR, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f<n>) → dest<n + 1>, (f<7>) → C, (C) → dest<0> Status Affected: C, N, Z Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 Description: Encoding: 0000 0001 001s 0011 Description: Return from subroutine. The stack is popped and the top of the stack (TOS) is loaded into the program counter. If ‘s’= 1, the contents of the shadow registers WS, STATUSS and BSRS are loaded into their corresponding registers W, STATUS and BSR. If ‘s’ = 0, no update of these registers occurs (default). Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation Process Data POP PC from stack No operation No operation No operation No operation 01da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the left through the Carry flag. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Q Cycle Activity: Decode f {,d {,a}} register f C Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Example: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination RETURN After Instruction: PC = TOS Example: Before Instruction REG = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary RLCF REG, 0, 0 1110 0110 0 1110 0110 1100 1100 1 DS39778B-page 361 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY RLNCF Rotate Left f (No Carry) RRCF Rotate Right f through Carry Syntax: RLNCF Syntax: RRCF Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f<n>) → dest<n + 1>, (f<7>) → dest<0> Operation: Status Affected: N, Z (f<n>) → dest<n – 1>, (f<0>) → C, (C) → dest<7> Status Affected: C, N, Z Encoding: 0100 Description: f {,d {,a}} 01da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the left. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). Encoding: 0011 Description: If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). 1 1 Q1 Decode Q2 Read register ‘f’ Example: Before Instruction REG = After Instruction REG = DS39778B-page 362 RLNCF Q3 Process Data Q4 Write to destination Words: 1 Cycles: register f 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination REG, 1, 0 1010 1011 ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the right through the Carry flag. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). C Q Cycle Activity: ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. register f Cycles: 00da If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: f {,d {,a}} Example: RRCF Before Instruction REG = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = 0101 0111 Preliminary REG, 0, 0 1110 0110 0 1110 0110 0111 0011 0 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY RRNCF Rotate Right f (No Carry) SETF Set f Syntax: RRNCF Syntax: SETF Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f<n>) → dest<n – 1>, (f<0>) → dest<7> Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0100 Description: f {,d {,a}} 00da Operation: FFh → f Status Affected: None Encoding: ffff ffff 0110 Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the right. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). 1 Cycles: 1 Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example 1: RRNCF Before Instruction REG = After Instruction REG = Example 2: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ SETF Before Instruction REG After Instruction REG REG,1 = 5Ah = FFh REG, 1, 0 1101 0111 1110 1011 RRNCF Before Instruction W = REG = After Instruction W = REG = ffff Q Cycle Activity: Example: Q1 ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. register f Words: 100a The contents of the specified register are set to FFh. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank will be selected, overriding the BSR value. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, then the bank will be selected as per the BSR value (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. f {,a} REG, 0, 0 ? 1101 0111 1110 1011 1101 0111 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 363 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY SLEEP Enter Sleep Mode SUBFWB Subtract f from W with Borrow Syntax: SLEEP Syntax: SUBFWB Operands: None Operands: Operation: 00h → WDT, 0 → WDT postscaler, 1 → TO, 0 → PD 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (W) – (f) – (C) → dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Status Affected: TO, PD Encoding: 0000 Description: Encoding: 0000 0000 0011 0101 Description: The Power-Down status bit (PD) is cleared. The Time-out status bit (TO) is set. The Watchdog Timer and its postscaler are cleared. The processor is put into Sleep mode with the oscillator stopped. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation Process Data Go to Sleep Example: SLEEP Before Instruction TO = ? ? PD = DS39778B-page 364 ffff ffff Subtract register ‘f’ and Carry flag (borrow) from W (2’s complement method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: After Instruction 1† TO = PD = 0 † If WDT causes wake-up, this bit is cleared. 01da If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). Q Cycle Activity: Decode f {,d {,a}} Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination SUBFWB REG, 1, 0 Example 1: Before Instruction REG = 3 W = 2 C = 1 After Instruction REG = FF W = 2 C = 0 Z = 0 N = 1 ; result is negative SUBFWB REG, 0, 0 Example 2: Before Instruction REG = 2 W = 5 C = 1 After Instruction REG = 2 W = 3 C = 1 Z = 0 N = 0 ; result is positive SUBFWB REG, 1, 0 Example 3: Before Instruction REG = 1 W = 2 C = 0 After Instruction REG = 0 W = 2 C = 1 Z = 1 ; result is zero N = 0 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY SUBLW Subtract W from Literal SUBWF Subtract W from f Syntax: SUBLW k Syntax: SUBWF Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operands: Operation: k – (W) → W Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) – (W) → dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0000 1000 kkkk kkkk Description: W is subtracted from the eight-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Encoding: 0101 Description: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example 1: Before Instruction W = C = After Instruction W = C = Z = N = Example 2: Before Instruction W = C = After Instruction W = C = Z = N = Example 3: Before Instruction W = C = After Instruction W = C = Z = N = SUBLW SUBLW 11da ffff ffff Subtract W from register ‘f’ (2’s complement method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 02h 01h ? 01h 1 0 0 f {,d {,a}} ; result is positive Words: 1 Cycles: 1 02h Q Cycle Activity: 02h ? 00h 1 1 0 SUBLW ; result is zero Q2 Q3 Q4 Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination SUBWF REG, 1, 0 Example 1: Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = Z = N = 02h 03h ? FFh 0 0 1 Q1 Decode ; (2’s complement) ; result is negative Example 2: Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = Z = N = Example 3: Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = Z = N = © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary 3 2 ? 1 2 1 0 0 ; result is positive SUBWF REG, 0, 0 2 2 ? 2 0 1 1 0 SUBWF ; result is zero REG, 1, 0 1 2 ? FFh ;(2’s complement) 2 0 ; result is negative 0 1 DS39778B-page 365 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY SUBWFB Subtract W from f with Borrow SWAPF Swap f Syntax: SUBWFB Syntax: SWAPF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operands: Operation: (f) – (W) – (C) → dest 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z (f<3:0>) → dest<7:4>, (f<7:4>) → dest<3:0> Status Affected: None Encoding: 0101 Description: f {,d {,a}} 10da ffff ffff Subtract W and the Carry flag (borrow) from register ‘f’ (2’s complement method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). Encoding: 0011 Description: If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read register ‘f’ Example 1: SUBWFB Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = Z = N = Example 2: Q4 Write to destination If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination REG, 1, 0 19h 0Dh 1 (0001 1001) (0000 1101) 0Ch 0Dh 1 0 0 (0000 1011) (0000 1101) ffff Example: SWAPF Before Instruction REG = After Instruction REG = REG, 1, 0 53h 35h ; result is positive SUBWFB REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = Z = N = Example 3: 1Bh 1Ah 0 (0001 1011) (0001 1010) 1Bh 00h 1 1 0 (0001 1011) SUBWFB Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W C Z N Q3 Process Data ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 10da The upper and lower nibbles of register ‘f’ are exchanged. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed in register ‘f’ (default). = = = = DS39778B-page 366 ; result is zero REG, 1, 0 03h 0Eh 1 (0000 0011) (0000 1101) F5h (1111 0100) ; [2’s comp] (0000 1101) 0Eh 0 0 1 ; result is negative Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TBLRD Table Read TBLRD Table Read (Continued) Syntax: TBLRD ( *; *+; *-; +*) Example 1: TBLRD Operands: None Operation: if TBLRD *, (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) → TABLAT, TBLPTR – No Change; if TBLRD *+, (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) → TABLAT, (TBLPTR) + 1 → TBLPTR; if TBLRD *-, (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) → TABLAT, (TBLPTR) – 1 → TBLPTR; if TBLRD +*, (TBLPTR) + 1 → TBLPTR, (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) → TABLAT Before Instruction TABLAT TBLPTR MEMORY(00A356h) After Instruction TABLAT TBLPTR Example 2: Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 0000 0000 0000 TBLRD Before Instruction TABLAT TBLPTR MEMORY(01A357h) MEMORY(01A358h) After Instruction TABLAT TBLPTR *+ ; = = = 55h 00A356h 34h = = 34h 00A357h +* ; = = = = AAh 01A357h 12h 34h = = 34h 01A358h 10nn nn=0 * =1 *+ =2 *=3 +* This instruction is used to read the contents of Program Memory (P.M.). To address the program memory, a pointer called Table Pointer (TBLPTR) is used. The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to each byte in the program memory. TBLPTR has a 2-Mbyte address range. TBLPTR<0> = 0:Least Significant Byte of Program Memory Word TBLPTR<0> = 1:Most Significant Byte of Program Memory Word The TBLRD instruction can modify the value of TBLPTR as follows: • no change • post-increment • post-decrement • pre-increment Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation (Read Program Memory) No operation No operation (Write TABLAT) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 367 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TBLWT Table Write TBLWT Table Write (Continued) Syntax: TBLWT ( *; *+; *-; +*) Example 1: TBLWT *+; Operands: None Operation: if TBLWT*, (TABLAT) → Holding Register, TBLPTR – No Change; if TBLWT*+, (TABLAT) → Holding Register, (TBLPTR) + 1 → TBLPTR; if TBLWT*-, (TABLAT) → Holding Register, (TBLPTR) – 1 → TBLPTR; if TBLWT+*, (TBLPTR) + 1 → TBLPTR, (TABLAT) → Holding Register Status Affected: Example 2: None Encoding: Description: Before Instruction TABLAT = 55h TBLPTR = 00A356h HOLDING REGISTER (00A356h) = FFh After Instructions (table write completion) TABLAT = 55h TBLPTR = 00A357h HOLDING REGISTER (00A356h) = 55h 0000 0000 0000 11nn nn=0 * =1 *+ =2 *=3 +* This instruction uses the 3 LSBs of TBLPTR to determine which of the 8 holding registers the TABLAT is written to. The holding registers are used to program the contents of Program Memory (P.M.). (Refer to Section 5.0 “Memory Organization” for additional details on programming Flash memory.) TBLWT +*; Before Instruction TABLAT = 34h TBLPTR = 01389Ah HOLDING REGISTER (01389Ah) = FFh HOLDING REGISTER (01389Bh) = FFh After Instruction (table write completion) TABLAT = 34h TBLPTR = 01389Bh HOLDING REGISTER (01389Ah) = FFh HOLDING REGISTER (01389Bh) = 34h The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to each byte in the program memory. TBLPTR has a 2-Mbyte address range. The LSb of the TBLPTR selects which byte of the program memory location to access. TBLPTR<0> = 0:Least Significant Byte of Program Memory Word TBLPTR<0> = 1:Most Significant Byte of Program Memory Word The TBLWT instruction can modify the value of TBLPTR as follows: • • • • no change post-increment post-decrement pre-increment Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Q3 Q4 No No No operation operation operation No No No No operation operation operation operation (Read (Write to TABLAT) Holding Register) DS39778B-page 368 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TSTFSZ Test f, Skip if 0 XORLW Exclusive OR Literal with W Syntax: TSTFSZ f {,a} Syntax: XORLW k Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 a ∈ [0,1] Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: (W) .XOR. k → W Operation: skip if f = 0 Status Affected: N, Z Status Affected: None Encoding: Encoding: 0110 Description: 011a ffff ffff If ‘f’ = 0, the next instruction fetched during the current instruction execution is discarded and a NOP is executed, making this a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. 0000 1010 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are XORed with the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: Before Instruction W = After Instruction W = XORLW 0AFh B5h 1Ah Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE NZERO ZERO Before Instruction PC After Instruction If CNT PC If CNT PC TSTFSZ : : CNT, 1 = Address (HERE) = = ≠ = 00h, Address (ZERO) 00h, Address (NZERO) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 369 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY XORWF Exclusive OR W with f Syntax: XORWF Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (W) .XOR. (f) → dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0001 Description: f {,d {,a}} 10da ffff ffff Exclusive OR the contents of W with register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in the register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 25.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: XORWF Before Instruction REG = W = After Instruction REG = W = DS39778B-page 370 REG, 1, 0 AFh B5h 1Ah B5h Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 25.2 Extended Instruction Set A summary of the instructions in the extended instruction set is provided in Table 25-3. Detailed descriptions are provided in Section 25.2.2 “Extended Instruction Set”. The opcode field descriptions in Table 25-1 (page 330) apply to both the standard and extended PIC18 instruction sets. In addition to the standard 75 instructions of the PIC18 instruction set, the PIC18F87J11 Family family of devices also provide an optional extension to the core CPU functionality. The added features include eight additional instructions that augment Indirect and Indexed Addressing operations and the implementation of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing for many of the standard PIC18 instructions. Note: The additional features of the extended instruction set are enabled by default on unprogrammed devices. Users must properly set or clear the XINST Configuration bit during programming to enable or disable these features. The instructions in the extended set can all be classified as literal operations, which either manipulate the File Select Registers, or use them for Indexed Addressing. Two of the instructions, ADDFSR and SUBFSR, each have an additional special instantiation for using FSR2. These versions (ADDULNK and SUBULNK) allow for automatic return after execution. 25.2.1 EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SYNTAX Most of the extended instructions use indexed arguments, using one of the File Select Registers and some offset to specify a source or destination register. When an argument for an instruction serves as part of Indexed Addressing, it is enclosed in square brackets (“[ ]”). This is done to indicate that the argument is used as an index or offset. The MPASM™ Assembler will flag an error if it determines that an index or offset value is not bracketed. The extended instructions are specifically implemented to optimize re-entrant program code (that is, code that is recursive or that uses a software stack) written in high-level languages, particularly C. Among other things, they allow users working in high-level languages to perform certain operations on data structures more efficiently. These include: When the extended instruction set is enabled, brackets are also used to indicate index arguments in byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions. This is in addition to other changes in their syntax. For more details, see Section 25.2.3.1 “Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 Commands”. • dynamic allocation and deallocation of software stack space when entering and leaving subroutines • function pointer invocation • software Stack Pointer manipulation • manipulation of variables located in a software stack TABLE 25-3: The instruction set extension and the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode were designed for optimizing applications written in C; the user may likely never use these instructions directly in assembler. The syntax for these commands is provided as a reference for users who may be reviewing code that has been generated by a compiler. Note: In the past, square brackets have been used to denote optional arguments in the PIC18 and earlier instruction sets. In this text and going forward, optional arguments are denoted by braces (“{ }”). EXTENSIONS TO THE PIC18 INSTRUCTION SET 16-Bit Instruction Word Mnemonic, Operands ADDFSR ADDULNK CALLW MOVSF f, k k MOVSS zs, zd PUSHL k SUBFSR SUBULNK f, k k zs, fd Description Cycles MSb Add Literal to FSR Add Literal to FSR2 and Return Call Subroutine using WREG Move zs (source) to 1st word fd (destination) 2nd word Move zs (source) to 1st word zd (destination) 2nd word Store Literal at FSR2, Decrement FSR2 Subtract Literal from FSR Subtract Literal from FSR2 and Return © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 1 2 2 2 LSb Status Affected 1000 1000 0000 1011 ffff 1011 xxxx 1010 ffkk 11kk 0001 0zzz ffff 1zzz xzzz kkkk kkkk kkkk 0100 zzzz ffff zzzz zzzz kkkk None None None None 1 1110 1110 0000 1110 1111 1110 1111 1110 1 2 1110 1110 1001 1001 ffkk 11kk kkkk kkkk None None 2 Preliminary None None DS39778B-page 371 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 25.2.2 EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET ADDFSR Add Literal to FSR ADDULNK Add Literal to FSR2 and Return Syntax: ADDFSR f, k Syntax: ADDULNK k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 63 f ∈ [ 0, 1, 2 ] Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 63 Operation: FSR(f) + k → FSR(f) Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 FSR2 + k → FSR2, Operation: (TOS) → PC Status Affected: 1000 ffkk kkkk Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is added to the contents of the FSR specified by ‘f’. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 None Encoding: 1110 Description: Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to FSR Example: After Instruction FSR2 = 03FFh Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: 0422h Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to FSR No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation Example: Note: kkkk This may be thought of as a special case of the ADDFSR instruction, where f = 3 (binary ‘11’); it operates only on FSR2. ADDFSR 2, 23h Before Instruction FSR2 = 11kk The instruction takes two cycles to execute; a NOP is performed during the second cycle. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 1000 The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is added to the contents of FSR2. A RETURN is then executed by loading the PC with the TOS. ADDULNK 23h Before Instruction FSR2 = PC = 03FFh 0100h After Instruction FSR2 = PC = 0422h (TOS) All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument preceding the instruction mnemonic for use in symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction format then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s). DS39778B-page 372 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY CALLW Subroutine Call using WREG MOVSF Move Indexed to f Syntax: CALLW Syntax: MOVSF [zs], fd Operands: None Operands: Operation: (PC + 2) → TOS, (W) → PCL, (PCLATH) → PCH, (PCLATU) → PCU 0 ≤ zs ≤ 127 0 ≤ fd ≤ 4095 Operation: ((FSR2) + zs) → fd Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 Description 0000 0001 0100 First, the return address (PC + 2) is pushed onto the return stack. Next, the contents of W are written to PCL; the existing value is discarded. Then, the contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are latched into PCH and PCU, respectively. The second cycle is executed as a NOP instruction while the new next instruction is fetched. Encoding: 1st word (source) 2nd word (destin.) Description: Unlike CALL, there is no option to update W, STATUS or BSR. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 1110 1111 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read WREG Push PC to stack No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation The contents of the source register are moved to destination register ‘fd’. The actual address of the source register is determined by adding the 7-bit literal offset ‘zs’, in the first word, to the value of FSR2. The address of the destination register is specified by the 12-bit literal ‘fd’ in the second word. Both addresses can be anywhere in the 4096-byte data space (000h to FFFh). Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Before Instruction PC = PCLATH = PCLATU = W = After Instruction PC = TOS = PCLATH = PCLATU = W = CALLW Decode address (HERE) 10h 00h 06h 001006h address (HERE + 2) 10h 00h 06h © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. zzzzs ffffd If the resultant source address points to an Indirect Addressing register, the value returned will be 00h. Decode HERE 0zzz ffff The MOVSF instruction cannot use the PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the destination register. Q Cycle Activity: Example: 1011 ffff Q2 Q3 Determine Determine source addr source addr No operation No operation No dummy read Example: MOVSF Before Instruction FSR2 Contents of 85h REG2 After Instruction FSR2 Contents of 85h REG2 Preliminary Q4 Read source reg Write register ‘f’ (dest) [05h], REG2 = 80h = = 33h 11h = 80h = = 33h 33h DS39778B-page 373 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY MOVSS Move Indexed to Indexed PUSHL Store Literal at FSR2, Decrement FSR2 Syntax: MOVSS [zs], [zd] Syntax: PUSHL k Operands: 0 ≤ zs ≤ 127 0 ≤ zd ≤ 127 Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: k → (FSR2), FSR2 – 1 → FSR2 Status Affected: None Operation: ((FSR2) + zs) → ((FSR2) + zd) Status Affected: None Encoding: 1st word (source) 2nd word (dest.) 1110 1111 Description 1011 xxxx 1zzz xzzz zzzzs zzzzd The contents of the source register are moved to the destination register. The addresses of the source and destination registers are determined by adding the 7-bit literal offsets ‘zs’ or ‘zd’, respectively, to the value of FSR2. Both registers can be located anywhere in the 4096-byte data memory space (000h to FFFh). Encoding: Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Words: 1 Cycles: Q1 Decode Q2 Q3 Determine Determine source addr source addr Determine dest addr Example: kkkk 1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read ‘k’ Process data Write to destination Example: PUSHL 08h Before Instruction FSR2H:FSR2L Memory (01ECh) = = 01ECh 00h After Instruction FSR2H:FSR2L Memory (01ECh) = = 01EBh 08h Q4 Read source reg Write to dest reg MOVSS [05h], [06h] Before Instruction FSR2 Contents of 85h Contents of 86h After Instruction FSR2 Contents of 85h Contents of 86h DS39778B-page 374 Determine dest addr kkkk Q Cycle Activity: Q Cycle Activity: Decode 1010 The 8-bit literal ‘k’ is written to the data memory address specified by FSR2. FSR2 is decremented by 1 after the operation. This instruction allows users to push values onto a software stack. The MOVSS instruction cannot use the PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the destination register. If the resultant source address points to an Indirect Addressing register, the value returned will be 00h. If the resultant destination address points to an Indirect Addressing register, the instruction will execute as a NOP. 1111 Description: = 80h = 33h = 11h = 80h = 33h = 33h Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY SUBFSR Subtract Literal from FSR SUBULNK Syntax: SUBFSR f, k Syntax: SUBULNK k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 63 Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 63 f ∈ [ 0, 1, 2 ] Operation: FSR2 – k → FSR2, Operation: FSRf – k → FSRf Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 (TOS) → PC Status Affected: 1001 ffkk kkkk Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is subtracted from the contents of the FSR specified by ‘f’. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 1110 Description: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Before Instruction FSR2 = After Instruction FSR2 = 1001 11kk kkkk The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is subtracted from the contents of the FSR2. A RETURN is then executed by loading the PC with the TOS. The instruction takes two cycles to execute; a NOP is performed during the second cycle. Decode SUBFSR 2, 23h None Encoding: Q Cycle Activity: Example: Subtract Literal from FSR2 and Return This may be thought of as a special case of the SUBFSR instruction, where f = 3 (binary ‘11’); it operates only on FSR2. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: 03FFh 03DCh Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation Example: © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary SUBULNK 23h Before Instruction FSR2 = PC = 03FFh 0100h After Instruction FSR2 = PC = 03DCh (TOS) DS39778B-page 375 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 25.2.3 Note: BYTE-ORIENTED AND BIT-ORIENTED INSTRUCTIONS IN INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE Enabling the PIC18 instruction set extension may cause legacy applications to behave erratically or fail entirely. In addition to eight new commands in the extended set, enabling the extended instruction set also enables Indexed Literal Offset Addressing (Section 5.6.1 “Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset”). This has a significant impact on the way that many commands of the standard PIC18 instruction set are interpreted. When the extended set is disabled, addresses embedded in opcodes are treated as literal memory locations: either as a location in the Access Bank (a = 0) or in a GPR bank designated by the BSR (a = 1). When the extended instruction set is enabled and a = 0, however, a file register argument of 5Fh or less is interpreted as an offset from the pointer value in FSR2 and not as a literal address. For practical purposes, this means that all instructions that use the Access RAM bit as an argument – that is, all byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions, or almost half of the core PIC18 instructions – may behave differently when the extended instruction set is enabled. When the content of FSR2 is 00h, the boundaries of the Access RAM are essentially remapped to their original values. This may be useful in creating backward-compatible code. If this technique is used, it may be necessary to save the value of FSR2 and restore it when moving back and forth between C and assembly routines in order to preserve the Stack Pointer. Users must also keep in mind the syntax requirements of the extended instruction set (see Section 25.2.3.1 “Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 Commands”). Although the Indexed Literal Offset mode can be very useful for dynamic stack and pointer manipulation, it can also be very annoying if a simple arithmetic operation is carried out on the wrong register. Users who are accustomed to the PIC18 programming must keep in mind that, when the extended instruction set is enabled, register addresses of 5Fh or less are used for Indexed Literal Offset Addressing. Representative examples of typical byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset mode are provided on the following page to show how execution is affected. The operand conditions shown in the examples are applicable to all instructions of these types. DS39778B-page 376 25.2.3.1 Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 Commands When the extended instruction set is enabled, the file register argument ‘f’ in the standard byte-oriented and bit-oriented commands is replaced with the literal offset value ‘k’. As already noted, this occurs only when ‘f’ is less than or equal to 5Fh. When an offset value is used, it must be indicated by square brackets (“[ ]”). As with the extended instructions, the use of brackets indicates to the compiler that the value is to be interpreted as an index or an offset. Omitting the brackets, or using a value greater than 5Fh within the brackets, will generate an error in the MPASM Assembler. If the index argument is properly bracketed for Indexed Literal Offset Addressing, the Access RAM argument is never specified; it will automatically be assumed to be ‘0’. This is in contrast to standard operation (extended instruction set disabled), when ‘a’ is set on the basis of the target address. Declaring the Access RAM bit in this mode will also generate an error in the MPASM Assembler. The destination argument ‘d’ functions as before. In the latest versions of the MPASM Assembler, language support for the extended instruction set must be explicitly invoked. This is done with either the command line option, /y, or the PE directive in the source listing. 25.2.4 CONSIDERATIONS WHEN ENABLING THE EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET It is important to note that the extensions to the instruction set may not be beneficial to all users. In particular, users who are not writing code that uses a software stack may not benefit from using the extensions to the instruction set. Additionally, the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode may create issues with legacy applications written to the PIC18 assembler. This is because instructions in the legacy code may attempt to address registers in the Access Bank below 5Fh. Since these addresses are interpreted as literal offsets to FSR2 when the instruction set extension is enabled, the application may read or write to the wrong data addresses. When porting an application to the PIC18F87J11 Family family, it is very important to consider the type of code. A large, re-entrant application that is written in C and would benefit from efficient compilation will do well when using the instruction set extensions. Legacy applications that heavily use the Access Bank will most likely not benefit from using the extended instruction set. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY ADD W to Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) BSF Bit Set Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) Syntax: ADDWF Syntax: BSF [k], b Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 95 d ∈ [0,1] Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 95 0≤b≤7 Operation: (W) + ((FSR2) + k) → dest Operation: 1 → ((FSR2) + k)<b> Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Status Affected: None ADDWF Encoding: [k] {,d} 0010 Description: 01d0 kkkk kkkk The contents of W are added to the contents of the register indicated by FSR2, offset by the value ‘k’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). Words: Encoding: bbb0 kkkk kkkk Description: Bit ‘b’ of the register indicated by FSR2, offset by the value ‘k’, is set. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination 1 Cycles: 1000 1 Q Cycle Activity: Example: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read ‘k’ Process Data Write to destination Example: ADDWF Before Instruction W OFST FSR2 Contents of 0A2Ch After Instruction W Contents of 0A2Ch Before Instruction FLAG_OFST FSR2 Contents of 0A0Ah After Instruction Contents of 0A0Ah [OFST] ,0 = = = 17h 2Ch 0A00h = 20h = 37h = 20h BSF [FLAG_OFST], 7 = = 0Ah 0A00h = 55h = D5h SETF Set Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) Syntax: SETF [k] Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 95 Operation: FFh → ((FSR2) + k) Status Affected: None Encoding: 0110 1000 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of the register indicated by FSR2, offset by ‘k’, are set to FFh. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read ‘k’ Process Data Write register Example: SETF Before Instruction OFST FSR2 Contents of 0A2Ch After Instruction Contents of 0A2Ch © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary [OFST] = = 2Ch 0A00h = 00h = FFh DS39778B-page 377 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 25.2.5 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS WITH MICROCHIP MPLAB® IDE TOOLS The latest versions of Microchip’s software tools have been designed to fully support the extended instruction set for the PIC18F87J11 Family family. This includes the MPLAB C18 C Compiler, MPASM assembly language and MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE). When selecting a target device for software development, MPLAB IDE will automatically set default Configuration bits for that device. The default setting for the XINST Configuration bit is ‘0’, disabling the extended instruction set and Indexed Literal Offset Addressing. For proper execution of applications developed to take advantage of the extended instruction set, XINST must be set during programming. DS39778B-page 378 To develop software for the extended instruction set, the user must enable support for the instructions and the Indexed Addressing mode in their language tool(s). Depending on the environment being used, this may be done in several ways: • A menu option or dialog box within the environment that allows the user to configure the language tool and its settings for the project • A command line option • A directive in the source code These options vary between different compilers, assemblers and development environments. Users are encouraged to review the documentation accompanying their development systems for the appropriate information. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 26.0 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT 26.1 The PIC® microcontrollers are supported with a full range of hardware and software development tools: • Integrated Development Environment - MPLAB® IDE Software • Assemblers/Compilers/Linkers - MPASMTM Assembler - MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 C Compilers - MPLINKTM Object Linker/ MPLIBTM Object Librarian - MPLAB ASM30 Assembler/Linker/Library • Simulators - MPLAB SIM Software Simulator • Emulators - MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator - MPLAB REAL ICE™ In-Circuit Emulator • In-Circuit Debugger - MPLAB ICD 2 • Device Programmers - PICSTART® Plus Development Programmer - MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer - PICkit™ 2 Development Programmer • Low-Cost Demonstration and Development Boards and Evaluation Kits MPLAB Integrated Development Environment Software The MPLAB IDE software brings an ease of software development previously unseen in the 8/16-bit microcontroller market. The MPLAB IDE is a Windows® operating system-based application that contains: • A single graphical interface to all debugging tools - Simulator - Programmer (sold separately) - Emulator (sold separately) - In-Circuit Debugger (sold separately) • A full-featured editor with color-coded context • A multiple project manager • Customizable data windows with direct edit of contents • High-level source code debugging • Visual device initializer for easy register initialization • Mouse over variable inspection • Drag and drop variables from source to watch windows • Extensive on-line help • Integration of select third party tools, such as HI-TECH Software C Compilers and IAR C Compilers The MPLAB IDE allows you to: • Edit your source files (either assembly or C) • One touch assemble (or compile) and download to PIC MCU emulator and simulator tools (automatically updates all project information) • Debug using: - Source files (assembly or C) - Mixed assembly and C - Machine code MPLAB IDE supports multiple debugging tools in a single development paradigm, from the cost-effective simulators, through low-cost in-circuit debuggers, to full-featured emulators. This eliminates the learning curve when upgrading to tools with increased flexibility and power. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 379 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 26.2 MPASM Assembler 26.5 The MPASM Assembler is a full-featured, universal macro assembler for all PIC MCUs. The MPASM Assembler generates relocatable object files for the MPLINK Object Linker, Intel® standard HEX files, MAP files to detail memory usage and symbol reference, absolute LST files that contain source lines and generated machine code and COFF files for debugging. The MPASM Assembler features include: MPLAB ASM30 Assembler produces relocatable machine code from symbolic assembly language for dsPIC30F devices. MPLAB C30 C Compiler uses the assembler to produce its object file. The assembler generates relocatable object files that can then be archived or linked with other relocatable object files and archives to create an executable file. Notable features of the assembler include: • • • • • • • Integration into MPLAB IDE projects • User-defined macros to streamline assembly code • Conditional assembly for multi-purpose source files • Directives that allow complete control over the assembly process Support for the entire dsPIC30F instruction set Support for fixed-point and floating-point data Command line interface Rich directive set Flexible macro language MPLAB IDE compatibility 26.6 26.3 MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 C Compilers The MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 Code Development Systems are complete ANSI C compilers for Microchip’s PIC18 and PIC24 families of microcontrollers and the dsPIC30 and dsPIC33 family of digital signal controllers. These compilers provide powerful integration capabilities, superior code optimization and ease of use not found with other compilers. For easy source level debugging, the compilers provide symbol information that is optimized to the MPLAB IDE debugger. 26.4 MPLINK Object Linker/ MPLIB Object Librarian The MPLINK Object Linker combines relocatable objects created by the MPASM Assembler and the MPLAB C18 C Compiler. It can link relocatable objects from precompiled libraries, using directives from a linker script. MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker and Librarian MPLAB SIM Software Simulator The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator allows code development in a PC-hosted environment by simulating the PIC MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs on an instruction level. On any given instruction, the data areas can be examined or modified and stimuli can be applied from a comprehensive stimulus controller. Registers can be logged to files for further run-time analysis. The trace buffer and logic analyzer display extend the power of the simulator to record and track program execution, actions on I/O, most peripherals and internal registers. The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator fully supports symbolic debugging using the MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 C Compilers, and the MPASM and MPLAB ASM30 Assemblers. The software simulator offers the flexibility to develop and debug code outside of the hardware laboratory environment, making it an excellent, economical software development tool. The MPLIB Object Librarian manages the creation and modification of library files of precompiled code. When a routine from a library is called from a source file, only the modules that contain that routine will be linked in with the application. This allows large libraries to be used efficiently in many different applications. The object linker/library features include: • Efficient linking of single libraries instead of many smaller files • Enhanced code maintainability by grouping related modules together • Flexible creation of libraries with easy module listing, replacement, deletion and extraction DS39778B-page 380 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 26.7 MPLAB ICE 2000 High-Performance In-Circuit Emulator 26.9 The MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator is intended to provide the product development engineer with a complete microcontroller design tool set for PIC microcontrollers. Software control of the MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator is advanced by the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment, which allows editing, building, downloading and source debugging from a single environment. The MPLAB ICE 2000 is a full-featured emulator system with enhanced trace, trigger and data monitoring features. Interchangeable processor modules allow the system to be easily reconfigured for emulation of different processors. The architecture of the MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator allows expansion to support new PIC microcontrollers. The MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator system has been designed as a real-time emulation system with advanced features that are typically found on more expensive development tools. The PC platform and Microsoft® Windows® 32-bit operating system were chosen to best make these features available in a simple, unified application. 26.8 MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System is Microchip’s next generation high-speed emulator for Microchip Flash DSC® and MCU devices. It debugs and programs PIC® and dsPIC® Flash microcontrollers with the easy-to-use, powerful graphical user interface of the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE), included with each kit. The MPLAB REAL ICE probe is connected to the design engineer’s PC using a high-speed USB 2.0 interface and is connected to the target with either a connector compatible with the popular MPLAB ICD 2 system (RJ11) or with the new high speed, noise tolerant, lowvoltage differential signal (LVDS) interconnection (CAT5). MPLAB ICD 2 In-Circuit Debugger Microchip’s In-Circuit Debugger, MPLAB ICD 2, is a powerful, low-cost, run-time development tool, connecting to the host PC via an RS-232 or high-speed USB interface. This tool is based on the Flash PIC MCUs and can be used to develop for these and other PIC MCUs and dsPIC DSCs. The MPLAB ICD 2 utilizes the in-circuit debugging capability built into the Flash devices. This feature, along with Microchip’s In-Circuit Serial ProgrammingTM (ICSPTM) protocol, offers costeffective, in-circuit Flash debugging from the graphical user interface of the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment. This enables a designer to develop and debug source code by setting breakpoints, single stepping and watching variables, and CPU status and peripheral registers. Running at full speed enables testing hardware and applications in real time. MPLAB ICD 2 also serves as a development programmer for selected PIC devices. 26.10 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer The MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer is a universal, CE compliant device programmer with programmable voltage verification at VDDMIN and VDDMAX for maximum reliability. It features a large LCD display (128 x 64) for menus and error messages and a modular, detachable socket assembly to support various package types. The ICSP™ cable assembly is included as a standard item. In Stand-Alone mode, the MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer can read, verify and program PIC devices without a PC connection. It can also set code protection in this mode. The MPLAB PM3 connects to the host PC via an RS-232 or USB cable. The MPLAB PM3 has high-speed communications and optimized algorithms for quick programming of large memory devices and incorporates an SD/MMC card for file storage and secure data applications. MPLAB REAL ICE is field upgradeable through future firmware downloads in MPLAB IDE. In upcoming releases of MPLAB IDE, new devices will be supported, and new features will be added, such as software breakpoints and assembly code trace. MPLAB REAL ICE offers significant advantages over competitive emulators including low-cost, full-speed emulation, real-time variable watches, trace analysis, complex breakpoints, a ruggedized probe interface and long (up to three meters) interconnection cables. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 381 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 26.11 PICSTART Plus Development Programmer 26.13 Demonstration, Development and Evaluation Boards The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer is an easy-to-use, low-cost, prototype programmer. It connects to the PC via a COM (RS-232) port. MPLAB Integrated Development Environment software makes using the programmer simple and efficient. The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer supports most PIC devices in DIP packages up to 40 pins. Larger pin count devices, such as the PIC16C92X and PIC17C76X, may be supported with an adapter socket. The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer is CE compliant. A wide variety of demonstration, development and evaluation boards for various PIC MCUs and dsPIC DSCs allows quick application development on fully functional systems. Most boards include prototyping areas for adding custom circuitry and provide application firmware and source code for examination and modification. 26.12 PICkit 2 Development Programmer The PICkit™ 2 Development Programmer is a low-cost programmer and selected Flash device debugger with an easy-to-use interface for programming many of Microchip’s baseline, mid-range and PIC18F families of Flash memory microcontrollers. The PICkit 2 Starter Kit includes a prototyping development board, twelve sequential lessons, software and HI-TECH’s PICC™ Lite C compiler, and is designed to help get up to speed quickly using PIC® microcontrollers. The kit provides everything needed to program, evaluate and develop applications using Microchip’s powerful, mid-range Flash memory family of microcontrollers. DS39778B-page 382 The boards support a variety of features, including LEDs, temperature sensors, switches, speakers, RS-232 interfaces, LCD displays, potentiometers and additional EEPROM memory. The demonstration and development boards can be used in teaching environments, for prototyping custom circuits and for learning about various microcontroller applications. In addition to the PICDEM™ and dsPICDEM™ demonstration/development board series of circuits, Microchip has a line of evaluation kits and demonstration software for analog filter design, KEELOQ® security ICs, CAN, IrDA®, PowerSmart® battery management, SEEVAL® evaluation system, Sigma-Delta ADC, flow rate sensing, plus many more. Check the Microchip web page (www.microchip.com) and the latest “Product Selector Guide” (DS00148) for the complete list of demonstration, development and evaluation kits. Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 27.0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Absolute Maximum Ratings(†) Ambient temperature under bias.............................................................................................................-40°C to +100°C Storage temperature .............................................................................................................................. -65°C to +150°C Voltage on any digital only input pin or MCLR with respect to VSS (except VDD) ........................................ -0.3V to 6.0V Voltage on any combined digital and analog pin with respect to VSS ............................................. -0.3V to (VDD + 0.3V) Voltage on VDDCORE with respect to VSS ................................................................................................... -0.3V to 2.75V Voltage on VDD with respect to VSS ........................................................................................................... -0.3V to 4.0V Total power dissipation (Note 1) ...............................................................................................................................1.0W Maximum current out of VSS pin ...........................................................................................................................300 mA Maximum current into VDD pin ..............................................................................................................................250 mA Input clamp current, IIK (VI < 0 or VI > VDD) (Note 2)........................................................................................................ ±0 mA Output clamp current, IOK (VO < 0 or VO > VDD) (Note 2) ................................................................................................ ±0 mA Maximum output current sunk by any PORTB and PORTC I/O pins......................................................................25 mA Maximum output current sunk by any PORTD, PORTE and PORTJ I/O pins ..........................................................8 mA Maximum output current sunk by any PORTA, PORTF, PORTG and PORTH I/O pins............................................2 mA Maximum output current sourced by any PORTB and PORTC I/O pins.................................................................25 mA Maximum output current sourced by any PORTD, PORTE and PORTJ I/O pins .....................................................8 mA Maximum output current sourced by any PORTA, PORTF, PORTG and PORTH I/O pins ......................................2 mA Maximum current sunk by all ports combined.......................................................................................................200 mA Maximum current sourced by all ports combined..................................................................................................200 mA Note 1: Power dissipation is calculated as follows: Pdis = VDD x {IDD – ∑ IOH} + ∑ {(VDD – VOH) x IOH} + ∑ (VOL x IOL) + ∑ (VTPOUT x ITPOUT) 2: No clamping diodes are present. † NOTICE: Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at those or any other conditions above those indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 383 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-1: PIC18F87J11 FAMILY VOLTAGE-FREQUENCY GRAPH, REGULATOR ENABLED (INDUSTRIAL) 4.0V 3.6V Voltage (VDD) 3.5V 3.0V PIC18F87J11 Family 2.5V 2.35V 2.0V 8 MHz 0 48 MHZ Frequency FIGURE 27-2: PIC18F87J11 FAMILY VOLTAGE-FREQUENCY GRAPH, REGULATOR DISABLED (INDUSTRIAL)(1) 3.00V Voltage (VDDCORE) 2.75V 2.7V 2.50V PIC18F87J11 Family 2.00V 0 Note 1: 2.35V 2.25V 8 MHz 48 MHz Frequency When the on-chip voltage regulator is disabled, VDD and VDDCORE must be maintained so that VDDCORE ≤ VDD ≤ 3.6V. DS39778B-page 384 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 27.1 DC Characteristics: Supply Voltage PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) PIC18F87J11 Family Family (Industrial) Param No. Symbol Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial Characteristic Supply Voltage D001 VDD D001B VDDCORE External Supply for Microcontroller Core Min Typ Max Units VDDCORE 2.0 — — 3.6 3.6 V V ENVREG tied to VSS ENVREG tied to VDD 2.0 — 2.7 V ENVREG tied to VSS D001C AVDD Analog Supply Voltage VDD – 0.3 — VDD + 0.3 V D001D AVSS Analog Ground Potential VSS – 0.3 — VSS + 0.3 V D002 VDR RAM Data Retention Voltage(1) 1.5 — — V D003 VPOR VDD Power-on Reset Voltage — — 0.7 V D004 SVDD VDD Rise Rate to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal 0.05 — — D005 VBOR Brown-out Reset Voltage — 1.8 — Note 1: This is the limit data. to which VDD can © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Conditions See Section 4.3 “Power-on Reset (POR)” for details V/ms See Section 4.3 “Power-on Reset (POR)” for details V be lowered in Sleep mode, or during a device Reset, without losing RAM Preliminary DS39778B-page 385 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 27.2 DC Characteristics: PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) Param No. Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial Device Typ Max Units Conditions 0.5 1.4 μA -40°C 0.5 1.4 μA +25°C 5.5 10.2 μA +85°C 0.6 1.5 μA -40°C 0.6 1.5 μA +25°C 6.8 12.6 μA +85°C 2.9 7 μA -40°C 3.6 7 μA +25°C 9.6 19 μA +85°C Power-Down Current (IPD)(1) All devices All devices All devices Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: VDD = 2.0V(4) (Sleep mode) VDD = 2.5V(4) (Sleep mode) VDD = 3.3V(5) (Sleep mode) TBD = To Be Determined The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG = 0, tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG = 1, tied to VDD, REGSLP = 1). DS39778B-page 386 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 27.2 DC Characteristics: PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) Param No. Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial Device Typ Max Units Conditions 5 14.2 μA -40°C 5.5 14.2 μA +25°C +85°C Supply Current (IDD)(2,3) All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 10 19.0 μA 6.8 16.5 μA -40°C 7.6 16.5 μA +25°C 14 22.4 μA +85°C 37 84 μA -40°C 51 84 μA +25°C 72 108 μA +85°C 0.43 0.82 mA -40°C 0.47 0.82 mA +25°C 0.52 0.95 mA +85°C 0.52 0.98 mA -40°C 0.57 0.98 mA +25°C +85°C 0.63 1.10 mA 0.59 0.96 mA -40°C 0.65 0.96 mA +25°C +85°C 0.72 1.18 mA 0.88 1.45 mA -40°C 1 1.45 mA +25°C 1.1 1.58 mA +85°C 1.2 1.72 mA -40°C 1.3 1.72 mA +25°C 1.4 1.85 mA +85°C 1.3 1.87 mA -40°C 1.4 1.87 mA +25°C 1.5 1.96 mA +85°C VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 31 kHz (RC_RUN mode, internal oscillator source) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 1 MHz (RC_RUN mode, internal oscillator source) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 4 MHz (RC_RUN mode, internal oscillator source) VDD = 3.3V(5) TBD = To Be Determined The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG = 0, tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG = 1, tied to VDD, REGSLP = 1). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 387 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 27.2 DC Characteristics: PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) Param No. Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial Device Typ Max Units Conditions 3 9.4 μA -40°C 3.3 9.4 μA +25°C 8.5 17.2 μA +85°C 4 10.5 μA -40°C 4.3 10.5 μA +25°C 10.3 19.5 μA +85°C 34 82 μA -40°C 48 82 μA +25°C 69 105 μA +85°C 0.33 0.75 mA -40°C 0.37 0.75 mA +25°C Supply Current (IDD) Cont.(2,3) All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 0.41 0.84 mA +85°C 0.39 0.78 mA -40°C 0.42 0.78 mA +25°C +85°C 0.47 0.91 mA 0.43 0.82 mA -40°C 0.48 0.82 mA +25°C +85°C 0.54 0.95 mA 0.53 0.98 mA -40°C 0.57 0.98 mA +25°C 0.61 1.12 mA +85°C 0.63 1.14 mA -40°C 0.67 1.14 mA +25°C 0.72 1.25 mA +85°C 0.7 1.27 mA -40°C 0.76 1.27 mA +25°C 0.82 1.45 mA +85°C VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 31 kHz (RC_IDLE mode, internal oscillator source) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 1 MHz (RC_IDLE mode, internal oscillator source) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 4 MHz (RC_IDLE mode, internal oscillator source) VDD = 3.3V(5) TBD = To Be Determined The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG = 0, tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG = 1, tied to VDD, REGSLP = 1). DS39778B-page 388 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 27.2 DC Characteristics: PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) Param No. Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial Device Typ Max Units Conditions 0.17 0.35 mA -40°C 0.18 0.35 mA +25°C +85°C Supply Current (IDD) Cont.(2,3) All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 0.20 0.42 mA 0.29 0.52 mA -40°C 0.31 0.52 mA +25°C 0.34 0.61 mA +85°C 0.59 1.1 mA -40°C 0.44 0.85 mA +25°C 0.42 0.85 mA +85°C 0.70 1.25 mA -40°C 0.75 1.25 mA +25°C 0.79 1.36 mA +85°C 1.10 1.7 mA -40°C 1.10 1.7 mA +25°C +85°C 1.12 1.82 mA 1.55 1.95 mA -40°C 1.47 1.89 mA +25°C 1.54 1.92 mA +85°C 9.9 14.8 mA -40°C 9.5 14.8 mA +25°C 10.1 15.2 mA +85°C 13.3 19.2 mA -40°C 12.2 18.7 mA +25°C 12.1 18.7 mA +85°C VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 1 MHZ (PRI_RUN mode, EC oscillator) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 4 MHz (PRI_RUN mode, EC oscillator) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 48 MHZ (PRI_RUN mode, EC oscillator) VDD = 3.3V(5) TBD = To Be Determined The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG = 0, tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG = 1, tied to VDD, REGSLP = 1). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 389 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 27.2 DC Characteristics: PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) Param No. Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial Device Typ Max Units Conditions 2.8 3.8 mA -40°C 3.0 3.8 mA +25°C +85°C Supply Current (IDD) Cont.(2,3) All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 3.2 4.1 mA 4.5 5.2 mA -40°C 4.4 5.2 mA +25°C +85°C 4.5 5.2 mA 5.7 6.7 mA -40°C 5.5 6.3 mA +25°C 5.3 6.3 mA +85°C 10.8 13.5 mA -40°C 10.8 13.5 mA +25°C 9.9 13.0 mA +85°C 13.4 17.1 mA -40°C 12.3 16.2 mA +25°C 11.2 15.5 mA +85°C VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 4 MHZ. 16 MHz internal (PRI_RUN HSPLL mode) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 12 MHZ, 48 MHz internal (PRI_RUN HSPLL mode) VDD = 3.3V(5) TBD = To Be Determined The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG = 0, tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG = 1, tied to VDD, REGSLP = 1). DS39778B-page 390 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 27.2 DC Characteristics: PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) Param No. Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial Device Typ Max Units Conditions 0.10 0.26 mA -40°C 0.07 0.18 mA +25°C +85°C Supply Current (IDD) Cont.(2,3) All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 0.09 0.22 mA 0.25 0.48 mA -40°C 0.13 0.30 mA +25°C +85°C 0.10 0.26 mA 0.45 0.68 mA -40°C 0.26 0.45 mA +25°C 0.30 0.54 mA +85°C 0.36 0.60 mA -40°C 0.33 0.56 mA +25°C 0.35 0.56 mA +85°C 0.52 0.81 mA -40°C 0.45 0.70 mA +25°C +85°C 0.46 0.70 mA 0.80 1.15 mA -40°C 0.66 0.98 mA +25°C 0.65 0.98 mA +85°C 5.2 6.5 mA -40°C 4.9 5.9 mA +25°C 3.4 4.5 mA +85°C 6.2 8.4 mA -40°C 5.9 7.5 mA +25°C 5.8 7.5 mA +85°C VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 1 MHz (PRI_IDLE mode, EC oscillator) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 4 MHz (PRI_IDLE mode, EC oscillator) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 48 MHz (PRI_IDLE mode, EC oscillator) VDD = 3.3V(5) TBD = To Be Determined The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG = 0, tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG = 1, tied to VDD, REGSLP = 1). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 391 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 27.2 DC Characteristics: PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) Param No. Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial Device Typ Max Units Conditions 18 35 µA -40°C 19 35 µA +25°C 28 49 µA +85°C 20 45 µA -40°C 21 45 µA +25°C +85°C Supply Current (IDD) Cont.(2,3) All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices All devices Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 32 61 µA 0.06 0.11 mA -40°C 0.07 0.11 mA +25°C 0.09 0.15 mA +85°C 14 28 µA -40°C 15 28 µA +25°C 24 43 µA +85°C 15 31 µA -40°C 16 31 µA +25°C 27 50 µA +85°C 0.05 0.10 mA -40°C 0.06 0.10 mA +25°C 0.08 0.14 mA +85°C VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 32 kHz(3) (SEC_RUN mode, Timer1 as clock) VDD = 3.3V(5) VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) FOSC = 32 kHz(3) (SEC_IDLE mode, Timer1 as clock) VDD = 3.3V(5) TBD = To Be Determined The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG = 0, tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG = 1, tied to VDD, REGSLP = 1). DS39778B-page 392 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 27.2 DC Characteristics: PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) Param No. D022 D025 (ΔIOSCB) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial Device Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Typ Max Units Conditions Module Differential Currents (ΔIWDT, ΔIOSCB, ΔIAD) Watchdog Timer 2.1 7.0 μA -40°C Timer1 Oscillator A/D Converter D026 (ΔIAD) Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) (Continued) 2.2 4.3 3.0 7.0 9.5 8.0 μA μA μA +25°C +85°C -40°C 3.1 5.5 5.9 8.0 10.4 12.1 μA μA μA +25°C +85°C -40°C 6.2 6.9 14 12.1 13.6 24 μA μA μA +25°C +85°C -40°C 15 23 17 24 36 26 μA μA μA +25°C +85°C -40°C 18 25 19 21 28 3.0 26 38 35 35 44 10.0 3.0 3.2 VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) VDD = 3.3V VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) 32 kHz on Timer1(3) μA μA μA μA μA μA VDD = 2.5V, +25°C VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) +85°C -40°C VDD = 3.3V +25°C +85°C -40°C to +85°C VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V(4) 32 kHz on Timer1(3) 10.0 μA -40°C to +85°C VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V(4) 11.0 μA -40°C to +85°C VDD = 3.3V 32 kHz on Timer1(3) A/D on, not converting TBD = To Be Determined The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD; MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. Standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. Voltage regulator disabled (ENVREG = 0, tied to VSS). Voltage regulator enabled (ENVREG = 1, tied to VDD, REGSLP = 1). © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 393 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 27.3 DC Characteristics:PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial DC CHARACTERISTICS Param Symbol No. VIL Characteristic Min Max Units Conditions Input Low Voltage All I/O ports: D030 with TTL buffer VSS 0.15 VDD V D031 with Schmitt Trigger buffer VSS 0.2 VDD V VSS 0.2 VDD V D032 MCLR D033 OSC1 VSS 0.3 VDD V HS, HSPLL modes D033A OSC1 VSS 0.2 VDD V EC, ECPLL modes D034 T13CKI VSS 0.3 V 0.25 VDD + 0.8V VDD V 0.8 VDD VDD V 0.25 VDD + 0.8V 5.5 V VDD < 3.3V 3.3V ≤ VDD ≤ 3.6V VIH Input High Voltage I/O ports with analog functions: D040 with TTL buffer D041 with Schmitt Trigger buffer VDD < 3.3V Digital-only I/O ports: with TTL buffer with Schmitt Trigger buffer 2.0 5.5 V 0.8 VDD 5.5 V D042 MCLR 0.8 VDD VDD V D043 OSC1 0.7 VDD VDD V HS, HSPLL modes D043A OSC1 0.8 VDD VDD V EC, ECPLL modes 1.6 VDD V D044 T13CKI IIL Input Leakage Current(1,2) D060 I/O ports — ±1 μA VSS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD, Pin at high-impedance D061 MCLR — ±1 μA Vss ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD OSC1 — ±5 μA Vss ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD 30 240 μA VDD = 3.3V, VPIN = VSS D063 D070 Note 1: IPU Weak Pull-up Current IPURB PORTB weak pull-up current Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin. DS39778B-page 394 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 27.3 DC Characteristics:PIC18F87J11 Family (Industrial) (Continued) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial DC CHARACTERISTICS Param Symbol No. VOL D080 Characteristic Min Max Units Conditions PORTA, PORTF, PORTG, PORTH — 0.4 V IOL = 2 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40°C to +85°C PORTD, PORTE, PORTJ — 0.4 V IOL = 3.4 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40°C to +85°C PORTB, PORTC — 0.4 V IOL = 3.4 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40°C to +85°C OSC2/CLKO (EC, ECPLL modes) — 0.4 V IOL = 1.6 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40°C to +85°C PORTA, PORTF, PORTG, PORTH 2.4 — V IOH = -2 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40°C to +85°C PORTD, PORTE, PORTJ 2.4 — V IOH = -2 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40°C to +85°C PORTB, PORTC 2.4 — V IOH = -2 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40°C to +85°C 2.4 — V IOH = -1 mA, VDD = 3.3V, -40°C to +85°C — 15 pF In HS mode when external clock is used to drive OSC1 Output Low Voltage I/O ports: D083 VOH D090 Output High Voltage(1) I/O ports: D092 OSC2/CLKO (INTOSC, EC, ECPLL modes) V Capacitive Loading Specs on Output Pins D100(4) COSC2 OSC2 pin D101 CIO All I/O pins and OSC2 — 50 pF To meet the AC Timing Specifications D102 CB SCLx, SDAx — 400 pF I2C™ Specification Note 1: Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 395 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 27-1: MEMORY PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial DC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max 1K 10K — Units Conditions Program Flash Memory D130 EP Cell Endurance D131 VPR VDD for Read VMIN — 3.6 V VMIN = Minimum operating voltage D132B VPEW VDD for Self-Timed Write VMIN — 3.6 V VMIN = Minimum operating voltage D133A TIW Self-Timed Write Cycle Time — 2.8 — ms 20 — — Year Provided no other specifications are violated mA D134 TRETD Characteristic Retention D135 IDDP Supply Current during Programming — 10 14 D1xxx TWE Writes per Erase Cycle — — 1 E/W -40°C to +85°C † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.3V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. DS39778B-page 396 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 27-2: COMPARATOR SPECIFICATIONS Operating Conditions: 3.0V < VDD < 3.6V, -40°C < TA < +85°C (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym Characteristics Min Typ Max Units D300 VIOFF Input Offset Voltage — ±5.0 ±10 mV D301 VICM Input Common Mode Voltage* 0 — AVDD – 1.5 V (2) VIRV Internal Reference Voltage — ±1.2 — V D302 CMRR Common Mode Rejection Ratio* 55 — — dB 300 TRESP Response Time(1)* — 150 400 ns 301 TMC2OV Comparator Mode Change to Output Valid* — — 10 μs * Note 1: 2: Comments ±1.2% These parameters are characterized but not tested. Response time measured with one comparator input at (VDD – 1.5)/2, while the other input transitions from VSS to VDD. Tolerance is ±1.2%. TABLE 27-3: VOLTAGE REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS Operating Conditions: 3.0V < VDD < 3.6V, -40°C < TA < +85°C (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym Characteristics Min Typ Max Units VDD/24 — VDD/32 LSb VRES Resolution D311 VRAA Absolute Accuracy — — 1/2 LSb D312 VRUR Unit Resistor Value (R) — 2k — Ω TSET Time(1) — — 10 μs D310 310 Note 1: Settling Comments Settling time measured while CVRR = 1 and the CVR3:CVR0 bits transition from ‘0000’ to ‘1111’. TABLE 27-4: INTERNAL VOLTAGE REGULATOR SPECIFICATIONS Operating Conditions: -40°C < TA < +85°C (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym Characteristics VRGOUT Regulator Output Voltage* CF * External Filter Capacitor Value* Min Typ Max Units — 2.5 — V 4.7 10 — μF Comments Capacitor must be low-ESR These parameters are characterized but not tested. Parameter numbers not yet assigned for these specifications. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 397 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 27.4 27.4.1 AC (Timing) Characteristics TIMING PARAMETER SYMBOLOGY The timing parameter symbols have been created following one of the following formats: 1. TppS2ppS 2. TppS T F Frequency Lowercase letters (pp) and their meanings: pp cc CCP1 ck CLKO cs CS di SDI do SDO dt Data in io I/O port mc MCLR Uppercase letters and their meanings: S F Fall H High I Invalid (High-impedance) L Low I2C only AA output access BUF Bus free TCC:ST (I2C specifications only) CC HD Hold ST DAT DATA input hold STA Start condition DS39778B-page 398 3. TCC:ST 4. Ts (I2C specifications only) (I2C specifications only) T Time osc rd rw sc ss t0 t1 wr OSC1 RD RD or WR SCK SS T0CKI T13CKI WR P R V Z Period Rise Valid High-impedance High Low High Low SU Setup STO Stop condition Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 27.4.2 TIMING CONDITIONS The temperature and voltages specified in Table 27-5 apply to all timing specifications unless otherwise noted. Figure 27-3 specifies the load conditions for the timing specifications. TABLE 27-5: TEMPERATURE AND VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS – AC AC CHARACTERISTICS FIGURE 27-3: Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial Operating voltage VDD range as described in Section 27.1 and Section 27.3. LOAD CONDITIONS FOR DEVICE TIMING SPECIFICATIONS Load Condition 1 Load Condition 2 VDD/2 RL CL Pin CL Pin VSS VSS RL = 464Ω © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. CL = 50 pF for all pins except OSC2/CLKO/RA6 and including D and E outputs as ports CL = 15 pF for OSC2/CLKO/RA6 Preliminary DS39778B-page 399 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 27.4.3 TIMING DIAGRAMS AND SPECIFICATIONS FIGURE 27-4: EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 OSC1 1 3 4 3 4 2 CLKO TABLE 27-6: Param. No. 1A EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS Symbol FOSC Characteristic Min Max Units External CLKI Frequency(1) DC 48 MHz DC 12 4 25 4 12 (1) Oscillator Frequency 1 TOSC External CLKI Period(1) Oscillator Period (1) Time(1) 20.8 — 83.3 — 40.0 250 83.3 250 Conditions EC Oscillator mode ECPLL Oscillator mode MHz HS Oscillator mode HSPLL Oscillator mode ns EC Oscillator mode ECPLL Oscillator mode ns HS Oscillator mode HSPLL Oscillator mode 2 TCY Instruction Cycle 83.3 — ns TCY = 4/FOSC, Industrial 3 TOSL, TOSH External Clock in (OSC1) High or Low Time 10 — ns HS Oscillator mode 4 TOSR, TOSF External Clock in (OSC1) Rise or Fall Time — 7.5 ns HS Oscillator mode Note 1: Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time base period for all configurations except PLL. All specified values are based on characterization data for that particular oscillator type under standard operating conditions with the device executing code. Exceeding these specified limits may result in an unstable oscillator operation and/or higher than expected current consumption. All devices are tested to operate at “min.” values with an external clock applied to the OSC1/CLKI pin. When an external clock input is used, the “max.” cycle time limit is “DC” (no clock) for all devices. DS39778B-page 400 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 27-7: Param No. PLL CLOCK TIMING SPECIFICATIONS (VDD = 2.15V TO 3.6V) Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units 4 16 — — 12 48 MHz MHz F10 F11 FOSC Oscillator Frequency Range FSYS On-Chip VCO System Frequency F12 trc PLL Start-up Time (lock time) — — 2 ms ΔCLK CLKO Stability (jitter) -2 — +2 % F13 Conditions † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.3V, 25°C, unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. TABLE 27-8: Param No. INTERNAL RC ACCURACY (INTOSC AND INTRC SOURCES) Device Min Typ Max Units Conditions INTOSC Accuracy @ Freq = 8 MHz, 4 MHz, 2 MHz, 1 MHz, 500 kHz, 250 kHz, 125 kHz, 31 kHz(1) All Devices -2 Note 1: 2 % +25°C VDD = 2.7-3.3V -5 — 5 % -10°C to +85°C VDD = 2.0-3.3V -10 +/-1 10 % -40°C to +85°C VDD = 2.0-3.3V — 40.3 kHz INTRC Accuracy @ Freq = 31 All Devices +/-1 kHz(1) 21.7 The accuracy specification of the 31 kHz clock is determined by which source is providing it at a given time. When INTSRC (OSCTUNE<7>) is ‘1’, use the INTOSC accuracy specification. When INTSRC is ‘0’, use the INTRC accuracy specification. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 401 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-5: CLKO AND I/O TIMING Q1 Q4 Q2 Q3 OSC1 11 10 CLKO 13 12 19 14 18 16 I/O pin (Input) 15 17 I/O pin (Output) New Value Old Value 20, 21 Note: Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions. TABLE 27-9: Param No. CLKO AND I/O TIMING REQUIREMENTS Symbol Characteristic Min Typ Max Units Conditions 10 TOSH2CKL OSC1 ↑ to CLKO ↓ — 75 200 ns (Note 1) 11 TOSH2CKH OSC1 ↑ to CLKO ↑ — 75 200 ns (Note 1) 12 TCKR CLKO Rise Time — 15 30 ns (Note 1) 13 TCKF CLKO Fall Time — 15 30 ns (Note 1) — — 0.5 TCY + 20 ns 0.25 TCY + 25 — — ns 14 TCKL2IOV CLKO ↓ to Port Out Valid 15 TIOV2CKH Port In Valid before CLKO ↑ Port In Hold after CLKO ↑ 16 TCKH2IOI 17 TOSH2IOV OSC1 ↑ (Q1 cycle) to Port Out Valid 0 — — ns — 50 150 ns 18 TOSH2IOI 100 — — ns 19 TIOV2OSH Port Input Valid to OSC1 ↑ (I/O in setup time) 0 — — ns 20 TIOR Port Output Rise Time — — 6 ns 21 TIOF Port Output Fall Time — — 5 ns 22† TINP INTx pin High or Low Time TCY — — ns 23† TRBP RB7:RB4 Change INTx High or Low Time TCY — — ns OSC1 ↑ (Q2 cycle) to Port Input Invalid (I/O in hold time) † These parameters are asynchronous events not related to any internal clock edges. Note 1: Measurements are taken in EC mode, where CLKO output is 4 x TOSC. DS39778B-page 402 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-6: PROGRAM MEMORY READ TIMING DIAGRAM Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 OSC1 A<19:16> BA0 Address Address Address AD<15:0> Address Data from External 150 151 163 160 162 161 155 166 167 168 ALE 164 169 171 CE 171A OE 165 Operating Conditions: 2.0V < VCC < 3.6V, -40°C < TA < +125°C unless otherwise stated. TABLE 27-10: CLKO AND I/O TIMING REQUIREMENTS Param. No Symbol Characteristics Min Typ Max Units 0.25 TCY – 10 — — ns 150 TadV2alL Address Out Valid to ALE ↓ (address setup time) 151 TalL2adl ALE ↓ to Address Out Invalid (address hold time) 5 — — ns 155 TalL2oeL ALE ↓ to OE ↓ 10 0.125 TCY — ns 160 TadZ2oeL AD high-Z to OE ↓ (bus release to OE) 0 — — ns 161 ToeH2adD OE ↑ to AD Driven 162 TadV2oeH Least Significant Data Valid before OE ↑ (data setup time) 0.125 TCY – 5 — — ns 20 — — ns 163 ToeH2adl OE ↑ to Data In Invalid (data hold time) 0 — — ns 164 TalH2alL ALE Pulse Width — 0.25 TCY — ns 165 ToeL2oeH OE Pulse Width 0.5 TCY – 5 0.5 TCY — ns 166 TalH2alH ALE ↑ to ALE ↑ (cycle time) — TCY — ns 167 Tacc Address Valid to Data Valid 0.75 TCY – 25 — — ns 168 Toe OE ↓ to Data Valid — 0.5 TCY – 25 ns 169 TalL2oeH ALE ↓ to OE ↑ 0.625 TCY – 10 — 0.625 TCY + 10 ns 171 TalH2csL Chip Enable Active to ALE ↓ 0.25 TCY – 20 — — ns 171A TubL2oeH AD Valid to Chip Enable Active — — 10 ns © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 403 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-7: PROGRAM MEMORY WRITE TIMING DIAGRAM Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 OSC1 A<19:16> BA0 Address Address 166 AD<15:0> Address Data Address 153 150 156 151 ALE 171 CE 171A 154 WRH or WRL 157A 157 UB or LB Operating Conditions: 2.0V < VCC < 3.6V, -40°C < TA < +125°C unless otherwise stated. TABLE 27-11: PROGRAM MEMORY WRITE TIMING REQUIREMENTS Param. No Symbol Characteristics Min Typ Max Units 0.25 TCY – 10 — — ns 150 TadV2alL Address Out Valid to ALE ↓ (address setup time) 151 TalL2adl ALE ↓ to Address Out Invalid (address hold time) 5 — — ns 153 TwrH2adl WRn ↑ to Data Out Invalid (data hold time) 5 — — ns 154 TwrL WRn Pulse Width 0.5 TCY – 5 0.5 TCY — ns 156 TadV2wrH Data Valid before WRn ↑ (data setup time) 0.5 TCY – 10 — — ns 157 TbsV2wrL Byte Select Valid before WRn ↓ (byte select setup time) 0.25 TCY — — ns 157A TwrH2bsI WRn ↑ to Byte Select Invalid (byte select hold time) 0.125 TCY – 5 — — ns 166 TalH2alH ALE ↑ to ALE ↑ (cycle time) — TCY — ns 171 TalH2csL Chip Enable Active to ALE ↓ 0.25 TCY – 20 — — ns 171A TubL2oeH AD Valid to Chip Enable Active — — 10 ns DS39778B-page 404 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-8: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER AND POWER-UP TIMER TIMING VDD MCLR 30 Internal POR PWRT Time-out 33 32 Oscillator Time-out Internal Reset Watchdog Timer Reset 31 34 34 I/O pins Note: Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions. TABLE 27-12: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER, POWER-UP TIMER AND BROWN-OUT RESET REQUIREMENTS Param. Symbol No. Characteristic 30 TMCL MCLR Pulse Width (low) 31 TWDT Watchdog Timer Time-out Period (no postscaler) 32 TOST Oscillator Start-up Timer Period Min Typ Max Units 2 — — TCY 3.4 4.0 4.6 ms 1024 TOSC — 1024 TOSC — 33 TPWRT Power-up Timer Period 45.8 65.5 85.2 ms 34 TIOZ I/O High-Impedance from MCLR Low or Watchdog Timer Reset — 2 — μs 38 TCSD CPU Start-up Time — 200 — μs Note 1: Conditions (Note 1) TOSC = OSC1 period To ensure device reset, MCLR must be low for at least 2 TCY or 400 µs, whichever is lower. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 405 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 27-13: TIMER0 AND TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMINGS T0CKI 41 40 42 T1OSO/T13CKI 46 45 47 48 TMR0 or TMR1 Note: Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions. TABLE 27-14: TIMER0 AND TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK REQUIREMENTS Param No. Symbol Characteristic 40 TT0H T0CKI High Pulse Width No prescaler 41 TT0L T0CKI Low Pulse Width No prescaler 42 TT0P T0CKI Period No prescaler With prescaler With prescaler With prescaler 45 46 47 TT1H TT1L T13CKI High Synchronous, no prescaler Time Synchronous, with prescaler Units 0.5 TCY + 20 — ns 10 — ns 0.5 TCY + 20 — ns 10 — ns TCY + 10 — ns Greater of: 20 ns or (TCY + 40)/N — ns 0.5 TCY + 20 — ns 10 — ns Asynchronous 30 — ns 0.5 TCY + 5 — ns 10 — ns Asynchronous 30 — ns Greater of: 20 ns or (TCY + 40)/N — ns TT1P T13CKI Input Synchronous Period FT 1 T13CKI Oscillator Input Frequency Range TCKE2TMRI Delay from External T13CKI Clock Edge to Timer Increment DS39778B-page 406 Max T13CKI Low Synchronous, no prescaler Time Synchronous, with prescaler Asynchronous 48 Min Preliminary 60 — ns DC 50 kHz 2 TOSC 7 TOSC — Conditions N = prescale value (1, 2, 4,..., 256) N = prescale value (1, 2, 4, 8) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-9: PARALLEL SLAVE PORT TIMING PMCSx PMRD PMWR PS4 PMD<7:0> PS1 PS3 PS2 Note: Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions. TABLE 27-15: PARALLEL SLAVE PORT REQUIREMENTS Param. No. Symbol Characteristic Min Max Units PS1 TdtV2wrH Data In Valid before PMWR or PMCSx Inactive (setup time) 20 — ns PS2 TwrH2dtI PMWR or PMCSx Inactive to Data–In Invalid (hold time) 20 — ns PS3 TrdL2dtV PMRD and PMCSx Active to Data–Out Valid — 80 ns PS4 TrdH2dtI PMRD Active or PMCSx Inactive to Data–Out Invalid 10 30 ns © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Conditions DS39778B-page 407 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-10: PARALLEL MASTER PORT READ TIMING DIAGRAM Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 System Clock PMA<18:13> PMD<7:0> Address Address<7:0> Data PM6 PM2 PM7 PM3 PMRD PM5 PMWR PMALL/ PMALH PM1 PMCS<2:1> Operating Conditions: 2.0V < VCC < 3.6V, -40°C < TA < +85°C unless otherwise stated. TABLE 27-16: PARALLEL MASTER PORT READ TIMING REQUIREMENTS Param. No Symbol Characteristics Min Typ Max Units PM1 PMALL/PMALH Pulse Width — 0.5 TCY — ns PM2 Address out valid to PMALL/PMALH Invalid (address setup time) — 0.75 TCY — ns PM3 PMALL/PMALH Invalid to Address Out Invalid (address hold time) — 0.25 TCY — ns PM5 PMRD Pulse Width — 0.5 TCY — ns PM6 PMRD or PMENB Active to Data In Valid (data setup time) — — — ns PM7 PMRD or PMENB Inactive to Data In Invalid (data hold time) — — — ns DS39778B-page 408 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-11: PARALLEL MASTER PORT WRITE TIMING DIAGRAM Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 System Clock PMA<18:13> PMD<7:0> Address Address<7:0> Data PM12 PM13 PMRD PMWR PM11 PMALL/ PMALH PMCS<2:1> PM16 Operating Conditions: 2.0V < VCC < 3.6V, -40°C < TA < +85°C unless otherwise stated. TABLE 27-17: PARALLEL MASTER PORT WRITE TIMING REQUIREMENTS Param. No Symbol Characteristics Min Typ Max Units PM11 PMWR Pulse Width — 0.5 TCY — ns PM12 Data Out Valid before PMWR or PMENB Goes Inactive (data setup time) — — — ns PM13 PMWR or PMEMB Invalid to Data Out Invalid (data hold time) — — — ns PM16 PMCSx Pulse Width TCY – 5 — — ns © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 409 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-12: CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM TIMINGS (INCLUDING ECCP MODULES) CCPx (Capture Mode) 50 51 52 CCPx (Compare or PWM Mode) 54 53 Note: Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions. TABLE 27-18: CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM REQUIREMENTS (INCLUDING ECCP MODULES) Param Symbol No. 50 51 TCCL TCCH Characteristic Min Max Units CCPx Input Low No prescaler Time With prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — ns 10 — ns CCPx Input High Time 0.5 TCY + 20 — ns 10 — ns 3 TCY + 40 N — ns No prescaler With prescaler 52 TCCP CCPx Input Period 53 TCCR CCPx Output Fall Time — 25 ns 54 TCCF CCPx Output Fall Time — 25 ns DS39778B-page 410 Preliminary Conditions N = prescale value (1, 4 or 16) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-13: EXAMPLE SPI MASTER MODE TIMING (CKE = 0) SCKx (CKP = 0) 78 79 79 78 SCKx (CKP = 1) 80 MSb SDOx bit 6 - - - - - - 1 LSb 75, 76 SDIx bit 6 - - - - 1 MSb In LSb In 74 73 Note: Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions. TABLE 27-19: EXAMPLE SPI MODE REQUIREMENTS (MASTER MODE, CKE = 0) Param No. Symbol Characteristic 73 TDIV2SCH, TDIV2SCL Setup Time of SDIx Data Input to SCKx Edge 73A TB2B Last Clock Edge of Byte 1 to the 1st Clock Edge of Byte 2 Min Max Units 100 — ns 1.5 TCY + 40 — ns 75 TDOR SDOx Data Output Rise Time — 25 ns 76 TDOF SDOx Data Output Fall Time — 25 ns 78 TSCR SCKx Output Rise Time — 25 ns 79 TSCF SCKx Output Fall Time — 25 ns 80 TSCH2DOV, SDOx Data Output Valid after SCKx Edge TSCL2DOV — 50 ns © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Conditions DS39778B-page 411 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-14: EXAMPLE SPI MASTER MODE TIMING (CKE = 1) 81 SCKx (CKP = 0) 79 73 SCKx (CKP = 1) 80 78 MSb SDOx LSb bit 6 - - - - - - 1 75, 76 SDIx bit 6 - - - - 1 MSb In LSb In 74 Note: Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions. TABLE 27-20: EXAMPLE SPI MODE REQUIREMENTS (MASTER MODE, CKE = 1) Param. No. Symbol Characteristic Min Max Units 73 TDIV2SCH, TDIV2SCL Setup Time of SDIx Data Input to SCKx Edge 100 — ns 74 TSCH2DIL, TSCL2DIL Hold Time of SDIx Data Input to SCKx Edge 100 — ns 75 TDOR SDOx Data Output Rise Time — 25 ns 76 TDOF SDOx Data Output Fall Time — 25 ns 78 TSCR SCKx Output Rise Time — 25 ns 79 TSCF SCKx Output Fall Time — 25 ns 80 TSCH2DOV, SDOx Data Output Valid after SCKx Edge TSCL2DOV — 50 ns 81 TDOV2SCH, SDOx Data Output Setup to SCKx Edge TDOV2SCL TCY — ns DS39778B-page 412 Preliminary Conditions © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-15: EXAMPLE SPI SLAVE MODE TIMING (CKE = 0) SSx 70 SCKx (CKP = 0) 83 71 72 SCKx (CKP = 1) 80 SDOx MSb bit 6 - - - - - - 1 LSb 75, 76 MSb In SDI 77 bit 6 - - - - 1 LSb In 74 73 Note: Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions. TABLE 27-21: EXAMPLE SPI MODE REQUIREMENTS (SLAVE MODE TIMING, CKE = 0) Param No. Symbol Characteristic Min Max Units Conditions 70 TSSL2SCH, SSx ↓ to SCKx ↓ or SCKx ↑ Input TSSL2SCL 3 TCY — ns 70A TSSL2WB SSx ↓ to write to SSPxBUF 3 TCY — ns 71 TSCH SCKx Input High Time 1.25 TCY + 30 — ns Single byte 40 — ns TSCL SCKx Input Low Time Continuous 1.25 TCY + 30 — ns Single byte 40 — ns 100 — ns — ns 100 — ns — 25 ns Continuous 71A 72 72A 73 TDIV2SCH, Setup Time of SDIx Data Input to SCKx Edge TDIV2SCL 73A TB2B 74 TSCH2DIL, Hold Time of SDIx Data Input to SCKx Edge TSCL2DIL 75 TDOR SDOx Data Output Rise Time 76 TDOF SDOx Data Output Fall Time — 25 ns 77 TSSH2DOZ SSx ↑ to SDOx Output High-Impedance 10 50 ns 80 TSCH2DOV, SDOx Data Output Valid after SCKx Edge TSCL2DOV — 50 ns 83 TSCH2SSH, SSx ↑ after SCKx Edge TSCL2SSH 1.5 TCY + 40 — ns Note 1: 2: Last Clock Edge of Byte 1 to the First Clock Edge of Byte 2 1.5 TCY + 40 (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 2) Requires the use of Parameter #73A. Only if Parameter #71A and #72A are used. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 413 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-16: EXAMPLE SPI SLAVE MODE TIMING (CKE = 1) 82 SSx SCKx (CKP = 0) 70 83 71 72 SCKx (CKP = 1) 80 MSb SDOx bit 6 - - - - - - 1 LSb 75, 76 SDIx MSb In 77 bit 6 - - - - 1 LSb In 74 Note: Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions. TABLE 27-22: EXAMPLE SPI SLAVE MODE REQUIREMENTS (CKE = 1) Param No. Symbol Characteristic 70 TSSL2SCH, SSx ↓ to SCKx ↓ or SCKx ↑ Input TSSL2SCL 70A TSSL2WB SSx ↓ to write to SSPxBUF 71 TSCH SCKx Input High Time 71A 72 TSCL SCKx Input Low Time 72A Min Max Units Conditions 3 TCY — ns 3 TCY — ns Continuous 1.25 TCY + 30 — ns Single byte 40 — ns Continuous 1.25 TCY + 30 — ns Single byte 40 — ns (Note 1) — ns (Note 2) — ns 73A TB2B 74 TSCH2DIL, Hold Time of SDIx Data Input to SCKx Edge TSCL2DIL Last Clock Edge of Byte 1 to the First Clock Edge of Byte 2 1.5 TCY + 40 100 75 TDOR SDOx Data Output Rise Time — 25 ns 76 TDOF SDOx Data Output Fall Time — 25 ns 77 TSSH2DOZ SSx ↑ to SDOx Output High-Impedance 10 50 ns 80 TSCH2DOV, SDOx Data Output Valid after SCKx Edge TSCL2DOV — 50 ns 82 TSSL2DOV SDOx Data Output Valid after SSx ↓ Edge — 50 ns 83 TSCH2SSH, SSx ↑ after SCKx Edge TSCL2SSH 1.5 TCY + 40 — ns Note 1: 2: (Note 1) Requires the use of Parameter #73A. Only if Parameter #71A and #72A are used. DS39778B-page 414 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-17: I2C™ BUS START/STOP BITS TIMING SCLx 91 93 90 92 SDAx Stop Condition Start Condition Note: Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions. TABLE 27-23: I2C™ BUS START/STOP BITS REQUIREMENTS (SLAVE MODE) Param. Symbol No. 90 91 92 93 TSU:STA THD:STA TSU:STO Characteristic Max Units Conditions ns Only relevant for Repeated Start condition ns After this period, the first clock pulse is generated Start Condition 100 kHz mode 4700 — Setup Time 400 kHz mode 600 — Start Condition 100 kHz mode 4000 — Hold Time 400 kHz mode 600 — Stop Condition 100 kHz mode 4700 — Setup Time 400 kHz mode 600 — 100 kHz mode 4000 — 400 kHz mode 600 — THD:STO Stop Condition Hold Time FIGURE 27-18: Min ns ns I2C™ BUS DATA TIMING 103 102 100 101 SCLx 90 106 107 91 92 SDAx In 110 109 109 SDAx Out Note: Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 415 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 27-24: I2C™ BUS DATA REQUIREMENTS (SLAVE MODE) Param. No. 100 Symbol THIGH 101 TLOW 102 TR Characteristic Clock High Time Clock Low Time TF TSU:STA THD:STA 91 THD:DAT 106 TSU:DAT 107 TSU:STO 92 109 TAA 110 TBUF D102 CB Note 1: 2: Units 100 kHz mode 4.0 — μs 0.6 — μs MSSP modules 1.5 TCY — 100 kHz mode 4.7 — μs μs 400 kHz mode 1.3 — MSSP modules 1.5 TCY — — 1000 ns 20 + 0.1 CB 300 ns SDAx and SCLx Rise Time 100 kHz mode SDAx and SCLx Fall Time 100 kHz mode Conditions CB is specified to be from 10 to 400 pF — 300 ns 20 + 0.1 CB 300 ns CB is specified to be from 10 to 400 pF Start Condition Setup Time 100 kHz mode 4.7 — μs 400 kHz mode 0.6 — μs Only relevant for Repeated Start condition 400 kHz mode 90 Max 400 kHz mode 400 kHz mode 103 Min Start Condition Hold Time Data Input Hold Time Data Input Setup Time 100 kHz mode 4.0 — μs 400 kHz mode 0.6 — μs 100 kHz mode 0 — ns 400 kHz mode 0 0.9 μs 100 kHz mode 250 — ns 400 kHz mode 100 — ns Stop Condition Setup Time 100 kHz mode 4.7 — μs 400 kHz mode 0.6 — μs Output Valid from Clock Bus Free Time Bus Capacitive Loading 100 kHz mode — 3500 ns 400 kHz mode — — ns 100 kHz mode 4.7 — μs 400 kHz mode 1.3 — μs — 400 pF After this period, the first clock pulse is generated (Note 2) (Note 1) Time the bus must be free before a new transmission can start As a transmitter, the device must provide this internal minimum delay time to bridge the undefined region (min. 300 ns) of the falling edge of SCLx to avoid unintended generation of Start or Stop conditions. A Fast mode I2C™ bus device can be used in a Standard mode I2C bus system, but the requirement, TSU:DAT ≥ 250 ns, must then be met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCLx signal. If such a device does stretch the LOW period of the SCLx signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDAx line, TR max. + TSU:DAT = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the Standard mode I2C bus specification), before the SCLx line is released. DS39778B-page 416 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-19: MSSP I2C™ BUS START/STOP BITS TIMING WAVEFORMS SCLx 93 91 90 92 SDAx Stop Condition Start Condition Note: Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions. TABLE 27-25: MSSP I2C™ BUS START/STOP BITS REQUIREMENTS Param. Symbol No. 90 TSU:STA Characteristic After this period, the first clock pulse is generated 400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — mode(1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — 400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — 1 MHz mode(1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — Stop Condition 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — Setup Time 400 kHz mode THD:STO Stop Condition 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — mode(1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — 400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — 1 MHz mode(1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — 2C™ Maximum pin capacitance = 10 pF for all I FIGURE 27-20: ns Setup Time Hold Time Note 1: Only relevant for Repeated Start condition — 1 MHz 93 ns 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) Hold Time 92 Units 100 kHz mode THD:STA Start Condition TSU:STO Max Start Condition 1 MHz 91 Min Conditions ns ns pins. MSSP I2C™ BUS DATA TIMING 103 102 100 101 SCLx 90 106 91 107 92 SDAx In 109 109 110 SDAx Out Note: Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 417 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 27-26: MSSP I2C™ BUS DATA REQUIREMENTS Param. Symbol No. 100 101 THIGH TLOW Characteristic Min Max Units 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms 400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms 1 MHz mode(1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms Clock Low Time 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms 400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms (1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms — 1000 ns 20 + 0.1 CB 300 ns — 300 ns Clock High Time 100 kHz mode 1 MHz mode 102 TR SDAx and SCLx 100 kHz mode Rise Time 400 kHz mode 1 MHz mode(1) 103 90 91 106 107 92 109 110 D102 TF TSU:STA SDAx and SCLx 100 kHz mode Fall Time 400 kHz mode Start Condition Setup Time THD:STA Start Condition Hold Time THD:DAT Data Input Hold Time TSU:DAT Data Input Setup Time TSU:STO Stop Condition Setup Time TAA TBUF CB Output Valid from Clock Bus Free Time — 300 ns 20 + 0.1 CB 300 ns 1 MHz mode(1) — 100 ns 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms 400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms 1 MHz mode(1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms 400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms 1 MHz mode(1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms 100 kHz mode 0 — ns 400 kHz mode 0 0.9 ms 1 MHz mode(1) TBD — ns 100 kHz mode 250 — ns 400 kHz mode 100 — ns 1 MHz mode(1) TBD — ns 100 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms 400 kHz mode 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms 1 MHz mode(1) 2(TOSC)(BRG + 1) — ms 100 kHz mode — 3500 ns 400 kHz mode — 1000 ns (1) 1 MHz mode — — ns 100 kHz mode 4.7 — ms 400 kHz mode 1.3 — ms 1 MHz mode(1) TBD — ms — 400 pF Bus Capacitive Loading Conditions CB is specified to be from 10 to 400 pF CB is specified to be from 10 to 400 pF Only relevant for Repeated Start condition After this period, the first clock pulse is generated (Note 2) Time the bus must be free before a new transmission can start Legend: TBD = To Be Determined Note 1: Maximum pin capacitance = 10 pF for all I2C™ pins. 2: A Fast mode I2C bus device can be used in a Standard mode I2C bus system, but parameter #107 ≥ 250 ns must then be met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCLx signal. If such a device does stretch the LOW period of the SCLx signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDAx line, parameter #102 + parameter #107 = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (for 100 kHz mode), before the SCLx line is released. DS39778B-page 418 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY FIGURE 27-21: EUSART SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (MASTER/SLAVE) TIMING TXx/CKx pin 121 121 RXx/DTx pin 120 Note: 122 Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions. TABLE 27-27: EUSART SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION REQUIREMENTS Param No. 120 Symbol Characteristic TCKH2DTV SYNC XMIT (MASTER and SLAVE) Clock High to Data Out Valid Min Max Units — 40 ns 121 TCKRF Clock Out Rise Time and Fall Time (Master mode) — 20 ns 122 TDTRF Data Out Rise Time and Fall Time — 20 ns FIGURE 27-22: Conditions EUSART SYNCHRONOUS RECEIVE (MASTER/SLAVE) TIMING TXx/CKx pin 125 RXx/DTx pin 126 Note: Refer to Figure 27-3 for load conditions. TABLE 27-28: EUSART SYNCHRONOUS RECEIVE REQUIREMENTS Param. No. Symbol Characteristic 125 TDTV2CKL SYNC RCV (MASTER and SLAVE) Data Hold before CKx ↓ (DTx hold time) 126 TCKL2DTL Data Hold after CKx ↓ (DTx hold time) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Min Max Units 10 — ns 15 — ns Conditions DS39778B-page 419 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 27-29: A/D CONVERTER CHARACTERISTICS: PIC18F87J11 FAMILY (INDUSTRIAL) Param Symbol No. Characteristic Min Typ Max Units — — 10 bit Conditions ΔVREF ≥ 3.0V A01 NR Resolution A03 EIL Integral Linearity Error — — <±1 LSb ΔVREF ≥ 3.0V A04 EDL Differential Linearity Error — — <±1 LSb ΔVREF ≥ 3.0V A06 EOFF Offset Error — — <±3 LSb ΔVREF ≥ 3.0V A07 EGN Gain Error — — <±3 LSb ΔVREF ≥ 3.0V A10 — Monotonicity — VSS ≤ VAIN ≤ VREF A20 ΔVREF Reference Voltage Range (VREFH – VREFL) 2.0 3 — — — — V V VDD < 3.0V VDD ≥ 3.0V A21 VREFH Reference Voltage High VSS — VREFH V A22 VREFL Reference Voltage Low VSS – 0.3V — VDD – 3.0V V A25 VAIN Analog Input Voltage VREFL — VREFH V A30 ZAIN Recommended Impedance of Analog Voltage Source — — 2.5 kΩ A50 IREF VREF Input Current(2) — — — — 5 150 μA μA Note 1: 2: Guaranteed(1) During VAIN acquisition. During A/D conversion cycle. The A/D conversion result never decreases with an increase in the input voltage and has no missing codes. VREFH current is from RA3/AN3/VREF+ pin or VDD, whichever is selected as the VREFH source. VREFL current is from RA2/AN2/VREF- pin or VSS, whichever is selected as the VREFL source. FIGURE 27-23: A/D CONVERSION TIMING BSF ADCON0, GO (Note 2) 131 Q4 130 A/D CLK 132 9 A/D DATA 8 7 ... ... 2 OLD_DATA ADRES 1 0 NEW_DATA TCY (Note 1) ADIF GO DONE SAMPLING STOPPED SAMPLE Note 1: If the A/D clock source is selected as RC, a time of TCY is added before the A/D clock starts. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed. 2: This is a minimal RC delay (typically 100 ns), which also disconnects the holding capacitor from the analog input. DS39778B-page 420 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY TABLE 27-30: A/D CONVERSION REQUIREMENTS Param Symbol No. Characteristic Min Max Units 0.7 25.0(1) μs TOSC based, VREF ≥ 3.0V A/D RC mode 130 TAD A/D Clock Period TBD 1 μs 131 TCNV Conversion Time (not including acquisition time) (Note 2) 11 12 TAD μs 132 TACQ Acquisition Time (Note 3) 1.4 — 135 TSWC Switching Time from Convert → Sample — (Note 4) TBD TDIS Discharge Time 0.2 — Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: Conditions -40°C to +85°C μs TBD = To Be Determined The time of the A/D clock period is dependent on the device frequency and the TAD clock divider. ADRES registers may be read on the following TCY cycle. The time for the holding capacitor to acquire the “New” input voltage when the voltage changes full scale after the conversion (VDD to VSS or VSS to VDD). The source impedance (RS) on the input channels is 50Ω. On the following cycle of the device clock. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 421 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 422 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 28.0 DC AND AC CHARACTERISTICS GRAPHS AND TABLES Graphs and tables are not available at this time. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 423 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 424 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 29.0 PACKAGING INFORMATION 29.1 Package Marking Information 64-Lead TQFP Example XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN 18F67J11 -I/PT e3 0710017 80-Lead TQFP Example PIC18F87J11 -I/PT e3 0710017 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN Legend: XX...X Y YY WW NNN e3 * Note: Customer-specific information Year code (last digit of calendar year) Year code (last 2 digits of calendar year) Week code (week of January 1 is week ‘01’) Alphanumeric traceability code Pb-free JEDEC designator for Matte Tin (Sn) This package is Pb-free. The Pb-free JEDEC designator ( e3 ) can be found on the outer packaging for this package. In the event the full Microchip part number cannot be marked on one line, it will be carried over to the next line, thus limiting the number of available characters for customer-specific information. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 425 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 29.2 Package Details The following sections give the technical details of the packages. 64-Lead Plastic Thin Quad Flatpack (PT) – 10x10x1 mm Body, 2.00 mm Footprint [TQFP] Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging D D1 E e E1 N b NOTE 1 123 NOTE 2 α A c φ A2 β A1 L L1 Units Dimension Limits Number of Leads MILLIMETERS MIN N NOM MAX 64 Lead Pitch e Overall Height A – 0.50 BSC – Molded Package Thickness A2 0.95 1.00 1.05 Standoff A1 0.05 – 0.15 Foot Length L 0.45 0.60 0.75 Footprint L1 1.20 1.00 REF Foot Angle φ Overall Width E 12.00 BSC Overall Length D 12.00 BSC Molded Package Width E1 10.00 BSC Molded Package Length D1 10.00 BSC 0° 3.5° 7° Lead Thickness c 0.09 – 0.20 Lead Width b 0.17 0.22 0.27 Mold Draft Angle Top α 11° 12° 13° Mold Draft Angle Bottom β 11° 12° 13° Notes: 1. Pin 1 visual index feature may vary, but must be located within the hatched area. 2. Chamfers at corners are optional; size may vary. 3. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed 0.25 mm per side. 4. Dimensioning and tolerancing per ASME Y14.5M. BSC: Basic Dimension. Theoretically exact value shown without tolerances. REF: Reference Dimension, usually without tolerance, for information purposes only. Microchip Technology Drawing C04-085B DS39778B-page 426 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY 80-Lead Plastic Thin Quad Flatpack (PT) – 12x12x1 mm Body, 2.00 mm Footprint [TQFP] Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging D D1 E e E1 N b NOTE 1 12 3 NOTE 2 c β φ L α A A2 A1 L1 Units Dimension Limits Number of Leads MILLIMETERS MIN N NOM MAX 80 Lead Pitch e Overall Height A – 0.50 BSC – Molded Package Thickness A2 0.95 1.00 1.05 Standoff A1 0.05 – 0.15 Foot Length L 0.45 0.60 0.75 Footprint L1 1.20 1.00 REF Foot Angle φ Overall Width E 14.00 BSC Overall Length D 14.00 BSC Molded Package Width E1 12.00 BSC Molded Package Length D1 12.00 BSC 0° 3.5° 7° Lead Thickness c 0.09 – 0.20 Lead Width b 0.17 0.22 0.27 Mold Draft Angle Top α 11° 12° 13° Mold Draft Angle Bottom β 11° 12° 13° Notes: 1. Pin 1 visual index feature may vary, but must be located within the hatched area. 2. Chamfers at corners are optional; size may vary. 3. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed 0.25 mm per side. 4. Dimensioning and tolerancing per ASME Y14.5M. BSC: Basic Dimension. Theoretically exact value shown without tolerances. REF: Reference Dimension, usually without tolerance, for information purposes only. Microchip Technology Drawing C04-092B © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 427 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 428 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY APPENDIX A: REVISION HISTORY Revision A (January 2007) Original data sheet for the PIC18F87J11 Family of devices. APPENDIX B: DEVICE DIFFERENCES The differences between the devices listed in this data sheet are shown in Table B-1. Revision B (February 2007) Updated values in Power-Down and Supply Current table in “DC Characteristics” section. TABLE B-1: DEVICE DIFFERENCES BETWEEN PIC18F87J11 FAMILY MEMBERS Features PIC18F66J11 PIC18F66J16 PIC18F67J11 PIC18F86J11 PIC18F86J16 PIC18F87J11 Program memory 64K 96K 128K 64K 96K 128K Program Memory (Instructions) 32764 49148 65532 32764 49148 65532 I/O Ports EMB 10-Bit ADC module Packages © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Ports A, B, C, D, E, F, G Ports A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J No Yes 11 Input Channels 15 Input Channels 64-Pin TQFP 80-Pin TQFP Preliminary DS39778B-page 429 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 430 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY THE MICROCHIP WEB SITE CUSTOMER SUPPORT Microchip provides online support via our WWW site at www.microchip.com. This web site is used as a means to make files and information easily available to customers. Accessible by using your favorite Internet browser, the web site contains the following information: Users of Microchip products can receive assistance through several channels: • Product Support – Data sheets and errata, application notes and sample programs, design resources, user’s guides and hardware support documents, latest software releases and archived software • General Technical Support – Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), technical support requests, online discussion groups, Microchip consultant program member listing • Business of Microchip – Product selector and ordering guides, latest Microchip press releases, listing of seminars and events, listings of Microchip sales offices, distributors and factory representatives • • • • • Distributor or Representative Local Sales Office Field Application Engineer (FAE) Technical Support Development Systems Information Line Customers should contact their distributor, representative or field application engineer (FAE) for support. Local sales offices are also available to help customers. A listing of sales offices and locations is included in the back of this document. Technical support is available through the web site at: http://support.microchip.com CUSTOMER CHANGE NOTIFICATION SERVICE Microchip’s customer notification service helps keep customers current on Microchip products. Subscribers will receive e-mail notification whenever there are changes, updates, revisions or errata related to a specified product family or development tool of interest. To register, access the Microchip web site at www.microchip.com, click on Customer Change Notification and follow the registration instructions. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39778B-page 431 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY READER RESPONSE It is our intention to provide you with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip product. If you wish to provide your comments on organization, clarity, subject matter, and ways in which our documentation can better serve you, please FAX your comments to the Technical Publications Manager at (480) 792-4150. Please list the following information, and use this outline to provide us with your comments about this document. To: Technical Publications Manager RE: Reader Response Total Pages Sent ________ From: Name Company Address City / State / ZIP / Country Telephone: (_______) _________ - _________ FAX: (______) _________ - _________ Application (optional): Would you like a reply? Y N Device: PIC18F87J11 Family Literature Number: DS39778B Questions: 1. What are the best features of this document? 2. How does this document meet your hardware and software development needs? 3. Do you find the organization of this document easy to follow? If not, why? 4. What additions to the document do you think would enhance the structure and subject? 5. What deletions from the document could be made without affecting the overall usefulness? 6. Is there any incorrect or misleading information (what and where)? 7. How would you improve this document? DS39778B-page 432 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY INDEX A A/D .................................................................................... 291 A/D Converter Interrupt, Configuring ........................ 295 Acquisition Requirements ......................................... 296 ADCAL Bit................................................................. 299 ADRESH Register..................................................... 294 Analog Port Pins, Configuring................................... 297 Associated Registers ................................................ 300 Automatic Acquisition Time....................................... 297 Calibration................................................................. 299 Configuring the Module............................................. 295 Conversion Clock (TAD) ............................................ 297 Conversion Requirements ........................................ 421 Conversion Status (GO/DONE Bit) ........................... 294 Conversions .............................................................. 298 Converter Characteristics ......................................... 420 Operation in Power-Managed Modes ....................... 299 Special Event Trigger (ECCP) .......................... 210, 298 Use of the ECCP2 Trigger ........................................ 298 Absolute Maximum Ratings .............................................. 383 AC (Timing) Characteristics .............................................. 398 Load Conditions for Device Timing Specifications.................................................... 399 Parameter Symbology .............................................. 398 Temperature and Voltage Specifications .................. 399 Timing Conditions ..................................................... 399 ACKSTAT ......................................................................... 259 ACKSTAT Status Flag ...................................................... 259 ADCAL Bit ......................................................................... 299 ADCON0 Register GO/DONE Bit............................................................ 294 ADDFSR ........................................................................... 372 ADDLW ............................................................................. 335 ADDULNK ......................................................................... 372 ADDWF ............................................................................. 335 ADDWFC .......................................................................... 336 ADRESL Register ............................................................. 294 Analog-to-Digital Converter. See A/D. ANDLW ............................................................................. 336 ANDWF ............................................................................. 337 Assembler MPASM Assembler................................................... 380 Auto-Wake-up on Sync Break Character .......................... 282 B Baud Rate Generator ........................................................ 255 BC ..................................................................................... 337 BCF ................................................................................... 338 BF ..................................................................................... 259 BF Status Flag .................................................................. 259 Block Diagrams 16-Bit Byte Select Mode ........................................... 103 16-Bit Byte Write Mode ............................................. 101 16-Bit Word Write Mode............................................ 102 8-Bit Multiplexed Address and Data Application................................................ 178 8-Bit Multiplexed Mode Example .............................. 105 A/D ............................................................................ 294 Analog Input Model ................................................... 295 Baud Rate Generator................................................ 255 Capture Mode Operation .......................................... 201 Comparator ............................................................... 301 Comparator Analog Input Model ............................... 304 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Comparator I/O Configurations................................. 306 Comparator Voltage Reference................................ 309 Comparator Voltage Reference Output Buffer Example ..................................... 311 Compare Mode Operation ........................................ 202 Connections for On-Chip Voltage Regulator ............ 323 Demultiplexed Addressing Mode.............................. 171 Device Clock............................................................... 31 Enhanced PWM........................................................ 211 EUSART Receive ..................................................... 281 EUSART Transmit .................................................... 279 External Power-on Reset Circuit (Slow VDD Power-up) ......................................... 51 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor ............................................ 325 Fully Multiplexed Addressing Mode.......................... 171 Generic I/O Port Operation....................................... 127 Interrupt Logic........................................................... 112 LCD Control.............................................................. 179 Legacy Parallel Slave Port ....................................... 165 MSSP (SPI Mode) .................................................... 223 MSSPx (I2C Master Mode) ....................................... 253 MSSPx (I2C Mode) ................................................... 233 Multiplexed Addressing Application.......................... 178 On-Chip Reset Circuit................................................. 49 Parallel EEPROM (Up to 15-Bit Address, 16-Bit Data) ...................................................... 179 Parallel EEPROM (Up to 15-Bit Address, 8-Bit Data) ........................................................ 179 Parallel Master/Slave Connection Addressed Buffer.............................................. 168 Parallel Master/Slave Connection Buffered.............. 167 Partially Multiplexed Addressing Application ............ 178 Partially Multiplexed Addressing Mode..................... 171 PIC18F6XJ1X (64-Pin) ............................................... 10 PIC18F8XJ1X (80-Pin) ............................................... 11 PLL ............................................................................. 36 PMP Module ............................................................. 157 PWM Operation (Simplified) ..................................... 204 Reads From Flash Program Memory ......................... 91 Table Read Operation ................................................ 87 Table Write Operation ................................................ 88 Table Writes to Flash Program Memory ..................... 93 Timer0 in 16-Bit Mode .............................................. 182 Timer0 in 8-Bit Mode ................................................ 182 Timer1 ...................................................................... 186 Timer1 (16-Bit Read/Write Mode)............................. 186 Timer2 ...................................................................... 192 Timer3 ...................................................................... 194 Timer3 (16-Bit Read/Write Mode)............................. 194 Timer4 ...................................................................... 198 Watchdog Timer ....................................................... 321 BN..................................................................................... 338 BNC .................................................................................. 339 BNN .................................................................................. 339 BNOV ............................................................................... 340 BNZ .................................................................................. 340 BOR. See Brown-out Reset. BOV .................................................................................. 343 BRA .................................................................................. 341 Break Character (12-Bit) Transmit and Receive............... 284 BRG. See Baud Rate Generator. Preliminary DS39778B-page 433 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY Brown-out Reset (BOR) ...................................................... 51 and On-Chip Voltage Regulator ................................ 324 Detecting ..................................................................... 51 Disabling in Sleep Mode ............................................. 51 BSF ................................................................................... 341 BTFSC .............................................................................. 342 BTFSS............................................................................... 342 BTG................................................................................... 343 BZ...................................................................................... 344 C C Compilers MPLAB C18 .............................................................. 380 MPLAB C30 .............................................................. 380 Calibration (A/D Converter)............................................... 299 CALL ................................................................................. 344 CALLW.............................................................................. 373 Capture (CCP Module)...................................................... 201 Associated Registers ................................................ 203 CCP Pin Configuration .............................................. 201 CCPRxH:CCPRxL Registers .................................... 201 Prescaler ................................................................... 201 Software Interrupt ..................................................... 201 Timer1/Timer3 Mode Selection ................................. 201 Capture (ECCP Module) ................................................... 210 Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP)......................................... 199 Capture Mode. See Capture. CCP Mode and Timer Resources ............................. 200 CCPRxH Register ..................................................... 200 CCPRxL Register...................................................... 200 Compare Mode. See Compare. Module Configuration ................................................ 200 Timer Interconnect Configurations ............................ 200 Clock Sources ..................................................................... 33 Default System Clock on Reset .................................. 34 Selection Using OSCCON Register ............................ 34 CLRF................................................................................. 345 CLRWDT........................................................................... 345 Code Examples 16 x 16 Signed Multiply Routine ............................... 110 16 x 16 Unsigned Multiply Routine ........................... 110 8 x 8 Signed Multiply Routine ................................... 109 8 x 8 Unsigned Multiply Routine ............................... 109 A/D Calibration Routine ............................................ 299 Changing Between Capture Prescalers .................... 201 Computed GOTO Using an Offset Value .................... 67 Erasing a Flash Program Memory Row ...................... 92 Fast Register Stack..................................................... 67 How to Clear RAM (Bank 1) Using Indirect Addressing ............................................. 81 Implementing a Real-Time Clock Using a Timer1 Interrupt Service ................................ 189 Initializing PORTA ..................................................... 130 Initializing PORTB ..................................................... 133 Initializing PORTC..................................................... 136 Initializing PORTD..................................................... 139 Initializing PORTE ..................................................... 142 Initializing PORTF ..................................................... 145 Initializing PORTG .................................................... 148 Initializing PORTH..................................................... 151 Initializing PORTJ ..................................................... 154 Loading the SSP1BUF (SSP1SR) Register .............. 226 Reading a Flash Program Memory Word ................... 91 Saving STATUS, WREG and BSR Registers in RAM .............................................. 126 DS39778B-page 434 Single-Word Write to Flash Program Memory................................................ 95 Writing to Flash Program Memory .............................. 94 Code Protection ................................................................ 313 COMF ............................................................................... 346 Comparator....................................................................... 301 Analog Input Connection Considerations ................. 304 Associated Registers ................................................ 308 Configuration ............................................................ 305 Control ...................................................................... 305 Effects of a Reset ..................................................... 308 Enable, Input Selection............................................. 305 Enable, Output Selection .......................................... 305 Interrupts .................................................................. 307 Operation .................................................................. 304 Operation During Sleep ............................................ 308 Reference Response Time ................................................ 304 Single Comparator.................................................... 304 Comparator Specifications................................................ 397 Comparator Voltage Reference ........................................ 309 Accuracy and Error ................................................... 311 Associated Registers ................................................ 311 Configuring ............................................................... 310 Connection Considerations....................................... 311 Effects of a Reset ..................................................... 311 Operation During Sleep ............................................ 311 Compare (CCP Module) ................................................... 202 Associated Registers ................................................ 203 CCPRx Register ....................................................... 202 Pin Configuration ...................................................... 202 Software Interrupt ..................................................... 202 Timer1/Timer3 Mode Selection................................. 202 Compare (ECCP Module)................................................. 210 Special Event Trigger ....................................... 210, 298 Compare (ECCPx Modules) Special Event Trigger ............................................... 195 Computed GOTO................................................................ 67 Configuration Bits ............................................................. 313 Configuration Mismatch Reset (CM)................................... 51 Configuration Register Protection..................................... 327 Core Features Easy Migration .............................................................. 8 Expanded Memory........................................................ 7 Extended Instruction Set .............................................. 7 External Memory Bus ................................................... 7 nanoWatt Technology................................................... 7 Oscillator Options and Features ................................... 7 CPFSEQ ........................................................................... 346 CPFSGT ........................................................................... 347 CPFSLT ............................................................................ 347 Crystal Oscillator/Ceramic Resonator................................. 35 Customer Change Notification Service............................. 431 Customer Notification Service .......................................... 431 Customer Support............................................................. 431 D Data Addressing Modes ..................................................... 81 Comparing Addressing Modes with the Extended Instruction Set Enabled ...................... 85 Direct .......................................................................... 81 Indexed Literal Offset ................................................. 84 BSR .................................................................... 86 Instructions Affected ........................................... 84 Mapping Access Bank ........................................ 86 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY Indirect ........................................................................ 81 Inherent and Literal ..................................................... 81 Data Memory ...................................................................... 70 Access Bank ............................................................... 72 Bank Select Register (BSR)........................................ 70 Extended Instruction Set............................................. 84 General Purpose Registers......................................... 72 Memory Map ............................................................... 71 Memory Maps Special Function Registers ................................. 73 Special Function Registers ......................................... 73 Context Defined SFRs ........................................ 74 Shared Address .................................................. 74 DAW.................................................................................. 348 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables ................................................... 423 DC Characteristics ............................................................ 394 Power-Down and Supply Current ............................. 386 Supply Voltage.......................................................... 385 DCFSNZ ........................................................................... 349 DECF ................................................................................ 348 DECFSZ............................................................................ 349 Default System Clock.......................................................... 34 Development Support ....................................................... 379 Device Differences ............................................................ 429 Device Overview ................................................................... 7 Details on Individual Family Members .......................... 8 Features (64-Pin Devices) ............................................ 9 Features (80-Pin Devices) ............................................ 9 Direct Addressing................................................................ 82 E ECCP Associated Registers ................................................ 222 Capture and Compare Modes................................... 210 Enhanced PWM Mode .............................................. 211 Standard PWM Mode................................................ 210 Effect on Standard PIC Instructions .................................. 376 Effects of Power-Managed Modes on Various Clock Sources................................................ 40 Electrical Characteristics................................................... 383 Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) ..................... 207 Capture Mode. See Capture (ECCP Module). ECCP1/ECCP3 Outputs and Program Memory Mode .................................... 208 ECCP2 Outputs and Program Memory Modes......... 208 Outputs and Configuration ........................................ 208 Pin Configurations for ECCP1 .................................. 209 Pin Configurations for ECCP2 .................................. 209 Pin Configurations for ECCP3 .................................. 210 PWM Mode. See PWM (ECCP Module). Timer Resources....................................................... 208 Use of CCP4/CCP5 with ECCP1/ECCP3 ................. 208 Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART). See EUSART. ENVREG pin ..................................................................... 323 Equations A/D Acquisition Time................................................. 296 A/D Minimum Charging Time.................................... 296 Calculating the Minimum Required Acquisition Time ............................................... 296 Errata .................................................................................... 5 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. EUSART Asynchronous Mode................................................. 279 12-Bit Break Transmit and Receive.................. 284 Associated Registers, Receive......................... 282 Associated Registers, Transmit........................ 280 Auto-Wake-up on Sync Break .......................... 282 Receiver ........................................................... 281 Setting Up 9-Bit Mode with Address Detect......................................... 281 Transmitter ....................................................... 279 Baud Rate Generator Operation in Power-Managed Mode................. 273 Baud Rate Generator (BRG) .................................... 273 Associated Registers........................................ 274 Auto-Baud Rate Detect..................................... 277 Baud Rate Error, Calculating............................ 274 Baud Rates, Asynchronous Modes .................. 275 High Baud Rate Select (BRGH Bit) .................. 273 Sampling .......................................................... 273 Synchronous Master Mode....................................... 285 Associated Registers, Receive......................... 287 Associated Registers, Transmit........................ 286 Reception ......................................................... 287 Transmission .................................................... 285 Synchronous Slave Mode......................................... 288 Associated Registers, Receive......................... 289 Associated Registers, Transmit........................ 288 Reception ......................................................... 289 Transmission .................................................... 288 Extended Instruction Set ADDFSR................................................................... 372 ADDULNK ................................................................ 372 CALLW ..................................................................... 373 MOVSF..................................................................... 373 MOVSS..................................................................... 374 PUSHL...................................................................... 374 SUBFSR ................................................................... 375 SUBULNK................................................................. 375 External Memory Bus ......................................................... 97 16-Bit Byte Select Mode ........................................... 103 16-Bit Byte Write Mode............................................. 101 16-Bit Data Width Modes.......................................... 100 16-Bit Mode Timing .................................................. 104 16-Bit Word Write Mode ........................................... 102 8-Bit Data Width Mode ............................................. 105 8-Bit Mode Timing .................................................... 106 Address and Data Line Usage (table) ........................ 99 Address and Data Width............................................. 99 Address Shifting ......................................................... 99 Control ........................................................................ 98 I/O Port Functions....................................................... 97 Operation in Power-Managed Modes ....................... 107 Program Memory Modes .......................................... 100 Extended Microcontroller.................................. 100 Microcontroller .................................................. 100 Wait States ............................................................... 100 Weak Pull-ups on Port Pins...................................... 100 External Oscillator Modes Clock Input (EC Modes) ............................................. 36 HS............................................................................... 35 Preliminary DS39778B-page 435 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY F Fail-Safe Clock Monitor............................................. 313, 325 Exiting ....................................................................... 326 Interrupts in Power-Managed Modes ........................ 326 POR or Wake-up From Sleep ................................... 326 WDT During Oscillator Failure .................................. 325 Fast Register Stack............................................................. 67 Firmware Instructions........................................................ 329 Flash Configuration Words................................................ 313 Flash Program Memory....................................................... 87 Associated Registers .................................................. 96 Control Registers ........................................................ 88 EECON1 and EECON2 ...................................... 88 TABLAT (Table Latch) Register.......................... 90 TBLPTR (Table Pointer) Register ....................... 90 Erase Sequence ......................................................... 92 Erasing ........................................................................ 92 Operation During Code-Protect .................................. 96 Reading....................................................................... 91 Table Pointer Boundaries Based on Operation......................... 90 Table Pointer Boundaries ........................................... 90 Table Reads and Table Writes ................................... 87 Write Sequence .......................................................... 93 Write Sequence (Word Programming) ........................ 95 Writing ......................................................................... 93 Unexpected Termination..................................... 96 Write Verify ......................................................... 96 FSCM. See Fail-Safe Clock Monitor. G GOTO................................................................................ 350 H Hardware Multiplier ........................................................... 109 8 x 8 Multiplication Algorithms .................................. 109 Operation .................................................................. 109 Performance Comparison (table) .............................. 109 I I/O Ports ............................................................................ 127 Input Pull-up Configuration ....................................... 128 Open-Drain Outputs .................................................. 128 Pin Capabilities ......................................................... 127 I2C Mode (MSSP) Acknowledge Sequence Timing................................ 262 Associated Registers ................................................ 268 Baud Rate Generator ................................................ 255 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition ................... 266 During a Stop Condition.................................... 267 Clock Arbitration........................................................ 256 Clock Stretching ........................................................ 248 10-Bit Slave Receive Mode (SEN = 1).............. 248 10-Bit Slave Transmit Mode.............................. 248 7-Bit Slave Receive Mode (SEN = 1)................ 248 7-Bit Slave Transmit Mode................................ 248 Clock Synchronization and the CKP bit .................... 249 Effects of a Reset...................................................... 263 General Call Address Support .................................. 252 I2C Clock Rate w/BRG .............................................. 255 DS39778B-page 436 Master Mode............................................................. 253 Operation.......................................................... 254 Reception ......................................................... 259 Repeated Start Condition Timing ..................... 258 Start Condition Timing ...................................... 257 Transmission .................................................... 259 Multi-Master Communication, Bus Collision and Arbitration .................................................. 263 Multi-Master Mode .................................................... 263 Operation .................................................................. 238 Read/Write Bit Information (R/W Bit) ................ 238, 241 Registers .................................................................. 233 Serial Clock (RC3/SCKx/SCLx) ................................ 241 Slave Mode............................................................... 238 Address Masking Modes 5-Bit .......................................................... 239 7-Bit .......................................................... 240 Addressing........................................................ 238 Reception ......................................................... 241 Transmission .................................................... 241 Sleep Operation........................................................ 263 Stop Condition Timing .............................................. 262 INCF ................................................................................. 350 INCFSZ............................................................................. 351 In-Circuit Debugger........................................................... 327 In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP)....................... 313, 327 Indexed Literal Offset Addressing and Standard PIC18 Instructions.............................. 376 Indexed Literal Offset Mode.............................................. 376 Indirect Addressing ............................................................. 82 INFSNZ............................................................................. 351 Initialization Conditions for all Registers ....................... 55–60 Instruction Cycle ................................................................. 68 Clocking Scheme........................................................ 68 Flow/Pipelining............................................................ 68 Instruction Set................................................................... 329 ADDLW..................................................................... 335 ADDWF..................................................................... 335 ADDWF (Indexed Literal Offset Mode) ..................... 377 ADDWFC .................................................................. 336 ANDLW..................................................................... 336 ANDWF..................................................................... 337 BC............................................................................. 337 BCF .......................................................................... 338 BN............................................................................. 338 BNC .......................................................................... 339 BNN .......................................................................... 339 BNOV ....................................................................... 340 BNZ .......................................................................... 340 BOV .......................................................................... 343 BRA .......................................................................... 341 BSF........................................................................... 341 BSF (Indexed Literal Offset Mode) ........................... 377 BTFSC ...................................................................... 342 BTFSS ...................................................................... 342 BTG .......................................................................... 343 BZ ............................................................................. 344 CALL......................................................................... 344 CLRF ........................................................................ 345 CLRWDT .................................................................. 345 COMF ....................................................................... 346 CPFSEQ ................................................................... 346 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY CPFSGT ................................................................... 347 CPFSLT .................................................................... 347 DAW.......................................................................... 348 DCFSNZ ................................................................... 349 DECF ........................................................................ 348 DECFSZ.................................................................... 349 Extended Instructions ............................................... 371 Considerations when Enabling ......................... 376 Syntax ............................................................... 371 Use with MPLAB IDE Tools .............................. 378 General Format......................................................... 331 GOTO ....................................................................... 350 INCF.......................................................................... 350 INCFSZ ..................................................................... 351 INFSNZ ..................................................................... 351 IORLW ...................................................................... 352 IORWF ...................................................................... 352 LFSR......................................................................... 353 MOVF........................................................................ 353 MOVFF ..................................................................... 354 MOVLB ..................................................................... 354 MOVLW .................................................................... 355 MOVWF .................................................................... 355 MULLW ..................................................................... 356 MULWF..................................................................... 356 NEGF ........................................................................ 357 NOP .......................................................................... 357 Opcode Field Descriptions........................................ 330 POP .......................................................................... 358 PUSH ........................................................................ 358 RCALL ...................................................................... 359 RESET ...................................................................... 359 RETFIE ..................................................................... 360 RETLW ..................................................................... 360 RETURN ................................................................... 361 RLCF......................................................................... 361 RLNCF ...................................................................... 362 RRCF ........................................................................ 362 RRNCF ..................................................................... 363 SETF......................................................................... 363 SETF (Indexed Literal Offset Mode) ......................... 377 SLEEP ...................................................................... 364 Standard Instructions ................................................ 329 SUBFWB................................................................... 364 SUBLW ..................................................................... 365 SUBWF ..................................................................... 365 SUBWFB................................................................... 366 SWAPF ..................................................................... 366 TBLRD ...................................................................... 367 TBLWT...................................................................... 368 TSTFSZ .................................................................... 369 XORLW..................................................................... 369 XORWF..................................................................... 370 INTCON Register RBIF Bit..................................................................... 133 INTCON Registers ............................................................ 113 Inter-Integrated Circuit. See I2C. Internal Oscillator Block ...................................................... 37 Adjustment .................................................................. 38 INTIO Modes............................................................... 37 INTOSC Frequency Drift............................................. 38 INTOSC Output Frequency......................................... 38 INTPLL Modes ............................................................ 37 Internal RC Block Use with WDT ........................................................... 321 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Internal Voltage Reference Specifications........................ 397 Internet Address ............................................................... 431 Interrupt Sources .............................................................. 313 A/D Conversion Complete ........................................ 295 Capture Complete (CCP) ......................................... 201 Compare Complete (CCP) ....................................... 202 Interrupt-on-Change (RB7:RB4)............................... 133 TMR0 Overflow......................................................... 183 TMR2 to PR2 Match (PWM)..................................... 211 TMR3 Overflow................................................. 193, 195 TMR4 to PR4 Match ................................................. 198 TMR4 to PR4 Match (PWM)..................................... 197 Interrupts .......................................................................... 111 During, Context Saving............................................. 126 INTx Pin.................................................................... 126 PORTB, Interrupt-on-Change................................... 126 TMR0........................................................................ 126 Interrupts, Flag Bits Interrupt-on-Change (RB7:RB4) Flag (RBIF Bit).......................................................... 133 INTOSC, INTRC. See Internal Oscillator Block. IORLW .............................................................................. 352 IORWF.............................................................................. 352 IPR Registers.................................................................... 122 L LFSR ................................................................................ 353 M Master Clear (MCLR).......................................................... 51 Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP). See MSSP. Memory Organization ......................................................... 61 Data Memory .............................................................. 70 Program Memory........................................................ 61 Memory Programming Requirements............................... 396 Microchip Internet Web Site.............................................. 431 MOVF ............................................................................... 353 MOVFF ............................................................................. 354 MOVLB ............................................................................. 354 MOVLW ............................................................................ 355 MOVSF ............................................................................. 373 MOVSS............................................................................. 374 MOVWF ............................................................................ 355 MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker, Librarian ................... 380 MPLAB ICD 2 In-Circuit Debugger ................................... 381 MPLAB ICE 2000 High-Performance Universal In-Circuit Emulator.................................................... 381 MPLAB Integrated Development Environment Software .............................................. 379 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer .................................... 381 MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System ................ 381 MPLINK Object Linker/MPLIB Object Librarian ................ 380 MSSP ACK Pulse ........................................................ 238, 241 I2C Mode. See I2C Mode. Module Overview...................................................... 223 SPI Master/Slave Connection................................... 227 MULLW............................................................................. 356 MULWF............................................................................. 356 N NEGF................................................................................ 357 NOP .................................................................................. 357 Preliminary DS39778B-page 437 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY O Open-Drain Outputs .......................................................... 128 Oscillator Configuration....................................................... 31 EC ............................................................................... 31 ECPLL......................................................................... 31 HS ............................................................................... 31 HSPLL......................................................................... 31 Internal Oscillator Block .............................................. 37 INTIO1 ........................................................................ 31 INTIO2 ........................................................................ 31 INTPLL1 ...................................................................... 31 INTPLL2 ...................................................................... 31 Oscillator Selection ........................................................... 313 Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) .......................................... 40 Oscillator Switching............................................................. 33 Oscillator Transitions........................................................... 34 Oscillator, Timer1 ...................................................... 185, 195 Oscillator, Timer3 .............................................................. 193 P Packaging ......................................................................... 425 Details ....................................................................... 426 Marking ..................................................................... 425 Parallel Master Port (PMP) ............................................... 157 Application Examples................................................ 178 Associated Registers ................................................ 180 Control Registers ...................................................... 158 Data Registers .......................................................... 164 Master Port Modes.................................................... 170 Slave Port Modes...................................................... 165 PICSTART Plus Development Programmer ..................... 382 PIE Registers .................................................................... 119 Pin Functions AVDD ........................................................................... 29 AVDD ........................................................................... 19 AVSS ........................................................................... 29 AVSS ........................................................................... 19 ENVREG ............................................................... 19, 29 MCLR .................................................................... 12, 20 OSC1/CLKI/RA7 ................................................... 12, 20 OSC2/CLKO/RA6 ................................................. 12, 20 RA0/AN0 ............................................................... 13, 21 RA1/AN1 ............................................................... 13, 21 RA2/AN2/VREF-..................................................... 13, 21 RA3/AN3/VREF+.................................................... 13, 21 RA4/PMD5/T0CKI ....................................................... 21 RA4/T0CKI .................................................................. 13 RA5/AN4 ..................................................................... 13 RA5/PMD4/AN4 .......................................................... 21 RA6 ....................................................................... 13, 21 RA7 ....................................................................... 13, 21 RB0/FLT0/INT0 ..................................................... 14, 22 RB1/INT1/PMA4 ................................................... 14, 22 RB2/INT2/PMA3 ................................................... 14, 22 RB3/INT3//PMA2/ECCP2/P2A.................................... 22 RB3/INT3/PMA2 ......................................................... 14 RB4/KBI0/PMA1 ................................................... 14, 22 RB5/KBI1/PMA0 ................................................... 14, 22 RB6/KBI2/PGC ..................................................... 14, 22 RB7/KBI3/PGD ..................................................... 14, 22 RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI ............................................ 15, 23 RC1/T1OSI/ECCP2/P2A....................................... 15, 23 RC2/ECCP1/P1A .................................................. 15, 23 RC3/SCK1/SCL1 .................................................. 15, 23 RC4/SDI1/SDA1 ................................................... 15, 23 DS39778B-page 438 Preliminary RC5/SDO1............................................................ 15, 23 RC6/TX1/CK1 ....................................................... 15, 23 RC7/RX1/DT1....................................................... 15, 23 RD0/AD0/PMD0.......................................................... 24 RD0/PMD0.................................................................. 16 RD1/AD1/PMD1.......................................................... 24 RD1/PMD1.................................................................. 16 RD2/AD2/PMD2.......................................................... 24 RD2/PMD2.................................................................. 16 RD3/AD3/PMD3.......................................................... 24 RD3/PMD3.................................................................. 16 RD4/AD4/PMD4/SDO2............................................... 24 RD4/PMD4/SDO2....................................................... 16 RD5/AD5/PMD5/SDI2/SDA2 ...................................... 24 RD5/PMD5/SDI2/SDA2 .............................................. 16 RD6/AD6/PMD6/SCK2/SCL2 ..................................... 24 RD6/PMD6/SCK2/SCL2 ............................................. 16 RD7/AD7/PMD7/SS2.................................................. 24 RD7/PMD7/SS2.......................................................... 16 RE0/AD8/PMRD/P2D ................................................. 25 RE0/PMRD/P2D ......................................................... 17 RE1/AD9/PMWR/P2C ................................................ 25 RE1/PMWR/P2C ........................................................ 17 RE2/AD10/PMBE/P2B................................................ 25 RE2/PMBE/P2B.......................................................... 17 RE3/AD11/PMA13/P3C/REFO ................................... 25 RE3/PMA13/P3C/REFO ............................................. 17 RE4/AD12/PMA12/P3B .............................................. 25 RE4/PMA12/P3B ........................................................ 17 RE5/AD13/PMA11/P1C .............................................. 25 RE5/PMA11/P1C ........................................................ 17 RE6/AD14/PMA10/P1B .............................................. 25 RE6/PMA10/P1B ........................................................ 17 RE7/AD15/PMA9/ECCP2/P2A ................................... 25 RE7/PMA9/ECCP2/P2A ............................................. 17 RF1/AN6/C2OUT.................................................. 18, 26 RF2/PMA5/AN7/C1OUT ....................................... 18, 26 RF3/AN8/C2INB ................................................... 18, 26 RF4/AN9/C2INA ................................................... 18, 26 RF5/AN10/C1INB/CVREF............................................ 18 RF5/PMD2/AN10/C1INB/CVREF................................. 26 RF6/AN11/C1INA ....................................................... 18 RF6/PMD1/AN11/C1INA ............................................ 26 RF7/PMD0/SS1 .......................................................... 26 RF7/SS1 ..................................................................... 18 RG0/PMA8/ECCP3/P3A....................................... 19, 27 RG1/PMA7/TX2/CK2 ............................................ 19, 27 RG2/PMA6/RX2/DT2............................................ 19, 27 RG3/PMCS1/CCP4/P3D ...................................... 19, 27 RG4/PMCS2/CCP5/P1D ...................................... 19, 27 RH0/A16 ..................................................................... 28 RH1/A17 ..................................................................... 28 RH2/A18/PMD7 .......................................................... 28 RH3/A19/PMD6 .......................................................... 28 RH4/PMD3/AN12/P3C/C2INC.................................... 28 RH5/PMBE/AN13/P3B/C2IND.................................... 28 RH6/PMRD/AN14/P1C/C1INC ................................... 28 RH7/PMWR/AN15/P1B .............................................. 28 RJ0/ALE ..................................................................... 29 RJ1/OE ....................................................................... 29 RJ2/WRL .................................................................... 29 RJ3/WRH.................................................................... 29 RJ4/BA0 ..................................................................... 29 RJ5/CE ....................................................................... 29 RJ6/LB ........................................................................ 29 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY RJ7/UB........................................................................ 29 VDD ............................................................................. 29 VDD ............................................................................. 19 VDDCORE/VCAP ...................................................... 19, 29 VSS .............................................................................. 29 VSS .............................................................................. 19 Pinout I/O Descriptions PIC18F6XJ1X (64-TQFP) ........................................... 12 PIC18F8XJ1X (80-TQFP) ........................................... 20 PIR Registers .................................................................... 116 PLL...................................................................................... 36 HSPLL and ECPLL Oscillator Modes ......................... 36 Use with INTOSC........................................................ 36 POP .................................................................................. 358 POR. See Power-on Reset. PORTA Associated Registers ................................................ 132 LATA Register........................................................... 130 PORTA Register ....................................................... 130 TRISA Register ......................................................... 130 PORTB Associated Registers ................................................ 135 LATB Register........................................................... 133 PORTB Register ....................................................... 133 RB7:RB4 Interrupt-on-Change Flag (RBIF Bit) .......................................................... 133 TRISB Register ......................................................... 133 PORTC Associated Registers ................................................ 138 LATC Register .......................................................... 136 PORTC Register ....................................................... 136 RC3/SCKx/SCLx Pin................................................. 241 TRISC Register......................................................... 136 PORTD Associated Registers ................................................ 141 LATD Register .......................................................... 139 PORTD Register ....................................................... 139 TRISD Register......................................................... 139 PORTE Associated Registers ................................................ 144 LATE Register........................................................... 142 PORTE Register ....................................................... 142 TRISE Register ......................................................... 142 PORTF Associated Registers ................................................ 147 LATF Register........................................................... 145 PORTF Register ....................................................... 145 TRISF Register ......................................................... 145 PORTG Associated Registers ................................................ 150 LATG Register .......................................................... 148 PORTG Register....................................................... 148 TRISG Register......................................................... 148 PORTH Associated Registers ................................................ 153 LATH Register .......................................................... 151 PORTH Register ....................................................... 151 TRISH Register......................................................... 151 PORTJ Associated Registers ................................................ 155 LATJ Register ........................................................... 154 PORTJ Register........................................................ 154 TRISJ Register.......................................................... 154 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Power-Managed Modes...................................................... 41 and EUSART Operation ........................................... 273 and SPI Operation .................................................... 231 Clock Sources ............................................................ 41 Clock Transitions and Status Indicators ..................... 42 Entering ...................................................................... 41 Exiting Idle and Sleep Modes ..................................... 47 By Interrupt ......................................................... 47 By Reset ............................................................. 47 By WDT Time-out ............................................... 47 Without an Oscillator Start-up Delay .................. 47 Idle Modes .................................................................. 45 PRI_IDLE ........................................................... 46 RC_IDLE ............................................................ 47 SEC_IDLE .......................................................... 46 Multiple Sleep Commands.......................................... 42 Run Modes ................................................................. 42 PRI_RUN............................................................ 42 RC_RUN............................................................. 44 SEC_RUN .......................................................... 42 Selecting..................................................................... 41 Sleep Mode ................................................................ 45 OSC1 and OSC2 Pin States............................... 40 Summary (table) ......................................................... 41 Power-on Reset (POR)....................................................... 51 Power-up Delays ................................................................ 40 Power-up Timer (PWRT) .............................................. 40, 52 Time-out Sequence .................................................... 52 Prescaler Timer2 ...................................................................... 212 Prescaler, Timer0 ............................................................. 183 Prescaler, Timer2 (Timer4)............................................... 205 PRI_IDLE Mode.................................................................. 46 PRI_RUN Mode .................................................................. 42 Program Counter ................................................................ 65 PCL, PCH and PCU Registers ................................... 65 PCLATH and PCLATU Registers ............................... 65 Program Memory ALU Status ................................................................. 80 Extended Instruction Set ............................................ 84 Flash Configuration Words ......................................... 62 Hard Memory Vectors................................................. 62 Instructions ................................................................. 69 Two-Word ........................................................... 69 Interrupt Vector........................................................... 62 Look-up Tables........................................................... 67 Memory Maps............................................................. 61 Hard Vectors and Configuration Words.............. 62 Modes................................................................. 64 Modes......................................................................... 63 Extended Microcontroller.................................... 63 Extended Microcontroller (Address Shifting)....................................... 64 Memory Access (table)....................................... 64 Microcontroller .................................................... 63 Reset Vector............................................................... 62 Program Verification and Code Protection ....................... 327 Programming, Device Instructions.................................... 329 Pull-up Configuration ........................................................ 128 Pulse-Width Modulation. See PWM (CCP Module) and PWM (ECCP Module). PUSH................................................................................ 358 Preliminary DS39778B-page 439 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY PUSH and POP Instructions ............................................... 66 PUSHL .............................................................................. 374 PWM (CCP Module) Associated Registers ................................................ 206 Duty Cycle................................................................. 204 Example Frequencies/Resolutions ........................... 205 Operation Setup ........................................................ 205 Period........................................................................ 204 PR2/PR4 Registers ................................................... 204 TMR2 (TMR4) to PR2 (PR4) Match .......................... 204 TMR2 to PR2 Match ................................................. 211 TMR4 to PR4 Match ................................................. 197 PWM (ECCP Module) ....................................................... 211 CCPR1H:CCPR1L Registers .................................... 211 Direction Change in Full-Bridge Output Mode ..................................................... 216 Duty Cycle................................................................. 212 Effects of a Reset...................................................... 221 Enhanced PWM Auto-Shutdown .............................. 218 Example Frequencies/Resolutions ........................... 212 Full-Bridge Mode....................................................... 215 Full-Bridge Output Application Example ................... 216 Half-Bridge Mode ...................................................... 214 Half-Bridge Output Mode Applications Example........................................ 214 Output Configurations ............................................... 212 Output Relationships (Active-High) ........................... 213 Output Relationships (Active-Low)............................ 213 Period........................................................................ 211 Programmable Dead-Band Delay ............................. 218 Setup for PWM Operation ......................................... 221 Start-up Considerations ............................................ 219 Q Q Clock ..................................................................... 205, 212 R RAM. See Data Memory. RC_IDLE Mode ................................................................... 47 RC_RUN Mode ................................................................... 44 RCALL............................................................................... 359 RCON Register Bit Status During Initialization ..................................... 54 Reader Response ............................................................. 432 Reference Clock Output...................................................... 38 Register File ........................................................................ 72 Register File Summary.................................................. 75–79 Registers ADCON0 (A/D Control 0) .......................................... 291 ADCON0 (A/D Control 1) .......................................... 292 ANCON0 (A/D Port Configuration 2)......................... 293 ANCON1 (A/D Port Configuration 1)......................... 293 BAUDCONx (Baud Rate Control) ............................. 272 CCPxCON (Capture/Compare/PWM Control) ............................................................. 199 CCPxCON (ECCPx Control) ..................................... 207 CMSTAT (Comparator Output Status) ...................... 303 CMxCON (Comparatorx Control) .............................. 302 CONFIG1H (Configuration 1 High) ........................... 315 CONFIG1L (Configuration 1 Low)............................. 315 CONFIG2H (Configuration 2 High) ........................... 317 CONFIG3H (Configuration 3 High) ........................... 319 CONFIG3L (Configuration 3 Low)....................... 63, 318 CVRCON (Comparator Voltage Reference Control)............................................ 310 DEVID1 (Device ID 1) ............................................... 320 DS39778B-page 440 DEVID2 (Device ID 2)............................................... 320 ECCPxAS (ECCPx Auto-Shutdown Control)............ 219 ECCPxDEL (ECCPx PWM Delay)............................ 218 EECON1 (EEPROM Control 1) .................................. 89 INTCON (Interrupt Control)....................................... 113 INTCON2 (Interrupt Control 2).................................. 114 INTCON3 (Interrupt Control 3).................................. 115 IPR1 (Peripheral Interrupt Priority 1) ........................ 122 IPR2 (Peripheral Interrupt Priority 2) ........................ 123 IPR3 (Peripheral Interrupt Priority 3) ........................ 124 MEMCON (External Memory Bus Control) ................. 98 ODCON1 (Peripheral Open-Drain Control 1) ........... 129 ODCON2 (Peripheral Open-Drain Control 2) ........... 129 ODCON3 (Peripheral Open-Drain Control 3) ........... 129 OSCCON (Oscillator Control) ..................................... 32 OSCTUNE (Oscillator Tuning).................................... 33 PADCFG1 (I/O Pad Configuration Control) .............. 130 PIE1 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable 1)......................... 119 PIE2 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable 2)......................... 120 PIE3 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable 3)......................... 121 PIR1 (Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) 1)............ 116 PIR2 (Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) 2)............ 117 PIR3 (Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) 3)............ 118 PMADDRH (Parallel Port Address High Byte, Master Mode Only).................................. 164 PMCONH (Parallel Port Control High Byte).............. 158 PMCONL (Parallel Port Control Low Byte) ............... 159 PMEH (Parallel Port Enable High Byte).................... 161 PMEL (Parallel Port Enable Low Byte) ..................... 162 PMMODEH (Parallel Port Mode High Byte) ............. 160 PMMODEL (Parallel Port Mode Low Byte)............... 161 PMSTAT (Parallel Port Status High Byte) ................ 162 PMSTAT (Parallel Port Status Low Byte) ................. 163 RCON (Reset Control)........................................ 50, 125 RCSTAx (Receive Status and Control)..................... 271 REFOCON (Reference Oscillator Control) ................. 39 SSPCON2 (MSSPx Control 2, I2C Master Mode) ................................................... 236 SSPCON2 (MSSPx Control 2, I2C Slave Mode) ..................................................... 237 SSPxCON1 (MSSPx Control 1, I2C Mode)............... 235 SSPxCON1 (MSSPx Control 1, SPI Mode) .............. 225 SSPxMSK (I2C Slave Address Mask)....................... 237 SSPxSTAT (MSSPx Status, I2C Mode).................... 234 SSPxSTAT (MSSPx Status, SPI Mode) ................... 224 STATUS ..................................................................... 80 STKPTR (Stack Pointer)............................................. 66 T0CON (Timer0 Control) .......................................... 181 T1CON (Timer1 Control) .......................................... 185 T2CON (Timer2 Control) .......................................... 191 T3CON (Timer3 Control) .......................................... 193 T4CON (Timer4 Control) .......................................... 197 TXSTAx (Transmit Status and Control) .................... 270 WDTCON (Watchdog Timer Control) ................. 74, 322 RESET .............................................................................. 359 Reset .................................................................................. 49 Brown-out Reset (BOR).............................................. 49 Configuration Mismatch (CM) ..................................... 49 MCLR Reset, During Power-Managed Modes ........... 49 MCLR Reset, Normal Operation................................. 49 Power-on Reset (POR)............................................... 49 RESET Instruction ...................................................... 49 Stack Full Reset.......................................................... 49 Stack Underflow Reset ............................................... 49 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Reset ................................... 49 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY Resets ............................................................................... 313 Brown-out Reset (BOR) ............................................ 313 Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ................................ 313 Power-on Reset (POR) ............................................. 313 Power-up Timer (PWRT) .......................................... 313 RETFIE ............................................................................. 360 RETLW ............................................................................. 360 RETURN ........................................................................... 361 Revision History ................................................................ 429 RLCF................................................................................. 361 RLNCF .............................................................................. 362 RRCF ................................................................................ 362 RRNCF ............................................................................. 363 S SCKx ................................................................................. 223 SDIx .................................................................................. 223 SDOx ................................................................................ 223 SEC_IDLE Mode................................................................. 46 SEC_RUN Mode ................................................................. 42 Serial Clock, SCKx............................................................ 223 Serial Data In (SDIx) ......................................................... 223 Serial Data Out (SDOx) .................................................... 223 Serial Peripheral Interface. See SPI Mode. SETF ................................................................................. 363 Slave Select (SSx) ............................................................ 223 SLEEP .............................................................................. 364 Software Simulator (MPLAB SIM)..................................... 380 Special Event Trigger. See Compare (ECCP Module). Special Features of the CPU ............................................ 313 Special Function Registers Shared Registers ........................................................ 74 SPI Mode (MSSP)............................................................. 223 Associated Registers ................................................ 232 Bus Mode Compatibility ............................................ 231 Clock Speed, Interactions ......................................... 231 Effects of a Reset...................................................... 231 Enabling SPI I/O ....................................................... 227 Master Mode ............................................................. 228 Master/Slave Connection.......................................... 227 Operation .................................................................. 226 Operation in Power-Managed Modes ....................... 231 Serial Clock............................................................... 223 Serial Data In ............................................................ 223 Serial Data Out ......................................................... 223 Slave Mode ............................................................... 229 Slave Select .............................................................. 223 Slave Select Synchronization ................................... 229 SPI Clock .................................................................. 228 SSPxBUF Register ................................................... 228 SSPxSR Register...................................................... 228 Typical Connection ................................................... 227 SSPOV.............................................................................. 259 SSPOV Status Flag .......................................................... 259 SSPxSTAT Register R/W Bit.............................................................. 238, 241 SSx ................................................................................... 223 Stack Full/Underflow Resets ............................................... 67 SUBFSR ........................................................................... 375 SUBFWB........................................................................... 364 SUBLW ............................................................................. 365 SUBULNK ......................................................................... 375 SUBWF ............................................................................. 365 SUBWFB........................................................................... 366 SWAPF ............................................................................. 366 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. T Table Pointer Operations (table)......................................... 90 Table Reads/Table Writes .................................................. 67 TBLRD .............................................................................. 367 TBLWT ............................................................................. 368 Timer0 .............................................................................. 181 Associated Registers................................................ 183 Operation.................................................................. 182 Overflow Interrupt ..................................................... 183 Prescaler .................................................................. 183 Switching Assignment ...................................... 183 Prescaler Assignment (PSA Bit)............................... 183 Prescaler Select (T0PS2:T0PS0 Bits) ...................... 183 Prescaler. See Prescaler, Timer0. Reads and Writes in 16-Bit Mode............................. 182 Source Edge Select (T0SE Bit) ................................ 182 Source Select (T0CS Bit) ......................................... 182 Timer1 .............................................................................. 185 16-Bit Read/Write Mode ........................................... 187 Associated Registers................................................ 189 Considerations in Asynchronous Counter Mode................................................... 188 Interrupt .................................................................... 188 Operation.................................................................. 186 Oscillator........................................................... 185, 187 Layout Considerations...................................... 187 Oscillator, as Secondary Clock................................... 33 Resetting, Using the ECCPx Special Event Trigger ....................................... 188 Special Event Trigger (ECCP).................................. 210 TMR1H Register....................................................... 185 TMR1L Register ....................................................... 185 Use as a Clock Source ............................................. 187 Use as a Real-Time Clock ........................................ 188 Timer2 .............................................................................. 191 Associated Registers................................................ 192 Interrupt .................................................................... 192 Operation.................................................................. 191 Output....................................................................... 192 PR2 Register ............................................................ 211 TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt................................... 211 Timer3 .............................................................................. 193 16-Bit Read/Write Mode ........................................... 195 Associated Registers................................................ 195 Operation.................................................................. 194 Oscillator........................................................... 193, 195 Overflow Interrupt ............................................. 193, 195 Special Event Trigger (ECCPx) ................................ 195 TMR3H Register....................................................... 193 TMR3L Register ....................................................... 193 Timer4 .............................................................................. 197 Associated Registers................................................ 198 Operation.................................................................. 197 Output....................................................................... 198 Postscaler. See Postscaler, Timer4. PR4 Register ............................................................ 197 Prescaler. See Prescaler, Timer4. TMR4 Register ......................................................... 197 TMR4 to PR4 Match Interrupt........................... 197, 198 Preliminary DS39778B-page 441 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY Timing Diagrams A/D Conversion ......................................................... 420 Asynchronous Reception .......................................... 282 Asynchronous Transmission ..................................... 280 Asynchronous Transmission (Back to Back) ............ 280 Automatic Baud Rate Calculation ............................. 278 Auto-Wake-up Bit (WUE) During Normal Operation.............................................. 283 Auto-Wake-up Bit (WUE) During Sleep .................... 283 Baud Rate Generator with Clock Arbitration ............. 256 BRG Overflow Sequence .......................................... 278 BRG Reset Due to SDAx Arbitration During Start Condition .................................................. 265 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition (Case 1)....................................................................... 266 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition (Case 2) ............................................ 266 Bus Collision During a Start Condition (SCLx = 0) ........................................ 265 Bus Collision During a Stop Condition (Case 1) ............................................ 267 Bus Collision During a Stop Condition (Case 2) ............................................ 267 Bus Collision During Start Condition (SDAx Only)...................................... 264 Bus Collision for Transmit and Acknowledge............ 263 Capture/Compare/PWM (Including ECCP Modules) ................................................ 410 CLKO and I/O ........................................................... 402 Clock Synchronization .............................................. 249 Clock/Instruction Cycle ............................................... 68 EUSART Synchronous Receive (Master/Slave)................................................... 419 EUSART Synchronous Transmission (Master/Slave)................................................... 419 Example SPI Master Mode (CKE = 0) ...................... 411 Example SPI Master Mode (CKE = 1) ...................... 412 Example SPI Slave Mode (CKE = 0) ........................ 413 Example SPI Slave Mode (CKE = 1) ........................ 414 External Clock (All Modes Except PLL) .................... 400 External Memory Bus for Sleep (Extended Microcontroller Mode) ............................... 104, 106 External Memory Bus for TBLRD (Extended Microcontroller Mode) ............................... 104, 106 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor............................................. 326 First Start Bit Timing ................................................. 257 Full-Bridge PWM Output ........................................... 215 Half-Bridge PWM Output .......................................... 214 I2C Acknowledge Sequence ..................................... 262 I2C Bus Data ............................................................. 415 I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits.............................................. 415 I2C Master Mode (7 or 10-Bit Transmission) ............ 260 I2C Master Mode (7-Bit Reception) ........................... 261 I2C Slave Mode (10-Bit Reception, SEN = 0) ........... 246 I2C Slave Mode (10-Bit Reception, SEN = 0, ADMSK = 01001) .............................. 245 I2C Slave Mode (10-Bit Reception, SEN = 1) ........... 251 I2C Slave Mode (10-Bit Transmission)...................... 247 I2C Slave Mode (7-Bit Reception, SEN = 0) ............. 242 I2C Slave Mode (7-bit Reception, SEN = 0, ADMSK = 01011) .............................. 243 I2C Slave Mode (7-Bit Reception, SEN = 1) ............. 250 I2C Slave Mode (7-Bit Transmission)........................ 244 I2C Slave Mode General Call Address Sequence (7 or 10-Bit Addressing Mode)......... 252 DS39778B-page 442 Preliminary I2C Stop Condition Receive or Transmit Mode......... 262 MSSP I2C Bus Data.................................................. 417 MSSP I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits .................................. 417 Parallel Master Port Read......................................... 408 Parallel Master Port Write......................................... 409 Parallel Slave Port .................................................... 407 Parallel Slave Port Read................................... 166, 169 Parallel Slave Port Write................................... 166, 169 Program Memory Read ............................................ 403 Program Memory Write............................................. 404 PWM Auto-Shutdown (P1RSEN = 0, Auto-Restart Disabled) ..................................... 220 PWM Auto-Shutdown (P1RSEN = 1, Auto-Restart Enabled) ...................................... 220 PWM Direction Change ............................................ 217 PWM Direction Change at Near 100% Duty Cycle .............................................. 217 PWM Output ............................................................. 204 Read and Write, 8-Bit Data, Demultiplexed Address..................................... 173 Read, 16-Bit Data, Demultiplexed Address .............. 176 Read, 16-Bit Muliplexed Data, Fully Multiplexed 16-Bit Address............................... 177 Read, 16-Bit Multiplexed Data, Partially Multiplexed Address ......................................... 176 Read, 8-Bit Data, Fully Multiplexed 16-Bit Address .................................................. 175 Read, 8-Bit Data, Partially Multiplexed Address ....... 173 Read, 8-Bit Data, Partially Multiplexed Address, Enable Strobe.................................... 174 Read, 8-Bit Data, Wait States Enabled, Partially Multiplexed Address ........................... 173 Repeated Start Condition ......................................... 258 Reset, Watchdog Timer (WDT), Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) and Power-up Timer (PWRT) ...... 405 Send Break Character Sequence ............................. 284 Slave Synchronization .............................................. 229 Slow Rise Time (MCLR Tied to VDD, VDD Rise > TPWRT) ............................................. 53 SPI Mode (Master Mode).......................................... 228 SPI Mode (Slave Mode, CKE = 0) ............................ 230 SPI Mode (Slave Mode, CKE = 1) ............................ 230 Synchronous Reception (Master Mode, SREN) .............................................................. 287 Synchronous Transmission ...................................... 285 Synchronous Transmission (Through TXEN) ........... 286 Time-out Sequence on Power-up (MCLR Not Tied to VDD), Case 1 .......................................... 52 Time-out Sequence on Power-up (MCLR Not Tied to VDD), Case 2 .......................................... 53 Time-out Sequence on Power-up (MCLR Tied to VDD, VDD Rise < TPWRT) ................................ 52 Timer0 and Timer1 External Clock ........................... 406 Transition for Entry to Idle Mode................................. 46 Transition for Entry to SEC_RUN Mode ..................... 43 Transition for Entry to Sleep Mode ............................. 45 Transition for Two-Speed Start-up (INTRC to HSPLL)............................................ 324 Transition for Wake From Idle to Run Mode............... 46 Transition for Wake From Sleep (HSPLL) .................. 45 Transition From RC_RUN Mode to PRI_RUN Mode.................................................. 44 Transition From SEC_RUN Mode to PRI_RUN Mode (HSPLL) ................................... 43 Transition to RC_RUN Mode ...................................... 44 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY Write, 16-Bit Muliplexed Data, Fully Multiplexed 16-Bit Address ............................... 177 Write, 16-Bit Muliplexed Data, Partially Multiplexed Address ......................................... 177 Write, 8-Bit Data, Demultiplexed Address................. 176 Write, 8-Bit Data, Fully Multiplexed 16-Bit Address .................................................. 175 Write, 8-Bit Data, Partially Multiplexed Address ....... 174 Write, 8-Bit Data, Partially Multiplexed Address, Enable Strobe .................................... 175 Write, 8-Bit Data, Wait States Enabled, Partially Multiplexed Address............................ 174 Timing Diagrams and Specifications Capture/Compare/PWM Requirements (Including ECCP Modules) ............................... 410 CLKO and I/O Requirements ............................ 402, 403 EUSART Synchronous Receive Requirements ........ 419 EUSART Synchronous Transmission Requirements ................................................... 419 Example SPI Mode Requirements (Master Mode, CKE = 0) ................................... 411 Example SPI Mode Requirements (Master Mode, CKE = 1) ................................... 412 Example SPI Mode Requirements (Slave Mode, CKE = 0) ..................................... 413 Example SPI Slave Mode Requirements (CKE = 1) .......................................................... 414 External Clock Requirements ................................... 400 I2C Bus Data Requirements (Slave Mode) ............... 416 I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits Requirements (Slave Mode) .................................................... 415 Internal RC Accuracy (INTOSC, INTRC Sources) ............................................... 401 MSSP I2C Bus Data Requirements .......................... 418 MSSP I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits Requirements ........... 417 Parallel Master Port Read Requirements ................. 408 Parallel Master Port Write ......................................... 409 Parallel Slave Port Requirements ............................. 407 PLL Clock.................................................................. 401 Program Memory Write Requirements ..................... 404 Reset, Watchdog Timer (WDT), Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST), Power-up Timer (PWRT) and Brown-out Reset .......................... 405 Timer0 and Timer1 External Clock Requirements ................................................... 406 TSTFSZ ............................................................................ 369 Two-Speed Start-up .................................................. 313, 324 Two-Word Instructions Example Cases........................................................... 69 TXSTAx Register BRGH Bit .................................................................. 273 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. V VDDCORE/VCAP Pin ........................................................... 323 Voltage Reference Specifications..................................... 397 Voltage Regulator (On-Chip) ............................................ 323 Operation in Sleep Mode.......................................... 324 Power-up Requirements........................................... 324 W Watchdog Timer (WDT)............................................ 313, 321 Associated Registers................................................ 322 Control Register........................................................ 321 During Oscillator Failure ........................................... 325 Programming Considerations ................................... 321 WCOL ....................................................... 257, 258, 259, 262 WCOL Status Flag.................................... 257, 258, 259, 262 WWW Address ................................................................. 431 WWW, On-Line Support ....................................................... 5 X XORLW ............................................................................ 369 XORWF ............................................................................ 370 Preliminary DS39778B-page 443 PIC18F87J11 FAMILY NOTES: DS39778B-page 444 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F87J11 FAMILY PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM To order or obtain information, e.g., on pricing or delivery, refer to the factory or the listed sales office. PART NO. X /XX XXX Device Temperature Range Package Pattern Examples: a) b) Device PIC18F66J11/66J16/67J11(1), PIC18F86J11/86J16/87J11(1), PIC18F66J11/66J16/67J11T(2), PIC18F86J11/86J16/87J11T(2) Temperature Range I Package PT = TQFP (Thin Quad Flatpack) Pattern QTP, SQTP, Code or Special Requirements (blank otherwise) PIC18F87J11-I/PT 301 = Industrial temp., TQFP package, QTP pattern #301. PIC18F66J16T-I/PT = Tape and reel, Industrial temp., TQFP package. = -40°C to +85°C (Industrial) © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Note 1: 2: F T = Standard Voltage Range = in tape and reel DS39778B-page 445 WORLDWIDE SALES AND SERVICE AMERICAS ASIA/PACIFIC ASIA/PACIFIC EUROPE Corporate Office 2355 West Chandler Blvd. Chandler, AZ 85224-6199 Tel: 480-792-7200 Fax: 480-792-7277 Technical Support: http://support.microchip.com Web Address: www.microchip.com Asia Pacific Office Suites 3707-14, 37th Floor Tower 6, The Gateway Habour City, Kowloon Hong Kong Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 India - Bangalore Tel: 91-80-4182-8400 Fax: 91-80-4182-8422 India - New Delhi Tel: 91-11-4160-8631 Fax: 91-11-4160-8632 Austria - Wels Tel: 43-7242-2244-39 Fax: 43-7242-2244-393 Denmark - Copenhagen Tel: 45-4450-2828 Fax: 45-4485-2829 India - Pune Tel: 91-20-2566-1512 Fax: 91-20-2566-1513 France - Paris Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20 Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79 Japan - Yokohama Tel: 81-45-471- 6166 Fax: 81-45-471-6122 Germany - Munich Tel: 49-89-627-144-0 Fax: 49-89-627-144-44 Atlanta Duluth, GA Tel: 678-957-9614 Fax: 678-957-1455 Boston Westborough, MA Tel: 774-760-0087 Fax: 774-760-0088 Chicago Itasca, IL Tel: 630-285-0071 Fax: 630-285-0075 Dallas Addison, TX Tel: 972-818-7423 Fax: 972-818-2924 Detroit Farmington Hills, MI Tel: 248-538-2250 Fax: 248-538-2260 Kokomo Kokomo, IN Tel: 765-864-8360 Fax: 765-864-8387 Los Angeles Mission Viejo, CA Tel: 949-462-9523 Fax: 949-462-9608 Santa Clara Santa Clara, CA Tel: 408-961-6444 Fax: 408-961-6445 Toronto Mississauga, Ontario, Canada Tel: 905-673-0699 Fax: 905-673-6509 Australia - Sydney Tel: 61-2-9868-6733 Fax: 61-2-9868-6755 China - Beijing Tel: 86-10-8528-2100 Fax: 86-10-8528-2104 Korea - Gumi Tel: 82-54-473-4301 Fax: 82-54-473-4302 China - Chengdu Tel: 86-28-8665-5511 Fax: 86-28-8665-7889 China - Fuzhou Tel: 86-591-8750-3506 Fax: 86-591-8750-3521 Korea - Seoul Tel: 82-2-554-7200 Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or 82-2-558-5934 China - Hong Kong SAR Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 Malaysia - Penang Tel: 60-4-646-8870 Fax: 60-4-646-5086 China - Qingdao Tel: 86-532-8502-7355 Fax: 86-532-8502-7205 Philippines - Manila Tel: 63-2-634-9065 Fax: 63-2-634-9069 China - Shanghai Tel: 86-21-5407-5533 Fax: 86-21-5407-5066 Singapore Tel: 65-6334-8870 Fax: 65-6334-8850 China - Shenyang Tel: 86-24-2334-2829 Fax: 86-24-2334-2393 Taiwan - Hsin Chu Tel: 886-3-572-9526 Fax: 886-3-572-6459 China - Shenzhen Tel: 86-755-8203-2660 Fax: 86-755-8203-1760 Taiwan - Kaohsiung Tel: 886-7-536-4818 Fax: 886-7-536-4803 China - Shunde Tel: 86-757-2839-5507 Fax: 86-757-2839-5571 Taiwan - Taipei Tel: 886-2-2500-6610 Fax: 886-2-2508-0102 China - Wuhan Tel: 86-27-5980-5300 Fax: 86-27-5980-5118 Thailand - Bangkok Tel: 66-2-694-1351 Fax: 66-2-694-1350 Italy - Milan Tel: 39-0331-742611 Fax: 39-0331-466781 Netherlands - Drunen Tel: 31-416-690399 Fax: 31-416-690340 Spain - Madrid Tel: 34-91-708-08-90 Fax: 34-91-708-08-91 UK - Wokingham Tel: 44-118-921-5869 Fax: 44-118-921-5820 China - Xian Tel: 86-29-8833-7250 Fax: 86-29-8833-7256 12/08/06 DS39778B-page 446 Preliminary © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc.